2017 SCCA CLUB RACIN G GEN ERAL CO M PETITIO N RULES

2017 SCCA CLUB RACIN G GEN ERAL CO M PETITIO N RULES
2017 SCCA CLUB RACING
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
Heat Cycling Available – Tires Arrive Ready for Competition!
g-Force R1
g-Force R1-S
P Zero Trofeo R
C51 Medium and
C71 Soft Compounds
Autocross and
Road Race Compounds
A7/R7
DOT Radial
Wet H20
Pilot Sport
Cup 2
Proxes RA1
Proxes RR
Proxes R888
Proxes R888R
Ventus Z214
LIGHTWEIGHT WHEELS, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION
®
MUCH MORE TO SEE AT
WWW.TIRERACK.COM
©2017 Tire Rack
888-380-8473
M-F 8am-8pm EST
SAT 9am-4pm EST
2017 EDITION
GENERAL
COMPETITION
RULES
Updated Through TB 17-05
Sports Car Club of America, Inc.
Club Racing Department
6620 SE Dwight St.
Topeka, Kansas 66619
(800) 770-2055
www.scca.com
email: [email protected]
GCR - 1
©2017 Revised
SPORTS CAR CLUB OF AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by means
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage or retrieval
system, without permission in writing from the Sports Car Club of America or as allowed in this book.
The following are registered trademarks of SCCA and are used throughout the General Competition Rules
without the circle R.
AMERICAN SEDAN
FASTRACK
FORMULA ATLANTIC
FORMULA CONTINENTAL
FORMULA VEE
PRESS ON REGARDLESS
PRO SOLO
PROSOLO
RALLYCROSS
RUNOFFS
SCCA
SCCA PRO RACING
SCCA U.S. MAJORS TOUR
SOLO
SPEC RACER
SPORTS CAR CLUB OF AMERICA
SPORTSCAR
STREET TOURING
SUPER TOURINGTRACK NIGHT IN AMERICA
TRANS AM
TRANS-AM
UNITED STATES ROAD RALLY CHALLENGE
WORLD CHALLENGE
GCR - 2
The General Competition Rules of the Sports Car Club of America are intended to assist in the orderly
conduct of race events. They are in no way a guarantee against injury or death to participants, spectators,
or others. No express or implied warranties of safety or fitness for a particular purpose are intended or shall
result from publication of or compliance with these rules.
FOREWORD
Electronic and printed editions of the GCR are available. The electronic edition may be updated during the
calendar year and will be available on the SCCA website. The electronic editions take precedence over
the printed edition. Express permission is granted members and others to transmit and use the electronic
editions for purposes related to SCCA Club Racing activities.
In all societies where men compete with one another - and in which societies, pray, do they not? - there
must be laws to regulate that competition. The extent to which that competition is carried, whether by
intensity or sophistication, determines the degree of complexity of the necessary laws; and the extent to
which those laws are willingly accepted determines, no less, the degree of civilization of that society.
Translated from Thales of Miletus, c 600 BC.
This book is the property of:
Name: _______________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Address: _____________________________________________________
City: ________________________________________________________
State: _______________________________________ Zip: ___________
Region: ______________________________________________________
GCR - 3
CONTENTS
1. CONTROLLING COMPETITION
13
1.1. SCCA (Sports Car Club of America, Inc.)
13
1.2. SCCA GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
13
1.2.1. Replacing the GCR
13
1.2.2. Revising the GCR
13
1.2.3. Interpreting and Applying the GCR
13
1.2.4. Submitting to the GCR
14
1.3.
Assumption of Risk 14
1.3.1. Release and Waiver of Liability, Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement 14
1.4. Media Rights
15
2. PARTICIPANT CONDUCT
17
2.1. BREACH OF THE RULES
17
2.2. ADDITIONAL PARTICIPANT RESPONSIBILITIES
17
2.2.1. Authorized Events
17
2.2.2. Driver and Entrant Responsible for Crew
17
2.2.3. Waiver Signer Responsible for Minor
17
2.2.4. Official’s Conflicts of Interest
17
2.2.5. Pets at the Track
17
2.2.6 Unmanned Aircraft Systems
18
2.3.IMPAIRMENT
18
2.3.1. Alcoholic Beverages, Narcotics, and Dangerous Drugs18
2.3.2. Medical Fitness
18
2.4. DIVISIONAL ADMINISTRATOR AND EXECUTIVE STEWARD LICENSING AUTHORITY AND MEMBER
RIGHTS19
2.5. EXECUTIVE STEWARD DRIVER AND OFFICIAL REVIEW
20
2.6. REVIEW COMMITTEE MEMBERS CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
20
2.7. CRB OFFICIAL REVIEW
20
3.EVENTS 23
3.1. TYPES OF SCCA RACE EVENTS
23
3.1.1. U.S. Majors Tour Races
23
3.1.2.Regional and Endurance Races
25
3.1.3. Drivers’ Schools
25
3.1.4. Vintage/Historic Races
25
3.1.5. Practice Days
26
3.2. SCHEDULING RACE EVENTS
26
3.3. SANCTIONING RACE EVENTS
26
3.4. SUPPLEMENTAL REGULATIONS AND ENTRY FORMS
26
3.4.1. Changing U.S. Majors Tour Supplemental Regulations26
3.4.2. Changing Regional Race Supplemental Regulations 26
3.5.INSURANCE
26
3.5.1.Waivers
26
3.6.AWARDS
27
3.6.1. Distributing Awards
27
3.6.2.Trophies
27
3.6.3. Prize Money
27
3.6.4. Refuse Awards
27
3.7 CHAMPIONSHIPS
27
3.7.1. Division Championships
27
3.7.2. Conference Championships
27
3.7.3
Super Tour Championship
27
3.7.4. SCCA Runoffs
28
4. PARTICIPANT LICENSING, EVENT CREDENTIALS, & ENTRIES
4.1. SCCA RESERVATION OF RIGHTS
4.2. SUBMITTING TO THE GCR
4.3. PARTICIPANT LICENSES
4.3.1. SCCA Licenses
4.3.2. SCCA Membership
4.3.3. Expiring License and Membership
4.3.4. Possessing a Membership and License
4.3.5. Presenting a License
4.3.6. Required Membership and License
4.4. RACE EVENT ENTRIES
4.4.1. Entering an Event
GCR - 4
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
4.5.
4.4.2. Entering Multiple Classes
4.4.3. Withdrawing an Entry
4.4.4. Falsifying an Entry
4.4.5. Racing Under an Assumed Name
4.4.6. Refusing an Entry
EVENT CREDENTIALS
4.5.1.Waivers
4.5.2. Photo ID
4.5.3. Hazardous Area Credentials
4.5.4. Non-hazardous Area Credentials
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
5. OFFICIALS, THEIR DUTIES, OPERATING PROCEDURES, AND EQUIPMENT
5.1. PRINCIPAL OFFICIALS
35
5.1.1. Required Stewards
35
5.1.2.Appointment
35
5.1.3. Minimum Grades of Licenses
35
5.1.4. Right to Oversight
36
5.1.5. Plurality of Duties
36
5.1.6. Separation of Duties
36
5.2. RACE CHAIRMAN
36
5.2.1
U. S. Majors Tour Event Chairman Responsibilities 36
5.2.2. Regional Event Race Chairman Responsibilities
36
5.3. COURSE MARSHAL
36
5.4. EMERGENCY SERVICES – MEDICAL and FIRE SAFETY
36
5.4.1.Purpose
36
5.4.2.Personnel
37
5.4.3. Required Equipment
37
5.5. FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
38
5.5.1. Chief of Flagging and Communications
38
5.5.2. General Organization
38
5.5.3. Corner Stations
38
5.6.REGISTRATION
39
5.7. SOUND CONTROL
39
5.7.1. Sound Control Chief
39
5.7.2. General Procedures and Requirements
39
5.7.3.Standards
39
5.8.START
39
5.8.1. Chief Starter
39
5.8.2.Responsibility
40
5.8.3.Function
40
5.8.4.Location
40
5.8.5.Equipment
40
5.9. TECHNICAL AND SAFETY INSPECTION
40
5.9.1. Series Chief Tech Inspector and Chief Technical Inspector
5.9.2. Inspecting Automobiles
40
5.9.3.Impound
41
5.9.4. Official Scales
41
5.10. TIMING AND SCORING
41
5.10.1. Chief of Timing and Scoring
41
5.10.2. Approved Systems
42
5.10.3. Timing and Scoring Systems
42
5.10.4.Results
42
5.10.5.Media
43
5.11. ADDITIONAL OFFICIALS
43
5.11.1. Driver Observer
43
5.11.2. Press Officer
43
5.11.3.Judges
43
5.11.4. Compliance
43
5.11.5. Race Data Technicians
44
5.12.STEWARDS
44
5.12.1. Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
44
5.12.3. Chief Steward
45
5.12.4. Assistant Chief Steward – Safety
46
6. RACING RULES AND PROCEDURES
6.1.FLAGS
6.1.1. Meaning of Each Flag
6.1.2. Lights Instead of Flags
6.2. RULES OF THE PADDOCK
48
48
48
49
49
GCR - 5
35
40
6.2.1. Paddock Area Defined
49
6.2.2. Retiring to the Paddock
49
6.3. RULES OF THE PITS
49
6.3.1. Pit Area Defined
49
6.3.2. Required Equipment
49
6.3.3.Fueling
49
6.3.4. Authorized Personnel in the Pits
49
6.3.5. Number of Crew Members in the Hot Pit Lane
49
6.3.6.Control
49
6.3.7. Pit Barrier
49
6.3.8. Overshooting the Pit
49
6.3.9. Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
49
6.4. THE GRID
49
6.4.1General
49
6.4.2
Establishing the Race Grid
50
6.4.3. Qualifying for Oversubscribed Classes
50
6.4.4. Starting the Engine on the Grid
50
6.4.5. Push Starts on the Grid
50
6.4.6.Fueling
50
6.4.7. Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
50
6.5. RACES STARTS
50
6.5.1. The Grid
50
6.5.2. The Pace Lap
50
6.5.3. The SCCA Standard Rolling Start
51
6.5.4. An Aborted Start
51
6.5.5. Split Starts
51
6.5.6. Late Starters
52
6.6. PACE AND SAFETY CAR
52
6.6.1. Operation and Control
52
6.6.2. Full Course Yellow Procedures
52
6.7. STOPPING A SESSION
53
6.7.1.Methods
53
6.7.2. Assistance During Race Session Stoppage
53
6.8. RESTARTING A RACE
53
6.9. RAIN RACING
53
6.10. TIMING LINE; STARTERS, Awarding of Points, AND WINNERS53
6.10.1. Starting Line for Timing and Scoring
53
6.10.2. Race Starter
53
6.10.3. Awarding of Points
53
6.10.4. Race Winner
54
6.10.5 Shortened Races
54
6.10.6. Lap Record
54
6.11. RULES OF THE ROAD
54
6.11.1 On Course Driver Conduct
54
6.11.2. Hand Signals
54
6.11.3. Off-Course Excursions
54
6.11.4. Counter-Race Direction Driving
55
6.11.5. Stopping on a Course; Accepting Assistance
55
6.11.6. Using the Engine Self-Starter on Course
55
6.11.7.Passengers
55
7.PENALTIES
7.1. WHO MAY BE PENALIZED
7.2. RANGE OF PENALTIES
7.3. MULTIPLE PENALTIES
7.4. PENALTY POINTS
7.5. AMENDMENT OF RESULTS
7.6.PUBLICATION
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
8. STEWARDS’ ACTIONS, PROTESTS, AND APPEALS
8.1. TYPES OF JUDICIAL ACTIONS
8.1.1. Chief Steward’s Action
8.1.2. Request for Action
8.1.3. Chief Steward’s Action Against a Car
8.1.4. Compliance Review
8.1.5.Protests
8.2. HEARINGS AND JUDGEMENTS
8.3. PROTEST PROCEDURES
8.3.1. How to Protest
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
59
GCR - 6
8.3.2. Reasonable Protests
8.3.3. Actions Against Cars
8.4.APPEALS
8.4.1. Right to Appeal
8.4.2. Appointment and Jurisdiction
8.4.3. Appeal Procedures
8.4.4. Hearing Appeals
8.4.5.Judgment of the Court of Appeals
8.4.6. Publication and Effect of Decision
8.4.7. Bad Faith Appeals
8.4.8. Appeals Affecting Final Points Standings
59
59
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
9. CARS AND EQUIPMENT
64
9.1. CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
64
9.1.1. FORMULA CATEGORY CLASSES
64
9.1.2. GRAND TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES
65
9.1.3. IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES (Regional Classes)65
9.1.4. SUPER TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES
65
9.1.5. PRODUCTION CATEGORY CLASSES
65
9.1.6. SEDAN CATEGORY
65
9.1.7. SPEC MIATA CLASS
65
9.1.8. SPORTS RACING CATEGORY CLASSES
65
9.1.9. TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES:
66
9.1.10. B-SPEC CATEGORY CLASSES
66
9.1.11. SPEC MX-5 CLASS
66
9.1.12. CARS RUN IN THE PROPER CLASS
66
9.1.13. RUNOFFS-ELIGIBLE CLASS PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENTS66
9.2. VEHICLE DOCUMENTATION
66
9.2.1
VEHICLE LOGBOOKS
67
9.2.2. HOMOLOGATION REQUIREMENTS
67
9.3. GENERAL TECHNICAL AND SAFETY Specifications
68
9.3.1. ACCUMULATORS (e.g., Accusumps)
68
9.3.2. ACTIVE SUSPENSIONS AND TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMS
68
9.3.3. ADVERTISEMENTS AND GRAPHICS
68
9.3.4. AERODYNAMIC SKIRTS
68
9.3.5. ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
68
9.3.6. APPEARANCE NEAT AND CLEAN, AND SUITABLE FOR COMPETITION
9.3.7.BALLAST
68
9.3.8.BATTERIES
68
9.3.9. BODY PANELS
68
9.3.10.BRAKES
68
9.3.11. CAMERA MOUNTS
69
9.3.12. CARBURETOR FUEL INLET FITTING
69
9.3.13. COOL SUITS
69
9.3.14. COOLANT CATCH TANKS
69
9.3.15. CRYOGENIC TREATMENT
69
9.3.16. DATA COLLECTION DEVICES
69
9.3.17. DETACHABLE PANELS/SUNROOFS
69
9.3.18. DRIVER’S RESTRAINT SYSTEM
69
9.3.19. DRIVER’S SAFETY EQUIPMENT
72
9.3.20.ELIGIBILITY
73
9.3.21. EXHAUST SYSTEM
73
9.3.22. FIRE SYSTEM
73
9.3.23. FIREWALL AND FLOOR
74
9.3.24. FORMULA CAR VISIBILITY
74
9.3.25.FUEL
74
9.3.26. FUEL CELL SPECIFICATIONS
77
9.3.27. FUEL, OIL, AND WATER LINES
78
9.3.28. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
78
9.3.29. INSIDE NET
80
9.3.30. LEAKAGE AND CAPS
80
9.3.31.LIGHTS
80
9.3.32. LOSS OF BODYWORK
80
9.3.33. MASTER SWITCH
80
9.3.34.MIRRORS
81
9.3.35. NON-METALLIC WHEEL/CHASSIS CONSTRUCTION 81
9.3.36. OIL AND OIL ADDITIVES
81
9.3.37. OIL CATCH TANKS, FILTERS, AND BREATHERS
81
9.3.38. ROLL CAGE/ROLL BAR
81
GCR - 7
68
9.3.39. SCATTERSHIELDS/CHAIN GUARDS
81
9.3.40.SEATS
82
9.3.41. STEERING WHEEL LOCKS
82
9.3.42. STEERING WHEELS
82
9.3.43. SUSPENSION AND STEERING
82
9.3.44.TIRES
82
9.3.45. TIRE WARMERS
82
9.3.46. TONNEAU AND BOOT COVERS
82
9.3.47. TOWING EYES
82
9.3.48.VENTILATION
82
9.3.49.WEIGHT
83
9.3.50. WHEEL FANS
83
9.3.51. WHEEL RIM WIDTH
83
9.3.52.WINDOWS
83
9.3.53. WINDOW SAFETY NETS
83
9.3.54. WINDSHIELDS/WINDSHIELD CLIPS/REAR WINDOW STRAPS
9.4. ROLL CAGES FOR GT AND PRODUCTION BASED CARS
84
9.4.5. ROLL CAGES FOR FORMULA CARS AND SPORTS RACING CARS
APPENDIX A. Administrative Glossary
96
APPENDIX B. Organizational and Administrative 98
84
90
Procedures for Events
98
1. Organizing Events
98
1.1 Scheduling
98
1.1.1 Divisional Scheduling Representative
98
The Executive Steward of each Division will appoint a Divisional Scheduling Representative who
will:98
1.1.2. Scheduling Policies and Procedures
98
1.2
Postponing or Cancelling Events
98
1.3
Sanctioning Events
98
1.3.1. Applying for an SCCA Sanction
99
1.3.2. Sanction Requirements
99
1.3.3. Sanctioning for Alternative Drivers’ Schools
99
1.3.4 Courses
99
1.3.4.1. Types of SCCA Course Approval
99
1.3.4.2. Application For An Event On An Unapproved Course99
1.4
Supplemental Regulations and Entry Forms
99
1.4.1
Required Contents of Supplemental Regulations
100
1.4.2
Combining Classes into Race Groups
100
1.4.3
Additional Classes
100
1.4.4
Multiple Types of Events on a Single Weekend
100
1.4.5
Required Contents of Entry Forms
100
1.5. Organizer’s Additional Responsibilities
101
1.5.1. Entry List
101
1.5.2.Results
101
1.5.3. Post-Event Reporting
101
1.6 RACE EVENT FEES
101
2. INSURANCE COVERAGES AND LIMITS
101
2.1. Insurance Requirements
102
APPENDIX C. Licensing and Types
104
1. OFFICIAL’S LICENSING AND TYPES
104
1.1. Official104
1.2. Steward
104
1.3. Licensing Requirements
104
1.4. Licensing Minors
104
2. COMPETITION LICENSES
105
2.1. Medical Requirements
105
2.2. Credit Towards License
105
2.3. Competition Licensing Requirements
105
2.4. Additional Licensing Information
105
2.5. Licensing Minors
106
2.6. 14 and 15 Year-Old Novice Permits and Licensing
106
2.7. Novice Permit
107
2.8. Full Competition License
109
2.9 Vintage License 110
2.10 Renewal
110
GCR - 8
2.11 Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
3. NON-STANDARD LICENSE SITUATIONS
110
110
APPENDIX D. Duties, Authorities, and Responsibilities of 114
Race Directors, Chief Stewards, and the SOM.
114
APPENDIX E. Oval Track Racing
122
APPENDIX F. Technical Glossary
126
APPENDIX G. Facts, Formulas, and Measurement Standards
154
1. FACTS AND FORMULAS TO BE USED AT ALL SCCA EVENTS154
2. MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
155
3. MEASURING COURSES
155
4. MEASURING TRACK
155
5. MEASURING WINGS
155
APPENDIX H. Index
158
APPENDIX I. 2007 Roll Cage Rules
164
APPENDIX J. 2004 Production Category Roll Cage Rules
178
APPENDIX K. 2012 STO General Technical Regulations
182
APPENDIX L. 2013 TA2 Technical Regulations
200
APPENDIX M. SMG Technical Regulations
216
APPENDIX N. SpecE46 Technical Regulations
224
APPENDIX O. Small Regional Event Steward Model
230
9.1.1.
FORMULA CATEGORY
F500328
233
9.1.2.
GT1 CATEGORY SPECIFICATIONS
c.
GT1 Approved Automobile List
GT1-ST398
375
394
9.1.2.F. GT-2, 3, LITE Category Specifications
409
GT2
Cars - ACURA
GT2/ST438
GT3 Cars - ACURA
GTL Cars - Acura
424
446
466
9.1.2.G. GTA Category Specifications (Regional Only)
486
9.1.3.
501
9.1.4.
IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY
ITR516
ITS524
ITA534
ITB548
ITC562
SUPER TOURING CATEGORY
571
9.1.5.
PRODUCTION CATEGORY
EP634
FP658
HP684
611
9.1.6.
AMERICAN SEDAN CATEGORY
AS728
703
9.1.7.
SPEC MIATA CLASS
SM754
737
GCR - 9
9.1.8.A
SPORTS RACING CATEGORY
757
9.1.9.1. TOURING (T1) CATEGORY
T1844
T1-856
LP856
829
9.1.9.2
TOURING (T2-T4) CATEGORY
T2878
T3896
T4910
865
9.1.10. B-SPEC CATEGORY
B-SPEC936
929
9.1.11. SPEC MX-5 CLASS (Regional Only)
941
GCR - 10
GCR - 11
1. Controlling Competition
GCR - 12
1. Controlling Competition
CONTROLLING COMPETITION
1.1.
SCCA (SPORTS CAR CLUB OF AMERICA, INC.)
The SCCA is a non-profit organization, incorporated in the state of Connecticut, dedicated to owning, operating, and preserving sports cars; arranging and regulating sports car events and exhibitions; encouraging
safe and sportsmanlike conduct on public highways; and developing technical information relevant to these
purposes. ACCUS FIA has delegated the authority to sanction FIA listed events to the SCCA.
The address of SCCA can be found in the front of this rule book.
In these General Competition Rules, SCCA is sometimes referred to as “the National Office”.
1.2.
SCCA GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
SCCA has established these General Competition Rules (GCR) to govern all Club Racing events sanctioned
by the SCCA. The GCR also includes the General Technical and Safety Specifications, and the Category
Rules.
1.2.1. Replacing the GCR
Beginning January 1st each calendar year, the newest edition of the GCR takes effect and supersedes all
prior editions. Rule revisions published in prior calendar year(s) must be included in the new edition of the
GCR to remain effective. Court of Appeals decisions on technical specifications are effective for the calendar year during which they are rendered, and are superseded by the following year’s edition of the GCR.
1.2.2. Revising the GCR
A. The latest published electronic GCR version on the official SCCA website supersedes all prior GCR
versions, FasTrack, Racing Memos, Member Advisories, or Tech Bulletins published in writing or on
the official SCCA web site as of the first day of the month of publication.
B. When a rule clarification or change must be implemented immediately, the Board of Directors will
issue a memorandum stating the change and its effective date. These memoranda will be posted on
the SCCA website and sent to all Executive Stewards and Divisional Administrators of Tech.
C. If preliminary performance estimates for a car initially classified or reclassified prove grossly inaccurate during its first year of classified or reclassified eligibility, the technical specifications may be
changed on thirty days’ notice.
1.2.3. Interpreting and Applying the GCR
A. Interpreting the GCR shall not be strained or tortured and applying the GCR shall be logical, remembering that the GCR cannot specifically cover all possible situations. Words such as “shall” or “shall
not”, “will” or “will not”, “can not”, “may not”, “are” or “must” are mandatory; and words such as
“may” and “should” are permissive.
B. References in the GCR to the SCCA Operations Manual and the SCCA Insurance Manual are for
informational purposes; these SCCA documents may not be protested or appealed.
C. Conflicts among or between portions of the GCR are handled as follows:
1. The Category Rules take precedence over the General Technical Specifications.
2. Specific class rules in the Category Section of the GCR shall take precedence over the general
Category Rules and the General Technical Specifications.
3. Any item not addressed in the Category Rules is controlled by the General Technical Specifications. The specification line for a particular car takes precedence over the specific class rules,
the general Category Rules and the General Technical Specifications.
D. The interpretation and application of the GCR by SCCA officials is final and binding. To promote the
sport of automobile competition; to achieve prompt finality in competition results; and to recognize
the numerous benefits to them, all members expressly agree that:
1.SCCA officials’ determinations are non-litigable;
2. They will not initiate or maintain litigation of any kind against SCCA or anyone acting on behalf
of SCCA to reverse or modify such determinations, or seek to recover damages or other relief
allegedly incurred or required as a result of such determination; and
3. Any member who initiates or maintains litigation violating this provision agrees to reimburse
SCCA for all costs of litigation, including travel expenses and attorneys’ fees.
E. All money amounts specified in the GCR are in US Dollars.
F. The pronouns “he”, “his”, and “him” are generic and are not intended to indicate gender.
G. All dimensions are in inches unless otherwise noted.
GCR - 13
General
1.
1. Controlling Competition
1.2.4. Submitting to the GCR
Any organizer who applies for a sanction to conduct an SCCA race event ex-pressly agrees, and will
acknowledge the following in writing if requested:
A. Familiarity with the GCR.
B. Unreserved agreement to any consequences of not complying with the GCR.
C. Renunciation of any right to recourse, except with the written consent of the SCCA, to any arbitrator
or tribunal not provided for in the GCR.
1.3.
Assumption of Risk
Road racing is a dangerous sport that can result in serious injury or death. Participation in all aspects of the
sport is voluntary. The ultimate responsibility for participant and vehicle safety lies with the participant,
vehicle owner, driver and crew members.
The participant also acknowledges that by participating in the event, the participant may suffer bodily injury or death, or loss or damage to property. The participant further acknowledges that the participant has
voluntarily, assumed the risk of bodily injury or death or loss or damage to, property and waives any claims
for bodily injury or death, or loss or damage to property against SCCA, its directors, officers, employees
and agents, event officials, event sponsors, racetrack operators and other participants; discharges such
persons and entities from responsibility for such losses; and covenants not to sue such persons and entities
for bodily injury or death or loss or damage to property.
1.3.1. Release and Waiver of Liability, Assumption of Risk and I n d e m n i t y
Agreement
All participants shall be required as a condition of participation to sign all required entry forms including
but not limited to such releases as shall be required by SCCA and/or its insurers consisting of the following
or similar wording. Whether or not the participant signs such releases, the participant agrees to the terms
set forth below and participant is hereby put on notice of such terms and makes such agreement either by
receiving this Rulebook or by participating in the sport, or both.
IN CONSIDERATION of being permitted to compete, or officiate, observe, work for, or participate in any
way in SCCA OR SCCA PRO SANCTIONED EVENTS and/or being permitted to enter for any purpose any
RESTRICTED AREA(S) (defined to be any area which requires special authorization, credentials, or permission to enter or any area to which admission by the general public is restricted or prohibited), I, for myself,
my personal representatives, heirs, and next of kin:
1. Acknowledges, agrees, and represents that he has or will immediately upon entering any of such RESTRICTED AREAS, and will continuously thereafter, inspect the RESTRICTED AREAS which he enters,
and he further agrees and warrants that, if at any time, he is in or about RESTRICTED AREAS and he feels
anything to be unsafe, he will immediately advise the officials of such and if necessary will leave the RESTRICTED AREAS and/or refuse to participate further in the EVENT(S).
2. HEREBY RELEASES,WAIVES, DISCHARGES AND COVENANTS NOT TO SUE the promoters, participants, racing associations, sanctioning organizations or any subdivision thereof, track operators, track
owners, officials, car owners, drivers, pit crews, rescue personnel, any persons in any RESTRICTED AREA,
sponsors, advertisers, owners and lessees of premises used to conduct the EVENT(S), premises and event
inspectors, surveyors, underwriters, consultants and others who give recommendations, directions, or
instructions or engage in risk evaluation or loss control activities regarding the premises or EVENT(S) and
each of them, their directors, officers, agents, employees, representatives, owners, members, affiliates,
successors and assigns all for the purposes herein referred to as “Releasees,” FROM ALL LIABILITY TO
THE UNDERSIGNED, his personal representatives, assigns, heirs, and next of kin FOR ANY AND ALL LOSS
OR DAMAGE, AND ANY CLAIM OR DEMANDS THEREFOR ON ACCOUNT OF INJURY TO THE PERSON
OR PROPERTY OR RESULTING IN DEATH OF THE UNDERSIGNED ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE
EVENT(S), WHETHER CAUSED BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF THE RELEASEES OR OTHERWISE.
3. HEREBY AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS the Releasees and each of them
FROM ANY LOSS, LIABILITY, DAMAGE, OR COST they may incur arising out of or related to the UNDERSIGNED’S INJURY OR DEATH, WHETHER CAUSED BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF THE RELEASEES OR OTHERWISE.
4. HEREBY ASSUMES FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY RISK OF BODILY INJURY, DEATH OR PROPERTY
DAMAGE arising out of or related to the EVENT(S) whether caused by the NEGLIGENCE OF RELEASEES
or otherwise.
GCR - 14
5. HEREBY acknowledges that THE ACTIVITIES OF THE EVENT(S) ARE VERY DANGEROUS and involve
the risk of serious injury and/or death and/or property damage. Each of THE UNDERSIGNED, also expressly
acknowledges that INJURIES RECEIVED MAY BE COMPOUNDED OR INCREASED BY NEGLIGENT RESCUE
OPERATIONS OR PROCEDURES OF THE RELEASEES.
6. HEREBY agrees that this Release and Waiver of Liability, Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement
extends to all acts of negligence by the Releasees, INCLUDING NEGLIGENT RESCUE OPERATIONS and
is intended to be as broad and inclusive as is permitted by the laws of the State or Province in which the
Event(s) is/are conducted and that if any portion thereof is held invalid, it is agreed that the balance shall,
notwithstanding, continue in full legal force and effect.
I HAVE READ THIS RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIABILITY, ASSUMPTION OF RISK AND INDEMNITY
AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND ITS TERMS, UNDERSTAND THAT I HAVE GIVEN UP SUBSTANTIAL RIGHTS
BY SIGNING IT, AND HAVE SIGNED IT FREELY AND VOLUNTARILY WITHOUT ANY INDUCEMENT, ASSURANCE OR GUARANTEE BEING MADE TO ME AND INTEND MY SIGNATURE TO BE A COMPLETE AND
UNCONDITIONAL RELEASE OF ALL LIABILITY TO THE GREATEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW.
1.4. Media Rights
The Entrant agrees to permit the Sports Car Club of America Inc., and their assigns (including but not limited
to series sponsors, promoters/organizer of an Event), free of any charges duties or fees, to use, license,
reproduce, have reproduced, show, have shown, without limitation in space or time, all soundtracks,
photographs, drawings, trademarks, films/video pictures concerning competitors, their drivers, teams or
cars involved in the event(s) on any medium whatsoever that is sourced by or under the authority of SCCA
(excepting medium submitted by a participant as part of a formal protest or appeal procedure) for any documents, reports, coverage, broadcast, program, publication, video game or model production, software, etc.
whether past, present or future. The Entrant further acknowledges and agrees that SCCA may freely assign
or license its rights to a third party.
GCR - 15
General
1. Controlling Competition
2. Participant Conduct
PARTICIPANT CONDUCT
Each participant shall conduct himself to the highest standards of behavior and sportsmanship. His actions
shall not prejudice the reputation of the SCCA or the sport of automobile racing. Failure to comply may
result in penalties as specified in Section 7; an official may, in addition, lose his assignment for that event.
2.1.
BREACH OF THE RULES
Beyond any other offenses or violations of specific rules, each of the following is a breach of the GCR.
2.1.1. Bribing, or attempting to bribe, anyone connected with an event; soliciting, accepting, or offering
to accept a bribe.
2.1.2. Acting to enable a person or car known to be ineligible, not properly entered, or credentialed to
participate in an event.
2.1.3. Acting fraudulently or prejudicially to the interests of the SCCA or of the sport of automobile racing.
2.1.4. Driving recklessly or dangerously, anywhere on the track property.
2.1.5. Failing to obey a direction from an official.
2.1.6. Refusing to cooperate with, interfering with, or obstructing the actions of the Chief Steward, the
Stewards of the Meeting (SOM), the Court of Appeals, or other review committees in the performance of
their duties.
2.1.7. Acting in an unsportsmanlike manner.
2.1.8. Threatening or committing physical violence upon any other participant or spectator.
2.1.9. Possession of firearms is only permitted in compliance with federal and local ordinances and per
facility rules and regulations. Firearms are not permitted in competition vehicles while on course.
2.2.
ADDITIONAL PARTICIPANT RESPONSIBILITIES
2.2.1. Authorized Events
SCCA licensed drivers and officials may participate in any events except those specifically disapproved by
the Club Racing Board (CRB) or the Executive Steward of the Division concerned.
2.2.2. Driver and Entrant Responsible for Crew
The driver and entrant are responsible for the conduct of their crew at all times during an event, including
a crew member’s violation of the GCR or the Supplemental Regulations. For the purpose of this section, an
event begins when registration opens and ends when the driver, entrant, and all crew members from that
team have left the track property at the conclusion of the event.
2.2.3. Waiver Signer Responsible for Minor
The parent (s) and/or guardian that has signed a minor waiver on behalf of a minor is fully responsible for
that minor.
2.2.4. Official’s Conflicts of Interest
A.The Race Director or Chief Steward, Assistant Chief Stewards, and the SOM shall have no financial,
employment or business interest; or significant personal relationship with the organizer or sponsor
of an event. Being a member or holding an office in an SCCA Region is not considered a conflict of
interest in the absence of any other evidence.
B. A steward should not operate a session where a family member, co-worker, or a person with whom
he has a significant business, financial, or personal relationship is an entrant or driver.
C.An SOM shall not be involved in a hearing involving a family member, co-worker, or any person with
whom he has a significant business, financial, or personal relationship.
2.2.5. Pets at the Track
The owner is fully responsible for actions of his pet(s), and for any liability arising from those actions. Unless a particular track has a stated policy to the contrary, a pet may be in the paddock, provided it is appropriately confined or on a leash. A pet on a leash must be controlled by an adult, and the leash may not
GCR - 17
General
2.
2. Participant Conduct
exceed 10 feet in length. Pets are prohibited in the pits.
2.2.6 Unmanned Aircraft Systems
Commercial and private unmanned aircraft systems (aka “drones”) are prohibited unless authorized in the
Supplemental Regulations.
2.3.IMPAIRMENT
2.3.1. Alcoholic Beverages, Narcotics, and Dangerous Drugs
A. No driver, entrant, or crew may consume alcohol until all practice, qualifying, or racing for his class
is finished for the day. No official may consume alcohol until his duties have been completed for
the day. Anyone who has consumed any alcohol on the day of an event, other than following the
conclusion of his activities, shall not participate on that day, may be excluded from the balance of
the event, and may be penalized as specified in Section 7. Alcohol may not be consumed in the pits
until after all the day’s on track activities are concluded.
B. The use at an event by any participant of any Federal Schedule 1 controlled substance (including
marijuana), or other drugs that affect the ability of the participant to safely participate in the event or
may otherwise adversely affect the safety or integrity of the event is specifically prohibited. Certain
prescription and non-prescription medicines may also impair performance so competent medical
authority should be consulted prior to using such medicines and participating in the event. Any
participant who violates this prohibition
•shall not seek to participate in the event
•may be excluded from the event by the Race Director or Chief Steward or the Chief of an official’s
specialty
•may be removed from the grounds by the order of the Race Director or Chief Steward
•may be penalized as provided in Section 7.
As a condition of continued participation and/or retention of any SCCA license, the participant may
be required to submit to such testing procedures that may be established by SCCA in its sole discretion. Failure or refusal to submit to such testing shall be deemed a violation of the above prohibitions.
However, SCCA assumes no obligation or duty to establish such testing procedures and/or to test
participants on a random basis or in a specific case.
2.3.2. Medical Fitness
Each participant is encouraged to have someone at the track maintain his medical information in case it
may be needed by a medical treatment team.
A. Medical Fitness of a Driver
1. Responsibility of a Driver
The driver and the driver’s physician are responsible for determining if the driver is medically fit
for participation. The required medical examination form is a tool and guide for the physician in
deciding an applicant’s fitness to participate.
2. Required Medical Examination
No driver shall participate in any event unless he has been examined by a physician within the
period specified in App C.2.1.A., and has been approved by that physician for a competition
license.
3. Changes in Medical Condition
When a driver experiences a change in their medical condition that could affect their fitness to
participate they must:
a. Notify the national office of the change in medical status.
b. Discontinue participation until examined and approved by their physician.
c. Submit a new completed and approved-for-competition medical form.
d. If a driver seeks (or receives) medical attention during an event, that in the opinion of the
event Medical Officer may compromise his on track driving ability, the Medical Officer shall
notify the Safety Steward. The Safety Steward will inform the National Office in writing.
Upon receipt the SCCA Licensing Department will contact the driver, reminding him of the
obligations stipulated under GCR 2.3.2.A.3
Examples of medical conditions that may affect the ability to participate: pregnancy, cardiac or
neurological problems, heart attack, heart surgery, stroke, loss of consciousness, seizures, major
surgery or diagnosis of cancer.
4. Involvement in Accident at an Event
GCR - 18
2. Participant Conduct
A driver must report to the event Medical Service as soon as possible whenever any of the
following conditions is met:
2. His car collides with a stationary object hard enough to cause structural damage to the
car;
3. He is aware that he may have been injured in an incident;
4. He has been directed by an official to do so.
A driver transported to an off-site medical facility cannot continue to compete in that event
without a medical release signed by the attending physician at the treating facility or the event
Chief Medical Official.
B. Medical Fitness of Crew
Any known medical condition (including pregnancy) which could affect medical fitness to perform
the duties of a crew member may prevent admission to the pits or any other hazardous area.
C. Medical Fitness of an Official
Any known medical condition (including pregnancy) which could affect the ability to perform some
or all of the assigned specialty duties requires reassignment based on the recommendations of the
person’s physician. Some medical conditions (including pregnancy) may require reassignment to nonhazardous areas only.
D. Concussion & Loss of Consciousness
A participant who suffers a concussion, defined as a traumatic brain injury caused by a bump, blow
or jolt to the head, or loss of consciousness, defined as lack of response to others or amnesia for the
incident, shall be medically evaluated by the track physician or ER and is prohibited from participating
in the remainder of the event weekend. If the driver is diagnosed as having a head injury or concussion, regardless of the level, the driver must have a follow up evaluation by a neurologist upon his/her
return home. The driver must obtain the approval of the neurologist to resume racing and submit the
approval to SCCA Member Services. The event Safety Steward shall notify SCCA Member Services
of accidents resulting in the above. The protocol for evaluation is available from the event Safety
Steward and the National Office.
2.4. DIVISIONAL ADMINISTRATOR AND EXECUTIVE STEWARD LICENSING AUTHORITY AND MEMBER
RIGHTS
2.4.1. Divisional Administrators and Executive Stewards manage licenses in their respective specialties for
their Divisions. They may downgrade, refuse to upgrade, suspend, or not renew the license of any official
for non- or under-participation, conduct violating the GCR, actions contrary to the best interests of the
SCCA, or inability to perform satisfactorily at the current license grade.
2.4.2. Any official subject to a license action as described in Sections 2.4.1. may request a review of the
license action.
A. Request:
1. Must be made to the official’s Executive Steward in writing.
2. Must be made within ten days of the license action.
B. Review Management:
1. Non-steward Licenses - the member’s Executive Steward.
2. Steward licenses - the Chairman of the Stewards’ Program
C. Review Committee:
1. Will be established by the Executive Steward or the Chairman of the Stewards’ Program according
to Section 2.6.
2. Will be conducted in accordance with the Stewards’ Manual guidelines.
3. May uphold, modify, or overturn the license action.
D. Appeal:
1. Parties have the right to appeal the decision of the Review Committee to the Court of Appeals,
per Section 8.4.
GCR - 19
General
1. He is involved in an incident where his car rolls over;
2. Participant Conduct
2.5. EXECUTIVE STEWARD DRIVER AND OFFICIAL REVIEW
A Divisional Executive Steward may convene a Review Committee in compliance with Section 2.6 to
review a driver or official’s conduct, car legality, competition record, and/or other matters. The Review
Committee may invoke penalties as specified in Section 7, suspend or change the grade of any license, and/
or return a driver to an SCCA Drivers’ School. The driver or official has the right to appeal the decision of
the Review Committee to the Court of Appeals, as specified in Section 8.4.
2.6. REVIEW COMMITTEE MEMBERS CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
Members of review committees created under Sections 2.4. and 2.5. may not have any significant conflicts
of interest or ties to any of the parties. Members will be subject to the restrictions of 2.2.4.C., and may
not have any other significant conflicts of interest with any of the parties. Reviews will be conducted in
accordance with the Stewards Manual guidelines.
2.7. CRB OFFICIAL REVIEW
The license of any official may be suspended by the CRB, if in their view his actions are contrary to the best
interest of the SCCA. A license may be suspended for a period of time specified by the CRB, or it may be
revoked permanently. License revocation by the CRB may be appealed to the SCCA Board of Directors.
GCR - 20
2. Participant Conduct
General
NOTES:
GCR - 21
3. Events
3.1. TYPES OF SCCA RACE EVENTS
The SCCA sanctions various types of race events conducted in compliance with the GCR. SCCA race
events are classified by the persons eligible to participate, the categories of cars eligible to compete,
defined organizational requirements, and the awards offered.
3.1.1. U.S. Majors Tour Races
U.S. Majors Tour races are high-profile events for drivers seeking an elevated level of competition. The Head
of Club Racing oversees and is responsible for the U.S. Majors Tour; events are operated by host Regions,
with assistance from the U.S. Majors Tour Staff in some cases. The U.S. Majors Tour is organized as series
of events within six geographic units known as Conferences.
A. Types of U.S. Majors Tour Events
1. Conference Events
Points earned in Conference races in Runoffs-eligible classes will count toward Conference
Championships (see 3.7.2), and qualification for the National Championship Runoffs (see 3.7.4).
They may also count toward Divisional Championships (see 3.7.1).
There may be a non-Runoffs eligible component of an event.
Competitors will find information on the classes eligible and the structure for each event on the
SCCA website and in the Supplemental Regulations.
2. Super Tour Events
Super Tour Events are specially-designated Conference Events that include additional enhancements. Points earned in Super Tour Events in Runoffs-eligible classes will count toward Conference Championships (see 3.7.2), the Super Tour Championship (see 3.7.3) and qualification for
the National Championship Runoffs (see 3.7.4).
3.Festival
Entry invitations are limited to the particular class(es) specified in the Supplemental Regulations.
Points earned in Festival events do not count toward Conference Championships.
B. Driver Eligibility
C.
Only drivers who hold an SCCA Full Competition License or an SCCA Pro License are eligible to enter.
Organizing Personnel
1.
Head of Club Racing or their designate - oversees all aspects of the U.S. Majors Tour, including
the appointment of personnel.
2.
Race Director (RD)
a. Appointed by Head of Club Racing for all Super Tours. Appointed by local Executive Stewards for their respective Conference. Conference RD serves as Asst. RD for Super Tour
events within that Conference.
b. The RD works with each Executive Steward and host Region to appoint the balance of the
Stewards for each U.S. Majors Tour event.
c. The RD works with the event Stewards to conduct the event.
d. Only the RD in agreement with the Region’s representative may modify the Supplementary
Regulations, as permitted in 5.12.2, after the Sanction has been issued; he may act on these
matters without filing a Request for Action with the SOM.
e. Administrative actions taken by the RD (including modifying the Schedule of Events and race
groupings), are non-protestable; actions/penalties imposed by the RD for driving or compliance are protestable.
3.
Series Administrator (SA)
a. Required for all Super Tours, optional for other Conference events.
b. The SA oversees series organization and administration of the U.S. Majors Tour series events
for his Conference.
4. Series Chief Technical Inspector (SCTI)
a. Required for all Super Tours, optional for other Conference events.
GCR - 23
General
3.EVENTS
3. Events
b. The SCTI works with the CCC and event technical staff to provide consistent compliance
checking across all the events in his Conference.
5. Series Timing Administrator
a. Required for all Super Tours, optional for other Conference events.
b. The Series Timing Administrator works with the local Timing team to deliver enhanced
timing functionality to events.
6. Series Public Relations Representative
a. Required for all Super Tours, optional for other Conference events.
b. The Series PR Representative provides communication and public relations support for the
event.
7. Series Clerk of the Course
a. May be designated for Super Tours, optional for other Conference events.
b. The Clerk of the Course is an Operating Steward that works in Race Control with local stewards to provide consistency in race operations.
8. One or more SCCA Regions may organize a U.S. Majors Tour event. The region or group hosting
a U.S. Majors Tour event will enter into a written agreement with the National Office that details
the responsibilities of both parties.
D. Event Format / Schedule
1. Conference Events
a. The National Office has developed standard formats for each type of U.S. Majors Tour
event. Regions are encouraged to utilize these standard formats to retain program consistency.
b. At least one race for each race group will be a minimum of 45 miles. Additional races on a
weekend shall be a minimum of 20 minutes in length.
c. Minimum track time
1. Two-day events shall have a minimum of 35 minutes of non-racing track time available
per Majors class entry.
2. Three-day events shall have a minimum of 65 minutes of non-racing track time available
per Majors class entry.
2. Super Tour Events
a. The National Office has developed standard formats for each type of U.S. Majors Tour
event, and works with Regions to create a specific schedule, which must be approved by
the Head of Club Racing, who has final authority.
b. At least one race for each race group will be 35 minutes in length with a maximum of 50
miles (variations may be approved by the head of Club Racing and published in the supplemental regulations). Additional races on a weekend shall be a minimum of 25 minutes in
length.
c. Minimum track time
1. Two-day events shall have a minimum of 35 minutes of non-racing track time available
per Majors class entry.
2. Three-day events shall have a minimum of 65 minutes of non-racing track time available
per Majors class entry.
3. The schedule must show start times for all sessions, however, it is understood that actual
start times will vary based on on-track situations and forces of nature. Minor running adjustments to the schedule do not require Requests for Action to the SOM.
4. All U.S. Majors Tour events are open to the public. Host Regions and the National Office
jointly promote U.S. Majors Tour events.
E. Classes to be included in U.S. Majors Tour events:
1. All Runoffs-eligible classes will be included in Conference and Super Tour events.
2. Run groups comprised of non-Runoffs eligible classes may be included in U.S. Majors Tour
Conference events to encourage participation.
F. Additional Majors Requirements
GCR - 24
3. Events
2. For the purposes of Conference points keeping, timing and scoring shall supply an Orbits database backup file (Orbits 4 preferred) to the SCCA National office (see front of book for email
address) within three business days of the event to tabulate series points. Any revisions not
included in that file shall be communicated with the submission.
a. All drivers listed on the final race results shall be consistent with the numbers included in the
event audit.
3.1.2.Regional and Endurance Races
All races, except U.S. Majors Tour events, are designated Regional races. The requirements for
Regional races are given below and in the referenced appendices. Some Regional races may be designated as Division Championship races.
Regional races are ordinarily open to the following competitors:
A. Drivers holding SCCA Full Competition Licenses, SCCA Pro Licenses, SCCA Vintage Licenses, and
those holding SCCA Novice Permits (AppC.2.7.F)
B. Canadian Residents holding current ASN National Licenses, are 21 or years of age or older, and are
members of SCCA.
C. SCCA members holding competition licenses issued by SCCA-approved organizations. The event
Supplemental Regulations must list the particular organizations and licenses not eligible for a specific
race or else exclude the entire group of organizations and licenses by reference to this section.
Minors possessing competition licenses issued by SCCA approved organizations must also complete
the minor competition license requirements found in AppC.2.5. If a driver is currently listed on the
SCCA Suspension List, then they may not use any other sanctioning body’s competition license to
participate in an SCCA event.
The organizations whose licenses are currently approved by SCCA for competition in Regional events
are listed in AppC.
Please direct any questions about licenses to the Club Racing department in the National Office.
Section 9.1 identifies the classes of cars eligible to compete in Regional races.
D. An endurance race is a single race that may allow multiple drivers in the same car.
3.1.3. Drivers’ Schools
Drivers’ Schools provide instruction in safe and sportsmanlike wheel to wheel competition. They shall be
conducted according to the GCR and under the following conditions:
A. The entered cars will be divided into at least open and closed wheel groups, which will run separately
from one another. Sports Racing cars may be grouped with Formula cars. (See AppB.1.4.2.)
B. Only students undergoing instruction and their instructors may participate on track. However, a
driver holding an SCCA competition license or a license from any organization listed in AppC.2.8.B
may be admitted as a student at the discretion of the Chief Steward.
C. Alternative Drivers’ Schools may be offered to permit novice drivers with prior racing, PDX, Time
Trials, Solo and coaching experience to complete their school requirements. An alternative school
may be used as credit for a single school completion See AppC.2.7.E.3. for the details of Alternative
Drivers’ Schools.
3.1.4. Vintage/Historic Races
Vintage/Historic races may be included on SCCA programs under the following conditions:
A.The Vintage/Historic segment is provided for in the sanction and Supplemental Regulations.
B. Each driver is an SCCA member holding an SCCA Full Competition License, SCCA Pro License,
Vintage License or an SCCA Novice Permit as provided in AppC.2.7.D. and F., or an SCCA approved
license.
The following organizations’ licenses are currently approved by SCCA for competition in
Vintage/Historic events:
1. Classic Sports Racing Group (CSRG)
2. Historic Sportscar Racing (HSR)
3. Society of Vintage Racing Enthusiasts (SOVREN)
4.Sportscar Vintage Racing Association (SVRA)
GCR - 25
General
1. Conference Preferred Numbers will be administered by the National office and shall be honored
at all Majors events until 14 days prior to the event. If two drivers holding the same Pre-ferred
Number request that number for the same run group, the number will be assigned to the driver
with the earliest request.
3. Events
5. Vintage Auto Racing Association (VARA)
6. Vintage Motorsports Council (VMC) and VMC member organizations
7. Vintage Driver’s Club of America (VDCA)
Please direct any questions about licenses to the Club Racing department in the National Office.
C. All Vintage cars must conform to Appendix Z of the SCCA Vintage Competition Rulebook (VCR),
publication #5684 dated March 2005. Roll cages as defined in Appendix Z of the current VCR are
required in all production cars considered model year 1973 or later. There is no requirement for cars
from model year 1972 or earlier to have roll cages; however, members are encouraged to install
roll cages in such cars where satisfactory installation can be achieved. At a minimum, roll bars are
required for production cars from model year 1972 or earlier. Where allowed, roll bars must conform
to Appendix Z of the current VCR.
Driver restraint systems must meet current GCR requirements. Driver window safety net or arm
restraints are required in closed cars. Open cars require arm restraints.
D. Vintage/Historic cars shall not be allowed to be grouped with any other SCCA racing classes (except
in a Drivers’ School).
3.1.5. Practice Days
Practice Days are non-competition track days scheduled, sanctioned, and insured under standards included
in AppB. Practice Days are conducted according to the GCR. In addition, the following standards apply:
A. A Practice Day sanction is valid for 1 day.
B. Each driver is an SCCA member holding an SCCA Full Competition License, SCCA Pro License,
Vintage License or an SCCA Novice Permit showing Drivers’ School requirements signed off as
provided in AppC.2.7.D and F, or an SCCA approved license. A Novice Permit holder who is participating in an Alternate Drivers’ School may participate in SCCA practice days in accordance with the
provisions of AppC.2.7.E.3.
C. 9.1 identifies the classes of cars eligible to compete in Practice Days.
D. Officials meet the requirements of 5.1.3.
E. At a minimum, a Race Director or Chief Steward and Assistant Chief Steward – Safety are required.
F. Unless required by the track, or local authorities or ordinances, Sound Control is not in effect.
G. Staffing and equipment meet the requirements of 5.4. and 5.5.
H. Formula cars may be combined with Sports Racing cars, but may not be combined with other categories.
I.
A maximum of 25 cars per mile may be on the course simultaneously, with no exception.
3.2.
SCHEDULING RACE EVENTS
SCCA race date/event scheduling, postponement and cancellation policies and procedures are found in
AppB.1.1.
3.3.
SANCTIONING RACE EVENTS
A sanction is the documentary approval granted by SCCA Club Racing to organize and conduct an SCCA
race event. The relevant policies and procedures are found in AppB.1.3.
3.4.
SUPPLEMENTAL REGULATIONS AND ENTRY FORMS
The requirements for Supplemental Regulations and Entry Forms are found in AppB.1.4.
3.4.1. Changing U.S. Majors Tour Supplemental Regulations
The Race Director may change the Supplemental Regulations of a U.S. Majors Tour event as permitted in
5.12.2. in agreement with the event organizers prior to making changes and promptly inform the Chairman
SOM of all changes.
3.4.2. Changing Regional Race Supplemental Regulations
All non-clerical errors and omissions changes to the Supplemental Regulations and event schedule must be
approved by the SOM. Prior to the start of the event, the Chief Steward may make clerical errors and omissions changes to the schedule and/or class groupings and related information (for example, the omission
of a class or a reference to the rules for a regional class). Except for modifications to the schedule and/
or class groupings, no changes may be made to the Supplemental Regulations after the pre-entry period is
open unless either there is unanimous agreement by all affected competitors who have already entered, or
the SOM determine changes are necessary for reasons of safety or forces beyond their control.
3.5.INSURANCE
SCCA race/event insurance policies, procedures, and coverages are found in AppB.2. and the Insurance
Handbook.
3.5.1.Waivers
GCR - 26
3. Events
3.6.AWARDS
Drivers compete primarily for points and trophies in SCCA events, although financial awards may also be
offered.
3.6.1. Distributing Awards
Organizers must have event awards for each race available to distribute as soon as Official Results are
determined, or after the period for receiving protests has elapsed so placing drivers can take their trophies
with them. Awards will not be distributed until after any protest affecting their distribution has been settled.
If notified of an intent to appeal any decision which would affect awards, the SOM will direct that the
distribution be held pending Court of Appeals decision.
3.6.2.Trophies
U.S. Majors Tour event trophies will be awarded on the following minimum basis for each participating
class:
Number of Starters
Trophies Awarded for
Finishing Position
2
1st place only
3
1st and 2nd
4
1 , 2nd, and 3rd
st
3.6.3. Prize Money
The SCCA may require as a condition of an event sanction that any prize money be deposited in escrow a
satisfactory period of time prior to the start of the event, and also that the SCCA controls the distribution
of the prize money.
3.6.4. Refuse Awards
A driver may refuse all event/series awards by notifying the Race Director or Chief Steward before his race.
He must meet all other GCR requirements, including impound. He may earn a lap record and, provided he
finishes, he may receive license credit for the race.
3.7 CHAMPIONSHIPS
3.7.1. Division Championships
Each Division will conduct an SCCA approved championship program for Runoffs invitations. The program
must be submitted for approval to the Head of Club Racing or his designate by October 1st each year. Division Championship rules will be posted on the SCCA website.
3.7.2. Conference Championships
Each Conference will award Championships for each Runoffs-eligible class based on points earned in U.S.
Majors Tour Conference and Super Tour races. A competitor may enter events in one or more Conferences,
but points only accrue within the Conference in which the event is held. If a single event is designated for
multiple Conferences, points are scored in each Conference. The minimum number of U.S. Majors Tour
races per Conference is 10 and the total may vary; a driver shall count the best 8 finishes in a conference
for the class championship. Point standings are maintained by the SCCA National Office and posted at
www.scca.com.
A. Dead Heat Race Finish
When there is a dead heat in a race finishing position, the total points for the positions tied are added
up and divided equally between or among the tied drivers. Points then continue starting with the next
untied position.
B. Race Points Awarded Only to One Driver
Points are awarded to one driver per car per race. When more than one driver competes in the same
race, neither is awarded points.
C. Championship Ties
Ties in final Championship standings are resolved based on the drivers’ records of first place finishes,
then second place, then third and so on, as needed; including any finishes beyond the drivers’ best
8. If two or more drivers have identical records, they are tied for the position in the standings.
3.7.3 Super Tour Championship
Super Tour Championship Point Standings will be complied for Super Tour event participants in each
Runoffs-eligible class. A driver’s best six points races in the same class count in the Super Tour Championship, regardless of the Conference in which the points were earned. Additionally, the National ChampionGCR - 27
General
All participants must be properly credentialed for the event. Each adult participant must also either sign the
SCCA waiver at the event or have an SCCA annual waiver on file at the National Office and present his
hard card it at registration. Each minor participant must also have the event minor waiver signed by one or
both parents or have an executed annual minor waiver on file at the National Office and present his hard
card at registration.
3. Events
ship Runoffs (in the same class) will count as a seventh scored race. Ties will be broken initially by Runoffs
finishing position and then by 3.7.3.C, if needed.
A. Dead Heat Race Finish
When there is a dead heat in a race finishing position, the total points for the positions tied are added
up and divided equally between or among the tied drivers. Points then continue starting with the next
untied position.
B. Race Points Awarded Only to One Driver
Points are awarded to one driver per car per race group. When more than one driver competes in the
same car in the same race group, neither is awarded points.
C. Championship Ties
Ties in final Championship standings are resolved based on the drivers’ finishing position at that
year’s Runoffs. If tied drivers do not participate at the Runoffs, ties will be resolved by records of
first place finishes, then second place, then third, and so on as needed; including any finishes beyond
the drivers’ best six (6). If two or more drivers have identical records, they are tied for the position
in the standings.
D. Points are awarded to the top 20 starters that have completed half of the laps of the overall race
winner in each race as follows: 25, 21, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8. 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1.
3.7.4.SCCA Runoffs
SCCA schedules and conducts an event each year called the SCCA Runoffs, open to all U.S. Majors Tour
participants and Division Championship participants who meet the invitation qualifications. A competitor
must qualify in the same class(es) in which he is entering the Runoffs, though he may compete in any car
eligible for the class(es).
The SCCA Runoffs determine the SCCA National Champion in each eligible class.
SCCA publishes the Supplemental Regulations defining driver and car eligibility and other event details.
A. Invitations to the SCCA Runoffs
Three distinct paths exist for qualifying for a Runoffs invitation. Invitations are issued to all drivers in
each Runoffs-eligible class based on the following minimum qualifications:
1. U.S. Majors Tour Super Tour and/or Conference Events
A competitor must meet participation requirements.
a. Participation Requirements
Participate on track in a minimum of three separate U.S. Major Super Tour and/or Conference event weekends and have a minimum of three individual race starts, all in the same
class. Events may be a part of any Conference.
A driver may substitute two Regional-sanctioned weekends for one of his three Majors
weekend participation requirements. Eligible Regional weekends shall occur between
January 1 of that year and a date not less than three weeks prior to the start of the Runoffs
or as otherwise specified in the Runoffs supplemental regulations. Endurance races are not
eligible.
Drivers in the following classes may replace participation in one Majors weekend with an
SCCA Pro Racing weekend in the corresponding class. Drivers must request this replacement through the Club Racing Department, and pay the entry fee to a Majors event of their
choice, to be collected and distributed by SCCA.
GT1- TA
GT2- TA2 or TA3
T1 - TA3 or TA4
T2 - TA4
FA - F4
This replaces participation but not the Majors starts requirement.
2. Division Championship Events
There are both participation and performance requirements to qualify for the Runoffs through
Division Championships.
a. Participation Requirement: A competitor must participate on track in a minimum of four of a
GCR - 28
3. Events
single Division’s championship points weekends in the same class.
c. If a Division Championship is not concluded at the time of the Runoffs, invitations will be
extended to competitors meeting the requirements at a period of time three weeks prior to
the start of the Runoffs event. This allows Divisions to run programs year-round, if desired.
d. In addition to the Top 3 (Top 5 SRF3/SM) Divisional points earners nationwide, SCCA BoD
will allow drivers in the top 50% in CenDiv and Great Lakes Divisions for 2017 to be eligible
for Runoffs invitations on a space available basis.
3. Defending National Champions
In addition, a current defending National Champion, who has not met the Runoffs invitation
requirements in 3.7.4.A.1 or 2, may be accepted as an entrant even if he did not meet the
participation requirements of 3.7.4.A.1 or 2.
a. The entry will not be included in the total count of Runoffs invitations.
b. He may compete only in the class(es) being defended, though he may compete in any car
eligible for the class(es).
c. He will not bump anyone from the field who was invited based on the qualifications in
3.7.4.A.1 or 2.
d. A driver may not invoke the provisions of this section in two consecutive years in the same
class, even if he repeats as a National Champion.
4. Additional Requirements
The driver must hold a current SCCA Full Competition License or SCCA Pro License.
B. Refusal Of Entry
A competitor whose entry has been refused for the SCCA Runoffs may protest and appeal only the
refusal of his entry, and he may protest up to 15 days before the start of the event. (See 4.4.6.)
C. Invited Runoffs Classes
All Runoffs eligible classes are invited to the Runoffs.
1. A Runoffs-eligible class with a minimum of 10 qualified drivers entered who have participated in
at least one on track session at the current year’s Runoffs will name a National Champion.
2. A Runoffs-eligible class with fewer than 10 qualified drivers entered who have participated in
at least one on track session at the current year’s Runoffs will name a National Champion but
subsequently be on probation for the following year’s Runoffs. Should a class on probation at
the Runoffs fail to have a minimum of 10 qualified drivers enter and participate in at least one
on-track session the year it is on probation, that class may run as a supplemental class but will
not name a National Champion.
3. Classes may be combined as needed to limit the number of race groups with a preference for
combining no more than 2 classes for any race.
GCR - 29
General
b. Performance Requirement: A competitor must finish in the top three positions in his class
point standings, except SM and SRF3 where the top five will be invited.
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
PARTICIPANT LICENSING, EVENT CREDENTIALS, & ENTRIES
4.1.
SCCA RESERVATION OF RIGHTS
SCCA is a private, not for profit organization, and it reserves the right to deny any license, or to revoke any
previously issued license, for any reason or no reason, except that SCCA will not deny or revoke a license
solely on the basis of race, creed, color, sex, or national origin.
4.2.
SUBMITTING TO THE GCR
Anyone who applies for an SCCA license expressly agrees, and will acknowledge the following in writing
if requested:
A. Familiarity with the GCR;
B. Agreement without reservations to any consequences of not complying with the GCR;
C. Renunciation of any right to recourse, except with the written consent of the SCCA, to any arbitrator
or tribunal not provided for in the GCR.
4.3.
PARTICIPANT LICENSES
4.3.1.SCCA Licenses
SCCA issues Competition and Officials’ Licenses based on qualifications and experience. Information and
procedures about Competition and Official’s licensing and grades are found in Appendix C. Any individual
may be a Crew member. Crew must be SCCA members to gain access to the pit lane and other hazardous
areas. (See 4.5.3.)
4.3.2. SCCA Membership
SCCA licenses are issued only to SCCA members in good standing. The types of membership are found in
the SCCA Operations Manual.
4.3.3. Expiring License and Membership
All licenses show the month and year of expiration, which coincides with the individual’s SCCA membership anniversary date. Any participant who is properly registered for an event may participate for its duration even if his membership and license expire while the event is in progress.
4.3.4. Possessing a Membership and License
A participant registered for an event must have his current membership and license in his possession. His
license must be the proper level for the type of event and activity. All entrants must be members of the
SCCA and they are subject to all provisions of the GCR. (Refer to 7.2.I.)
4.3.5. Presenting a License
When requested, any official, driver, entrant (if Entrant Licenses are required), or crew must show his
license to an official.
4.3.6. Required Membership and License
Only licensed members may be in hazardous areas. Non-members may only be where the hazards do not
exceed those to the general public. The exception is that employees of services hired by the organizer or
the track who enter restricted areas to fulfill their job responsibilities (such as ambulance, wrecker, and fire
crews) are not required, but are recommended, to be SCCA members. For the purpose of determining a
hazardous area, the definition “outside the protection of a positive barrier” is used.
4.4.
RACE EVENT ENTRIES
An entry submitted and accepted according to the GCR and event Supplemental Regulations is an agreement to participate in that event. Provided the entrant or driver has made every effort to participate, the
organizers will adhere to their published refund policy. Failure by any party to adhere to the entry agreement may be treated as a breach of the GCR.
4.4.1. Entering an Event
An entry is considered official and a competitor is considered entered in an event under the following conditions:
A. The competitor is in good standing and his competition privileges have not been suspended.
B. An official event Entry Form has been completed, signed (or if an electronic entry, the approved Club
Racing consent box is checked), submitted to and received by the organizers.
C. The entry fee has been submitted to and received by the organizers.
D. All monies due the SCCA have been submitted and paid.
4.4.2. Entering Multiple Classes
An entrant or driver who enters more than one class under a single sanction number must submit separate
entry forms and fees for each class.
4.4.3. Withdrawing an Entry
If an entry is withdrawn prior to the entry deadline, there is no penalty, and the organizers will return the
GCR - 31
General
4.
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
entry fee. If the entry is withdrawn after the entry deadline, the organizers may return all or part of the
entry fee. An entrant or driver may be found in violation of the GCR if he is officially entered in one event
but participates in a different competition held on the same day.
4.4.4. Falsifying an Entry
An entry containing a false or incorrect statement may be determined null and void by the SOM or other
reviewing group. The entrant or driver may be found in violation of the GCR, the entry fee may be forfeited,
and additional penalties imposed.
4.4.5. Racing Under an Assumed Name
Unless the Club Racing Department authorizes a driver to use an assumed name, he must sign all official
documents with his legal name for all events requiring an SCCA Competition License.
4.4.6. Refusing an Entry
Even if an entry meets all the requirements outlined in 4.4.1., above, the organizers have the right to refuse
an entry without giving a reason. If an entry is refused, notification must be sent to the entrant or driver at
the address on the Entry Form as soon as possible, and normally at least 5 days before the event.
4.5.
EVENT CREDENTIALS
4.5.1.Waivers
Anyone participating in an event must sign the SCCA Release and Waiver of Liability Agreement before an
event credential (pass) will be issued.
4.5.2. Photo ID
A. An SCCA-issued photo ID is required for any registered event participant who is an SCCA licensed
member.
B. The member’s name, current photograph, SCCA membership number, and credential for the event
must be clearly visible.
C. Accepted photo IDs are those issued by the SCCA National Office, the Club Racing Department, the
SCCA Pro Racing Department, or an SCCA Region. Any of these must be honored by any SCCA
Region.
D. Identification cards from any other organization, including civil authorities, will not be accepted.
E. A non-member or weekend member will be issued a paper pass or a wristband rather than a photo
ID.
4.5.3. Hazardous Area Credentials
SCCA members who are licensed and who are 18 and older may be issued credentials allowing them
access to hazardous areas.
SCCA members 14 to 18 years old may be issued credentials allowing them access to hazardous areas
only if they possess a Minor License issued by the SCCA National Office. (See AppC.1.4., AppC.2.5.,
AppC.3.2.) Otherwise, they may not enter any area where the hazards exceed those of the general public.
4.5.4. Non-hazardous Area Credentials
Non-member participants may be issued credentials which do not allow them access to hazardous areas.
Guests of the organizer or spectators may be issued credentials or tickets which do not allow them access
to hazardous areas.
GCR - 32
4. Participant Licensing, Event Credentials, Entries
General
NOTES:
GCR - 33
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
OFFICIALS, THEIR DUTIES, OPERATING PROCEDURES, AND EQUIPMENT
5.1.
PRINCIPAL OFFICIALS
The principal officials, who direct the event, may include the following:
Race Chairman
Chief Course Marshal
Chief of Emergency Services
Chief of Flagging
Chief of Communications
Chief Registrar
Chief of Sound Control
Chief Starter
Chief Technical Inspector
Chief of Timing and Scoring
Chief Observer
Chief of Pit
Chief of Grid
Chief of Race Administration
Judges
Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
U.S. Majors Race Director
Chief Steward
Assistant Chief Steward–Safety (ACS – Safety)
Except for the SOM, these officials may have assistants to whom any of their duties may be delegated.
5.1.1. Required Stewards
At a minimum, there shall be a Race Director or Chief Steward, an ACS – Safety, and at least 2 SOM
(including a Chairman and one other licensed steward in addition to any Stewards-in-Training).
5.1.2.Appointment
A. Runoffs
The SCCA will appoint all Runoffs officials.
B. U. S. Majors Tour
The SCCA will appoint for each Super Tour, a Series Administrator, and, upon consultation with the
Chairman of the Stewards Program, a Race Director and a Series Chief Tech Inspector. All other event
stewards shall be appointed by the Executive Steward for the event’s Division, with input from the Race
Director. The organizer conducting the event appoints all other officials, subject to approval by the Executive Steward. U.S. Majors Tour Race Director and the Chief Steward at each event in their Super Tour. At
U.S. Majors Tour events, where there is a Race Director and a Chief Steward, the Race Director has final
authority over the event. The Race Director must still adhere to the responsibilities stated in 3.1.1.D.2
and 5.12.2.
C. SCCA Regional Events
The Division’s Executive Steward appoints all event Stewards. The organizer conducting the event
appoints all other officials, subject to approval by the Executive Steward.
5.1.3. Minimum Grades of Licenses
For the following events, these minimum licenses are mandatory:
Drivers’
School
Stewards
U. S. Majors Tour
Regional
Chief
National*
Divisional
National
Chairman of the SOM
National
Divisional
Divisional
GCR - 35
General
5.
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
*Appointed by SCCA upon consultation with
the Chairman of the Steward’s program
Chiefs of Specialty
U. S. Majors
Tour
Regional
Drivers’ School
Emergency Services
National
Divisional
National
Flagging and Comm
National
Divisional
National
Grid Marshal
National
Divisional
National
Pit Marshal
National
Divisional
National
Registrar
National
Divisional
National
Starter
National
Divisional
National
Technical Inspector
National
Divisional
National
Timing and Scoring
National
Divisional
Divisional
Sound Control
Divisional
Divisional
Divisional
5.1.4. Right to Oversight
The SCCA reserves the right to designate a qualified person to evaluate any competition.
5.1.5. Plurality of Duties
Except for the Race Director, the Chief Steward and the Chairman SOM, the same person may hold more
than one official position at an event.
5.1.6. Separation of Duties
An official may not perform duties not clearly attached to his appointment(s).
5.2.
RACE CHAIRMAN
5.2.1 U. S. Majors Tour Event Chairman Responsibilities
The Race Chairman organizes the event in conjunction with the Conference Series Administrator in accordance with the event agreement between SCCA and the organizing region.
5.2.2. Regional Event Race Chairman Responsibilities
The Race Chairman organizes an event. Specifically, he will:
A. With the promoters, organizers, and the Chief Steward determine the schedule (including all activities
during the event) and draft the Supplemental Regulations.
B. See that all Entry Forms are distributed.
C. Arrange for insurance conforming to SCCA requirements, and for a copy of the Insurance Certificate
to be presented to the Chief Steward, the Chairman SOM, the ACS – Safety, and the track before
the beginning of the event.
D. Arrange for trophies and their proper distribution.
E. Arrange for the use of the course and all necessary facilities.
F. See that qualified officials are appointed.
G. Work with each Chief of Specialty to assure that they have the proper equipment and facilities.
5.3.
COURSE MARSHAL
The Course Chief prepares and maintains the course and performs other related duties assigned to him by
the ACS – Safety and the Chief of Emergency Services (Chief of ES) in conjunction with the Race Directoror
Chief Steward.
5.4.
EMERGENCY SERVICES – MEDICAL AND FIRE SAFETY
The Chief of ES, in conjunction with the Race Chairman and ACS – Safety, staffs and equips the event for
medical and fire safety.
5.4.1.Purpose
A. To establish equipment and personnel needed to affect a workable medical, fire, and safety plan.
Detailed plans need to be based on the specific conditions at the event facility and local, state or
federal protocols and regulations.
B. The Chief of ES shall be familiar with local, state, and federal regulations for accident and medical
emergencies. At tracks where SCCA volunteer medical personnel cannot perform medical duties,
the Chief of ES and the ACS – Safety will be responsible to ensure that proper medical equipment is
available, and that proper medical procedures are being followed.
C. A copy of the medical and fire safety plan for each track must be submitted by the Divisional Executive Steward to the National Office.
GCR - 36
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
1. There will be a Chief Medical Official who is either: 1) Physician, MD or DO, preferably with an
EMS background and licensed to practice in at least one (1) state or, 2) Paramedic or equivalent
(advanced life support technician) with an active license or certification for the state in which
they are operating, or, 3) PA (Physicians Assistant) or APN (Advanced Practice Nurse) trained
and experienced in EMS and emergency medicine with an active license. The Chief Medical
Official may be a person contracted with the track, and not an SCCA member, but he must
coordinate with the Chief of ES.
2. There should be a second licensed medical person (EMT, paramedic, physician’s assistant, registered nurse, etc) to assist the Chief Medical Official(s).
3. Medical personnel report to the event Chief Medical Official.
4. Medical units should be stationed so that the maximum time for a first medical response is no
more than 2 minutes.
B. Fire Fighters
1. At least 2 persons who are trained to use the equipment should be assigned to each fire truck.
A minimum of 2 persons should be assigned to each fire truck.
2. Fire fighters report to the Chief of ES. If no Chief is assigned, then to the ACS – Safety.
C. Wrecker Operator(s)
1.At least 1 person who is trained to use the equipment will be assigned to a wrecker.
2.Wrecker personnel report to the Chief of ES. If no Chief is assigned, then to the ACS – Safety.
5.4.3. Required Equipment
A.Ambulances
1. During any competition, there shall be at least 1 ambulance at the track which meets all Advanced
Life Support requirements for the jurisdiction in which the event takes place (where “jurisdiction”
means the governing body, such as a township, city, or county). A Basic Life Support ambulance
is acceptable only if the track medical facility is equipped and staffed for Advanced Life Support.
2. Arrangements for transportation from the track by EMS service should be in the medical operations protocol.
B. Fire Truck
At least 1 fire truck shall be equipped to fight automobile fires. This vehicle should be stationed so that
maximum response time is 2 minutes at a speed not to exceed 50 mph.
C. Wrecker
At least 1 wrecker must be capable of lifting any race car in the event. The wrecker may also serve as a
fire truck if it is properly equipped and staffed.
D.Telephone
A telephone or radio in the tower or medical duty station must be able to contact community emergency
services and hospitals.
E. Other Equipment
1. If a power compound rescue tool and trained operator is on call and available within 10 minutes,
it does not have to be located at the event site.
2. Comparable equipment may be substituted with the advance approval of the Divisional Executive
Steward.
5.4.4. Operating Rules
A. Emergency Plan
The Chief of ES and the ACS – Safety will verify that a written emergency plan has been distributed to
all emergency and supervisory personnel before the event begins.
B.Briefing
All emergency service personnel should be briefed to review duties, duty stations, equipment, race circuit
characteristics, vehicle, and other protocols.
C.Dispatching
Dispatching emergency vehicles onto the track must be authorized by the Race Director or Chief Steward,
according to procedures agreed on in advance by the Chief Steward, Chief(s) of Flagging and Communications, Chief of ES, and ACS – Safety.
GCR - 37
General
5.4.2.Personnel
A. Medical
The following apply:
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
D. Hospital Arrangements
1.The Race Chairman and Chief Medical Official establish a primary route to the primary and
secondary hospital prior to an event, and advise the vehicle drivers.
2. In advance of the event, the Chief Medical Official must confirm that adequate hospital staff and
facilities are available, along with the protocols to be followed, and notify the Chief of ES.
E. Identification of Personnel
Emergency services personnel should be readily identifiable by some means other than the usual passes
(e.g., vest, arm bands, jackets).
F. Start of Race
All emergency vehicles shall be staffed with engines running for the first lap of each race.
G. Suspension of Racing
Racing must be suspended if the personnel specified in 5.4.2. or the equipment specified in 5.4.3.A. - C.
are no longer on the premises or are unable to perform their assigned duties, or if communications with
emergency vehicles are interrupted.
H. Counter-Race Direction Towing
Specific approval of the Race Director or Chief Steward is required to tow a car in counter-race direction
at any time or under any condition during an event. Violating this rule may result in penalties as specified
in Section 7.
5.5.
FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
5.5.1. Chief of Flagging and Communications
The Flagging and Communications Chief establishes and administers the Flagging and Communications
organization; he recruits, trains, and assigns qualified individuals within the specialty. There may be separate Chiefs for Flagging and for Communications.
5.5.2. General Organization
The purpose of Flagging and Communications is to provide course control by:
A. Informing the drivers, through flags, lights, or other signals, of the conditions of the course, the
condition of their cars, or of any unusual conditions affecting the running of the event;
B. Establishing and operating a communications system which includes all corner stations and race
control, where all communications affecting the control of the event are conducted. Race control
maintains direct communications with the Race Director or Chief Steward. Racing must be suspended
if communications between race control and the corner stations or between race control and the
Race Director or Chief Steward is interrupted;
C. Informing the Race Director or Chief Steward and other officials, through the communication network,
of the condition of the course and the competing cars, and of any situation requiring decisions and/
or action by the officials;
D. Relaying information and instructions from the Race Director or Chief Steward to the emergency
vehicles and equipment around the course as well as to the race drivers and corner workers;
E. Acting to protect the lives and property of drivers, workers, or spectators in the event of an incident;
F. Maintaining a clear course;
G. Keeping the required log of all communications on the race network by a person located in the immediate vicinity of the Operating Steward.
5.5.3. Corner Stations
A.Number
The number, location, and staffing of corner stations must assure that the entire course is can be seen at
all times and that areas of the course not immediately visible to oncoming race cars are covered.
B.Location
Corner stations will be located according to the following criteria:
•the corner personnel have a clear view of the area to be covered
•the oncoming drivers have maximum visibility of the flags and corner personnel
•corner crew have maximum protection from out of control automobiles
The yellow flag must be displayed when a corner worker or other personnel move to a less protected or
unprotected area.
C.Personnel
Corner stations should be staffed with at least 4 people: a flagger, a communicator, a safety response,
GCR - 38
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
and a corner captain in charge of the station. If necessary, stations may be staffed with a minimum of
2 people.
D.Equipment
Along with communications hardware, each corner station will be equipped with sufficient flags and fire
extinguishers so that they may respond adequately to any situation.
5.6.REGISTRATION
The Chief Registrar establishes and administers the Registration organization and systems; he recruits,
trains, and assigns qualified individuals within the specialty.
The Chief Registrar accepts, certifies, and processes all entries and issues credentials for drivers, crew, and
Officials and posts all required signs/placards in the registration area.
Registration provides all entry information to Timing and Scoring in the format requested by T&S. Information from late entries must be given to T&S promptly. Registration assigns the car numbers for all cars
entered in the event. See section 9.3. Identification Markings.
Registration provides entry information to the Stewards as requested.
5.7.
SOUND CONTROL
5.7.1. Sound Control Chief
The Sound Control Chief shall be responsible for monitoring and reporting sound levels of all racing vehi­cles
at sound-controlled events in accordance with the GCR. Specifically, he shall:
A. Ensure that the sound monitoring equipment is located at an official certified site.
B. Ensure that readings shall be made in accordance with the GCR.
C Advise race control as soon as possible of any sound readings above the track limit.
D. Submit post-race reports to the Chairman of the SOM.
E. Monitor weather and ambient conditions throughout the day.
F. Perform field calibration of the equipment in accordance with the GCR.
G. Ensure that yearly certification of the equipment (meter, cables, microphone, and field calibrator) has
been performed by the manufacturer or a certified laboratory.
5.7.2. General Procedures and Requirements
Competitors carry sole responsibility to determine that their vehicles comply with Sound Control Regulations at each event.
Sound Control may be in effect for all events, as approved by the Division Executive Steward. If Sound
Control is in effect at an event, all cars will be monitored and readings will be posted for competitors’
information. A driver registering a single sound level reading over the maximum for the event shall not be
black flagged. If a driver is black flagged due to sound, the car shall not re-enter the course until corrective
steps are taken.
5.7.3.Standards
A sound level instrument (meter) that meets American National Standards Institute (ANSI) S1.4-1983 Class
2 or better shall be used. The primary maximum for SCCA Sound Control shall be a sound pressure level
of 103dB “A” frequency weighted (dBA) measured on the fast response setting at 50 feet (+/- 2 feet)
from the edge of the track pavement, and/or artificial markers indicating track edge. Other maximum levels
may be imposed at specific venues or events. These alternate levels shall be noted in the Supplemental
Regulations. All sound readings shall be truncated to the lower whole number. (Anything after the decimal
point is ignored.)
Proper location and use of all test instrumentation is essential to obtain valid measurements.
A. Acoustic calibration procedures should include extension cable influence.
B. Field calibration shall be done at least every 4 hours while in the operating mode.
C. The microphone shall be 3.5 feet (minimum) above the ground surface, 2.0 feet (minimum) above the
level of the roadway, no more than 6 feet above the level of the roadway. Whenever possible, it is
recommended (but not mandatory) that the microphone shall be located on the outside of the track
between the race car and the outside perimeter of the racing facility, aimed into infield areas.
D. Weather conditions should be recorded every hour when conditions are unstable, or otherwise every
2 hours.
5.8.START
5.8.1. Chief Starter
The Chief Starter directs and manages the officials in the specialty, ensuring that directions given to
competing drivers by flag, hand, and body signals are done so as prescribed by the GCR with respect to
starting, suspending, and ending a race.
GCR - 39
General
At least 20 percent of the Flagging and Communications personnel should have experience in fighting
actual or simulated vehicle fires.
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5.8.2.Responsibility
The Starter operates directly under, carries out the orders of, and is responsible solely to the Race Director
or Chief Steward.
5.8.3.Function
The Starter controls the competing drivers by conveying to them the orders of the Race Director or Chief
Steward.
5.8.4.Location
The Starter shall be stationed in a position that will provide maximum visibility to the competing drivers. The
Starter shall have immediate communication with the Race Director or Chief Steward.
5.8.5.Equipment
The Starter must be equipped with a complete set of flags required by the GCR.
5.9.
TECHNICAL AND SAFETY INSPECTION
5.9.1. Series Chief Tech Inspector and Chief Technical Inspector
The Series Chief Tech Inspector or the Chief Technical Inspector assures that cars comply with the GCR
and Supplemental Regulations. Specifically, he:
A. Approves cars that comply with all safety regulations.
B. Inspects cars at the request of the Race Director or the Chief Steward and recommends inspecting
cars to the Race Director or the Chief Steward.
C. Reports cars that do not comply with the GCR to the Race Director or the Chief Steward.
The Series Chief Tech Inspector or the Chief Technical Inspector approves every car before it competes,
according to procedures defined in Sections 5.9.2 and 9. A driver or entrant whose car is not approved
and who subsequently competes or who presents it for recheck without the corrections specified may be
penalized as provided in Section 7.
5.9.2. Inspecting Automobiles
A. Annual Inspection
A car must have full and complete Annual Technical Inspection by a tech inspector holding either a
Divisional, National or Senior license once a year (12 months). If the car passes the inspection, the tech
inspector enters the date of the safety harness expiration in the Vehicle Logbook; he then stamps, decals,
or inscribes approval; dates and signs the Vehicle Logbook. The driver’s safety equipment does not have
to be inspected at the same time the car is inspected, but it must be inspected by or at the driver’s first
race of each calendar year. An Annual Tech expiring on a race weekend is valid for the full weekend. (See
9.3. Driver’s Safety Equipment )
B. Minimum Event Safety Inspection/Logbook-Tech Sticker
Following the Annual Technical Inspection, minimum inspection for each event requires reviewing of the
current Vehicle Logbook and signing off the logbook page for the event. If it is in order, a Tech sticker
is issued. The Series Chief Tech Inspector or the Chief of Tech may delegate signing the logbook page
and issuing the Tech sticker to any worker holding a current Regional Tech license or above. The driver’s
safety equipment does not need to be reinspected.
All cars must display a Tech Sticker signifying successful completion of technical inspection to enter the
course. Technical inspection assists event officials in determining, in their judgment, eligibility to participate in a SCCA sanctioned event. The technical inspection does not ensure, certify, or warrant that the
vehicle or any part of it is safe or totally and ultimately compliant with all applicable rules nor does it in
any way change the fact that the driver, crew members, and vehicle’s owner are ultimately responsible
for the safety and operation of the vehicle and equipment. By conducting a technical inspection, SCCA
and each of its directors, officers, employees, and officials, make no representations, warranties, or
assurances that a technical inspection, including the review of any written information, will do any or all
of the following:
•Detect every or any problem with a vehicle or a driver’s personal equipment or clothing; or
•Detect every problem with rule compliance; or
•Prevent bodily injury, death, or personal monetary damage.
The participant agrees that he bears the ultimate respon­sibility at all times to ensure the safety of his
vehicle and equip­ment, and compliance with all SCCA rules, regulations, and agreements, including but
not limited to those contained in the GCR. In addition, in the case of technical violations, he acknowledges, understands, and agrees that he is responsible to fully know every component of his vehicle and
that even if a third party (for example, an engine builder) has caused his vehicle to be noncompliant, he
will still be responsible for and will be charged with any applicable violation and penalty.
C.Re-inspection
A car must be re-inspected if damage or deficiencies from the car’s previous event(s) are noted in the
Vehicle Logbook or if the car changes category.
GCR - 40
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
Inspection above the minimum level (see 5.9.2.B.) may be performed when:
•For vehicles as specified in Supplemental Regulations; or
Throughout the racing season, the Tech crew is encouraged to perform regular re-inspections through
walk around observation in the pits and paddock, or through special impounds by group or class with the
concurrence of the Race Director or the Chief Steward.
D. Alterations or Damage After Inspection
Cars which have been altered or damaged after they have been approved at event Tech Inspection are
subject to re-inspection and re-approval.
5.9.3.Impound
A. Post Race Impound
Post-race impound is mandatory at all U.S. Majors Tour races as defined in the event-specific supplemental regulations and at the Runoffs; it is recommended at all other events.
B. Impound Safety
There should be at least 1 nominal 10 pound dry chemical agent capacity, minimum UL 60 BC or ABC
rated, CO2 or equivalent Halon fire extinguisher present in the impound area.
C. Minimum Impound Inspection
Unless otherwise specified in the Supplemental Regulations, the first 3 finishers in each class shall be
immediately impounded for a minimum of 30 minutes after their race is completed. The Race Director or
the Chief Steward may direct that additional finishers in any class may likewise be impounded. It is the
driver’s responsibility to know his finishing position and present his car to impound immediately, without
going to the paddock. Failure to do so promptly will be reported to the Race Director or Chief Steward,
and may result in penalty.
For each impounded car, the weight and other items appropriate for the class may be inspected, as
agreed upon by the Race Director or Chief Steward and the Series Chief Tech inspector or Chief Technical
Inspector. The Race Director or Chief Steward may also order that a wheel or intake choke(s) or restrictors be removed during impound for inspection. These inspections are not subject to the fees outlined in
5.12.3.C.5. Additional inspections may be conducted through the protest procedures outlined in 8.3.3.
If there is any doubt about the weight, the car must be weighed in both directions. A car that is underweight in impound will be reported to the Race Director or Chief Steward, is subject to penalty, and the
weight will be noted on the next page of the Vehicle Logbook. The car must be weighed at the next event
and must meet the proper minimum weight before being allowed to qualify.
The Series Chief Tech Inspector or Chief Technical Inspector will report any questions or doubts about a
car’s compliance to the Race Director or Chief Steward.
5.9.4. Official Scales
A.The scales at the event are the official scales for the event. The Supplemental Regulations will
include the hours scales will be available for drivers to weigh their cars.
B. The following scale configurations are acceptable:
•platform scales,
•individual scales that weigh 1 axle (2 wheels) at a time, or
•4 individual scale pads that each weigh a single wheel.
If all 4 wheels cannot be weighed simultaneously, the driver must be weighed separately from the
car.
C.Certification
Scales must be certified, as follows:
1. On-site certification by a commercial scale service within one calendar year prior to the event,
OR
2. Use at the track of calibration weights, totaling 100 pounds up to 250 pounds total as recommended by the scale manufacturer, or minimum 250 pounds total if no recommendation is
provided by the scale manufacturer for individual wheel scales; minimum 750 pounds total for
platform scales. Where applicable, the calibration recommendation by the scale manufacturer
(e.g., a manual or letter from the manufacturer) must be available at all times during an event
where the scales are in use.
5.10. TIMING AND SCORING
5.10.1. Chief of Timing and Scoring
GCR - 41
General
•At the request of the Race Director or the Chief Steward.
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
The Chief of Timing and Scoring (Chief of T&S) is responsible for accurately timing and scoring the event,
specifically:
A. Recruiting, training, assigning, and supervising qualified personnel to time and score the event.
B. Providing the Race Director or the Chief Steward and the SOM any times and results they request.
C. Maintaining records of official times and lap charts for all competing cars.
D. Compiling and publishing the Official Results of all competitions. By the end of the weekend’s
on-track activities, results must be available for all competitors and officials. These may be Provisional Results, particularly if there are pending pro-tests or actions. (See also 5.10.4.) Results will
be submitted to the Race Chairman, the SOM, the organizers, the U.S. Majors Tour and Divisional
Pointskeeper(s), and the SCCA. Uploading each session to MyLaps is strongly encouraged. Complete
Official Results for a U.S. Majors Tour race must be submitted within 2 days of the end of the event;
results for a Regional race must be submitted within 5 days of the event. Every effort should be made
to have Official Results ready to distribute by the end of the weekend.
E. At spectator events, working closely with the Press Officers, press, and other media, as well as with
circuit, radio, and/or television announcers, providing qualifying information, results, and any other
data requested, as quickly as possible.
F. Titles are used in this section in a functional sense. The Chief of T&S may delegate any task to any
member of the Timing and Scoring staff as appropriate.
G. Live timing is required for all U.S. Majors Tour events. Set-up assistance is available through the U.S.
Majors Series Administrator.
5.10.2. Approved Systems
Transponder/transmitter systems used in SCCA Club Racing shall be manufactured by AMB or be compatible with AMB systems. Those other transponder/transmitter systems which are currently in use may
continue to be used, but shall not be the primary systems for any US Majors Tour race.
5.10.3. Timing and Scoring Systems
A. The use of two Timing and Scoring systems is required for SCCA U.S. Majors Tour races and is
recommended for Regional races and Drivers’ Schools.
B.Any Timing and Scoring system used for a U.S. Majors Tour or Regional race should enable the T&S
staff to produce the following information: a set of grids for each race group, a set of time cards for
each car from qualifying and the race, continuity tapes, independently prepared lap charts, provisional results, and final results. For Drivers’ Schools, the T&S system should enable the T&S staff to
produce the time on track for each session and comprehensive time for all sessions for each student,
if requested by the Chief Instructor.
C. Should there be insufficient staff to run two separate systems as described, the Chief of T&S should
notify the Race Director or Chief Steward. The Race Director or Chief Steward may decide to waive
the two-system requirement, allowing the Chief of T&S to use the staff in the most productive
manner possible. In this case, the primary function during qualifying is to establish grid positions.
During a race, the emphasis should be on scoring the race and recording any timing-related race information that is possible with the available staff. Timing of class leaders during races is recommended
to provide the information described in Section 5.10.4.B.3. No protests concerning the Timing and
Scoring requirements will be accepted.
5.10.4.Results
A. Provisional Results
A lap chart or a printout showing the order of finish and number of laps completed for each car shall be
posted and titled as Provisional Results. The time of posting will be on the Provisional Results with the
Chief of T&S’s initials or signature, and a public address announcement will be made. When there is a
pending action for a particular race group, Provisional Results for that group may be distributed to officials and competitors in lieu of Official Results, with a notation printed stating the reason (i.e., pending
outcome of action involving X class).
B. Official Results
1. At the expiration of the protest period (30 minutes or the time stated in the Supplemental Regulations), Provisional Results may be considered final if Tech has cleared impound and the Race
Director or Chief Steward and/or SOM have no pending actions. The Final Results should be
titled as Final or Official Results and shall include the following types of information: description
of event, timing and scoring information, and driver information.
2. Official Results will be produced and distributed for a group with pending actions when the
Race Director or Chief Steward or Chairman SOM notifies the Chief of T&S that all actions and
appeals are complete. The Chief Steward or Chairman SOM will inform the T&S Chief of any
penalties when the group is declared final. The T&S Chief will distribute Final Results to the Race
Chairman, the race organizers, the Chairman SOM, the SCCA, and the appropriate Pointskeeper.
GCR - 42
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
A starter is defined in Section 6.10.2. A DNS is defined as any car that turned a wheel on the
track during practice or qualifying, but did not start the race. See 6.10.2.
4. The driver information shall include: driver’s full name, hometown, state, region of record,
membership number, car number, car make and model, and sponsor information.
5. Optional information on the Final Results might include: the overall time and average speed for
each class winner, pit stop information, and accident reports. This information may be available
on a separate document, such as an Entry List.
6. When a car is given a lap, time, or finishing position penalty, the reason should be shown on the
Final Results, including the GCR reference.
7. When a car is disqualified, or withdrawn, the results should list the car at the bottom of the
finishing order, showing the true finishing order as affected by the disqualification, or withdrawal.
The results should show the final overall and class positions, as adjusted, for all finishers. The
reason for the disqualification should be shown on the Official Results, including the GCR reference.
8. A driver not competing for event/series awards will be listed on the final results in the correct
finishing position with a notation citing 3.6.4. No points will be assigned, if any would have been
earned. An earned lap record remains intact.
5.10.5.Media
It is strongly recommended that at spectator events the Chief Timer and Scorer meet with the Course and
Regional Press Officers in order to establish close cooperation with the announcer and all media, and to
arrange for fast transmission of unofficial and official Timing and Scoring information to these people.
It is always preferable that the Circuit announcer and any radio and television announcers receive information relating to Timing and Scoring from members of the Official Timing and Scoring personnel, via the
Circuit or Regional Press Officer.
5.11. ADDITIONAL OFFICIALS
5.11.1. Driver Observer
A Driver Observer is an optional official who occupies a post along the course assigned by the Race Director
or Chief Steward, or by the Chief Observer, if there is one. Driver Observers are controlled by the Race
Director or Chief Steward and they report all incidents which occur in their assigned section of the course
to the Chief Steward.
5.11.2. Press Officer
A Press Officer is an optional official who advises other Officials on press information and who acts as
liaison with the promoter’s press director, if any. Chief Officials and SOM cooperate with the Press Officer
in carrying out his responsibility to advise the press on matters of public interest.
5.11.3. Judges
Judges are optional officials who may perform one or more of following duties:
A.Starting Judges report to the Race Director or Chief Steward any false starts immediately after they
occur. Finishing Judges declare the order in which cars cross the finish line. Judges of the Fact
decide whether a car has touched or passed a given line or rule on other facts of the same type
provided in the Supplemental Regulations.
B. A Judge’s determination may not be protested.
C. A Judge may correct his determination with the approval of the SOM.
5.11.4. Compliance
A. Compliance Staff- Members of the compliance staff are assigned by the head of Club Racing and
designated subject matter experts for particular classes or categories. As part of the technical inspection team, their sole responsibility is to advise the Chief Technical Inspector of cars not in compliance
with the GCR and/or the Supplemental Regulations for the event.
B. Class Compliance Chief (CCC) - A member of the compliance staff may be specifically designated
by the head of Club Racing as the CCC for a class. The CCC will work under the guidance of the
Race Director or Chief Steward and with the event technical staff to provide consistent compliance
checking across all events for the designated class. The CCC will report any findings of vehicles not
complying with the GCR to the Race Director or Chief Steward for potential Chief Steward’s Action
(CSA) or Request for Action (RFA). Findings of the CCC regarding compliance items specific to that
class are non-protestable. Decisions made by and/or penalties assessed by the Race Director, Chief
Steward or Stewards of the Meeting (SOM) may be subject to protest or appeal.
GCR - 43
General
3. The timing and scoring information shall include: total number of entries, DNS’s, the overall and
class finishing positions for all starters, the number of laps completed for all starters, the overall
time of the race, the winner’s margin of victory, the winner’s average speed, the fastest lap time
for all starters and any new course records.
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
5.11.5. Race Data Technicians
Data Technicians are optional Officials whose duties include:
A. Being responsible for placing, operating and removing SCCA supplied data boxes on cars at all Club
races.
B. Analysis of data retrieved from all sources, including dyno runs, at-race data boxes and data provided
by individual racers.
C. Prepare reports to the applicable Advisory Committees, and to the CRB, with recommendations for
competition adjustments.
5.12.STEWARDS
5.12.1. Stewards of the Meeting (SOM)
The SOM are responsible only to SCCA, and they enforce compliance with the GCR and Supplemental
Regulations. They act primarily in a judicial capacity, and therefore shall not incur any responsibility for the
organization or execution of an event.
A. Powers of the SOM
1. Settle any dispute within the administrative functions, or protest arising from an event, subject
to the rights of appeal provided by the GCR.
2. Hear and act on Requests for Action from the Race Director or Chief Steward. (See Section
8.1.2.)
3. Impose any penalty permitted by the GCR and Supplemental Regulations. (See Section 7.)
4. Appoint substitutes to replace any Stewards or Officials not able to perform their duties. This
power shall be used by the remaining Steward or Stewards to ensure that there are always at
least 2 SOM.
5. Modify the Supplemental Regulations. (See 3.4.2.)
6. Alter the schedule.
7. Modify the position of the starting or finishing lines where necessary to ensure the safety of
drivers and spectators.
8. Amend the results of a competition:
a. Based on a correction or error by the Chief of T&S.
b. To take into account a time, distance, or lap penalty against a competitor.
c. To change the sequence of finishing positions in case a competitor is disqualified.
9. Postpone a competition for reasons of safety or forces beyond their control.
B. Chairman of the SOM
One of the SOM shall be appointed Chairman of the SOM for the event. He may not be a member of the
organizing Region at U.S. Majors Tour events, and should not be for Regionals and/or Drivers’ Schools.
1. Observer’s Reports
As soon as practical after the conclusion of an event (not later than 10 days), the Chairman of the
SOM shall forward to the Club Racing Department an Observer’s Report that includes:
a. Details of all protests,
b. Actions taken,
c. Penalties imposed (including reprimands and suspensions to be noted in driver’s file),
d. Notice(s) of intention to appeal and appeals, including appeal fee(s),
e. Fine(s) collected,
f. Full details of any incidents,
g.Official results of all competitions,
h. General comments and recommendations of the SOM on the organization and conduct of
the event.
2. Notice of Probation
The name(s) of anyone placed on probation must be faxed or emailed to the Club Racing Department
on Monday following the event. Required information includes the name, member number, event
date/location, and the name of the Chairman SOM. The confiscated license(s) and tear-off coupon(s)
from the Probation Letter(s) must be sent with the Observer’s Report.
GCR - 44
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
The name(s) of anyone whose competition privileges were suspended must be faxed or emailed
to the Club Racing Department on Monday following the event. Required information includes the
name, member number, event date/location, and the name of the Chairman SOM. The appropriate
paperwork and suspended license must be sent with the Observer’s Report.
5.12.2 U.S. Majors Tour Race Director
In addition to the Chief Steward’s responsibilities and duties detailed in 5.12.3, the US Majors Tour Race
Director has the power to change the Schedule and/or Race Groups, in agreement with the organizing
Region, to correct any typographical or clerical errors or omissions (see 3.1.1.D.2.c and 3.1.1.D.2.d), or
place a driver on probation per 7.2.G. For all other changes to the Supplemental Regulations, the Race
Director must file a Request for Action with the SOM.
5.12.3. Chief Steward
The Chief Steward is the executive responsible for the general conduct of the event under the GCR and the
Supplemental Regulations. He has the powers and the duties set out in this Section, and he may delegate
any duties to Assistant Chiefs. See Appendix D, Duties, Authorities, and Responsibilities of the Chief
Steward, for specific powers of the Chief Steward.
A. Execution of the Event
The Chief Steward shall:
1. Execute the program of competitions and other activities safely by controlling drivers, their cars,
the Officials, and workers from the commencement of activities until the time for protests from
the last competition has expired.
2. Determine whether Officials are at their posts and report any absences to the SOM.
3. Ensure that all Officials and workers are provided with necessary information.
4. Collect all reports and other official information to determine the results.
5. Provide any information required to enable the Chairman SOM to prepare the Observer’s Report.
6. Authorize a change of driver or car.
7. Forward to the SOM any Chief Steward proposed modifications the schedule of competitions for
approval.
8. Prevent an ineligible driver from competing.
B. Maintenance of Order
The Chief Steward:
1. Shall keep order in conjunction with public safety authorities who are policing the event.
2. May exclude from the event any entrant, driver, crew, official, worker, or SCCA member who is
guilty of misbehavior.
3. May exclude from participating any worker or official who is ineligible for the position to which
he is assigned or who the Chief Steward determines is incapable of carrying out his duties.
4. May order any person who refuses to obey the order of any responsible Official or of a public
safety officer removed from the premises.
5. May prohibit any driver or car considered dangerous from competing.
6. Shall convey a report to the SOM of entrant or driver misbehavior. This may be accompanied by
a Request for Action. (See 8.1.2.)
7. Shall receive protests from entrants, drivers, or officials and immediately transmits them to the
SOM.
C. Powers of the Chief Steward
The Chief Steward may:
1. Disqualify a driver or an ineligible car.
2.Remove technical inspection stickers.
3.Disallow qualifying times.
4. Direct cars to be impounded at any time during the event.
5. At his discretion and without necessarily receiving a request to do so, order (or request the
SOM order) disassembly and inspection of any entered car to determine whether it complies
with the GCR. If the car is found to be compliant, the race organizers stand the expense of
the disassembly, inspection, and reassembly. If it is not compliant, the entrant shall bear the
GCR - 45
General
3. Notice of Suspension
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
expense, in addition to whatever penalties the Chief Steward may assess or the SOM may direct
after receiving the Chief Steward’s report. A representative of the race organizers authorized
to approve financial expenditures must formally approve the bond established for disassembly,
inspection, and reassembly before disassembly begins. If the process is the result of a Chief
Steward’s Action, the Chief Steward is directly responsible for monitoring all facets of the procedure until the time when the impounded parts are either retained by SCCA or returned to the
competitor, in the same way the Chairman SOM does for a protest or RFA.
6. Convey report(s) of any breach of the GCR or Supplemental Regulations to the SOM. This report
may be accompanied by a Request for Action. (See 8.1.2.)
7. Impose a fine of up to $100.
8. Prevent an ineligible car from competing.
9.Reprimand.
10.Impose time, lap, event points, or position penalty.
11.Impose up to a three race weekend probation.
D. Additional Powers of the Chief Steward
See Appendix D. for additional/specific powers of the Chief Steward.
5.12.4. Assistant Chief Steward – Safety
The Assistant Chief Steward – Safety is responsible to the Race Director or Chief Steward for the following:
A. Investigate accidents and forward the originals of all reports, including original releases, to the Risk
Management Department of SCCA.
B. The same day, notify Risk Management via telephone of any accident which involves serious injury
to a participant or any injury to a spectator.
C. Mail copies of the material sent to the Risk Management Department to the Divisional Safety Administrator.
D. During the event, report to the Race Director or Chief Steward any hazards requiring further investigation or action.
E. Perform the duties delegated by the Race Director or Chief Steward.
F. Supervise Emergency Services personnel and equipment in conjunction with the Race Chairman (preevent) and the Chief of ES (during the event).
GCR - 46
5. Officials, Operating Procedures, Equipment
General
NOTES:
GCR - 47
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6.
RACING RULES AND PROCEDURES
6.1.FLAGS
Flags convey the commands or information indicated below. They must be obeyed immediately and without
question. The content of this section cannot be amended by any event Supplemental Regulations.
6.1.1. Meaning of Each Flag
A. GREEN FLAG (Solid Green)
When displayed, the green flag indicates that the course is clear, and that racing is underway. The green
flag is ordinarily shown only by the Starter.
B. YELLOW FLAG (Solid Yellow)
STANDING YELLOW – Take care, Danger, Slow Down, NO PASSING FROM THE FLAG until past the
emergency area.
WAVED – Great Danger, Slow Down, be prepared to stop – NO PASSING FROM THE FLAG until past
the emergency area.
DOUBLE YELLOW, DISPLAYED AT ALL STATIONS – Indicates the entire course is under yellow (full
course yellow). All stations will display double yellow flags for all pace and safety car laps. SLOW DOWN,
NO PASSING. However, cars may carefully pass emergency vehicles and other cars that are disabled or
off pace (see 6.6.2.).
NOTE: A driver may encounter several flags before reaching the emergency area. The requirements are
still the same: SLOW DOWN, NO PASSING.
C. BLUE FLAG (Blue with Diagonal Yellow Stripe)
Another competitor is following very closely or is trying to overtake. This flag may be displayed standing
or waving, depending upon the speed differential.
D. SURFACE CONDITION (Yellow with Vertical Red Stripes)
Take care. A slippery condition exists, or debris is present on the racing surface. This flag is displayed
standing.
E. WHITE FLAG (Solid White)
STANDING WHITE - Caution and take care for a slow moving race car, ambulance or other emergency
vehicle on the racing surface. The standing flag is displayed for 2 flag stations prior to the vehicle in
question. In addition, a standing white flag will be displayed during the first lap of each race group’s
first session of the day unless another flag is already on display to indicate the location of the flagging
stations.
WAVED - A waving white flag if displayed by the Starter shall indicate the start of the last lap of the race.
F. BLACK FLAG (Solid Black)
CLOSED BLACK FLAG (Furled) – Pointed or shaken at an individual car from the Starter’s stand (optionally, accompanied by a number board indicating the car number): WARNING for driving in an unsafe and/
or improper manner. Continued unsafe and/or improper driving will result in an OPEN BLACK FLAG.
OPEN BLACK – Displayed from the Starter’s stand with a number board indicating the car number:
Proceed directly to the pits and the location designated by the Race Director or Chief Steward or event
Supplemental Regulations for consultation with Officials. DO NOT TAKE ANOTHER LAP.
NOTE: This flag and number board may also be displayed at station(s) elsewhere on the course.
OPEN BLACK, DISPLAYED AT ALL STATIONS – The session has been stopped; all cars must stop racing,
and proceed directly and immediately to the pits, exercising extreme caution. This flag will be displayed
with an ‘ALL’ sign at the Starter’s stand and the sign may also be shown at station(s) elsewhere on the
course.
NOTE: THE BLACK FLAG CAN ONLY BE DISPLAYED BY ORDER OF THE RACE DIRECTOR OR CHIEF
STEWARD AS RELAYED THROUGH RACE CONTROL.
G. MECHANICAL BLACK FLAG (Black with Orange Ball)
Displayed from the Starter’s stand with a number board indicating the car number. There is a mechanical
problem with the car. Proceed directly to your pit or the location designated by the Race Director or Chief
Steward or event Supplemental Regulations. DO NOT TAKE ANOTHER LAP.
NOTE: This flag and number board may also be displayed at station(s) elsewhere on the course.
H. CHECKERED FLAG (Black and White Checks)
Displayed at Finish to indicate that the session is finished. Continue cautiously to the pits.
GCR - 48
I. RED FLAG (Solid Red)
Displayed at each station and on the Starter’s stand – EXTREME DANGER – THE SESSION HAS BEEN
STOPPED. Come to an immediate, controlled stop at the side of the race track (preferably before and
within sight of a staffed station or where specified in the event Supplemental Regulations). When released
by an official, proceed cautiously to the pits. Once a red flag has been displayed, it will not be withdrawn
until all cars have come to a stop.
NOTE: THE RED FLAG CAN ONLY BE DISPLAYED BY ORDER OF THE RACE DIRECTOR OR CHIEF
STEWARD AS RELAYED THROUGH RACE CONTROL.
6.1.2. Lights Instead of Flags
Supplemental Regulations will state where on the course and for what purpose lights, if any, will be used.
6.2.
RULES OF THE PADDOCK
6.2.1. Paddock Area Defined
The area where a car parks when not participating in its sessions is the Paddock. Event Supplemental
Regulations may delineate the Paddock location and assignment of equitable amounts of space to each
competitor.
6.2.2. Retiring to the Paddock
A car that retires to the paddock during its qualifying session, and then returns to the track automatically
forfeits qualifying times earned before retiring. A car that retires to the paddock from the pits or the track
during its race may not return to the track unless the Supplemental Regulations or the Race Director or
Chief Steward specify.
6.3.
RULES OF THE PITS
6.3.1. Pit Area Defined
The area that is part of or connects with the access roads leading to and from the racing surface is the hot
pit lane, which is where competition vehicles park when not on course during their sessions. There must be
a protective barrier between the hot pit lane and the area where support equipment and crews are located.
6.3.2. Required Equipment
There must be fire extinguishers with a nominal 10 pound dry chemical agent capacity and a minimum UL
60 BC or ABC rating placed at 50 foot intervals along the pit wall. If there will be refueling in the pits during
the race, each team must provide 1, minimum 10 pound /60 BC or ABC rated fire extinguisher for each car.
6.3.3.Fueling
Fueling is not permitted in the pits unless authorized by the Supplemental Regulations or the Race Director
or Chief Steward.
6.3.4. Authorized Personnel in the Pits
Crew members in the hot pits must be event credentialed SCCA licensed members.
6.3.5. Number of Crew Members in the Hot Pit Lane
Unless the Supplemental Regulations or the Race Director or Chief Steward provide otherwise, no more
than 4 crew plus the driver or drivers may attend to any car in the hot pit lane.
6.3.6.Control
Pit crews are under the control of the Pit Marshal at all times.
6.3.7. Pit Barrier
Crew may only cross the pit barrier when their car is in the hot pit, except to signal the driver, when no
more than 2 crew may cross the barrier.
6.3.8. Overshooting the Pit
If a car overshoots its pit location, the car must either be pushed back into the pit location by hand, or else
continue for another lap. No car may be pushed back to the pit location if doing so would create an undue
hazard.
6.3.9. Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
All compressed air bottles/gas cylinders with a pressure in excess of 200 psi must have a protective structure around their gauges and valves when in the pit area.
6.4.
THE GRID
note: In section 6.4, the field is defined as all segments.
6.4.1General
A. 1 car in a class shall constitute a class. A car may not compete in more than one race class in the
same race group.
B. Number of Cars allowed on Course
A maximum of 25 cars per mile may be on the course or started simultaneously in any type of
session.
The Division’s Executive Steward may increase or decrease the 25 car limitation for any or all race
GCR - 49
General
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
groups.
6.4.2 Establishing the Race Grid
A. A starting position is qualified by a driver/car combination.
B. The Chief Timer certifies official qualifying times to determine race grid positions. Cars are positioned
on the race grid in order of their official qualifying times without regard to engine displacement or
class, with the fastest cars at the head of the grid. Any other method of determining starting positions must be described in the Supplemental Regulations and approved by SCCA.
C. Qualifying time ties are broken by comparing the second fastest times, and then the third, if needed,
and so on until a difference is found.
D. The fastest qualifier may select the inside front row position (in the direction of the first turn) or
the outside. If he does not choose, the pole position is presumed to be the inside. If he selects the
outside position, the second qualifier is assigned the inside, the third outside, the fourth inside, and
so on throughout the entire grid.
E. Each driver/car combination must qualify within 120% of the qualifying time of the fastest qualifier in
his class to be allowed to start his race. The Race Director or Chief Steward may waive this requirement and may allow non-qualifiers to grid behind qualifiers.
F. Cars that are not in position on the grid prior to the 1 minute signal relinquish their starting positions.
They will be held behind other cars, and must start from the back of the field.
6.4.3. Qualifying for Oversubscribed Classes
When the number of cars entered into a single class race group exceeds the maximum number of cars per
mile, the following qualifying procedures apply:
A. The class is split into 2 qualifying groups.
B. The grid is determined according to 6.4.2.
C. Alternatively, if the Race Director or Chief Steward determines that track conditions are significantly
different for the 2 groups, he may recommend the parallel column procedure in which one half of the
race grid is taken from each session, and gridded in columns by group, by time. The fastest car is
assigned the inside position on the front row and he is followed in that column by the cars from his
session in qualifying time order. The SOM must approve this alternate procedure.
6.4.4. Starting the Engine on the Grid
In all SCCA competitions, engines shall be started by the driver sitting in the normal driving position, except
F500, using an on-board or supplementary power supply. Carburetor or fuel injection systems may be
manipulated and/or primed in the starting process. Push starts are permitted only as specifically authorized
as specified in 6.4.5.
6.4.5. Push Starts on the Grid
A car that cannot start on the grid may be push started under the supervision of the Grid Marshal, provided
it is back in position prior to the 1 minute signal. Cars push started after the 1 minute signal, or not in position at the 1 minute signal relinquish their grid positions. They will be held behind other cars, and must start
from the back of the field.
6.4.6.Fueling
Fueling is not permitted on the grid unless authorized by the Supplemental Regulations or the Race Director
or Chief Steward as specified in 6.3.3.
6.4.7. Air Bottles/Gas Cylinders
All compressed air bottles/gas cylinders with a pressure in excess of 200 psi must have a protective structure around their gauges and valves when in the grid area as specified in 6.3.9.
6.5.
RACES STARTS
note: In section 6.5, the field is defined as all segments.
6.5.1. The Grid
A.The Race Director or Chief Steward instructs the 5 minute and 1 minute warnings to be given to
the grid, indicating the time remaining before the start of the pace lap. These signals must be plainly
audible and/or visible.
B. Engines should be started at or before the 1 minute signal.
C. At or before the expiration of the 1 minute warning, the cars will be released to begin the pace lap.
D. See 6.4.2. for additional requirements.
6.5.2. The Pace Lap
A. One pace lap precedes all races, unless the Race Director or Chief Steward authorizes an additional
unscored pace lap.
B. The pace lap may begin at a brisk pace, but must be sufficiently slowed before the start line to allow
GCR - 50
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
1. If a pace car is used, it will be positioned at the head of the pack, with emergency lights flashing.
Drivers may not pass the pace car until it turns off its emergency lights and pulls off the track,
and the pole car will maintain the speed of the pace car before it pulled off track until the green
flag. The front row drivers must be advised not to pass the pace car.
2. If a pace car is not used, the pole car will pace the field complying with directions from the Race
Director or Chief Steward or his designee. The pole car will maintain a constant speed from the
grouping until the green flag and shall not modify his speed approaching the flag stand.
C. A car may not improve its position in the field after the cars are released from the grid for the pace
lap.
1. A car that improves its position relative to the field during the pace lap by moving forward,
moving out of line more than half a car width, or passing before the green flag is displayed may
be penalized for a false start. If a false start has occurred, and the race has been started, the
driver(s) may be black-flagged and held in the pits or at the start line for up to 1 minute, and
other penalties may also be imposed, as specified in Section 7.
2. A car that fails to start with the pace lap or falls out of position during a pace lap relinquishes its
grid position and may rejoin only at the back of the field.
3. A car that is disabled and cannot keep the pace should not hold up the field. The driver must
signal that his car is disabled by raising an arm, pulling to the side of the course, and staying well
off the racing line. Other cars may safely pass the signaling vehicle. The driver of a disabled car
should seek assistance at the nearest corner station or pit at the first opportunity.
4. When a car drops out of the pace lap(s), everyone in the column behind that car must close up
behind the car in front; moving up under this circumstance is not considered improving position
or passing under yellow.
6.5.3. The SCCA Standard Rolling Start
A. The SCCA standard rolling start will be used at all SCCA races unless an alternate procedure has
been approved by the Division’s Executive Steward and is included in the event Supplemental Regulations.
B. The Starter shall be safely located where the majority of the drivers in the field can clearly see him
as they approach his position. He shall remain motionless, with the green flag hidden, and no other
flags visible.
C. The Starter will start the race by suddenly and continuously waving the green flag until all cars have
passed the start line if the field is:
1. At a constant low speed;
2. Well bunched; and
3. Close enough to the Starter that the majority of the drivers can see the flag.
D. Racing begins and passing may occur throughout the field when the green flag is displayed.
6.5.4. An Aborted Start
A. The Starter will abort the start by displaying no flag and shaking his head in the negative if the field
is not in good order, or if some drivers have improved their positions by moving out of line more
than half a car width or by passing prior to the waving of the green flag. This advises the drivers to
proceed on another pace lap. Drivers raise one hand to confirm that the start is aborted.
B. If the race is not started, another pace lap will be run. Depending on conditions, the pace car may
overtake the field and resume its function. The front row drivers must be advised that the pace car
may return to its position for the additional pace lap if there is no start.
C. Any additional pace lap(s) following aborted start(s) are under double standing yellow flags at all
stations, and are scored as race laps. Timing starts when the pole car crosses the timing control line,
unless otherwise specified by the event Supplemental Regulations.
6.5.5. Split Starts
A. Split starts are recommended when there is a large differential in speed or cornering ability between
the classes or categories in a single race group. The procedure for a split start must be explained in
the Supplemental Regulations or at a Drivers’ Meeting.
B.The Race Director or Chief Steward will determine the class(es) in each segment. Segments will
contain entire classes of cars, including those cars with no qualifying time. The Race Director or
Chief Steward will determine which segment will start first. The cars assigned to each segment will
GCR - 51
General
orderly grouping of the field. The actual speed immediately prior to the start is dictated by the types
of cars, size of the field, and course layout. However, the standard SCCA start is a rolling start and
not a flying start. The same official should brief the front row drivers before each race, preferably the
Starter, under the direction of the Race Director or Chief Steward.
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
be gridded by qualifying time, regardless of class.
C. Each segment should be led by a pace car, if possible. A following segment should have the previous
segment in sight on the longest straight.
D. Split Starts
1. Provided each segment is properly formed, each will receive a separate green flag.
2. Drivers in each segment shall not improve their position until their respective green flag is
displayed. Jump starts may be penalized.
3. If the first segment receives a green flag, the race is considered to have begun for the subsequent segment(s) when they cross the control line, regardless of the flags displayed by the
starter.
4. The flags displayed by the starter have their normal meanings.
5. If the first segment receives a green flag, but on track safety conditions require an immediate full
course yellow, cars in subsequent segments should fall into single file grid order and make every
effort to safely catch the back of the first segment.
6. A driver in one segment who is unable to leave the grid when directed but is able to get
underway before the first car in the next segment is released, may join the back of his segment
at the direction of the Grid official. Otherwise, he relinquishes his grid position and will be held
until the end of the last segment.
E. A starting judge should be appointed for a split start.
6.5.6. Late Starters
After the field has left the grid, the Race Director or Chief Steward may release cars that were not in position at the 1 minute warning to join the back of the pack either from the grid at the beginning of the pace
lap or from the pit exit after the race has been started.
6.6.
PACE AND SAFETY CAR
6.6.1. Operation and Control
Pace car procedures are located in 6.5.2.B.1.
The Race Director or Chief Steward is responsible for the control and safe operation of the pace/safety
car(s), and he must approve the communicator/observer and the driver, who must either hold or have held
an SCCA Full Competition License, or have other qualifying experience.
6.6.2. Full Course Yellow Procedures
The Race Director or Chief Steward may use a safety car as necessary to control the field and to assure
expeditious restarts.
A safety car and/or the lead car will be used to control the field and to assure expeditious restarts. All
vehicles must pass any on track incident(s) well under control.
A. Safety Car
1. A safety car will enter the course only under double yellow flags.
2. When dispatched, the safety car, with emergency lights flashing, will gather the field under
steady and reduced speeds that are appropriate to track conditions.
3. If the safety car is not dispatched in front of the leader, an official in the safety car will wave
cars by until the leader is behind it.
4. Prior to a restart, the safety car will maintain the established pace, extinguish the lights, and exit
the course.
B. Lead Car
1. If there is a safety car, the lead car will control the field, as follows:
i.
Smoothly and orderly slow the field prior to the safety car entering the track.
ii. Keep pace with the safety car, and not balk the field.
iii. Maintain the speed of the safety car coming down to a restart.
2. If there is no safety car, the lead car will control the field, as follows:
i
Slow the field to permit the entire field to bunch up single file behind him.
ii
Maintain a consistent pace that is appropriate to the track conditions.
iii Maintain a steady pace coming down to a restart.
3. The Field
GCR - 52
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
All drivers must make every effort to safely catch the field as soon as possible to form a
single and evenly-spaced line behind the safety car or leader.
ii. Race cars may not pass the safety car unless waved around by that official. Any car passing
the safety car without being directed may be black-flagged into the pits, and other penalties
may be imposed, as specified in Section 7.
iii Drivers must maintain the safety car’s pace and not improve their positions or begin racing
until the green flag has been displayed to restart the race.
iv. A driver of a disabled car or a car that cannot maintain the pace should not hold up the field.
He must signal that his car is disabled by raising an arm, pulling to the side of the course,
and staying well off the racing line. Other drivers may safely pass the signaling vehicle. A
driver of a disabled car should seek assistance at the nearest corner station, or pit at the first
opportunity.
6.7.
STOPPING A SESSION
6.7.1.Methods
When it is necessary to stop a session, the Race Director or Chief Steward may do any of the following:
A. Order a black flag with an “ALL” sign at Start (this sign may also be shown at additional stations
elsewhere on the course) and a black flag at all other flag stations around the course.
B. Order a red flag at Start and all other flag stations. Further instructions will be conveyed by officials.
C. Order the checkered flag to be displayed to the lead car if at least 50 percent of its scheduled time
or distance has been completed.
6.7.2. Assistance During Race Session Stoppage
Replenishing or assisting cars is allowed after a practice or qualifying session is stopped and before it is
restarted, but not after a race session is stopped and before it is restarted.
6.8.
RESTARTING A RACE
If a race is stopped, the Race Director or Chief Steward may:
A. Restart in the original starting order. (See 6.7.2.)
B. Restart the cars single file in the physical order they crossed the control line on the last completely
scored lap.
For all restarts, the lap count reverts to the end of the last completely scored lap (zero if no laps have been
completely scored). When a race is restarted, each pace lap counts as a race lap. If the clock has been
stopped in a timed session, it shall be restarted when the field is dispatched. Any method of restarting the
engine is permitted.
6.9.
RAIN RACING
If a race is started in the dry, and it starts to rain on all or part of the course, the Race Director or Chief
Steward may use one of the following procedures:
A. If the race has covered half or more of the scheduled distance or time, it may be finished with the
checkered flag.
B. If the race has not reached half distance or time, the black flag “ALL” procedure shall be used to bring
all cars into the pits, and 15 minutes will be allowed to install rain tires, at the driver’s discretion. The
cars will restart single file in the physical order of the cars on the last completely scored lap.
6.10. TIMING LINE; STARTERS, AWARDING OF POINTS, AND WINNERS
6.10.1. Starting Line for Timing and Scoring
Unless otherwise defined in the Supplemental Regulations, the start line is the control line where timing
begins when crossed by a car.
6.10.2. Race Starter
One of the following conditions must be met for a car to be considered a race starter:
A. The car receives a green flag at the start of the race.
B. If the start is aborted, the car crosses the control line.
C. The car is anywhere on the course when the green is displayed.
D. The car completes the pace lap for the first start.
E. The car enters the race any time after the start before the checkered flag is displayed.
6.10.3. Awarding of Points
A. A car that completes half the laps of the overall race winner for either a numbered lap event or a
timed event shall be awarded earned points. Enduro events should define the awarding of points
in the enduro supplemental regulations. If the race is an uneven number of laps, divide the overall
winner’s laps in half and round down to the nearest whole integer. A car has 5 minutes after the
GCR - 53
General
i.
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
checkered flag to complete its current lap.
B. A car may complete a lap by being driven across the control line in the pit lane only using on-board
power (such as the starter motor), but it may not be pushed across the line by its crew or any officials.
6.10.4. Race Winner
The race winner is the car that completes the race distance in the least time, or the greatest distance in the
timed length of the competition. If the race is shortened, the leader of the last completely scored lap is the
winner, provided the race is completed.
A. Checkered Flag
The checkered flag is displayed at the finish line first to the winner as he completes the race distance or
after he completes the prescribed time, and then to the other finishers as they cross the finish line.
B. Checker to Wrong Car
If the checkered flag is displayed first to the wrong car, it shall be continuously waved until seen by the
entire field. The race finishing order will be determined by the last completely scored lap.
C. Late Checker
If the checkered flag is not displayed at the scheduled end of the race and the race is one or more laps
longer than scheduled, the race is scored as if it had ended at the scheduled length. As soon as the
Starter is aware that the checkered flag has not been displayed at the scheduled end of the race, he may
show the checkered flag immediately, if both Timing and Scoring and the Operating Steward concur.
D. Winning Car Not Running in Timed Race
If the winning car is not running at the expiration of the timed length, the checkered flag will be displayed
to the highest placing car still running. The winner in a timed race is not required to take the checkered
flag.
E. Dead Heats
Competitors in a dead heat share the prizes allotted to their finishing positions.
6.10.5 Shortened Races
A. If a race is stopped at less than 50 percent of its scheduled time or distance and is not restarted,
it is incomplete; championship points shall not be awarded, and organizers will not be required to
distribute trophies or other awards.
B. A race that is stopped at 50 percent or more of its scheduled time or distance, and not restarted, is
complete, and results will reflect the order of the end of the last completely scored lap (even if that
lap is less than 50 percent of the scheduled distance).
6.10.6. Lap Record
Official lap records are set during races; not practice or qualifying. A driver whose car is penalized for noncompliance in a race may not set a lap record in that race.
6.11. RULES OF THE ROAD
6.11.1 On Course Driver Conduct
A. Drivers are responsible to avoid physical contact between cars on the race track.
B. Each competitor has a right to racing room, which is generally defined as sufficient space on the
marked racing surface that under racing conditions, a driver can maintain control of his car in close
quarters.
C. Drivers must respect the right of other competitors to racing room. Abrupt changes in direction that
impede or affect the path of another car attempting to overtake or pass may be interpreted as an
effort to deprive a fellow competitor of the right to racing room.
D. The overtaking driver is responsible for the decision to pass another car and to accomplish it safely.
The overtaken driver is responsible to be aware that he is being passed and not to impede or block
the overtaking car. A driver who does not use his rear view mirror or who appears to be blocking
another car attempting to pass may be black flagged and/or penalized, as specified in Section 7.
6.11.2. Hand Signals
A. A driver should signal his intention to enter the pits from the course by raising his arm.
B. An overtaken driver should point to the side on which an overtaking driver should pass.
C. The driver of a stalled car should raise both arms to indicate that he will not move until the course is
clear.
6.11.3. Off-Course Excursions
Drivers are required to follow the pavement or marked course, and may not gain an advantage from an offcourse excursion. Unless the Supplemental Regulations specify otherwise, a driver who leaves an artificially
marked course or an airport circuit with all four wheels must reenter the course at the same location where
GCR - 54
6. Racing Rules and Procedures
6.11.4. Counter-Race Direction Driving
Specific approval of the Race Director or Chief Steward is required to drive a car in counter-race direction
at any time or under any condition during an event. Violating this rule may result in penalties as specified
in Section 7.
6.11.5. Stopping on a Course; Accepting Assistance
A. A driver who stops his car on course must make every effort to assure that the location does not
pose a danger or obstruction to other competitors.
B. During a race, a driver may receive assistance only in the pit lane by his pit crew, except for safety
assistance from race officials.
C.For assistance during restarts, see 6.8.
6.11.6. Using the Engine Self-Starter on Course
While on the course, a car may not be moved using the starting device, except to relocate to a position of
greater safety or under provisions of 6.10.3.B.
6.11.7. Passengers
No one may ride outside the cockpit area or on the coach work of any automobile at any time, including
victory laps.
GCR - 55
General
he went off, subject to the directions of officials controlling reentry.
7. Penalties
7.PENALTIES
All Club Racing participants are subject to control by SCCA, the GCR, and the Supplemental Regulations.
This Section specifies the penalties for violating the GCR and the Supplemental Regulations.
7.1.
WHO MAY BE PENALIZED
Any entrant, driver, crew member, organizer, official, or SCCA member may be penalized.
7.2.
RANGE OF PENALTIES
In increasing order of severity, the range of penalties is as follows:
A. Fine ($1-$99)
B.Reprimand
NOTE: A reprimand against an SCCA member shall be noted in his license file.
C. Fine ($100-$249)
D. Loss of event points
E. Fine ($250)
NOTE: All fines must be in whole dollar amounts only.
F. Loss of Time, Lap, or Finishing Position
G. Probation of competition privileges
Although the probation is effective immediately, the probation period does not begin until the license, as
well as any imposed fine, is received by the Chairman SOM or the National Office. Any member on probation must notify the event Race Director or Chief Steward prior to his first on track session or beginning
his assigned official’s responsibilities. Failure to notify the Race Director or Chief Steward is a violation
of probation.
1. Length of Probation
Probation may be up to 12 months; or it may be specified as a number of SCCA Club Racing event
days or SCCA Club Racing event sanctions.
2. Term(s) of Probation
A driver on probation may be restricted to competing in his Division; limited to competing in certain
types of levels of events; or required to perform specified event related activities, including attending
an SCCA Drivers’ School. Participating in SCCA Practice Days or SCCA events that are not sanctioned by SCCA Club Racing will not fulfill probation.
3. Violation of Probation
Failing to comply with the probation terms may result in further penalties assigned by a review
committee appointed to hear the violation, by Driver or Official Review, or by the SOM at the event
where the violation occurs.
H.Disqualification
An entrant, driver, or car may be disqualified from a competition or an event. Rights to awards in the
competition or event are automatically forfeited.
I.
Suspension of license privileges
SCCA license privileges for a driver, crew, or official may be suspended for a period of time not to exceed
12 months. A license holder whose privileges are suspended must immediately surrender his license to
the Chairman of the SOM, review committee, or Court of Appeals. While the suspension is effective
immediately, the suspension period does not begin until the license, as well as any imposed fine, is
received by the Chairman of the SOM, review committee, or the National Office.
A member whose Competition License has been suspended shall not participate in a Club Racing event
using any other grade or form of competition license. When the suspension is the result of a noncompliant vehicle, the infraction shall be noted in the Vehicle Logbook.
The suspension document for a Competition License holder will note whether a member whose license
privileges have been suspended may participate in further Club Racing events in another capacity using
another type or grade of license.
J. Loss of accrued points
A competitor may be penalized all points accrued during the current season.
K. Expulsion from SCCA
GCR - 56
7. Penalties
7.3.
MULTIPLE PENALTIES
Multiple penalties may be imposed. In addition, penalties may be consecutive (for example, 2 month
suspension followed by 6 month probation). Both suspension and probation, each for the maximum allowable term, may be imposed for a single violation.
7.4.
PENALTY POINTS
A. Penalties assessed by the SOM or the Court of Appeals accumulate points according to the following
schedule:
1. Fine ($1 - $99)
no points
2. Reprimand
1 point
3. Fine ($100 - $249)
1 point
4. Loss of event points
1 point
5. Fine ($250)
2 points
6. Loss of time, lap, or finishing position
2 points
7. Probation of SCCA competition privileges
3 points
8.Disqualification
4 points
9. Suspension of SCCA competition privileges
6 points
10.Loss of accrued championship or series points7 points
B. Penalties imposed by the Race Director or Chief Steward do not incur penalty points. If a Chief Steward’s Action is protested and the protest is disallowed (upholding the Chief Steward’s Action), the
SOM may, at their discretion, assign penalty points as listed above.
C. When multiple penalties result from a single action, only the most severe penalty accrues points.
D. Automatic penalties are imposed according to the following schedule:
Condition
Automatic Penalty
11-14 points accumulated in
consecutive 3 year period
Probation for 6 months or 6 events
determined by Divisional Executive
Steward
15 or more accumulated in
consecutive 3 year period
Suspension of competition privileges for
6 months
Invalid Statement of Facts
Affidavit
Event disqualification, 60 day suspension
of competition privileges, and 6 penalty
points
Refusing to allow teardown in
Mechanical Protest,Request for
Action, or Chief Steward’s Action
Event disqualification, 6 month
suspension of competition privileges,
$250 fine, and 6 penalty points
Non-Compliance in the following
classes:
Formula Enterprise
Spec Racer Ford
Enterprises Sports Racer
FE: see 9.1.1.I.19
SRF: see 9.1.8.E.T
ESR: see 9.1.8.H.18
NOTES:
-Penalties caused by accumulated penalty points do not themselves result in further points.
-Penalty points expire 3 calendar years from the date they were incurred.
7.5.
AMENDMENT OF RESULTS
Whenever a penalty affects the final results, including when a driver or car is disqualified, the SOM shall
advance the subsequent competitors in the finishing order and advise the Chief of Timing and Scoring of
any amendment to the results.
7.6.PUBLICATION
SCCA has the right to publish that any individual or organization has been penalized, the penalty, and the
reasons. An individual or organization included in the notice of penalty has no right to act against the SCCA
or against any other individual for publishing the notice or for its contents.
GCR - 57
General
A member may be expelled from the SCCA as provided in the SCCA Bylaws.
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8.
STEWARDS’ ACTIONS, PROTESTS, AND APPEALS
8.1.
TYPES OF JUDICIAL ACTIONS
8.1.1. Chief Steward’s Action
The Race Director or Chief Steward may file a Chief Steward’s Action (CSA) with the SOM to describe a
participant’s breach of the GCR or the Supplemental Regulations and the action taken according to 5.12.2.
All CSAs must be filed with the SOM within 30 minutes after the results of the final race of the event are
posted, although the SOM may approve an extension of time.
8.1.2. Request for Action
The Race Director or Chief Steward may submit to the SOM a Request for Action (RFA) describing a
suspected breach of the GCR or the Supplemental Regulations, asking the SOM to investigate and determine whether there was a breach, and what, if any, penalties to impose. The Race Director or Chief
Steward cannot submit an RFA for any single violation of the rules for which he has already imposed a
penalty allowed in 5.12.3. An RFA resulting from a post-race impound inspection may be submitted within
a reasonable time following the discovery of the suspected breach. All other RFAs must be submitted to
the SOM within 30 minutes after the results of the final race of the event are posted, although the SOM
may approve an extension of time.
8.1.3. Chief Steward’s Action Against a Car
The Race Director or Chief Steward may initiate an action against a car for non-compliance using a CSA or
RFA. The procedures are the same as when one competitor protests the compliance of another’s car (see
8.3.3.), except that the organizer replaces the protestor regarding expenses and the Chief Steward replaces
the Chairman.
8.1.4. Compliance Review
A member may request a determination on the compliance of their vehicle or its components by submitting
a Compliance Request Form to the Club Racing Department at which time a letter will be entered into the
CRB letter system. Formal rule clarifications may be submitted to the Club Racing Board at www.clubracingboard.com.
A. The Staff will review the request and must consult with the CRB and other appropriate experts.
B. Club Racing will schedule in-person inspection of the vehicle or components by a class expert. The
expert will submit a written opinion back to Club Racing and the CRB.
C. Club Racing and the CRB will review the expert’s opinion. If required, the CRB may initiate a clarification of the applicable rule(s). Club Racing will then submit a written ruling to the applicant.
D. A fee will be determined and paid in advance of the inspection. A portion of the fee may be refunded
at the discretion of SCCA.
E. Verification of compliance is based on the GCR as of the date of the written response to the member.
The GCR changes annually, and there is no guarantee of compliance beyond the current rules season.
8.1.5.Protests
Any entrant, driver, crew, organizer, or official participating in an event may protest any decision, act, or
omission of another entrant, driver, crew, organizer, official, or any other person connected with that event
whose actions the protestor believes to be in error or which violate the GCR, the Supplemental Regulations,
or any condition involving SCCA’s sanction of the event, except where exemption from protest is specified
elsewhere in the GCR or the event Supplementary Regulations.
8.2. HEARINGS AND JUDGEMENTS
The SOM procedures for RFAs and Protests are the same.
All RFAs and Protests will be heard by the SOM as soon as practical. The parties concerned will be notified
when and where the hearing will occur. This may include 3rd parties who were not immediately identified as
being involved in the incident(s) in question. Although all parties have the right to call witnesses, they must
state their cases in person. Each party or witness must be heard separately and privately.
Unless they are specifically released by the Chairman SOM, all parties must remain at the event until a ruling
has been issued. If any party is absent, a judgment may still be rendered, and may by default go against
him.
If the SOM are unable to rule immediately after the hearing, all parties will be notified when and how the
decision will be conveyed.
All parties shall be bound by the decision, subject only to appeal, as specified in 8.4.
For the purpose of this section, the term “party” means anyone who has protested or been protested,
or who is the subject of a Chief Steward’s Request for Action, in addition to anyone found to have been
involved with and possibly responsible for the incident(s) in question.
8.3.
PROTEST PROCEDURES
GCR - 58
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
8.3.1. How to Protest
The following are requirements to protest. A Protest must:
B. must specify the sections of the GCR or Supplemental Regulations that are alleged to have been
violated;
C. be signed by the protestor;
D. be accompanied by a fee of $50, if at a U.S. Majors Tour race; $25 if at a Regional race or Drivers’
School. These fees may be returned to the protestor at the discretion of the SOM.
E. be delivered, with fee, to the Race Director, Chief Steward or to an Assistant Chief Steward delegated to receive Protests, who will promptly convey it to the Chairman of the SOM.
F. be filed within the time limits specified below, although the SOM may extend the time in cases where
the protestor can show that evidence relating to the Protest was not available within the time limit,
or where the protestor can show that he was unable to meet the deadline because of circumstances
beyond his control.
Protest Type
Time Limit
Validity of an entry
Rules compliance of an entrant,
driver, or car
No later than one hour before the start of
the race session of the competition for the
issue in question. Cars in impound may
be protested within 30 minutes after any
session.
Starting (Grid) position
Within 30 minutes after the grid is posted.
Driver’s on track behavior
Within 30 minutes after the end of the
session
Race results
Within 30 minutes after results are posted.
Race officials’s action or
decision
Within 30 minutes after the end of the
session OR within 30 minutes of receiving
the notification of the official’s action.
8.3.2. Reasonable Protests
Properly presented Protests must be reasonable, logical, and based on sound evidence. Reasonable people
may differ and a properly presented Protest may not be upheld.
A.The protest fee will be forfeited if the Protest is not well-founded.
B. A protestor whose actions are in bad faith or vexatious may be penalized by the SOM as specified in
Section 7.
8.3.3. Actions Against Cars
An entrant or driver may initiate an action against a car in his race group for non-compliance using a Protest.
Any participant may protest the fuel used in any car in a competition as specified in 9.3. Fuel. A Protest
against a car is also a Protest against its driver and entrant.
The protestor may request that the car be disassembled, inspected, or any other test made, provided he
posts a tear down bond (also referred to as “bond”) with the SOM sufficient to cover the total expenses
of disassembly, inspection, reassembly, and other costs associated with the protest. A Protest may be
reduced in scope but not added to at the time the bond is set. Unless the protestor wholly or partially
withdraws his Protest, the stipulated inspections will be completed after the bond is set and received.
A claim that non-compliant item(s) offer no performance advantage has no influence on any ruling.
Non-compliant item(s) will be noted in the car’s Vehicle Logbook. (See 9.2.1.I.)
A. Setting a Bond
1.The SOM will establish a bond after consulting separately with the protestor and the protested
party(ies), with the Chief Technical Inspector, and any others whose advice the SOM believe to
be useful.
2. A cost schedule must be established before the inspection can begin. Items covered by the bond
may be priced individually, giving consideration to logically linking some items. Or else the bond
may be allocated on the basis of an agreed-upon apportionment. Bond apportioning after the
fact is not permitted, except where the protestor has withdrawn all or part of the Protest. If the
protestor does withdraw all or part of his Protest, the SOM will apportion the costs incurred,
including reassembly, up to the point of withdrawal, provided no non-compliance has been
GCR - 59
General
A. be in writing;
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
discovered.
3.The bond must be paid before the inspection can begin, and must be cash, check, or credit card
(Visa, Mastercard, or Discover only).
4. If circumstances warrant, the SOM will require the protested party to post bond and/or sign a
repair order with a service establishment to cover the costs of disassembly and inspection. The
bond shall be determined in the same manner as a protestor’s bond.
5. The SCCA Technical Services Department offers verification services for protest and/or compliance resolution of components and/or assemblies with the following requirements:
a. A complete description of the vehicle/engine combination (specifically - make, model, year,
VIN #, engine code, displacement, and so on).
b. A known stock example of the part in question must be shipped with the protested part. The
sample must be the same make, model and year of the protested part.
c. The cost for each inspection will be set according to the Club Racing Labor Rate Guide,
published on the SCCA web site. Provisions for shipping to and from the National Office
must also be included in the bond.
d. A complete comparison will be produced within 5 working days of receiving the protested
assembly and the stock sample, along with all the required information. The outcome will be
conveyed to the Chairman SOM via email.
B. Conducting an Inspection
The SOM will oversee the inspection and/or disassembly. They determine which, if any, portions of the
inspection and/or disassembly may be observed, and by whom.
Non-compliant items found during inspection and/or disassembly that were not part of the original Protest
must be referred to the Race Director or Chief Steward. If additional non-compliant items are found and
referred, the protested party will receive no portion of the protestor’s bond, regardless of the compliance
of the protested component(s).
C. Refusing to Allow Inspection
A driver or entrant of a protested car who refuses to allow inspection is subject to immediate automatic
penalty as specified in 7.4.D.
D. Bond Disposition
If the car is found compliant, the protestor forfeits the bond. If the car is found non-compliant, the protestor’s bond is returned, and the protested driver or entrant pays the expenses. 8.3.3.A.2. specifies the
conditions for apportioning the bond.
E. Time of Disbursement of Bond; Appeal Escrow
The tear down bond shall be sent to the Club Racing Department to hold it in escrow until the time limit
to Appeal expires, an Appeal has been rejected, or an Appeal has been decided by the Court of Appeals.
F. Preserving Evidence
1. Documentation – all recorded evidence, such as technical data, inspectors’ reports, or measurements must be forwarded to the Club Office.
2. Impounded parts
a. The Chairman SOM is authorized to impound parts.
b. The Chairman SOM must assure that the chain of evidence is not broken.
1. All impounded parts must be uniquely and identifiably marked when they are removed
from the car.
2. All impounded parts must remain under the direct control of a licensed Tech Inspector
or Steward until they are returned to the competitor or are delivered by a licensed Tech
Inspector or Steward into the direct control of a courier service for insured and traced
shipping for third-party inspection.
c. At an event, components may be returned to the protestee under the following conditions
without either party losing the right to appeal.
1. Both parties must agree in writing to the following:
a.
b. The proper tool(s) was (were) properly used to measurement(s).
The official measuring the part(s) is qualified.
take
c.
contested.
The measurements as documented are not GCR - 60
the
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
d.
The three items above are not subject to appeal.
1.
Will be marked as such.
2.
Will be retained by the SCCA.
3.
May be the subject of appeal.
8.4.APPEALS
8.4.1. Right to Appeal
Any participant or organization named as a party to a protest, a Race Director or Chief Steward’s RFA; or
any member named as a party in a Review Committee, has the right to appeal a decision or penalty imposed
upon him or it by the SOM or Review Committee. The Race Director or Chief Steward of an event has the
right to appeal any decision or penalty imposed.
8.4.2. Appointment and Jurisdiction
Each year, the Board of Directors, SCCA, Inc., will appoint (5) active and experienced members to the Court
of Appeals. At least three (3) members, selected from the members of the Court by its Chairman, shall
review any appeal filed under this section and make a final decision. The purpose of the Court is to provide
a mechanism to resolve differences by a committee composed of members with individual and collective
expertise in racing matters.
8.4.3. Appeal Procedures
A. How to Appeal
The following are requirements to appeal. An Appeal:
1. must be in writing;
2. must specify who is appealing; what decision is being appealed; the sections of the GCR and/or
Supplemental Regulations which are believed to have been administered inappropriately, unfairly,
or inequitably; all information the appellant wishes the Court to consider; and the arguments in
favor of the Appeal;
3. must be received by the National Office US Government postmarked or registered with a carrier
service such as UPS or Federal Express or by Express Mail, fax or email within 10 days after the
decision of the SOM or review committee has been delivered to the appellant;
4. must be accompanied by a fee of $175, payable to SCCA, Inc. A minimum of $100 of any appeal
fee will be retained by the SCCA. Faxed or emailed Appeals must include a Visa or MasterCard
account number for payment of the fee. Insufficient funds checks or credit card transactions that
are rejected will be grounds for suspension of competition privileges. Any additional fees charged
by the financial institution(s) will be assessed to the appellant.
5. may be withdrawn by the appellant, by writing the National Office before a decision is reached.
The administrative portion of the appeal fee may be retained at the discretion of the Court of
Appeals.
B.Fines, Licenses, Financial Obligations
Before an Appeal will be heard, all applicable following conditions must be met:
1.all fines must be received by the National Office;
2. a competition license surrendered to the Chairman of the SOM or the Race Director or Chief
Steward in return for a Probation Letter must be received by the National Office; and
3. any other financial obligation to the SCCA, Inc., or to any Region as reported to SCCA by the
Region, must be received by the National Office.
All fines must be paid in cash or by check.
C. Stay of Decision
An Appeal filed on a penalty of suspension of competition privileges or expulsion from the SCCA imposed
by the SOM or other review permits the appellant to participate in subsequent races, until his Appeal has
been decided and the decision announced by the Court. The results and awards from these races are
Provisional until the Court’s ruling upholds or overturns the suspension or expulsion, at which time the
results and awards will be Final and Official. If the Court upholds the suspension or expulsion, the appellant’s awards from races run while awaiting the Court’s decision will be null and void. Race results for
those events will be revised to expunge the appellant’s information from the Final and Official Results.
D. Multiple Sanction Weekends
On a multiple event weekend, (i.e., where more than one Club Racing sanction number has been issued,
in any permitted combination of events), an individual whose competition privileges are suspended as
specified in 7.2.I. may file a Notice of Intent to Appeal, accompanied by the appeal fee, with the
GCR - 61
General
d. Parts found non-compliant
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
Chairman of the SOM, and be allowed to participate in an event that weekend whose sanction number
is different than the one under which he was suspended. The Appeal shall be filed within ten days of the
date the decision of the SOM was given to the appellant. THIS APPEAL CANNOT BE WITHDRAWN. The
appellant may participate in subsequent events until the Court conveys its ruling.
If an individual’s competition privileges are suspended by the SOM during a single sanction weekend, he
is prohibited from further competition activities during that event from the time he receives their decision.
At a single sanction weekend, the SOM may not accept A Notice of Intent to Appeal for any reason at
any time.
E. Reasonable Appeals
Properly presented Appeals must be reasonable, logical, and based on sound evidence. Reasonable people
may differ on the interpretation of the evidence. An Appeal may be properly presented even if the decision of the SOM or review committee remains unchanged or is overturned by the Court.
8.4.4. Hearing Appeals
All properly filed Appeals will be heard by the Court. The Court will review the SCCA Official Observer’s
Report, the Notice of Appeal, containing all the evidence the appellant wishes the Court to consider, and
will make appropriate inquiries before coming to a decision. It may require the appellant to submit additional
evidence necessary for it to reach an equitable decision; hear directly evidence from any person it believes
has pertinent information or necessary data; permit other parties to the issue under appeal to make written
comments on the Notice of Appeal; and/or seek information from any other source. The Court shall make
every effort to come to a conclusion and convey a final written decision on each Appeal within 30 days of
receiving the Notice of Appeal.
No member of the Court may consider the Appeal if he has participated in the event under review as a
competitor or official, or if he is directly or indirectly interested or involved with the matters under consideration.
The Court shall determine the procedures for hearing appeals, and these procedures are not subject to
appeal.
8.4.5. Judgment of the Court of Appeals
A. After considering all relevant material, the Court shall meet privately, reach a conclusion, and
prepare a written decision. Actions of the Court may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. The penalty or other action should be nullified, mitigated, affirmed, increased, or a different
penalty imposed.
2. The Court may order a rehearing by the original SOM.
B. The Court may not order a competition to be re-run.
C. At no time shall the Court of Appeals act as a Chief Steward, SOM, or Review Committee.
D. Penalties imposed by the Court incur automatic penalty points as specified in 7.4.
E. The Court may or may not return appeal fees; and it will determine the disposition of protest fees
and tear down bonds, if any, in cases where the decision being appealed is nullified or otherwise
changed.
F. The Court’s decision is final, binding and not subject to further appeals by any party, either inside
or outside the SCCA.
8.4.6. Publication and Effect of Decision
The National Office will distribute a copy of the Court’s decision to all parties of the Appeal as soon as
possible after the decision becomes final and will use its best efforts to publish the final decision as soon
as possible. Individuals or organizations referred to in any decision have no right of action against SCCA,
or any person publishing the decision, and the decision shall be final and binding. Any penalty imposed by
the Court is effective immediately, or as stated in the Court’s decision. Penalties involving time, disqualification, or loss of points apply to the event involved, but are effective as of the date of the conclusion of
that event. The Court will determine the effective date for a suspension, whether it is affirmed or imposed.
8.4.7. Bad Faith Appeals
An appellant whose actions are in bad faith or vexatious may be penalized by the Court as specified in
Section 7.
8.4.8. Appeals Affecting Final Points Standings
For all Runoffs Qualifying Races held less than 28 days before the beginning of the Runoffs, any Appeal
affecting Runoffs eligibility, including all evidence, must be received in the National Office within 48 hours
after either the receipt of a judgment issued by the SOM or the completion of the event, whichever occurs
later. Runoffs invitations to all parties named in or affected by the Appeal will be held until the Appeal decision is final. An “intent to appeal” will not be accepted. This section supersedes any other time allowances
for filing an Appeal.
GCR - 62
8. Stewards’ Actions, Protests, Appeals
General
NOTES:
GCR - 63
9. Cars and Equipment
9.
CARS AND EQUIPMENT
9.1.
CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
All cars competing in SCCA sanctioned races must comply with the requirements of the GCR.
There are 3 types of SCCA classes.
A. Runoffs Eligible Classes
1. Runoffs Eligible classes are those listed below which are not designated “Regional Only”.
2. Only Runoffs Eligible classes will be invited to the Runoffs.
B. Regional Classes
Regional classes are identified in the list below.
C. Optional Regional Classes
1. Organizers may develop classes of cars to accommodate local demand and interest, provided
the preparation rules meet the General Technical Specifications and are reviewed annually and
approved by the Club Racing Department before the first event of the calendar year in which the
local class(es) will compete. It is the organizer’s option to Include these classes in events defined
in 3.1.2.
2. In addition, organizers may include either or both of the following Optional Regional Classes in
their events defined in 3.1.2.
a. Super Production Class (SP) (Optional Regional Class): Cars which exceed the preparation
limitations of the applicable Production or GT Category Rules but which meet the General
Technical Specifications of Section 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 of the GCR for GT category cars. This
includes cars not listed in the GT or Production specification pages, such as FIA homologated production cars.
b. Legend Cars (LC) (Optional Regional Class): Cars that are manufactured by 600 Racing and
that comply with current Legend Car Rules, published by 600 Racing. An LC competitor
must have the current LC Rules at all events. LC should grouped with cars of similar weight,
configuration, and speed potential. Note: Legend Cars are not eligible for any other Club
Racing category. Modifications not permitted in the current LC rules render the car ineligible
for SCCA Club Racing competition. Legend Cars may run with any DOT 205/60/13 tires.
Cars shall have two (2) red brake lights per GCR Section 9.3. Lights with fifteen (15) watt
(minimum) bulbs. Engine breathers shall be equipped with oil catch tanks per GCR Section
9.3. Oil Catch Tanks, Filters, and Breathers. Minimum catch tank capacity shall be one (1)
U.S. quart. All cars shall be equipped with a master switch (per GCR Section 9.3. Master
Switch) easily accessible from outside the car. It should be located in the rear window just
behind the “B” post on the right side. All cars are required an on-board fire system per GCR
Section 9.3. Fire System. All cars shall be equipped with a fuel cell meeting the specifications of GCR Sections 9.3. Fuel Cell Specifications. All suspension Heim joints shall be
captured with a flat washer(s). Arm restraints are required in all Legends Cars. A current
Legends Car Rules is required to be in the possession of each entrant. Legends Cars are
specifically exempt from GCR 9.3. Exhaust System, 9.1.9.A.2.d.1 (as it applies to tire
protrusion from the fenders), and 9.3. Window Safety Nets.
The abbreviations in parentheses are the class identifications as required in 9.3.29. Identification Markings.
9.1.1. FORMULA CATEGORY CLASSES
Formula Atlantic
(FA)
Formula 1000
(FB)
Formula Continental
(FC)
Formula Enterprises
(FE)
Formula Vee
(FV)
GCR - 64
Formula F
(FF)
Formula 500
(F5)
Formula Mazda
(FM)
Formula S
(FS)
Regional Class
Formula First
(FST)
Regional Class
9.1.1 continues in the Formula Category Rules.
9.1.2. GRAND TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES
GT-1(GT1)
GT-2(GT2)
GT-3(GT3)
GT-Lite(GTL)
GT-A
(GTA) Regional Class
9.1.2 continues in the GT Category Rules.
9.1.3. IMPROVED TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES (REGIONAL CLASSES)
R(ITR)
S(ITS)
A(ITA)
B(ITB)
C(ITC)
9.1.3 continues in the Improved Touring Category Rules.
9.1.4. SUPER TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES
Super Touring Under
(STU)
Super Touring Lite
(STL)
9.1.4 continues in the Super Touring Category Rules.
9.1.5. PRODUCTION CATEGORY CLASSES
E Production
(EP)
F Production
(FP)
H Production
(HP)
9.1.5 continues in the Production Category Rules.
9.1.6. SEDAN CATEGORY
American Sedan
(AS)
9.1.6 continues in the American Sedan Category Rules.
9.1.7. SPEC MIATA CLASS
Spec Miata
(SM)
9.1.7 continues in the Spec Miata Class Rules.
9.1.8. SPORTS RACING CATEGORY CLASSES
A Sports Racing
(ASR) Regional Class
Prototype 1
(P1)
Prototype 2
(P2)
GCR - 65
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
Spec Racer Ford
(SRF)
Spec Racer Ford 3
(SRF3)
9.1.8 continues in the Sports Racing Category Rules.
9.1.9. TOURING CATEGORY CLASSES:
Touring 1
(T1)
Touring 2
(T2)
Touring 3
(T3)
Touring 4
(T4)
9.1.9 continues in the Touring Category Rules.
9.1.10. B-SPEC CATEGORY CLASSES
B-Spec(B-Spec)
9.1.10 continues in the B-SPEC Category Rules.
9.1.11. SPEC MX-5 CLASS
Spec MX-5
(SM5) Regional Class
9.1.11 continues in the Spec MX-5 Class Rules.
9.1.12. CARS RUN IN THE PROPER CLASS
A. All cars shall race in their respective classes.
B. Cars should not be run in classes and/or categories for which they were not designed or intended.
The Race Director or Chief Steward must approve the proposed classification. He will not approve if
the car is so dissimilar or the car/driver combination otherwise unsuitable that it is a hazard or impediment to fair competition among the other cars in the class and race group.
9.1.13. RUNOFFS-ELIGIBLE CLASS PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENTS
A. A class retains its Runoffs-eligible status as long as its annual average number of entries achieves
2.5 or higher per Runoffs-eligible race. (This section has been suspended by the Board of Directors
until 2018. See the BoD minutes from the December 2016 meeting in the January 2017 Fastrack.)
B. Should that annual average number of entries fall below 2.5, the class will have one additional year
to bring the participation level above the current requirement. Alternatively, it may be immediately
consolidated into an existing class. If the class does not exceed the current average requirement
during the grace year, it will either be consolidated into existing classes or become a Regional Class.
(This section has been suspended by the Board of Directors until 2018. See the BoD minutes from
the December 2016 meeting in the January 2017 Fastrack.)
C. Based on member input, a Regional Class (except Improved Touring) meeting or exceeding the
participation requirements outlined in paragraph 9.1.13.A. for 1 year may be reviewed to become a
Runoffs-eligible Class.
D. Based on member or manufacturer input, the CRB may recommend creating new Runoffs-eligible
classes for BoD approval. Runoffs-eligible classes created under this section have 5 years to achieve
an average of 2.5 cars per Runoffs-eligible race before being consolidated or redefined as a Regional
Class, according to 9.1.13.B.
Note 1: For the purposes of this section, the term “entries” is defined as drivers classified in the final official
race results of Runoffs-eligible races as finishers, did-not-finish (DNF), did-not-start (DNS), or disqualified
(DQ).
Note 2: Classes such as Improved Touring, Super Production, A Sports Racing, and Formula S (Regional and
Optional Regional Classes) have been developed for competitors to race at a Regional level. These classes
will not be eligible for National races since they were created with the express understanding that they
remain Regional Classes only. There may be other classes added to this philosophy, as we identify classes
for our members to race cars that do not fit within our Runoffs-eligible racing program.
9.2.
VEHICLE DOCUMENTATION
GCR - 66
9. Cars and Equipment
A. The standard SCCA Vehicle Logbook will be used by all competitors at all SCCA competitions, unless
excepted in the Supplemental Regulations for an event shared with another sanctioning organization,
or as specified in 9.2.1.D.
All unissued Vehicle Logbooks must remain the in possession and control of a Divisional or National
Technical Inspector.
B. Only one logbook will be issued for each vehicle (except as a continuation of the original or a replacement). When a continuation logbook is issued, the date the initial logbook was issued must be
written on the front page of the continuation logbook. (It is not necessary to present all old logbooks
for issuance of annual inspec­tion stamp or a tech sticker.) Possessing two logbooks for one vehicle
is a breach of the rules under 2.1.3.
C. A complete description of the vehicle, its safety roll bar/roll cage, and the required photographs must
be present in the places provided. All changes of ownership of the vehicle must be recorded.
D. ASN Canada FIA Vehicle History Logbooks will be accepted at all SCCA events.
E. The Vehicle Logbook must be issued by a Nationally licensed Technical Inspector, who will complete
the required vehicle information in the front and back of the logbook. He will conduct a thorough
inspection of the vehicle, as provided in Section 9.3, General Technical and Safety Specifications.
The logbook issue date is the date of registration.
F.Identity Numbers:
1. Each vehicle shall be issued an identity number which will be permanently stamped on its roll
bar, and which will correspond to the number on the Vehicle Logbook.
2. The first digit(s) corresponding to the region’s identity number will be separated from the balance
of the numbers by a dash (-).
3. The car numbering system, beginning with 001, shall be issued consecutively as the vehicles are
registered during a thorough inspection.
G. All Formula and Sports Racing Cars may be required to be homologated by SCCA and issued a Certificate of Approval. Refer to section 9.2.2. for details. Exceptions are Spec Racer Ford, FE, SRSCCA,
and Shelby Can-Am. The original certificate shall be presented along with the car for issuance of a
new Vehicle Logbook. Additionally, former Spec Racer Renaults may compete in Vintage/Historic
events using their originally issued logbook.
H. At each event, this Logbook and the Certificate of Approval (for cars required by these rules to have
one) must be presented at Technical Inspection with the signature of the driver/entrant for that event
in the space provided. During Technical Inspection, any deviations in compliance shall be noted in the
logbook by the Technical Inspector. The Race Director or Chief Steward may issue a waiver for the
noted compliance deviation for the current event only by making a notation in the competitor’s log
book. Competitor must remediate before any subsequent events.
I.
If a car is protested or inspected during an event and found to be non-compliant, the results of this
protest or inspection must be noted in the logbook by the Chairman SOM, or another delegated official, such as the Chief Technical Inspector. (See 8.3.3.)
J. If a car is involved in an accident or is damaged as a result of mechanical failure, the damage must
be noted in the Vehicle Logbook by the accident investigator or Chief Technical Inspector.
K. Cars found to be underweight at impound are subject to penalty and the weight shall be noted on the
next page of the Vehicle Logbook.
L. If the logbook is not available at Technical Inspection, the car may compete only after a thorough
inspection of the car is completed, during which all details required to issue a logbook are recorded.
M. A car may be entered in multiple classes within a single sanction numbered event. A single Vehicle
Logbook is required, but it must contain pictures of each configuration.
9.2.2. HOMOLOGATION REQUIREMENTS
GCR - 67
General
9.2.1 VEHICLE LOGBOOKS
Each car shall have a complete and up-to-date logbook.
9. Cars and Equipment
All Formula, Sports Racing, P1 and P2 cars shall be constructed in strict accordance with the rules and
regulations contained in the current GCR unless specifically excepted. Cars registered prior to January 1,
1983 do not require homologation certificates.
Cars which do comply with the design criteria set forth for roll hoops (GCR 9.4.5) do not require a homologation certificate. Cars which do not comply with the design criteria set forth for roll hoops (GCR 9.4.5)
may submit an application to the Club Racing Technical Manager as defined in GCR 9.4.5.F. The Club
Racing Technical Staff, may deny any application for a configuration which is not compliant with the rules,
which incorporates design characteristics or conditions that are fundamentally divergent from standard
safety considerations or is otherwise incompatible with the relevant class structure or philosophy. A fee to
be determined by Club Racing shall be assessed for all such applications.
Cars which are excepted from the published design criteria, shall at all times have available for examination
a current logbook, a copy of the letter of exception from Club Racing and supporting engineering documentation. Cars which have previously been issued Homologation Certificates may satisfy this rule by presentation of said certificate or a copy.
All cars are subject to inspection for compliance with the data which was submitted in support of the alternative roll structure. The existence of a Homologation Certificate or letter of exception from Club Racing is
not conclusive evidence of rules compliance.
9.3.
GENERAL TECHNICAL AND SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
The points covered at Technical and Safety Inspection shall be:
9.3.1. ACCUMULATORS (e.g., Accusumps)
An accumulator (e.g., Accusump) may be installed (except for Spec Miata). Location is free, but it shall be
securely mounted within the bodywork. All oil lines that pass into or through the driver/passenger compartment shall be of metal braided hose (e.g., Aeroquip).
9.3.2. ACTIVE SUSPENSIONS AND TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Active suspensions and traction control systems, as installed by the automobile manufacturer and unmodified, are allowed only in Touring.
9.3.3. ADVERTISEMENTS AND GRAPHICS
Advertising and graphics (names, symbols and logos) may be displayed on cars provided they are in good
taste and do not interfere with identification marks and SCCA logos.
9.3.4. AERODYNAMIC SKIRTS
Aerodynamic skirts are prohibited in Club Racing.
9.3.5. ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
Four wheel (All-Wheel) drive is prohibited except in Touring, Improved Touring, Super Touring.
9.3.6. APPEARANCE NEAT AND CLEAN, AND SUITABLE FOR COMPETITION
Specifically, cars that are dirty either externally or in the engine or passenger compartments, or that show
bodywork damage, structural or surface rust, or that are partially or totally in primer, or that do not bear
the prescribed identification marks shall not be approved for competition.
9.3.7. BALLAST
Ballast may be added to all cars as required, to meet minimum weight, provided it is securely mounted
within the bodywork and serves no other purpose.
9.3.8. BATTERIES
Battery location is unrestricted within the bodywork (except Spec Miata, Touring, B-Spec, and Improved
Touring). If located in the driver/passenger compartment, vented wet cell batteries shall be in a nonconductive marine type container or equivalent. The hot terminal shall be insulated on all cars. All batteries
(on-board power supplies) shall be attached securely to the frame or chassis structure independent of the
marine type container.
9.3.9. BODY PANELS
Body panels shall be securely mounted. Fender skirts and hub caps shall be removed. The hood and engine
compartment shall be securely fastened. Hood fasteners must be removable with simple tools; no fastener
requiring a key to open it is permitted.
9.3.10.BRAKES
GCR - 68
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.11. CAMERA MOUNTS
The mounts for video / photographic cameras shall be of a safe and secure design. The body of the camera
or recording unit that weighs more than 8 oz shall be secured at a minimum of 2 points on different sides
of the camera body. Suction cups or elastic mounts are not permitted. If a tether is used to restrain the
camera, the tether length shall be limited so that the camera cannot contact the driver.
9.3.12. CARBURETOR FUEL INLET FITTING
On all carburetors, (except SU, C and D Sports Racing cars with motorcycle-type carburetors and Formula
500 Mikuni VM38 and F600 cars) with a non-threaded fuel inlet fitting, the fitting shall be replaced by drilling and tapping the carburetor body for a threaded fitting.
9.3.13. COOL SUITS
Cool suits are allowed in all classes. Water tank mounts shall be of a safe and secure design.
9.3.14.COOLANT CATCH TANKS
Cooling systems shall be equipped with coolant catch tanks with a minimum capacity of 1 US Pint, except
cars that are equipped with working OEM pressurized coolant reservoirs , which may use an additional
catch tank.
9.3.15. CRYOGENIC TREATMENT
Cryogenic treatment of components is allowed unless specifically prohibited in the category or class preparation rules.
9.3.16. DATA COLLECTION DEVICES
Data collection devices are considered to be instrumentation and are therefore allowed in all classes that
permit the installation, replacement or addition of gauges, indicators or instruments.
9.3.17. DETACHABLE PANELS/SUNROOFS
Detachable hardtops, detachable panels, and detachable doors (e.g., Lotus 7) shall be removed, unless
authorized in the Category Rules or Specification Book for that car to remain in place. All glass panels in the
roof must be removed. Movable or removable metal or composite panels in the roof may be either removed
or positively secured in the closed position. Any openings in the roof resulting from the removal of a panel
must be covered with panels of stock contour made of the same material as the stock surrounding roof
structure.
9.3.18. DRIVER’S RESTRAINT SYSTEM
All drivers in SCCA sanctioned speed events shall utilize either a 5, 6, or 7 point restraint harness meeting
the following specifications. A 7 point restraint harness is recommended. Arm restraints are required on
all open cars including open Targa tops, sunroofs and T-tops. Arm restraints shall not be worn in a manner which limits the ability of the driver to provide visible signals to other competitors while on track. The
restraint system installation is subject to approval of the Chief Technical Inspector.
A. The shoulder harness shall be the over the shoulder type. There shall be a single release common to
the seat belt and shoulder harness. When mounting belts and harnesses it is recommended that they
be kept as short as reasonably possible to minimize stretch when loaded in an accident.
The shoulder harness shall be mounted behind the driver and supported above a line drawn downward from the shoulder point at an angle of 20 degrees with the horizontal. The seat itself, or
anything added only to the seat shall not be considered a suitable guide. Guides must be a part of
the roll cage or a part of the car structure.
Only separate shoulder straps are permitted. (“Y” type shoulder straps are not allowed.) “H” type
configuration is allowed.
B. The single anti-submarine strap of the 5 point system shall be attached to the floor structure and
have a metal to metal connection with the single release common to the seat belt and shoulder
harness.
C. The double leg straps of the 6 point or 7 point system may be attached to the floor as above for the 5
point system or be attached to the seat belt so that the driver sits on them, passing them up between
his legs and attaching either to the single release common to the seat belt and shoulder harness or
GCR - 69
General
Shall be pedal-operated, working directly on each wheel, and in good working order. Rolling brake tests
are prohibited. ABS or Anti-lock braking systems are not allowed except in Touring, and Super Touring. To
satisfy this rule, the ABS shall be disabled by removing or disconnecting all of the wheel sensors.
9. Cars and Equipment
attaching to the shoulder harness straps. It is also permissible for the leg straps to be secured at a
point common to the seat belt attachment to the structure, passing under the driver and up between
his legs to the seat belt release or shoulder harness straps.
All straps shall be free to run through intermediate loops or clamps/buckles.
D. Each seat (lap) and shoulder belt of the harness (5, 6, or 7 points) shall have an individual mounting
point (i.e. 2 for seat belt and 2 for shoulder belt minimum). 6 or 7 point system anti-submarine straps
may share a mounting point with one or both seat (lap) belt(s). The minimum acceptable bolts used
in the mounting of all belts and harnesses is SAE Grade 5/Metric 8.8. Mounting hardware, including
eye bolts, as provided by the belt manufacturer, may also be used for mounting belts and harnesses.
Where possible, seat belt, shoulder harness, and anti-submarine strap(s) should be mounted to the
roll structure or frame of the car. Where this is not possible, large diameter mounting washers or
equivalent should be used to spread the load. Bolting through aluminum floor panels, etc., is not
acceptable. Holes in the roll cage to accommodate the installation of the harness must be bushed
and welded completely.
E. All driver restraint systems shall meet one of the following: SFI specification 16.1, 16.5, or FIA
specification 8853/98, 8853-2016 or 8854/98.
1. Restraint systems meeting SFI 16.1 or 16.5 shall bear a dated SFI Spec label. The certification
indicated by this label shall expire on December 31st of the 5th year after the date of manufacture as indicated by the label. If for example the manufacture date is 2014 the fifth year after
the date of manufacture is 2019.
2. Restraint systems homologated to FIA specification 8853/98 and 8854/98 will have a label
containing the type of harness designation (‘C-###.T/98 or D-###.T/98) and date of expiration
which is the last day of the year marked. All straps in this FIA restraint system will have these
labels.
3. If a restraint system has more than one type of certification label, the label with the latest expiration may be used.
F. Harness Threading: Assemble in accordance with manufacturers instructions. If no manufacturer
instructions are given, use the methods shown in Figures 2-6.
GCR - 70
General
9. Cars and Equipment
GCR - 71
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.19. DRIVER’S SAFETY EQUIPMENT
All required driver’s safety equipment must be worn at all times while on track. The participant agrees that
the participant bears the ultimate responsibility at all times to ensure the safety of participant’s driver’s
safety equipment, and compliance with all SCCA rules, regulations, and agreements, including but not limited to those contained in the GCR.
A. Annual Inspection
At or before the first event of the calendar year, all driver’s safety equipment will be inspected by a licensed
scrutineer. The scrutineer performing the inspection shall affix a dated, non-removable sticker or decal on
the left side of helmets that comply with Section 9.3.20.C.2., to indicate that all driver’s safety equipment
has been inspected and is in compliance with this section. This sticker or decal, which shall be placed on
the helmet in a manner such that it is visible from outside the car with the driver seated and belted in the
normal driving position, may be checked by grid or scrutineering personnel on the starting grid. The presence of other externally visible driver’s safety equipment (gloves, balaclava, and suit) may also be checked
by grid or scrutineering personnel on the starting grid.
B.Reinspection
Throughout the racing season, a check of the condition and legality of driver’s safety equipment should
periodically be done by scrutineers in impound by group or class with the concurrence of the Race Director
or Chief Steward.
C. Required Equipment
The following required equipment shall be in good condition and free of defects, holes, cracks, frays, etc.
1. Driving suits that effectively cover the body from the neck to the ankles and wrists. One piece
suits are highly recommended. All suits shall bear an SFI 3.2A/1 or higher certification label or
FIA 1986 Standard or FIA Standard 8856-2000 homologation label. Underwear of fire resistant
material shall be used, but is optional with suits carrying an FIA Standard 1986 Standard or FIA
Standard 8856-2000 label or SFI 3-2A/5 or higher (e.g., /10, /15, /20) certification label.
2
Crash helmets approved by the Snell Foundation with Snell sticker 2010 or later Special Application SA2010/SAH2010, or SA2015/SAH2015, or by the SFI with a SFI Sticker SFI 31.1, or by
the FIA standard 8860-2004 or later, or British Standards Institute BS6658-85 type A/FR. Each
driver’s helmet shall be labeled with a minimum of the driver’s name. The use of a head and neck
restraint system that has been certified in accordance with SFI 38.1 or FIA 8858-2002 or 8858GCR - 72
2010 is required; an SFI 38.1 or FIA 8858-2002 or 8858-2010 label must be properly affixed to
the device. Accident damaged helmets should be sent by the driver or his or her representative to
the Snell Memorial Foundation, 3628 Madison Ave., North Highland, CA. 95660 (ph.) 916-3315073 (attn. Edward B. Becker). Details of the accident should be included. Freon based total loss
helmet cooling systems are not allowed.
3. Gloves made of leather and/or accepted fire resistant material containing no holes.
4. Socks made of accepted fire resistant material.
5. Face coverings (balaclavas) of accepted fire resistant material for drivers with beards or
mustaches. Hair protruding from beneath a driver’s helmet shall be completely covered by fire
resistant material. As an alternative to balaclavas, a full helmet skirt of accepted fire resistant
material may be used. Double-layer balaclavas are recommended. If balaclavas are used voluntarily, they shall be of accepted fire resistant material.
6. Goggles or face shields, preferably made of new impact resistant materials, for drivers of open
cars.
7. A driver’s restraint system meeting SCCA standards (See section 9.3. Driver’s Restraint System)
shall be used at all times while on the track.
8. Shoes, with uppers of leather and/or nonflammable material that at a minimum cover the instep.
Ventilation pinholes by the manufacturer are allowed.
9.3.20.ELIGIBILITY
Eligibility for class entered–compliance with the GCR and Specification Books.
9.3.21. EXHAUST SYSTEM
Shall be directed away from the body and shall terminate at or behind a point which is equidistant from the
front and rear hubs. Legends Cars exhaust systems must comply with the official Legends Cars technical
specifications.
9.3.22. FIRE SYSTEM
All cars shall be equipped with an On-Board Fire System except T3, T4 STL, Spec Miata, and Improved
Touring.
A. On-Board Fire System Requirements
Cars registered after 1/1/09 shall comply with the following onboard fire system requirements:
• Systems certified to SFI specification 17.1, or
• Those listed by the FIA on Technical List No. 16
The following information must be visible of the unit:
• Certification label
•Capacity
• Type of extinguishing agent
• Weight, or volume, of the extinguishing agent
The following is acceptable for cars registered before 1/1/09:
On-board fire systems shall use Halon 1301 or 1211, with a five pound minimum capacity (by weight).
Alternatively, on-board fire systems may use AFFF or equivalent surfactant foam material, 2.25 liter minimum capacity (by volume). All AFFF fire system bottles, except non-pressurized AFFF systems with CO2
propellant, shall incorporate a functional pressure gauge and shall be marked with the manufacturer’s recommended “filled weight.” CO2 cartridge propellant fire extinguishing systems are permitted provided that
the seal of the manufacturer specified CO2 cartridge is not punctured and the fire bottle is equal to the
weight specified by the system manufacturer.
Cars shall meet the following regardless of registration date:
1. The fire system cylinder shall be securely mounted in such a manner that it can be checked
during a technical inspection and may be removed for weighing periodically for compliance to
full weight shown on the cylinder. (Weight is without valve assembly.)
GCR - 73
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
2. Manual or automatic release is allowed. The release mechanism shall be within reach of the
driver when belted in the car.
3. All on-board fire systems shall be identified with a circle “E” decal.
a. In GT and Production cars, two circle “E” decals may be required–one at the release location
and the second on the outside bodywork in line with or as near to the release location as
possible.
b. In Formula and Sports Racing cars, a circle “E” decal shall be located on the outside bodywork as near to the release location as possible.
4. There shall be a minimum of two nozzle locations–one in the driver’s compartment and one in
either the engine area or the fuel cell area. The nozzles shall be suitable for the type of extinguishing agent used.
5. The firing safety pin(s) shall be removed from all on-board fire systems prior to going on track. It
is recommended that a warning tag be attached to the safety pin to remind the driver to remove
the safety pin before entering the racing surface.
6. All fire systems shall be serviced according to manufacturer’s specifications.
B. Hand-Held Fire Extinguisher Requirements
The following are acceptable for Touring, Spec Miata, Super Touring and Improved Touring cars:
1. Halon 1301, 1211 or Dupont FE-36, two (2) pound minimum capacity by weight.
2. Dry chemical, two (2) pound minimum with a positive indicator showing charge. Chemical: 10
BC Underwriters Laboratory rating, potassium bicarbonate (Purple K) recommended, 1A10BC
Underwriters Laboratory rating multipurpose, ammonium phosphate and barium sulfate or
Monnex.
3. AFFF (aqueous film forming foam) or equivalent surfactant foam material, 2.25 liter minimum
capacity (by volume). All AFFF fire bottles shall incorporate a functional pressure gauge.
4. The fire extinguisher shall be securely mounted in the cockpit. All mounting brackets shall be
metal and of the quick release type.
5. The circle “E” decal of 9.3.23.A.3.b (above) shall not appear on cars which have only a handheld fire extinguisher.
9.3.23. FIREWALL AND FLOOR
Firewall and floor shall prevent the passage of flame and debris into the driver’s compartment. Belly pans
shall be vented to prevent the accumulation of liquids, except composite/honeycomb structures. All rearengined Formula cars are required to have an undertray, from driver’s foot area to the firewall, for protection of legs and torso. Insulation or heat-resistant material may be added to the interior (cockpit) surfaces
of the firewall, floor, and transmission tunnel.
9.3.24. FORMULA CAR VISIBILITY
The driver of all Formula cars shall have a field of vision of not less than ninety (90) degrees to either side
(total of 180 degrees) with both eyes by turning his or her head, but without lifting his or her head forward
or otherwise moving from the normal driving position. Plexiglas or similar uncolored transparent material
may be substituted for existing bodywork. “Token” portholes do not satisfy this requirement. Only a structural member such as a roll bar brace or frame tube may interrupt the required field of vision.
9.3.25. FUEL
GCR - 74
9. Cars and Equipment
Permitted fuel is herein defined as gasoline or diesel fuel meeting specified dielectric constant standards and
not containing any prohibited substance in excess of stated limits. Gasoline is a mixture of refined hydrocarbons. Gasoline is an electrical insulator and its relative effectiveness as an insulator is represented by its
dielectric constant (D.C.). The D.C. of gasoline will be measured by an SCCA Fuel Check Meter (Precision
Fuel Testing G-01 Fuel Analyzer, Kavlico FT-K01 Fuel Tester or Digatron DT47-FT fuel tester). The 0 (zero)
calibration of the SCCA Fuel Check Meter is set against reagent or laboratory grade cyclohexane. Gasoline
may be tested and certified at SCCA events by the determination of the dielectric constant using the SCCA
Fuel Check meter and through the application of various chemical analyses. If a competitor’s fuel is not
compliant with the fuel standards below, the Race Director or Chief Steward shall take appropriate action
(Chief Steward’s Action or Request for Action). In addition, fuel may be subject to laboratory testing.
If a car is required to run diesel fuel, it will be noted on its specification line. Diesel fuels must have a dielectric constant between 2.2 and 4.9 (G-01 or FTK-01) or between 24 and 55 (DT-47FT). Diesel fuels are
subject to the same restrictions on prohibited substances as gasoline.
Any participant may protest the fuel in any car to determine compliance with the provisions of these fuel
rules. In addition to the standard protest fee, a bond shall be collected from the protestor and the driver
or entrant of the protested car. The bond covers the cost of laboratory testing of the fuel sample(s) and
transportation costs. The laboratory testing shall be limited to determining the presence of any prohibited
substance in excess of the allowed amount. If the test is negative, the protestor’s bond will be used to
pay the laboratory fees and transportation. If the test is positive (any banned substance present in excess
of the stated limits), the protested driver’s or entrant’s bond will be used to pay the laboratory fees and
transportation costs. The unused bond will be returned. In the case of a CSA or RFA resulting in laboratory testing, the organizing Region shall take the role of the protestor. If the laboratory results show that
the protested fuel is non-compliant, the Chief Steward or the SOM shall assess appropriate penalties. The
amount of each bond is $250.
GCR - 75
General
All cars shall use fuel, as defined below, unless a specific exemption is made in the provisions for a specific
category/class.
A. Permitted Fuel
9. Cars and Equipment
Fuel Standards
Classes
Type
All other
classes
DC max
Gasoline with or without added oil
G-01 or FTK-01: 15
DT-47FT: 166
The use of any substance in the following table in excess of the stated limit is prohibited either in fuel or
otherwise introduced into the engine.
Chemical Compounds Prohibited or Restricted in SCCA Race Fuels
Compounds
Examples
Maximum Weight or
Percentage
By Weight Allowed
Total Aldehydes
Acetaldehyde, Acrolein, Formaldehyde
1.0%
Benzene
0.75%
3,3-dimethyl-1-butene
0.05%
Total ethers except MTBE
1,4 Dioxane, Furan, Tetrahydrofuran
0.05%
MTBE
Total Dienes(Diolefins)
3.0%
1,3 Butadiene, Isoprene
1.0%
Ethanol
Total Epoxides
10.0%
Ethylene oxide, Propylene oxide
0.05%
Methanol
1.0%
Total Metals
(elemental,non-lead)
Manganese (e.g.,MMT), Boron, Chromium
0.05 gm/gal
Total Lead (elemental)
Lead (e.g.,TML, TEL)
8.0 gm/gal
Total Nitrogen Compounds
Nitromethane, Nitroethane. Nitropropane, and all aromatic nitrogen
compounds such as Nitrobenzene,
Ammonia, Amines and their salts,
Aniline, Hydrazine, Pyridine, Pyrrole,
Benzidine
0.05%
Styrene
Total Sulfur Compounds
1.0%
Dimethylsulfoxide, Thiophene
0.05%
B. Fuel Sample Acquisition
All cars shall be equipped with an accessible sampling port/valve/device located in a fuel line between the
fuel tank or fuel cell and the carburetors or fuel injection system or in an unused carburetor port to allow
safe acquisition of a fuel sample. If possible, the port/valve/device should be located outside the engine
compartment. The sampling port/ valve/device will be installed and used by the competitor to obtain the
sample without fuel leaking, spraying or squirting. Siphoning of fuel directly from the fuel tank or fuel cell
or removing a hose or line is not allowed.
Competitors whose cars are equipped with a factory fuel pressure test port or who have factory fuel pressure test equipment available are not required to have an additional fuel sampling port, providing the test
port is accessible and the competitor obtains the sample without fuel leaking, spraying or squirting.
Competitors will provide all the necessary and appropriate tools to obtain a fuel sample.
A tech observer and manned fire extinguisher will be at the car at the time the sample is taken and the
GCR - 76
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.26. FUEL CELL SPECIFICATIONS
All cars must be equipped with a safety fuel cell complying with these specifications, except for Touring,
Spec Miata, Improved Touring, production-based Vintage cars, or as otherwise specified in the GCR. All
safety fuel bladders shall be constructed and certified in accordance with the FIA FT-3 or higher (FT-3.5,
FT-5, etc.) or SFI 28.3 specifications. Fuel cells do not time out and have no expiration date. Alternatively,
safety fuel cells shall be constructed in accordance with FIA FT-3 or higher or SFI 28.3 specifications and
tested to those requirements by an independent facility as witnessed and certified by a Professional Engineer. The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Club Racing department for inclusion on a list
of approved suppliers. All safety fuel cells shall consist of a foam-filled fuel bladder enclosed in a metal
container at minimum.
There is no restriction of fuel cell capacity or dimensions of the fuel cell, except where otherwise specified.
The installation of more than one cell is permitted.
1.Installation
Internal body panels may be modified to accommodate the installation of fuel cells as long as modifications
serve no other purpose. If installation includes encroachment into the driver’s compartment, a metal bulkhead must prevent exposure of the driver to the fuel cell. The fuel cell must not be installed any closer to
the ground than 6 inches, unless enclosed within the bodywork or OEM floor pan.
a. There must be a metal bulkhead between the driver/passenger compartment and the compartment containing the fuel cell. This includes fuel cells that are flush mounted with driver/passenger
compartment panels or otherwise exposed to the driver/passenger compartment.
b. Fuel cells must be located within 12 inches of the standard tank. The 12 inch measurement is
taken from the perimeter of the stock and alternative fuel cell. Fuel filler location is unrestricted
with installation of a safety fuel cell.
2.Container
a. GT and Production Category
The bladder shall be installed in a container of .036 inch steel, or .059 inch aluminum that fully
surrounds the bladder.
b. Sports Racing Category and Formula Cars
The fuel bladder shall be completely surrounded by a container (which may also be a part of the
structure or bodywork of the car) to ensure rigid and secure mounting of the bladder and provide
additional protection. A minimum of .036 inch steel, .059 inch aluminum, or an approved equivalent is required for all vehicles.
3. Filler Cap and Vents
A positive locking fuel filler cap (no Monza/flip type) shall be used. Fuel pickup openings and lines, breather
vents, and fuel filler lines shall be designed and installed so that if the car is partially or totally inverted, fuel
shall not escape. Fuel filler necks, caps, or lids shall not protrude beyond the bodywork of the car.
If the fuel filler cap is located directly on the fuel cell, a check valve is not required, provided the filler cap
is a positive locking type and does not use an unchecked breather opening. If the filler cap is not located
on the fuel cell, a check valve must be installed on the fuel cell to prevent fuel from escaping if the cap and
filler neck are torn from the tank.
Fuel cell breathers shall vent outside the car. The cell need not incorporate a drain fitting. It is recommended
that all lines, filler openings, and vents be incorporated in a single fitting located at the top of the fuel cell.
In Formula and Sports Racing cars registered prior to January 1, 1994, the filler cap and neck are exempt
from the bulkhead requirements of 9.3.27.1.a.
Factory installed gas tank evaporative emission control devices must be removed from all Production and
GT Category cars. Fuel cell vents must not discharge into the driver/passenger compartments, even if installed that way by the manufacturer. The fuel system cannot vent through the roll bar/roll cage structure.
4. Rotary Molded Cell
The use of rotary molded fuel cells not having a bladder, or not contained in a metal can, is allowable in
those cars that do not require the use of a fuel cell, but where they are an allowed option.
GCR - 77
General
competitor will name the fuel brand and type for notation on the fuel sample bottle label.
9. Cars and Equipment
5. Fuel Tank Filler Doors
On vehicles where a stock fuel tank is allowed, the unleaded fuel filler trap door and restrictor plate in
the filler neck may be removed.
9.3.27. FUEL, OIL, AND WATER LINES
All fuel, oil, and water lines, including gauge and vent lines, that pass into or through the driver/passenger
compartment, shall be of steel tube or metal braided hoses or bulkheaded (Cool suit lines are exempt). The
driver shall not be exposed to header tanks. Heat shielding between fuel/oil lines and fuel/oil filters and
exhaust components is strongly recommended.
9.3.28. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
Each car shall carry identification numbers and class letters per A and B, below, SCCA logos per C, below;
and any markings required by the Supplemental Regulations.
A. Numbers and Class Letters
Numbers shall be placed on the front and both sides of the car so that they are legible. All Formula cars with
a rear wing shall have legible numbers on each rear wing side plate. Numbers may be 1, 2 or 3 digits. 3 digit
numbers must start with the number “1”. Class letters shall be placed on both sides of the car so that they
are legible. Rear numbers and class letters are recommended. Cars running in multiple classes must clearly
identify which class and weight they are running. The numeral “1” shall be exclusively reserved for the
current national champion in each class for national events. The numeral “1” will be reserved until the end
of the period for submitting advanced or pre-event entries, and then will be released. If 2 or more national
champions are entered in the same run group, the first to enter shall have preference.
B. Size of Numbers and Class Letters
Numbers shall be at least 8 inches high, with a 1.5 inch stroke on a contrasting background (rear winged
Formula cars shall have as large a number as possible on their rear wing side plates). Metallic (reflective)
numbers and class letters are prohibited. The distance between 2 numbers shall be at least as wide as the
stroke of the numbers. Class letters shall be at least 4 inches high, with a 1/2 inch stroke on a contrasting
background.
C. SCCA Logo
Each driver’s suit shall display the official SCCA uniform patch logo (see figures 2 and 3). Each car competing in an event shall display the official SCCA field logo (see figures 4 and 5) unobstructed and prominently
on both sides of the car and adjacent to the side numbers. A third logo shall be displayed on the front of
the car unobstructed and prominently near the front number. The logo shall be on the spoiler of cars so
equipped.
D. Displaying Minimum Weight and Restrictor Size Type
Except for classes in which there is only 1 required minimum weight (e.g., ASR, FE, FS, FST, FV, SM5,
SRF), all cars shall display the correct minimum weight specified in the current GCR in a manner that is
clearly legible to the scrutineers at the scales. Cars that are run in more than one class must display the
correct minimum weight for each class so that it is clear which weight applies to each class. Any car required to run a restrictor must display the restrictor size and type in a manner that is clearly legible to the
scrutineers. If the car also displays a minimum weight, it is recommended that the restrictor information be
located near the displayed minimum weight.
GCR - 78
General
9. Cars and Equipment
Logos and decals of sanctioning bodies other than SCCA shall be removed or covered (car and driver’s
suit).
Vintage cars when participating in vintage events may use the four (4) inch diameter “SCCA Wire Wheel”
in place of the current field logo.
GCR - 79
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.29. INSIDE NET
An inside net running between the main roll hoop and the dash is recommended for all production-based
cars and two-seater Sports Racing cars (see figure 6). It is recommended that the lower strand of the net
pass the shoulder and run horizontally from the cage to the dash. The upper strand should pass the Cg
of the helmet in the side view. The net should run parallel to the center of the car in plain view and be as
close to the seat as possible. It is recommended that the net be tensioned tightly and have a way to quickly
disconnect it in case the driver needs to exit through the car in an emergency. Metal collars, or some other
equivalent method, should be used to keep the strands of the net from moving along the roll cage. If possible, the recommended mounting method is to wrap the net strands around the back of the seat and attach them to the main hoop upright. However, teams should consult the net manufacturer to verify their
recommended method of mounting.
9.3.30. LEAKAGE AND CAPS
There shall be no visible fluid leaks.
9.3.31. LIGHTS
All non-Formula cars shall have two operating red brake lights. All Formula (open wheel) and Sports Racing
cars shall be equipped with a red taillight of at least the equivalent illumination power of a 15 watt bulb.
This light shall be mounted as high as possible on the centerline of the car and be clearly visible from the
rear. The taillight shall be illuminated when ordered by the Race Director or Chief Steward. Light assemblies
shall be considered one light for the purposes of this rule, irrespective of the number of individual lamps
the assembly may contain. Light assemblies may perform both rain and brake light functions provided they
have two distinct illumination levels. An optional tail light (“rain light”), as described above, may be added
to cars in all other classes. Lights that function as a strobe lights are not permitted except that in Formula
and Sports Racer classes, the tail light may strobe when directed to be used as a rain light.
Exposed glass headlights shall be taped. Rear brake lights may be taped with transparent tape. Turn signals,
front parking lights, backup lamps, and side marker lights may be taped or painted. Lights mounted on or
below the bumper shall be removed, and all resulting holes shall be covered to prevent air passage through
said holes. Lights mounted within the bumper may be removed or covered and any resulting holes shall be
covered to prevent air passage through said holes.
9.3.32. LOSS OF BODYWORK
All major body components such as front and rear hoods, fenders, doors, and windscreens shall be maintained in normal position throughout the competition. If loss of bodywork is a safety hazard, the car may be
black-flagged. A car completing a competition with bodywork missing may be penalized.
9.3.33. MASTER SWITCH
All cars, except Touring, and B-Spec shall be equipped with a master switch easily accessible from outside
the car. Spec Racer Fords shall be wired per RFSRII. The master switch shall be installed directly in either
battery cable and shall cut all electrical circuits but not an on-board fire system. All terminals of the master
switch shall be insulated to prevent shorting out. It shall be clearly marked by the international marking of
a spark in a blue triangle and mounted in a standard location. Off position shall be clearly indicated at the
master switch location. The standard locations shall be as follows:
GCR - 80
General
9. Cars and Equipment
A.Formula and Sports Racing Cars–In proximity to the right-hand member of the roll bar, but in a location so that it cannot be operated accidentally. It can be mounted on a bracket welded to the inside
of the upright member or mounted so that the operating lever or knob is outside of the body panel
immediately in-board of the upright member. This is the standard location on Formula cars built to
the Constructor’s Association requirements for Formula 1.
B. Closed Sports Racing Cars, Production Cars, Improved Touring and GT Cars–In front of the windshield on either the cowl or on top of the fender, but close enough to the windshield to be accessible
if the car is overturned. Alternatively, it may be mounted below the center of the rear window or
on a bracket welded, clamped or bolted to the roll cage or dash, easily accessible through the open
window. (Drilling of holes in roll cage to attach the bracket is prohibited.)
C. Open Production, GT, and Improved Touring Cars–May exercise a choice among the above locations.
9.3.34. MIRRORS
Shall provide driver visibility to the rear of both sides of the car.
9.3.35. NON-METALLIC WHEEL/CHASSIS CONSTRUCTION
Non-metallic wheel construction is prohibited. Non-metallic chassis construction is prohibited, except in
ASR, P1, P2, S2, FS and FA. New chassis of non-metallic composite construction shall be proven to meet
FIA specifications for non-metallic composite chassis prior to being submitted to the SCCA for homologation. Contact the SCCA national office for a list of the relevant FIA specifications/SCCA requirements.
9.3.36. OIL AND OIL ADDITIVES
Any oil or oil additive may be used. Oil additives are defined as: Any liquid or particulate compound(s)
delivered into the engine via the engine oil for the purpose of friction/temperature reduction, and/or metal
surface conditioning (i.e. PTFE resins (Teflon, “Slick-50”), Molybdenum Disulfide, etc.).
9.3.37.OIL CATCH TANKS, FILTERS, AND BREATHERS
Oil holding tanks and engine breathers, whether directly or indirectly ventilating the crankcase, and all transmission/transaxle breathers shall be equipped with oil catch tanks. Minimum catch tank capacity shall be
one U.S. quart for the engine and transmission/transaxle. Oil holding tanks and oil filters may be mounted
in the driver/passenger compartment. A metal bulkhead shall prevent exposure of the driver to oil spillage.
Oil catch tanks shall vent into the engine compartment or outside the driver’s compartment. A crankcase
vacuum breather that passes through the oil catch tank(s) to exhaust systems or vacuum devices that
connect directly to exhaust systems is prohibited.
9.3.38. ROLL CAGE/ROLL BAR
Shall comply with Section 9.4., Driver Protection Structures.
9.3.39. SCATTERSHIELDS/CHAIN GUARDS
The installation of scattershields or explosion-proof bell housings shall be required on all cars (except Spec
Miata, Touring and Improved Touring) where the failure of the clutch or flywheel could create a hazard to
the driver. Chain drive cars shall be fitted with a protective case/shield to retain the chain in case of failure.
Minimum material specifications are:
.125 inch SAE 4130 alloy steel
.250 inch mild steel plate
GCR - 81
9. Cars and Equipment
.250 inch aluminum alloy
NHRA or SFI approved flexible shields.
9.3.40.SEATS
The driver’s seat shall be a one-piece bucket-type seat and shall be securely mounted, so as to provide fore/
aft and lateral support. Passenger seat back, if a folding seat, shall be securely bolted or strapped in place.
Mounting structures for racing seats may attach to the floor, cage and or center tunnel. Seat mounting
points forward of the main hoop, between the center line of the car and the driver’s side door bar and
rearward of the front edge of the seat bottom are not considered cage attachment points in classes with
limitations on the number of attachments.
A system of head rest to prevent whiplash and rebound, and also to prevent the driver’s head from striking the underside of the main hoop shall be installed on all vehicles. Racing seats with integral headrests
satisfy this requirement.
The head rest on non-integral seats shall have a minimum area of 36 square inches and be padded with a
minimum of one inch thick padding. It is strongly recommended that padding meet SFI spec 45.2 or FIA
Sports Car Head Rest Material. The head rest shall be capable of withstanding a force of two-hundred (200)
lbs. in a rearward direction. The head rest support shall be such that it continues rearward or upward from
the top edge in a way that the driver’s helmet can not hook over the pad.
9.3.41. STEERING WHEEL LOCKS
Steering wheel lock devices shall be removed or disabled (except Touring).
9.3.42. STEERING WHEELS
Wood rim steering wheels are prohibited.
9.3.43. SUSPENSION AND STEERING
Suspension and steering shall be of suitable design and in good working order. Four wheel steering is
prohibited. Unless specifically permitted, non-metallic suspension control arms, locating links, toe/steering
links and pushrods are prohibited.
9.3.44.TIRES
Tires shall be 124 (“U”) mph rated or better unless otherwise specified or controlled.
In the Improved Touring, Super Touring, American Sedan, Spec Miata and Touring categories, any U rated,
or better, DOT approved tire are required. Re-grooving of tires by any method once the tire has left the
manufacturer is not permitted. Recapped, or re-grooved tires are not allowed. Tire size is unrestricted unless
otherwise stated. The only modifications allowed to tires are having treads “shaved” or “trued.”
9.3.45. TIRE WARMERS
Pre-heating of tires prior to competition by electrically heated covers or similar means is prohibited on the
grid.
9.3.46. TONNEAU AND BOOT COVERS
Tonneau covers and boot covers shall be removed.
9.3.47. TOWING EYES
All cars without an exposed roll bar shall have a towing eye or strap, front and rear that does not dangerously protrude from the bodywork when the car is racing, to be used for flat towing or hauling the vehicle.
A removable towing eye carried inside the car is not acceptable, except in formula cars and Sports Racing
cars. These towing eyes or straps shall be easily accessible without removal or manipulation of bodywork
or other panels. Towing eye minimum ID 2 inches.
The required tow eyes must be strong enough to tow the car from a hazard such as a gravel trap. Front
tow eye may be mounted in the driver/passenger side window openings, or any location forward of the
windshield. If mounted in the driver/passenger side window openings, it must be attached to the forward
roll cage down tube as close to the base of the windshield as possible. If the front tow eye is located in
the side window openings there shall be one on each side of the car. Rear tow eyes must be accessible
rearward of the rear axle centerline.
In addition, for Formula and Sports Racing cars, if the main hoop is faired in, the fairing shall have access
holes to allow the insertion of a bar or strap to allow the car to be lifted by a wrecker.
9.3.48.VENTILATION
GCR - 82
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.49.WEIGHT
All cars shall meet or exceed the minimum weight specified with driver, exactly as they come off the race
circuit, at the conclusion of any race or qualifying session
9.3.50. WHEEL FANS
Wheel fans are permitted, unless otherwise restricted.
9.3.51. WHEEL RIM WIDTH
Wheel rim width shall be measured at the base of the bead seat.
9.3.52.WINDOWS
Windows shall be clear or uncolored, except in Production, Super Tour¬ing and Touring if no factory or
aftermarket clear windows are available. Officials may require the replacement of windshields that are
considered a safety hazard. Factory (OEM Manufacturer) and FIA GT3/GT4, race prepared cars with fixed
Lexan front door windows may race with windows as delivered and noted on the Spec Line. All other closed
cars shall run with both front door windows fully open.
9.3.53. WINDOW SAFETY NETS
Window safety nets shall be used on the driver’s side window of all closed cars unless these are factory
(OEM manufacturer) and FIA GT3/GT4 race prepared cars with fixed Lexan front door windows as noted on
Specification Line. All window nets shall meet SFI Specification 27.1., and shall bear an “SFI Spec 27.1.,
Label” to that effect. (Note: Window nets need not be dated.) The window net shall be equipped with a
quick-release device and when released it shall fall down, thus not having to be flipped up on the roof.
Nets shall be attached to the roll cage; plastic buckles, cable ties, hose clamps, and elastic cords are not
permitted. Holes in the roll cage to accommodate either support rod are unacceptable unless bushed and
welded completely. Refer to figures 7 and 8, “Proper Window Net Installation,” for additional information
on mounting methods. Closed cockpit Sports Racing cars may use arm restraints in lieu of a window net.
Legends Cars are not required to have window net.
GCR - 83
General
Holes for ventilation in quarter or rear windows on Production or GT cars are not allowed, unless specified in PCS or GTCS, respectively.
9. Cars and Equipment
9.3.54. WINDSHIELDS/WINDSHIELD CLIPS/REAR WINDOW STRAPS
Polycarbonate windshields such as Lexan are allowed except in Improved Touring, American Sedan, B-Spec,
Spec Miata, and Touring. Alternate windshields must be of 6mm minimum thickness.
Windshield safety clips and rear window safety straps are required on all closed cars, except on American
Sedan, B-Spec, Spec Miata, Touring, Improved Touring, and Super Touring, where they are optional. Alternatively, no clips or straps are required if polycarbonate windshields and rear windows are securely bolted
to the frame.
3 clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the body at the top of the windshield.
2 clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the cowl and extend over the bottom edge
of the windshield. Clips shall be spaced a minimum of 12 inches apart.
It is recommended that 3 – 1 inch wide strips of steel or aluminum be installed behind the windshield to
support it from collapsing inwards if it becomes damaged. The rear window shall be secured with 2 metal
straps (1 inch wide x 1/8 inch thick) bolted or riveted to the body at the top and bottom of the rear window.
9.4.
ROLL CAGES FOR GT AND PRODUCTION BASED CARS
All cars must utilize a roll cage compliant with the following specifications. These specifications apply to
all vehicles registered (issued an SCCA logbook) after 1/1/08. Cars registered before 1/1/08 may continue
to compete with their previous roll cage as specified in Appendix I or comply with the following specifications. Cars registered as Production class cars prior to 1/1/08 may continue to use their existing roll cage
per Appendix J or comply with the following specifications.
A.DEFINITION
The roll cage consists of the main hoop, front hoop, side protection, and braces as specified in these
rules.
B. MAIN HOOP
1. The main hoop (behind the driver) must be the full width of the cockpit for all cars. It must be
one continuous length of tubing with smooth bends and no evidence of crimping or wall failure.
The main hoop must maintain a single plane.
a. On all closed cars, the main hoop must be as close as possible to the roof and “B” pillars.
b. Open cars without the windshield frame may use an asymmetric main hoop. The main hoop
must be full width to the passenger side of the car. On the passenger side of the car the
hoop must be at least as high as the top of the rear corner of the door as illustrated in figure
9.
GCR - 84
General
9. Cars and Equipment
The main hoop must be high enough that a straight line drawn from the top of the main hoop
to the top of the front hoop would pass over the driver’s helmet and steering wheel when
the driver is seated in the normal driving position. Additionally, the top of the main hoop
must be at least 2 inches above the driver’s helmet as illustrated in figure 10.
c.On open cars retaining the windshield frame the main hoop must be full height for the entire
width of the hoop. The top of the main hoop must be at least 2 inches above the driver’s
helmet as illustrated in figure 11.
GCR - 85
9. Cars and Equipment
2. Main Hoop Bracing
a. Main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace. The brace shall either be in the plane of the
main hoop, or extend from the top of one rear brace (described in 9.4.B.2.c) to the bottom
of the opposite rear brace. Automobiles with mid mounted engines can have the lower
mounting point attach to the frame of the automobile within six inches of the main hoop. In
the case of braces in the plane of the main hoop, the brace must span at least 50% of the
width of the main hoop, and at least 75% of the height of the main hoop as shown in figure
12.
b. Cars must incorporate a main hoop horizontal brace at the approximate level of the driver’s
shoulders but not lower than the shoulder belt mounting point as described in section 9.3.
Driver’s Restraint Systems. If a double-diagonal “X” brace is used in the plane of the main
hoop, a half-width horizontal brace may be used behind the driver’s seat to mount the seat
back and shoulder harness as shown in figure 13.
GCR - 86
General
9. Cars and Equipment
c.Cars must have 2 braces extending to the rear from the main hoop and attaching to the
frame or chassis. Braces must be attached as near as possible to the top of the main hoop
(not more than 6 inches below the top), and at an included angle of at least 30 degrees.
d. Open cars must have 2 braces extending forward from the main hoop and attaching to the
front hoop, not more than 6 inches below the top of the front and main hoop. It is recommended that the front and rear braces attach to the main hoop as close as possible to each
other.
e. On cars where the rear window/bulkhead prohibits the installation of rear braces (e.g. Honda
del Sol), the main hoop shall be attached to the body by plates welded to the cage and
bolted to the stock shoulder harness mounting points. This installation design must incorporate a diagonal bar connecting the top of the main hoop to the lower front passenger
side mounting point (Petty Bar). Alternatively, the rear window may be removed and a
clear, lexan replacement installed. The rear cage braces may pass through this replacement
window and through the engine cover or bodywork to allow connection to the frame or
unibody. Such allowances shall be noted on the car’s specification line.
C. FRONT HOOP
1. Roll cages may be of two designs, low front hoop or high front hoop. All closed top cars and cars
that retain the windshield frame must have a high front hoop design. Open cars may incorporate
a high or low front hoop design. High front hoop are also referred to as side hoops.
a. Closed cars
The front hoop (side hoop) must follow the line of the A-pillars to the top of the windshield
and be connected by horizontal bars to the top of the main hoop on each side (as close
to the roof as possible). Instead of a single front hoop, two side hoops (down tubes) may
be used. Alternatively, a top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main hoop to
the windshield with forward down tubes following the A-pillars to the floor may be used.
Regardless of which one of the two approved tubing configurations there shall be a tube
connecting the two A-pillar tubes at the top of the windshield.
b. Open cars
The height of the front hoop (per section 9.4.B.1.b) must be consistent across the full width
of the cockpit.
c. Front Hoop Bracing
GCR - 87
9. Cars and Equipment
All open cars with a high front hoop and all closed cars except those competing in the T4,
Improved Touring, Spec Miata, and B-Spec classes must incorporate a horizontal front hoop
brace at the approximate level of the dashboard. It is recommended that cars competing in
T4, Improved Touring, and Spec Miata classes also have the front hoop brace.
2. One tube must extend, from each front down tube, forward to the firewall or through the firewall
except in vehicles in Improved Touring, Spec Miata, Touring, and B-Spec. This tube, one on each
side, must connect to the chassis at a point not more than 12 inches forward of the front axle
centerline.
3. Cars competing in Improved Touring, Spec Miata, Touring, and B-Spec may extend one tube,
from each front down tube, forward to the firewall, bulkhead or wheel well, but not penetrating
any panel.
D. SIDE PROTECTION
Two side tubes connecting the front and main hoops across both door openings are mandatory. Tubes that
are welded to any part of the same mounting plate are considered to be connected to one another (see
9.4.E.3 below). NASCAR-style side protection or one bar bisecting another to form an “X” is permitted.
Door side tubes may extend into the front door. In Improved Touring, Spec Miata, Touring, and B-Spec
the door window glass, window operating mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest, map pockets, wiring
harnesses for door locks, windows, power mirrors, seat wiring, etc., and inside door latch/lock operating
mechanism may be removed and the inner door structural panel may be modified, but not removed only if
the door bars extend into the door cavity. The stock outside door latch/lock operating mechanism shall not
be removed or modified unless specifically authorized in the category rules. All categories except Production and GT shall not remove or modify stock side impact beams unless specifically authorized.
E. ROLL CAGE ATTACHING POINTS
1. Improved Touring, Spec Miata, B-Spec AND Touring (excluding T1 and T2) classes–The roll
cage must attach to the vehicle structure within the passenger compartment in a minimum of 6
points and a maximum of 8 points as specified in these rules. Roll cage may not pass through
any structural member, except Miata rear main hoop braces may pass through the package tray.
2. All other classes–There is no limit on cage attachment points. The roll cage shall be integrated
into the frame or chassis.
3. Mounting Plates
a. Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall not be less than .080 inches thick
nor more than 0.25 inches thick. The maximum area of each mounting plate in the Improved
Touring, Spec Miata, and Touring classes shall be 144 square inches. Plates may be on
multiple planes but shall not be greater than 15 inches on any side.
b. The thickness of mounting plates bolted or riveted to the structure of the car must not be
less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that they attach to the chassis, and must
be backed up with a plate of equal size and thickness on the opposite side of the chassis
panel. The maximum area of each mounting plate must be 144 square inches. Plates may
be on multiple planes but shall not be greater than 15 inches on any side.
c. Fasteners for bolted or riveted mounting plates must be Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better with a
minimum diameter of 5/16”.
F.TUBING
1. Seamless or DOM mild steel tubing (SAE 1020 or 1025 recommended) or alloy steel tubing (SAE
4130 or T45) , or Docol R8 tubing must be used for all roll cage structures. Alloy and mild steel
tubing may not be mixed. ERW tubing is not allowed.
2. The following table shows the minimum allowed tubing outer diameter and wall thickness by
vehicle weight:
Tubing Size (inches)
(outer diameter x wall thickness)
1.375 x .080
Vehicle Weight
Up to 1700 lbs
GCR - 88
Tubing Size (inches)
(outer diameter x wall thickness)
1.500 x .095
1.625 x .080
1.50 x .120
1.750 x .095
2.00 x .080
Vehicle Weight
1701 - 2699 lbs
2700 lbs and up
3. For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is as raced without driver, fuel and
ballast. The minus tolerance for wall thickness should not be less than .010” below the nominal
thickness.
4. The required tubing elements must meet the material minimums set forth above. Optional tubing
elements may be any size.
5. The minus variance of tubing wall thickness due to manufacturing tolerances is limited to .010
inch.
6. Either an inspection hole between 3/16 and 1/4 inch diameter must be drilled in a non-critical
area of the front and rear hoops, as well as one of the supplemental braces to facilitate verification of wall thickness; or alternatively, wall thickness may be determined by non-invasive means
and noted in the logbook as inspected by such means.
G. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. All portions of the roll cage subject to contact by the driver must be padded with a minimum 1
inch of material. Padding that meets or exceeds SFI 45.1 or FIA 8857-2001 (curved padding),
or SFI 45.2 or FIA sports car head rest material (flat padding) specification is recommended.
2. No portion of the roll cage may have an aerodynamic effect by creating a vertical force.
3. The radius of all bends in the roll cage (measured at centerline of tubing) must not be less than
3 times the diameter of the tubing.
4. It is recommended that all joints of the roll cage be welded. All welding must include full penetration, no cold lap, no surface porosity, no crater porosity, no cracks, no whiskers, and so forth.
Welds shall be continuous around the entire tubular structure. Procedures for welding alloy steel
shall be in accordance with accepted industry practice. It is recommended that a certified AWS
D1.1 welder do all welding.
5. It is recommended that gussets be used at all joints. In Improved Touring, and Spec Miata a
maximum of 2 gussets per joint are allowed and must be no thicker than .125”.
6. Any number of additional tube elements is permitted within the boundaries of the cage structure.
Such tube elements may pass through any mandatory or optional bulkhead or panel separating
the driver/passenger compartment from the trunk/cargo area/fuel tank/fuel cell area provided the
bulkhead is sealed around such tube elements.
7.Removable roll cage bracing is acceptable in one of the following configurations:
a. If one tube fits inside another tube to facilitate removal, the removable portion must fit
tightly and must bottom by design, and at least 2 bolts must be used to secure each joint.
The telescoping section must be at least 8 inches long. The minimum bolt diameter is 3/8
inch.
b. Removable bracing may incorporate connectors of the double-lug, double ear-type, tapered,
or muff-type as shown in figures 14 and 15. The double-lug type must include a doubler,
gusset, or capping arrangement to avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
Double ear-type joints must be fully welded at all the mating surfaces.
GCR - 89
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
8.
MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED/FIA/MSA HOMOLOGATED ROLL CAGES
1. Cars may compete with FIA or FIA-Approved Test Houses homologated cages provided the cage
was built by the manufacturer or a manufacturer designated shop/team and approved for use. Cars
must have the FIA identification plate attached to the cage along with a letter from SCCA Technical
Services certifying the origins of the car, or confirmation that the cage was certified by an FIAApproved Test House.
2. Cars may compete with an approved MSA (Motor Sports Association UK) Roll Over Protection
System Certificate. All related engineering drawings and documents shall be submitted to SCCA
Technical Services. Cars must have MSA identification plate attached to the cage along with a letter
from SCCA Technical Services certifying the cage was approved by the MSA.
9.4.5. ROLL CAGES FOR FORMULA CARS AND SPORTS RACING CARS
All Formula and Sports Racing automobiles are required to have full roll cages. Cage may be of two designs,
low front hoop (top of steering wheel) or high front hoop (equal to rear hoop) but with no diagonal brace.
2 seat Sports Racing cars shall have full cockpit width cages. All tube frame automobiles shall have both
front and rear hoops formed of tubing per 9.4.5.E.4. On automobiles of full monocoque construction, a
fabricated sheet metal front hoop structure may be approved upon specific application to the SCCA. Closed
cockpit Sports Racing car cages may be constructed in accordance with 9.4 ROLL CAGES FOR GT AND
PRODUCTION BASED CARS. All Formula car and Sports Racing car roll cage tubing specifications must
meet the current GCR specifications, effective 1/1/98.
GCR - 90
9. Cars and Equipment
The main hoop shall be constructed of tubing per 9.4.5.E.4. The minimum bend radius shall not be
less than 3 times the tube diameter measured from the tube centerline. The main hoop shall not be
less than 2 inches above the driver’s helmet, seated normally and restrained by seat belt/shoulder
harness. A straight line drawn from the top of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall pass
over the driver’s helmet. On Formula cars and single seat Sports Racing cars the vertical members
of the main hoop shall not be less than 15 inches apart (inside dimension) at their attachment to the
chassis. If the hoop does not go to the belly pan, proper gussets and tube triangulation shall be used
under its attachment. On monocoque chassis the main hoop shall be welded to mounting plates not
less than .080” thick. It is important that these plates be attached to the chassis in such a way as
to spread the loads over a wide area. There shall be a plate of equal thickness on the inside of the
monocoque with solid rivets or bolts (5/16” minimum bolt diameter) through the non-ferrous metal
and/or composite material.
B. Front Hoop
Low front hoops must be no lower than the top of the steering wheel. It is recommended the hoop
extend to the belly pan. If not, it shall be attached to the chassis with gussets and triangulation in
order to spread the loads. In automobiles of full height (top of the steering wheel) monocoque or
composite construction, a steel cap plate, not less than .080” thick must be attached as a rub block.
C. Roll Cage Bracing
1. The main hoop must have 2 forward braces extending from the hoop and attached to the
frame, monocoque, or front hoop. Braces must be attached as near as possible to the top of
the hoop but must not be more than 6 inches below the top and at an included angle of at least
30 degrees. If these braces do not extend to the front hoop, an additional brace or gusset (14
gauge - .078” minimum thickness) must be installed between the lower frame rail and the upper
frame rail at the point of attachment of the forward hoop brace. If these braces do not extend to
the front hoop, an additional brace or gusset must be installed at the point of attachment to the
main rear hoop or lower frame rail or other major frame member in such a manner as to reinforce
the attachment point to help prevent collapse of the frame rail at the point of attachment. These
tubes shall be 1” x .080” minimum and gussets shall be 14 gauge - .078” minimum thickness.
Two (2) seat Sports Racing cars with full width main hoops must incorporate a lateral brace
to prevent lateral distortion of the of the hoop (See figure 12). All bracing on full width cages
must be the same diameter and wall thickness as the main hoop. Formula and single seat Sports
Racing cars under 1500 lbs. may use bracing with a minimum dimension of 1.0” diameter by
.080” wall thickness or Chromoly 4130 , or Docol R8 tubing 1.0” diameter by .065” wall thickness. F500 cars up to 875 pounds may use 1020 DOM mild steel roll cage bracing with a 1.0”
diameter by .065 wall thickness. Braces attached to monocoque chassis must be welded to
plates not less than .080” thick and backed up on the inner side by plates of equal thickness
using bolts of Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better with 5/16” minimum diameter.
2. The front hoop must have 2 braces near its top extending forward to protect the driver’s legs. It
is recommended that this bracing extend to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s feet; but in any
case it must be integrated into the chassis to provide substantial support for the front hoop. Full
width front hoop bracing shall be a minimum dimension of 1.0” diameter by .080” wall thickness
tubing.
Formula and single seat Sports Racing cars under 1500 lbs., may use tubing with a minimum
dimension of 1.0” diameter by 080” wall thickness or Chromoly 4130 , or Docol R8 tubing
1.0” diameter by .065” wall thickness. F500 cars up to 875 pounds may use 1020 DOM mild
steel roll cage bracing with a 1.0” diameter by .065 wall thickness. When monocoque construction is used as bracing for the front hoop, it must be approved on an individual basis. If a high
front hoop is used, it must be similar in shape to the rear hoop and have two horizontal tubes
connecting the top of the front hoop to the top of the main hoop. The bracing for the main hoop
remains the same.
3. Removable bracing must incorporate connectors of the double-lug, tapered, or muff-type as
shown in figures 14, and 15. The double-lug type must include a doubler, gusset, or capping
arrangement so as to avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
GCR - 91
General
A. Main Hoop
9. Cars and Equipment
D. Composite Chassis Safety Structures
1. The basic purpose of safety structures is to protect the driver. This purpose is the primary design
consideration.
2. All cars must have at least 2 roll over structures, but the use of titanium is prohibited.
The first roll over structure must be in front of the steering wheel, not more than 25cm forward
of the steering wheel rim, and at least as high as the top of the steering wheel rim.
The second roll over structure must not be less than 50cm behind the first. It must be high
enough for a line extending from the top of the front structure to the top of the rear structure to
pass over the driver’s helmet when he is seated normally in the car with his helmet on and the
seat belt fastened. This second structure behind the seat must be symmetrical about the lengthwise centerline of the car and comply with the following dimensions: The top of the roll bar must
be at least 2 inches (5cm) above the driver’s helmet when the driver is seated in a normal driving
position. No second roll structure on a composite chassis will be considered unless it contains a
main hoop having a minimum tubing size of 1.375” x .080” wall thickness. Supplemental braces
must have a minimum tubing size of 1.00” x .080” wall thickness.
The roll bar must be capable of withstanding the following stress loading applied simultaneously
to the top of the roll bar:
1.5 (X) laterally
5.5 (X) longitudinally in either direction
7.5 (X) vertically
where (X) = the minimum weight of the car.
The induced loads must be carried over into the primary structure of the chassis.
The ability of the roll bar to bear and distribute the load through the chassis must be demonstrated satisfactorily in test conditions to the SCCA. In conjunction with SCCA, manufacturers
of cars utilizing carbon fiber composite survival cell construction will be required to designate
repair locations capable of proper evaluation and damage repair. In the event of damage to the
chassis, repairs can only be made at these locations.
Proper documentation must be made in the vehicle logbook. No car will be allowed to compete
after damage without following this procedure.
E. Basic Design Considerations
1. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if the car turns over, runs into an
obstacle such as a guardrail or catch fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed to
withstand compression forces from the weight of the car coming down on the rollover structure
and to take fore/aft and lateral loads resulting from the car skidding along on its rollover structure.
2. No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic effect by creating a vertical thrust.
3. Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into the driver compartment.
4.Material:
a. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing (SAE 1010, 1020, 1025) or
equivalent, or alloy steel tubing (SAE, 4130 or T45), or Docol R8 tubing shall be used for all
roll cage structures. Proof of use of alloy steel is the responsibility of the entrant.
b. Minimum tubing sizes for all required roll cage elements (All dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Tubing Size (inches)
(outer diameter x wall thickness)
Up to 1700 lbs.
1.375 x 0.080
1701-2699 lbs.
1.50 x 0.095 or 1.625 x 0.080
GCR - 92
Vehicle Weight
Tubing Size (inches)
(outer diameter x wall thickness)
Over 2699 lbs.
1.50 x .120
1.75 x 0.095
2.00 x .080
c. For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is as raced without driver, fuel
and ballast. The minus tolerance for wall thickness should not be less than .010” below the
nominal thickness.
d. Either an inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no greater than 1/4 inch diameter
shall be drilled in a non-critical area of the front and rear hoop as well as the one of the
supplemental braces to facilitate verification of wall thickness; or alternatively, wall thickness may be determined by non-invasive means and noted in the logbook as inspected by
such means. Formula Cars and Sports Racing cars with alternate roll structures are not
required to have inspection holes, the wall thickness will be indicated on the back of the
homologation certificate.
5. One continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage hoop
(measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than 3 times the diameter of the tubing.
Whenever possible, the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in the case of
tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal
webs with support tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that
gussets be used.
6. All welding must include full penetration, no cold lap, no surface porosity, no crater porosity, no
cracks, no whiskers, and so forth. Welds shall be continuous around the entire tubular structure.
Procedures for welding alloy steel shall be in accordance with accepted industry practice. It is
recommended that a certified AWS D1.1 welder do all welding.
7. Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is permitted, but extreme care shall be
used in preparation of parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching joints.
8. Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact by the driver’s helmet (as
seated normally and restrained by seatbelt/shoulder harness) shall be padded with a non-resilient
material with a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch. Padding meeting SFI spec 45.1 or FIA 88572001 is strongly recommended.
9. Cars may compete with FIA homologated cages provided the cage was built by the manufacturer
or a manufacturer-designated shop/team and approved for use.
10.Single seat cars may compete with an approved MSA (Motor Sports Association UK) National
Single Seater Roll Structure Certificate. All related engineering drawings and documents shall
be submitted to SCCA Technical Services with the homologation request. SCCA homologation
will only be approved for designs that incorporate a main hoop having a minimum tubing size of
34mm x 2mm wall thickness.
F. Exceptions for Formula Cars and Sports Racing cars
Any roll hoop design which does not comply with the specifications in 9.4.5, will only be considered
if it is accompanied by engineering specifications signed by a registered engineer stating that the
design meets the stress loading requirements below. No alternate roll hoop will be considered unless
it contains a main hoop having a minimum tubing size of 1.375” x .080” wall thickness. The roll bar
must be capable of withstanding the following stress loading applied simultaneously to the top of the
roll bar: 1.5 (X) laterally, 5.5 (X) longitudinally in both the fore and aft directions, and 7.5 (X) vertically, where (X) = the minimum weight of the car.
G. Front Impact Attenuation
1. All formula cars registered or homologated with SCCA as of 1/1/1986 must have a front impact
attenuation device meeting at least one of the following criteria:
a.An FIA-approved front impact attenuation structure.
GCR - 93
General
9. Cars and Equipment
9. Cars and Equipment
b. A metallic structure, securely attached to the front bulkhead, with a minimum cross section
of 200 sq cm (31 sq in.), 40 cm (15.75 in.) forward of the clutch and brake pedals (not
depressed), constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge 6061-T4 or equivalent aluminum.
A non-metallic composite structure, securely attached to the front bulkhead or incorporated
into the nose piece, with a minimum cross section of 200 sq cm (31 sq. in.), 40 cm (15.75
in.) forward of the clutch and brake pedals (not depressed), constructed of a minimum of 6 mm
stabilized (e.g., honeycomb) material with inner and outer reinforcements of a minimum of 2
5-ounce laminate material (fiberglass, carbon, Kevlar, and so on).
2. Formula Vee and other formula cars using the VW sedan H-beam front suspension must satisfy
the requirements of section 9.1.1.C.3.A.10 or use any of the structures listed in 9.4.5.G.1.
3. Formula Mazda cars may use the spec front wing support as a front crush structure, or any of
the structures listed in G.1 above.
4. Radiators may be incorporated in impact attenuation structures.
5. Composite impact attenuation structures may incorporate carbon and/or kevlar regardless of any
class restrictions on materials.
6. Rear impact attenuation structures are strongly recommended for all formula cars, and may
incorporate the materials and/or construction techniques listed above for front impact attenuation structures.
7. Pre-1986 formula cars and all Sports Racing cars are strongly urged to use front and rear impact
attenuation structures, and may incorporate the materials and/or construction techniques for
front impact attenuation structures listed above.
GCR - 94
9. Cars and Equipment
General
NOTES:
GCR - 95
Appendix A. Administrative Glossary
APPENDIX A. ADMINISTRATIVE GLOSSARY
The following nomenclature, definitions, and abbreviations shall be used in the GCR, all Supplemental Regulations and Entry Forms, and for general use.
When used throughout the SCCA Club Racing Program, the GCR, and all event related material, the following
terms and abbreviation will be defined as indicated.
1. Federation Internationale de l’Automobile (FIA)
The International Federation of National Automobile Clubs.
2. Federation Internationale du Sport Automobile (FISA)
The International Sporting Commission which is appointed by the FIA to deal with competition matters.
3. Code Sportif Internationale of the FIA (The Code)
The International Sporting Code. FIA listed events sanctioned by the SCCA are also governed by The Code.
4. National Sporting Authority (ASN)
A national governing body of automobile competitions recognized by the FIA.
5. Automobile Competition Committee for the United States FIA, Inc. (ACCUS FIA)
The ASN of the United States of America.
The Automobile Competition Committee for the United States (ACCUS) is recognized by the FIA as the
ASN (National Sporting Authority) of the USA. Under the terms of the International Sporting Code of the
FIA, ACCUS is the sole authority for the control of international automobile competition in the USA, its
territories, and protectorates.
6. Club Racing Board
The SCCA Club Racing Club Racing Board (CRB) establishes rules and standards for scheduling, organizing,
and conducting SCCA sanctioned Club Racing events, and the licensing of drivers and officials. The CRB
supervises the execution of these rules and standards.
The CRB may appoint Advisory Committees to assist in reviewing member requests for rules development
and changes to individual vehicle specifications, and to solicit and make recommendations to the CRB
based on their research and knowledge. Advisory Committee members serve at the discretion of the CRB
and the Board of Directors.
7. SCCA Divisions
Geographic segments of the SCCA, established to facilitate administering SCCA policies, competitions,
events and the GCR under the direction of the CRB and its Advisory Committees.
8. Executive Steward
The individual appointed by the Board of Directors in each SCCA Division to supervise and administer SCCA
policies and standards for all Club Racing events.
9. Car (Automobile)
A self propelled land vehicle running on 4 wheels which are not in a line and which must be in contact with
the ground. At least 2 wheels affect the steering and at least 2 the propulsion.
10. Class
A group of cars, classified according to the provisions of the GCR.
11. Category
A combination of similar classes of cars.
12. Competition
A contest for driver and car, given a competitive nature by publication of results. Practice and qualifying for
starting positions are included in the term “competition”. A competition may also be referred to as a “race”.
13. Event
An entire program of competitions. Also known as a “race event”. This term includes all sessions run under
a single, or multiple sanction numbers.
14. Speed Event
A program of competitions when there is more one car on the course at a time, cars are driven at maximum
speeds, and a high level of driver and vehicle safety equipment is essential. See also “competition”, “sanction”, and “event”.
15. Non-Speed Event
An event in which the hazards do not exceed those encountered in legal travel on public roads, and which
therefore do not require drivers to hold Competition Licenses.
16. Sanction
The documentary authority, granted by the SCCA, to organize and hold a competition. This term also is
GCR - 96
Appendix A. Administrative Glossary
17. Session
A session begins when the first race car in the Race Group exits the grid onto the racing surface and ends
when the last running race car exits the racing surface. If the session is a race, see 6.10.3.A. for time limits.
18. Supplemental Regulations
Event regulations that establish the additional ground rules of competition and that are consistent with the
GCR. See 3.5.
19. Driver
A person named as the driver of a car in any competition. Also, any person who drives a race car in any
competition whether or not properly registered, entered, or named as the driver.
20. Entrant
A regular SCCA member who submits an entry to compete in an SCCA Club Racing event. The entrant may
also be the driver. If the entrant is not also the driver, the entrant has the same rights and responsibilities
as the driver except that he may not drive the competition vehicle on course nor may he substitute for the
driver in an SOM or Court of Appeals hearing.
21. Participant
Any person admitted to an event after having signed a SCCA authorized Release and Waiver of Liability
Agreement.
22. SCCA Conferences
Geographic segments of the SCCA established for the purpose of hosting U.S. Majors Tour events that
result in Conference Championships.
23. Region of Record
A driver may belong to an unlimited number of Regions. One shall be designated as his Region of Record.
24. Division of Record
A driver’s Division is determined by his designated Region of Record recorded in the membership files at
the National Office.
GCR - 97
General
used to describe the event organized under a single sanction number, which is evidence of that documentary authority.
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
APPENDIX B. ORGANIZATIONAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE
PROCEDURES FOR EVENTS
This section contains administrative procedures and information for members and race organizers. This
section mandates certain actions, but it may not be protested or appealed.
1. ORGANIZING EVENTS
1.1 SCHEDULING
1.1.1 Divisional Scheduling Representative
The Executive Steward of each Division will appoint a Divisional Scheduling Representative who will:
A. Work with the Regions to prepare a Race Schedule for the following calendar year for all events to be
conducted within his Division, including potential U.S. Majors Tour dates. All U.S. Majors Tour dates
must be confirmed by the Head of Club Racing before being listed on the calendar.
B. Submit the necessary documents and fees to the National Office to support those events.
C. Mail copies of the final racing schedule for his Division to the Manager of Club Racing (with the
appropriate non-refundable calendar listing fees) and to the Chairman of the Club Racing Board, the
Regional Executives of all Regions in the Division, and to the Scheduling Representatives of the other
Divisions no later than December 1st.
The Scheduling Representative must be appointed in sufficient time to assure that the Race Schedule
is completed and filed with the National Office no later than December 1.
1.1.2. Scheduling Policies and Procedures
A. The Division‘s Race Schedule encompasses all club race activities, including Regional Events, Drivers’
Schools, Practice Days, Performance Driving Experience and TimeTrial events.
B. Alternative Drivers’ Schools (3.1.3.C) and Racing Experience Sessions are not required to appear on
Divisional Schedules, but must be sanctioned.
C. Calendar Listing Fee
1. A Region must pay a non-refundable Calendar Listing Fee for each race weekend it will sanction
and conduct during the following calendar year.
2. A single fee of $25, made payable to SCCA, is required for each weekend of racing.
3. Calendar Listing Fees are submitted to the Scheduling Representative, who forwards the fees
and the approved Racing Schedule to the National Office.
4. If a date request is denied, the Fee will be refunded.
5. Change of date requests are considered new applications and a separate fee is required. The
Scheduling Representative shall notify the parties listed in, AppB.1.1.1.C as changes are made
in the final schedule.
D. No U.S. Majors Tour events may be scheduled for a weekend that is less than two weeks prior to
the start of the Runoffs.
1.2
POSTPONING OR CANCELLING EVENTS
All or part of an event may be postponed or cancelled under the following conditions:
A. Provision is made in the Supplemental Regulations for the event, or
B. The SOM order that all or part of the event be postponed or cancelled for reasons of safety or forces
beyond their control.
1. Postponement. After consulting with the organizing Region, the SOM may postpone the classes
not afforded the opportunity to race (as opposed to practice or qualify), provided a scheduled
date is available at the same facility within the same competition year. The postponed races shall
be run under the original sanction number.
2. Cancellation. An entire event (all classes, all sessions) postponed for more than 24 hours is
considered cancelled, and entry fees shall be returned. If an event is cancelled during the competition, then the entry fees shall be prorated and a reasonable portion of the entry fee shall be
returned.
3. Credit for Start. If an entire event is cancelled (all classes, all sessions), there shall be no credit
for a start. If a race is postponed, the competitors have the option of either competing in
the postponed race, or receiving a prorated refund and being classified as DNS for that race,
provided they have participated in a practice session or are shown on the qualifying results for
that race.
1.3
SANCTIONING EVENTS
GCR - 98
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
A. Organizers of SCCA sanctioned races may be the SCCA or one or more SCCA Regions.
B. The SCCA name and emblem (logo) may be used only with events sanctioned by SCCA.
1.3.1. Applying for an SCCA Sanction
Sanction applications must be submitted for approval at least 45 days prior to the scheduled date of the
event with the following:
A. Completed current SCCA Sanction Application Form
B. Appropriate sanction fee to be paid within 14 days of the completion of the event with the event
insurance audit.
C. Entry Form
D. Supplemental Regulations
E. Schedule of Events
1.3.2. Sanction Requirements
In addition to the items listed in AppB.1.3.1, the following conditions must be met before a sanction
number can be issued:
A. The race event is listed on the official SCCA calendar.
B. SCCA has approved the course for Club Racing.
C. The organizer owes no event related fees for prior events. See AppB.1.6 for information about event
fees.
1.3.3. Sanctioning for Alternative Drivers’ Schools
SCCA Regions wishing to hold a Drivers’ School using the Alternative Driving School method must submit
a sanction applications to the National Office no less than 10 days prior to holding a school and include
the following:
A. Sanction Application Form
B. Names of students
C. Name(s) of Instructor(s)
D. Dates of “school” elements (classroom/on-track)
E. Brief outline of the training components/schedule
F. Approval letter from one of the following:
a. Divisional Chief Driving Instructor
b. Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator
c. Certified Driving Instructor (list of who is considered Certified to be provided by Divisional Chief
Driving Instructors)
d. Executive Steward
1.3.4 Courses
The words “course” and “circuit” and “track” are considered interchangeable for the purpose of these rules.
1.3.4.1.Types of SCCA Course Approval
SCCA must approve any course for a Club Racing event. For a particular track, the SCCA may:
A. Limit the types of events.
B. Restrict the number of cars which may be started simultaneously or in total.
C. Restrict the number of entries which may be accepted for an event.
D. Restrict the classes and categories of cars.
E. Restrict the license grades of drivers.
F. Disapprove the course for all SCCA speed events.
1.3.4.2.Application For An Event On An Unapproved Course
A Sanction Application for an event at a course not already approved by the SCCA must be submitted at
least 2 months before the proposed event, and must include a full description of the course and facilities,
including a scale map.
1.4
SUPPLEMENTAL REGULATIONS AND ENTRY FORMS
GCR - 99
General
C. The National Office will issue a sanction within 5 business days from date of receiving the completed
sanction application.
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
Organizers shall not distribute Supplemental Regulations or Entry Forms for an SCCA event prior to obtaining
an SCCA sanction.
1.4.1 Required Contents of Supplemental Regulations
Supplemental Regulations establish specific conditions for an event.
Before a sanction for an event can be issued, the Divisional Executive Steward or his designee must
approve all Regulations different than those of the GCR. The Club Racing Board has the right of review and
final approval at their discretion.
For U.S. Majors Tour events, Supplemental Regulations are drafted by the sanctioning Region and the U.S.
Majors Tour staff. The Supplemental Regulations are submitted by the sanctioning Region, reviewed and
approved by the Division’s Executive Steward (or his designee), and reviewed and approved by the Head
of Club Racing.
Supplemental Regulations must contain the following information for the event:
A. The name, location, dates, nature, and event type.
B. The sanction number and type of sanction.
C. Conspicuously placed words: “Held under the SCCA General Competition Rules.”
D. The name and address of the organizers.
E. A complete description of the event, including the course length and types of sessions and races, the
classes of cars eligible, and the race groups (See AppB.1.4.2.)
F. Schedules and locations of on and off-track activities, inspections, and meetings.
G. The name and address of the Registrar or other person to whom the entry is to be sent, closing date
for receipt of entries, and amount of the entry fee.
H. The names of the Chief Steward and the Chairman SOM. For U.S. Majors Tour events, add the Race
Director and the Series Administrator.
I.
The way results will be determined and trophies and prizes awarded.
J. The times official scales will be available for competitors to check the weight of their cars.
K. The brand and general description of any required spec fuel (e.g., Sunoco 100 octane unleaded).
L. All other information necessary for the proper conduct of the event, not already included in the GCR.
1.4.2 Combining Classes into Race Groups
A. The speed and performance differences among the cars may not be extreme.
B. Any Formula classes may be combined with Sports Racing classes.
C. It is more preferable to combine Sports Racing classes with appropriate Formula classes than with
Production or GT classes.
D. It is preferable not to combine FA, FB, FC, FE, and FM with FV and/or F500. FV may be combined
with F500.
E. SRF may be combined with F and H Production and GTL.
F. Formula classes shall not be combined with cars from any other category except Sports Racing. The
only exception is in race groups con-sisting solely of Vintage/Historic cars.
G. It is preferable not to combine GT1, AS, ST, T1, T2, T3, STO, and STU with P1, P2, SRF, FP, HP,
or GTL.
H. Vintage cars may not be grouped with any other type of cars, except at Drivers’ Schools.
1.4.3 Additional Classes
Organizers may include classes not specified in 9.1, provided the conditions and specifications are clearly
outlined or referred to in the Supplemental Regulations. Including those additional classes may not jeopardize the full schedule of sessions for the SCCA recognized classes.
1.4.4 Multiple Types of Events on a Single Weekend
It is not generally permitted for race groups from different types of events on the same weekend to run
simultaneously.
1.4.5 Required Contents of Entry Forms
A. Spaces for full names, addresses, membership numbers, sponsorship information and license type
and numbers of entrant(s) and driver(s), and for driver’s Region of Record.
B. Space for full description of cars to be entered.
C. The words: “Held under the SCCA General Competition Rules.”
GCR - 100
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
D. Spaces for signature(s) of entrant(s) and driver(s) for waiving liability and/or indemnity declarations,
acknowledging the authority of the GCR, declaring that the entered car complies with the provisions
of the GCR, and the person(s) to be notified in case of accident.
F. Any other information required for the clarification of all other details of the event.
1.5.
ORGANIZER’S ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES
In addition to the responsibilities listed above, organizers must fulfill the following requirements:
1.5.1. Entry List
An official list of competitors entered in the event shall be made available to all entrants at no charge as
early as possible before the event begins.
1.5.2.Results
The organizer is responsible to distribute results as follows:
Printed or photocopied Official Race Results available for each entrant at the event; or mailed at the organizer’s expense or emailed (at the entrant’s option) within 7 days of the event, 7 days of the notification
of any protest decision affecting Results, or 7 days of a Court of Appeals decision, whichever is applicable
and whichever comes first.
1.5.3. Post-Event Reporting
The organizer is responsible to submit all SCCA required audits and appropriate fees to the National Office
within the time limits, as specified in AppB.1.6 and the SCCA Insurance Handbook.
1.6 RACE EVENT FEES
A. Sanction Fee
The sanction fee for a Regional event listed on the sanction application must be paid within 14 days
of the completion of the event.
B. Late Sanction Fee
A late fee of 50 percent of the sanction fee shall be charged on all sanctions postmarked after the
applicable deadline, unless prior arrangements have been made and approved by the National Office
Sanction Administrator.
C. Sanction Fee Refunds
There shall be no refunds of Sanction fees unless notice of cancellation is received by the National
Office at least 15 days prior to the event.
D. Compliance Surcharge
Upon the conclusion of Regional race events, a surcharge for each Spec Racer and Formula Enterprises car that turned a wheel on the course must be submitted to the SCCA National Office.
E. Volunteer Fee
Upon the conclusion of Regional race events, a Volunteer Incentive Fee must be submitted to the
SCCA National Office to support the SCCA volunteer incentive and rewards program. The fee
schedule is available from the SCCA National Office, or on the SCCA website.
F. Insurance Fee
The appropriate premium for Regional race events must be sent to the SCCA for mandatory event
insurance coverage within 14 days of the completion of the event. The fee schedule is available from
the SCCA National Office, or on the SCCA website.
G. U.S. Majors Tour Assessment
For all U.S. Majors Tour Events, a “per entry” fee will be assessed and must be paid within 14 days
of the event. No further sanctions will be issued to a region until this has been paid. This fee includes
the following components:
1. Sanction fee
2. Compliance Surcharge
3. Insurance Assessment - The fee schedule is available from the SCCA National Office, or on the
SCCA website.
4. Volunteer Incentive Fee - The fee schedule is available from the SCCA National Office, or on the
SCCA website.
5. U.S. Majors Tour Assessment
2. INSURANCE COVERAGES AND LIMITS
GCR - 101
General
E. The sanction number assigned to the event.
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
2.1. Insurance Requirements
All SCCA sanctioned events must be insured for Event Liability and Participant Accident insurance coverage.
General Liability and Participant Accident coverage must be provided by the SCCA Event Insurance Plan.
The Race Director or Chief Steward must delay an event until he is satisfied that the required insurance is
in place.
GCR - 102
General
Appendix B. Organizational and Administrative Procedures for Events
GCR - 103
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
APPENDIX C. LICENSING AND TYPES
1. OFFICIAL’S LICENSING AND TYPES
1.1. Official
1.Regional
2.Divisional
3.National
4.Senior
1.2. Steward
1.Steward-in-training
2.Regional
2.Divisional
3.National
4.Senior
1.3. Licensing Requirements
A. Only SCCA members may be licensed.
B. License applications are available from Divisional Specialty Administrators, Regional Licensing Chairmen, online at the SCCA official
website, and by mail from the SCCA National Office.
C. Except for the Senior License level, all Licenses are for one year,
concurrent with the membership term.
D. Following the initial year, the renewal minimums are as follows:
1. Divisional Renewal: Six (6) days at SCCA Sanctioned events in
the preceding 12 months.
2. National Renewal: Eight (8) days at SCCA Sanctioned events
in the preceding 12 months.
3. Senior Renewal: Must be approved by Divisional Administrator
and Executive Steward every three (3) years.
E. Anyone not meeting the participation requirements for his license
(upgrade or renewal) is advised to contact his Divisional Specialty
Administrator, who may waive requirements.
F. Upgrading to the next level of license is dependent upon the
specialty.
G. License Renewal/Upgrade Forms are mailed automatically to license
holders in advance of the expiration of the current License.
1.4. Licensing Minors
A. The SCCA defines a Minor as an individual between 14 years and
the age of majority as determined by the law in the state of the
individual’s residence (typically 18 years old, but it may vary). A
Minor may apply for an SCCA Official’s License.
B. Only the National Office may issue an Official’s License to a Minor.
In addition to the Specialty License Application, a Minor applicant
must submit the following to the National Office:
1. A completed Annual Parental Consent, Release and Waiver of
GCR - 104
Liability, Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement and
a completed Minor’s Assumption of Risk Acknowledgement
(note: forms vary by state and witnessing method). This document must be filed annually until the Minor achieves the age of
majority in his state.
2. COMPETITION LICENSES
2.1. Medical Requirements
A. Everyone who applies for an SCCA Competition License or Permit
must submit a completed SCCA Physician’s Examination and
Medical History Form, a completed Federal Aviation Authority
medical form or a NASA approved medical form. For the purposes
of SCCA competition licensing, the term “form” refers to any of
these. The form must be submitted every 5 years for applicants
ages 14-39; every 3 years for applicants ages 40-49; every 2
years for applicants ages 50-69; and every year for applicants’
age 70 and over. The examination date cannot be more than 6
months before the Competition License or Permit application date.
A new Form is not required for a 14 year-old Novice Permit holder
or Novice Permit holder applying for a Full Competition or Vintage
License, provided the current Form is within the specified term
for his age group. The form remains valid for an SCCA license
only when a member maintains continuous SCCA membership and
permit or license.
B. An individual may be issued a Novice Permit by a Divisional or
Regional Licensing Chairman provided there is no medical condition
identified on the Form which requires review.
C. SCCA Physician’s Examination and Medical History Forms are
available from Regions, from the National Office, and on SCCA’s
web site, www.scca.com.
D. A competitor who is issued a license under medical waiver must
submit the Form annually.
2.2. Credit Towards License
A. To qualify for renewing or upgrading a license, a competitor must
participate in the minimum number of SCCA races specified in
Table 1. However, no license credit shall be given for the following:
1. Drivers Schools
2. Races held as part of a Drivers School
3. Events not sanctioned by the SCCA
4. Events resulting in a DNS or DQ from a race. At multi-race
events, successful completion of another race(s) is acceptable
on the same weekend.
B. A Full Competition license holder may enter multiple races in an
event, but will earn only one license credit for each class raced per
weekend. See Table 1 for Vintage License renewal requirements.
2.3. Competition Licensing Requirements
Table 1 below shows the standard licensing requirements and progressions.
2.4. Additional Licensing Information
A. All 14 Year-Old Novice Permit, Novice Permit and License applications must be signed by the applicant and sent, along with all
required paperwork and fees to the address in the front of this rule
book.
GCR - 105
General
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
B. An applicant for any Permit or License who requests expedited
processing must add an additional $125 to the license fee shown
in Table 1. The special handling fee guarantees a 24 hour business
day turn-around and the License is returned via Federal Express.
C. License Renewal/Upgrade Forms are mailed automatically to Full
Competition or Vintage License holders in advance of the expiration
of the current License.
D. An applicant’s Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator, or the
National Administrator of Driver Licensing, or the Club Racing
Department may waive some or all of the participation requirements for issuing or renewing a Full Competition or Vintage
License. Anyone not meeting the participation requirements for Full
Competition or Vintage License (upgrade or renewal) is advised to
contact one of these sources to request a waiver.
E. In addition to the basic items for each license level and upgrade in
the Table 1, please note the following sections, particularly with
respect to licensing Minors.
2.5. Licensing Minors
A. The SCCA defines a Minor as an individual between 14 years and
the age of majority as determined by the law in the state of the
individual’s residence (typically 18 years old, but it may vary).
B. With the approval of the Divisional Licensing Administrator, only
the National Office may issue a Novice Permit to a minor. In addition to the paperwork and fees indicated in Table 1, a Minor applicant must submit the following to the National Office:
1. A completed Annual Parental Consent, Release and Waiver of
Liability, Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement and
a completed Minor’s Assumption of Risk Acknowledgement
(note: forms vary by state and witnessing method). This document must be filed annually until the Minor achieves the age of
majority in his state.
2. A photocopy of both sides of his State Operator’s Permit/Driver’s License.
C. Only the Divisional Licensing Administrator may waive Drivers’
School, Full Competition License, or Vintage License participation
requirements for a Minor.
2.6. 14 and 15 Year-Old Novice Permits and Licensing
A 14 and 15 Year-Old Novice Permit is a provisional license for young
drivers with previous racing experience in karts, quarter-midgets, etc.
A. Applicants with prior racing experience in karts, quarter-midgets,
etc., will be considered for a 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice Permit.
Applicants must submit a resume of their prior racing experience
that will be evaluated by their Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator. If the Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator is satisfied
with the applicant’s experience, he will schedule an interview with
the applicant to complete the evaluation. It is preferred that the
interview be in person, but if necessary, a telephone interview is
acceptable. If the Divisional Licensing Administrator judges that the
applicant’s experience and maturity is satisfactory, he will recommend to the Club Racing Office that a 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice
Permit be issued. A completed Annual Parental Consent, Release
and Waiver of Liability, Assumption of Risk and Indemnity Agreement and a completed Minor’s Assumption of Risk Acknowledgment must be submitted to the Club Racing Office (note: forms vary
GCR - 106
by state and witnessing method). The requirement of AppC.2.5.B.3
may be waived by the Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator.
B. A 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice Permit will be issued in the form of a
Novice Permit with a distinctive cover. It must be used for all Driver
School and Regional race events until the driver reaches the age
of 16. If the requirements for a Full Competition or Vintage license
are satisfied before the permit holder turns 16, the 14 or 15 YearOld Novice Permit shall be returned to the Club Racing Office, with
the appropriate license fee, to be replaced by a Full Competition
or Vintage license. If the requirements for a Full Competition or
Vintage license are not fulfilled by the time the driver reaches the
age of 16, the 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice Permit shall be returned
to the Club Racing Office to be replaced by a Novice Permit. Any
successfully completed Driver Schools and races will be transferred
to the Novice Permit.
C. 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice Permits may be issued only by the Club
Racing Office.
D. At every driver school and every race before the permit holder is
licensed, he must present the Novice Permit to the Chief Steward
before participating in any on-track session. The Chief Steward
will complete the appropriate permit page at the end of the event.
E. At any event before the permit holder is licensed (school or race),
the Chief Steward may recommend revocation of the permit.
F. In addition to the successful completion of the required driver
school(s), the Chief Steward must explicitly state that the driver is
prepared to race; otherwise, additional school(s) are required.
G. A 14 or 15 year-old must complete his first SCCA driver school in
a car not classed in GT1, GT2, FA, FB, FS, ITR, ASR, P1, P2, or
T1. Upon successful completion of the first school, any car may be
used thereafter.
H. No 14 or 15 year-old will be allowed to race without having
successfully completed at least one SCCA driver school. In Divisions in which SCCA driver schools are not available, the student
may be allowed to race after completing two SCCA Accredited
Schools subject to the approval of the Divisional Driver Licensing
Administrator.
I.
The 14 or 15 Year-Old Novice Permit is treated as a Novice Permit
for the purposes of licensing while participating in Driver Schools
and Regional races.
2.7. Novice Permit
A Novice Permit is a training license for student drivers as they develop
the experience necessary to safely race with the SCCA.
A. After submitting the required materials, an applicant will receive
his Novice Permit with one photo attached. The Permit must be
presented at each Drivers’ School and subsequent SCCA races until
replaced by a Full Competition License or Vintage. The requirement
of AppC.2.5.B.3 may be waived by the Divisional Driver Licensing
Administrator.
B.A Novice Permit is valid for 24 months with continuous SCCA
membership. However, Novice Permit holders age 70 and over and
those requiring a medical waiver must submit the Medical Form
annually for the Permit to remain in effect.
C. A Novice Permit holder who does not complete requirements to
GCR - 107
General
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
upgrade to a Full Competition or Vintage License by the expiration
date of the Permit may renew the Permit. Credit for schools or
races completed in the previous 24 months will carry over to the
renewed permit, if it is renewed within 3 months of the expiration
date.
D. Successful completion of 1 SCCA Drivers School or its equivalent
is required before a Novice Permit holder may race. The following
must be noted in the Novice Permit:
1. A total of at least 3 hours of in-car, on-course time.
2. A Satisfactory rating in SCCA Drivers School.
3. The Signature of the Race Director or Chief Steward indicating
participation in the School attended.
4. In addition to the successful completion of the required Driver
School, the Race Director or Chief Steward must explicitly
state that the driver is prepared to race; otherwise, additional
school(s) are required.
E. Novice Permit holders may offer equivalencies to replace the SCCA
Drivers Schools’ requirements.
1.The Race Director or Chief Steward of an SCCA Drivers School
or the Novice Permit holder’s Divisional Licensing Chairman
may waive all or part of the Drivers School requirements for
drivers with prior racing experience.
2. Club Racing will publish the list of accredited private schools
whose curricula and methods have been approved and who
have submitted a service fee to the SCCA.
3. Alternative Drivers’ Schools- Chief Driving Instructors and
Divisional Licensing Chairmen should coordinate with the Divisional Executive Steward and the Chief Steward of the event
to ensure that the prospective student has had the proper
ground school before the event and the right attitude and capabilities to complete the program. This is especially important
for novice drivers with little or no prior experience.
At the request of the Divisional Chief Driving Instructor,
Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator, Certified Driving
Instructor or Divisional Executive Steward, a Novice Permit
holder may be offered an alternative path to an SCCA Full
Competition or Vintage license under the following conditions:
a. The ground school/classroom component may be satisfied
informally via telephone, email, or one-on-one meetings
between the student and his designated Driving Instructor.
The student must demonstrate knowledge of the GCR and
the flags as used in SCCA Club Racing.
b. After successfully completing the ground school, the
student must enter a track test day or SCCA sanctioned
test day during which his driving will be observed and
evaluated by his Driving Instructor along with any other
individuals the Instructor and the Chief Steward for the
race may designate.
c. Driving Instructors for this program will be approved by
the Division’s Chief Driving Instructor or by the Divisional
Driver Licensing Administrator.
GCR - 108
d. The driving instructor for the alternate school may witness
participating student(s) sign the SCCA insurance waiver
for that event.
e. The host region may charge a fee to cover costs associated with this type of school.
f.
For students with recent on-track and/or competition experience, upon recommendation of the Driving Instructor, the
Chief Steward, the Divisional Chief Driving Instructor or
the Divisional Driver Licensing Administrator may waive all
Drivers’ School requirements for the student.
g. For students without recent on-track and/or competition
experience, the driving evaluation must include sufficient
on track activity to satisfy the Driving Instructor and Chief
Steward that the student is prepared to participate in
Regional races.
F. Drivers who have fulfilled the Drivers’ School requirements complete
the Novice Permit by successfully competing in 3 Regional event
weekends within the 2 year term of the Permit. The Chief Steward
for each race must sign the Permit to indicate participation.
When the third Regional event weekend is credited, the Chief
Steward or Chairman SOM for that event must also sign the Permit
acknowledging completion of the Novice Permit requirements. If the
Chief or Chairman will not sign the Permit, a Novice Permit holder
may appeal that decision to his Divisional Licensing Chairman for a
final decision.
G.A Novice Permit may be revoked by the holder’s Divisional Driver
Licensing Administrator upon the recommendation of the event
Chief Steward.
2.8. Full Competition License
A. A driver who has completed all Novice Permit requirements,
including the acknowledgment signature of the Race Director, Chief
Steward or Chairman SOM, may follow the directions in the Permit
to apply for an upgrade to a Full Competition License. For the three
consecutive weekends after he has submitted his Full Competition
License application to the National Office for processing, he may
use a photocopy of the Permit as a Full Competition License to
race.
B. Licenses listed below will be accepted as equivalent to a SCCA Full
Competition License at SCCA Regional events if the requirements
of AppC.2.1 are met and the license holder is an SCCA member in
good standing.
1. BMW CCA Club Racing Full Competition
2. Confederation of Autosport Car Clubs (CACC) Competition
3. FIA Issued by any sanctioning body
4. Historic Sportscar Racing (HSR) HSR License
5. ICSCC Area Road Racing or International Road Racing licenses
6.IMSA
7. Midwestern Council of Sports Car Clubs (MCSCC) Full and
Novice permit
8. Miller Motorsports Park Racing Association Full Competition
GCR - 109
General
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
Li-cense
9. NASA Full Competition
10.Ontario Region CASC Regional
11.Porsche Club of America Full Competition
12.SCCA Pro Racing or SCCA Vintage
13.Sportscar Vintage Racing Association (SVRA)
14.Vintage Auto Racing Association Full Competition
15.Vintage Motorsports Council (VMC) and VMC member organiza-tions
16.Waterford Hills Road Racing Club Full
17.West Canada Motorsport Association Amateur
18. Eastern Motor Racing Association (EMRA) Competition License.
19. Atlantic Region Motor Sports (ARMS) Regional Competition
License
20. Grand American Road Racing Association (Grand-Am)
21. Autobahn Country Club Level 1/Level 2
22. Independent Motorsports Group (IMG)
C. A Canadian resident holding a current ASN Professional Grade
C License or higher may apply for an SCCA Full Competition or
Vintage License if he is an SCCA member in good standing and
submits a copy of his current ASN License and ASN Medical Form,
along with the License fee.
2.9 Vintage License
A Driver who has completed all Novice Permit requirements, may
apply to the National Office for a Vintage Competition License. A
current medical form and appropriate license fee to be included.
2.10 Renewal
Requirements for renewing Full Competition Licenses and Vintage
Licenses are noted in Appendix C. Table 1.
2.11 Applicants with Prior Racing Experience
Participation requirements for issuance or renewal of Novice Permit,
Vintage or Full Competition Licenses may be waived in total or part
by the Divisional Licensing Chairman of the applicant’s Division of
Record or the Manager of Club Racing.
3. NON-STANDARD LICENSE SITUATIONS
A. Probation Letter as License
1.The Chairman SOM or other review committee or Court of
Appeals issues a Probation Letter to temporarily replace the
confiscated License of a member whose penalty is probation.
2. The member uses the Probation Letter as a License until the
terms of the probation have been met completely.
3. When the terms are completed, the member sends the Probation Letter to the National Office and receives his License in
return.
B. Statement of Facts Affidavit in Lieu of License
GCR - 110
A Statement of Facts Affidavit is available ONLY to a competitor
who has received a current SCCA Competition License but does
not have it in his possession at the event. A competitor whose
claim to have been issued an SCCA Competition License cannot be
verified is subject to automatic penalty, as specified in 7.4.D.
GCR - 111
General
Appendix C. Licensing and Types
GCR - 112
LICENSE LEVEL
AGE
LICENSE
ISSUER
APPLICATION
MEDICAL
FORM
FEE
MAX.
TERM
OTHER
14 and 15 YEAROLD NOVICE
PERMIT
Individual/
Family/
First Gear
in good
standing
14-15
years
old
SCCA National
Office
Novice Permit
Application
Required
$125
(Region
retains
$40)
2 years
2 Passport Photos
or Proof of Age +
Divisional Licensing
Chairman Approval
NOVICE PERMIT
Individual/
Family/
Spouse/
First Gear
in good
standing
16
years or
older
SCCA National
Office or
National/
Divisional/
Regional Driver
Licensing
Administrator
Novice Permit
Application
Required
$125
(Region
retains
$40)
2 years
2 Passport Photos
+ Proof of Age +
Operator’s Permit/
State Driver’s License
allowing solo motor
vehicle operation
NOVICE TO
VINTAGE
Individual/
Family/
Spouse/
First Gear
in good
standing
14
years or
older
SCCA National
Office or
National/
Divisional/
Regional Driver
Licensing
Administrator
Completed
Novice Permit
+ Vintage
License
Application
1 year
Complete School
Requirements + 2
Regional Races on
Permit + Appropriate
Officials’ Signatures
on Permit
When
needed
$60
Appendix C. Licensing and Types Table
Table 1
SCCA
MEMBER
TYPE
LICENSE LEVEL
SCCA
MEMBER
TYPE
Table 1
AGE
VINTAGE
RENEWAL
Individual/
Family/
Spouse/
First Gear
in good
standing
14
years or
older
FULL
COMPETITION
RENEWAL
Individual/
Family/
Spouse/
First Gear
in good
standing
14
years or
older
APPLICATION
MEDICAL
FORM
FEE
$100
(waived
if applied
for within
90 days
of paying
Novice
Permit
Fee)
SCCA National
Office
Completed
Novice
Permit + Full
Competition
License
Application
When
needed
SCCA National
Office
Vintage License
Renewal
Application
When
needed
$60
SCCA National
Office
Full
Competition
License
Renewal
Application
When
needed
Fee noted
on SCCA
Website
(comp.
license
form)
MAX.
TERM
OTHER
2 years
Complete School
Requirements +
3 Regional Race
weekends. All in
prior 24 months.
Note: 1 SCCA Time
Trial Level 1,2 and
3 events may be
substituted for 1 of
the Regional Race
events. Appropriate
Officials’ Signatures
on Permit
1 year
Results of 2 Vintage
Races or 2 SCCA
Regional Races from
the prior 12 months
3 year
Results of 1 SCCA
U.S. Majors Tour or
Regional Sanctioned
Race/Pro/FIA
weekend per year
General
Appendix C. Licensing and Types Table
14
years or
older
GCR - 113
NOVICE TO FULL
COMPETITION
Individual/
Family/
Spouse/
First Gear
in good
standing
LICENSE
ISSUER
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
APPENDIX D. DUTIES, AUTHORITIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF
RACE DIRECTORS, CHIEF STEWARDS, AND THE SOM.
This Appendix summarizes the duties, authorities, and responsibilities of
the Race Director, Chief Steward, the Chairman of the Stewards, and the
SOM in the GCR, except those in 5.12, the primary section governing the
powers and responsibilities of Stewards. This appendix is a digest and is
intended to direct the reader to the appropriate specific sections for the
full citation. Because these are summaries only, the statements in this
Appendix may not form the basis of a protest or appeal.
1.
Duties, Authorities, and Responsibilities of the Race Director or
Chief Steward
2.1.6.
Refusing to cooperate with, interfering with or obstructing the
RD or CS is a breach of the rules.
2.2.4.
The RD or CS may have no conflict of interest as defined in this
section.
2.3.1.B. The RD or CS may exclude any participant using narcotics or
CS or dangerous drugs, may have that person removed from
the grounds, and may cause that person to be penalized.
3.1.1.D.2.d Administrative actions taken by the RD (including modifying
the Schedule of Events and race groupings), are non-protestable; actions/penalties imposed by the RD for driving or compliance are protestable.
3.1.5.E. A RD or CS is required for an SCCA sanctioned Practice Day.
3.4.1
The RD may change the Supplemental Regulations as permitted
in 5.12.2.
3.4.2
The CS may correct clerical errors and omissions to the
schedule and class groupings prior to the start of an event.
3.6.4
The RD or CS will accept a driver’s request for refusal of
awards.
5.1.
The RD or CS is listed among the principal officials.
5.1.1.
There shall be a RD or CS at every event.
5.1.3.
Grades of Licenses for RD or CS
5.1.5.
The RD or CS shall have no plurality of duties.
5.2.2.A. With the Race Chairman, the organizer, and the promoter,
the CS determines the schedule, and drafts the Supplemental
Regulations.
5.2.2.C. The CS must receive a copy of the Insurance Certificate prior
to beginning the event.
5.3.
The RD or CS, the ARD or CS – Safety, and the Chief of Emergency Services oversee the activities of the Course Marshal.
5.4.4.C. The RD or CS authorizes dispatching emergency vehicles. The
RD or CS, F&C Chief, Chief of ES, and ARD or CS-Safety agree
on dispatch procedures.
5.4.4.H. The RD or CS must specifically approve counter-race towing.
5.5.2.B
There must be immediate communications among the RD or
CS, Race Control, and the corner stations.
GCR - 114
5.5.2.C
Descriptions of course and car conditions, and on-track situations will be conveyed to the RD or CS via the communications
net-work.
5.5.2.D Information and instructions from the RD or CS to the
on-track emergency vehicles, the corners, and the drivers will
be conveyed via the communications network, and racing
suspended if com-munication is interrupted.
5.8.2.
The RD or CS oversees the activities of the Starter.
5.8.3.
The Starter controls the field by conveying RD or CS orders
while the cars are on course.
5.8.4.
The Starter and the RD or CS must have immediate communica-tion with one another.
5.9.1.B. The RD or CS may request that the Chief of Tech conduct
in-spections; the Chief of Tech may recommend inspections to
the RD or CS.
5.9.1.C. The Chief of Tech will report non-conforming cars to the RD or
CS.
5.9.2.C. The RD or CS may request re-inspection of any car (beyond the
Annual), and may request special impounds.
5.9.3.C. The RD or CS may require impounding cars post-race beyond
the top three finishers. The RD or CS may penalize drivers who
fail to report to impound with their cars. The RD or CS and the
Chief of Tech determine items to be checked. Underweight
cars will be reported to the RD or CS. Cars of doubtful compliance will be reported to the RD or CS.
5.10.1.B. T&S will provide times and results at the request of the RD or
CS.
5.10.3.C.The RD or CS may waive the two-system T&S requirement
when there is insufficient staff. T&S protests will not be
accepted.
5.11.1.
The RD or CS may assign Driver Observers on course, whose
activities are overseen by the RD or CS, and to whom they
report in writing regarding all incidents or accidents witnessed.
5.11.3.A.The RD or CS may assign Start, Finish, and Judges of Fact
who shall report directly to the RD or CS.
5.12.2
The RD may change the schedule and race groups and correct
errors and omissions in the Supplemental Regulations. The RD
has the duties and responsibilities of 5.12.3.
5.12.5
The RD or CS may delegate all or part of his or her powers
under 5.12.3.C, and 8.1.1. to the Compli-ance Checking Crew,
who are responsible to advise the RD or CS of non-compliant
cars.
6.1.1.F. The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations will define
where a car stops in the pits upon receiving an Open Black
Flag with a number board.
6.1..F.
The RD or CS will direct the Black Flag “ALL” procedure when
needed.
6.1.1.G. The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations will define
where a car stops in the pits upon receiving a Mechanical Black
Flag with a number board.
GCR - 115
General
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
6.1.1.I.
The RD or CS will direct the Red Flag procedure when needed.
6.2.2.
The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve a
car returning to the course from the paddock during a race.
6.3.3.
The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve
fueling in the pits.
6.3.5.
The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve
more than 4 hot pit crew.
6.4.2.E. The RD or CS may waive the 120% qualifying rule, and may
allow non-qualifiers to grid behind qualifiers.
6.4.3.C. The RD or CS may recommend the parallel column procedure
to establish the grid when conditions merit for oversubscribed
clas-ses.
6.4.6.
The RD or CS or the Supplemental Regulations must approve
fueling on the grid.
6.5.1.A. The RD or CS initiates the 5 and 1 minute warnings to the grid.
6.5.2.A. The RD or CS may authorize a second unscored pace lap.
6.5.2.B. The RD or CS may direct the Starter or someone else to brief
the front row prior to a race.
6.5.5.B. The RD or CS will determine the class(es) in each segment of
a split start.
6.5.6.
After the field has left the grid, the RD or CS may allow cars
not in position at the 1 minute warning to join the field at the
back during the pace lap or from the pit exit after the green.
6.6.1.
The RD or CS is responsible for the pace cars, and will approve
the driver and communicator/observer.
6.6.2.
The RD or CS may use a safety car to control the field and
re-starts.
6.7.1.
The RD or CS may stop a session in any of the following ways:
A.
Black Flag “ALL”
B.
Red flag
C.
Checkered Flag, if at least 50% of a race scheduled time or
dis-tance has been completed
6.8.
The RD or CS may restart a race in one of the following ways:
A.
Restart in original grid positions.
B.
Single file restart by the last completely scored lap.
6.9.
The RD or CS may use the Black Flag “ALL” procedure to stop
a race less than 50% complete to give competitors 15 minutes
to change to rain tires (at their discretion); or if it is more than
50% complete, he may checker the race.
6.11.4.
The RD or CS must approve counter-race driving.
7.2.G.
The RD or CS must receive notification from any driver on
probation before that driver enters the course the first time.
7.4.B.
Penalties imposed by the RD or CS do not incur automatic
penalty points, but the SOM may assign points when an RD or
CSA is protested and is upheld.
GCR - 116
8.1.1.
The RD or CS may file a Chief Steward’s Action describing a
breach and the action taken. All CSAs must be filed within 30
minutes after the results of the final race are posted, unless the
SOM approve an extension.
8.1.2.
The RD or CS may file a Request for Action with the SOM
de-scribing a breach, but he may not file an RFA for a single
breach for which he has already imposed a penalty. Unless
the SOM ap-prove an extension, RFAs must be filed within 30
minutes after the results of the final race are posted, except
RFAs resulting from post-race impound.
8.1.3.
The RD or CS may file a CSA or an RFA against a car for noncompliance. The procedures are the same as for a mechanical
protest.
8.3.1.E. The RD or CS shall receive protests and shall promptly forward
them to the Chairman SOM.
8.3.3.B. Items beyond the scope of a mechanical protest found noncompliant during the inspection must be forwarded to the RD
or CS.
8.4.1.
The RD or CS may appeal any decision or penalty imposed by
the SOM.
8.4.4.B.2.The RD or CS must receive the competition license and forward
it to the national office before an appeal will be heard.
8.4.6.C. The Court of Appeals will not act as a RD or CS.
9.1.12.B. The RD or CS approves the classification of cars; and will not
approve if the proposed classification poses a safety hazard or
an impediment to fair competition.
9.2.1.H. The RD or CS may waive deviations compliance requirements
for a car for an event.
9.3.20.B. The RD or CS approves reinspection of driver’s safety equipment.
9.2.26.A.The RD or CS or SOM will assess appropriate penalties when
fuel is tested non-compliant.
9.3.32.
The RD or CS may direct that the taillight on formula or sports
racers be illuminated.
AppB.2.1.The RD or CS must delay an event until he is satisfied that the
required insurance is provided.
AppC.2.7.D.3. The RD or CS signs Novice Permits attesting to participation in SCCA Drivers’ Schools.
AppC.2.7.D.4. The RD or CS must explicitly state that the driver is
prepared to race.
AppC.2.7.E.1. The RD or CS of a Drivers’ School may waive all or part
of the school requirements for drivers with prior racing experience.
AppC.2.7.F. The CSOM (or CS) must sign the Novice Permit acknowledge completion of Novice Permit requirements after the driver’s third Regional race weekend is credited. An SOM (or CS)
refusing to sign off a Novice Permit may be appealed to the
driver’s Divisional Licensing Chairman.
AppC.2.7.G. The CS may recommend to the driver’s Divisional Licensing
GCR - 117
General
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
Chairman that his Novice Permit be revoked.
AppC.2.8.A. The RD or CS (or the Chair SOM) signs off the Novice Permit
following completion of the third satisfactory Regional Race
weekend.
AppC.3.A.1. A Probation Letter is a temporary replacement for a confiscated license issued by, among others, a CSOM.
AppE.5.4.B. The CS determines the order of single car qualifying at an
oval event.
AppE.5.5.A.2. The CS announces the number of pace laps before the
start of an oval race.
AppE.5.5.B.2. The CS may use a safety car at an oval race, or may designate the lead car to pace the field safely to a restart or to slow
the field for the safety car.
AppF.Qualifier (a) One who receives a time, or (b) One who is waived
into a race by the RD or CS and starts the race.
2.
Duties, Authorities, and Responsibilities of the Chairman of the
SOM and the SOM STEWARDS OF THE MEETING
2.1.6.
Refusing to cooperate with, interfering with or obstructing the
SOM is a breach of the rules.
2.2.4.
An SOM may have no conflict of interest as defined in this
section.
3.1.1.C. The SOM may reschedule National races to 30 minutes in
length.
3.2.1.B. The SOM may cancel or postpone all or part of an event.
3.5.1.H. The name of the CSOM must appear in the Supplemental
Regula-tions.
3.5.5.
The SOM must approve changes to the schedule and Supplemental Regulations.
3.8.1.
The SOM will prevent distribution of awards if a named party
in-dicates that he will appeal their decision.
4.4.4.
The SOM may nullify an entry containing a false or incorrect
statement and penalize the driver or entrant.
5.1.
The SOM are listed among the principal officials. The SOM
may not delegate their responsibilities.
5.1.1.
There must be at least 2 SOM at every event.
5.1.3.
Grades of licenses for CSOM:
A.
Nationals – National Steward. Senior Steward or Divisional
Stew-ard if appointed by the Division’s Executive Steward and
approved by the Chairman of the Stewards Program.
B.
Regionals – minimum Divisional Steward.
C.
Driver Schools – minimum Divisional Steward.
5.1.5.
The CSOM may have no plurality of duties.
5.2.1.C. The CSOM must receive a copy of the Insurance Certificate
prior to the beginning of an event.
5.7.1.D. The Sound Control Chief will provide reports to the CSOM.
GCR - 118
5.10.1.B. T&S will provide times and results at the request of the SOM.
5.10.1.D.T&S will provide completed Official Results to the SOM.
5.10.4.B.1. SOM pending actions will hold publication of Official Results.
5.11.2.
SOM will cooperate with the Press Officer.
5.11.3.
The SOM may approve a corrected determination by a Judge.
6.4.3.C. The SOM must approve using the alternate qualifying procedure for an oversubscribed single class group.
7.2.G.
A probation period begins when the license and any fine are
col-lected by the Chairman of the SOM who assessed the
penalty or by the National Office.
7.2.G.3. The SOM at the event where a violation of probation occurs
may be asked to hear the violation.
7.2.I.
The CSOM whose committee suspends competition privileges
must collect the license immediately. The suspension begins
when the penalty is assessed, however, the period begins
when the license and any fine are collected by the body who
suspended the license or by the National Office.
7.4.A.
Penalties assessed by the SOM incur penalty points.
7.4.B.
The SOM may assign penalty points when upholding a
protested CSA.
7.5.
The SOM shall advance subsequent competitors when a
penalty affects the final results, and shall notify T&S.
8.1.1.
The CS may file a CSA with the SOM for a breach of the
GCR or Supplemental Regulations. CSAs must be filed with the
SOM within 30 minutes after the results of the last race of the
weekend are posted, although the SOM may extend the time.
8.1.2.
The CS may file an RFA with the SOM for a suspected breach
of the GCR or Supplemental Regulations. RFAs from post-race
in-spections may be filed within a reasonable amount of time
fol-lowing discovery. While all other RFAs must be submitted
within 30 minutes after the results of the last race of the
weekend are posted, the SOM may extend the time.
8.2.
SOM procedures for RFAs and Protests are the same.
A.
The SOM will hear actions as soon as practical.
B.
Only the CSOM can release parties from the track.
C.
The SOM will notify all parties if there is a delay in ruling on the
action.
8.3.1.D. The SOM may return protest fees at their discretion.
8.3.1.E. The CSOM will promptly receive protests from the CS or ACS.
8.3.1.F. The SOM may extend time limits for filing protests.
8.3.2.B. The SOM may penalize a protestor whose actions are judged in
bad faith or vexatious.
8.3.3.
The SOM will receive a bond to cover the expense of disassembling, inspecting, and reassembling a car that is protested.
8.3.3.A.1.The SOM will consult separately with all appropriate parties in
setting the bond.
GCR - 119
General
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
8.3.3.A.2.The SOM will apportion the bond if the protestor withdraws all
or part of the protest.
8.3.3.A.4.The SOM may require that the protested party posts a bond or
signs a repair order.
8.3.3.A.5.d. The CSOM requesting verification services will receive an
email within 5 working days from the SCCA Technical Services
De-partment.
8.3.3.B. The SOM will oversee the inspection or disassembly of the
pro-tested vehicle, and determine who else may be allowed to
observe which parts of the process.
8.3.3.F. The CSOM is responsible to assure unbroken chain of evidence
and may impound parts.
8.4.1.
An SOM decision may be appealed by any named party.
8.4.3.B.2.An appeal will not be heard until a license surrendered to a
CSOM is received by the National Office.
8.4.3.D. The CSOM may accept a notice of intent to appeal the suspension of privileges to allow the individual to compete in subsequent events during a multiple sanction weekend. However,
the SOM cannot accept a notice of intent to appeal during a
single sanction weekend for any reason.
8.4.3.E. An SOM decision may be upheld or overturned by a properly
pre-sented appeal.
8.4.5.A.2.The original SOM may be ordered by the Court of Appeals to
rehear an action.
8.4.5.C. The Court of Appeals will not act as an SOM.
9.2.1.I.
The CSOM, or his designee, will note technical non-compliance
in the vehicle logbook.
9.3.26.
The SOM (or the CS) will assess appropriate penalties when
fuel tests non-compliant.
GCR - 120
Notes:
GCR - 121
General
Appendix D. Duties, Authorities, Responsibilities of the RD, CS, SOM
Appendix E. Oval Track Racing
APPENDIX E. OVAL TRACK RACING
This section is intended as a guideline and recommendation for SCCA
Club Racing events conducted entirely on paved oval tracks.
1. EVENTS
Club Racing events on oval tracks will be sanctioned only on paved
ovals and only as Regional events. U.S. Majors Tour events may not be
conducted as oval track events. A Drivers’ School in preparation for an
event on an oval track may be conducted, but not as a substitute for a
road course Drivers’ School. Regions conducting oval Drivers’ Schools are
encouraged to seek out local drivers who have experience at that track to
advise students at the event.
All items of Section 3, Events, which apply to Regional events shall apply
to oval track events.
Depending on the length and banking of the oval course being used, it is
rec-ommended that Regions consider restricting the faster classes (GT1,
FA, and CSR) from competition at oval track events.
Oval track events may consist of any combination of practice sessions,
qualifying sessions, heat races, and feature races. On tracks of less than
1 mile in length, it is recommended that qualifying be conducted one car
at a time.
2. COURSES
Courses for oval track events must be approved by the Divisional Executive Steward prior to applying for a race sanction. These approvals shall
expire at the end of the calendar year or upon written notification to the
region by the Executive Steward which ever comes first.
3. TIMING AND SCORING
Timing and Scoring standards may be modified in favor of short-track
scoring techniques. It is not necessary to time every lap of every car
during a race, though an overall time for the winner should be recorded.
4. FLAGGING AND COMMUNICATIONS
Generally, all communications with drivers while they are on course will be
via flags at the Starter’s Stand and/or signal lights around the course. It is
recommended that Flagging and Communications personnel be stationed
around the course to communicate to Race Control the observations they
make regarding the condition of the course or the nature of any incidents
they witness.
5. RULES OF THE ROAD
5.1. Racing Surface
For the conduct of all competitions (qualifying or race), the racing surface
shall be defined as only the marked, paved race track and it’s curbing.
Pit lanes, their entries and exits; grass verges; and so on, are expressly
excluded from the racing surface.
5.2. Flags
For oval track events, flags will normally be only displayed at the Starter’s
Stand. Flags may be supplemented by signal lights displayed around the
course. The flags used in an Oval Event are defined in Section 6.1.2.,
Flags, with the following exceptions:
A. RED FLAG – Come to a stop as soon as possible on driver’s left (for
counterclockwise tracks) or driver’s right (for clockwise tracks).
Then proceed very slowly and with great caution to the hot pit area
and await further instructions.
GCR - 122
B. Yellow Flag and/or Yellow Light
STANDING YELLOW — Take care, Danger, Slow Down, NO PASSING.
The entire course is yellow.
WAVED — Great Danger, Slow Down, be prepared to stop. NO
PASSING. The entire course is yellow.
DOUBLE YELLOW – Not used.
C. SURFACE CONDITION FLAG (Yellow with Vertical Red Stripes) –
Not used. Any course condition warranting a surface condition flag
is cause a yellow flag until the course condition can be corrected.
D. WHITE FLAG (Solid White) – The leader is starting his last lap. The
white flag shall be waved to the leader and then to each following
car during that lap.
5.3.
Practice / Multi-Car Qualifying
A.During practice and multi-car qualifying sessions, all cars enter the
pit area and stop at their pit at the first opportunity after observing
a yellow flag or yellow light at any flag or light station on the track.
No car may re-enter the track from the pit lane until the course
becomes green again.
B. The scheduled practice time is total running clock time, not on-track
green flag time, subject to event scheduling requirements.
5.4.
Single-Car Qualifying
A. The number of warm-up laps, timed laps, and cool-down laps
allowed in a qualifying session will be defined in the supplementary
regulations and/or announced at the drivers meeting.
B. Cars will qualify in an order determined by the Chief Steward. If
a random drawing is used to determine qualifying order, details of
the drawing will be announced prior to the drawing. Positions in the
qualifying order are reserved as long as the car is in the qualifying
line prior to the order to begin its qualifying attempt.
C. If a car does not proceed with the qualification attempt when
ordered to do so, the qualifying order position will be forfeited. The
car may be penalized further by the loss of one qualifying lap.
D.A qualifying attempt shall be considered started when the front
tires of the car cross the starting line after the qualifying start
signal is given by the Starter.
E. If the car stops anywhere on the course after the qualifying start
signal is given by the Starter, the driver will be charged with an
attempt. Time permitting, those cars having started a qualifying
attempt, but unable to complete the attempt, will be permitted to
begin a second qualifying attempt. First priority for a second qualifying attempt will go to cars that failed to receive any qualifying
time during their first attempt.
F. In the event qualification cannot be held or completed within the
allotted qualification time, the field, or remaining field, will be filled
by means of a seeded lottery by those drivers who have entered,
but who have not qualified.
5.5.Races
A. Initial Race Start
1. A pace car may or may not be used. If no pace car is used, the
responsibility of pacing the field will fall to the pole car.
GCR - 123
General
Appendix E. Oval Track Racing
Appendix E. Oval Track Racing
2. The number of pace laps prior to the start of the race will be
announced by the Chief Steward.
3. On the final pace lap prior to start, the pace car, if used, will
turn its lights out and accelerate to leave track.
4. The pole car will bring the field gradually up to speed for
possible start.
5. Cars shall not improve position prior to crossing start/finish
line. (Pulling out of line alongside the car in front of you is
improving your position.)
6. In case of an aborted start, the starter will display a standing
green flag to the field. After the cars have entered turn one,
the course will go yellow and the field will reform on the back
straight for a restart.
B. Yellow Light/Flag.
1. In the event of a yellow flag, the lead car is responsible for
controlling the field and getting the field to slow down in a
smooth, orderly fashion.
2. A pace or safety car may be employed to bring the field under
control. Whenever a pace car is used, it will remain out for
a minimum of two laps subject to race conditions and at the
discretion of the Chief Steward. The Chief Steward may designate to the lead car the duties of pace car to safely pace the
field to a restart or to slow the field down gradually prior to a
safety car entering the track.
3. In case of a pass in progress when the yellow light goes on, the
over-taking car is expected to fall back and take station behind
the car he was attempting to pass. The field does not race to
the start/finish line.
4. The running order as of the last completed green flag lap immediately prior to the yellow flag shall determine the running order
for the re-start.
5. Any yellow light or flag at an oval track is a full course yellow,
whether or not there is a safety car. The lead car will slow the
field down to permit the entire field to “bunch up” single file
behind the leader. The track will stay yellow until the field is
consolidated behind the leader. Drivers strung out around the
track are expected to quickly move up to catch “the pack”
while observing the yellow flag situation.
6. Cars entering the pits during a yellow flag condition, or cars
responsible for causing the yellow flag condition, shall, assume
a position at the rear of the formed pack on rejoining the field.
C.Restarts
1. On the lap prior to a possible yellow-to-green restart, the field
will be notified of a possible restart on the next lap by:
a. Safety car turning lights off and exiting the track.
b. If no safety car is used, Starter indicating one more lap.
2. In either case, the lead car gradually brings the field up to
speed for a possible restart.
3. At the instant the starter waves the green flag, all yellow lights
will go green. Racing resumes immediately over the entire
GCR - 124
track.
5.6. Driving Conduct
A. It is the responsibility of all drivers to avoid physical contact
between cars on the race track.
B. All competitors have a right to “racing room” on the marked racing
surface. “Racing room” shall be generally defined as sufficient
space on the marked racing surface so as to allow a competitor
to maintain control of his car in close quarters, under racing conditions.
C. It shall be incumbent on all drivers to preserve the right of his fellow
competitors to “racing room” on the race track. Abrupt changes in
direction so as to impede or affect the path of a car attempting to
overtake or pass may be interpreted by Officials as an attempt to
deprive a fellow competitor of his right to “racing room”.
GCR - 125
General
Appendix E. Oval Track Racing
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
APPENDIX F. TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
NOTE: Should any of the definitions contained in this Glossary appear
to be in conflict with a specific rule, then the GCR or Specification Book
will take precedence.
2 Cycle – A reciprocating engine in which the intake, compression,
combustion and exhaust phases are completed each revolution of the
crankshaft.
4 Cycle – A reciprocating engine in which the intake, compression,
combustion and exhaust phases are completed each two revolutions of
the crankshaft.
A-Pillar – The forward most roof support in a passenger car, which also
serves as the side support for the windshield.
Accelerator Pedal – A foot-operated device which allows the driver to
vary the degree of opening of the induction system throttle(s).
Accessible – Capable of being reached without removal of other components.
Accumulator – A pressurized free-piston device, in which the compression of a fixed volume of air by the piston, upon the application of a force
caused by fluid under pressure, provides a pressurized reservoir of the
fluid.
Active Aerodynamic Devices – No active aerodynamic devices are
permitted. These include, but are not limited to, those that allow any
degree of freedom in relation to the entirely sprung part of the car
(chassis/monocoque), movable or hinged skirts, or that can be adjusted
from within the cockpit. Adjustment of aerodynamic devices may only be
made by mechanical changes performed from outside the car.
Active Suspension – Automatic ride height and / or roll control by an
active system receiving power from a pump or compressor.
Addition – To introduce a component not present in the cars stock state,
or attachment to an existing component.
Adhesive – A bonding agent designed to cause two or more components
to adhere to each other without fusing them into a single component.
Adjustable Timing Gear – A camshaft drive gear or sprocket which permits
a range of angular adjustment of the outer portion relative to the attachment point of the driven camshaft.
Advance Curve – The degrees of distributor advance from the static
setting as a function of rotational speed, usually achieved by mechanical
or electronic means.
Advance Plate – The plate inside a distributor on which the ignition points
are mounted, which is free to rotate over a prescribed angle in response
to the actions of the advance mechanism(s), thus altering the phase relationship of the points and distributor cam.
Advance Springs – Springs which provide the restoring force against the
actions of the advance mechanism(s) in a distributor.
Aerodynamic Device – An attachment to, or an integral part of, a car
intended to generate atmospheric downforce by the action of air flowing
through or around the attachment.
Aerodynamic Skirts – Body panels, movable or fixed, at the bottom of
the sides of a car’s body, which aid in the creation of “ground effects”
downforce by ensuring that little air passing under the car can escape at
GCR - 126
the sides.
Aeroquip Line – A brand name, used generically, for a braided metalcovered hose.
Air Cleaner – An induction system component intended to filter particulate matter from the incoming air.
Air Dam – An air control device at the lower front of a car, intended to
divert some of the air which would normally pass under the car when the
car is in motion.
Air Horn – See Velocity Stack.
Air Pump – An engine-driven pump intended to provide a supply of air
(without fuel) to the engine to assist in the reduction of pollution components.
Air Throttle – The valve which allows the driver to modulate the volume
of air passing into a fuel injection induction system.
Airfoil – An aerodynamic device or part of a car which the flow of air over
its surface will generate a vertical force by creating a pressure differential
between top and bottom surfaces.
Air Throttle/Throttle Body – The component which allows the driver to
regulate the volume of air passing into a fuel injection induction system.
Alloy – A homogeneous mixture of two or more elements, at least one of
which is a metal, and where the resulting material has metallic properties.
Alter (verb) – To change a component by modifying.
Alternator – A component intended to generate current with which to
maintain a proper level of charge in the on-board storage battery.
AN Coupler – A threaded high pressure hydraulic coupling of the type
normally used with metal braided hose.
Annular Discharge – A carburetor type in which the fuel is introduced into
the flowing air from an annulus on the periphery of the main duct.
Anti-Roll Bar (Sway bar) – A torsion control device connected to a car’s
structure, and to moving portions of the suspension, which is intended
to control body roll. (Some types of ARB may also serve as a suspension
component.)
Anti-Submarine Strap – A safety strap intended to provide additional
support against motions of the driver’s lower torso in the forward direction.
Aspect Ratio – The ratio of tire section height to section width, expressed
as a percentage.
Attachment Points (Suspension) – The locations at which the fixed and
moving ends of a shock absorber are mounted and/or the location of the
suspension component on the frame or structure of a car.
Automatic Transmission – A transmission which is capable of allowing
a car to start from a stop without use of a clutch, which may be shifted
from gear to gear without use of a clutch, and in which such shifting of
gears is accomplished by hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric actuation.
Automobile – See Car, Appendix A.
Axle Housing – The housing which contains axle shafts and may provide
support for wheel hubs.
Axle Shaft – A shaft whose purpose is to carry rotational drive from a
differential or transaxle to the driven wheels, or simply to support 1 or 2
GCR - 127
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
undriven wheel hub(s).
Axle Tube – See Axle Housing. Also, the beam connecting the rear wheels
on a front wheel drive car.
B-Pillar – The center roof support in a passenger car.
Backing Plate – A braking component used in drum type brake systems,
generally to support the brake shoes and wheel cylinder(s) at a wheel.
Baffle – A plate or panel in a fluid container, which is designed to inhibit
the rapid transfer of the fluid within the container when it is subject to
changing dynamic forces.
Balance (Verb) – To minimize the dynamic off-axis forces of rotating
components, or to equalize the weights of like reciprocating components.
Balance Pipe – A tubular induction system component which connects 2
or more independent branches of the system.
Ball Joint – A bearing coupling, generally in suspension or steering
systems, consisting of 2 mating surfaces, 1 convex and 1 concave,
which permits a range of angular displacements of the 2 attached shafts
over a prescribed range.
Ballast – Non-functional mass fastened inside a car to increase the weight
of the car.
Base Circle – The constant radius portion of a camshaft lobe which is
closest to the centerline of the camshaft.
Battery (Storage) – An on-board electrical storage component which may
be used to activate electrical devices or systems, such as starter, ignition, etc.
Battery Box – A covered container for an on-board storage battery.
Beam Axle – A solid, non-rotating axle connecting the undriven wheels
of a car.
Bearing – A mechanical component provided to allow connected parts to
move with respect to one another in a manner consistent with durability
and minimal friction.
Bearing Carrier – A housing in which the bearings carrying a shaft are
mounted.
Bell Housing – A nominally bell-shaped extension or attachment to the
engine or transmission which serves as a coupler between these assemblies, and usually encloses the clutch/flywheel assembly.
Belt Drive (Car) – A drive system in which the engine power is coupled to
the driven wheels through a flexible belt and pulleys.
Bezel/Rim – Outer trim components which determine the assembled
appearance.
Bias Ply Construction – A tire construction in which the structural plies of
the main carcass form an angle considerably greater than zero relative to
a cross section of the tire.
Big End – The crankshaft end of a connecting rod.
Blanking Sleeve – A replacement for a thermostat designed to divert the
flow of cooling water away from the cooling system bypass circuit.
Block – The elemental component of a reciprocating engine which contains
at least the cylinder location(s) and the crankshaft mounting points.
Block Deck Height – The distance between the crankshaft centerline and
the machined surface that forms the head/block interface of the block.
GCR - 128
Blueprinting – The practice of engine improvement achieved by the use
of selected standard parts and/or by optimizing the factory machined
surfaces of stock engine components to achieve the most advantageous
specifications within the normal range as defined by the manufacturer for
that engine.
Within the above definition of blueprinting, any procedures that involve
the following are not permitted unless specifically authorized:
a)
The addition of material of any kind to any component (this
includes, but is not limited to, the addition of sleeves/bushings and the
application of anti-friction, oil shedding and thermal barrier/retention coatings).
b)
The machining, tooling or any other physical or chemical modification (including shot blasting) of any surface that was not originally
a factory machined surface. Glass or other media blasting for cleaning
purposes only is allowed as long as it does not remove or modify the base
material of the original part.
c)
Mixing/matching of parts from any other year, make, model or
type of vehicle or engine.
d)
Balancing procedures that involve spot machining of all rotating
and/or reciprocating parts (i.e. one rod/piston assembly must remain
untouched).
e. Any edges resulting from authorized machining processes may be
deburred up to .040”.
Note: Under no circumstances may any factory specification be exceeded
as a result of any permitted blueprinting operation(s) (i.e. compression
ratio, valve lift, bore, stroke, etc.).
Body – All parts of the car licked by the air stream and situated above the
belly / floor with exception of the roll bar or cage. For Formula and Sports
Racing cars, further exceptions are those units definitely associated with
the function of the engine or transmission.
Body Panel – A replaceable section of the body.
Bodywork – See Body.
Bolt Pattern – The arrangement of bolts or other fasteners used to join 2
components.
Boost – The degree of induction pressurizing in a turbo/supercharged
engine.
Boot Cover – A cover for the area behind the driver/passenger seating
area in an open car.
Bore – The diameter of a cylinder.
Boss – A protrusion from a casting or forging which provides the
surface(s) and/or structure necessary to accomplish particular function
of the component.
Brake Light – A signaling light mounted on the rear of the car, which may
be actuated only by driver braking actions.
Brake Lining/Pad – Replaceable friction material which accomplishes
braking action by making rubbing contact with the brake drum or rotor.
Brake Rotor – The disc component of a braking system, which is attached
to a wheel hub and provides a friction surface for braking actions.
Brake Rotor Hat – The integral part of a brake rotor or a separate component that locates and provides attachment for the brake rotor to the hub.
GCR - 129
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Braking System – A system, including hydraulic and mechanical components, which allows the driver to reduce the velocity of a car.
Breather Vent – An aperture which allows the flow of air into or out of
an enclosure.
Bulb – A lighting system component which contains the actual light emitting element(s).
Bulkhead – A partition separating compartments.
Bump Steer – The change in toe-in or toe-out which results from changes
in suspension geometry as the wheel(s) rises or falls from its neutral position.
Bump Stop – A cushioning pad which acts as the limit to suspension
travel in one vertical direction.
Bumper – A semi-rigid attachment to the structure of a car at the front
or rear, which is intended to absorb a portion of low speed front or rear
collision forces.
Bumper Block – See Bump Stop.
Bushing/Bush – A sleeve or tubular insert, whose purpose is to reduce the
dimension(s) of an existing hole. A protective liner that cushions noise,
friction, or movement such as a rod end or spherical bearing.
C-Pillar – The body roof support bordering on the rear window or hatch.
Caliper – A braking system component which is the disc brake equivalent of a wheel cylinder, and converts hydraulic pressure into mechanical
braking force at a wheel.
Cam Carrier – That portion of a reciprocating engine that contains the
supporting bearings for an overhead camshaft.
Cam Cover – Equivalent to a valve cover in an engine with an overhead
cam.
Camber – The angle of a wheel relative to true vertical. Negative camber
implies that the top of the wheel is closer than the bottom to the car’s
centerline.
Camber Compensator – A wheel location device designed to control the
wheel camber under varying conditions of bump/rebound.
Camshaft – An engine component, driven by the crankshaft, whose function is to actuate the valves, and often, to drive other engine components.
Camshaft Timing – The phase relationship of the camshaft to the crankshaft, which determines when in the crankshaft cycle the valves will
open.
Canard – A near-horizontal aerodynamic device normally mounted at the
extreme front of a (race) car.
Carburetor – The component of a non-fuel injection induction system
which achieves the mixing of fuel and air to create a combustible mixture.
Car – See Appendix A, Car.
Caster – The angle which the swivel axis of a steered wheel makes with
the vertical in the fore/aft direction.
Catalytic Converter – An emissions control device in the exhaust system
which reduces emissions by catalysis.
Catch Tank – A container with the purpose of collecting liquid, generally
lubricant or coolant, vented from an engine, transmission, transaxle, or
differential and preventing the loss, from the car, of the liquid.
GCR - 130
cc – Cubic centimeter (a unit of volume).
Center-Lock – A type of road wheel/hub which is retained by a single
central fastener.
Centerline – A line coincident with the axis of rotational symmetry of a
component.
Centrifugal Clutch – A clutch which automatically engages in response
to an increase from low engine speed, and disengages upon return to low
speed operation.
Chain Drive – A drive system in which the engine power is transmitted
through a chain and sprockets.
Chapman Strut – An adaptation of the McPherson strut for a rear suspension (without steering swivel).
Check Valve – A valve designed to prevent the flow of a fluid in one direction, while allowing relatively unimpeded flow in the opposite direction.
Choke – A carbureted induction system mechanism which, when actuated, causes an enrichment of the fuel/air mixture to assist cold starting or
an intake restrictor (venturi) for the purpose of limiting intake air volume.
Also see Restrictor, Intake.
Clinch Nut – A threaded female fastener which has been distorted on one
end to supply a gripping force when assembled to a stud or bolt thread.
Clutch – A device whose function is to permit the driver to engage/disengage a power coupling between the engine and the transmission or transaxle.
CO – Carbon monoxide.
Cockpit – The driver/passenger volume within a car in which driver control
devices, gauges, and seating are provided.
Coil – The transformer component of an ignition system which converts
each low voltage pulse into a pulse of sufficiently high voltage to bridge
the gap in a spark plug and initiate combustion in the engine.
Coil-Over Shock – A tubular shock absorber which contains top and
bottom mounting locations for a coaxial coil spring, and is used with such
a spring supporting the weight of the car.
Cold Air Box – An engine carburetor attachment of unspecified size and
composition, whose purpose is to provide a source of ambient air alternate to that existing in the engine compartment.
Component – A constituent part of an assembly.
Compression Ratio – Reciprocating engines: the ratio of the sum of swept
plus unswept volumes to the unswept volume. Rotary engines: the ratio
of the largest to the smallest volume of the working chamber.
Compression Ring – A reciprocating engine component which is intended
to seal the gap between the piston and cylinder wall against the pressure
differential arising from compression, induction or combustion.
Compressor (AC) – The engine-driven pressurizing pump in an automotive
air conditioning system.
Concentric – Two components or objects are concentric if they share a
common centerline.
Condenser (AC) – The portion of an automotive air conditioning system in
which the refrigerant in vapor phase is converted to liquid phase.
Connecting Rod – A component physically connecting a piston to a crankGCR - 131
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
shaft in such a way as to convert the rotary motion of the crankshaft to
a reciprocating motion of the piston.
Constant-Velocity Joint – A type of universal joint in which the angular
velocities of input and output shafts are held approximately equal.
Cool Suit – A driver’s safety suit which has provision to be cooled by a
circulating liquid.
Cooling System – Those components directly associated with the cooling
of an engine, including any hoses, fans, pumps, radiators, internal engine
passages, galleries, coolant retention components, and coolant entry and
exit points, etc.
Cowl Induction – An arrangement in which the incoming air for an induction system is ducted from the cowl area below the windshield.
Crank-Triggered Ignition – An ignition system in which the triggering
pulses are obtained from a pickup and wheel connected directly to the
crankshaft, or to an intermediate pulley.
Crankshaft – The rotating engine component which, driven by piston/
connecting rod assemblies, transmits, for external coupling, the torque
resulting from the combustion process.
Crossflow Head – A cylinder head in which the intake and exhaust ports
for each cylinder are on opposite sides of the head.
Crown – The top face of a piston at which combustion takes place.
Curvature – The dimension defined by the maximum distance between a
curving surface and the straight line between its ends.
Cylinder Liner (Sleeve) – An insert in an engine block which defines the
path followed by a piston in its reciprocating motion.
Dash board – See instrument panel.
Decamber (Verb) – To make the wheel camber more negative.
Deck – Generally the rearmost upper body panel of a car, but not present
in all cars.
Deck Height – The distance between the top of the piston at its outer
edge and the machined surface which forms the head/block interface of
the block.
Deck Lid – The access door into the volume (often “trunk”) beneath a
deck.
Differential – A gear assembly whose purpose is to reduce the rotational
velocity transmitted from the engine/gearbox, while providing a division
of driving force to 2 wheels.
Differential Housing – The housing in which the differential (final drive)
gears are mounted.
Diffuser – See Aerodynamic Device definition.
Disc Brake – A braking system which relies on the friction between a
suitable material in the form of a “pad” and a rotating disc to supply the
braking force at a wheel.
Discriminator Valve – A check valve designed to install on the vent line of
a fuel cell, allowing vapors to vent while retaining liquid.
Dish – A concave piston crown.
Displacement (Engine) – Reciprocating engine: the swept volume of 1
cylinder times the number of cylinders. Rotary engine: the difference
between the largest and smallest volumes of the working chamber, times
GCR - 132
the number of lobes, times the number of rotors.
Distributor Cap – An ignition system distributor component which
contains the high voltage distribution contacts and means for securing
the high voltage wires.
Dome – A convex piston crown.
Door Panel – The inner shell of a door which normally supports the trim.
Dowel – A tubular or cylindrical pin, the sole purpose of which is to make
positive location of two assembled components possible.
Drive Belt – A continuous flexible reinforced elastomer band which
provides the driving force for engine accessories, when attached by pulley
to a rotating part of the engine, such as the crankshaft.
Drive Shaft – The mechanical drive train coupling between transmission
and differential, which may allow an angular displacement of the driving
and driven axes by the use of universal, constant velocity, or flex joints.
Drivetrain – Those rotating components in a car that convey the driving
power from the engine flywheel to the ground and the housings containing
these parts. This is inclusive of the clutch, transmission, driveshaft,
differential, halfshafts/axles or any systems providing such functionality.
Wheel bearings, driveshaft carrier bearings, wheels, and tires are specifically excluded.
Dry Break Coupling – An attachment to an on-board fuel cell/tank filler
neck/hose which is designed to prevent the spillage of fuel during refueling operations.
Dry Sump – An engine lubrication system in which the residual lubricant
is pumped to an external storage tank by a “scavenge pump,” and an
additional pump or pumps return a supply of pressurized lubricant to the
engine from the storage tank.
Dry Tire – A race tire, often with groove-less tread, intended strictly for
use in competition under dry conditions.
Dryer (AC) – A component of an automotive air conditioning system
which is intended to remove water from the refrigerant.
Duct/Ducting – A tube or enclosed passage for conveying a substance,
usually air.
Dust Shield – A cover intended to protect disc brake components from
mud, dirt, etc.
Eccentric Shaft – The analog of a crankshaft in a rotary engine, the shaft
driven by the actions of the rotor.
EGR Valve – An engine pollution control device which channels a portion
of the exhaust gases back into the combustion regions of the engine.
End Plate – An air control panel mounted at each end and perpendicular
to a wing, intended to maximize the efficiency of the wing by preventing
spillage of flowing air at the ends.
Engine – The primary power plant of a car, including all physically attached
ancillary components necessary for power production.
Engine Air Box – An induction system attachment, generally part of the
bodywork, which ducts air from an opening protruding into the airstream
to the induction system intake(s).
Engine Case – See rotor housing and/or block.
Engine Compartment – The loosely defined volume, nominally enclosed
by panels on top and sides, which is the normal location of the engine in
GCR - 133
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
a car.
Engine Mount – A passive mechanical coupling used to support the weight
of an engine at its attachment points to the structure of a car.
Engine Steady Bar (Torque suppressor) – A constraining beam or rod
intended to resist the tendency of an engine to rotate on its mounts in
reaction to torque forces.
Epitrocoidal Curve – The contour of the interior surface of a rotary engine
rotor housing, which, with the rotor, determines the volume of the
working chambers at any point in the rotation of the rotor.
Equivalent – The same form, fit, function, and dimensions.
Evaporator (AC) – That portion of an automotive air conditioning system
in which the transition from liquid phase to vapor phase occurs.
Exhaust Pipe – A duct of unspecified dimensions, whose function is to
convey exhaust products toward the rear of a car and away from the
driver.
Exhaust Port – The duct within a cylinder head or rotor housing through
which the exhaust gases pass from the exhaust valve(s) to the outer
flange of the head.
Exhaust System – A passive system, whose components serve to convey
the exhaust of an engine past the driver and away from the car.
Expansion Tank – A container, often operating at system pressures,
which is designed to contain engine coolant on expansion at operating
temperatures.
Extension – An external modification resulting in more material on the
outside of the component than originally existed.
Fairing – A covering intended to divert airflow in a specific region of a car,
to reduce air drag.
Fan – A rotating bladed device intended to provide a cooling flow of air
to a heat exchanger.
Fan Belt – A flexible drive belt which is used to drive a water radiator
cooling fan, and, often simultaneously, furnish drive to 1 or more other
rotating attachments to the engine.
Fasteners – Any mechanism which serves no other purposes than to
cause a component to maintain a fixed position (e.g. bolt, nut, screw,
etc.).
Fender – The body panel covering a road wheel assembly.
Fender Flare – An attachment to an existing fender which extends the
fender outward so as to more completely cover the tire within.
Fender Skirt – A removable fender extension which partially closes the
wheel opening, smoothing the air flow in this region.
Ferrous – An alloy containing more than 50% iron.
Filler Cap – A closure which prevents the loss of fuel from the filler neck/
hose when the car is in use, but which may be removed for refueling.
Filler Neck/Hose – The attachment to a fuel cell/tank through which fuel
is supplied from a source external to the car.
Final Drive Housing – See Rear Axle Housing.
Final Drive Ratio – The ratio of input to output shaft motions in a final
drive or differential.
GCR - 134
Fire Extinguisher – An on-board container of specified capacity charged
with approved fire extinguishing material which provides the driver or
others with the capability to control small fires. See Section 9.3.Fire
System.
Fire System – An on-board fire extinguishing system designed to be activated in the event of fire, whose purpose is to extinguish or retard the
fire, thus providing a measure of protection for driver and car. See Section
9.3.Fire System.
Firewall – A vertical (plus or minus 10 degrees) metal panel separating and
protecting the driver/passenger compartment from the engine compartment, preventing the passage of flame and debris. Metal ducts may penetrate the firewall, but must begin and end outside of the driver/passenger
compartment. No intakes are allowed in the firewall.
Firing Order – The order in which the cylinders in a reciprocating engine
produce power under normal conditions.
Flare (Verb) – 1. To extend by extrusion or attachment a fender so as to
more completely cover the tire mounted within (Noun) – 2. Extruded end
of a pipe or tube.
Flat Bottom – A race car construction in which the underside of the car is
nominally flat and contains no “ground effects” shaping or ducting.
Flat Plate Intake Restrictor – a metal plate through which all engine
combustion chamber air (and possibly fuel) must pass. Unless otherwise
specified in a category, class or individual engine specification, all flat
plate restrictors must meet the following requirements (more than one
plate may be required in some applications; each shall meet the requirements):
• The restrictor shall be made from flat steel or aluminum sheet at
least 0.060 inches thick.
• The hole through which all air to the engine must pass shall be
round, centered with respect to the throttle body bore or carburetor
bore or intake manifold bore to which it is attached; no radiusing,
chamfering or beveling of the hole is permitted.
• The restrictor plate must be located between the throttle body or
carburetor and the engine within 4 inches of the centerline of the
carburetor or fuel injection butterfly.
• A steel or aluminum spacer no more than 0.75 inch thick may be
placed between the throttle body or carburetor and the restrictor
to allow for clearance of the butterfly. The hole must be the same
shape and size as the throttle body or carburetor flange; no radiusing, chamfering or beveling of the hole is permitted.
• The restrictor plate shall be mounted on the bolts or studs used to
locate the throttle body or carburetor. There shall be no movement
of the restrictor plate possible when mounted.
Flex Joint – A coupling designed to fulfill the function of a universal joint,
but employing flexible materials to achieve changes in the drive axis.
Float – A carburetor component which, with an associated valve, controls
the fuel level in the reservoir supplying the carburetor jet(s).
Float Chamber – The carburetor component which contains the reservoir
of fuel supplying the jet(s).
Float Valve – The shut off valve actuated by a carburetor float, which
controls the maximum level of the fuel in the float chamber.
GCR - 135
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Floor Pan – The section(s) of a car normally used as a supporting platform
for seats and to physically separate the interior (cockpit) area from the
underside of the car.
Fluid – Any material which readily flows at the specified temperature,
e.g., liquids and gases at room temperature.
Flywheel – An engine attachment whose normal functions are to provide
a gear appropriate for starter engagement, to provide a friction drive
surface and attachment points for a clutch pressure plate, and to smooth
the flow of power.
Frame – The minimal configuration of a car necessary to contain all
running gear and to provide support for the body. Not present on “frameless” or “unibody” cars.
Fuel – The chemical mixture which, when mixed with air, is burned in an
engine to produce power.
Fuel Cell – A crash-resistant container for the on-board fuel supply of a
car.
Fuel Distribution Unit – A fuel injection induction system component
which accomplishes the distribution of fuel to the injection nozzles.
Fuel Injection – A system, including mechanical and/or electrical components, whose function is to provide fuel, via pressurized nozzles, to the
engine in lieu of carburetion.
Fuel Line – A hose or tube which conveys fuel from one point to another.
Fuel Metering Unit – A component of a fuel injection system which, under
external control, determines the quantity of fuel supplied to the engine at
any given time.
Fuel Pickup – The attachment to a fuel tank or fuel cell at which point the
supply line(s) leading to the fuel pump(s) are attached.
Fuel Pump – A pump, mechanical or electromechanical, whose function
is to cause the transport of fuel from the fuel cell or tank to the induction
system.
Fuel Tank – A conventional OEM container, not of the safety fuel cell
type, for the on-board fuel supply of a car.
Gas Cap – See Filler Cap.
Gasket – A sealing component of unspecified composition which is
intended to prevent the leakage of a fluid (air, water, oil, etc.) at the interface between two demountable assemblies.
Gauges – Mechanical or electronic readouts of automotive parameters.
Gear – A toothed drive train component used, in mesh with another gear,
for the transmission of rotational force.
Generator – An engine-driven attachment which produces direct current
to replenish an on‑board storage battery.
Girdle – A component whose purpose is the structural reinforcement of
the bottom end of an engine block. It either replaces the main bearing
caps with a continuous block of material containing equivalent bearing
mounts or it is a continuous block of material that mates with the existing
main bearing caps (which may be machined to achieve the mating).
Grille – The decorative covering for the grille opening.
Grille Opening – The opening in the front of a car, through which cooling
air is ducted to the radiator(s), and in some cases, to other accessories,
or to the engine.
GCR - 136
Ground Effects – A term for a car design in which airflow produces a
significant pressure differential between the upper and lower portions of
the body/chassis, creating downforce on the assembly.
Gudgeon Pin – English term for piston wrist pin.
Gusset – A brace generally formed by attaching, by welding, a plate at or
near the junction of two structural beams or tubes, providing reinforcement particularly in the plane including the tubes and the plate.
H.D. – Heavy duty.
H.T. – High tension. English term for spark plug voltage in regard to ignition components.
Hand Brake – A braking system component causing a braking action on 1
or more wheels, or on another part of the drive train, which may be actuated and locked in the engaged position by the driver.
Hardtop – A removable rigid substitute for a convertible or roadster top.
Hatchback – A hinged body component containing the rear window
which, in the open position, gives access to the interior of a car from the
rear.
Head and Neck Restraint – A protection device which attaches to the
helmet and is intended to decease neck stresses and forward head movement during an impact.
Head Rest – See Head Restraint.
Head Restraint – A cushioned, fixed restraining object intended to protect
the driver under conditions which cause the driver’s head to be thrust
rearward.
Header – A multibranch exhaust system assembly, whose function is to
convey the exhaust products from more than one cylinder to one or more
exhaust pipes.
Header Tank – A component of an engine cooling system, generally at
the top or above the radiator, which is often used as the filling point for
the system.
Headlight Cover – A protective cover for headlight(s) which is part of the
original configuration of the body design.
Heat Riser Tube – An attachment to an induction system which provides
a source of warmed air, generally from the exhaust system, as an aid to
cold running.
Heat Sink – A part of a system used to convey and dissipate heat from
another part of the system.
Helicoil – A commercial repair for internal threads.
Homologation – A system whereby the manufacturer/competitor certifies that a Formula or Sports Racing car, as produced, complies with the
applicable construction specifications. compliance with the construction
specifications does not certify that the car meets the class specific specifications.
Hood – The panel or assembly of panels which cover the engine compartment.
Horn – The audible signaling device with which highway cars are equipped.
Hot Terminal – The terminal of a storage battery which is not connected
to the frame or chassis of the car.
Hub – A component to which a road wheel is attached, which provides
GCR - 137
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
support for the wheel, and has the capability, via attached internal bearings to rotate on a fixed shaft.
Hub Caps – Decorative removable attachments to the central area of road
wheels.
Hub Carrier – A suspension component which provides the means for
mounting a rotating wheel hub, and for attachment of suspension components and stabilizers.
Idler Shaft – A shaft which rotates, or supports another component which
rotates, without itself transmitting the rotational force.
Ignition System – A system which converts on-board storage battery
supply voltage into a timed sequence of high voltage pulses suitable for
igniting engine combustion mixtures in a controlled manner.
Independent Suspension – A suspension system in which either wheel
on the referenced end of the car can undergo its normal vertical motions
without directly influencing the motions of the other wheel.
Induction System – Those engine components directly associated with
the creation and conveyance of the combustible mixture, and any functional associated attachments thereto.
Injection Nozzle – The fuel induction system component through which
fuel is forced under pressure to form a combustible mixture with air.
Inlet Port – The cylinder head duct leading to intake valve(s).
Insert (Strut) – The replaceable portion of a suspension strut, basically a
tubular shock absorber with the necessary fastening element(s) for the
upper strut mounting point.
Instrument – An indicator or readout which, when active, contains information about some aspect of car operation for driver reference.
Instrument Panel – A panel, the associated mounting bracket(s), and
HVAC ducting components, located within the cockpit of a car, and in
a position convenient for driver visibility, which may provide a mounting
area for various gauges and controls. Also referred to as a dash pad or
dash panel.
Intake – An opening through which fluid/air enters an enclosure.
Intercooler – A heat exchanger associated with a turbocharging or supercharging system, which is intended to reduce the temperature of the
incoming air or air/fuel mixture, and is located in ducting between the
turbo/super-charger and the engine.
IR – Individual runners. (No balance pipe, no plenum)
Jack Points – Locations on the underside of a car suitable for the application of a lifting jack.
Jack Shaft – A shaft which transfers a driving force from one element of
an engine to another, such as the drive for an oil pump and/or distributor,
taken from an overhead camshaft.
Jet – A carburetor aperture component which is used to meter air and/or
fuel flowing into the mixing region of the carburetor by presenting restriction to the flow.
Kill Switch – See Master Switch.
Lamp – see Bulb.
L.T. – Low tension. English term for battery voltage in regard to ignition
components.
GCR - 138
Limited Slip Differential – A differential which is designed in such a way
as to overcome the normal action of a differential to apply most of the
available torque to the least loaded wheel, and instead to apply a significant portion of the torque to the most loaded wheel.
Linkage – A link or system of links (cables, rods, etc.) which convey a
mechanical force from one location to another.
Lip-Type Rear Spoiler – A directly attached aerodynamic device which
generates downforce from the action of air flowing over a single surface,
creating a turbulent depression away from the direction of motion.
Lobe Center – The angular position of a camshaft, defined as that position
in the rotation at which the lift of an associated tappet will be greatest.
Locked Differential – A variation of the limited slip differential in which no
relative slippage of the two driven wheels is permitted under any conditions.
Lubricant – A substance which, when interposed between components
moving with respect to each other, reduces friction and promotes durability. (see section 9.3 Oil and Additives)
Lubrication System – those components directly associated with the lubrication of an engine, including hoses, pumps, heat exchangers, internal
engine passages, galleries, lubricant retention components, and lubricant
entry and exits points, etc.
Luggage Compartment – The region within the bodywork of a car which
is designated as being intended for the carrying of luggage.
Magneto – An ignition system component which generates the electrical
power for ignition of combustion with a system of magnets and coils in
relative motion.
Main Bearing Cap – A reciprocating engine component which has provision for nominally half of one main crankshaft bearing, and which, when
attached to the engine block, may also provide lateral location for the
crankshaft.
Manifold – A passive device for conveying gases into or out of an engine,
generally to achieve the connection of differing numbers of ducts.
Master Cylinder – A hydraulic component of the braking system which
produce positive pressure in the hydraulic lines on the application of
mechanical force.
Master Switch – A safety switch which can be actuated by the driver or
other to disable all operating electrical functions, without disconnecting
the electrical supply to any fire system present.
McPherson Strut – (See strut type suspension) A front suspension type
utilizing a strut with integral tubular shock absorber and coil spring, with
the steering swivel axis that of the strut/shock. Upper location is by strut
only.
Metal – An element that forms metallic bonds between its atoms, is
usually shiny, is usually ductile and malleable, usually has a high melting
point, is usually hard, and conducts electricity and heat well.
Metallic – A material having iridescent or specular (mirror-like) reflective
qualities (e.g. aluminum foil).
Metering Rod – A carburetor component which aids in the metering of
fuel flow.
Mirror (Rear View) – A reflective device whose sole purpose is to enable
the driver’s field of vision to extend in a rearward direction.
GCR - 139
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Modify/Modification – To change a component from stock.
Monocoque – A frameless construction in which the main structure of a
car is composed of a permanent assembly of panels to which the running
gear, suspension and body are attached.
Motor Mount – See Engine Mount.
Mudguard – A partial fender, generally not contiguous with the car body.
Muffler – A component, whose function is to reduce the sound level from
an exhaust system.
NASCAR-Style Door Bars – If installed, shall consist of one or more sidebars that intrude into the door cavity and connect the main hoop to the
front hoop.
Needles (Carb) – Tapered carburetor fuel flow metering shafts, or tapered
shafts used in float shutoff valves.
Nitride (Verb) – To heat process ferrous metal components so as to
increase the surface hardness.
O-Ring – A seal or gasket, generally made from an elastomer or metal, in
the shape of a torus with a circular cross section.
O E M – Original Equipment Manufacturer.
Offset Key – A metal drive key for coupling a shaft and a pulley, wheel,
or sprocket, in which opposite radial ends of the key are offset to achieve
adjustment of the phase relationship of the driving and driven parts.
OHC (Overhead Cam) – A type of reciprocating engine in which the
camshaft(s) are located in the cylinder head(s), and act on the valves,
either directly or through a linkage.
OHV (Overhead Valve) – A type of reciprocating engine in which the
camshaft(s) are located in the engine block, and act on the valves through
linkage, generally including pushrods and rocker arms.
Oil Filter – An engine accessory intended to intercept all or a portion of
the lubricant circulating from the oil pump, and to remove, by trapping,
solid particles from the lubricant.
Oil Galley – A passage within an engine block which carries the flowing
lubricant to various internal distribution points.
Oil Line – A hose or pipe, external to the engine, which conveys lubricating oil from one point to another.
Oil Pan – An oil sump fixed to the bottom of an engine.
Oil Passage – A duct within an engine component intended to convey
lubricating oil.
Oil Pump – A mechanically-driven pump designed to draw lubricant from
a reservoir, or sump, and supply it under pressure to the balance of the
lubrication system.
Oil Separator – Sealed inline catch tank, generally located between the
crankcase vent and intake tract.
Oil Strainer – A screen surrounding the oil pickup in an engine which is
intended to keep relatively large solid particles from being drawn into the
pump.
Oil Sump – The container in which the return lubricant from the engine is
collected to form the supply from which the pump may draw.
Orientation – Alignment relative to its major axis.
GCR - 140
Outline – A line that marks the outer limits of an object or figure.
Overhang – The distance which the end of the bodywork extends away
from the wheels at the referenced end of the car.
Panhard Rod – A rear axle lateral locating device, which has one end
connected via a link to the axle housing, and the other end connected to
the car structure or bodywork.
Parkerizing – A commercial process in which a metal part, usually a
camshaft, is treated to increase resistance to break-in scuffing.
Parking Brake – See Hand Brake.
Parking Light – A non-racing lighting component, frequently combined
with lighting components of other functions, intended to illuminate the
extremities of a car while parked.
Phase – The angular relationship between two rotating components, or
between 1 rotating component and a periodic event.
Pickup point (Suspension) – The location of attachment of a suspension
component on the frame or structure of the car. Pickup point is also
referred to as “pivot axis.”
Pilot Bearing – A bearing, generally within one end of a shaft, which
is intended to support another shaft under conditions of relative rotary
motion.
Piston – A reciprocating engine component whose functions are to
provide a partial vacuum with which to induce the flow of fuel/air into the
combustion region, to convert the combustion pressures to reciprocating
motion, and to expel exhaust gases.
Piston Deck Height – The distance between the top of the piston at its
outer edge and the machined surface that forms the head/block interface
of the block (piston).
Piston Ring – A reciprocating engine component which, when mounted
on a piston, provides either sealing or oil control functions when the
engine is in operation.
Pitman Arm – A steering system component which translates the rotation
of the steering gears to a linear motion of steering links.
Plenum – An induction system chamber generally interposed between
carburetor(s) or air intake(s) and ducts feeding ports.
Points (Ignition) – The switch portion of a distributor actuated by cam
lobes, which interrupts the current flowing through the primary windings of an ignition coil, thus generating high voltage pulses which are
conveyed to the spark plug.
Polish (Verb) – To reduce the roughness of a surface by mechanical,
chemical, or electrochemical means.
Port – See Intake, Exhaust Ports.
Power Brakes – A braking system in which the driver-initiated mechanical force acting on a master cylinder is assisted by a servo mechanism,
generally derived from manifold vacuum.
Power Steering – A steering system in which the driver-initiated force
acting on the steering gears is assisted by a servo mechanism, usually
involving an engine-driven hydraulic pump.
Power Train – Consists of the combination of an internal combustion
Engine and Drive Train components. The Engine specifically includes
induction systems (carburation, fuel injection, forced and natural, intake
GCR - 141
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
manifolds) and exhaust systems (manifolds, headers, turbochargers) up
thru and including the flywheel. Ancillaries such as electrical (charging or
ignition) or cooling are specifically excluded.
Pressure Equalizing Device – A braking system component intended to
equalize or allow adjustment of the relative pressures in separate branches
of the hydraulic system (e.g. front/rear).
Pressure Plate – The clutch assembly component which provides the
force necessary to couple the engine to the next component in the drive
train through friction surfaces.
Pressure Regulator Spring – A spring whose installed force determines
the pressure at which a valve or valve system will open to allow the flow
of fluid.
Profile (Verb) – To measure or to reshape the contour of a camshaft lobe,
rocker arm or similar component.
Propeller Shaft – See Drive Shaft.
Proportioning Valve – A braking system component intended to allow
adjustment of the hydraulic pressures available in separate branches of
the system (e.g., front/rear).
Pulley – A rotational attachment for a drive belt.
Pushrod – A cylindrical or tubular reciprocating engine component which
transmits a reciprocating motion arising from camshaft rotation to or
toward the valves.
Pushrod Tube – An engine component which encloses a pushrod in the
region between the engine block and the cylinder head.
Qualifier – (a) One who receives a time, or (b) One who is waived into a
race by the Race Director or Chief Steward and starts the race.
Racers Tape – Generally duct tape, an adhesive, fabric-backed tape.
Rack and Pinion – A type of steering system, or the gear components
thereof, in which the rotary motions of a pinion gear attached to the
steering shaft act on a rack, or linear gear.
Radiator (Cooler) – A heat exchanger intended to remove heat from
engine or gear fluids.
Radius (Verb) – To contour an abrupt edge on a component by increasing
the radius of the transition.
Rain Light – A light used at the rear of a race car during periods of low
visibility as a warning to following cars.
Rain Tire – A racing tire intended solely for competition in wet conditions.
Ram Air – A type of induction system in which the incoming air is obtained
from an extension into the airstream outside the bodywork.
Ratio (Gear) – The number of rotations of the drive shaft which produces
one (1) rotation of the driven shaft(s).
Rebound – A suspension term referring to motion in the upward direction.
Reciprocating Engine – An internal combustion engine in which the driven
actions of one or more pistons are converted to the rotary motion of a
crankshaft.
Relief Valve – A check valve intended to vent at a predetermined pressure
differential.
Remote Reservoir Shock Absorber – Any shock absorber or dampening
device which uses an externally mounted (connected either by hose or
GCR - 142
“piggy back” design) fluid and/or gas reservoir.
Removal – To take off a component.
Repair (Verb) – To remove the effect(s) of accidental damage to a component, returning it to original or legally modified dimensions and function.
Replica – A component identical to or very similar in appearance and function to the original which it replaces.
Resistor Spark Plug – An ignition system spark plug containing electrical
resistance which is intended to reduce radio interference.
Restrictor, Intake - any of the following methods of restricting the volume
of air entering the intake system on and internal combustion engine.
The following applies to all restrictors:
The specified ID of the restrictor is listed on the vehicle’s spec
line, the engine spec line or within general engine specifications
for the class. The engine air intake system must be fitted with an
aluminum, (alternate materials are permitted where specified) air
restrictor. The intake system is defined as an assembly of parts,
including but not restricted to: the restrictor, restrictor housing,
ducting, filters, air box, velocity stacks, throttle body, carburetors,
manifold and manifold gasket up to the intake ports on the cylinder
head. The intent of a restrictor in the system is to have a sealed
system from the restrictor to the intake ports of the cylinder head.
All of the air entering the intake ports shall pass through the specified restrictor. Modification or addition to any part of the intake
system that allows the introduction of air into the intake ports that
has not passed through the specified restrictor is prohibited.
All restrictors internal shape must be round and centered with
respect to the throttle body bore or carburetor bore or intake manifold bore to which it is attached. On engines requiring a restrictor
all air entering the intake ports must pass through the restrictor.
Choke - an intake restrictor (venturi) for the purpose of limiting
intake air volume.
Flat Plate Intake Restrictor (FPIR) – a metal plate through which
all engine combustion chamber air (and possibly fuel) must pass.
Unless otherwise specified in a category, class or individual engine
specification, all flat plate restrictors must meet the following
requirements (more than one plate restrictor may be required in
some applications; each shall meet the require-ments):
The restrictor shall be made from flat steel or aluminum sheet at
least 0.060 inches thick no radiusing, chamfering or beveling of
the hole is permitted. The restrictor plate must be located between
the throttle body or carburetor and the engine within 4 inches of
the centerline of the carburetor or fuel injection butterfly. Alternate locations may be specified in class specific rules. A steel or
aluminum spacer no more than .75 inches thick may be placed
between the throttle body or carburetor and the restrictor to allow
for clearance of the butterfly. The hole must be the same shape
and size as the throttle body or carburetor flange; no radiusing,
chamfering or beveling of the hole is permitted. The restrictor plate
shall be mounted on the bolts or studs used to locate the throttle
body or carburetor. There shall be no movement of the restrictor
plate possible when mounted. Alternate mounting may be may be
specified in class specific rules.
Single Inlet Restrictor (SIR) – A system to limit engine performance
GCR - 143
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
that meets the following criteria:
The restrictor’s specified ID must be maintained for a minimum
length of 3.0 mm. Restrictor mounting/placement within the intake
system is free, but must allow accessibility for measurement. It is
acceptable to have some minor disassembly of the intake system
to provide access to the restrictor for measurement. Measurement
device and restrictor shall be similar temperatures when used.
SIR testing procedure:
The inlet side of the SIR can be cleared of debris that would hinder
the proper sealing of the designated SIR Ball. Pressure sensors
present inside the intake system must be disconnected. The SIR
stall test is to be administered with the idle of the vehicle set at
2500 RPM. The competitor must be prepared to set the RPM at a
sustained 2500rpm. The competitor may not be inside the vehicle
during testing. The competitor should be prepared to perform the
test at full operating temperature or cold. Testing should be accomplished with a stopwatch and measured from the time of insertion
of the SIR test ball to the time the crank stops moving. If the
vehicle stalls within 4 seconds, the vehicle is deemed compliant of
the stall test. In the event of a failed stall test, run the engine to
clear any accumulated fuel in the Plenum. At this point, the test
is to be repeated two (and only two) more times and it must pass
both times. All parts of the intake system, must withstand all three
of the possible stall tests without modification or repair to any
part of the system. If the system suffers damage that prohibits
the system from achieving a compliant result it cannot be repaired
to conduct subsequent tests. The system is to be tested as is and
the result is considered “as raced”. It is the responsibility of the
competitor to present a system that can withstand every possible
scenario that would or could result in a failed SIR stall test. The
intake system shall be visually inspected for devices and design
that could result in induction of additional air that did not pass
through the SIR. Introduction of air behind the SIR by any means is
prohibited.
Supercharger Inlet Restrictor (SCIR) - The restrictor’s specified ID
must be maintained for at least 3.0 mm. This 3.0 mm restrictor
segment shall be placed within 50 mm of the rotating section
(impeller assembly) of the pressurizing unit.
Turbo Inlet Restrictor (TIR) –
The restrictor’s specified ID must be maintained for at least 3.0
mm. This 3.0 mm restrictor segment shall be placed within 50
mm of the rotating section (impeller assembly) of the pressurizing
unit. On engines where the approved turbo prohibits meeting this
distance, different locations may be approved by the CRB on a
case-by-case basis. If an alternative location is approved, the entire
restrictor assembly shall have a maximum length of 50 mm. There
shall be no other provisions for airflow to the turbocharger other
than through this single orifice.
Venturi Restrictor- see venturi and choke.
Ride Height – The distance from level ground to the specified portion of
the car, with the tires, wheels, air pressure, etc., as normally raced.
Rim Width – The distance between the opposing lateral sides of a road
wheel in the region where the bead of a tire seats. Measuring method per
tire and rim association standard.
GCR - 144
Ring Gear – The main driven gear in a final drive assembly, driven by a
pinion gear. Also the starter engagement gear on a flywheel.
Rocker Arm – A valve train component which transfers the motions of the
camshaft, often with a multiplication of travel, to a valve.
Rocker Cover – See Valve Cover.
Rocker Panel – The body panel closest to the ground extending along
either outer side of a car between the wheels.
Rod End – A load-bearing threaded mechanical coupling with angular
freedom of the relative axes and which allows rotation of the inner portion
with respect to the outer, i.e. spherical bearing.
Roll Bar – A safety device designed to protect the driver from injury in the
event of a roll over accident. See Section 9.4.
Roll Cage – An extension of a minimal roll bar, designed to protect the
driver from injury from accidental forces in several directions. See Section
9.4.
Roller Cam Follower – An engine component (tappet) which utilizes a
rolling member to contact the camshaft.
Rotary Engine – A non-reciprocating engine of the NSU-Wankel type.
Rotary Engine Rotor – The main rotating component of a rotary engine,
which essentially accomplishes the compression, power delivery and
exhaust functions of a reciprocating engine in constrained rotation in a
specially shaped housing.
Rotary Piston – See Rotary Engine Rotor.
Rotor Housing – The housing of a rotary engine in which the rotor rotates.
Analogous to the engine block of a reciprocating engine.
Rub Strip – Expendable material added to bottom of a car to prevent
contact with the road surface from damaging non-expendable portions
of the car.
Runner – A duct of an induction system leading to the cylinder head.
Running Light – A signaling light of specified size and location, which can
be activated by driver control, and is intended to improve the ability of
other drivers to detect the signaling car.
Scattershield – A stationary safety device intended to protect the driver
in the event of catastrophic clutch/flywheel failure.
Scraper – A passive internal attachment to an oil pan whose purpose is
to control the return flow of lubricant by removing it from the rotating
crankshaft.
Seal – A conformable sealing component generally used to inhibit the
passage of fluids along the shafts of moving parts, such as valves, master
cylinders, etc.
Seat Belt – A safety strap, generally containing the attachment/release
mechanism for all other safety straps, intended to restrain the driver
against forces tending to move the driver. See Section 9.3. Driver’s
Restraint System.
Section Width – The lateral cross section of a tire, sidewall to sidewall.
Servo Assist – The application of mechanical assistance, through vacuum
or hydraulic or other external action, to reduce the forces required from
the driver.
Shaved Tread – A tire tread which has been abraded or cut to reduce the
GCR - 145
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
tread depth.
Shift Fork – A transmission or transaxle component which directly moves
gears into engagement or disengagement in response to driver actions.
Shock Absorber – A device intended to dampen the actions of road
springs.
Short Shift Kit – A mechanical modification or replacement of shift lever
or shift linkage parts only, to modify the throw of the shifter. It does not
change the pattern, syncros, gear ratios, gears, bearings or any other
internal parts from the original.
Shot Blasting – See Shot Peening.
Shot/Glass Peening – A treatment, consisting of impelling small glass or
metal balls into metal parts, intended to reduce stresses in components.
Shoulder Harness – A safety strap assembly intended to restrain the driver’s upper body under conditions of rapid reduction of forward velocity.
See Section 9.3. Driver’s Restraint System.
Side Marker Light – A small light fixture normally mounted on the side of
a fender, which is intended to make the car more readily visible from the
side under appropriate conditions.
Signal Light – A light fixture used to signal turns or, in some cases, stops.
Single Inlet Restrictor (SIR) – See Restrictor, Intake.
Slave Cylinder – A hydraulic system component which achieves the
conversion of hydraulic pressure to mechanical force, usually to accomplish a disengagement of the clutch.
Space Frame – An automotive frame constructed of multiple small tubes.
See also Tube Frame.
Spark Plug – An engine component which, by means of high voltage
supplied by an ignition system, initiates the combustion of the air/fuel
mixture.
Specification – A detailed presentation of parameters which determine
the performance or suitability of a system or assembly of systems to
accomplish design goals.
Spherical Bearing – A load-bearing connector in which the central portion
is convex and the outer portion is concave, allowing both angular displacements of the axes and relative rotation.
Spider Gears – Components of the torque division section of a conventional differential gear assembly.
Spindle (Stub Axle) – The shaft, and integral assembly supporting a wheel
hub, and often, braking and/or steering components.
Spoiler – A panel attached to the body of a car at the front or rear,
intended to alter the airflow around or under that end of the car when in
motion.
Spring Cap – See Valve Spring Retainer.
Spring Shock – A suspension assembly containing a coil spring surrounding
a tubular shock absorber.
Spring Washer – A spacer designed to exert force against securing pressure, thus reducing the tendency of an attached threaded fastener to
separate.
Sprocket – A gear made specifically for use with a drive chain.
Stabilizer – An attachment to the suspension system, not usually part
GCR - 146
of the suspension, which aids in maintaining the relative alignment of a
wheel or wheels to the car.
Starter (Self Starter) – An electrical device which is used to initiate normal
engine operation by converting electrical energy into mechanical rotation
of the engine.
Starter Ring – The gear on the outer periphery of a flywheel for application of drive from a starter.
Stayrod – A rigid reinforcement bar or rod interconnecting opposite sides
of a car at structurally significant locations.
Steering – The mechanical system of components that allow a wheel to
be turned side to side to follow the desired course of its driver.
Steering Arm – The rigid link in a steering system which conveys the
steering action from the steering gears and linkage to a wheel assembly.
Steering Column – The shaft forming the connection between the steering
wheel and the steering gear, through which driver-initiated steering
motions are transmitted.
Steering Linkage – The various components, exclusive of gears, steering
column and steering wheel, which transmit the driver’s steering motions
to the steered wheels.
Steering Lock – The degree of turning motion given to the steering wheel,
and hence to the steered wheels. “Full lock” denotes the maximum available turning angle.
Steering Lock Mechanism – An antitheft device used to lock the steering
shaft or wheel when the ignition key is withdrawn.
Stock – In the exact same state or location as supplied by the original
manufacturer.
Streamlining – Smoothing the airflow over a portion of the car.
Stroke – The length of travel of an engine piston from uppermost to
lowermost positions.
Strut (Stabilizer) – A rigid beam used to assist in the location of suspension components.
Strut Type Suspension – Strut suspension consists of three pivoting
attachment points including a single upper attachment point, the spindle
being mounted on a telescoping post with no vertical movement at the
top attachment point.
Stub Axle – See Spindle.
SU-type Carburetor – Any single barrel automotive-type side draft, overhead sliding piston type carburetor regardless of manufacturer.
Sub-frame/Cross Member – A component attached to the frame or structure of a car in order to augment its strength while at the same time
serving as a platform for mounting suspension and drive train components.
Substitution – To remove a component and replace it with another.
Surround – To enclose on all sides.
Sunroof – A movable panel in the roof of a car, which may normally be
partially opened from within the car.
Supercharger – An induction system compressor component, mechanically driven from the engine, which provides forced flow of the fuel/air
mixture into the engine by the generation of positive pressure.
GCR - 147
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Suspension – A mechanical system of components controlling vertical
motion and connecting the axle housing and wheels to the chassis of a
car.
Suspension Bushing – A hollow cylindrical mounting component which
acts as a bearing, allowing constrained motion, between a suspension
component and attachment point.
Suspension Control Arm – A beam or frame intended to limit the normal
motion of the affected suspension part to predetermined paths.
Suspension Pick Up Point – The point on the frame, subframe, cross
member or chassis where the suspension members are attached.
Swaged Fitting – A tubing fitting which utilizes some form of extrusion
of the tubing to form a seal against the leakage of pressurized fluid from
within the tubing.
Sway Bar – See Anti Roll Bar.
Synchronizer – A transmission component which aids in matching speeds
of 2-gears as they are engaged.
System – An assembly of components with an identifiable primary function.
T-type Top – A body design in which the roof contains, above the front
seats, 2 removable panels separated by a fixed section which joins to the
balance of the roof.
Taillight – The running (parking) light assembly at the rear of a car, which
may include lights with stop and/or turn signaling functions.
Tap (Verb) – To cut threads in a hole to retain a stud or bolt with threads
of matching pitch and diameter.
Tappet – (Cam follower, valve lifter) An engine component which, in
contact with the camshaft, follows its rotating profile, resulting in a
programmed reciprocating motion suitable for actuating valves.
Targa-Type Top – An automotive roof design in which the area over the
front seats is removable.
T D C – Top dead center, referring to the rotational position of the crankshaft when the number one piston is farthest from the crankshaft.
Tender Spring – A spring used to capture the spring with the perches at
full droop and are completely compressed when the car is at static ride
height. Static ride height shall be determined with driver seated in the
normal driving position.
Thermostat – An engine cooling system regulator device which is intended
to control the temperature of the coolant by modulating the flow through
an aperture.
Throttle Butterfly – An induction system component which may effectively vary the area of the induction port when turned (in response to
driver input) from parallel to the flow in the port (“full throttle”), to almost
perpendicular to the flow (“closed throttle”).
Throwout Bearing – A bearing which, in response to driver actuation,
accomplishes the application of the force needed to release the friction
clutch through the actuation of the pressure plate.
Tie Rod – The link connecting a portion of the steering system which is
fixed to the chassis to a sprung wheel.
Time (Verb) – To adjust the phase relationship of ignition and crankshaft,
or of camshaft(s) and crankshaft.
GCR - 148
Timing Belt – A toothed belt used, with appropriate pulleys, to convey
drive force in a synchronous manner from the crankshaft to one or more
camshafts.
Timing Gear – The engine gear or sprocket attached to a camshaft and
driven by the crankshaft via gear(s) or chain.
Tire Tread – The portion of a tire containing the material intended to be in
road contact while a car is in straight-ahead motion.
Toe (-In, -Out) – The measure of the position of the wheels on either axle
of a car with respect to each other, with reference to the fore/aft direction.
Tonneau Cover – A cover for the passenger portion of an open car.
Top (Removable) – A removable covering for an open car, normally
supplied for protection against the elements.
Torque Biasing Differential – A form of limited slip differential.
Torque Converter – An engine-driven power transmission device which
couples driving and driven shafts with a variable speed reduction.
Torque Suppressor – See Engine Steady Bar.
Torsion Bar – A bar or beam intended to act as a springing medium, in
which the “springing” is derived from resistance to twisting along the
main axis of the bar.
Track – The distance between the center of the rims of two wheels at one
end of a car, with any angular adjustments at normal settings and steered
wheels in the straight ahead position.
Traction Bar – A longitudinal link to an axle housing or hub carrier which
resists torque reaction from the driven wheel(s) by acting in compression
or tension.
Traction Control – Any system that employs electronic signals to reduce
wheel spin, independent of direct driver inputs. To achieve their goal,
such systems may, for example, reduce engine speed, reduce fuel flow,
selectively apply braking, or modify differential input.
Trailing Arm – A wheel control linkage locating the wheel in the fore/aft
direction, which is attached to the car structure at the forward end of the
arm, and to the wheel carrier at the rear of the arm.
Transaxle – A component containing the mechanisms necessary to
achieve the combined functions of a transmission and a differential.
Transistor Ignition – A system of ignition in which electronic components
are utilized.
Translucent – Permitting the passage of a reasonable amount of visible
light. In the case of fluid containers, permitting the visual assessment of
fluid levels by observing these through the container.
Transmission (Gearbox) – An assembly of driver-selectable gears in an
independent housing, located between the engine and driven wheels,
whose function is to alter the rotational velocity reaching the wheels.
Transmission Short Shift Kit – see Short Shift Kit.
Transparent – Offering very little resistance to the passage of visible light,
suitable for use in the line of sight.
Transverse Engine – An engine located in a car such that the crankshaft
centerline is nominally perpendicular to the normal direction of car motion.
Trim – Coverings or attachments whose function is solely cosmetic.
GCR - 149
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Trued Tread – The tread of a tire which has been cut after mounting on a
wheel so as to ensure that the surface of the tread is equidistant from the
center of the wheel at all angles of rotation.
Trumpet – See Velocity Stack.
Trunk Area – The spare tire and/or luggage region inside the body of a
car.
Tub – The central contiguous assembly of stressed panels which form the
basic structure of a frameless car.
Tub-based (non tube-frame) Car – A non-tube frame car has a stock floor
pan, firewall, door pillars, sills, windshields conforming to stock profile,
and window frames, etc.
Tube Frame Car – A car intended solely for racing, whose main structure
or frame is fabricated from an assembly of tubes welded into the desired
configuration.
Tuftriding – A commercial surface hardening process for ferrous metals.
Turbo Boost Control – An adjustment which causes a change in the
degree of turbo boost available.
Turbo Inlet Restrictor – See Restrictor, Intake.
Turbocharger – An induction system compressor component, driven by
exhaust gases from the engine, which provides forced flow of the fuel/air
mixture into the engine by means of positive pressure.
Undertray (Belly Pan) – An attachment to the underside of a car intended
to smooth airflow and/or to offer driver protection in this region of the car.
Unibody – A type of construction in which the main car structure is
fabricated from an assembly of panels and reinforcements, permanently
fastened together, generally by welding, into a single unit.
Universal Joint – A mechanical drive train component which permits a
change in direction of the axis of rotation conveying the force.
Unswept Volume – The enclosed volume existing in a cylinder/cylinder
head with the piston at its closest approach to the cylinder head.
Vacuum Advance Mechanism – An ignition distributor mechanism which,
under the influence of manifold vacuum, changes the ignition timing in a
prescribed fashion.
Valance – Bodywork welded or bolted to the cars body/structure, at the
front or rear of a car, normally but not always located behind and/or
below the bumper.
Valve – A reciprocating engine component, consisting of head and a
stem, which may be opened or sealed in phase with crankshaft rotation,
so as to control the induction of fuel/air mixtures or the exhaust of products of the combustion process.
Valve Cover – A cylinder head attachment whose function is to contain
lubricants and to protect the valve actuation mechanism from outside
contaminants.
Valve Guide – A sleeve bearing whose function is to provide axial location
of a valve, while allowing normal reciprocating motions.
Valve Head – the portion of the valve that is larger than the stem.
Valve Keeper – The component, generally two‑piece, which secures the
valve spring retainer to the valve stem in a cylinder head.
Valve Relief – A cutout in a piston crown to allow close approach of a
GCR - 150
valve.
Valve Seat – The area in a cylinder head in which the head of a valve
under spring pressure forms a gas seal.
Valve Size – The diameter of the head of a valve.
Valve Spring Retainer (Collar) – A valve train component which serves the
dual purpose of containing the outer end of the valve spring(s), and, by
means of valve keepers, connecting the valve stem to the spring.
Valve Spring Shim – A valve train component whose purpose is to allow
the adjustment of the seated valve spring pressure by effectively changing
its seated length.
Valve Stem (Engine) – The shaft portion of a reciprocating engine poppet
valve.
Valve Stem (Wheel) – The attachment to a road wheel through which
pressurizing air is admitted/released.
Vapor Lock – A condition in the fuel delivery system caused by the existence of vapors, rather than liquid fuel, in the fuel pump, resulting in
abnormal fuel delivery.
Variable Ratio Drive – A power transmission device in which at fixed
input shaft rotational velocity the rotational velocity of the driven shaft is
continuously variable over a prescribed range of ratios.
Velocity Stack (Air Horn/Trumpet) – An induction system attachment,
generally in the form of a cylindrical flare, used to alter the dynamic
coupling between carburetor and the mass of incoming air.
Vent – An aperture which allows pressure equalization between a semisealed volume and the outside of this volume by providing a flow path
for gases.
Ventilation – Cooling a component by an intentional flow of air, or modifying a component so as to facilitate this process.
Venturi – A region of constriction in an air duct of a carburetor in which,
through the actions of incoming air flow, a reduced pressure is created
to induce the inflow of fuel through one or more jets. Also see Restrictor,
Intake.
Vibration Dampener – Generally a rubber-mounted rotating circular disc
or pulley whose function is to reduce the amplitude of vibrations in the
mechanism or part to which it is attached.
Visible – Capable of being seen, perceptible to the eye, apparent, evident.
Voltage Regulator – An electronic or electromechanical device intended to
regulate the charging actions of an alternator or generator.
Watts Linkage – A rear axle lateral location system which employs a
frame/body-mounted central pivoting attachment (bell crank) for 2 lateral
links, whose opposite ends are attached to either end of the axle housing
or vice versa.
Wave Washer – A thin, continuous spring washer.
Welding – The process of fusing one or more components into a single
unit by means other than adhesives or fasteners (i.e. TIG, MIG, soldering,
brazing, etc.).
Wheel – Flange and Rim.
Wheel (Steering) – The cockpit-mounted control device, normally circular,
which allows the driver to exert manual force with which to control the
car’s direction of motion.
GCR - 151
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Wheel Cover – A removable decorative covering for a road wheel.
Wheel Cylinder – A hydraulic component of the braking system, which
produces mechanical force at the wheel brakes in response to positive
hydraulic pressure.
Wheel Fan – An integral part of or attachment to a wheel assembly with
blade‑like elements, intended to improve brake cooling.
Wheel Spacer – A plate of unspecified thickness or material which is
mounted between a road wheel and hub to increase the distance from the
inside of the wheel to the hub, thereby increasing track.
Wheel Trim Rings – Decorative removable attachments to road wheels
effectively covering the rim area of the wheels.
Wheel Well – The volume under a fender.
Wheelbase – The distance between the front and rear axle centerlines of
a car, with the front wheels in the straight ahead position.
Windage Tray – An internal baffle attachment to an engine oil pan which
is intended to help maintain a sufficient supply of lubricant at the location
of the oil pickup under cornering, braking or acceleration.
Windows: –
A.
Door or Side – The opening where the window normally is raised
or lowered in a door. Does not include a “vent” window whether fixed or
movable.
B.
Quarter (1/4) – On a 2-door or 4-door vehicle, the window to
the rear of the rearmost door. Such windows are not generally raised or
lowered, but they may be hinged and open to the rear. Quarter windows
are not “rear” windows.
C.
Rear – Rear windows are positioned at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the car.
Windshield (Windscreen) – An attachment to the bodywork of a car
intended to divert the flow of air from forward motion without obstructing
forward vision.
Windshield Pillar – A body component which extends nominally upward
from the cowl area, forming one supporting attachment for the windshield.
Wing – An aerodynamic attachment to the structure of a car specifically
intended to generate downforce from the action of air flowing over the
upper and lower surfaces, creating a pressure differential.
Wiring Harness – Bundles of electrical wires which provide the electrical
links in a car.
Wishbone Type Susp. – A form of suspension in which the lower (and
often upper) locating links are in the form of a wishbone or “A-frame”,
and provide the lateral and at least a portion of the fore/aft wheel location.
Working Chamber – The volume in a rotary engine which is defined by the
case and the two adjacent rotor tip seals, and which will vary in capacity
with position in rotation.
Worm and Sector – A steering gear type in which the steering forces from
the driver are transmitted to the steering linkage via a worm gear and a
sector gear in mesh.
Wrist Pin – The one-piece physical link between a connecting rod and a
piston.
GCR - 152
Zerk Fitting (Grease gun fitting) – A small check valve attachment to a
bearing housing through which pressurized lubricant may be applied to
the bearing.
GCR - 153
General
Appendix F. Technical Glossary
Appendix G. Facts, Formulas, and Measurement Standards
APPENDIX G. FACTS, FORMULAS, AND MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
1. FACTS AND FORMULAS TO BE USED AT ALL SCCA EVENTS
1 inch = 2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
1 cubic inch = 16.387 cubic cm
1 millimeter = .03937 inch
1 kilometer = 1000 meters =.62137 mile = 1093.6 yards
1 mile = 1,760 yards = 1.60934 kilometers
Miles per hour = kilometers per hour x .62137
Kilometers per hour = miles per hour x 1.60934
1 cubic centimeter = .061 cubic inch
1 liter = 61.03 cubic inches = 1000 cubic centimeters (cc)
1 kilogram = 2.21 pounds
1 pound = 453.6 grams
Cylinder volume (displacement) =
3.1416 x bore x bore x stroke
4
Engine displacement = Cylinder volume times number of cylinders
Compression ratio = V1 + V2
V2
Where V1 is total volume of one cylinder
V2 is volume of space above piston at top of stroke
Piston speed (ft. per min.) = 2 x RPM x stroke in feet
Brake Horsepower (BHP) = RPM x torque (in lbs ft.)
5252
Note: Formula is actually: 6.28 x RPM x torque
33,000
6.28 into 33,000 we get 5250
Torque = BMEP x Swept volume (in cc)
2473
Frontal Area (for figuring air resistance) = T x H (square feet)
144
Where T is front tread in inches, H is overall height in inches.
MPH = RPM x wheel diameter (in inches)
gear ratio x 336
Note: Wheel diameter is overall diameter of the inflated tire, not the
nominal diameter of the wheel.
GCR - 154
2. MEASUREMENT STANDARDS
The following specifications shall meet the standards set below unless
otherwise specified or unrestricted in the individual category or class preparation rules. Any specification not listed herein shall meet stock factory
specifications unless otherwise specified or unrestricted in the individual
category or class preparation rules. For these specifications, the tolerance
shall be equivalent to ½ of the final digit of the specification (e.g. .01”
tolerance equals +/- .005”). Absolute maximum means tolerances of
+0.000 inches or +0.00 millimeters. Absolute minimum means a tolerance of -0.000 inches or -0.00 millimeters. Measuring devices available to
scrutineers differ from location to location so it is the responsibility of the
driver to insure that measurements comply with these rules.
1. Weight is absolute minimum.
2. Track is absolute maximum.
3. Rim width is absolute maximum.
4. Wheelbase has a tolerance of +/-1.0”
5. Valve size is absolute maximum +0.1 mm.
6. Throttle bore and/or venturi size and intake restrictor size is absolute maximum.
7. Drum brake size is nominal i.d. plus manufacturer’s “turning” tolerance.
8. Disk brake rotor diameter has a tolerance of +0.1”.
9. Engine cylinder bore is absolute maximum before allowable overbore.
10.Engine stroke length is absolute maximum +0.1 mm.
11.Valve lift is absolute maximum.
12.Compression ratio is absolute maximum
13. Dialectric Constant has a tolerance of +0.2. (G-01 and FTK-01
meters) or +2 (DT-47FT meter).
3. MEASURING COURSES
The official length of a course shall be measured along the centerline of
the road.
4. MEASURING TRACK
Track is the distance between the centerlines of the wheels as raced,
without driver, measured at a horizontal plane through the wheel hub
centerline. Alternatively, it may be measured from the inside of one
wheel at the hub centerline height to the outside of the other wheel, then
conversely from the outside of the first wheel at hub centerline to the
inside of the second wheel. The 2 dimensions obtained are to be added
together and divided by 2 to obtain the average. Measurements are to
be taken at both front and rear of the wheels and averaged to compensate for toe-in/out. Under certain circumstances it may be preferable to
measure from the outside of one wheel to the outside of another and
from this dimension deduct the thickness of one wheel. This should be
repeated 180° opposite to the first measurement and the two dimensions
averaged.
5. MEASURING WINGS
For all Formula and Sport Racing cars and unless otherwise specified in
the applicable rules the measurement of aero dynamic devices and reference areas shall include end plates but not include fasteners as long as
GCR - 155
General
Appendix G. Facts, Formulas, and Measurement Standards
Appendix G. Facts, Formulas, and Measurement Standards
the fasteners serve no other purpose. Fasteners may protrude no more
than 1/2” from the mounting surface.
GCR - 156
NOTES:
GCR - 157
General
Appendix G. Facts, Formulas, and Measurement Standards
Appendix H. Index
APPENDIX H. INDEX
A
Aborted start 152
ABS 86, 87
Accident 41, 50, 55, 85, 88, 173
Accumulators 86
Advertisements 86
Affidavit 70, 138, 139
Air Bottles 58, 59
Alcoholic Beverages 20
Ambulance 35, 42, 56
Annual Technical Inspection 46
Appeals 53, 78
Appearance 86
ASN 84, 124
Assistance 66, 173
Assistant Chief Steward 39, 55, 73
Authorized Events 19
Automatic Penalties 69
Awards 25, 30, 65, 77
B
Ballast 86
Batteries 86
Blocking 65
Bodywork 86, 93, 94, 97, 98, 102, 105, 112, 161, 167, 169, 170, 180
Bond 55, 74, 75, 95
Brake Lights 102
Brakes 180
Breach of Rules 19
C
Camera Mounts 87
Carburetor 87, 96, 155, 159, 163, 166, 167, 168, 169, 175, 179
Catch Tanks 87, 104
Categories 80
Category 47, 80, 87, 94, 183
Chain Guards 104
Chairman SOM 40, 41, 53, 54, 55, 68, 73, 75, 85, 138
Checkered Flag 63, 64, 65
Chief Course 39
Chief Observer 39, 51
GCR - 158
Chief of Communications 39
Chief of Emergency Services 39, 41
Chief of Flagging 39, 43
Chief of Grid 39
Chief of Pit 39
Chief of Race Administration 39
Chief of Sound Control 39
Chief of Timing and Scoring 39, 48, 70
Chief Registrar 39, 44
Chief Starter 39, 45
Chief Steward 19, 20, 28, 39, 40, 41, 43, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
56, 57, 58, 59, 63, 64, 66, 68, 69, 70, 72, 73, 75, 77, 78, 83, 91, 95,
102, 135, 136, 137, 151, 152, 170
Chief Technical Inspector 39, 46, 74, 85, 88
Classes 80
Club Racing Board 19, 124
Communications 39, 43, 44, 150
Conduct 3, 13, 19, 29, 53, 84, 150
conflict of interest 20
Control Line 64
Corner Stations 43, 44
Counter-Race Direction 43, 66
Course 41, 43, 44, 46, 51, 56, 57, 58, 63, 64, 66, 125, 131, 136, 150, 151,
152, 175, 183
Court of Appeals 13, 19, 30, 69, 75, 77, 78, 138
Crew 14, 19, 20, 22, 35, 44, 47, 54, 58, 64, 66, 68, 69, 72
Cryogenic Treatment 87
D
Dangerous 20
Data Collection 87
Dead Heats 31, 65
Decals 46, 93, 100
Definitions 124, 154
Disqualification 70, 78
E
Emergency 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 55
Entrant 19, 20, 35, 36, 46, 54, 68, 72, 73, 74, 75, 85, 95, 121
Entries 44, 83, 150
Entry Form 36
Entry List 50
Executive Steward 19, 41, 42, 58, 70, 124, 132, 150
GCR - 159
General
Appendix H. Index
Appendix H. Index
F
FIA 13, 80, 84, 88, 89, 91, 92, 105, 115, 117, 122, 124
Final Results 49, 70
Fines 68, 77
Finishers 65, 83
Fire System 92
Fire Truck 42
Firewall 94, 163
FISA 124
Flagging & Communications 43, 150
Flags 43, 44, 46, 56, 150
Fuel 94
Fuel Sample 95, 97
G
Gas Cylinders 58, 59
Gloves 92
Grid 49, 58, 59, 73, 91, 105
H
Hand Signals 66
Historic 28, 29
Homologation 91, 121
Hospital 43
Hot Pit 58, 150
I
Identification Markings 99
Impound 47, 50, 72, 85, 91
Insurance 13, 30, 41, 131
J
Judges 39, 51
L
Lap Charts 49
Licenses 35, 40, 77, 125, 132, 137
Lights 102
Logbook 84, 85, 120
M
Master Switch 102
Media 49, 51, 157, 327
Medical 21, 22, 41, 43, 133
Medical Personnel 41
GCR - 160
Minors 132, 134
Mirrors 103
N
Novice Permit 28, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 140, 141
Numbers 84, 99
O
Observers 51
Observer’s Reports 53
Officials 14, 15, 19, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 51, 54, 63, 64, 66, 74, 124
Oil Lines 86
Oval Track 152
P
Pace Car 151, 152
Pace Lap 64, 152
Paddock 20, 47, 57
Participant 14, 15, 19, 21, 30, 35, 36, 47, 55, 72, 74, 91, 95
Participation Level 83
Passengers 66
Passing 88, 154, 155
Patch 99, 532, 773, 893
Penalties 53, 69, 70, 78, 393, 819, 843
Penalty 36, 47, 50, 52, 55, 69, 70, 72, 75, 77, 78, 85, 138, 139
Pets 20
Photo ID 36, 37
Pits 20, 22, 47, 56, 57, 58, 66, 152
Points 30, 31, 55, 65, 68, 69, 70, 78, 86, 112, 114, 154, 156, 160, 162, 164,
167, 168, 175
Practice 20, 151, 157
Press Officer 51
Probation 53, 68, 69, 70, 77, 138
Program 53, 84, 125
Protest 30, 50, 52, 55, 69, 72, 73, 74, 75, 78, 85, 95
Protest Fee 74, 95
Provisional Results 50
Push Starts 59
Q
Qualifying 20, 49, 54, 57, 58, 59, 150, 151
R
Race Chairman 39, 40, 41, 43, 55
Racing Room 65, 153
GCR - 161
General
Appendix H. Index
Appendix H. Index
Rain Racing Procedure 64
Rear Window Straps 107
Red Flag 57, 63
Regional Only 80
Registrar 39, 40, 44
Reprimand 68
Request for Action 54, 55, 70, 72, 73
Restarts 66
Restraint System 87, 89, 92
Results 14, 49, 52, 53, 54, 65, 70, 72, 74, 77, 83, 85, 95, 158
Retiring 57
RFA 55, 72, 95
Roll Cages 84, 88, 98, 101, 103, 105, 106, 108, 114, 115, 116, 117, 120,
121
Rules of the Road 65
Runoffs 32, 39, 79, 80
S
Safety Car 56, 152
Safety Car Procedure 62
Safety Inspection 46, 86
Sanctions 25, 130
Scales 48
Scattershields 104
Scheduling 29, 124, 151
Scoring 39, 40, 48, 49, 50, 51, 64, 65, 70, 150
Scrutineer 91
Seat 88, 101, 106, 111, 117, 118, 120
Shoes 92
Shortened Race 64
SOM 19, 20, 30, 36, 39, 40, 41, 45, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 59, 68, 69,
70, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79, 85, 95, 138
Sound Control 44
Start 30, 59, 64, 73, 83, 121, 151, 152, 155
Starter 64, 152, 156, 164, 173, 175
Steering Wheel Locks 105
Stewards of the Meeting 19, 39, 52
Sunroofs 87
Supplementary Regulations 151
Suspension 43, 53, 69, 70, 105, 154, 155, 166, 169, 175, 176
T
Tapes 49
Technical Inspection 46, 47, 54, 93
Ties 59, 106
GCR - 162
Timing 39, 40, 48, 49, 50, 51, 64, 65, 70, 150, 154, 158, 177
Tire Warmers 357
Towing Eyes 105
Traction Control 177
Transponders 49
Trophies 30, 41, 65
U
Unsportsmanlike Conduct 19
V
Video Camera Mounts 87
Vintage 28, 29, 100, 140, 141
Visibility 44, 46, 103, 166
W
Waivers 30, 133, 134
Weight 80, 85, 86, 92, 93, 114, 120, 122, 156, 159, 162
Wheel Fans 106
Windows 106, 180
Window Safety Nets 106
Windshield Clips 107
Wrecker 42
Y
Yellow Flag 44, 151, 152
GCR - 163
General
Appendix H. Index
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
APPENDIX I.
2007 ROLL CAGE RULES
This appendix is present so that cages in cars with logbooks from 2007
and earlier can be verified for compliance with the construction rules
required at the time the car was built.
9.4.
DRIVER PROTECTION STRUCTURES
These general specifications are for all automobiles. Roll cages are
required in all automobiles.
Roll cages may be of two (2) designs, low front hoop (top of steering
wheel) or high front hoop (top of windshield). Specific installations are
subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each event.
The Technical Staff of Club Racing shall have the responsibility to ensure
specification compliance with SCCA safety standards. To that end, the
Technical Staff of Club Racing may or may not accept alternate construction standards from any source that significantly vary from SCCA standards of protection.
9.4.1. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if the
car turns over, runs into an obstacle such as a guardrail or catch
fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed to withstand
compression forces from the weight of the car coming down on
the rollover structure and to take fore/aft and lateral loads resulting
from the car skidding along on its rollover structure.
B. Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact by
the driver’s helmet (as seated normally and restrained by seatbelt/
shoulder harness) shall be padded with non-resilient material such
as Ethafoam® or Ensolite® with a minimum thickness of one‑half
(1/2) inch. Padding meeting SFI spec 45.1 or FIA 8857-2001 is
strongly recommended.
C. No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic effect
by creating a vertical thrust.
D. Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into the
driver compartment.
E.Material:
1. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing
(SAE 1010, 1020, 1025) or equivalent, or alloy steel tubing
(SAE, 4130) shall be used for all roll cage structures. Proof of
use of alloy steel is the responsibility of the entrant.
2. Minimum tubing sizes (all Formula, Sports Racing, GT, and
Production Category automobiles, and all automobiles registered prior to June 1, 1994) for all required roll cage elements
(All dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Material
Without Driver
Mild Steel
Alloy Steel
Up to 1500 lbs.
1500-2500 lbs.
Over 2500 lbs.
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
1.50 x .120
1.625 x .120
1.75 x .095
1.375 x .080
1.375 x .095
1.50 x .095
3. Minimum tubing sizes for (all Showroom Stock, Touring and
Improved Touring Category auto-mobiles registered after June
GCR - 164
1, 1994) for all required roll cage elements (All dimensions in
inches):
Up to 1500 lbs. 1.375 x .095 DOM
1501-2200 lbs. 1.500 x .095 DOM
2201-3000 lbs. 1.500 x .120 DOM
1.625 x .120 DOM
1.750 x .095 DOM
(American Sedans may construct to these specs
3001-4000 lbs. 1.750 x .120 DOM
Over 4000 lbs.
2.000 x .120 DOM
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
regardless of weight.)
/ Seamless / Alloy
/ Seamless / Alloy
Note: ERW tubing is not permitted in any car registered after 1/1/2003.
Main hoop: 4 bends max., totaling 180º ± 10º
Front hoop: 4 bends max. or
Front downtubes: 2 bends max.
Rear hoop supports: No bends.
If any of the above bend requirements cannot be met, all components of the roll cage shall be fabricated from the tubing size(s)
listed for the next heavier category of automobiles.
4. For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is
as raced without fuel and driver. The minus tolerance for wall
thickness should not be less than .010” below the nominal
thickness. Improved Touring roll cage tubing size are to be
calculated based on the published vehicle weight minus 180
lbs.
5. An inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no greater
than 1/4 inch diameter shall be drilled in a non-critical area of
the front and rear hoop as well as the one of the supplemental
braces to facilitate verification of wall thickness. Formula Cars
and Sports Racers with alternate roll structures are not required
to have inspection holes, the wall thickness will be indicated
on the back of the homologation certificate.
F. General Construction
1. One (1) continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main
hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence
of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage
hoop (measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than
three (3) times the diameter of the tubing. Whenever possible,
the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in
the case of tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis
tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal webs with support
tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that gussets be used.
2. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society D1.1:2002,
Structural Welding Code, Steel Chapter 10, Tubular Structures. Whenever D1.1 refers to “the Engineer” this shall be
interpreted to be the owner of the vehicle. Welds shall be
continuous around the entire tubular structure.
All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if
the following conditions are satisfied:
a. The weld shall have no cracks.
b. Thorough fusion shall exist between weld metal and base
metal.
c. All craters shall be filled to the cross section of the weld.
GCR - 165
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
d. Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 inch deep.
3. Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is
permitted, but extreme care shall be used in preparation of
parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching
joints.
9.4.2. SHOWROOM STOCK ROLL CAGE
A. Full width roll cages are required in all Showroom Stock automobiles. Roll cages installed in Showroom Stock automobiles are
for driver safety and shall be contained entirely within the driver/
passenger compartment without removing any panel or accessory
not specifically authorized in these rules. The carpet/padding may
be cut around the mounting base plates.
1. The cage need not be removable. It shall be bolted and/or
welded to the car.
2. It shall attach to the car at no more than eight (8) points,
consisting of the basic cage with six (6) points and two
optional braces.
3. The forward part of the cage shall be mounted to the floor of
the vehicle. In addition, if the two optional braces referred to in
item 2, above are utilized they shall be mounted, one on either
side, from the forward section of the cage to the firewall or
front fender wells (see figure 16). No braces shall pass through
the front firewall.
4. Rollcage gussets shall be no thicker than .125”. A maximum of
two gussets per rollcage joint are allowed.
B. Removable roll cages and braces shall be very carefully designed
and constructed to be at least as strong as a permanent installation. If one tube fits inside another tube to facilitate removal, the
removable portion shall fit tightly and shall bottom by design and
at least two (2) bolts shall be used to secure each such joint. The
telescope section shall be at least eight (8) inches in length except
forthe door bars which shall be a minimum of four (4) inches in
length. Minimum bolt diameter is 3/8 inches.
C. For tubing sizes for front and main hoop and all required bracing,
see 9.4.1.E.3.
GCR - 166
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
D. Main Roll Hoop:
1. Main roll hoop (behind the driver) shall extend the full width
of the driver/passenger compartment and shall be as near the
roof as possible. It shall incorporate a diagonal lateral brace
to prevent lateral distortion of the hoop (See figure 16). Any
number of additional reinforcing bars are permitted within the
structure of the cage. It is required that the horizontal brace
behind the driver’s seat (described in Section 9.4.2.J.) continue
from the diagonal to the passenger side main hoop upright or
that a second diagonal be installed in the main hoop.
E. Front Roll Hoops:
1. The front or side hoops shall follow the line of the front pillars
to the top of the windshield (as close to the roof as possible)
then horizontally to the rear attaching to the main hoop. These
two side hoops are to be connected together by a tube over
the top of the windshield, or
2. A front hoop following the line of the front pillars and connected
by horizontal bars to the main hoop on each side at the top
may be used, or
3. A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main hoop
to the windshield with forward down tubes following the line
of the front pillars to the floor.
4. The front or side hoops may extend through the dash pad. This
includes the forward part of the door panel if it is an extension
of the dash panel.
5. One (1) bar is recommended in a horizontal plane between
forward cage braces in the dash area.
F.Bracing:
The main roll hoop shall have two braces extending to the rear attaching
GCR - 167
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop not more than six (6) inches below the top
and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. On cars where
the rear window/bulkhead prohibits the installation of rear braces (e.g.,
Honda del Sol), the main hoop shall be attached to the body by plates
welded to the cage and bolted to the stock shoulder harness mounting
points. This installation design must also incorporate a diagonal bar
connecting the top of the main hoop to the lower front passenger side
mounting point (“Petty Bar”).
1. Rear hoop braces may pass through the factory bulkhead or
panel separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
trunk/cargo area/, fuel tank/fuel cell area, provided the bulkhead is sealed around said cage braces. Metal tape may be
used to seal the openings between the bulkhead and the tubes.
G. Side Protection:
Two (2) side tubes connecting the front and rear hoops across both
door openings are mandatory. Door side tubes may extend into the
door. NASCAR-style side protection, or one bar bisecting another to
form an “X” is permitted. The door window glass, window operating
mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest, map pockets, and inside
door latch/lock operating mechanism may be removed and the inner
door structural panel may be modified, but not removed to facilitate this
type of side protection. The stock side impact beam and the outside
door latch/lock operating mechanism shall not be removed or modified.
H. Mounting Plates:
1. Each mounting plate shall be at least .080 thick if welded and
3/16” thick (with appropriate backing plates) if bolted. There
shall be a minimum of three (3) bolts per mounting plate if
bolted.
2. Each mounting plate shall not be greater than 100 square
inches and shall be no greater than twelve (12) inches or less
than two (2) inches on a side.
3. Whenever possible, mounting plates shall extend onto a vertical
section of the structure (such as a rocker box).
4. The mounting plate may be multi-angled but must not exceed
these dimensions in a flat plane.
5. Any number of tubes may attach to the plate or each other.
I. Hardware: (Bolts)
All hardware shall be Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better. 5/16” minimum
diameter.
J. In order to provide a secure seat back support a section of tubing
equal to the roll bar shall be installed horizontally from the main
hoop upright to the diagonal brace. This tube shall be no higher
than shoulder height.
9.4.3. TOURING ROLL CAGE
A. All cars registered after 1/1/03 shall conform to these roll cage
rules. Effective 1/1/08 all Touring cars shall conform to these roll
cage rules. Full width roll cages are required in all Touring automobiles. Roll cages installed in Touring automobiles are for driver
safety and shall be contained entirely within the driver/passenger
compartment without removing any panel or accessory not specifically authorized in these rules. The carpet/padding may be cut
around the mounting base plates.
GCR - 168
1. The cage shall be welded to the car, and all mandatory tubes
shall use welded joint construction.
2. It shall attach to the car at no more than twelve (12), (T2);
eight (8) points, (T3-T4); with the forward section of the cage
attaching to the front bulkhead or front fender wells (see figure
16).
3. The front down tubes of the cage shall be mounted to the floor
of the vehicle.
B. For tubing sizes for front hoop, main hoop, and all required bracing,
see Section 9.4.1.E.3. It is recommended that gussets (flat steel,
tubing, etc.) be utilized to strengthen the joints of all required cage
elements.
C. Main Roll Hoop:
1. Main roll hoop (behind the driver) shall extend the full width
of the driver/passenger compartment and shall be as near the
roof as possible. It shall incorporate a diagonal lateral brace
to prevent lateral distortion of the hoop (See figure 16). Any
number of additional tubes/braces are permitted within the
structure of the cage. It is required that the horizontal brace
behind the driver’s seat (described in Section 9.4.2.J.) continue
from the diagonal to the passenger side main hoop upright or
that a second diagonal be installed in the main hoop.
D. Front Roll Hoops:
1. The front or side hoops shall follow the line of the front pillars
to the top of the windshield (as close to the roof as possible)
then horizontally to the rear attaching to the main hoop. These
two side hoops are to be connected together by a tube over
the top of the windshield, or
2. A front hoop following the line of the front pillars and connected
by horizontal bars to the main hoop on each side at the top
may be used, or
3. A top “halo” hoop following the roofline from the main hoop to
the windshield with forward down tubes following the line of
the front pillars to the floor.
4. The front or side hoops may extend through the dash pad. This
includes the forward part of the door panel if it is an extension
of the dash panel.
5. One (1) bar is required in a horizontal plane between forward
cage braces in the dash area.
E.Bracing:
The main roll hoop shall have two braces extending to the rear attaching
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop but, not more than six (6) inches below
the top and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. On
cars where the rear window/bulkhead prohibits the installation of rear
braces (e.g., Honda del Sol), the main hoop shall be attached to the
body by plates welded to the cage and bolted to the stock shoulder
harness mounting points. This installation design must also incorporate
a diagonal bar connecting the top of the main hoop to the lower front
passenger side mounting point (“Petty Bar”).
1. Rear hoop braces may pass through the factory bulkhead or
panel separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
trunk/cargo area/, fuel tank/fuel cell area, provided the bulkGCR - 169
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
head is sealed around said cage braces. Metal tape may be
used to seal the openings between the bulkhead and the tubes.
F. Side Protection:
Two side protection tubes (door bars) are mandatory on each side of the
car. NASCAR-style side protection is required on the driver’s side and
is optional on the passenger side. The driver’s window safety net may
be mounted to this side protection and the top cage tube. NASCARstyle side protection tubes shall extend into the door. The door window
glass, window operating mechanism, inner door trim panel, armrest,
map pockets, and inside door latch/lock operating mechanism may be
removed only if it interfered with the installation of NASCAR-style side
protection tubes. The inner door structural panel may be modified, but
not removed to facilitate this type of side protection. The stock side
impact beam and the outside door latch/lock operating mechanism shall
not be removed or modified.
G. Mounting Plates:
1. Each mounting plate shall be at least .080 thick.
2. Each mounting plate shall not be greater than 100 square
inches and shall be no greater than twelve (12) inches or less
than two (2) inches on a side.
3. Whenever possible, mounting plates shall extend onto a vertical
section of the structure (such as a rocker box).
4. The mounting plate may be multi-angled but must not exceed
these dimensions in a flat plane.
5. Any number of tubes may attach to the plate or each other.
9.4.4. GT ROLL CAGE
All GT automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Open automobiles
without full windshields may have a low front hoop. All closed automobiles shall have full height (top of windshield) front hoops.
A. Main and Front Hoops
1. Main Hoop:
The main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of the cockpit.
The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible on closed
automobiles and not less than two (2) inches above the driver’s
helmet on open automobiles, with the driver seated normally and
restrained by seat belt/shoulder harness. Low front hoops shall be
cowl height, or at a minimum, a straight line drawn from the top
of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall pass over the
driver’s helmet.
2. Front Hoop:
a. The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to
the top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal
bars, to the top of the main hoop on each side (as close to
the roof as possible).
b. Two (2) side hoops following the line of the front pillars to
the top of the main hoop may be used. These two (2) side
hoops are to be connected by a horizontal bar over the top
of the windshield. (See figure 17), or
c. A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main
hoop to the windshield with forward down tubes following
the line of the front pillars to the floor.
d. Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they
GCR - 170
are fully welded at all mating surfaces.
3.Fabrication:
The main hoop shall be one continuous length of tubing with
smooth continuous bends with no evidence of crimping or wall
failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be three (3) times
the tube diameter measured from the tube centerline. Whenever
possible, the roll hoops should start from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube frame construction, be attached to
the tubes by means of gussets or metal webs in order to distribute
the loads. On automobiles of frameless construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360 degrees
completely around the inside of the automobile and attached with
suitable mounting plates.
B.Bracing
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 9.4.1.E, Material. (Main and Front Hoops)
All main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and
wall thickness as main hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main
hoop.
1. Main Hoop Bracing:
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear,
attaching to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near
as possible to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6)
inches below the top) and at an included angle of at least thirty
(30) degrees. Open cars with a low front hoop shall have (Effective 1/1/99) two braces extending from the main hoop to the low
front hoop. These braces shall be mounted no lower than six inches
below the top of the main hoop as illustrated in figure 18.
GCR - 171
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
2. Front Hoop Bracing:
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front
hoop to protect the driver’s legs. It is recommended that this
bracing extend to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s feet; but, in
any case, it shall be integrated into the frame or chassis to provide
substantial support for the front hoop.
C. Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
1. The minimum side protection shall consist of a side tube
connecting the front and rear hoops across both the door openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal tube
from the front hoop to the rear hoop bisecting the door opening
below the horizontal side tube, or not less than two (2) horizontal side tubes. Additional tubing may be added. NASCARstyle door bars are recommended.
2. In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side
bars, interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed.
When door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections
shall be protected.
D. Mounting Plates:
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car shall
not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that they attach
and shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite
side of the panel, with the plates through-bolted together. A minimum
of three (3) bolts per mounting plate is required for bolted mounting
plates. All hardware (bolts) shall be Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better with
5/16” diameter minimum. Mounting plates welded to the structure
of the car shall not be less than .080” thick. Whenever possible the
mounting plates should extend onto a vertical section of the structure
(such as door pillar).
9.4.6. PRODUCTION ROLL CAGE
All automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Roll cages may be of
two (2) designs, low front hoop or high front hoop. Specific installations
are subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each
event. The Technical Staff of Club Racing, with the concurrence of the
Club Racing Board, shall have the responsibility to ensure specification
compliance with SCCA safety standards. Alternate structures which do
not meet the following criteria will not be considered unless they are
GCR - 172
eligible under Section 9.4.6.D.
A. Main Hoop
For all cars, the main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of the
cockpit.
1. Closed Automobiles:
The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible on closed
automobiles
2. Open top Automobiles:
a. The main hoop shall be not less than two (2) inches above
the driver’s helmet on open automobiles, with the driver
seated normally and restrained by seat belt/shoulder
harness as illustrated in figure 18.
b. Open top automobiles without a windshield may use an
asymmetric main hoop provided:
i.
The main hoop shall be full height (over the driver) for
at least 50% of the width of the hoop as illustrated in
figure 19.
ii. On the passenger side of the car, the hoop shall be at
least as high as the top of the rear corner of the door
as illustrated in figure 19.
B. Front Hoop
For all cars, the front hoop shall be full width of the cockpit.
1. Closed Automobiles and open top automobiles with a windshield:
a. The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to
the top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal
bars, to the top of the main hoop.
b. Instead of a single front hoop, two (2) side hoops following
the line of the front pillars to the top of the main hoop may
be used. These two (2) side hoops are to be connected by
a horizontal bar over the top of the windshield. (See figure
17)
c. Another option is a top “halo” hoop following the roof line
from the main hoop to the windshield with forward down
tubes following the line of the front pillars to the floor.
d. Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they
are fully welded at all mating surfaces.
e. It is recommended the hoop extend to the belly pan. If
not, it shall be attached to the chassis with gussets and
GCR - 173
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
triangulation in order to spread the loads.
f. It is recommended that the vertical bars of the front hoop
be connected by a horizontal bar at a point above the driver’s legs
g. All front hoop options (a, b, c) shall be connected to the
main hoop in the following manner.
i. On open top cars, attachments shall be no more than
six inches below the top of the main hoop.
ii. On closed top cars, attachments shall be as close to
the roof as possible.
2. Open top Automobiles without a windshield and with a high
front hoop design. Front hoop requirements for open top automobiles with a windshield are to be followed with the following
exceptions.
a. Since the windshield frame is to be removed with the
windshield, there is no requirement to follow the line of
the A-pillar.
b. Since there is no windshield for the hoop to be above, the
front hoop shall be above the driver’s line of sight.
3. Open top Automobiles without a windshield and with a low
front hoop design
a. Low front hoops shall be cowl height, or at a minimum, a
straight line drawn from the top of the main hoop to the
top of the front hoop shall pass over the driver’s helmet
(See figure 18).
b. Open cars with a low front hoop shall have two braces
extending from the main hoop to the low front hoop.
These braces shall be mounted no lower than six inches
below the top of the main and front hoops as illustrated in
figure 18.
c. Fabrication - Open and Closed Automobiles
The main hoop shall be one continuous length of tubing
with smooth continuous bends and no evidence of crimping
or wall failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be
three (3) times the tube diameter measured from the tube
centerline. Whenever possible, the roll hoops should start
from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube
frame construction, be attached to the tubes by means of
gussets or metal webs in order to distribute the loads. On
automobiles of frameless or uni-body construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360
degrees completely around the inside of the automobile
and attached with suitable mounting plates.
C. Bracing - Open and Closed Automobiles
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 9.4.1.E, Material. (Main and Front Hoop)
All main hoops shall incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and
wall thickness as main hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main
hoop. The brace shall either be in the plane of the main hoop or extend
from the top of one rear brace (see figure 20) to the bottom of the
opposite brace. In the case of braces in the plane of the main hoop, the
brace must be attached at both ends to the main hoop, span at least
50% of the main hoop, and at least 75% of the height of the main
GCR - 174
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
General
hoop.
1. Main Hoop Bracing
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear,
attaching to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near
as possible to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6)
inches below the top) and at an included angle of at least thirty (30)
degrees. Rear braces may penetrate required bodywork provided
the resulting hole serves no other function, and the holes are sealed
around the braces.
2. Removable Bracing
Removable bracing shall incorporate connectors of the double lug,
tapered, or muff-type as shown in figures 14 and 15. The doublelug type shall include a doubler, gusset, or capping arrangement so
as to avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
3. Front Hoop Bracing
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front
hoop to brace the front hoop and protect the driver’s legs. It is
recommended that this bracing extend to the bulkhead in front
of the driver’s feet; but, in any case, it shall be integrated into
the frame or chassis to provide substantial support for the front
hoop. Front braces may penetrate required bodywork provided the
resulting hole serves no other function, and the holes are sealed
around the braces.
D.Exceptions
When it is manifestly impractical or unsafe to construct and install a
roll structure meeting the minimum requirements as set forth above, an
alternate design roll structure may be submitted to the SCCA Technical
Staff who may, in a proper case, accept such alternate roll structure
design on a specific case by case basis.
E. Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
GCR - 175
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
1. The minimum side protection shall consist of a horizontal side
tube connecting the front and rear hoops across both the door
openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal
tube from the front hoop to the rear hoop bisecting the door
opening below the horizontal side tube, or not less than two
(2) horizontal side tubes. Additional tubing may be added.
NASCAR-style door bars are recommended.
2. In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side
bars, interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed.
When door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections
shall be protected.
F. Mounting Plates:
1. Bolt In cages.
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car
shall not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that
they attach and shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite side of the panel, with the plates throughbolted together. A minimum of three (3) bolts per mounting plate
is required for bolted mounting plates. All hardware (bolts) shall be
Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better with 5/16” diameter minimum.
2. Welded in cages.
Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car shall not be less
than .080” thick. Whenever possible the mounting plates should
extend onto a vertical section of the structure (such as door pillar).
9.4.7.APPENDAGES
The following procedures are approved for modification to roll bars/cages
that do not meet the two (2) inch required minimum: The old main hoop
may be cut off near the chassis mounting and a new main hoop of equal
tube size or a section of equal tubing size may be added, and inner tube(s)
must be used to mate all sections together. All braces must be minimum
distance from top of hoop per Section 9.4. All welding for this modification must be arc welded (min.). The inner tube(s) must be rosette welded
three (3) places near top and bottom, see figure 21.
GCR - 176
Notes:
GCR - 177
General
Appendix I. 2007 Cage Rules
Appendix J. 2004 Production Category Roll Cage Rules
APPENDIX J. 2004 PRODUCTION CATEGORY ROLL CAGE RULES
This appendix is present so that cages in Production cars with logbooks
from 2004 and earlier can be verified for compliance with the construction
rules required at the time the car was built.
18.
PRODUCTION ROLL CAGES
All Production Category automobiles shall have full width roll cages. Open
automobiles without full windshields may have a low front hoop. All
closed automobiles shall have full height (top of windshield) front hoops.
Roll cages may be of two (2) designs, low front hoop (top of steering
wheel) or high front hoop (top of windshield). Specific installations are
subject to approval by the Technical and Safety Inspectors at each event.
The Technical Staff of Club Racing shall have the responsibility to ensure
specification compliance with SCCA safety standards. To that end, the
Technical Staff of Club Racing may or may not accept alternate construction standards from any source that significantly vary from SCCA standards of protection.
18.1. BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. The basic purpose of the roll cage is to protect the driver if the
car turns over, runs into an obstacle such as a guardrail or catch
fence, or is struck by another car. It shall be designed to withstand
compression forces from the weight of the car coming down on
the rollover structure and to take fore/aft and lateral loads resulting
from the car skidding along on its rollover structure.
2. Forward braces and portions of the main hoop subject to contact by
the driver’s helmet (as seated normally and restrained by seatbelt/
shoulder harness) shall be padded with non-resilient material such
as Ethafoam® or Ensolite®, or other similar material with a minimum
thickness of one-half (1/2) inch. Padding meeting SFI spec 45.1 is
recommended.
3. No portion of the safety roll cage shall have an aerodynamic effect
by creating a vertical thrust.
4. Roll cage or chassis design shall prevent engine intrusion into the
driver compartment.
5.Material:
A. Seamless, or DOM (Drawn Over Mandrel) mild steel tubing (SAE
1010, 1020, 1025) or equivalent, or alloy steel tubing (SAE,
4130) shall be used for all roll cage structures. Proof of use of
alloy steel is the responsibility of the entrant.
B. Minimum tubing sizes for all required roll cage elements (All
dimensions in inches):
Vehicle Weight
Material
Without Driver
Mild Steel
Alloy Steel
Up to 1500 lbs.
1.375x.095
1.375x.080
1500-2500 lbs.
1.50x.095
1.375x.095
Over 2500 lbs.
1.50x.120
1.50x.095
1.625x.120
1.75x.095
C. For purposes of determining tubing sizes, the vehicle weight is
as raced without fuel and driver. The minus tolerance for wall
thickness should not be less than .010” below the nominal
thickness.
GCR - 178
D. An inspection hole at least 3/16 inch diameter, but no greater
than 1/4 inch diameter shall be drilled in a non-critical area of
all tubes with a specified size to facilitate verification of wall
thickness.
6. General Construction
A. One (1) continuous length of tubing shall be used for the main
hoop member with smooth continuous bends and no evidence
of crimping or wall failure. The radius of bends in the roll cage
hoop (measured at centerline of tubing) shall not be less than
three (3) times the diameter of the tubing. Whenever possible,
the roll cage hoop should start from the floor of the car, and, in
the case of tube frame construction, be attached to the chassis
tubes by means of gussets or sheet metal webs with support
tubes beneath the joints to distribute the loads. It is recommended that gussets be used.
B. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society D1.1:2002,
Structural Welding Code, Steel Chapter 10, Tubular Structures. Whenever D1.1 refers to “the Engineer” this shall be
interpreted to be the owner of the vehicle. Welds shall be
continuous around the entire tubular structure. All welds shall
be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if the following
conditions are satisfied:
1. The weld shall have no cracks.
2. Thorough fusion shall exist between weld metal and base
metal.
3. All craters shall be filled to the cross section of the weld.
4. Undercut shall be no more than 0.01 inch deep.
C. Aluminum bronze or silicon bronze welding technique is
permitted, but extreme care shall be used in preparation of
parts before bronze welding and in the design of the attaching
joints.
18.4.1. Main and Front Hoops
A. Main Hoop: The main hoop (behind the driver) shall be full width of
the cockpit. The main hoop shall be as near to the roof as possible
on closed automobiles and not less than two (2) inches above
the driver’s helmet on open automobiles, with the driver seated
normally and restrained by seat belt/shoulder harness. Low front
hoops shall be cowl height, or at a minimum, a straight line drawn
from the top of the main hoop to the top of the front hoop shall
pass over the driver’s helmet.
B. Front Hoop:
1. The front hoop shall follow the line of the front pillars to the
top of the windshield and be connected, by horizontal bars, to
the top of the main hoop on each side (as close to the roof as
possible).
2. Two (2) side hoops following the line of the front pillars to the
top of the main hoop may be used. These two (2) side hoops
are to be connected by a horizontal bar over the top of the
windshield. (See figure 17), or
3. A top “halo” hoop following the roof line from the main hoop
to the windshield with forward down tubes following the line
of the front pillars to the floor.
4. Double “ear-type” joints are allowed, provided that they are
GCR - 179
General
Appendix J. 2004 Production Category Roll Cage Rules
Appendix J. 2004 Production Category Roll Cage Rules
fully welded at all mating surfaces.
C. Fabrication: The main hoop shall be one continuous length of
tubing with smooth continuous bends with no evidence of crimping
or wall failure. The minimum radius for all bends shall be three (3)
times the tube diameter measured from the tube centerline. Whenever possible, the roll hoops should start from the floor of the automobile, and, in the case of tube frame construction, be attached to
the tubes by means of gussets or metal webs in order to distribute
the loads. On automobiles of frameless construction, consideration should be given to using a vertical roll hoop of 360 degrees
completely around the inside of the automobile and attached with
suitable mounting plates.
18.4.2.Bracing
All required bracing shall be the same diameter and wall thickness as
listed in 18.1.5., Material. (Main and Front Hoops) All main hoops shall
incorporate a diagonal brace (same diameter and wall thickness as main
hoop) to prevent lateral distortion of the main hoop. A horizontal bar
connecting the sides of the main hoop is highly recommended.
A. Main Hoop Bracing:
Main hoops shall have two (2) braces extending to the rear, attaching
to the frame or chassis. Braces shall be attached as near as possible
to the top of the main hoop (not more than six (6) inches below the
top) and at an included angle of at least thirty (30) degrees. Open
cars with a low front hoop shall have (Effective 1/1/99) two braces
extending from the main hoop to the low front hoop. These braces shall
be mounted no lower than six inches below the top of the main hoop
as illustrated in figure 18.
B. Removable Bracing:
Removable bracing shall incorporate connectors of the double lug,
tapered, or muff-type as shown in figures 14, and 15. The double-lug
type shall include a doubler, gusset, or capping arrangement so as to
avoid distortion or excessive strain caused by welding.
C. Front Hoop Bracing:
There shall be two (2) braces extending forward from the front hoop
to protect the driver’s legs. It is recommended that this bracing extend
to the bulkhead in front of the driver’s feet; but, in any case, it shall
be integrated into the frame or chassis to provide substantial support
for the front hoop. It is recommended that the verticle bars of the fornt
hoop be connected by a horizontal bar at a point above the driver’s legs.
18.4.3. Side Protection - Open and Closed Automobiles
A. The minimum side protection shall consist of a side tube connecting
the front and rear hoops across both the door openings. Additionally, there shall also be either a diagonal tube from the front hoop
to the rear hoop bisecting the door opening below the horizontal
side tube, or not less than two (2) horizontal side tubes. Additional
tubing may be added. NASCAR-style door bars are recommended.
B. In automobiles with full roll cage installations including side bars,
interior door panels may be altered, replaced, or removed. When
door panels are removed, all sharp edges or projections shall be
protected.
18.4.4. Mounting Plates:
The thickness of mounting plates bolted to the structure of the car shall
not be less than the thickness of the roll hoop or brace that they attach
and shall be backed-up with a plate of equal dimensions on the opposite
side of the panel, with the plates through-bolted together. A minimum of
GCR - 180
three (3) bolts per mounting plate is required for bolted mounting plates.
All hardware (bolts) shall be Grade 5/Metric 8.8 or better with 5/16”
diameter minimum. Mounting plates welded to the structure of the car
shall not be less than .080” thick. Whenever possible the mounting plates
should extend onto a vertical section of the structure (such as door pillar).
GCR - 181
General
Appendix J. 2004 Production Category Roll Cage Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
APPENDIX K. 2012 STO GENERAL TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
These specifications are a part of the SCCA GCR and all automobiles shall
conform to GCR section 9.
A. Purpose and Philosophy
The intent of the Super Touring category is to allow competition of
production-based vehicles, at a higher level of preparation, using DOTapproved tires. Vehicles used in this category must be identifiable with
the vehicles offered for sale to the public and available through the
manufacturer’s distribution channels in the US. No chassis or engines
older than 1985 will be eligible, except that model runs that began
before 1985 are eligible (e.g., if a model was produced in 1983-1988,
the 1983 and 1984 cars are eligible). The SCCA does not guarantee the
competitiveness of any car.
Super Touring Under (STU) vehicles are mid-level multi-purpose
performance cars of 3.2 liters and under. Case-by-case approval of engines
over 3.2 liters from “Pony Cars” or “American Iron” with stock camshaft
lift at a heavier weight will be considered. No engines over 4 liters shall
be allowed under any circumstances. Spec lines are not required for STU
eligibility; unless otherwise specified, any vehicle meeting the model year
and engine displacement limits is eligible for this class.
World Challenge vehicles compliant to a SCCA Pro VTS may be approved
on a case-by-case basis for STU. See the STU “Approved World Challenge
Cars” table.
Super Touring Lite (STL) is a small-bore “tuner” class for reciprocating
piston engines of displacements of 2.0 liters and under. STL encompasses
a lower level of allowed modifications compared to STU. As with STU,
spec lines are not required for STL eligibility; unless otherwise specified,
any vehicle meeting the model year and engine displacement limits is
eligible for this class.
Alternate allowances may be approved on a case-by-case basis for
individual vehicles that do not meet these parameters; see “Alternate
Vehicle Allowances” tables. Engines components from these approved
vehicle allowances may not be installed in other chassis without specific
line-item approval (e.g., the STU 3.8L Mustang engine may not be
installed into a Ford Focus).
Vehicle modifications are limited to those listed herein. Unless a particular
modification or part is approved in these rules, the vehicle and all of its
relevant parts and assemblies shall be stock for the correct make and
model of car. Some amount of latitude will be considered to facilitate
engine installations, however if extensive modifications are required it is
recommended to seek clarification from the Club Racing Board.
Replacement parts may be obtained from sources other than the
manufacturer provided they are the exact equivalent of the original parts.
The intent of this rule is to allow the competitor to obtain replacement
parts from standard industry outlets, e.g., auto-parts distributors, rather
than from the manufacturer. It is not intended to allow parts that do not
meet all dimensional and material specifications of new parts from the
manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed in the Super Touring category or
class rules.
Each class will have a baseline target power-to-weight ratio. Weights
may be adjusted or cars may be subject to changes in intake restrictors
to meet these targets. Cars may be required to carry data acquisition
equipment for review of performance.
GCR - 182
B. Eligibility
Vehicles meeting one of the following criteria may compete in the Super
Touring category:
• 1985 and newer cars built specifically under these ST rules
• World Challenge Touring cars, with a VTS sheet dated 2009 or
earlier, are eligible for classification in STU under the following
criteria:
-
Cars will be approved on a case-by-case basis with supporting
World Challenge VTS documentation
-
Competitors must have the VTS sheet, as approved, available
for scrutineers when requested.
-
Weight will be set at the greater of the World Challenge weight
plus 5% or the STU rules weight plus 5%.
-
Cars approved to run in accordance with their World Challenge
VTS must adhere to those specifications and are not permitted
to adopt general STU specifications.
-
See 9.1.4.2.I, table of Approved World Challenge Cars.
-
Cars must meet tire rule 9.1.4.P.1
Note: World Challenge VTS cars are subject to adjustments (i.e.,
weight, restrictor) as necessary.
• Any GCR listed IT cars, 1985 and newer, under their current IT
specifications may compete in STU. GCR listed ITS, ITA, ITB,
and ITC cars with reciprocating piston engines of 2 liters and less
engine displacement, 1985 and newer, may compete in STL under
their current IT specifications.
Note: While IT cars may not be competitive in the ST category,
their inclusion in the category will allow regional competitors to
participate in national events.
• Spec Miata cars completely conforming to Spec Miata class
specifications are eligible for STL. Spec Tire not required in STL.
• SM5 and MX-5 Cup cars completely conforming to SM5 or MX-5
Cup class specifications are eligible for STL. Spec Tire not required
in STL.
• Rocky Mountain Division SpecM3 cars completely conforming to
the 2011 rules may compete in STU. Competitors must have a
copy of the 2011 rules in their possession.
• Cars modified beyond SS, SM or IT rules in any fashion must meet
full ST safety requirements.
C. Bodywork
1. Standard body appearance must be strictly maintained. Standard
body appearance includes the OEM grille and badge. A photographic replica is not sufficient.
2. Body and frame seams and joints may be welded. The OEM radiator supports may be replaced or reinforced to make repairs easier.
The radiator supports shall not reinforce the rest of the chassis or
diminish the OEM crush zones.
3. Bumper brackets may be modified, but bumpers must remain in
OEM locations.
4. Non-essential body items and trim may be removed including
GCR - 183
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
attaching brackets and supporting structure. Any holes in bodywork exposed by the removal of these items shall be covered or
filled.
5. All of the vehicle’s doors must be able to be opened from both
inside and outside the vehicle. Latches and hinges for the doors
may be modified, but must remain in working order. Aftermarket
latches and hinges may be used but shall not protrude beyond
outer surface of bodywork. The stock side impact beams may be
removed when NASCAR style door bars are installed.
6. Hood and trunk pins, clips, or positive action external latches are
permitted. Stock hood and trunk latches and hinges may be disabled
or removed; if so, a positive action external fastening method shall
be used. Engine compartment insulation may be removed.
7. Openings in the bodywork may be temporarily covered, wholly or
partially, with tape for the purpose of regulating airflow. Bodywork openings may be closed off using close-out panels mounted
behind body openings. Bodywork seams may not be taped except
to temporarily secure it after contact.
8. All bodywork and windows shall be sufficiently rigid, adequately
supported and properly secured such that it does not noticeably
flutter, move, or deform while vehicle is in motion.
9. Aftermarket OEM style hardtops are allowed. Aftermarket carbon
fiber hardtops are not allowed.
10. Fenders and wheel openings shall remain unmodified. It is permitted
to roll under or flatten any interior lip on the wheel opening for tire
clearance. Cars with plastic/composite fenders may remove any
interior wheel opening lip, but the resulting material edge shall be
no thinner than the basic fender material thickness. Non-metallic
inner fender liners may be removed.
D. Aerodynamic Devices
1. Front Air Dam
a. A front spoiler/air dam may be added. It shall not protrude
beyond the overall outline of the body when viewed from
above perpendicular to the ground, or aft of the forward most
part of the front fender opening.
b. The spoiler/air dam shall be mounted to the body, and may
extend no higher than four (4) inches above the horizontal
centerline of the front wheel hubs. The air dam shall have no
support or reinforcement extending aft of the forward most
part of the front fender wheel opening.
c. The minimum ride height of the air dam is 3.0 inches.
d. Openings are permitted for the purposes of ducting air to the
brakes, cooler(s), and radiator(s).
2. Undertray
a. An undertray may be added. The undertray may close out the
underbody from the leading edge of the approved bodywork
(including air dam) back to the centerline of the front axle.
b. The minimum ride height of the undertray is 3.0 inches.
3. Splitter
a. Definition: A horizontal, single-plane aerodynamic device
GCR - 184
attached to the lower front of the vehicle, protruding forward.
It is intended to divert air and produce downforce through
vertical pressure differential. A splitter shall have no vertical
deviations.
b. A front splitter may be added. A maximum of 4 rods or cables
may be used to support the front and/or sides of the splitter. No
other material(s) may be used external to the body to support
the splitter.
c. The front splitter must not extend more than 2.0 inches past
the original or approved bodywork as viewed from above for
the entire profile of the splitter.
d. No part of the splitter shall extend laterally any further than the
widest point of the outside sidewall of the front tires with the
wheels pointed straight ahead.
e. The splitter may have vertical deviations, fences, etc., only if
they are part of the production bodywork for street use.
f. The minimum ride height of the front splitter is 3.0 inches.
4. Rear Wing
a. The wing shall be mounted to the trunk/deck lid with 2 mounting
brackets. Each mounting bracket shall attach to the wing at a
point that is at least 2.0 inches inboard of endplates. The wing,
and the portion of the mounting brackets located externally to
the trunk/deck lid, may only be reinforced by a diagonal strut
having no aerodynamic effect, and/or by affixing the external
parts of the brackets to internal parts of the brackets within
the trunk/cargo area. The internal parts of the brackets may
protrude through the trunk/deck lid to allow the two parts of
each bracket to be fastened together.
b. Factory wings, and spoilers, and roof vortex generators are
permitted, but must be removed if an approved aftermarket
wing is installed.
c. See individual class regulations for further restrictions.
5. A close-out panel may be mounted behind the grille.
6.
OEM side skirts may be used if they were available on the car from
the dealer provided they meet the minimum ride height rule.
7. Aftermarket side skirts may be used provided they meet the
minimum ride height rule, have no openings/ducts in them other
than for jacking insert(s), are no wider than the approved fascias,
do not extend any higher than the bottom of the door and do not
reinforce the chassis.
8. Canards or dive planes are not permitted unless part of the OEM
bodywork.
E. Interior
1. The following items must be removed : tool kit, spare tire, supplemental restraint systems (SRS) and passive restraint systems.
2. The following items may also be removed:
Headliner, sun visor, carpeting, carpet pad and/or insulation, soundproofing, OEM seats, all trim except the dashboard, heating and
air conditioning systems, window winding mechanisms, central
locking systems, audio system, and any other systems fitted to the
GCR - 185
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
original car solely for the comfort of the driver and/or passengers.
3. The following items may be installed:
Safety equipment/structures, seat, controls necessary for driving,
instrumentation, electronic equipment, radio, camera, battery,
driver cooling system, driver ventilation system, replacement door
panels/interior trim, anti-sway bar controls (not within reach of
driver). None of the above items may hinder driver exit from the
car.
4. The above components shall be attached to/contained in the
chassis in such a way as to be able to withstand 25g deceleration. Any sharp edges shall be covered, padded, protected, etc. to
prevent injury to driver, crew, course workers, and officials.
5. The driver’s seat shall be located in the same lateral location as
the OEM seat, unless otherwise allowed on a car’s spec line. The
transmission tunnel may be modified for the purpose of installing
a competition driver seat. The floor pan must remain in its original
position. The floor pan must remain in its original position. The
driver’s seat shall be located longitudinally.
6. Original instruments/gauges may be replaced, or supplemented,
with additional engine monitoring gauges. Accessories, lights and
switches may be added or removed. Box-type extensions from the
dash pad may be used to mount switches and controls, in the areas
where the OEM insert panels were mounted, so that they more
easily accessible to the driver. Audio and video systems may be
removed.
7. Vertical bulkheads, and enclosures, within the cockpit shall not
be any higher than the bottom of the side windows, and shall not
extend more than 18.0 inches above the floor pan. No bulkheads
shall cover the rear foot wells.
a. Sedan Body (4-door) and Hatchback Body (3-door) - Any bulkheads
positioned in front of the plane determined by the OEM rear seat
back shall not extend laterally from one side of the chassis to the
other, but rather shall only be large enough to cover the individual
components necessary.
b. Coupe Body (2-door) - Any bulkheads positioned in front of the
plane determined by the OEM rear seat back, if applicable, may
extend laterally from one side of the chassis to the other.
8. Dash pad modification – It is permitted to modify the dash pad in
order to run the roll cage tubes through the dash area as long as
the dash pad is modified only enough for roll cage fitment. If necessary, the dash pad may be parted to ease installation around roll
cage. Any such parting shall be done in such a way as to minimize
the appearance that they have been separated once pieces of dash
pad are installed.
F. Chassis
1. All cars shall have the OEM rear package shelf and/or rear seat
back support structure installed if applicable. As an alternative, a
metallic close out panel may be installed that simulates the rear
package shelf and/or the rear seat back support structure if applicable. If a close out panel is used to clean up the appearance of the
rear package shelf and/or rear seat bulkhead in conjunction with
the OEM structure, the close out panel material is free.
GCR - 186
2. Cables, wiring and fluid lines in the engine compartment and cabin
interior may be replaced, rerouted, and/or protected.
3. Cars that have drive shafts shall have 2 steel, 360-degree loops
of sufficient strength located as close as possible to the front and
rear universal joints to prevent the driveshaft from dropping in case
of failure of either universal joint. Floor materials, torque tubes and
cross members may also be utilized to provide this protection.
4. It is permitted to attach one or more plates, or pads, under the
car to provide for jacking of the car, provided they serve no
other purpose. It is prohibited to install any kind of device, which
protrudes from the rocker panel or side of the car. However, tubes
may be attached to the roll cage or chassis and extend to the inner
surface of the rocker panel or bodywork to act as a receptacle for
a jacking fixture. Air jacks are permitted, but no air source may be
carried on board.
5. Ride height will be measured at the lowest point of the rocker
panel, not including the pinch weld.
6. The OEM firewall between the cockpit and engine compartment
shall be intact to prevent the passage of flames from the engine
compartment to the cockpit. Any holes in the firewall must be of
the minimum size for the passage of controls and wires, and must
be completely sealed.
7. Both front windows, driver and passenger, shall be down (preferably removed) whenever the vehicle is on track. The OEM window
opening on the front doors shall not be filled in with any material, other than the material required to mount a NACA-duct for
driver cooling. If used, the NACA-duct shall be mounted in the
front, lower, corner of the window opening. The area closed off to
mount the NACA-duct shall not exceed 50 square-inches. In rain
conditions, a quarter window larger than 50 square-inches may
be used in the area normally used to mount the permitted NACAduct, in an attempt to minimize the amount of water entering the
cockpit. Enough open area for the driver to exit in an emergency
shall remain open at all times.
8. All vehicles must use a stock, OEM equivalent, safety glass
windshield, or 0.25 inch minimum thickness Lexan replacement,
mounted in the stock location, at the stock angle and maintaining
the stock profile.
9. Windshield clips, per GCR section 9.3 Windshield Clips/Rear
Window Straps, are permitted and recommended.
10.Side windows, not including the front door windows, and rear
windows may be replaced by clear Lexan-type plastic material
having a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch, but must retain the
same shape, size, and location as the original glass. NACA-ducts
may be mounted in the side windows. The rear window must be
secured by 2 additional straps 1.0 inch wide by 0.0625 inch thick
minimum, bolted or riveted to the body at both the top and bottom
of the rear window. If a Lexan rear window is mounted with
multiple, evenly spaced screws around each side of its perimeter,
safety straps are not required. If a DOT spec glass rear window
is used in conjunction with the OEM method of mounting, safety
straps are recommended, but not required.
11.Windows may be mounted and sealed with silicone. Any silicone
used to bridge the gap between the perimeter of the window and
GCR - 187
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
the chassis shall be neat in appearance and uniform in thickness.
Tape may only be used to seal the windows during wet track
sessions for the purpose of reducing the amount of water entering
the cockpit.
12.OEM side window framework shall be intact.
13.Acrylic or glass removable/moveable roof panels may be replaced
with the same material as the surrounding roof. All brackets,
mounts, and moldings must be removed. Fabric tops are not
permitted and shall be removed along with all associated hardware.
It may be replaced with an OEM hardtop if one is available.
14.Unused mounting tabs and brackets that are non-structural,
excluding the rear seat back support and package tray, may be
removed.
15.The OEM “rain gutter/tray” at the base of the windshield shall be
intact and in the OEM location.
16. The floor pan may be modified to provide clearance for the exhaust
system and allowed alternate transmission/transaxle.
17.Inner fender panels may be modified or replaced.
18.Convertible model cars may compete with a hardtop or as an open
car.
G. Engine
1. Alternate engines may be used, if the manufacturer of the vehicleand engine are the same (e.g., an Acura engine installed into
a Honda car) and was available in a car delivered in the United
States. Vehicles delivered with engines from other manufacturers
(e.g. Morgan, Panoz, etc) may only use the originally installed
engine, or another engine manufactured by the chassis manufacturer (e.g. Lotus Elise may use the Toyota ZZ engine, or any other
Lotus manufactured engine that complies with the class rules,
however a Lotus Esprit may not install a Toyota ZZ engine).
The chosen engine must retain its original cylinder head and intake
manifold. Competitors must have in their possession a copy of the
factory shop manual for both the drivetrain and chassis for use
by scrutineers. If an engine from a front wheel drive vehicle is
installed in a rear wheel drive vehicle, alternate OEM intake manifolds may be considered. The long block assembly of the alternate
engine must remain within the engine compartment with no modifications, however the firewall may be modified to provide clearance for intake manifolds and/or engine accessories. It is permitted
to use the OEM intake and throttle body for either the chassis or
the installed engine. If needed to allow the intake manifold fit on
the engine, an adapter plate between the engine and manifold is
permitted. This adapter plate must be no more than 1.0 inch thick
and must be made of the same material as either the head or intake
manifold.
Engines from vehicles not available in a car delivered in the United
States will be considered and approved on a case-by-case basis for
use in ST. For an engine to be considered, a member must submit
to the CRB a Vehicle Technical Specifications (VTS) sheet with
all engine parameters filled out. Copies of the appropriate factory
shop manual are also useful for this consideration. Any deviations
from the STCS that will be required for installation (e.g., trans
adapter plate, alternate intake manifold, etc) must be noted in the
“Requested Non-Stock Allowances” section, otherwise they will
GCR - 188
not be allowed. Once this information is received and considered,
any approved engines will be noted in a separate table within the
STCS.
2. The crankshaft shall be a stock OEM part or an aftermarket part
as long as it is of identical dimensions and material as the OEM
part for the specific engine. The crankshaft may be balanced. The
maximum weight reduction allowance for balancing of the crankshaft is 0.5 lbs. The maximum weight reduction allowance for the
balancing of the reciprocating assembly is 15 grams. Alternate
connecting rods are permitted, but must be ferrous unless OEM
supplied.
3. Blocks may be sleeved to repair cylinder walls. Engines may be
bored to a maximum of .040 inch over standard bore size.
4. Rocker arm, lifter, follower, pushrod, valve spring, keeper, retainer,
guide, seat, and valve materials are free; Titanium is not permitted,
except for retainers or OEM parts. The head may be machined to
fit valve train components.
5. Alternate camshafts are allowed. Camshaft timing is free.
6. Cars produced with an electronic throttle body may use the OEM
electronic throttle body. The OEM electronic throttle body may be
converted to manual actuation and the actuation cam on a manual
throttle body may be changed to alter the opening/closing rate of
the butterfly. Alternately actuated throttle bodies may be considered on a case by case basis.
7. The ignition system is unrestricted.
8. A programmable ECU is permitted. Engine calibration (spark and
fuel) is free.
9. Fuel injectors and fuel rails must maintain the original number and
mounting locations, but are otherwise free. Fuel pumps and fuel
filters are free in type, size and number.
10.The location and type of the fuel pressure regulators are free
provided they are mounted within the engine compartment or the
OEM location.
11.The oil pan and oil pickup may be baffled, modified, or replaced.
The OEM oil pump may be modified, or replaced with an OEM-style
oil pump. Cars using a wet-sump oil system shall safety wire or in
some other way secure the oil drain plug.
12.Vents, breathers, and oil filters may be added, or substituted. All
emission control devices may be removed and the resulting holes
plugged. It is recommended that cars using a wet-sump oil system
safety wire or in some other way secure the oil drain plug.
13.Replacement gaskets and seals are free, including head gaskets.
Replacement gaskets and seals must be made out of material(s)
designed to seal the parts of an engine. Replacement gaskets and
seals may not perform any other functions. Head gaskets may be
used to adjust compression ratio.
14.The intake manifold on piston engines may be port matched to the
head(s), provided no material is removed further than one inch in
from the manifold to head mounting surface(s).
15. Variable cam timing (VTEC, VANOS, etc.) and variable length intake
manifolds may be partially, or wholly, disabled. Variable cam timing
GCR - 189
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
systems that use multiple cam lobes for each valve(s) may remove
lobes from the camshaft(s) that are not being used. For 13B Rotary
Engines the 5th and 6th intake port actuators and valves may be
removed or disabled.
16.To inrease the compression ratio, the bottom of the head may be
machined. Alternate pistons are permitted and/or the pistons may
be machined.
17.Cars utilizing forced induction may not have a boost controller
within reach of the driver. A car must enter pit lane to have the
boost level changed by the crew if necessary. Competitors must be
prepared to demonstrate the boost adjustment process to officials.
18.Engine parts, including, but not limited to, heads, intake manifolds
and carburetors, may be cleaned using usual methods (e.g., bead
blasting, soda blasting, Scotch Brite pads) as long as part dimensions are not altered.
19. All cars shall use the installed engine’s stock air throttling devices
(e.g., throttle body, carburetor) and intake manifold, unless noted
otherwise. Components upstream of the throttling devices are free.
20.Unless otherwise noted, the follow restrictions apply to turbochargers. The inlet restrictor (if required) shall be positioned in the
compressor inlet housing. Turbochargers may be added to engines
that did not originally come equipped with one on a case by case
basis. Swapping of turbochargers between engine makes and
models is prohibited. Supercharged cars may be approved on a
case-by-case basis. Contact the Club Racing Technical Office for
details.
21.Alternate water pump, alternator, crankshaft dampers, and/or
power steering pulleys are unrestricted. Crankshaft pulley is unrestricted for all non-supercharged engines; supercharged engines
must use OEM crankshaft and supercharger pulleys.
H. Cooling Systems
1. Water Cooling
Provided that the stock method of cooling is retained, the cooling
system is free, including cooling fans, but the water radiator must
remain in the approximate OEM location. The mounting angle may
be changed.
2. Engine Oil Cooling- Coolers for the engine oil are free in number,
type and location.
3. Intake Air Cooling- Cars utilizing forced induction may install intercoolers. The number, type, and location of intercoolers are free.
4. Water Spray Systems- Water may not be sprayed on any intercoolers, radiators, etc. Water spray systems may only be used to
inject water into the brake ducts.
I. Fluid Piping & Fuel Tank
1. Fuel Cells/Tanks- The use of a fuel cell is required unless the stock
fuel tank is located between the axle centerlines and within the
main chassis structure (i.e., frame rails, etc.). All fuel cells must
comply with GCR 9.3. Proper bracing to protect the fuel cell in the
event of a rear-end crash is required. If a fuel cell is installed in the
rear hatch/rear trunk area, the OEM floor pan in that area may be
replaced with metal in order to make it easier to mount the fuel cell
and close out the area around the fuel cell.
GCR - 190
2. There must be a metal bulkhead completely separating the cockpit
from the compartment containing the fuel cell. This does not negate
the requirement that the fuel cell bladder be contained in a metal
container.
3. No line containing engine coolant may pass through the cockpit.
No hydraulic fluid lines may have removable connectors inside the
cockpit.
4. All fluid hoses, lines, reservoirs, and tanks that are in the cockpit,
or cargo area that is open to the driver, shall be separated from
the driver by rigid metallic and/or non-metallic enclosures and/or
deflection shields to prevent fluid from spraying on the driver in
case of a leak. Magnesium is prohibited. Waterproof flexible wraps
may also be used to prevent fluid from spraying on the driver. The
floor of these enclosures, or the area under the deflection shields,
shall be designed to prevent the accumulation of fluids.
5. No fuel cooling devices are permitted in the car.
J. Oil System
1. If oil storage tanks are not located in the original position they must
be surrounded by a 10 mm thick crushable structure. Provided that
the oil tank is not located in close proximity to the outer surface
of the bodywork, and there is some of the structure of the vehicle
between the oil tank and the bodywork, the car’s structure will
meet the 10mm crushable structure rule.
2. If the oil tank is located in the cockpit area, or a trunk area that is
open to the driver, it must be separated from the driver by a metal
enclosure made up of .036 inch steel, or .059 inch aluminum. This
is in addition to the 10mm thick crushable structure that is required
in section 9.1.4.I.2. The floor of the enclosure must be designed to
prevent accumulation of fluids.
3. Accusump-type systems may be used.
K. Exhaust System
1. The exhaust system may be modified, or replaced.
2. Outlets must be located rearward of the midpoint of the wheelbase.
3. The exhaust pipe may not protrude more than 3.0 inches at the
point where it exits the bodywork. If the exhaust pipe(s) exit the
bodywork at the widest part of the body such that any extension of
the exhaust pipe(s) beyond the body would make pipe(s) the widest
point, the exhaust pipe(s) must be trimmed flush (+/- 0.5 inch)
with the bodywork at the point that they exit the body. Minor body
modifications are permitted to accommodate exhaust systems.
Modifications shall serve no other purpose. The underbody rocker
panels may be modified for the installation of the exhaust system,
but these modifications may only serve to provide clearance for the
exhaust system. The exhaust system must be adequately isolated
from the driver’s compartment.
4. If the exhaust system is routed in such a way that damage to it
could cause hot exhaust to contact any part of the fuel system,
there shall be a metallic heat shield protecting the fuel system
components. This heat shield shall be located at least 3.0 inches
away from the exhaust system, and there shall be at least 3.0
inches between the heat shield and the fuel system components.
GCR - 191
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
L. Electrical System
The electrical system is free provided that:
1. Batteries are free, subject to GCR 9.3. Batteries.
2. Standard headlights, headlight operating ancillaries, and parking
light assemblies may be removed and replaced with a plate of identical shape and size of the lens. Standard headlight assemblies may
be replaced with aftermarket units of equal dimension. Vehicles
with pop-up and/or hidden headlights may modify and/or remove
the headlight assemblies as long as the headlight cover and any
other external hardware are properly secured in the stock closed
location.
3. Fog/driving lights, parking lights and associated attaching hardware
may be removed. The resulting openings may be used to duct air,
or may be filled/covered. No ducting may extend beyond the outer
surface of the bodywork.
5. Each car must be fitted with at least one effective windshield wiper
assembly, which must be in working order throughout the event.
Wiper blades, arms and associated hardware may be substituted
freely. Other windshield wiper assemblies may be removed.
6. Each car must have an effective defogging/demisting system that
is capable of keeping the windshield clear during wet sessions.
Anti-fog films meet this requirement.
M. Drivetrain
1. Alternate differential housings are permitted from the same model
of vehicle. Differential may be open, locked, or of a limited-slip
type. The internals of limited-slip type differentials may be modified
to change the amount of slip limiting. Differentials with external, or
electric, adjustability are prohibited. Driveshaft and half-shafts may
be aftermarket, but shall be the OEM-type and use the same types
of materials as stock. Drive shafts may be replaced by one piece
drive shafts, and conversely.
2. Vent and/or breather lines may be added to the transmission and/
or differential. 1 transmission cooler and 1 differential cooler are
permitted.
N. Suspension and Steering
1. All suspension members must be made from ferrous and/or
aluminum materials. Chromium plating of suspension members is
prohibited.
2. Suspension springs are free. Coil-over units may be added to
supplement or replace OEM springs. Attaching points may be reinforced. It is permitted to use threaded spring seats for adjustability.
3. Shock absorbers and struts are free. Driver adjustable systems and
electronically controlled shocks are not permitted. If a reservoir/
adjustment canister is used, only one may be used per shock. The
shocks at each individual wheel may not be connected in any way.
4. Stabilizer bars are free, and may be added, removed, or substituted. Driver adjustable stabilizer bars are not permitted. Adjustment controls for stabilizer bars may be located within the cockpit,
but must be out of the reach from the driver’s seat. Adjustments to
stabilizer bars during practice, qualifying and race must be done in
pit lane.
5. Suspension components shall be the stock OEM parts, but they
may be reinforced. Spherical bearings are permitted on suspension
GCR - 192
components. Standard suspension bushings may be replaced with
solid or spherical bushings. Drop spindles are allowed.
6. Any anti-roll bar(s) and rear axle traction bar(s), rear axle panhard
rod and watts linkage can be added or substituted, provided their
installation serves no other purpose. The mounts for these devices
can be welded or bolted to the car. These devices and their mounts
cannot be located in the trunk or driver/passenger compartment
unless fitted as stock. Rear axle traction bar(s) used to control axle
housing rotation must be solid bar or tube.
7. When a car’s anti-roll bar also acts as a suspension locating device,
the bar’s attachment points and pivot points on the chassis and
suspension control arms must remain in their stock locations.
8. Slotted plates may be added over original shock mounts on front
and rear shock towers for camber/caster adjustment. One bolt-in
brace may connect the front strut towers, and one bolt-in brace
may connect the rear strut towers.
9. All steering components, with the exception of the steering wheel,
column and tie-rods/toe-links, must be original equipment supplied
by the manufacturer. These parts may be strengthened provided
the original part can still be identified.
10.The steering wheel may be replaced with an aftermarket, or racing
steering wheel. Wood-rimmed steering wheels are not permitted.
An all-metal quick release coupling on the steering wheel may be
added.
11.A collapsible steering column shall be used. Most recent OEM
steering columns have at least 2 universal joints in them that allow
the steering column to collapse on impact. This type of design
(with at least 1 universal joint) must also be used in any steering
column extension(s) that may be used to reach the driver’s competition seating position.
12.Power steering may be modified in any of the following ways:
a.disconnected
b. an OEM manual steering rack for that model may be fitted
c. an electric power steering pump may be fitted
d. An OEM electric-assisted steering system may be used.
O. Brakes
1. Brake lines may be relocated, and rubber lines may be replaced
with stainless steel braided brake lines. Hand brake assemblies may
be removed. Brake proportioning valves may be used provided that
they are of the in line, pressure limiting type. Non-pressurized brake
fluid lines and master cylinders need not be metal, metal shielded,
or bulkheaded. Pressurized brake fluid lines must be metal, metal
shielded, or bulkheaded.
2. Brake proportioning valves may be used provided that they are of
the in line, pressure limiting type. Brake pad friction material is free.
3. Hand brake assemblies may be removed. Backing plates and dust
shields may be modified, ventilated, or removed.
4. Brake duct inlets incorporated in the front spoiler as standard, or
in light openings, other than headlights, may be used to duct air to
the front brakes. Additionally, brake ducts may be fitted into the
intermediate mounting surface of a permitted splitter.
GCR - 193
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
5. Water spray cooling systems are permitted. The amount of water
carried for injection into the brake duct is free. Water-cooled calipers are forbidden.
6. Wheel fans are not permitted.
7. When any allowed alternate calipers are used, calipers must be
mounted in the same location and orientation as the OEM calipers.
OE caliper mounting tabs may be modified or removed to facilitate
installation.
8. Titanium piston inserts are permitted.
9. May run OEM ABS or convert to an aftermarket ABS controller with
100 lb. weight penalty.
10.See individual class regulations for further restrictions/allowances.
P. Tires & Wheels
1. Tires must conform to 9.3. Tires. GT1/ST tire make/size is free,
DOT tires are not required. DOT tires per 9.3. Tires are required for
GT2/ST cars.
2. Wheels / Hubs- The standard wheels may be replaced with direct,
bolt-on racing/aftermarket wheels under the following provisions:
a. Loose wheel spacers of any type are not recommended.
b. All cars must run the same size wheel on the same axle.
c. As viewed from above at the centerline of the wheel; the
fender shall completely cover the “tread” portion of the tire.
Only the tire sidewalls may be visible.
d. The wheel material is free, but they must be constructed of
metallic material(s). No modifications (including grinding) are
permitted on a vendor-supplied wheel.
e. Valve stems and caps are free.
3. Wheel Attachment
a. Center-locking type hubs and wheels may be used if vehicle
is supplied with them from the manufacturer. If vehicle is not
supplied with center-locking type wheels they may be used
in conjunction with an adapter that bolts onto the OEM, or
approved, hub.
b. If a single wheel nut is used, a safety spring must be in place on
the nut whenever the car is running and must be replaced after
each wheel change. These springs must be painted Day-Glo
red or orange. Alternatively, another method of retaining the
wheels may be used provided it has been approved by FIA.
GCR - 194
K.1 2012 STO SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
A. Bodywork
1. OEM non-metallic composite body panels (i.e., plastic fascias,
fiberglass hoods, etc.) may be replaced with panels of any type
composite, provided that the panel maintains the OEM profiles.
All cars may replace the hood, hatch, and/or trunk/deck lid with
nonmetallic composite parts. The hood may have heat exhaust
vents installed in it. Hood inlets (scoops) are not allowed. The
vents shall not expose the mechanical components of the car when
looking down from above. The permitted transmission and differential coolers may vent through rear license plate frame. There shall
be a screen, painted the same color as the surrounding bodywork,
covering the vent opening. Any OEM non-functional, decorative
vents/ducts may be made to be functional provided the exterior
body appearance is not modified.
B. Aerodynamic Devices
1. Front Splitter
a. The front splitter must not extend more than 2.0 inches past
the original or approved bodywork as viewed from above for
the entire profile of the splitter.
b. The splitter shall not extend laterally any further than the
widest point of the outside sidewall of the front tires with the
wheels pointed straight ahead. The splitter may not extend
more than 2.0 inches beyond the bodywork, regardless of
where the outside edges of the front tires are.
c. The splitter may have vertical deviations, fences, etc., only if
they are part of the production bodywork for street use.
2. Rear Wing
a. Wings shall be a single element with a maximum chord length
of 12.00 inches, including any wicker.
b. The entire wing assembly may be no wider than the widest
part of the car, not including fender flares/lips and mirrors, or a
maximum width of 72.0 inches, whichever is the lesser.
c. The entire rear wing assembly, including the end plates and
any wicker , shall be mounted level with, or below, the peak of
the roof.
d. The trailing edge of the rear wing may be mounted no further
rearward than the center of the rearmost part of the approved
bodywork.
e. Wing end plates must not exceed 144.0 square inches each.
f. APR performance wing GTC-500 part #AS-1070xx, variable
cord length 12.75” Inner/9” Outer), is permitted.
C. Interior
1. The required dash pad may be made of any material. The dash pad
shall maintain the stock profile.
D. Chassis
1. Fasteners are free. Fasteners may be replaced with adhesives.
2. Rounded coverings may be used at the rear of the front window
GCR - 195
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
openings to bridge gap between the leading edge of b-pillar and
inner edge of main roll hoop. The material and design of these
coverings is free, but shall be neat in appearance and securely
fastened.
3. A third (3rd) tube on each side may extend through the firewall
to the chassis in the engine compartment. These tubes shall not
extend forward of the shock towers.
4. An underbody close-out panel(s) may be used in the area behind
the rear axle. These panels shall not alter the external appearance
of the car when looking from the rear and sides of the car (i.e. we
want to have to lay on the ground to see them). If the production car uses underbody trim pieces, the OEM trim pieces may be
removed or replaced, but any close-out panel(s) used may not visually hide any more of the mechanical components, when looking
from the rear and sides of the car, than the OEM trim pieces do.
The close-out panels shall not completely bridge the gap between
the rear floor pan area and the rear axle centerline. On rear engine
cars, any close-out panels shall not extend any further forward
than the rear axle centerline. Cars with a fuel cell, engine, etc.
that extend down into external visual range shall fit the close-out
panel(s) around the component in such a way that it does not alter
the external appearance of the car.
5. Minimum ride height is 3.0 inches.
E. Engine
1 Intake Requirements: All cars shall use the stock or approved air
throttling device (e.g., carburetor, throttle body) and intake manifold for the installed engine, unless noted otherwise.
2. All cars may fit the approved carburetor and manifold. The approved
manifold may be ported and polished, but its design and configura­
tion shall not be altered in any other way. The lowering of or boring
of holes in the center divider is prohibited. Removal or obliteration
of the manifold part number is prohibited.
a. The approved carburetor shall be a maximum of 650 cfm and 4
barrels. The approved optional insulator (Holley #108- 12), and
manifold (Edlebrock Performer RPM #7101-General Motors /
#7121-Ford/Mercury) shall be fitted to cars.
b. Except as permitted in these rules, the carburetor shall not be
modified in any way. Any carburetor jets, accelerator pump,
pump cam, and accelerator pump nozzles may be used. Power
valves, metering blocks, and floats may be altered or replaced.
No venturi (including secondary or auxiliary) shall be modified
in any way, but they may be aligned. Idle holes may be drilled
in the throttle plates (butterflies). Carburetors may be modified
to allow “four corner” idle adjustment.
c. The external throttle linkage to the carburetor may be modified
or changed. Choke mechanisms, plates, rods, and actuating
cables, wires, or hoses may be removed. No removal or alteration of the carburetor air horn is permitted.
d. All air entering the intake tract shall pass through the carbu­
retor air inlet.
3. Cars may modify, or replace, motor and gearbox mounts provided
that the engine is located in the specified location. This includes
the use of “torque plates”. All engines will be mounted in the stock
position unless otherwise specified. Where an engine setback is
GCR - 196
allowed, the OEM firewall may be modified only enough to accommodate the engine set back.
a. The following cars may set the engine rearward a maximum
of 4.0 inches and may lower the engine a maximum of 1.5
inches:
1. Cadillac CTS-V (04-07)
2. Pontiac GTO (04-08)
3. Ford Mustang (85-06)
4. GM F-Body (93-02)
4. The intake and exhaust ports on piston engines may be ported at
a 1% weight penalty. The valve guide may be machined as part of
this porting.
5. Compression ratio is limited to 12.0:1.
6. Valve lift is limited to .600 inches.
7. Dry sump systems are allowed. The dry-sump system is limited
to 5 stages. It shall consist of 1 pressure stage and a maximum
of 4 scavenge stages. If the OEM style pressure pump is used it
shall count as the one permitted pressure stage. There may be
a maximum of 2 two-port scavenge stages, or a maximum of 4
single-port scavenge stages, or any combination such that oil is not
being scavenged from more than a maximum of 4 locations.
F. Drivetrain
1. Alternate flywheels and clutches are permitted. Flywheel material
shall be ferrous or aluminum and the ring gear diameter must be
the same as the OEM flywheel. Clutch and pressure plate design is
free. Carbon clutches are permitted.
2. Transmissions and ratios are free. Forward gears are limited to six
speeds. Cars with aftermarket sequential shift transmissions shall
increase the required minimum weight by 100 lbs.
3. Traction Control/Launch Control is permitted, but must operate
solely through the engine managements system (i.e., spark and fuel
control) and may not interface with, or affect, the braking system
or throttle control.
G. Suspension and Steering
1. Cars that come with a solid rear axle or trailing arm suspension are
permitted an aftermarket or fabricated rear suspension. Cars with
an altered rear suspension must add 50 lbs. Cars with live axle rear
wheel drive may reduce the minimum weight by 50 lbs
2. Original suspension pick-up points below the upper line of the
wheel rim must be used within a tolerance of 1.0 inch; however,
if the lower suspension pickup point is changed from the OEM
location, 50 lbs. must be added to the car. The body/frame around
the pick-up points may be reinforced; this reinforcement shall be
limited to a radius of 6.0 inches. The 1.0 inch tolerance applies to
pick-up points on the chassis only.
3. Suspension mounting points above the upper line of the wheel rim
must be retained within a tolerance of 3.0 inches, however, the
body/frame around the pick-up points may be reinforced; this reinforcement shall be limited to a radius of 6.0 inches. The 3.0 inch
tolerance applies to pick-up points on chassis only.
GCR - 197
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
4. The spindle and/or outer joint on the a-arm and/or strut may be
moved to correct bump steer caused by changing the vehicle ride
height. These components are not limited to the 1.0 inch of movement that applies to the suspension pick-up points located on the
chassis.
5. Alternate control arms permitted.
H. Brakes
1. Rotors- 1 or 2 piece ferrous rotors that do not exceed 355mm
in diameter or 33mm in thickness are permitted. Maximum brake
rotor diameter of 380mm is permitted at a 100 pound penalty.
2. Calipers- The standard production calipers or any caliper with 6 or
less pistons may be used. 4-piston calipers may use a maximum
of 4 pads per caliper. 6-piston calipers are limited to 2 pads per
caliper.
3. Original equipment master cylinders and pedals may be replaced.
4. Power assisted braking systems are permitted.
5. The balance of braking forces between the two wheels on an axle
shall be equal and non-adjustable.
6. The balance of braking forces between the front and rear axles may
only be adjusted by the driver through:
a. Direct intervention on the position of the center of the joint, on
the linkage lever of the hydraulic pumps of the front and rear
circuits.
b. Direct intervention on a proportioning valve in which the intake
pressure is adjusted through a pre-loaded spring.
I. Wheels
1. Rear wheels may not exceed 18.0 inches in diameter and 13.0
inches in width. Front wheels may not exceed 18.0 inches in diameter and 11.0 inches in width.
J. Approved Cars and Engines
1. The following car and engine combinations are approved in STO.
Send a request to the Club Racing Board http://www.crbscca.com/
to add additional cars.
GCR - 198
NOTES:
GCR - 199
General
Appendix K. 2012 STO Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
APPENDIX L. 2013 TA2 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
ARTICLE 4.8: TRANS AM AMERICAN MUSCLE CLASS
4.8.1: CLASSIFICATION
4.8.1.1: This class will consist of all cars meeting the prescribed Trans Am Series
rules for the American Muscle class.
4.8.2: COST CONTROL
4.8.2.1: The following items have cost caps. Teams must submit a “COST
CONTROL INSPECTION” form prior to the team’s first race of the season (form
available from the Trans Am Technical Manager). Information the team must
provide will include the Make; Model; Part #; Supplier contact information; and
the commercially available cost.
Maximum Cost
Shock Absorbers
$800 each
Brake Calipers
$500 each
Brake Pads
$200 /axle
Wheels
$500 each
4.8.2.2: Data systems are limited to basic GPS based systems. Steering and
throttle position sensors may be used, and RPM may be monitored. Shock/
suspension position, brake pressure, wheel speed, and other advanced data
devices may not be used.
4.8.2.3: No titanium components are allowed.
4.8.2.4: No carbon fiber components are allowed, except for the driver seat.
4.8.3: WEIGHT
4.8.3.1: The minimum weight for all American Muscle Class cars is 2830 pounds.
4.8.3.2: The maximum rear weight bias is 52%. If the percentage exceeds 52%,
some or all of the fuel may be pumped out, but the car must still meet the
minimum weight requirement with the fuel removed.
4.8.3.3: Ballast must solidly mounted and attached in such a way that tools
are required for its removal. The location/configuration of any ballast shall not
perform a function that is not otherwise approved in the PRR.
4.8.3.4: All weight and percentage measurements will be made, with the driver
in place, as the car exits the track at the end of a practice, qualification, or race
session.
4.8.4: BODY
The body rules are divided into two sections. The “American Muscle” (2010+
Camaro-Mustang Challenger) body rules are found in Article 4.8.7.1. The “Stock
Car” body rules are found in 4.8.7.2. Either body type may be used in 2013, but
the stock car bodies will be phased out at some time in the future (TBD).
4.8.4.1: American Muscle Bodies
4.8.4.1.1: The following 2010+ make/model bodies are allowed.
1. Chevrolet Camaro (Howe and ARBodies currently approved
manufacturers)
2. Ford Mustang (Howe approval pending, ARBodies approved
GCR - 200
manufacturer)
3. Dodge Challenger (no manufacturers approved at this time)
The body manufacturer approval process consists of a Trans Am application from
the manufacturer, a complete measurement session conducted by the Trans Am
Technical Manager, and a set of body templates provided to Trans Am by the
manufacturer. For information contact the Trans Am Technical Manager.
4.8.4.1.1.1: The maximum overall width of the body (except mirrors) is 80.0
inches.
4.8.4.1.1.2: The minimum height of the body (measured 10.0 inches behind
the top of the windshield) is 47.0 inches.
4.8.4.1.2: All body components must be utilized in an as-produced,
unmodified form and must retain all manufacturer identifying markings.
4.8.4.1.3: Absolutely no additional holes, vents, modifications, etc., will be
permitted on the body panels except as provided herein.
4.8.4.1.4: The bottom of the car must not be “belly-panned” or flush paneled.
No fixed or moveable air-directing devices are permitted underneath or inside
the car, other than ductwork that serves no other purpose than to direct
cooling air to the brakes, fuel/air metering device (carburetor or throttle body),
and/or driver.
4.8.4.1.5: Full-width bottom shrouding of the front spoiler/nosebox area
(front undertray) is permitted, but must be flat, and can extend no farther
rearward than the center of the trailing edge of the radiator. Undertray may
not be stepped or curved. Undertray may be angled in side view to produce a
maximum height at the trailing edge of 3.50 inches above the ground.
4.8.4.1.6: Installation of air ducts to direct air to cool the driver is permitted.
Air ducts to direct air to cool the driver can be installed behind the a-pillar.
Duct and mount cannot exceed 8 inches in height by 12 inches in length. A
maximum of three vents may be added to each rear side window to exhaust
hot air from the driver’s compartment.
4.8.4.1.7: The hood must have a minimum of four (4) positive locating pins
on the leading edge of the hood and must be securely fastened by either pins
or hinges at the rear
4.8.4.1.8: If used, a cowl opening shall be located at the rear edge of the hood
at the base of the windshield and have a maximum opening of 2.5” deep by
20.0 inches wide. Fresh air boxes to the fuel/air metering device (carburetor or
throttle body) are allowed as long as that ductwork serves no other purpose.
4.8.4.1.9: A front splitter must be used.
4.8.4.1.9.1: A front splitter must follow the contour of the front bumper and
may extending a maximum of 6.75 inches beyond the forward-most vertical
portion of the center of the bumper. The splitter must follow the contour of
the front body work.
4.8.4.1.9.2: The minimum ground clearance for the splitter is 2.5 inches.
4.8.4.1.10: Cars must use either a Derhaag rear wing, or Howe rear wing.
4.8.4.1.10.1: The Derhaag single plane wing (# T-A W2), if used, must
include the end plates mounted in the original location. The wing profile
(Liebeck Airfoil #1LD104E) may not be altered.
4.8.4.1.10.1.1: The maximum height of the wing, including
end plates and wicker, can be no greater than the highest
point on the roof. The roof may not be altered or pushed up
to increase its height.
4.8.4.1.10.1.2: The wing may not extend behind the rear
GCR - 201
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
bumper or bodywork measured at the centerline of the body.
4.8.4.1.10.1.3: The maximum wing width, including end
plates, is TBD inches.
4.8.4.1.10.1.4: The cord length is a maximum of 10.75 inches.
4.8.4.1.10.1.5: The wing end plates must fit within a rectangle
measuring 11.00 inches long by 4.00 inches tall. All wing
elements, including the wicker bill, must be kept within the
profile of the end plates. The endplates must be mounted
parallel to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular
to the ground. Endplates must be flat, with no curvature or
Gurney tabs.
4.8.4.1.10.1.6: A wicker bill (Gurney) may be added to the wing
element. It must be a uniform shape across the complete
width of the wing. No air may pass between the wicker bill
and the wing. It must form a 90 degree angle with the wing
surface. The size of the wicker bill cannot exceed 0.50 inch
high as measured from the wing surface. The thickness of
the wicker material must be 0.625 inch.
4.8.4.1.10.1.7: Maximum angle of the rear wing element, from
horizontal, is 30 degrees.
4.8.4.1.10.2: The Howe dual element wing (# AS105552), if used, must
have the lower wing element mounted to the endplates in the original location
as supplied by Howe. The upper element mounting location can be altered
by slotting the existing holes, or adding holes in the end plates. The wing
profiles must remain unmodified.
4.8.4.1.10.2.1: The maximum height of the wing can be no
greater than the highest point on the roof of the car.
4.8.4.1.10.2.2: The wing may not extend behind the rear
bumper or bodywork measured at the centerline of the body.
4.8.4.1.10.2.3: The maximum wing width, including end
plates, is 55.75 inches.
4.8.4.1.10.2.4: The dog leg style Howe endplates must be used
without modification. All wing elements, including the wicker
bill, must be kept within the profile of the end plates. The
endplates must be mounted parallel to the vehicle centerline,
and must be perpendicular to the ground. Endplates must be
flat, with no curvature or Gurney tabs.
4.8.4.1.10.2.5: A wicker bill (Gurney) may be added to the
upper wing element. It must be a uniform shape across the
complete width of the wing. No air may pass between the
wicker bill and the wing. It must form a 90 degree angle with
the wing surface. The size of the wicker bill cannot exceed
0.375 inch. The thickness of the wicker bill must be 0.0625
inches
4.8.4.1.10.2.6: The maximum angle of the rear wing lower
element, from horizontal, is 30 degrees.
4.8.4.1.11: A full, stock-dimension molded front windshield is mandatory
and must be constructed from 3/16” (minimum) Lexan. Three (3) 1-inch by
1/8” thickness internal windshield support braces must be spaced at least on
six-inch centers and roughly centered on the windshield. The windshield must
be secured to the body by fasteners to prevent the windshield from popping
out under internal pressure.
GCR - 202
4.8.4.1.12: A full, stock dimension molded rear “glass” constructed of
minimum .093’ thickness Lexan is required. It must be held securely in place by
a minimum of two (2) 1.0” wide external straps as well as fasteners mounting
the “glass” to the rear bodywork around the perimeter of the opening. Back
“glass” must also be securely braced internally to prevent significant bowing or
distortion under racing conditions.
4.8.4.1.13: Side windows openings (driver and passenger side) must remain as
produced in dimensions. Models with rear quarter or opera windows must have
the stock opening covered with clear, securely mounted 0.093” thick Lexan.
4.8.4.1.14: Cockpit floors must be complete with no tunnels and/or air ducts
allowed.
4.8.4.1.15: No body streamlining is allowed (windshields, radiator grills,
headlights, etc.).
4.8.4.1.16: Body seams may not be taped for practice, qualifying, or race
sessions. Exception may be granted by the Technical Manager for the temporary
repair of damaged parts. If permission is granted the tape must match the color
of the portion of the car being taped, or be clear.
4.8.4.1.17: Headlight decals and taillight decals or the model’s original taillights
are required at all times. Two functioning brake lights in the approximate
location of the stock taillights are required. Two functioning taillights are also
required.
4.8.4.1.18: Vent windows, with or without air ducts, may be used at the
A-pillar. The maximum dimension, measured along the bottom of the window
opening in the door is eleven (11) inches. The trailing edge must be ninety (90)
degrees from the top of the door to bottom of the window opening.
4.8.4.1.19: Mirrors of sufficient size/area must be mounted on both sides of
the race car and allow the driver to clearly see cars to their left and right.
4.8.4.1.20: The upper half of the grill area on the 2010+ Camaro may be
taped closed to help control the engine temperature. The tape must be trimmed
to allow the complete manufacturer’s emblem in the center of the grill to be
visible.
4.8.4.1.21: For 2010+ Camaro and Mustang bodied cars, two hood louver
panels (Howe part #B940) may be installed. The panels are .083” aluminum x
15 1/2” long x 4” wide. They must be mounted on the top of the hood with
the rear of the panel 8” forward of the rear edge of the hood, and spaced as
shown in the diagram.
Other body styles may also use the louvers. Teams must contact the Technical
Director prior to installation to determine the location dimensions
4.8.4.2: Stock Car Bodies
4.8.4.2.1: Cars in the class must use 1997, through current year, commercially
available stock car bodywork. The following make/model bodies are allowed:
1. Cadillac CTS
2. Chevrolet Impala
3. Chevrolet Malibu
4. Chevrolet Monte Carlo
5. Dodge Charger
6. Dodge Intrepid
7. Ford Fusion
8. Ford Taurus
GCR - 203
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
9. Lincoln MKS
10. Pontiac G8
11. Pontiac GTO
12. Pontiac Grand Prix
13. Toyota Camry
4.8.4.2.1.1: The maximum overall width of the body (except mirrors) is 80.0
inches.
4.8.4.2.1.2: The minimum height of the body (measured 10.0 inches behind
the top of the windshield) is 47.0 inches.
4.8.4.2.2: All body components must be utilized in an as-produced, unmodified
form and must retain all manufacturer identifying markings. No “one-off” or
“high downforce” body packages are allowed.
4.8.4.2.3: Absolutely no additional holes, vents, modifications, etc., will be
permitted on the body panels except as provided herein.
4.8.4.2.4: The bottom of the car must not be “belly-panned” or flush paneled.
No fixed or moveable air-directing devices are permitted underneath or inside
the car, other than ductwork that serves no other purpose than to direct
cooling air to the brakes, fuel/air metering device (carburetor or throttle body),
and/or driver.
4.8.4.2.5: Full-width bottom shrouding of the front spoiler/nosebox area
(front undertray) is permitted, but must be flat, and can extend no farther
rearward than the center of the trailing edge of the radiator. Undertray may
not be stepped or curved. Undertray may be angled in side view to produce a
maximum height at the trailing edge of 3.50 inches above the ground.
4.8.4.2.6: Installation of air ducts to direct air to cool the driver is permitted.
Air ducts to direct air to cool the driver can be installed behind the a-pillar.
Duct and mount cannot exceed 8 inches in height by 12 inches in length. A
maximum of three vents may be added to each rear side window to exhaust
hot air from the driver’s compartment.
4.8.4.2.7: The hood must have a minimum of four (4) positive locating pins
on the leading edge of the hood and must be securely fastened by either pins
or hinges at the rear
4.8.4.2.8: If used, a cowl opening shall be located at the rear edge of the hood
at the base of the windshield and have a maximum opening of 2.5” deep by
20.0 inches wide. Fresh air boxes to the fuel/air metering device (carburetor or
throttle body) are allowed as long as that ductwork serves no other purpose.
4.8.4.2.9: A front air dam or splitter must be used.
4.8.4.2.9.1: A front air dam, if used, shall not protrude beyond the overall
outline of the car as viewed from above. The air dam shall not extend aft
of the forward most part of the front fender opening (cutout). The minimum
ground clearance for the air dam is 2.5 inches.
4.8.4.2.9.2: A front splitter, if used, must follow the contour of the front
bumper and may extending a maximum of 3 inches beyond the bumper. The
minimum ground clearance for the splitter is 2.5 inches.
4.8.4.2.10: Cars must use either a rear spoiler, a Derhaag rear wing, or Howe
rear wing.
4.8.4.2.10.1: The single-plane rear blade spoiler, if used, must be mounted
at an angle from 50 to 75 degrees (perpendicular to the ground being 90
degrees) and may not extend beyond the rear bumper when from directly
above the rear bumper. Spoilers must be a minimum of .063 aluminum or
GCR - 204
Lexan and may vary in overall height to match the contours of the bodywork.
The rear spoiler dimensions shall not exceed 59.0 inches wide by 5.0 inches
in height, (measured on the material surface) or 295.0 square inches total
surface area. Braces to prevent spoiler deflection are allowed, but may not
serve any other purpose.
4.8.4.2.10.2: The wing, Derhaag single plane wing (# T-A W2), if used,
must include the end plates mounted in the original location as supplied by
Derhaag. The wing profile must remain an unmodified single element Liebeck
Airfoil #1LD104E scaled to a cord length of 10.75 inches.
4.8.4.2.10.2.1: The maximum height of the wing can be no greater than the
highest point on the roof of the car.
4.8.4.2.10.2.2: The wing may not extend behind the rear bumper or
bodywork measured at the centerline of the body. Wing mounting brackets
may be fabricated to achieve the proper wing location.
4.8.4.2.10.2.3:The maximum wing width, including end plates, is TBD
inches.
4.8.4.2.10.2.4: The wing end plates must fit within a rectangle measuring
11.00 inches long by 4.00 inches tall. All wing elements, including the wicker
bill, must be kept within the profile of the end plates. The endplates must be
mounted parallel to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular to the
ground. Endplates must be flat, with no curvature or Gurney tabs.
4.8.4.2.10.2.5: A wicker bill (Gurney flap) may be added to the upper
wing element. It must be a uniform shape across the complete width of the
wing, and must be kept within the profile of the end plates. No air may pass
between the tab and the wing It must form a 90 degree angle with the wing
surface. The size of the wicker bill cannot exceed 1/2 inch high as measured
from the wing surface. The thickness of the wicker material must be 1/16
inch.
4.8.4.2.10.2.6: Maximum angle of the rear wing element, from horizontal,
is 30 degrees.
4.8.4.2.10.3: The Howe dual element wing (# AS105552), if used, must
have the lower wing element mounted to the endplates in the original location
as supplied by Howe. The upper element mounting location can be altered by
slotting the existing holes, or adding holes in the end plates. The wing profile
must remain unmodified.
4.8.4.2.10.3.1: The maximum height of the wing can be no greater than the
highest point on the roof of the car.
4.8.4.2.10.3.2: The wing may not extend behind the rear bumper or
bodywork measured at the centerline of the body. Howe wing mounting
brackets may be modified or replaced to achieve the proper wing location.
4.8.4.2.10.3.3: The maximum wing width, including end plates, is 55 3/4
inches.
4.8.4.2.10.3.4: The dog leg style Howe endplates must be used without
modification. All wing elements, including the wicker bill, must be kept
within the profile of the end plates. The endplates must be mounted parallel
to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular to the ground. Endplates
must be flat, with no curvature or Gurney tabs.
4.8.4.2.10.3.5: A wicker bill (Gurney flap) may be added to the upper wing
element. It must be a uniform shape across the complete width of the wing,
and must be kept within the profile of the end plates. It must form a 90
degree angle with the wing surface. The size of the wicker bill cannot exceed
0.375 inch high as measured from the wing surface. The thickness of the
wicker material must be 0.0625 inch.
4.8.4.2.10.3.6: Maximum angle of the rear wing lower element, from
GCR - 205
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
horizontal, is 30 degrees.
4.8.4.1.11: A full, stock-dimension molded front windshield is mandatory
and must be constructed from 3/16” (minimum) Lexan. Three (3) 1-inch by
1/8” thickness internal windshield support braces should be spaced at least on
six-inch centers and roughly centered on the windshield. The windshield must
be secured to the body by fasteners to prevent the windshield from popping
out under internal pressure.
4.8.4.1.12: A full, stock dimension molded rear “glass” constructed of
minimum .093’ thickness Lexan is required. It must be held securely in place by
a minimum of two (2) 1.0” wide external straps as well as fasteners mounting
the “glass” to the rear bodywork around the perimeter of the opening. Back
“glass” must also be securely braced internally to prevent significant bowing or
distortion under racing conditions.
4.8.4.2.13: Side windows openings (driver and passenger side) must remain as
produced in dimensions. Models with rear quarter or opera windows must have
the stock opening covered with clear, securely mounted .093” thick Lexan.
4.8.4.1.14: Cockpit floors must be complete with no tunnels and/or air ducts
allowed.
4.8.4.1.15: No body streamlining is allowed (windshields, radiator grills,
headlights, etc.).
4.8.4.1.16: Body seams may not be taped for practice, qualifying, or race
sessions. Exception may be granted by the Technical Manager for the temporary
repair of damaged parts. If permission is granted the tape must match the color
of the portion of the car being taped, or be clear.
4.8.4.2.17: Headlight decals and taillight decals or the model’s original taillights
are required at all times. Two functioning brake lights in the approximate
location of the stock taillights are required. Two functioning taillights are also
required.
4.8.4.2.18: Vent windows, with or without air ducts, may be used at the
A-pillar. The maximum dimension, measured along the bottom of the window
opening in the door is eleven (11) inches. The trailing edge must be ninety (90)
degrees from the top of the door to bottom of the window opening.
4.8.4.2.19: Mirrors of sufficient size/area must be mounted on both sides of
the race car and allow the driver to clearly see cars to their left and right.
4.8.5: CHASSIS/SUSPENSION:
The chassis shall be designed to provide maximum protection to the driver. The
intent of the following rules is to maintain the recognizable external features of
the manufacturer’s make and model while providing for necessary safety and
performance modifications. Chassis must be produced by a “Trans Am Approved
Manufacturer” and must be commercially available. For information on the approval
process, contact the Trans Am Technical Manager. (Howe is an approved chassis
manufacturer, others are pending for 2013). For older chassis rule see 4.8.5.9.
4.8.5.1: Frame
4.8.5.1.1: Configuration must be full-frame, front engine, front steering, rear
drive, and shall provide all suspension mounting points. The frame must be
constructed of mild steel tubing (SAE 1010, 1020, or 1025 recommended). All
construction and materials must conform to all SCCA Pro Racing Rules (2013
PRR).
4.8.5.1.2: Each frame must have a permanent tag attached to identify the
original manufacturer and serial number.
4.8.5.1.3: All cars must have mainframe rails of rectangular steel tubing with
minimum dimensions of 2.0” x 3.0” x 0.083” wall thickness. Mainframe
rails are defined as the lower outboard frame rails between the front firewall
bulkhead and the rear main hoop bulkhead.
GCR - 206
4.8.5.1.4: The roll cage and side door bars must be constructed of mild steel
tubing and according the specifications found in Appendix J.
4.8.5.1.5: The minimum ground clearance for any part of the chassis, rearward
of the centerline of the front tires is 3.50 inches
4.8.5.2: Front Suspension
4.8.5.2.1: Only basic-type coil-over, upper A-arm, with lower A-arm, or lower
control arm/strut type front suspension is allowed.
4.8.5.2.2: The upper A-arm must made of steel and be 7.0”-11.0” long when
measured from the center of the ball joint to the center of the cross shaft, or a
line connecting the two spherical rod ends. Cross shafts, if used can be made
of steel or aluminum.
4.8.5.2.3: Lower arms must be made of steel and be 13.0”-19.0” long when
measured from the center of the ball joint to the center of the cross shaft, or
a line connecting the two spherical rod ends (A-arm style); or from the center
of the ball joint to the center of the spherical rod end (control arm style).
Struts used in conjunction with control arm style arms may be made of steel or
aluminum. Cross shafts, if used can be made of steel or aluminum.
4.8.5.2.4: Front spindles/uprights must be steel, designed for racing
applications, and be commercially available to all competitors.
4.8.5.3: Rear Suspension
4.8.5.3.1: Only basic-type live solid axle, 3 link, coil-over suspension is
allowed. This shall consist of two (2) fore/aft control arms, and a single third
link arm. Independent rear suspensions are not allowed.
4.8.5.3.2: Axle housings may not rotate inside the axle mounting brackets (no
birdcage designs).
4.8.5.3.3: A 3-link design shall consist of three (3) attaching points on the rear
axle housing and three (3) attaching points on the chassis.
4.8.5.3.4: The two fore/aft control arms must be directed forward from the
rear axle, be 23”-29” long, and run parallel to the car’s centerline (+/- 10
degrees) in the plan view. Fore/aft control arms must be one piece (no springs/
shocks/rockers). The control arm ends may be spherical rod ends or rubber/
plastic bushings.
4.8.5.3.5: The single third link arm must be directed forward from the rear
axle, be 15”-21” in length, and run parallel to the car’s centerline (+/- 10
degrees) in the plan view. The third link arm ends may be spherical rod ends
or rubber/plastic bushings. Spring-loaded and/or cushioned (torque absorbing)
third link arms are allowed.
4.8.5.3.6: A Panhard bar or Watts linkage may be used to control rear
suspension centering and lateral motion.
4.8.5.3.7: Driver-controlled adjustment of the suspension while the car is in
motion is not allowed.
4.8.5.4: Track Width
4.8.5.4.1: The front and rear track width must be 63”- 65”.
4.8.5.5: Wheel Base
4.8.5.5.1: The wheel base must be 102”-105”, and be the same on both sides
of the car (+/- .75”).
4.8.5.6: Shocks/Springs
4.8.5.6.1: Only one coil-over shock/spring assembly may be used at each
corner of the suspension.
4.8.5.6.2: Driver adjustable or electronically controlled shocks are not allowed.
4.8.5.7: Anti-Roll Bars
GCR - 207
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
4.8.5.7.1: One (1) front and one (1) rear anti-roll bar are permitted.
4.8.5.7.2: Anti-roll bars must be made of steel. The arms may be made of steel
or aluminum.
4.8.5.7.3: Driver adjustable anti-roll bars are not permitted.
4.8.5.8: Steering
4.8.5.8.1: The steering wheel must be mechanically coupled to the front
wheels only (no “steer by-wire” or “four wheel” steering is allowed)
4.8.5.8.2: Power assisted steering is allowed.
4.8.5.9: Older Chassis/Suspensions
4.8.5.9.1: For 2013-TBD, race cars that competed in the Trans Am 2 class
during 2010-2012, may continue to run the chassis/suspension combination
that was used during that time period. Cars built in 2012 meeting the 2012
rules will also be allowed.
4.8.6: WHEELS/TIRES/BRAKES
4.8.6.1: Wheels must be 15”diameter specifically designed for racing. Wheel
back spacing must be a minimum of 3.00 inches and a maximum of 7.00 inches.
Maximum wheel width is 10”. Wheels can be steel or aluminum and must weigh
at least 18 pounds.
4.8.6.2: American Muscle cars must compete on Goodyear TBD race tires.
4.8.6.3: All vehicles must use dual master cylinder, 4-wheel disc brake systems.
4.8.6.4: Driver adjustable brake bias is allowed.
4.8.6.5: Brake rotors must be iron with a maximum diameter of 12.19”, a
minimum thickness of .810”, and a maximum thickness of 1.25”.
4.8.6.6: Brake fluid recirculators are allowed.
4.8.6.7: Inline blowers may be used in the brake cooling ducts.
4.8.6.8: Water cooling of the brakes is not allowed.
4.8.6.8: Electronically controlled anti-lock braking systems are not permitted.
4.6.6.9: Brake pad materials are unrestricted except for cost (4.8.2.1).
4.8.7: DRIVETRAIN
4.8.7.1: TRANSMISSION/CLUTCH /BELLHOUSING
4.8.7.1.1: Transmissions must be commercially available manual units with
four forward gears and an operating, driver-engageable, reverse gear. All
forward gears must be at least 1.00 inches thick. A manual “H-style” shift
linkage is required. No sequential shift mechanisms are allowed. Ceramic
bearings are not allowed.
4.8.7.1.2: The clutch is limited to no more than three steel disks and floater
plates with a minimum clutch diameter of 5.25 inches. No carbon parts or
carbon clutches are allowed.
4.8.7.1.3: Bellhousings must be Quarter Master, Tilton or meet requirements
found in Appendix E. Transmissions must bolt directly to the rear bellhousing
surface. (i.e. - the 10” spacers common in the Trans Am class are not allowed).
4.8.7.2: DRIVESHAFT
4.8.7.2.1: The driveshaft must be one piece and made of metal.
4.8.7.2.2: A minimum of two steel 360-degree driveshaft hoops shall be
installed. The hoops must be of sufficient strength to contain the driveshaft in
case of u-joint or driveshaft failure. The hoops shall be located within twelve
(12) inches of the frontof the shaft and as close as practical to the rear u-joint.
4.8.7.3: REAR END
4.8.7.3.1:. All cars must utilize a commercially available quick change or Ford
GCR - 208
9” rear end.
4.8.7.3.2: All axles and axle tubes must be made of steel.
4.8.7.3.3: Differentials must be of the Detroit Locker type (ratcheting), or
the Trutrack type (helical/worm gear). A spool may also be used. Externally
adjustable differentials are prohibited. Final drive units which permit ratio
changes while the car is in motion are prohibited.
4.8.7.3.4: The maximum rear camber per wheel is +/- 2.0 degrees.
4.8.8: ENGINES
The “base” engine for Trans Am’s American Muscle class is the GM LS3 as
described in Addendum A. This engine can be used in all body types. Other engine
packages are described in Addendums B, C and D. Specific rules for these engine
packages are found in:
ADDENDUM A: American Muscle “Base” Engine
ADDENDUM B: American Muscle GM LS1 Engine
ADDENDUM C: American Muscle Traditional Carbureted Engine
ADDENDUM D: American Muscle Restricted Carbureted Engine
ADDENDUM E: Additional New American Muscle Engine Packages
As new engine packages are proposed, they will be evaluated by the Trans Am
Series and may be added under these rules. New engines packages cannot exceed
the American Muscle “Base” Engine’s average power and torque levels over the
normal operating RPM range. Any newly proposed engine package will be evaluated
by the Trans Am Technical Manager. Evaluation will consist of the submission of
a detailed American Muscle Engine Component Build Sheet, along with presenting
a prototype engine for dynamometer testing. Contact the Trans Am Technical
Manager for details.
The following rules apply to all engine packages:
4.8.8.1: All engines will be normally aspirated V-8s.
4.8.8.2: Engine offset is a maximum of 1.0 inch, measured from the crankshaft
centerline to the longitudinal centerline of the chassis.
4.8.8.3: Engine setback is a maximum setback of TBD inches, measured from
the left side top ball joint to the engine bellhousing flange.
4.8.8.4: Engine height is a minimum of 9.5 inches, measured from the center of
the crankshaft centerline to the ground.
4.8.8.5: Alternators must be OEM type and must be belt driven. They may be
driven off the engine or drivetrain components.
4.8.8.6: Water pumps must be OEM type. Water pump impellers may be altered
for improved cooling. The OEM coolant flow direction must be maintained
4.8.8.7: Spark plugs are unrestricted.
4.8.8.8: The radiator must retain a stock appearance and must be located in
front of the engine. The top of the radiator may be laid back a maximum of 3.00
inches from vertical.
4.8.8.9: Any commercially available exhaust system that meets the Trans Am
sound requirements may be used. Exhaust systems may be constructed from
mild or stainless steel, and be chromed, ceramic coated, and/or painted. No
Inconel, titanium, or other high cost materials may be used.
ADDENDUM A:
AMERICAN MUSCLE “BASE” ENGINE:
(GENERAL MOTORS LS3 ENGINE EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BELOW)
GCR - 209
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
A.1: A stock Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, GM part #25168491, or #15865791
must be used. Any commercially available air filter may be used. All tubes
between the air filter and throttle body must be metal (except unions used to
connect intake tubes). The maximum outside diameter of the tubes is 4.0 inches.
No tapered tubing, tapered inserts, or airflow directing devices may be used in
the tubing connecting the air filter to the throttle body.
A.2: The throttle body must be either a GM 90mm, electronic, part #12570790,
or Edelbrock 90mm, mechanical, part #3869.
A.2.1: Throttle bodies may not be modified.
A.2.2: A 2.250 inch diameter flat plate restrictor must be in place during all
practice, qualification, and race sessions. The restrictor must be mounted in
the inlet side of the throttle body. The restrictor will be supplied by Trans Am
Technical Manager at the start of each event, and must be returned at the
conclusion of that event. Teams using the LS3 engine must notify the Trans
Am Technical Manager, at least 3 weeks before their first race, to ensure an
adequate supply of restrictors. Teams or engine builders wishing to test using
the restrictor should contact the Technical Manager for a dimensional drawing
of the plate, or to obtain a “loaner” plate.
A.3: An unmodified LS3 GM part # TBD (short), or L92 GM part # TBD (tall)
intake manifold must be used. Identically equivalent GM part number intake
manifolds may also be used. These part numbers include TBD.
A.4: Unmodified GM LS3 cylinder heads, GM casting #’s 0821, 0823, or 5364
must be used. Porting and/or polishing is not allowed. No more than a three
angle valve job with a bottom cut of 60 degrees is permitted. A maximum
of 0.250”inches from the head of the valve seat to the bottom of the 60
degree bottom cut is allowed. No grinding in the combustion chamber bowl
area is allowed. No interior or exterior coatings are permitted. Valve covers are
unrestricted.
A.5: The maximum compression ratio is 10.7:1.
A.6: The spec “American Muscle” camshaft must be used. Prior to use, each
cam must be measured by the Trans Am Technical Manager. A Trans Am serial
number will then be applied. The cam must be ordered through Schwanke
Engines, (507.723.4120). Stock rocker arms, with a 1.7:1 ratio must be used.
Stock valve spring retainers and keepers (locks/keys) must be used (no titanium).
Any valve springs are allowed.
A.7: The stock engine bore is 4.065 inches (103.25 mm). Cylinders may be
honed as part of the normal freshening procedure, but the engine displacement
cannot exceed 378 cubic inches.
A.8: The stock crankshaft, with a 3.622 inch (92 mm) stroke, must be used.
A.9: Aftermarket pistons, piston rings, piston pins and connecting rods may be
used if the basic design and weight is the same as the stock GM components.
A.10: Aftermarket fasteners, including rod bolts are allowed (no titanium).
A.11: The oil pan is unrestricted, but the oiling system may not exceed a fourstage system (three scavenge and one pressure).
A.12: A GM ECU must be used. It may be re-flashed and the maximum RPM set
at 6800 RPM.
ADDENDUM B:
AMERICAN MUSCLE GM LS1”ENGINE:
(GENERAL MOTORS LS-1 CORVETTE ENGINE EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BELOW)
B.1: A stock Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, GM part #25168491, or #15865791
must be used. Any commercially available air filter may be used. All tubes
GCR - 210
between the air filter and throttle body must be metal (except unions used to
connect intake tubes). The maximum outside diameter of the tubes is 4.0 inches.
No tapered tubing, tapered inserts, or airflow directing devices may be used in
the tubing connecting the air filter to the throttle body.
B.2: Throttle bodies can be mechanically or electronically operated.
B.3: Intake manifold/fuel system options include:
B.3.1: A stock, unmodified LS-1 intake manifold, GM #12560894, with the
stock GM 75 mm throttle body
B.3.2: A stock, LS-2 intake manifold, modified only to fit a 90 mm throttle
body, with any 90 mm throttle body.
B.3.3: A stock, LS-6 intake manifold, GM #12573572 or #88894339, with the
stock GM 75mm throttle body.
B.3.4: The fuel injection system may be completely replaced with a Holley
carburetor, 650 CFM, double pumper, part #0-80541. The carburetor must be
completely unmodified except for changing of jets and changes (safety wire
or epoxy) to keep the booster nozzles from falling into the intake manifold. No
porting, polishing or addition of any other material is permitted. A maximum
1.00 inch thick spacer may be used between the intake manifold and the
carburetor. This conversion also requires a GM intake manifold #88958675
and a MSD #6010 timing module.
B.4: Unmodified LS cylinder heads, part numbers 241, 243, 799, or 853 must be
used. Porting and/or polishing is not allowed. No more than a three angle valve
job with a bottom cut of 60 degrees is permitted. A maximum of 0.250”inches
from the head of the valve seat to the bottom of the 60 degree bottom cut is
allowed. No grinding in the combustion chamber bowl area is allowed. No interior
or exterior coatings are permitted.
B.5: The maximum compression ratio is 10.1:1.
B.6: The camshaft must be a GM #12480110 (“LS” V8 ASA cam).
B.6.1: Max lift, measured at the intake and exhaust valves, = 0.525 inches
B.6.2: Duration at .050” lift: intake = 226 degrees, exhaust = 236 degrees
B.6.3: Lobe center separation angle = 110 degrees
B.6.4: Stock rocker arms, with a 1.7:1 ratio must be used.
B.6.5: Stock valve spring retainers and keepers (locks/keys) must be used (no
titanium).
B.6.6: Any valve springs are allowed.
B.7: The stock engine bore is 3.898 inch (99 mm). Cylinders may be honed as
part of the nomal freshening procedure, but the engine displacement cannot
exceed 350 cubic inches.
B.8: The stock crankshaft stroke, of 3.622 inch (92 mm) stroke, must be
maintained.
B.9: The crankshaft may be replaced with Eagle # 434636226100. Rods may be
replaced with Eagle # 612503D2000, Callies Compstar # 6125LS1, or Engine
Pro# 10-1108-8.
B.10: Aftermarket fasteners, including rod bolts are allowed (no titanium).
B.11: The oil pan is unrestricted, but the oiling system may not exceed a fourstage system (three scavenge and one pressure).
B.12: A GM ECU must be used. It may be re-flashed and the maximum RPM set
at 6800 RPM.
ADDENDUM C:
AMERICAN MUSCLE TRADITIONAL CARBURETED ENGINE
GCR - 211
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
C.1: Air cleaners are required at all times. The air filter housing must be centered
on the carburetor and all air entering the engine shall pass through the filter. The
air filter element may not exceed 15.00 inches in diameter and the maximum
element height is 4.00 inches.
C.2: The carburetor must be a Holley, 650 CFM, double pumper, part #0-80541.
The carburetor must be completely unmodified except for changing of jets and
changes (safety wire or epoxy) to keep the booster nozzles from falling into
the intake manifold. No porting, polishing or addition of any other material is
permitted. A maximum 1.00 inch thick spacer may be used between the intake
manifold and the carburetor
C.3: Intake Manifolds:
C.3.1: No modifications to the intake manifold are allowed. No porting,
polishing or filling of ports with any kind of material is allowed. No internal or
external coatings or painting of any type is allowed.
C.3.2: Chevrolet intake manifold must be an Edelbrock Victor Jr., part #2975.
C.3.3: Ford intake manifold must be an Edelbrock Victor Jr., part #2980 or
#2981.
C.3.4: Chrysler intake manifold must be an Edelbrock Victor W-2, part #2920.
C.4: Cylinder Heads:
C.4.1: The minimum combustion chamber allowed is 62.0 cc and the internal
cylinder head chamber dimensions must remain identical to the cylinder head’s
original chamber dimensions. Grinding for cc adjustments is allowable only in
the combustion chamber cavity area. The cylinder head’s original squish area
must not be modified from the original dimensions at any point in the cylinder
head. Porting and polishing is not allowed. No more than a three-angle valve
job with a bottom cut of 60 degrees is permitted. A maximum of 0.250 inches
from the head of the valve seat to the bottom of the 60-degree bottom cut is
allowed. No interior or exterior coatings are permitted.
C.4.2: Maximum intake valve diameter is 2.020 inches. Maximum exhaust
valve diameter is 1.600 inches. No titanium valves are allowed. Valve stem
size must be a minimum of 11/32” and must remain as delivered from the
manufacturer without modification. No pro-flow or any type of valve that steps
down in diameter beyond the listed dimensions are allowed.
C.4.3: Chevrolet cylinder heads must be Dart Iron Eagle 200 cast iron heads,
part #10310010, which replaced part #1112B and #1115B.
C.4.4: Ford cylinder heads must be Dart Iron Eagle 200 cast iron heads, part
#5302B, or World Products’ Windsor Sr. iron heads, part #053040.
C.4.5: Mopar cylinder heads must be Mopar Performance Econo W2, part
#P4529994.
C.4.6: Valve covers are unrestricted.
C.5: The maximum compression ratio is 10.2:1.
C.6: Any roller or flat tappet camshaft with a maximum lift of 0.612 inches
(measured at the valve with zero lash) may be used. Engle cam¬shaft part
#RK-38 meets these specifications. The cam drive may use either a chain or
belt system. Rocker arms may be any OEM, or roller bearing type. No split shaft
or shaft mounted rocker arms are permitted. The maximum rocker arm ratio is
1.6:1.
C.7: Aftermarket engine blocks are allowed, but must be equal to or greater
in weight and exterior dimensions compared to the original manufacturer of
the make and model. No aftermarket aluminum blocks are allowed. Engine
displacement can be a maximum of 358 cubic inches.
C.8: The crankshaft must be made of steel or iron. The stroke may be increased
or decreased, but the minimum stroke length is 3.25 inches. The minimum (bare
GCR - 212
crank) allowable weight is 46 pounds. Lightweight, knife-edge, 180-degree,
pendulum cut, scalloped, and/or undercut counterweight crankshafts are
prohibited.
C.9: Aftermarket or OEM pistons must be any forged flat top version, however
valve reliefs may be cut into the top surface. No portion of the piston may
protrude from the block. Each piston must have two compression rings and one
oil ring groove. The minimum wall thickness of the piston wrist pin must be .125
inches and must be made of steel. Any type of wrist pin locking device may be
used. Connecting rods must be solid steel. No titanium, aluminum, stainless steel
or composite rods are allowed.
C.10: Aftermarket fasteners, including rod bolts are allowed.
C.11: The oil pan is unrestricted, but the oiling system may not exceed a fourstage system (three scavenge, and one pressure).
C.12: Ignition systems may be OEM or electronic. No magnetos are allowed. The
distributor must mount in the stock location. No ignition components may be
located on the driver’s side of the chassis. The ignition(s) must have a soft touch
rev limit chip set at 7000 rpm (no variable and/or adjustable ignition systems are
allowed). The soft touch system must be enclosed and have no interruptions or
breaks in the wires en route to the distributor. All ignition wires connecting to the
rev limiter(s), the ignition box(es), and the coil(s) must be readily accessible for
inspection. No other wires may intersect or connect to those wires operation the
ignition system(s) save for the ignition switch(es). If more than one ignition box
is used each will be limited by a separate 7000 RPM rev limiter.
NOTE: It is Trans Am’s intention to phase out this engine category in TBD
ADDENDUM D:
AMERICAN MUSCLE RESTRICTED CARBURETED ENGINE
D.1: Air cleaners are required at all times. The air filter housing must be centered
on the carburetor and all air entering the engine shall pass through the filter. The
air filter element may not exceed 15.00 inches in diameter and the maximum
element height is 4.00 inches.
D.2: Any 4 barrel, modular carburetor may be used, subject to the following
restrictions:
D2.1: Engines using a Holley, 650 CFM, double pumper, part #0-80541 will be
limited to 7000 RPM. The carburetor must be completely unmodified except
for changing of jets and changes (safety wire or epoxy) to keep the booster
nozzles from falling into the intake manifold. No porting, polishing or addition
of any other material is permitted. A maximum 1.00 inch thick spacer may be
used between the intake manifold and the carburetor.
D.2.2: Restricted engines using any other carburetor will be limited to 6500
RPM. A maximum 1.00 inch thick spacer may be used between the intake
manifold and the carburetor.
D.3: Any intake manifold may be used.
D.4: Any cylinder heads may be used. Maximum intake valve diameter is 2.050
inches. Maximum exhaust valve diameter is 1.600 inches. No titanium valves are
allowed. Valve covers are unrestricted
D.5: The maximum engine compression ratio is 9.5:1.
D.6: Any roller or flat tappet camshaft with a maximum lift of 0.550 inches
(measured at the valve with 0 lash) may be used.
D.7: Aftermarket engine blocks are allowed, but must be equal to or greater
in weight and exterior dimensions compared to the original manufacturer of
the make and model. No aftermarket aluminum blocks are allowed. Engine
displacement can be a maximum of 362 cubic inches.
GCR - 213
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
D.8: The crankshaft must be made of steel or iron. The stroke may be increased
or decreased, but the minimum stroke length is 3.25 inches. The minimum (bare
crank) allowable weight is 46 pounds. Lightweight, knife-edge, 180-degree,
pendulum cut, scalloped, and/or undercut counterweight crankshafts are
prohibited.
D.9: Connecting rods must be solid steel. No titanium, aluminum, stainless steel
or composite rods are allowed.
D.10: Aftermarket fasteners, including rod bolts are allowed.
D.11: The oil pan is unrestricted, but the oiling system may not exceed a fourstage system (three scavenge and one pressure).
D.12: Ignition systems may be OEM or electronic. No magnetos are allowed. The
distributor must mount in the stock location. No ignition components may be
located on the driver’s side of the chassis. The ignition(s) must have a soft touch
rev limit chip set at a maximum of 6500 or 7000 rpm depending the carburetor
being used (no variable and/or adjustable ignition systems are allowed). The soft
touch system must be enclosed and have no interruptions or breaks in the wires
en route to the distributor. All ignition wires connecting to the rev limiter(s),
the ignition box(es), and the coil(s) must be readily accessible for inspection.
No other wires may intersect or connect to those wires operation the ignition
system(s) save for the ignition switch(es). If more than one ignition box is used
each will be limited by a separate RPM rev limiter.
NOTE: It is Trans Am’s intention to phase out this engine category in TBD
ADDENDUM E:
ADDITIONAL NEW AMERICAN MUSCLE ENGINE PACKAGES
Specific rules for any new American Muscle engine packages will be established
after the Trans Am Technical Manager has evaluated the proposed American
Muscle Engine Component Build Sheet, and determined, through engine
dynamometer testing, that the new engine package does not exceed the
American Muscle “Base” engine’s average power and torque levels over the
normal operating RPM range. Contact the Trans Am Technical Manager for
details on the engine approval process.
GCR - 214
General
Appendix L. TA2 Rules
GCR - 215
Appendix M. SMG Rules
APPENDIX M. SMG TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
The Spec Mustang class is for the S197 Ford Mustang GT built from
2005-2009. The goal of this class is to provide a fast and safe race car
that is affordable to build and maintain with readily available parts and a
fully adjustable racing suspension.
Cars must meet the general regulations of Section 9 of the SCCA General
Competition Regulations (GCR) for Touring category cars.
Ford Racing Parts listed may or may not be available from Ford
Performance. If, at any time there is a loss of supply of any of these
parts, please notify SMG immediately so that SMG, as a group, can
select an equivalent alternative.
The following items represent approved modifications and safety items
permitted and/or required on Spec Mustangs, in addition to safety items
required by Section 9 of the GCR. Permitted components or modifications
must not perform a prohibited function.
1. ELIGIBILITY
• Ford Mustang GT hardtops with manual transmissions from 20052009 (S197)
• Bullitt Option Mustangs and Shelby GT Option Mustangs are
permitted, but must be brought to spec per the rules and part
numbers listed below.
2. SPECIFICATIONS
a. Engine Type:
SOHC 24-valve V-8, aluminum block and heads, port fuel injection
Displacement: 281 cu in, 4601cc 4.6 liter)
b. Transmission: 5-speed manual, factory.
c. Dimensions: Wheelbase: 107.1 inches; Length: 188.0 inches;
Width: 73.9 inches
Front and rear track measured from outside to outside of tires front
and rear:
Front: 75 inches
Rear: 74-3/8 inches
d. Weight with driver: 3400 lbs.
e. Allowed Interior Modifications
1. Remove all interior trim, door panels, sound system and
components, air bags and related wiring, A/C, compressor and
condenser with hoses/fittings, heater/heater motor/core, glove
box, headliner, driver and passenger windows with hardware,
column steering lock, seats and hardware/motors, carpeting
and sound insulation, interior lighting, console. Radio/HVAC
panel in center of dash may be removed. Otherwise, face of
dash to remain intact with air vents removed. Blinkers and
switches to be removed.
2. Driver “dead pedal” allowed.
GCR - 216
3. Ballast, if required to be located on floor of front or rear
passenger area, secured per GCR approved method.
4. Interior rear view mirror is open and mandatory.
5. Emergency brake may be removed.
6. Removable steering wheel allowed.
f. Body
1. Body to remain intact including rocker panel valance. Must
run the Steeda splitter and wing listed below. Fog lights may
be removed and replaced with cosmetic panel. No flaring of
fenders is allowed. Rolling of inner fender lips is allowed.
2. Stock windshield, rear backlight and quarter windows are
required. Lexan is not allowed. Windshield and backlight may
have retention straps installed.
3. Trunk lock assembly to be removed and replaced with external
fastener(s).
4. Hood pins allowed and encouraged.
5. 1” square steel tube welded to inside body seam under each
door for the purposes of jacking the car is allowed.
6.Stock side view mirrors to remain in place and functional.
7. Fuel cells are not allowed.
8. Radiator side air deflectors (M-8310-A or equivalent) and lower
connecting plate is permitted as a replacement structure for air
inlet flow to the radiator. It may not serve any other purpose
and must be within the confined area of the OEM plastic lower
air deflector. This will be used in conjunction with the OEM
lower air deflector.
g.Safety
1. Cars must meet the safety regulations of Section 9 of the
SCCA GCR for Touring category cars.
2.SCCA General Competition Regulations compliant head
restraint racing seat to be installed for driver. Optional similar
seat for passenger is allowed. In no circumstances will the roll
cage obstruct the passenger area from being functional Sixpoint harness is required for driver and passenger (if seat is
installed).
3. Window net required on driver’s side.
4. SCCA compliant fire bottle or fire system required.
5. GCR compliant, (per Section 9.4 GT and Production Car specs)
roll cage required, double side bars required both sides. SMG
roll cages limited to 6 points of contact to the car. Optionally,
two additional bars, extending forward to, but not penetrating
the firewall for foot protection may be added. Additional
gusseting connecting the cage to the body is also prohibited.
6. Master on/off switch to be mounted at lower front of driver’s
window, not to block rear view mirror.
7. Steel tow hooks required front and rear, welded to bumpers.
h.Suspension
GCR - 217
General
Appendix M. SMG Rules
Appendix M. SMG Rules
1. The Cortex Racing Spec Mustang Xtreme-Grip Suspension Kit
PN CCS-40-1000SPEC is required. Suspension modifications
are limited to this kit as specified below. Any replacement of
items in this kit must be the current component part number
from this kit.
2. Either: Koni Struts and Rear Coilover Shock with Springs
Kit comprised of single adjustable, Koni struts and Koni rear
coilover dampers with matching springs. Strut system part
number:
CSS-40-1000-JRI-SMG, rear shock system PN: SHK-
40-1000-JRI-SMG.
or
JR Single Adjustable Coilover Kit Part #CCK-40-1000-JRISMG
No mixing of the Koni and Jri shocks is allowed.
3.Spring rates: 600 lbs. OR 500 lbs., front, 450 lbs. OR 400 lbs.
rear.
Eibach part numbers:
1. Front 0700.250.0600;
0700.250.0500
2. Rear 0800.250.0400;
0800.250.0450
4. Maximum negative front camber is 3.5 degrees. The approved
technique to accomplish this is by using the Cortex P/N CFS40-ALIGN-SMG, SMG alignment kit (which includes camber
slugs P/N CFS-40-1010), in all SMG strut housings. Installation
guidelines are provided by Cortex. The Jri front strut housing
will already have this feature. This CFS-40 kit is allowed, not
required. But this IS the only allowed means to go beyond 3.0
degrees of negative camber. Potential tire clearance issues,
resulting from this modification, are addressed in section: o.
No machining of body to allow further travel.
Caster: min. +6.35 max. +7.85
Camber plate PN MM5CC-5 or CCP197-05-09.
Figure 1: SMG Strut housing with Slotted Upper Hole. (Note: Jri housings have the slot on the bottom hole)
GCR - 218
General
Appendix M. SMG Rules
Figure 2: SMG Strut Housing with Camber Slug Installed.
REAR:
5. Bump stops - Stock rear bump stops require modification or
removal to install the Cortex suspension. The shocks and struts
that come with the Cortex Kit have bump stops installed and
must be retained.
6. Cortex Rear lower control arm bracket, PN CLCA-40-1001
(left), CLCA-40-1003 (right).
7. Rear tubular lower control arms with heim joints and anglecorrection spacers at both ends (set), PN CLCA-1000.
8. Rear shock mounts allowing fitment of up to 18” x 10.5” rear
wheels, PN RUSM-40-1000L-ASSY, RUSM-40-1000R-ASSY,
RLSM-40-1000L-ASSY, RLSM-40-1000R-ASSY.
9. Cortex Watts Link package, PN CWL-40-1000SMG
a. Cortex’s differential cover: incorporates the Watts pivot
mount as well as provision for a differential cooler and
temperature sensor (allowed option), PN CWL-1001.
b. Eibach PN 35101.310 front, adjustable anti-sway bar or
Ford Racing PN M5490A (Front only).
c. Ford Racing PN M-20201F Strut tower brace – Also Hotchkiss PN 2016016.
d. Upgraded ball joints (Steeda X5), PN 555-8108.
e. Lower control arm part #M-3075-RA is allowed.
FRONT:
10.Allowed modification not included in Cortex Package: front,
lower control arm bushings: Prothane PN 6-218-BL forward
bushing PN 6-220-BL Rearward bushings (replace large hydrobushing.. This is not seen as a significant performance enhancement, rather and a cost savings when bushings are worn. This
GCR - 219
Appendix M. SMG Rules
allows them to be replaced without entire control arm replacement.
11. Cortex Racing Adjustable length anti-roll bar end links for corner
balance, PN ARB-40-1002. (Included with CSS-40-1000JRISMG).
12. Cortex Racing bump steer adjustment kit, PN CBS-40-1000
(Included with CSS-40-1000SPEC).
13. Steeda 555-4104 upper link/differential mount spherical
bearing is permitted.
14. Any type/origin of upper 3rd link and mount bracket assembly
may be used. Factory original locations for mounting holes (on
both body and differential) must be retained.
15. Rear anti-sway bar allowed – must be OEM, either 18 mm
(6R335A771BB) or 22 mm (Ford Racing #M-5490-AR Eibach
#35101.12).
16. Rear lower control arm to axle housing relocate bracket, and
the rear lower shock mount bracket may be welded for reinforcement.
i.Brakes
1. StopTech STR40 Trophy front brake kit (PN 87.330.4C00.
R1) with 355mmx35mm rotors (PN 31.747.1101.87,
31.747.1102.87) and the STR40 calipers (PN 379.444.7133,
379.44.7134). Aftermarket rotor of same size allowed.
2. Rear brakes stock caliper required. Aftermarket rotor of stock
size allowed.
Elimination of the parking brake and adjuster cylinder is allowed,
which will require the installation of the StopTech knockback
spring.
3. Shelby GT500 ABS module required Ford Racing PN M-2353A.
4. Stainless braided lines are allowed.
5. Brake pads are free.
6. Ducting to front and rear brakes is allowed.
7. Removal of dust shields front and rear is allowed (highly recommended).
8. The OEM brake booster assembly from a 2007-2009 Shelby
GT500 (7R3Z-2005-AA/8R3Z-2005-AB) is permitted and recommended.
j.Transmission/Differential
1. Stock transmissions: 5 speed to run with 3.73 ratio rear end.
2. Ford Racing Short-shift kit with knob PN M-7210T, Hurst
PN 391-0201, or MGW Short Throw shifter for 2005-2009
Mustang GT. Stock shifter can be run.
3. Eaton Truetrac limited slip differential required (PN 913A561);
overflow bottle allowed. If housed inside trunk this triggers
need for full bulkhead of trunk area.
4. Driveshaft loop required.
5. Metallic, one-piece driveshaft is allowed.
GCR - 220
k.Engine
1. No modifications to the engine are allowed except where specifically authorized within these rules. RACE-BUILT ENGINES
ARE NOT ALLOWED. All engines will be as built and delivered
by Ford Motor Company.
2. Cars in this class are to run stock 4.6 liter engines from 20052009 cars at no more than 315 rear wheel horsepower, and
325 ft lbs of torque. Updating or backdating of entire engine
long block is allowed.
3. Dyno testing may be required if it appears that an engine in
a competing car has an edge in power. Determination of any
potential power advantage will be made by SCCA stewards.
Test to be done at owner’s expense by dyno shop approved by
the SCCA.
4. Engine is to be unmodified internally. No balancing or blueprinting is allowed.
5. Ford Racing radiator required: M-8005-MGT or BE COOL PN
60205.
6. Ford Racing de-gas overflow bottle/radiator cap allowed: PN
M-8080-A or Moroso PN 63768.
7. Long tube headers: Borla PN 17237 with X pipe (Ford Racing
short tube on Miller cars grandfathered).
8. Cold air intake kit: M-9603-M463; Steeda #555-3131 or Ford
Racing #M-9603-GT06.
9. Ford Racing power steering cooler required: Ford PN M3746A
or Derale PN 13225.
10.Ford Racing idler pulley required: PN M19216-D46 or Dorman
PN 34191.
11.ECU tuning is allowed not to exceed the HP limit regulation
listed in this Engine section.
12.The Steeda PN 701-0005A which is an Underdrive Pulley
System consisting of a water pump pulley and a SFI rated
crankshaft pulley/damper” is allowed, but does not exempt
competitor from meeting HP and torque limits. (Optional)
13.Fuel shall comply with GCR Section 9.3. Fuel.
14. Clutch replacement: The following specified replacement clutch
parts are:
a. Clutch disc Centerforce PN DF380800
Clutch disc limited to OEM diameter (11”) with OEM
equivalent pressure plate and flywheel.
15.Stock pressure plate: Ford PN 8R3Z-7563-A or Sachs PN
SC70272.
16.Dorman throw out bearing Ford PN 4R3Z-7A-508-AA, or
Dorman PN CS650109.
17.Road racing oil pan, Moroso P/N 20548/18548 is allowed.
18.Ford Racing high volume oil pump #M-6600-F46 is allowed.
19.EVAP/emissions system components on engine and chassis
GCR - 221
General
Appendix M. SMG Rules
Appendix M. SMG Rules
may be modified, removed, or disabled, but, not vented from
engine to exhaust or any vacuum source other than the engine
air intake. An engine oil/air separator is permitted but is
restricted to the driver’s side PCV hose and must be mounted
within the engine compart-ment.
Charge motion delete
plates or plugs are permitted. Throttle body spacers are NOT
PERMITTED.
20.Ford Racing #M-6038-R or Prothane #6-505-BL motor mounts
are permitted as a replacement to the OEM motor mounts. The
engine must retain its original mounting location and height.
l.Exhaust
1. Stock GT exhaust to be retained with catalytic converters and
resonators removed. Car to be legally able to run at 92db at
100 feet.
m.Electrical
1. Stock wiring recommended but removal of unused wiring is
allowed.
n. Aero package
1. All Spec Mustangs will run the Steeda fixed rear wing, PN
307-0009
2. Splitter, two options allowed:
a. Classic Design Concepts – Steeda PN 067-110020 Chin
Spoiler-GT
b. Front fascia that includes integrated splitter: Steeda part
PN 555-0500
3. Miller Cup Mustang carbon fiber splitter grandfathered on original Miller cars.
o.Wheels/Tires
1. Jongbloed Wheel, Part PN 70010545 - 18” X 10.5” front and
rear. All tires and wheels on car must be the same size.
2. Wheels for practice and rain conditions are free; they must all
be the same size.
3. Tires: SMG cars competing in Touring Category may run any
tire that meets 9.3 and that meets the size specified by the
SMG rules (max tire size 295, aspect ratio open). SMG cars
competing elsewhere should consult the supplemental regulations for that event for any potential tire specification requirements when running as a regional only SMG class.
4. 0.5” hub-centric wheel spacers are an allowed option in front
only.
p. Graphic Requirements:
1. All Spec Mustang must have SCCA Club Racing decals on each
side and front per GCR, SMG Class stickers and numbers per GCR.
2. Other graphic requirements are based on annual sponsors, to be
distributed accordingly.
q. Allowed options
1. Tiger racing vented, fiberglass hood
GCR - 222
2. AIM dash/transponder system
3. Oil Cooler - Derale PN 52508 or equivalent
GCR - 223
General
Appendix M. SMG Rules
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
APPENDIX N. SPECE46 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
1. Introduction
Spec E46 is a road racing class based on BMW’s E46 chassis that
emphasizes high performance, vehicle consistency, reasonable
cost, and ease of entry in order to provide a highly competitive,
driver-focused racing experience.
2. Intent
Spec E46 is a spec racing series combining vehicle equality with
a high level of chassis performance and adjustability to maximize
driver involvement. Engine development above a stock power level
is not included in the intent of Spec E46. Future additions to this
rulebook, potentially including but not limited to maximum power
definitions, mandatory teardowns, and engine claim rules, can and
will be made to eliminate engine development if needed to maintaincar parity within the originally intended budget.
3. Sanctioning Body
In order to maximize participation and flexibility, Spec E46 is not
targeted at any particular organization. However, in order to
simplify this ruleset the SCCA GCR is referenced to cover safety
and other items that are generally accepted.
4. Vehicle Eligibility
The series is open to BMW E46-chassis 330 USDM models. This
includes 2001-05 sedans and 2001-06 coupes. ZHP, 330xi,
wagon, and convertible models are not permitted.
5. Safety
1. Cars must meet the safety requirement of GCR section 9.
2. A stationary fixed nozzle fire system must be installed.
3. A master electrical kill switch must be installed.
4. Steering wheel lock must be disabled.
5. Airbags must be removed.
6. Glass sunroof must be removed and replaced with a metal or
composite panel securely attached to the roof.
7. The roll cage must be of the standard six point design, or a 6+2
design with an additional two bars and associated chassis attachment points added for foot protection, provided that the foot protection bars do not go through the front firewall. Cars may utilize OEM
type steering column and transmission tunnel attachment points to
the dash bar if equipped. A driver seat mounting cradle integrated
into the cage structure may attach to the chassis at the transmission tunnel at two points, each with a maximum mounting surface
of 40 sq. in. Factory brackets 41118239493 and 41118233493
may be modified or removed but may not provide additional attachment points. No additional tabs or attachment points are permitted.
6. Definitions and Defaults
1. Cars must compete as equipped by the manufacturer, except as
permitted by these regulations.
2. Addition, removal, modification, or disabling of parts is not
permitted unless specified.
GCR - 224
3. OEM equivalent parts may be used provided they do not provide a
performance advantage over stock.
4. ‘Replaced’ means that parts may exceed OE specifications,
provided they are mounted in the stock location and perform the
same function.
5. If a part may be removed any related brackets, fasteners, electrical
components, etc may also be removed.
7. General Specifications
1. Fuel must meet the requirements of GCR section 9.3 Fuel.
2. All lubricating and hydraulic fluids may be replaced.
3. All filters may be replaced.
8. Graphics
1. Front fenders are reserved for sponsor and other required stickers.
2. The area above each wheel is reserved for the tire sponsor.
9. Engine
1. Regardless of factory specification or procedure, no oversize
pistons are permitted.
2. Compression ratio may be changed only within the tolerances
affected by resurfacing for trueness and within factory tolerances,
and shall not exceed 10.5:1 [exact value TBD] as measured by a
whistler device.
3. Time-Sert or similar product may be used with threaded components.
4. Oil pan baffle may be added.
5. Spark plugs may be replaced.
6. Head gasket may be replaced with any gasket having the same or
greater compression thickness as stock. Other engine gaskets and
seals may be replaced.
7. Stock oil pump assembly may be modified.
8. Oil separator (CCV system) may be replaced.
9. Oil filter housing may be replaced with the E46 M3 part number 11
42 7 839 858.
10.Engine must be controlled by the stock ECU flashed with the Epic
Motorsports Spec E46 tune. The Epic tamper proof seal must be
intact.
11.Emissions related equipment may be removed.
12.Horsepower or other engine checks may be performed to ensure
compliance.
10. Engine Bay
1. Engine accessory belts may be replaced.
2. Pulleys may be replaced with metal versions of the same diameter.
3. Windshield washer system may be removed.
4. Power steering hoses and reservoir may be replaced.
5. Horn may be removed.
6. All HVAC components may be removed.
GCR - 225
General
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
7. Fittings, adapters, senders, and sensors for monitoring or data
acquisition systems may be added.
11. Cooling System
1. Radiator may be replaced provided it retains the mounting points,
plane of orientation, and requires no body or structure modification
to install.
2. Electric fan may be replaced, mechanical fan may be removed.
3. Extraneous coolant hoses may be removed or plugged.
4. Coolant hoses may be replaced or reconfigured.
5. Thermostat may be replaced or an alternate configuration used.
6. Water pump may be replaced, provided it remains mechanically
driven.
7. Alternate coolant expansion tank may be installed.
8. Oil coolers for engine, transmission, and differential are allowed.
12. Exhaust System
1. Exhaust system provided by BimmerWorld, 1004184 Race Exhaust
and 1004187 Ypipe, must be used.
2. Exhaust must mate to factory OBD2 E36 exhaust manifolds, part
number 11 62 1 744 250 and 251.
3. Air injection ports may be welded/filled and ground.
4. Unmodified stock exhaust may be retained if the spec exhaust is
not installed.
13. Drivetrain
1. Either the 5 or 6-speed E46 330 manual transmission may be used.
2. Flywheel and clutch assembly may be replaced provided they use
the stock hydraulic actuating mechanism. Clutch must be a single
disc type.
3. Shifter mechanism may be replaced or modified.
4. Motor and transmission mounts may be replaced provided they are
no more than 10mm shorter than stock.
5. Upgraded differential is permitted using a 3.46 gear ratio, factory
housing, flanges, and mounting points. The internal parts of the
differential are otherwise unrestricted, including the use of limited
slip units.
6. Finned and/or larger capacity differential cover may be used.
7. Differential bushings may be replaced.
14. Suspension
1. Shocks must be MCS non-remote reservoir single-adjustable
(1WNR). OE bump stops in stock configuration may be used.
2. Front springs must be Hyperco 6” 2.25” ID 750# part number
186A0750.
3. Rear springs must be Hyperco 5” 2.25” ID 850# part number
185A0850.
4. SSwaybars may be replaced provided they use stock mounting
locations and either individual hole or sliding collar adjustment.
Remote adjustable or pivoting blade bars are not permitted.
GCR - 226
5. Swaybar links may be replaced.
6. Adjustable camber/caster plates are permitted. The three front
strut mounting holes and center hole may be notched/trimmed to
provide clearance for fitment or achieving full range of adjustment.
7. Any OE-spec E46 non-M3 front control arm may be used.
8. Front control arm bushings and housings may be replaced with a
non-spherical bearing.
9. Rear upper shock mounts may be replaced.
10.Rear trailing arm bushings may be replaced with a non-spherical
bearing.
11.Height adjustable rear spring adjusters may be added.
12.Rear lower control arms may be replaced.
13. Rear lower control arm bushing may be replaced with BMW part
number 33 32 6 775 551.
14. Headlights may be replaced with any complete, commercially available, functional headlight assemblies. Ballast may be removed from
Xenon/HID lights. Bulb assemblies may be replaced.
15. Tires and Wheels
1. Wheels may be replaced, 17” diameter and maximum width 9”.
2. Wheels and tires must fit within the bodywork and fenders.
3. Minimum wheel weight is 16.2 pounds.
4. Wheel studs and lug nuts may be added.
5. Wheel spacers may be used.
6. Toyo RR 255/40-17 is the required tire.
7. Toyo RA1 235/40-17 may be used instead of the RR.
16. Brakes
1. Brake pads may be replaced.
2. Brake rotors may be replaced provided they are one piece steel.
3. Dust shields may be removed or replaced.
4. Flex lines may be replaced.
5. Brake caliper guide bushings may be replaced.
6. Parking brake may be removed.
7. Ducting to the brakes is permitted. Two openings in the front
valance to allow the passage of up to a three (3) inch diameter
duct leading to each front brake are permitted for this purpose.
17. Body and Chassis
1. Bumpers must be USDM OEM or non-M3 fitment replica of USDM
M3.
2. Factory rear trunk lid spoiler must be removed if installed.
3. Engine under-tray panels may be removed.
4. Fenders may be rolled inside for clearance but can not be visibly or
measurably altered on the outside profile or width.
5. Non-metallic inner fender liners may be removed.
GCR - 227
General
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
6. Screening of 1/4” minimum mesh may be added over all openings
in the front of the vehicle, contained entirely with the bodywork of
the vehicle.
7. Side moldings, side reflectors, etc may be removed and attachment
holes may be filled.
8. Hood and trunk pins, clips, or positive action external latches may
be added. If alternate parts are used the stock releases and components may be removed.
9. Chassis reinforcements for the rear subframe, rear trailing arm
pocket, front subframe, front strut towers, and swaybar mounts
may be added.
10.Rear subframe bushings may be replaced.
11. Transmission cross member support may be replaced.
12. Both driver and passenger front side windows may be removed.
Side windows to the rear of the B-pillar may be permanently fixed
in position.
13.Secondary fuel pump to minimize fuel starvation may be installed.
The secondary fuel pump must be located in the fuel tank and have
no other function. The M3 fuel pump baffle 16 11 2 229 656 may
also be used.
14. Fuel filler neck may be modified, relocated, or replaced provided the
fuel tank and capacity are unchanged.
15.Battery may be replaced and/or relocated provided the positive
terminal is properly insulated.
16. Ballast is permitted and must be securely mounted within the
passenger compartment or trunk. Ballast segments must not
exceed 50 lbs.
18. Interior
1. All non-essential hardware and material in the interior and trunk
may be removed. This includes carpeting, headliner, sound and
thermal insulation, lighting, HVAC components, audio systems,
passenger and rear seats, seat belts, trim pieces, tools, spare
wheel/tire, storage compartments. Unibody structure may not be
modified or removed unless otherwise specified.
2. Stock dash must be retained. The portion of the dash extending
below the middle trim strip may be modified or removed. The
factory dash support may be removed.
3. Steering wheel may be replaced and a quick release added.
4. Steering column may be mounted to the roll cage front cross bar if
equipped.
5. Driver side dead pedal/foot rest and pedal covers may be added.
6. The stock instrument cluster may be removed and replaced with
a panel suitable for mounting gauges. Areas directly behind the
gauge panel may be modified/trimmed to accommodate gauge
mounting.
7. Driver and passenger outside mirrors may be removed, modified, or
replaced provided that side mirror functionality is retained. Interior
rear view mirror may be replaced.
GCR - 228
8. Inner door panels may be removed. If front door retains door glass
and window regulators, interior door panels must be replaced with
aluminum sheeting of 0.060-inch or thicker or comparable shatterproof material, securely attached to the door.
9. Rear bulkhead panel on non-folding rear seat cars may be cut out.
10.Aesthetic panels or covers may be added provided they are not
welded or structurally mounted.
11. Interior door steel panels may be removed along with window regulators and lock mechanisms.
12. Driver’s door must be capable of being opened from both inside and
outside the car.
13.Rear side glass (coupe) or door glass (sedan) may be replaced
with lexan provided it retains factory appearance. Ducts for driver
comfort may also be utilized in these locations.
14.Turn signal, headlight, and windshield wiper stalks may be modified, removed, or replaced with alternate switches located elsewhere in the driver compartment.
15. Accessories including but not limited to gauges, dash systems, cool
suits, helmet blowers, data acquisitions systems, video capture
systems, two-way radios, and associated equipment are permitted,
provided that such accessories are properly secured.
GCR - 229
General
Appendix N. SpecE46 Rules
Appendix O. Small Regional Event Steward Model
APPENDIX O. SMALL REGIONAL EVENT STEWARD MODEL
This section is intended to provide Regions with an alternate Steward
model for small Regional and Drivers’ School events. Its intent is to
reduce the required number of Race Officials and streamline some of the
processes and procedures required at larger events.
Unless specifically listed below all other sections of the GCR shall apply.
1. EVENTS
This model may be used to conduct small Regional and Drivers’ School
events, about 70 entries or less. The Region may request its use with the
approval of the Executive Steward. The Executive Steward will approve
the number of entries allowed at the event.
2. SUPPLEMENTAL REGULATIONS
The Chief Steward with the approval of the host Region’s representative
may make changes to the event Supplemental Regulations prior to and
during the event for reasons of errors, omissions, safety or forces beyond
their control.
3. REQUIRED STEWARDS
A. The minimum stewards required for the event are the Chief Steward
andand the Assistant Chief Steward Clerk of the Course (COC).
The duties of the Chief Steward shall include the role traditionally assigned to the Assistant Chief Steward – Safety. The Chief
Steward and the COC may delegate some of their authorities to
other Stewards or Race Officials in attendance.
B. The Executive Steward shall appoint will approve the Chief Steward
and the COC at the time the Small Event Request is made.
C. If a protest or RFA is not finalized at the event, the Executive
Steward shall appoint a Stewards of the Meeting (SOM) court to
hear and determine the outcome of the protest or RFA.
4. STEWARDS
A. Powers of the Chief Steward
1. Unless specifically altered in this section, the Chief Steward
prior to and during the event, shall have all of the powers and
responsibilities assigned to the Stewards of the Meeting in
GCR Section 5.12.1, as well as Section 7, and Section 8.
2. In certain circumstances it may be necessary to defer a protest
or RFA of an incident to the SOM. The Chief Steward shall
inform all parties involved that the action will be processed
by the SOM. The Chief Steward or his designee shall collect
and forward all related information regarding the actions to the
SOM. The SOM will make every effort possible to ensure the
action will be processed in a timely manner.
3. The Chief Steward shall have all of the powers and responsibilities assigned to the Chief Steward in GCR Section 5.12.3,
as well as Section 7, and Section 8.
4. The Chief Steward shall have all of the responsibilities assigned
to the Assistant Chief Steward – Safety in GCR Section 5.12.4.
The Chief Steward may delegate some of these responsibilities
to other Stewards or Race Officials.
GCR - 230
B. Assistant Chief Steward – Clerk of the Course (COC)
1. The COC is the Lead Operations Steward and primarily controls
all on-track sessions and any other activities where circuit
safety and functionality may be involved or impaired. These
duties are performed in accordance with the GCR, supplemental regulations and schedule for the event.
2. The COC works under the authority of the Chief Steward. The
COC, with the approval of the Chief Steward, may delegate
responsibilities to other Stewards and Race Officials at any
time as needed.
GCR - 231
General
Appendix O. Small Regional Event Steward Model
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
9.1.1.FORMULA CATEGORY
The Formula Category is intended to provide the membership and interested manufacturers with the opportunity to compete in purpose built,
highly modified open wheel single seat cars. The Club may alter or adjust
specifications and require, permit, or restrict certain specific components
to equate competitive potential.
In an effort to control shock/damper technology and cost to a level reasonable for Club Racing, any fluid dampers are allowed with the following
restrictions:
1. Maximum of 4 dampers/shock absorbers per vehicle.
2. Dampers must be independent from each other with no interconnectivity. However, data acquisition is permissible, as long as it serves no
other purpose.
3. Dampers must be manually adjustable only.
4. Mechatronic valves, G valves, hybrid inerters, inerters and mass
dampers are prohibited.
5. Electro/Magnetic shock fluid is prohibited.
A.
FORMULA ATLANTIC PREPARATION RULES
Formula Atlantic is a restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions.
The SCCA shall publish Formula Atlantic Category Specifications
containing the basic officially recognized specifications for each car
eligible to compete in the Category during the calendar year. These classifications are listed in Table 2.
1.General
a. A single seat, four open wheeled racing car with firewall, floor, and
safety equipment conforming to GCR Section 9. Homologation
may be required. Refer to section 9.2.2. for details.
b. Cars shall be equipped with on-board self starter controlled by the
driver in a normal driving position.
c. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel except for a removable
steering wheel and/or cockpit padding.
d. Cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated by a
single control. In case of failure or leak at any point in the system,
effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two wheels.
e. Superchargers or turbochargers are not permitted.
f. Power shall not be applied to more than two (2) wheels.
g.Bodywork:
1. No part of the bodywork and aerodynamic devices shall exceed
in height a horizontal plane 90cm (35.4”) above the ground.
The safety roll bar/roll cage and the engine air box are not
included in this height restriction. Measurements are to be
GCR - 233
FCS
These specifications are part of the SCCA General Competition Rules
(GCR) and all automobiles shall conform with GCR Section 9.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
made as raced with driver on-board.
2. The overall maximum width of the bodywork behind the front
wheels shall not exceed 130cm (51.18 inches). The maximum
width of any aerodynamic device situated behind the rear
wheels, including the rear wing, shall not exceed 110cm
(43.307 inches).
3.The bodywork ahead of the front wheels may be extended to
an overall maximum width of 150cm (59.055 inches) provided
it does not extend beyond the outside of the front tires. Flexible or movable aerodynamic skirts are prohibited. No part of
the body or suspended part of the car shall extend more than
1cm (0.394 inches) below the horizontal plane forming the
bottom of the tub or chassis floor (both static or in motion).
4. Any part of the bodywork ahead of the front wheels exceeding
an overall width of 110cm (43.307 inches) shall not extend
above the height of the front wheel rims.
5. Any specific part of the car which has an aerodynamic influence on the stability of the vehicle shall be mounted on the
entirely sprung part of the car and shall be firmly fixed while
the car is in motion. Aerodynamic devices, including wings and
end plates, shall not extend to the rear more than one meter
(39.4 inches) from the centerline of the rear wheel hubs.
6. Neither the safety roll bar nor any of the units associated with
the functioning of the engine or transmission shall have an
aerodynamic effect by creating a vertical thrust.
7. The leading edge of an airfoil fixed to the front of the car shall
not be sharp. Minimum radius ‑‑ 0.5cm (0.2 inches).
8. Cars registered with SCCA January 1, 1976, and after, shall
be fitted with deformable structures per FIA regulations for
Formula II as follows: Deformable Structure: The entire fuel
tank area of the car licked by the airstream shall incorporate a
crushable structure conforming to the following specifications.
The term “licked by the airstream” is considered to define
the complete external area of the body/monocoque construction irrespective of such added items as water radiators, inlet
ducts, windscreens, etc.
A. The crushable structure shall be a sandwich construction based on a fire‑resistant core of minimum crushing
strength of twenty-five (25) lbs./ square inch. Water
pipes are permitted to pass through this core. The sandwich construction shall include two (2) sheets of 1.5mm
(.060”) thickness, one of which shall be aluminum sheet
having a tensile strength of fourteen (14) tons/ square inch
and a minimum elongation of five (5) percent.
B. The use of a magnesium sheet will be authorized only if its
thickness exceeds 3mm (.120”).
C. The minimum thickness of the sandwich construction
shall be 10mm (.3937”). The fore and aft fuel tank area,
however, shall provide for a crushable structure of at least
100mm (3.937”) thickness at such crushable structure’s
thickest point. The position of this widest point to be at
the manufacturer’s discretion over a length of at least
35cm (13.78”) after which it may be gradually reduced to
10mm (.3937”).
GCR - 234
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
10.All cars with venturi section side pods (e.g. Ralt RT‑4) shall
comply to the following rule. Aerodynamic devices shall
comply with the rules relating to bodywork. Any part having
an aerodynamic influence and/or any part of the bodywork and
attachments to the bodywork shall be rigidly secured to the
entirely sprung part of the car (chassis/monocoque), shall have
no degree of freedom in relation to the entirely sprung part
of the car (chassis/monocoque), and shall remain immobile in
relation to the chassis/monocoque at all times. At any transverse section through the car from the rear edge of the front
wheels to the forward edge of the rear wheels, no part of the
car except the basic chassis/ monocoque structure shall be
below a horizontal line situated 1cm (0.4”) above the bottom
of the chassis/ monocoque. This measurement will be taken
without regard to bolt heads, rivets, etc.
Movable or hinged skirts are prohibited. Flexible sidepod skirts
are allowed on cars which have their primary load bearing
structure (tub) constructed of ferrous or non-ferrous alloys. No
part of the bodywork or suspended part of the car between
the front and rear wheels shall extend more than one (l) cm
(.3937”) below the horizontal panel forming the bottom of the
chassis. Within the above restrictions, only wearable material
(fiberglass, Kevlar, carbon fiber, high density polypropylene,
Telflon, Lexan, or wood) may be attached to the side panels as
a rubbing strip. Ceramics, plexiglass, plastic, and other materials which shatter or break‑up causing hazardous track condition are prohibited.
The intention of this Section (9.1.1.A.1.g.10.) is to control
ground effects on all cars by prohibiting “sealing” or bridging
the gap between the bodywork and the road surface, and to
do so in a uniform and consistent manner. Any means adopted
to circumvent this intention shall automatically be regarded as
a breach of these regulations.
h. Exhaust outlets shall be positioned not more than twenty-four (24)
inches above the ground and shall not extend more than six (6)
inches beyond the overall length of the car. In no case can the
exhaust terminate more than 45.4” behind the centerline of the
rear axle.
2.Engines
GCR - 235
FCS
9. The minimum wheel diameter is thirteen (13) inches. Ex-FSV
cars are permitted front wheel width: minimum six (6) inches,
maximum eight (8) inches; rear wheel width: minimum eight
(8) inches, maximum ten (10) inches. All other cars front
wheel width: ten (10) inches; rear wheel width: minimum fourteen (14) inches, maximum fifteen (15) inches.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
a. Engines shall be derived from automobiles and may be prepared for
competition in accordance with SCCA GT preparation rules, except
as specified in the Table below. OEM blocks and heads must be
used except when noted in the FA Engine Tables.
Note: If intake restrictors are specified, the restrictors shall be
round orifices (unless otherwise specified) and located within four
(4) inches of the throttle butterfly. Restrictors shall be a minimum
0.060” thick and of the specified diameter. SIR location is unrestricted so long as all SIR criteria are met.
b. The following modifications are permitted.
1.Any carburetor(s), fuel injection, or intake manifold(s), are
permitted. Fuel injected engines shall use the specified intake
restriction. Where Weber or Weber‑type carburetors are specified and used, they shall retain their standard configuration of
fuel distribution. This is to prohibit annular discharge carburetors.
2. The use of any exhaust manifold(s).
3. The use of any oil sump.
4. The use of any oil pump(s).
5. The use of a dry sump lubrication system.
6. The bore, crankshaft, stroke, and flywheel are unrestricted,
providing the appropriate specified displacement limit is not
exceeded, unless restricted in the engine table above.
7. Main bearing caps may be reinforced or substituted.
8. The make and location of the ignition coil and condenser may
be changed.
9. Any distributor and/or transistor ignition may be used provided
it’s installation does not require any modification of the engine.
10.Any make or type of spark plug may be used.
11.The use of any starter is permitted provided it can be fitted
without any modification to the engine.
12.Substitution of the clutch and flywheel is allowed provided
there is no increase in clutch diameter. The use of dowel pins
is permitted.
13.Any pistons and piston pins may be used.
14.Any camshaft(s) may be used.
15.Cam followers may be altered or substituted.
16. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape by tooling
the standard or optional components of the engine, provided
it is always possible to identify them positively as such. It is
not permitted to add any material to the components unless
specifically authorized.
17. The use of any alternate engine components considered replacement parts such as seals, bearings, valve guides, nuts, bolts,
studs, washers, and gaskets is allowed, provided they are of
the same type and dimension. Bushings may be added where
none are fitted as standard, provided they are concentric and
that the centerline of the bushed part is not changed. Water
and oil passages may be restricted or plugged. The substituGCR - 236
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
tion of valve springs, valve spring retainers, and keepers is
permitted. Any pushrods may be used.
19.The compression ratio may be increased by machining, using
any head gasket(s), or eliminating of head gasket(s), unless
otherwise noted in the FA Engine Table at http://www.scca.
com/clubracing/content.cfm?cid=44472.
20.The installation of any engine vent or breather is permitted.
21.Generator or alternator is unrestricted.
22.The use of any rocker arms or rocker arm supports.
23.Use of any connecting rod of the same basic material.
24.Valves are unrestricted in both size and material, provided the
valve centerline is not altered.
25.Exhaust emission control air pumps, and associated lines and
nozzles cannot be modified in any way except they may be
completely removed. When these nozzles are removed from a
cylinder head, the holes shall be completely plugged.
26.The use of any fuel pump(s) is permitted.
27.Valve or cam covers may be substituted.
28.Any external surface of the engine may be plated, painted, or
anodized.
29. Engines produced with a cam carrier as a separate and distinct
piece from the cylinder head or engine block may replace that
cam carrier with a cam carrier of other manufacture, provided
the replacement cam carrier affords no additional function
other than the original cam carrier and provided the type and
number of camshaft bearings remains the same.
30.The replacement of any jack shaft or idler shaft with another
of the same basic material as the standard shaft is permitted,
provided it performs no additional function over the original
shaft.
c. Honda Civic (K20Z3) Base Engine
a.General
1. No modifications to this engine are allowed except where
specifically authorized within these rules. This includes,
but is not limited to, all fuel injection and engine management components, electrical, cooling and lubrication
systems. All systems are subject to test procedures and
must conform to OEM specifications as stated in the
Honda Civic factory service manual, Honda PN 61SNA05
and all superseding years, or as specified in these rules.
The factory service manual or its equivalent is required to
be in the possession of each entrant. The manual may be
the form of printed material, microfiche, CDs, DVDs and/
or Internet access to manufacturer sponsored web-based
databases.
2.Permitted engine maintenance includes the replacement, but not modification, of external engine and engine
GCR - 237
FCS
18.Pulleys, including camshaft drive pulleys, may be altered or
replaced with others of unrestricted origin. The use of any
crankshaft vibration dampener is permitted.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
systems parts.
3. All rubber fluid lines may be replaced with braided metalcovered (Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps maybe installed
on the rubber coolant lines.
4. No balancing, lightening, polishing or other modification of
moving parts of the engine is permitted.
5. Only stock Honda manufactured gaskets and seals as
specified in the Honda Civic factory service manual are
permitted (Including, but not limited to, head gasket,
intake runner gaskets and O-rings, restrictor plate gasket,
and intake and exhaust gaskets).
6. For all Honda part numbers in these specifications, superseding part numbers are considered equivalent.
b.Block
1. The only permitted cylinder block is Honda PN: 11000RRB-810
2. Honing of cylinders is permitted to a maximum diameter of
86.070 mm (3.3886 inches). Fitting of cylinder sleeves is
prohibited. Re-boring to over size is prohibited.
3. Block must use stock main bearing caps, girdle and hardware as supplied.
4. Minimum deck height from crank centerline: 211.95 mm
(8.3445 inches).
c.Crankshaft
1. The stock Honda Civic crankshaft, Honda PN: 13310-PRBA00, must be used with no modifications allowed.
2. Minimum weight: 37.5 lbs. No pilot bearing or bushing.
3. Maximum stroke at piston: 86.1 mm (3.390 inches)
4. Main and rod bearings must not be modified in any way.
OEM bearings must be used from within the standard range
as allowed in the Honda Civic factory service manual.
5. The crank pulsar must not be altered in any way.
6. The crank pulley/balancer must not be altered or modified
in any way.
a. Minimum weight: 3.90 lbs.
b. Honda PN: 13810-RRB-A01.
d. Connecting Rods
1. Stock Honda Civic connecting rod must be used PN:
13320-PRB-A01.
2. Minimum connecting rod weight with cap and bolts: 580.0
grams (20.45 ounces).
3. Maximum connecting rod length center to center: 138.95
mm (5.470 inches).
e.Pistons
1. Honda Civic OEM standard size pistons, PN: 13010/13020GCR - 238
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
PRB-A01, must be used.
2. The use of oversize pistons is not permitted.
a. Maximum standard piston diameter, measured at a
point 11mm from the bottom of the skirt: 85.990 mm
(3.3854 inches).
b. Centerline of wrist pin to crown maximum: 32.7 mm
(1.287 inches).
c. Maximum overall height from skirt to crown edge:
52.1 mm (2.051 inches).
d. Minimum weight: 320 grams (11.287 ounces).
e. Minimum weight of piston pin: 87 grams (3.07
ounces).
f. Combined minimum weight of piston, piston pin and
connecting rod: 973 grams (34.32 ounces).
4. Piston rings must be as used in the K20Z3 engine. The
only modification allowed is ring end gap width. Two
compression rings and one 3 piece oil control ring must be
used.
a. The standard ring pack PN 13011-PRA-E02.
b. No modification of the piston is permitted for the
installation of rings.
c. Ring groove widths.
Top ring groove: 1.240mm (0.0488 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Middle groove: 1.235mm (0.0486 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Oil ring groove: 2.015mm (0.0793) +/- 0.01mm.
f. Cylinder Head
1. The only permitted heads are Honda PN: 12100-RBC-000.
2. The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced
provided the maximum compression ratio is not exceeded
or to a service limit of 0.2mm (0.008 inches) based on a
height of 140mm (5.511 inches).
3. The cylinder head must not be ported, polished or
machined. The original casting must not be modified in
any way or polished.
4. Head gasket to be stock Honda Civic PN: 12251-RBC-004.
Minimum compressed thickness of 0.70 mm +/- 0.05mm.
g.Camshaft
1. The only permitted camshafts are PN: 14110-RRB-A00
(Intake) & 14120-PRB-A01 (Exhaust); must not be modified.
2. The Cam, TDC, & Crankshaft pulse plates must be as
supplied, Honda PN 14113-PNA-003 (Cam), 14114-PNA003 (TDC) & 13622-RAA-A01 (Crankshaft).
3. The camshaft and crankshaft sprockets must be as
GCR - 239
FCS
3. Piston dimensions and weights:
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
supplied, Honda PN: 14310-RBC-003 (Intake VTC Actuator Sprocket), 14210-PRB-A00 (Exhaust Camshaft
Sprocket) and 13620-RAA-A02 (Crankshaft Sprocket).
Cam timing must not be altered; the timing chain must be
installed as specified in the Honda Civic factory service
manual. The timing chain cover and crankshaft pulley may
not be altered. With the engine at TDC (No. 1 cylinder),
the TDC marks on the camshaft sprocket must line up
with the each other horizontally and the indicator on the
crankshaft sprocket or crank pulley should line up with the
arrow on the cylinder block or timing chain case (respectively).
a. Timing chain Honda PN: 14401-PNA-004.
b. Cam Chain Case PN: 11410-RRA-A00
c. Pulley comp, crankshaft, PN: 13810-RRB-A01
d. Cam timing at 1mm after opening to 1mm before
closing on center / VTEC lobes (+/- 2.0 degrees):
i.Exhaust:
1. Open: 139 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 258.5 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 101.5 degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication)
3. Closing: 377 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 11 degrees ATDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication)
ii.Intake
1. Open: 15.5 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 135.5 degrees ATDC
3. Closing: 253 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 107
degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication)
4. Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be
checked using the official procedure published
by the SCCA.
5. Cam lobe heights:
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 32.772 mm
b. Exhaust MID: 34.768 mm
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 32.661 mm
d. Intake PRI (front): 32.791 mm
e. Intake MID: 35.534 mm
f. Intake SEC (rear): 32.678 mm
6. Maximum valve lift measured at the retainer:
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 6.90.
b. Exhaust MID: 10.70
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 7.10
GCR - 240
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
d. Intake PRI (front): 7.20.
e. Intake MID: 12.00.
f. Intake SEC (rear): 7.00
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 94 degrees
b. Exhaust MID: 116.5 degrees
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 96.5 degrees
d. Intake PRI (front): 90.5 degrees
e. Intake MID: 118.5 degrees
f. Intake SEC (rear): 92.5 degrees
8. Valve rockers must not be modified in any way.
a. Honda PN: 14620-PNA-040 Arm Assy,
rocker.
9. The VTEC system must be stock. The VTEC
activation valve must be stock. The HPD ECU
will activate the VTEC at 4000 RPM. Honda
PN: 15810-PRB-A03.
10. The timing chain tensioner may be replaced
with an aftermarket alternative.
h.Valves
1. OEM valves must be as used in the Civic.
2.Dimensions
a. Inlet PN: 14711-PRB-A01, Exhaust PN: 14721-PRBA00
b. Maximum diameter:
i.
Inlet: 35.15mm
ii. Exhaust: 30.15mm
c. Maximum overall length:
i.
Inlet: 109.10mm
ii. Exhaust: 109.00mm
d. Minimum stem diameter:
i.
Inlet: 5.445mm
ii. Exhaust: 5.420mm
3. Valve location or angle must not be moved.
4. Reshaping of the valves is strictly prohibited.
5. Valve guides may be replaced provided the position of
the valve is not changed and the replacement guides are
Honda OEM parts.
a. Inlet PN: 12204-PNA-305 (over size)
b. Exhaust PN: 12205-PNA-305 (over size).
GCR - 241
FCS
7. Valve Duration above 1mm measured at the
retainer (+/- 2 degrees):
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
6. It is permitted to replace or re-cut valve seats provided the
valve seat angles are stock Honda three angle cut per the
Honda Civic factory service manual.
7. Valve stem installed height must be per the Honda Civic
factory service manual:
a. Intake maximum: 44.7mm.
b. Exhaust maximum: 44.8mm.
8. Valve stem seals must be Honda OEM parts.
a. Honda PN: Intake: 12210-PZ1-004 seal A.
b. Honda PN: Exhaust: 12211-PZ1-004 seal B.
i. Valve Springs
1. Valve springs are Honda OEM as specified in the Honda
Civic factory service manual.
a. Intake PN: 14761-PRB-A02, free length: 49.77mm.
b. Exhaust PN: 14762-PRB-A02, free length:
50.39mm.
2. Valve spring shims are not permitted.
j.
Compression Ratio
1. The maximum compression ratio is 11.0:1 utilizing Honda
Civic factory service manual limits. Carbon may be
removed.
k. Intake Manifold and Fuel System
1. The intake manifold and throttle body assembly must be
used as delivered from HPD.
2. Intake manifold may be machined for the purposes of port
matching only. Any work done to the intake manifold
must not reach beyond 1.00” into the ports.
3. The fuel rail and fuel injectors must be stock Honda Civic
OEM parts (PN 16450-RBB-003).
l.
Fuel Pump
1. The fuel pump is unrestricted.
m. Exhaust Manifold
1. The Lambda sensor placement must be within 24 – 48
inches from the head mating surface.
2. Exhaust coatings and wraps and heat shields may be used
to control engine bay temperatures and protect other
components.
n. Lubrication System
1. The oil sump and pump must be as supplied by HPD. No
modifications are permitted.
2. Hose routing and filter system are unrestricted.
o. Cooling System
1. Water pump must be stock Honda Civic parts. No modifications are permitted.
GCR - 242
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
Honda PN: 19200-RBC-013 Pump, Water.
3. Drive belt manufacture is unrestricted.
4. Radiator is unrestricted.
p. Electrical Equipment
1. The ECU and engine electrical harness must be as supplied
by HPD. No modifications are permitted.
2. The ECU will be a sealed unit supplied by HPD. The ECU
maps and inputs must not be modified The ECU is capable
of being swapped in the case of a protest.
3. Ignition coils must be stock Honda Civic, PN: 30520-RRA007. No modifications are permitted.
4. All sensors related to engine operating parameters and/
or supplied by HPD must be used. These sensors, their
locations and mounts, and their wiring harness leads may
not be altered or “piggy backed”. Any sensors required
for analog type gauges must be in addition to the HPD
supplied sensors.
5. The alternator and all drive system pulleys may be replaced
except that the stock crankshaft pulley must be used. The
alternator must not be disabled and must be accessible to
SCCA officials.
q. Miscellaneous
1. All emission control devices must be removed and blocked
off by the blanking hardware provided by HPD, except the
VTEC activation solenoids. The VTC & VTEC activation
solenoids must be retained and functioning in the original
conditions.
2. Air filter is unrestricted.
3. The use of unleaded premium “pump” gas with a minimum
of 91 RON is required. Leaded race fuel is not allowed and
can cause serious damage to the engine.
4. The use of the following non-standard replacement parts
is permitted provided their use does not result in any unauthorized modification of any other component.
a. Fasteners – nuts, bolts, screws, washers, studs, etc.
Head bolts, rod bolts, flywheel bolts, and crank pulley
bolt may be substituted by sufficiently designed,
direct, of the shelf replacements.
b. Gaskets and seals, except those specified in the above
rules.
c. Spark plugs.
d. Mechanical tachometer and analog gauges.
d. Honda Civic (K20Z3) Uprated Engine
a.General
GCR - 243
FCS
2. Thermostat is unrestricted provided the housing is not
modified. The thermostat bypass may be plugged using
the HPD Mechanical Water Pump Dress Kit PN: 19220F25S-A200.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
1. No modifications to this engine are allowed except where
specifically authorized within these rules. This includes,
but is not limited to, all fuel injection and engine management components, electrical, cooling and lubrication
systems. All systems are subject to test procedures and
must conform to OEM specifications as stated in the
Honda Civic factory service manual, Honda PN 61SNA05
and all superseding years, or as specified in these rules.
The factory service manual or its equivalent is required to
be in the possession of each entrant. The manual may be
the form of printed material, microfiche, CDs, DVDs and/
or Internet access to manufacturer sponsored web-based
databases.
2.Permitted engine maintenance includes the replacement, but not modification, of external engine and engine
systems parts.
3. All rubber fluid lines may be replaced with braided metal
covered (Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps maybe installed
on the rubber coolant lines.
4. No balancing, lightening, polishing or other modification of
moving parts of the engine is permitted.
5. Only stock Honda manufactured gaskets and seals as
specified in the Honda Civic factory service manual are
permitted (Including, but not limited to, head gasket,
intake runner gaskets and O-rings, restrictor plate gasket,
and intake and exhaust gaskets).
6. For all Honda part numbers in these specifications, superseding part numbers are considered equivalent.
b.Block
1. The only permitted cylinder block is Honda PN: 11000RRB-810
2. Honing of cylinders is permitted to a maximum diameter of
86.070 mm (3.3886 inches). Fitting of cylinder sleeves is
prohibited. Re-boring to over size is prohibited.
3. Block must use stock main bearing caps, girdle and hardware as supplied.
4. Minimum deck height from crank centerline: 211.95 mm
(8.3445 inches).
c.Crankshaft
1. The stock Honda Civic crankshaft, Honda PN: 13310PRBA00, must be used with no modifications allowed.
2. Minimum weight: 37.5 lbs. No pilot bearing or bushing.
3. Maximum stroke at piston: 86.1 mm (3.390 inches)
4. Main and rod bearings must not be modified in any way.
OEM bearings must be used from within the standard range
as allowed in the Honda Civic factory service manual.
5. The crank pulsar must not be altered in any way.
6. The crank pulley/balancer must not be altered or modified
in any way.
GCR - 244
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
a. Minimum weight: 3.90 lbs.
b. Honda PN: 13810-RRB-A01.
d. Connecting Rods
2. Minimum connecting rod weight with cap and bolts: 580.0
grams (20.45 ounces).
3. Maximum connecting rod length center to center: 138.95
mm (5.470 inches).
e. Pistons
1. Honda Civic OEM standard size pistons, PN: 13010/13020PRB-A01, must be used.
2. The use of oversize pistons is not permitted.
3. Piston dimensions and weights:
a. Maximum standard piston diameter, measured at a
point 11mm from the bottom of the skirt: 85.990 mm
(3.3854 inches).
b. Centerline of wrist pin to crown maximum: 32.7 mm
(1.287 inches).
c. Maximum overall height from skirt to crown edge:
52.1 mm (2.051 inches).
d. Minimum weight: 320 grams (11.287 ounces).
e. Minimum weight of piston pin: 87 grams (3.07
ounces).
f. Combined minimum weight of piston, piston pin and
connecting rod: 973 grams (34.32 ounces).
4. Piston rings must be as used in the K20Z3 engine. The
only modification allowed is ring end gap width. Two
compression rings and one 3 piece oil control ring must be
used.
a. The standard ring pack PN 13011-PRA-E02.
b. No modification of the piston is permitted for the installation of rings.
c. Ring groove widths.
Top ring groove: 1.240mm (0.0488 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Middle groove: 1.235mm (0.0486 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Oil ring groove: 2.015mm (0.0793) +/- 0.01mm.
f. Cylinder Head
1. The only permitted heads are Honda PN: 12100-RBC-000.
2. The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced
provided the maximum compression ratio is not exceeded
or to a service limit of 0.2mm (0.008 inches) based on a
height of 140mm (5.511 inches).
3. The cylinder head must not be ported, polished or
GCR - 245
FCS
1. Stock Honda Civic connecting rod must be used PN:
13320-PRB-A01.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
machined. The original casting must not be modified in
any way or polished.
4. Head gasket to be stock Honda Civic PN: 12251-RBC-004.
Minimum compressed thickness of 0.70 mm +/- 0.05mm.
g.Camshaft
1. The only permitted camshafts are PN: 14110-RRB-A00
(Intake) & 14120-PRB-A01 (Exhaust); must not be modified.
2. The Cam, TDC, & Crankshaft pulse plates must be as
supplied, Honda PN 14113-PNA-003 (Cam), 14114-PNA003 (TDC) & 13622-RAA-A01 (Crankshaft).
3. The camshaft and crankshaft sprockets must be as
supplied, Honda PN: 14310-RBC-003 (Intake VTC Actuator
Sprocket), 14210-PRB-A00 (Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket)
and 13620-RAA-A02 (Crankshaft Sprocket). Cam timing
must not be altered; the timing chain must be installed
as specified in the Honda Civic factory service manual.
The timing chain cover and crankshaft pulley may not be
altered. With the engine at TDC (No. 1 cylinder), the TDC
marks on the camshaft sprocket must line up with the
each other horizontally and the indicator on the crankshaft
sprocket or crank pulley should line up with the arrow in
the cylinder block or timing chain case (respectively).
a. Timing chain Honda PN: 14401-PNA-004.
b. Cam Chain Case PN: 11410-RRA-A00
c. Pulley comp, crankshaft, PN: 13810-RRB-A01
d. Cam timing at 1mm after opening to 1mm before closing
on center / VTEC lobes (+/- 2.0 degrees):
i.Exhaust:
1. Open: 139 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 258.5 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or
101.5 degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree wheel
indication)
3. Closing: 377 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 11
degrees ATDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication)
ii.Intake
1. Open: 15.5 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 135.5 degrees ATDC
3. Closing: 253 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 107
degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication)
4. Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be
checked using the official procedure published by
the SCCA.
5. Cam lobe heights:
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 32.772 mm
GCR - 246
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
b. Exhaust MID: 34.768 mm
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 32.661 mm
d. Intake PRI (front): 32.791 mm
f. Intake SEC (rear): 32.678 mm
6. Maximum valve lift measured at the retainer:
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 6.90.
b. Exhaust MID: 10.70
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 7.10
d. Intake PRI (front): 7.20.
e. Intake MID: 12.00.
f. Intake SEC (rear): 7.00
7. Valve Duration above 1mm measured at the retainer
(+/- 2 degrees):
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 94 degrees
b. Exhaust MID: 116.5 degrees
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 96.5 degrees
d. Intake PRI (front): 90.5 degrees
e. Intake MID: 118.5 degrees
f. Intake SEC (rear): 92.5 degrees
8. Valve rockers must not be modified in any way.
a. Honda PN: 14620-PNA-040 Arm Assy, rocker.
9. The VTEC system must be stock. The VTEC activation valve must be stock. The HPD ECU will activate
the VTEC at 4000 RPM. Honda PN: 15810-PRB-A03.
10.The timing chain tensioner may be replaced with a
suitable aftermarket alternative.
h.Valves
1. OEM valves must be as used in the Civic.
2.Dimensions
a. Inlet PN: 14711-PRB-A01, Exhaust PN: 14721PRBA00
b. Maximum diameter:
i.
Inlet: 35.15mm
ii. Exhaust: 30.15mm
c. Maximum overall length:
i.
Inlet: 109.10mm
ii. Exhaust: 109.00mm
d. Minimum stem diameter:
GCR - 247
FCS
e. Intake MID: 35.534 mm
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
i.
Inlet: 5.445mm
ii. Exhaust: 5.420mm
3. Valve location or angle must not be moved.
4. Reshaping of the valves is strictly prohibited.
5. Valve guides may be replaced provided the position of
the valve is not changed and the replacement guides are
Honda OEM parts.
a. Inlet PN: 12204-PNA-305 (over size)
b. Exhaust PN: 12205-PNA-305 (over size).
6. It is permitted to replace or re-cut valve seats provided the
valve seat angles are stock Honda three angle cut per the
Honda Civic factory service manual.
7. Valve stem installed height must be per the Honda Civic
factory service manual:
a. Intake maximum: 44.7mm.
b. Exhaust maximum: 44.8mm.
8. Valve stem seals must be Honda OEM parts.
a. Honda PN: Intake: 12210-PZ1-004 seal A.
b. Honda PN: Exhaust: 12211-PZ1-004 seal B.
i.
Valve Springs
1. Valve springs are Honda OEM as specified in
the Honda Civic factory service manual.
a. Intake PN: 14761-PRB-A02, free length:
49.77mm.
b. Exhaust PN: 14762-PRB-A02, free length:
50.39mm.
2. Valve spring shims are not permitted.
j.
Compression Ratio
1. The maximum compression ratio is 11.0:1 utilizing Honda
Civic factory service manual limits. Carbon may be
removed.
k. Intake Manifold and Fuel System
1. The intake manifold and throttle body assembly must be
used as delivered from HPD.
2. The fuel rail and fuel injectors must be stock Honda Civic
OEM parts (PN 16450-RBB-003).
l.
Fuel Pump
1. The fuel pump is unrestricted.
m. Exhaust Manifold
1. The Lambda sensor placement must be within 24 – 48
inches from the head mating surface.
2. Exhaust coatings and wraps and heat shields may be used
to control engine bay temperatures and protect other
GCR - 248
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
components.
n. Lubrication System
1. The oil sump and pump must be as supplied by HPD. No
modifications are permitted.
o. Cooling System
1. Water pump and water pump pulley must be stock Honda
Civic parts. No modifications are permitted. Honda PN:
19200-RBC-013 Pump, Water.
2. Thermostat is unrestricted provided the housing is not
modified. The thermostat bypass may be plugged using
the HPD Mechanical Water Pump Dress Kit PN: 19220F25S-A200.
3. Drive belt manufacture is unrestricted.
4. Radiator is unrestricted.
p. Electrical Equipment
1. The ECU and engine electrical harness must be as supplied
by HPD. No modifications are permitted.
2. The ECU will be a sealed unit supplied by HPD. The ECU
maps and inputs must not be modified The ECU is capable
of being swapped in the case of a protest.
3. Ignition coils must be stock Honda Civic, PN: 30520-RRA007. No modifications are permitted.
4. All sensors related to engine operating parameters and/
or supplied by HPD must be used. These sensors, their
locations and mounts, and their wiring harness leads may
not be altered or “piggy backed”. Any sensors required
for analog type gauges must be in addition to the HPD
supplied sensors.
5. The alternator and all drive system pulleys may be replaced
except that the stock crankshaft pulley must be used. The
alternator must not be disabled and must be accessible to
SCCA officials.
q.Miscellaneous
1. All emission control devices must be removed and blocked
off by the blanking hardware provided by HPD, except the
VTEC activation solenoids. The VTC & VTEC activation
solenoids must be retained and functioning in the original
conditions.
2. Air filter is unrestricted.
3. The use of unleaded premium “pump” gas with a minimum
of 91 RON is required. Leaded race fuel is not allowed and
can cause serious damage to the engine.
4. The use of the following non-standard replacement parts
is permitted provided their use does not result in any unauthorized modification of any other component.
a. Fasteners – nuts, bolts, screws, washers, studs, etc.
Head bolts, rod bolts, flywheel bolts, and crank pulley
GCR - 249
FCS
2. Hose routing and filter system are unrestricted.
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
bolt may be substituted by sufficiently designed,
direct, of the shelf replacements.
b. Gaskets and seals, except those specified in the above
rules.
c. Spark plugs.
d. Mechanical tachometer and analog gauges.
e. Honda Civic (K20Z3) Engine for Swift 016 only
The following upgrades are allowed for the Honda Civic (K20Z3) as
listed in the rules above for use in the Swift 016 only
a. General
1. No modifications to this engine are allowed except where
specifically authorized within these rules. This includes,
but is not limited to, all fuel injection and engine management components, electrical, cooling and lubrication
systems. All systems are subject to test procedures and
must conform to OEM specifications as stated in the
Honda Civic factory service manual, Honda PN 61SNA05
and all superseding years, or as specified in these rules.
The factory service manual or its equivalent is required to
be in the possession of each entrant. The manual may be
the form of printed material, microfiche, CDs, DVDs and/
or Internet access to manufacturer sponsored web-based
databases.
2.Permitted engine maintenance includes the replacement, but not modification, of external engine and engine
systems parts.
3. All rubber fluid lines may be replaced with braided metalcovered (Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps maybe installed
on the rubber coolant lines.
4. No balancing, lightening, polishing or other modification of
moving parts of the engine is permitted.
5. Only stock Honda manufactured gaskets and seals as
specified in the Honda Civic factory service manual are
permitted (Including, but not limited to, head gasket,
intake runner gaskets and O-rings, restrictor plate gasket,
and intake and exhaust gaskets).
6. For all Honda part numbers in these specifications, superseding part numbers are considered equivalent.
b. Block
1. The only permitted cylinder block is Honda PN: 11000RRB-810
2. Honing of cylinders is permitted to a maximum diameter of
86.070 mm (3.3886 inches). Fitting of cylinder sleeves is
prohibited. Re-boring to over size is prohibited.
3. Block must use stock main bearing caps, girdle and hardware as supplied.
4. Minimum deck height from crank centerline: 211.95 mm
(8.3445 inches).
GCR - 250
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
c. Crankshaft
1. The stock Honda Civic crankshaft, Honda PN: 13310-PRBA00, must be used with no modifications allowed.
2. Minimum weight: 37.5 lbs. No pilot bearing or bushing.
4. Main and rod bearings must not be modified in any way.
OEM bearings must be used from within the standard range
as allowed in the Honda Civic factory service manual.
5. The crank pulsar must not be altered in any way.
6. The crank pulley/balancer must not be altered or modified
in any way.
a. Minimum weight: 3.90 lbs.
b. Honda PN: 13810-RRB-A01.
d. Connecting Rods
1. Stock Honda Civic connecting rod must be used PN:
13320-PRB-A01.
2. Minimum connecting rod weight with cap and bolts: 580.0
grams (20.45 ounces).
3. Maximum connecting rod length center to center: 138.95
mm (5.470 inches).
4. Piston pin bore should be honed out to a diameter of
22.000 +0.005~+0.009 mm
e. Pistons
1. HPD supplied pistons, PN: 13100-FC4Y-A000 (kit of 4
with rings, pins, and circlips), must be used.
2. The use of oversize pistons is not permitted.
3. Piston dimensions and weights:
a. Maximum standard piston diameter, measured at
approximately6mm from the bottom of the skirt:
85.925 mm (3.3829 inches).
b. Centerline of wrist pin to crown maximum: 38.5 +/0.15 mm (1.516 inches).
c. Maximum overall height from skirt to crown edge:
48.0 mm (1.89 inches).
d. Minimum weight: 325 grams (11.46 ounces).
e. Minimum weight of piston pin: 101 grams (3.56
ounces).
f. Combined minimum weight of piston, piston pin and
circlips: 448 grams (15.80 ounces).
4. Piston rings must be as supplied in the piston kit. The only
modification allowed is ring end gap width. Two compression rings and one 3 piece oil control ring must be used.
a. No modification of the piston is permitted for the
installation of rings.
GCR - 251
FCS
3. Maximum stroke at piston: 86.1 mm (3.390 inches)
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
b. Ring groove widths.
Top ring groove: 1.22mm (0.0480 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Middle groove: 1.22mm (0.0480 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Oil ring groove: 2.82mm (0.1110 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
f. Cylinder Head
1. The only permitted heads are Honda PN: 12100-RBC-000.
2. The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced
provided the maximum compression ratio is not exceeded,
or to a service limit of 0.2mm (0.008 inches) based on a
height of 140mm (5.511 inches).
3. The cylinder head may be ported, polished or machined for
port matching purposes only, on the intake and exhaust.
Any work done to the cylinder head must not reach beyond
1.00” into the ports.
4. Head gasket to be stock Honda Civic PN: 12251-RBC-004.
Minimum compressed thickness of 0.70 mm +/- 0.05mm.
5. Valve guides may be machined flush with the port, or
otherwise removed and replaced with a suitable alternative. Guide material is unrestricted.
g. Camshaft
1. The only permitted camshafts are PN: 14100-FC4Y-A000
(IN & EX set); must not be modified.
a. Timing chain Honda PN: 14401-PNA-004.
b. Cam Chain Case PN: 11410-RRA-A00
c. Pulley comp, crankshaft, PN: 13810-RRB-A01
d. Cam timing at 1mm after opening to 1mm before
closing on center / VTEC lobes (+/- 5.0 degrees):
i.Exhaust:
1. Open: 135 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 280.0 degrees ATDC (total cycle)
or 100.0 degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree
wheel indication)
3. Closing: 386 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 26
degrees ATDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication).
ii.Intake
1. Open: 2.0 degrees ATDC
2. Peak Lift: 135 degrees ATDC
3. Closing: 264 degrees ATDC (total cycle) or 96
degrees BTDC (partial cycle degree wheel indication).
2. Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be checked using
the official procedure published by the SCCA.
3. Cam lobe heights:
GCR - 252
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 33.40 mm
b. Exhaust MID: 35.30 mm
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 33.40 mm
e. Intake MID: 36.20 mm
f. Intake SEC (rear): 34.20 mm
4. Maximum valve lift measured at the retainer:
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 8.00 mm
b. Exhaust MID: 12.2 mm
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 8.00 mm
d. Intake PRI (front): 8.50 mm
e. Intake MID: 13.50 mm
f. Intake SEC (rear): 9.50 mm
5. Valve Duration above 1mm measured at the retainer (+/5 degrees):
a. Exhaust PRI (front): 202.0 degrees
b. Exhaust MID: 250.0 degrees
c. Exhaust SEC (rear): 202.0 degrees
d. Intake PRI (front): 202.0 degrees
e. Intake MID: 262.0 degrees
f. Intake SEC (rear): 210.0 degrees
6. Valve rockers must not be modified in any way. Honda PN:
14620-PNA-040 Arm Assy, rocker.
7. The VTEC system must be stock. The VTEC activation
valve must be stock. Honda PN: 15810-PRB-A03.
8. The timing chain tensioner may be replaced with a suitable
aftermarket alternative, but must remain as a ratcheting,
adjustable type (no solid tensioners allowed).
h. Valves
1. OEM valves must be as used in the Civic.
2.Dimensions
a. Inlet PN: 14711-PRB-A01, Exhaust PN: 14721-PRBA00
b. Maximum diameter:
i.
Inlet: 35.15mm
ii. Exhaust: 30.15mm
c. Maximum overall length:
i.
Inlet: 109.10mm
ii. Exhaust: 109.00mm
d. Minimum stem diameter:
GCR - 253
FCS
d. Intake PRI (front): 33.75 mm
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
i.
Inlet: 5.445mm
ii. Exhaust: 5.420mm
4. Valve location or angle must not be moved.
5 Reshaping of the valves is strictly prohibited.
Valve guides may be replaced provided the position of
the valve is not changed and the replacement guides are
Honda OEM parts or a suitable equivalent. Guide material
is unrestricted.
i. Valve Springs
1. HPD supplied valve springs, seats, and retainers (Titanium)
must be used PN: 14700-FC4Y-A000 (set of 16 springs,
seats, and retainers).
a. Valve spring seat load should be approximately 92
lbs.
2. Valve spring shims are not permitted.
j. Compression Ratio
1. The maximum compression ratio is 12.7:1 +/- 0.2.
k. intake Manifold and Fuel System
1. The intake manifold and throttle body assembly must be
used as delivered from HPD.
2. Intake manifold may be machined for the purposes of port
matching only. Any work done to the intake manifold
must not reach beyond 1.00” into the ports.
3. The fuel rail and fuel injectors must be stock Honda Civic
OEM parts (Fuel Injector PN: 16450-RBB-003, Fuel Rail
PN: 16220-RAA-A01).
l. Fuel Pump
1. Fuel pump is unrestricted.
2. Fuel pressure regulator is unrestricted.
a. Fuel pressure: 58psi +/- 3 PSI
3.Transmission
a. For all types of transmissions, no more than five forward speeds
and an operational reverse gear shall be used.
b. The use of an automatic gearbox is prohibited.
c. All gear changes shall be initiated by the driver. Mechanical gear
shifters, direct-acting electric solenoid shifters, air-shifters and
similar devices are permitted. Electronically controlled differentials
and devices that allow pre-selected gear changes are prohibited.
d. Gearboxes with shafts that are transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the chassis are not allowed. The sole exception are the gearbox
final drive (crownwheel) shaft axis and final drive shafts (half
shafts). All change gears must be located in the case aft of the
final drive.
GCR - 254
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Atlantic (FA) Specifications
GCR - 255
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
Table 1
FA
Spec
Line
Engine
Series
Max.
Displ.
(cc)
Max.
Valves /
Cyl.
Req’d
Restrictor
Min.
Weight
(lbs)
A.
Toyota
4age
1615
DOHC
(4-valve)
n/a
1175
B.
Toyota
4age
1800
DOHC
(4-valve)
n/a
1205
C.
Ford BD
Series
1600
BD
Series
4-valve
Any BD series iron or alloy cylinder block
and alternate crankshaft permitted with max.
displacement of 1615cc
n/a
1200
D.
Mazda MZR
2500
4-valve
29mm SIR
1400
FI restrictors – between cylinder head and
butterflies. Alt block and crankshaft permitted
with max. displacement of 2135cc,
Unrestricted
carbs
or F.I.
1190
n/a
1230
E.
Volkswagen
1835cc
SOHC
F.
Mazda 12A
Streetport
Rotary
n/a
Notes
n/a
no peripheral port or bridgeport
36mm
1230
44mm
1230
G.
Mazda 12A
Rotary
n/a
n/a
Bridgeport. One (1) auto-type 2 bbl carb or one
(1) 2 bbl throttle body. Restrictors/venturis
shall be no more than 4 inches from the center
line of the throttle butterfly shaft. All intake air
shall pass through the required restrictors and
the throttle body or carburetor body. Intake
manifold for either carburetion or injection
shall have individual runners connecting one
throttle plate to one rotor, only. No balance
tubes or other device shall connect runners
between rotors.
H.
Mazda 13B
Streetport
Rotary
n/a
n/a
One (1) 2-bbl auto-type carb or throttle body.
Intake manifold shall have individual runners
connecting one throttle plate/butterfly to one
rotor, only. No balance tubes or other devices
shall connect runners between rotors.
I.
Mazda 13B
Rotary
NA
NA
Peripheral Port
J.
Mazda
Renesis
Rotary
n/a
n/a
Porting not permitted. Unmodified OEM lower
intake manifold required, upper manifold
unrestricted. Balance tube not permitted.
Apex seals unrestricted. Fuel injection only.
K.
Honda
K20Z3 Base
Engine
2000
4
L.
Honda
K20Z3
Uprated
engine
2000
M.
Ford
Duratec/
Mazda
N.
36mm SIR
1230
70mm
Throttle
Body.
1230
See section 9.1.1.A.2.c.
NA
1200
4
See section 9.1.1.A.2.d.
NA
1275
1615
4
2.0L engine destroked to 1615cc.
NA
1250
Ford
Duratec/
Mazda
2296
4
Maximum compression permitted 14.0:1.
32mm SIR
1345
O.
Honda B16
1600
4
NA
1160
P.
MZR 2.0
2000
4
NA
1300
Sealed engine sourced by Elite Engines. Swift
014 Chassis only.
Engine Notes
(only apply to Table 1 and Table E)
Note 1: Add 25 lbs for sequential transmission.
Note 2: Add 25 lbs for fuel injection (except Volkswagen).
Note 3: Add 25 lbs for non-metallic chassis.
GCR - 256
Table 2
Car
Engine
Wheel
Width (in)
± .060
Aero
(F) 10
See FA
and Ex-Pro
(R) 14 Min.
rules
Atlantic cars
& 15 Max.
Purpose built
Pro Formula
Mazda
See Table 1
See Table 1
Pro Star
Mazda
specified
series
wheels
(F) 9
(R) 11
See FA
rules
Transmission
Up to 5 forward gears,
limited slip and locked
differential allowed
(sequential trans. carries
25 lb penalty
Weight
See
Table 1
Notes
All current FA rules apply
6 spd sequential transmission with open differential. Traction control is
allowed.
1275
All current FA rules apply.
Up to 6 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip Differential
(sequential Carries a 25 lb
Weight Penalty)
See
Table 1
Cars must run per FIA spec for year and model of chassis. Competitor must
carry and be able to present year specific FIA rules to tech. upon request. Cars
must meet all SCCA safety requirements including roll structure.
or
GCR - 257
(F) 10
(R) 14 Min.
& 15 Max.
All FIA compliant engines
years 1997 to 2008.
Engines must be run per
FIA spec. with 30mm
required restrictor
(F) 9 Min.
(R) 10 Min.
Ex-Fran-Am
2000
Renault 2.0L with MagnetiMarelli Renault Sport Formula Renault 2000 ECU
(F) 8
(R) 10
See FA
Rules
Renault Sport Formula
2000 6 Speed sequential
transmission with limited
slip differential. Gear
ratios unrestricted.
1250
Must have roll bar meeting the requirements of GCR 9.4. Must use Formula Renault or
Fran-Am engine seals on the cam cover, oil pan and crankshaft pulley bolt as applied
by an approved engine builder. An SIR will be required at a time to be determined by
the CRB.
Ex-Pro Formula
Super Vee
1600 VW (non Crossflow
head) or 1835cc Volkswagen with carbs (no
restrictor), FI with 37mm
restrictor located between
cylinder head and butterfly
(F) 6 Min.
(R) 8 Min.
or
(F) 8 Min.
(R) 10 Min.
See FA
Rules
Up to 5 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip and Locked
Differentials allowed
(sequential transmission
carries a 25 lb Weight
Penalty)
See
Table 1
Water cooled Super Vee cars compete in the FA class and may be prepared to their
professional racing rules. GT engine prep rules, no changes in bore x stroke, unrestricted weber type side draft carburetors with no modifications. These cars can also
run the present fuel injection with these engine prep rules.
FCS
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
Formula 3 car
Table 2
Pro Formula F
2000
Engine
2.0 Liter Zetec
(F) 8 Max
(R) 10 Max
Aero
See FA
Rules
Mazda MZR 2.0
Swift 016
2.3 liter Mazda Duratec
(F) 10
(R) 14 Min.
&
15 in Max.
See notes
Transmission
Weight
Notes
Up to 5 Forward Gears,
Limited Slip Differential
(sequential Carries a 25 lb
Weight Penalty)
1230
Engine must be prepared to current FC rules except that ECU map and cams are unrestricted. An air restrictor is not required.
1220
USF2000 cars using the MZR 2.0L Mazda shall comply with the technical regulations set forth in the 2016 USF2000 rule book excepting the following: Tires
shall be open subject only to limitations otherwise applicable to FA. ICAR and
other USF Series specific timing/scoring equipment is not required. References
to parts being inspected by INDYCAR prior to use shall be disregarded. Wheel
tethers (SWEMS) are not required. Fuel shall be any SCCA legal and permitted fuel.
5 speed sequential
1420
Cars must conform to Appendix A as provided by Swift Engineering (see diagram A illustration 1-5 at the end of the spec line for drawings). Engine: The 2.3
Liter Mazda Duratec engine and ECU is unrestricted with the exceptions that a 33mm
GCR - 258
SIR must be used with a sealed air box (part no. FA11016INT) supplied by SCCA Enterprises, the maximum compression ratio is 14.0:1, and the maximum displacement
is limited to 2266cc. OEM engine blocks and cylinder heads must be used. Dimensions: Wheel Base: 109.3 inches (277.6 cm) Overall Length: 177.1 inches (449.8
cm) Overall Width: F: 76.0 inches (193.0 cm) R: 75.8 inches (192.5 cm). The overall
width will be measured at the wheel hub center by projecting a vertical plane from
the widest outside rim surface. Other Dimensions: Reference Appendix A illustrations provided by Swift Engineering. All dimensions of the car within this table and
Appendix A shall have a tolerance of + or - 0.2 inches. The bodywork may not be
modified in shape or size; however, replacement bodywork may be supplied by sources
other than Swift. Exception: In Appendix A illustrations 1 and 3 the un-dimensioned
camera mount on the roll bar above the 37.83 height dimension may be removed. If
the camera mount is removed the faring must be re-shaped to continue the contour
lines of the roll bar below the 37.83 height dimension. Wings: The wings and end
plates may not be changed. All wings must conform to the wing angles and dimensions specified in the Appendix A illustrations provided by Swift Engineering. Wings
and endplates may be copies of the original Swift components whereas no profiles
are changed. Contact the SCCA Technical Services department for copies of the wing
profiles and end plate templates. Rear Wing Top Element: The rear wing top element
may be adjusted within the designed range of +2.00 to +16.00. Front Wing Main
Plane and Rear Wing Lower Element At all times, the front wing and lower rear wing
element must be maintained at the designed angle (as seen in illustrations 4 and 5 of
Appendix A provided by Swift Engineering) relative to the chassis zero line. Wickers:
Wickers/gurneys may be added to the top of the trailing edge of the front flaps, front
main plane, and rear wing lower elements only, and may not be used on the rear wing
upper element. They must be 90 degrees to the mounting surface and may be no more
0.500 inch high as measured from the upper surface of the wing element. Wicker/gurney height must remain constant across the width of the individual component span.
No saw tooth wickers/gurneys are allowed. The trailing edge of wings and flaps may
be drilled for the purposes of attaching wickers/gurneys. All wing angles shall have a
tolerance of + or - 0.30. For Honda engine package the following part numbers
from HPD are required:
60330-F25S-A010__ADAPTER, 016 ENGINE COVER, 60300-F25S-A000__
COMP,016 ENGINE COVER, 17205-F25S-A010__AIRBOX, 016, 17203-F25SA000__PIPE, INTAKE, 12510-F25S-A000__BLISTER, 016 OIL LINE.
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
Car
Wheel
Width (in)
± .060
Table 2
Car
Swift 016
Engine
2.5 Mazda
Wheel
Width (in)
± .060
(F) 10
(R) 14 Min.
&
15 in Max.
Aero
S e
Notes
e
GCR - 259
Transmission
Weight
Notes
5 speed sequential
1420
2.5 Mazda Notes: The max compression ratio is 11.5 with a 3.500 Bore x 3.94
Stroke (+/-.005). It must be a 2.5 Mazda Turbo Block, part# L3K9-10-300H.
The cylinder head, part# L504-10-090, and valves shall be 2.5 Mazda. They
must remain unmodified with no porting or valve modifications. Intake valve diameter is 35.1mm and exhaust valve diameter is 30.1mm. Valve springs must
be a single type of spring of any manufacturer. The crankshaft must be stock
Mazda part# LF-9-G-11-301. No profiling of counter weights and the balance
shaft drive gear may be removed. The rod and main journals may be reground
and a woodruff key slot may be added. Connecting rods shall be steel with a
min. weight of 495 gr. center to center 6.092. Pistons may be any aftermarket
part using 3 rings with a minimum weight, with pin, of 390 gr. Camshafts must
be Cosworth YDX profiles supplied by Crower Cams. Cam timing specs shall be
as follows: 104 ° TDC Intake 100 ° BTDC Exhaust +/- 1°. Chain or belt driven
camshaft drive is permissible. An adapter plate is necessary between throttle
body & cylinder head with a maximum thickness of 1 inch. The adapter plate
must be uniform in thickness. The following engine parts must be used and are
supplied by Cosworth: Barrel style throttle body (part# YD8183), Integral dry
sump pan and pump (part# YD8154 YD 8139), Flywheel (part# YD0449). A
carbon fiber 5.5 double plate clutch is optional. Exhaust system shall be the
standard 4 into 1 Swift 016. A 35mm SIR is required. They are manufactured
by Racetech and MUST be used with sealed air box kit, part# FA11016INT,
supplied by SCCA Enterprises.
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
FCS
Car
Engine
(F) 8
(R) 10
Aero
Transmission
Weight
Notes
Dual rear
adjustable main
planes.
Front
main
plane is
fixed.
Front
winglets
are adjustable.
Wings
and
bodywork are
delivered
with an
FS2.0
marking
that is to
remain
visible
for scrutineering.
6 forward speeds and
reverse with an open
differential. No lift shift
system.
1350
ECU map and engine shall be sealed by Hasselgren Engineering. FS2.0 sealed
Ohlins TTX dampers. Goodyear 475 compound tires. Wheels must me 3 piece
FS2.0 wheels with FS2.0 logo. Hasselgren Engineering spec FS2.0 intake must
be used. No part of the car shall be altered from FS2.0 original parts, except for
repairs that do not affect performance.
2.0 Liter Mazda MZR
USF2000
2.0 Liter Mazda MZR
see notes
see
notes
see notes
see
notes
Car must comply with the 2012 Pro USF2000 rules. Competitors must have
the current rules in their possession and present them upon request. The following sections of the 2012 Pro rules do not apply: 14.1.1 thru 14.1.4; 14.12.2
thru 14.12.13; 14.13.1; 14.13.2; 14.13.5; 14.18 in its entirety; 14.19 in its
entirety; 14.27 in its entirety; 13.34 in its entirety
see notes
see notes
see
notes
see notes
see
notes
Car must run per all current US F4 series rules. Competitors must provide current US F4 rules upon request.
GCR - 260
Formula
Speed2.0
(FS2.0)
US F4
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
Table 2
Wheel
Width (in)
± .060
FCS
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
GCR - 261
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
GCR - 262
FCS
9.1.1. FA Spec Lines
GCR - 263
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
GCR - 264
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
B.
FORMULA CONTINENTAL / F PREPARATION RULES
a. Formula F: A formula for single-seat, tubular frame, flat bottom,
open-wheel racing cars using standard Ford 1600 “crossflow”
pushrod engines, or a Honda Fit 1500 (L15A7) overhead cam
engine, with firewall, floor, and safety equipment conforming to
the GCR.
b. Formula Continental: A formula for single-seat, tubular frame, flat
bottom, open-wheel racing cars using the Ford 2 liter single overhead camshaft “NE” series engine, the 1971-74 Pinto/Capri 2 liter
single overhead camshaft engine, or the Ford Zetec ZX-3 2 liter
dual overhead camshaft engine.
c. Formula F and Formula Continental are restricted classes. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as
stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T.
d. Homologation may be required. Refer to section 9.2.2. for details.
2. General Construction Restrictions
NOTE: Contained herein are the 1986 Formula F chassis construction
requirements, revised January 1, 2013. All new Formula Continental and
Formula F cars are to be built to these specifications. Any class-specific differences are stated explicitly. For cars registered prior to January
1, 1986, see section B.21. The use of carbon fiber and/or Kevlar reinforcement, titanium, beryllium, metal matrix composites, ceramics, high
strength composites and similar materials is prohibited unless specifically
permitted. The use of the word “unrestricted” in any section does not
indicate the allowance of these prohibited materials. The use of non-metal
materials for seals, bearing and bearing liners, thread locking systems,
windscreens, mirrors, instruments, wiring, electronic systems, electrical
systems, hydraulic and oil and cooling systems, etc, are permitted unless
specifically restricted.
Fuel Capacity: Maximum capacity 41 liters (10.83 gallons)
Refer to the Formula F and Formula Continental Dimensions Table for
general dimensional limitations.
3. Chassis/Frame
a. The chassis/frame and all bulkheads shall be of steel tube, bar and
sheet space-frame construction only, and shall comply with GCR
construction requirements. Monocoque-type structures are prohibited.
b. The soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge
of the wheel rims (in normal position (i.e., pedals not depressed)
and shall remain behind the front bulkhead (per 9.4.5). The lower
main frame rails shall be a minimum of 25 centimeters (9.84
inches) apart (inside dimension) from the front bulkhead to the rear
roll hoop.
c. Forward-facing braces that protect the driver’s legs and feet shall
extend from the front roll hoop to the front bulkhead (The front
GCR - 265
FCS
1. FORMULA CONTINENTAL AND FORMULA F PREPARATION RULES
Definitions
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
bulkhead is defined as the transverse section of the frame immediately ahead of the pedals and drivers feet.) This does not preclude
a secondary forward bulkhead ahead of this “front” bulkhead). The
front bulkhead may be constructed from aluminum plate.
d. Further reinforcement of the frame structure shall be in accordance
with the allowances specifically stated herein. No other methods of
reinforcement are permitted. No panels other than those which are
explicitly described within the “Preparation Rules” set forth herein
may be attached to the chassis/frame.
1. The chassis shall carry a mandatory floorpan, and may
incorporate optional bulkhead panels on the main and
dash hoops, the front bulkhead immediately ahead of the
drivers feet, and any secondary bulkhead located forward
of the front bulkhead. The optional bulkhead panels may
be attached in the same manner as the requirements set
forth for the floorpan.
2. A metal floorpan shall be rigidly attached to the lower
surface of the bottom frame rails. At a minimum, it shall
extend from the main roll hoop bulkhead to the front bulkhead. Floorpan material must be a minimum of .060 heat
treated aluminum alloy and/or 18 gauge steel sheet only.
Its curvature shall not exceed 25.4 mm (1.0 inch).
3. The floorpan shall be, at the minimum, attached to the
chassis lower rails at or adjacent to its full perimeter by
any combination of welding, bonding, riveting, or bolting.
The centers between any two adjacent fasteners shall
be no more than 6 inches apart as measured along the
panel surfaces. The floorpan may not “wrap up” on to the
chassis sides to any point above the top surface of the
lower main frame rails.
4. The floorpan may be constructed in more than one section.
e. The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front instrument/dash roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be protected by at least one of the following methods to
prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit. Panels may extend
to the forward most bulkhead, but must otherwise comply with
these regulations.
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached to the
outside of the main frame tubes.
2. Reinforced body, consisting of at least two layers of 5 ounce,
bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the
body which shall be securely fastened to the frame. (5 or more
layers are highly recommended.) For either method, fasteners
shall be no closer than 6 inch centers. The steel tubes used for
the chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to
the roll hoop brace material.
3. Flat composite panels of uniform thickness and construction
attached to the outside of the main frame tubes. Shaping of
these panels to conform with the outer perimeter of the main
frame tubes is permitted. Carbon fiber is permitted; however,
it must be used in conjunction with another “anti-ballistic”
type material (e.g., Kevlar, Zylon, etc). Such material shall be
at least 1.5mm (.060 inches) in thickness not counting the
GCR - 266
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
4. Composite anti-intrusion panels shall be attached with no more
than eight fasteners per side. Fasteners shall be AN or superior
grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch diameter may be employed with each fastener. Ten fasteners per
side are permitted if the panels extend to the front bulkhead.
Alternatively, FIA mounting is permitted as follows:
One panel shall be permitted per side. It shall be fastened to
the frame at its extreme corners, the upper, lower, forward
and rearward edge halfway between the corners, and halfway
along each diagonal tube. The attachment should consist of an
8mm U-bolt and an aluminum plate 3mm thick, 20mm wide
and 12mm longer than the U-bolt span.
Panel mounting must comply with one or the other above
prescribed methods. It may not be a combination of the two.
5. Alternate attachment method. Composite anti-intrusion panels
may be attached to the outside frame with fasteners no closer
than 6 inches (15 cm) centers. Fasteners shall be AN or superior grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or
countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch
diameter may be employed with each fastener. No adhesives
may be used for attachment purposes. Cars with composite
panels, either interior or exterior, attached in this manner, are
subject to a 25 pound weight penalty. Inlet restrictors may
also be required. Composite panels attached to the interior and
exterior of the frame rails must use common attachment points
on opposite sides of the frame rail.
f. No other exterior panels (excepting body work) shall be permitted
in the area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
forward most bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead.
Suspension components shall not be mounted directly to any frame
exterior panel (including, but not limited to body and anti-intrusion
panels). The chassis must be capable of rolling without any such
frame-exterior panels installed. The engine, bell housing/oil tank
and gearbox are exempt from this limitation.
No panels or other components other than the required and optional
load bearing panels may be attached to the chassis for structural
purposes, except that the engine, bell housing/oil tank and gearbox
are permitted to be stressed and/or load bearing.
g. A firewall(s) that seals the drivers’ compartment (cockpit) and the
engine compartment is required. Forward facing ducts may be
installed to delivering air directly to the engine compartment. Air
duct openings may be located within the cockpit provided the firewall is extended to prevent the passage of flame and debris from
reaching the driver.
h. Brackets are permitted for the exclusive purpose of mounting
components, such as the engine, transmission, suspension pickups,
clutch and brake components. They shall be metal. Brackets shall
not be used to otherwise reinforce the frame. Composite and/or
non-metal bellhousings are prohibited.
i.
Brackets for the purpose of mounting or attaching bodywork may
be of glass fiber or metal construction, and may incorporate honeyGCR - 267
FCS
carbon fiber.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
comb, wood, or foam coring for purposes of maintaining its shape
under aero loading. Kevlar reinforcement is permitted.
j.
Instruments may be mounted in non-metal panels (e.g., composite,
wood or plastic) securely affixed to the dash bulkhead.
k. Impact Attenuators: See 9.4.5.G.
l.
No engine oil or water tubes are allowed within the cockpit, except
for shielded (stainless steel braid) mechanical oil pressure lines.
Chassis tubes shall not be used as oil or water transport tubes.
m. Fuel cell vents shall be located at least 25cm (9.84 inches) to the
rear of the cockpit.
4. Bodywork
For the purposes of this section, bodywork includes all panels external
to the chassis/frame and licked directly by the air stream. This includes
panels above or below the floor pan, and the bottoms of any side pods.
a. The bodywork opening giving access to the cockpit shall have the
following minimum dimensions:
Length: 60cm (23.62 inches)
Width: 45cm (17.72 inches)
This width extends over a length of 30cm (11.81 inches) minimum.
This minimum rectangular opening may exist anywhere forward of
the firewall. Forward-facing roll bar/cage bracing and padding will
not be considered in these dimensions.
b. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
manipulation or removal of any part or panel, with the exception
of the steering wheel and/or drivers head surround. The steering
wheel and the surround must be removable by the driver and/or
safety workers without the use of any tools. Readily legible removal
instructions for safety workers are recommended. Bead seats are
recommended.
c. Bodywork and rear spoiler(s) and any attached components except
for suspension components shall not exceed a maximum width of
95cm (37.40 inches). No part of the bodywork, rear spoiler or
exhaust system shall extend more than 100cm (39.37 inches) FF;
80cm (31.50 inches) FC behind the centerline of the rear axle.
Allowances shall be made for radius of bodywork along primarily
horizontal surfaces in this area. Undertrays and floorpans may
extend laterally past cockpit sides, sidepods, and engine compartment enclosures, but only up to the 95cm (37.40 inches) maximum
allowed width.
d. Diffusers and undertrays shall not exceed a maximum width of 95
cm (37.40 inches). No part of the diffuser or undertray shall extend
more than 80 cm (31.50 inches) behind the centerline of the rear
axle nor exceed in height a horizontal plane 90cm (35.43 inches)
above the ground with the car as qualified or raced with the driver
on board.
e. Bodywork shall be of aluminum or glass fiber construction and
may incorporate honeycomb, wood, or foam coring for purposes
of maintaining its shape under aero loading. Kevlar reinforcement is
permitted. All bodywork shall be attached to the chassis such that
it is not capable of coming loose when the car is in operation.
GCR - 268
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
g. Cockpit interior panels may be constructed of glass fiber, carbon
fiber, metal and/or Kevlar. Such panels shall be contained
completely within the frame and may not be attached to the frame
with fasteners closer than 6 in (15 cm) centers measured along the
surface of the panel. The chassis must be capable of rolling without
any such interior panels installed. Cars with composite panels,
either interior or exterior, attached in this manner, are subject to a
25 pound weight penalty. Inlet restrictors may also be required.
h. Mirrors, air ducts/intakes which do not serve any structural purpose
other than directing air flow into the engine or other permitted areas
and the required Zetec air scoop may be constructed of carbon
fiber and/or other composites.
5. Control of Undersides Shaping
It is the intent of these rules to minimize (not eliminate) the use of “ground
effects.”
a. A reference area is defined
Formula F: by the full width of the lowest surfaces of the car licked
by the air stream between the front bulkhead as described in B.3.a
above and the rear of the rear tires.
Formula Continental: by the full width of the lowest surfaces of the
car licked by the air stream between the rear edge of the front tires
and the front edge of the rear tires.
These surfaces may include the floor pan, undertrays, diffusers,
side pod bottoms and any essentially horizontal bodywork that is
included in the lowest surfaces licked by the air stream. Within this
reference area, the lowest surfaces licked by the air stream must
be flat with a total vertical tolerance of 25.4mm. An undertray
beneath the engine, bell housing and/ or gearbox is not required.
1. Mirrors and any primarily vertical bodywork (e.g., cockpit/radiator sides that are oriented 45 degrees or greater relative to
the ground) that extend laterally past the outer edges of the
floor pan and/or undertrays are not subject to the reference
area restrictions.
2. Fairings for streamlining suspension pickups are not subject to
the reference area restrictions; however, such fairings shall be
symmetrical about their horizontal axis.
3. The perimeter of any reference area surface that transitions
upward to any bodywork may use a maximum 1 inch radius
and shall be included in the reference surface measurement.
b. Measurement for compliance of the defined area shall be performed
as follows:
1. A non-flexible straight-edge bar shall be placed against the
lower surface of the reference area in a suitable section
(unworn and flat enough to prevent rocking of the bar) from
which the bar can be oriented to measure all parts of the reference area. The competitor shall be responsible for the availability and condition of such a surface. The bar shall be of
sufficient length to reach all portions of the reference area from
that surface.
GCR - 269
FCS
f. Cockpit is defined as the volume which is inside the inner surface
of any panel attached to the outside of the frame rails between the
rear roll hoop and the front bulkhead.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
2. All measurements shall be taken vertically from the bar to the
reference area surfaces. The total maximum vertical distance
(additive upward and downward) from the bar to any part of
the reference area surfaces shall be 2.54 cm. Skid blocks and
or rub strips are not included in this measurement.
c. No aerodynamic devices (e.g., skirts, body sides, skid “planks”,
undertrays, skid blocks, etc.) may extend more than 1 cm (.394
inches) below the reference area.
6. Aerodynamic Aids
a. A wing shall be defined as any shape that has a leading edge and a
trailing edge and creates downforce.
b. Wings and other airfoil devices (“dive planes”, etc.), whose primary
purpose are to create aerodynamic downforce, are prohibited in
Formula F.
c. Both front and rear wings/airfoils are a requirement for FC. See the
Formula F and Formula Continental Dimensions Table. Cockpit or
remote adjustment is not permitted; wings and airfoils shall be nonmovable when the car is in operation.
d. Any part of the car which that has an influence on the aerodynamic
stability of the vehicle shall be firmly attached with no provisions
for adjustment to vary downforce while the car is in motion.
e. Shaping of the lower surfaces to create “venturi” type tunnels is
prohibited. An example of venturi tunnels is shown in the following
figure.
f. It is not permitted to duct air through any part of the bodywork for
the purpose of aerodynamic downforce. There shall be no forward
facing gaps or openings in or about the bodywork with the exception of those necessary for engine cooling, engine air inlet, shock,
or brake cooling. All ducted air for heat exchangers shall pass
through those heat exchangers
g. Primarily vertical (see B.5.a.1) air diverters greater than 30 inches
forward of the main hoop (i.e. - “bargeboards”) that stand away
from the cockpit sides and are attached to (or through) the cockpit
sides, undertrays and/or sidepods shall be considered as creating
forward facing gaps and shall be prohibited.
h. (Formula F only) A single rear spoiler, that may be capable of
adjustment, is permitted. Cockpit adjustment is not permitted. This
spoiler shall be no wider than the surface to which it is attached,
and there shall be no gap between the spoiler and the body surface
to which it is attached.
GCR - 270
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
j.
(FC only) Diffuser undertrays, to the maximum allowed bodywork
width are permitted, but any portion within the reference area (B.5)
must comply with the reference area measurement rules.
k. Wings, endplates and their attachment(s) shall be of metal or
glass fiber construction, and may incorporate honeycomb, wood,
or foam coring for purposes of maintaining its shape under aero
loading. Kevlar reinforcement is permitted.
7. Suspension
Suspension is defined as the system of springs, shock absorbers, control
arms, links, etc., supporting the vehicle on its axles. Sway bars, sway
bar links, steering components, etc., are not considered as suspension in
this section.
a. All suspension components shall be of steel or ferrous material,
with the exception of hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, bell cranks,
pivot blocks, bearings, bushings, spring caps, abutment nuts,
shock absorber caps and nuts, which may be of aluminum alloy.
Material restrictions as set forth in Section B.2 above shall control.
b. Front and rear hub carriers shall be only steel, aluminum or magnesium alloy for cars manufactured after January 1, 1983.
c. Springs shall be steel only.
d. Control arms and all associated items that attach directly to the
chassis members shall be boxed in or captured to prevent intrusion
into the cockpit. “Anti-Intrusion” bars are highly recommended on
the front suspension arms.
e. Shock absorbers: Design - unrestricted; casing material: steel or
aluminum alloy.
f. Sway bars, sway bar links and steering components are unrestricted, except as specified in B.2.
g. It is not permitted to attach spoilers, fairings or other devices that
may exert downforce to the movable suspension members. If
the suspension member is of streamline or airfoil cross section, it
shall be symmetrical about its horizontal axis. Brake lines may be
attached to suspension members. Brake lines may be enclosed in a
symmetrical fairing.
8. Brakes
Unrestricted, except:
a. Maximum of 2 pistons allowed per caliper. Calipers must be ferrous
or aluminum alloy.
b. Brake rotors are restricted to ferrous material.
c. (FC only) Inner wheel fairings and/or ducts are permitted. They
shall however not sport any wings, dive planes or other airfoil type
devices. (FF only) inner wheel fairings and/or ducts are prohibited.
9. Steering
Unrestricted.
GCR - 271
FCS
i. (Formula F only) No part of the bodywork is allowed to have
any down-turned fences or intermediate strakes. Undertrays are
allowed, but any portion within the reference area (B.5) must
comply with the reference area measurement rules. No bodywork
below the horizontal centerline of the differential and to the rear of
the rear tires may be wider than 16 inches.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
10. Wheels and Tires
Wheels are unrestricted except that:
a. Material must be metal.
b. Diameter shall be thirteen (13) inches.
c. Rim width:
Formula F: shall not exceed 5.5 inches.
Formula Continental: shall not exceed 6.0 inches front and 8.0
inches rear.
d. All measurements shall be taken between the beads.
e. Formula F shall be limited to the following tires (front tires may not
be used as rears):
Dries:
Front- Hoosier R60A Radial 43322 or F1600 Radial 43321
185/60R13
Rear- Hoosier R60A Radial 43327 or F1600 Radial 43326
205/60R13
Wets:
Front-Hoosier Wet Radial 44421 185/60R13
Rear-Hoosier Wet Radial 44426 205/60R13
f. All Formula F competitors competing in an SCCA sanctioned event
shall place three (3) “Hoosier Tires” decals on their car in the
following locations: one (1) 8”x2” on the vertical plane of the front
nose section, and two (2) 11”x3”, one on each side of the engine
cover on a vertical plane.
11. Engines
Formula F engines
The only permitted engines are:
a. The Ford 1600 GT “Kent” pushrod “crossflow” as installed in the
Ford Cortina in 1971 and later. The Kent engine specifications are
contained in B.12.
b. The Ford 1600 GT “Cortina” engine as installed in the Ford Cortina
through 1970. The Cortina engine specifications are contained in
B.13.
c. The Honda Fit (L15A7) 1500cc overhead cam engine as installed
in a Honda Fit (all models starting 2009). The Honda Fit engine
specifications are contained in B.14.
Formula Continental Engines
The only permitted engines are:
a. The Ford 2 liter single overhead camshaft “NE” series engine or the
1971-74 Pinto/Capri 2 liter single overhead camshaft engine. The
specifications are contained in B.15.
b. The Ford Zetec ZX3 2 liter dual overhead camshaft engine. The
specifications are contained in B.16.
12. Kent Engine
a.General
1. Components shall not be interchanged between the Kent and
Cortina versions of the engine unless specifically authorized.
GCR - 272
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
2. The engine shall not be altered, modified, or changed in any
respect unless specifically authorized herein. When a system
is specified to be “unrestricted” (e.g. paragraphs p and q), the
restrictions of this paragraph do not apply.
4. Valve guides are unrestricted provided the position of the
valve is not changed. Standard Ford replacement valves, with
oversize stems, may be used as normal repair/maintenance
procedures. The specifications, in B.12.f are mandatory. It is
permitted to re-cut or replace valve seats. Valve seat angles
are unrestricted.
5. Exhaust emission control, air pumps, and associated lines and
nozzles shall be completely removed. When these air nozzles
are removed from a cylinder head, the holes shall be completely
plugged.
6. Balancing of all moving parts of the engine is permitted. The
pistons, rods, crankshaft, and flywheel may be lightened to
their stated minimum weights. It is permitted to polish parts of
the engine providing the contour of the part is not altered and
can be recognized as the original part. Pistons may be balanced
to the minimum weight by removing weight from the pin boss,
the underside of the piston crown, or the bottom edge of the
skirt. “Gas porting”, re-profiling, or any other modification to
the piston, other than expressly permitted herein, is prohibited.
Knife-edging the crankshaft throws is not permitted.
7. Compression Ratio
Maximum compression ratio: 9.3 to 1
The following specifications are used in determining compression
ratio:
A. Maximum bore size: 3.200”
B. Minimum cylinder volume at Top Dead Center: 42.0cc
C. Maximum valve protrusion from head surface: .040”
D. Only approved head gaskets may be used (see B.12.c.3)
b.Block
1. Bore may be enlarged for clearance between cylinder and
piston.
2. Cylinder sleeves may be fitted. The top surface of the block may
be milled or surface ground to obtain the maximum compression ratio specified above. Any steel center main bearing cap
may be used. The oil pump mounting face on the block may be
machined for the purpose of fitting an oil pump.
3. The 1600 Fiesta block is permitted as a replacement part.
4. The Ford Racing block, part number M-6010-16K, is permitted
as a replacement part.
c. Cylinder Head
1. Ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the
port diameter at the manifold face of the head does not exceed
the following dimensions:
Inlet: 1.50”
Exhaust: 1.20”
GCR - 273
FCS
3. The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced
provided the maximum compression ratio is not exceeded.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
2. The use of the Pierce aluminum cylinder head is permitted.
3. The following head gaskets are allowed:
A. Ford Part # 931M6051AA
B. Payen Part # AH-750
C. Felpro Part # 8360PT-1
d. Inlet Manifold
1. The ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as
the following dimensions are maintained:
Maximum dimension at head face: 1.340”
2. Carburetor Flange- Maximum dimensions at carburetor flange:
see Figure 1.
3.The carburetor face of the inlet manifold may be machined to
the horizontal to compensate for fore/aft tilt of the carburetor.
4. Epoxy exposed in the manifold used to make repairs is acceptable, providing the total area is less than 0.75 square inches.
5. The water passages in the inlet manifold may be plugged.
Holes in the inlet manifold resulting from the removal of emission/vacuum lines shall be plugged.
e.Pistons
1. Standard or 0.005 inch oversize pistons shall be used.
2. Standard size AE pistons P/N 18649, casting P/N 18634, standard size CP piston, part # 81-2 FF1600, or CP oversize piston,
part # 81-2- FF1600+5 may be used.
3. Alternate piston identified as follows is allowed: P/N AE-M717D,
casting number 711 M 6110. AE Hepolite P/N 20552, Casting
# 20548A. Note: Mahle pistons are not allowed.
4. Dimensions and Weights
Maximum diameter:
Standard:
3.187”
0.005” o/s:3.192”
GCR - 274
Depth of bowl:
0.470” (minimum)
Maximum diameter of bowl:
2.44” AE Hepolite,
2.50”
CP Piston
Centerline of wrist pin to crown: 1.702” +/- .002”
Overall height:
3.30” AE Hepolite
2.80”
CP Piston
Minimum weight 515 grams (w/ clips, pins and rings)
Weight of pin:
115 +/- 2 grams
Ring Groove Widths:
Top Groove: 0.064”
2nd Groove : 0.0795”
Oil Groove: 0.159”
5. Piston rings are unrestricted provided that:
A. One oil control and two compression rings are used.
B. No modification is made to the piston for the installation of
rings.
C. Pocketing of the piston valve reliefs is allowed up to a
maximum of .050” to obtain the maximum combustion
chamber volume.
6. Wrist Pins are unrestricted provided that:
A.Weight is 115 +/- 2 grams.
B.No modification is made to the piston for the installation of the
wrist pins.
f.Valves
1.Dimensions
Iron head
Alloy head
Distance apart at centers 1.540” +/- .020”
1.570” +/- .020”
Max. diameter:
Inlet:
1.560”
Exhaust:
1.340”
Overall length:
Inlet:
4.367” +/- .020”
Exhaust:
4.355” +/- .020”
2. Reshaping of the valves is specifically prohibited.
3. Alternate valve AE p/n V34524 (intake), V34525 (exhaust) are
permitted.
g.Camshaft
1. Regrinding camshaft lobes is permitted, providing they are
ground to meet FORD and SCCA profile.
2. Camshaft Lobe Centers: 109° +/- 2°
Lift at top of pushrod:
Inlet:
0.231” +/- .002” Maximum
Exhaust:
0.232” +/-.002” Maximum
Lift at spring cap: (Valve Lift)
Inlet:0.356” Maximum
(Zero tappet setting)
Exhaust:0.358” Maximum
3. Recontouring of the valve stem contact pad of the rocker arm
is permitted, provided the maximum lift at the spring cap is not
exceeded
GCR - 275
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
4. Offset camshaft/sprocket dowels are permitted.
5. Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be checked using the
official procedure published by SCCA.
6. A camshaft that is a replica of the original camshaft and of the
same material may be used.
h. Valve Springs
Valve springs and valve spring shims are unrestricted, except that:
1. Springs and shims shall be made of steel.
2. No more than one spring shall be used per valve.
3. Conically wound springs are not allowed.
4. The standard spring cap and retainers shall be used.
i.Pushrods
Any pushrod made of a ferrous material may be used, provided that
the minimum dimensions and weight are met.
Minimum stem diameter:
0.25”
Overall length:
7.64” Minimum
Minimum weight:
50 grams
j. Connecting Rods
Any ferrous connecting rod may be used provided it meets a minimum
weight of 630 grams and has a center to center length of 4.925 +/0.020 inches. (Note: Weights include cap, bolts, and small end bush,
but not big end bearing shells).
k.Crankshaft
An alternate cast steel crankshaft meeting original Ford Kent and SCCA
dimensions and weight is permitted.
Weight:
24 lbs. 8 oz. Minimum
Max Stroke (at piston):
3.056” +/- .004”
Crankshaft pulley:unrestricted
The crankshaft from the Cortina engine may be used.
The crankshaft from the Fiesta engine may be used.
The crankshaft may be shot peened.
l.Flywheel
1. Weight with ring gear: 15.5 lbs minimum.
2. The flywheel may be machined to reduce weight to the above
minimum weight. Flywheel locating dowels are permitted.
3. Weight may be added to the flywheel, providing it is added
ONLY to the existing clutch bolt holes, i.e., single cap screws
or set screws. No continuous material shall be used.
4. An alternate flywheel, part # JAE1600 is also allowed at the
above weight of 15.5 lbs.
m.Carburetor
Weber 32/36 DGV or Holley 5200
Venturi diameter: Primary:
26mm
Secondary:
27mm
GCR - 276
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
It is permitted to:
1. Fit any jets (including accelerator pump discharge nozzle) as
long as no modifications to the carburetor body are required.
2. Modify or substitute the external throttle linkage.
4. Remove the air cleaner
5. Fit velocity stacks
6. Remove the choke butterflies and linkage.
7. Use an alternate carburetor gasket provided it is the same
thickness as the original gasket and doesn’t exceed the manifold opening dimensions
8. Modify the carburetor housing for the installation of throttle
shaft bearings provided the modification serves no other
purpose.
n. Fuel Pump
Unrestricted
o. Exhaust Manifold
Unrestricted
p. Lubrication System
Lubrication system is unrestricted; any oil pump and oil sump permitted;
dry sump is permitted. Localized machining of the cylinder block is
permitted to allow fitting of the oil pump.Dry sump system is permitted.
q. Cooling System
Cooling system is unrestricted. Any radiator, fan, water pump and drive
belt permitted.Pump/fan/generator drive belt: Unrestricted
r. Electrical Equipment
Distributor: Distributors are unrestricted provided the original drive,
location, and housing are retained. The distributor is defined as the
component that triggers the LT current and distributes the HT current.
The ignition timing may only be varied by vacuum and/or mechanical
means. It is prohibited to use any other method or component to trigger,
distribute, or time the ignition. The vacuum advance mechanism may be
removed, and the distributor advance plate may be secured by soldering
or welding or by suitable fasteners. The advance curve and advance
springs are unrestricted. Generators/ Alternators: not required. All other
electrical components are unrestricted.
s.Miscellaneous
1. The timing chain/sprocket cover may be altered or replaced.
2. The use of the following non-standard replacement parts is
permitted provided their use does not result in any unauthorized modification of any other component:
A. Fasteners - nuts, bolts, screws, studs, etc. Intake manifold fasteners may be of either a socket head or hex head
configuration, and must be 5/16” diameter.
B. Gaskets, except head gasket.
C.Washers.
D.Seals.
E. Connecting rod, crankshaft, and camshaft bearings of the
GCR - 277
FCS
3. Fit internal and/or external surge pipes.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
same size and type as original. Normal oversize/undersize
bearings are permitted. This does not allow reducing the
bearing surface area by reducing the width of standard
bearings.
F. Spark plugs.
G. Rocker pedestals that are of the same material and dimensionally identical (i.e., shaft location, offset, etc.) to the
original components may be used.
3. Mechanical tachometer drive is permitted.
4. The crankcase breather may be altered or removed.
5. The standard rocker cover may be altered to provide for crankcase ventilation, and the filler cap may be altered or replaced.
Valve or rocker covers may be substituted, provided that the
replacement cover affords no additional function than that of
the original stock cover. (relocated text from 8 below)
6. The crankshaft and main bearing caps may be treated with
salt-bath nitriding cover under SAE specification AMS 2755A
(tuftriding, etc.)
7. Any oil or lubricants may be used.
8. Water pump, fan, and generator/alternator pulley(s) are unrestricted.
9. Exhaust Outlets
Exhaust outlets on cars registered after January 1, 1986 shall not
extend more than 60 cm (23.60”) behind the centerline of the
rear axle and shall be positioned between 10 cm (3.9”) and 60 cm
(23.6) from the ground, measured to the bottom of the exhaust
pipe.
Exhaust Outlets: Cars registered prior to January 1, 1986.
A. It is recommended that all exhaust outlets be no longer
than 60cm (23.60”) behind the centerline of the rear axle
and positioned between 30cm (11.8”) and 60cm (23.6”)
from the ground.
B. For cars unable to comply with the above rule (A.), they
shall have a support bracket that attaches within six (6)
inches of the outlet end, and the support bracket shall
extend no more than thirty (30) degrees from vertical to
the rear. Beginning January 1, 1986, it is mandatory for all
Formula F cars.
13. Cortina Engine
All of B.12 applies to the Cortina engine except as specified in this
section. Components shall not be interchanged between the Kent and
Cortina versions of the engine unless specifically authorized.
a. Compression Ratio
Maximum compression ratio: 10.0 to 1. The following specifications
are used in determining compression ratio:
1.64cc - top ring to top of piston
5.60cc - head gasket.
Minimum unswept volume per cylinder:
44.4cc (original engine with standard pistons)
45.1cc (original engine with .030” o/s pistons)
GCR - 278
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
c. Cylinder head
Ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the port
diameter at the manifold face of the head does not exceed the following
dimensions:
Inlet: 1.50” Exhaust: 1.16”
Combustion chamber:
Minimum depth 0.115”
Maximum length: 3.15”
Minimum volume per cylinder: 7.8cc
Reshaping is prohibited.
Ford Pinto cylinder head P/N DORY 6049B is permitted.
d. Inlet Manifold
The ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the
following dimensions are maintained:
Maximum Size at head face:
Cyl. 1 & 4:
1.48” x 1.28”
Cyl. 2 & 3:
.25”
Maximum size at carburetor flange:
3.060” x 1.389”
Maximum width:3.80”
Primary choke end radius:
.709”
Secondary choke end radius:
.787”
e.Pistons
Standard, 0.015 inch oversize or 0.030 inch oversize pistons may be
used.
Piston Maximum diameter:
Standard:
3.189”
0.015” o/s:
3.204”
0.030” o/s:
3.219”
Depth of bowl:
0.500” +/-.005”
Minimum volume of bowl:
31.5cc
Maximum diameter of bowl:
2.28”
Centerline of wrist pin to crown:
1.737” +/- .002”
Overall height:
3.30”
Minimum weight
w/rings & pin:
485 grams
Weight of pin:
115 +/- 2 grams
Wrist Pins are unrestricted provided that:
No modification is made to the piston for the installation of the wrist
pins
f.Valves
Distance apart at centers:
Max. diameter:
Inlet:
Exhaust:
Overall length:
Inlet:
Exhaust:
1.540” +/- .020”
1.502”
1.252”
4.280” +/- .006”
4.260” +/- .006”
g.Crankshaft
Weight: 23 lbs. 8 oz. minimum
The crankshaft from the Kent engine may be used.
GCR - 279
FCS
b.Block
The 1600 Pinto block, P/N DIFZ-6010-C, may be used as a replacement for the Cortina block; Standard Pinto tappets, P/N DORY 6500A
and DIFZ 6500A may also be used when this block is used as a Cortina
replacement.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
h.Carburetor
Weber 32 DFM or DFD or Holley 5200
Venturi Diameter:Primary:26mm
Secondary: 27mm
14. Honda Fit 1500 (L15A7) Engine
a.General
1. No modifications to this engine are allowed except where
specifically authorized within these rules. This includes, but is
not limited to, all fuel injection and engine management components, electrical, cooling and lubrication systems. All systems
are subject to test procedures and must conform to OEM specifications as stated in the Honda Fit factory service manual,
Honda PN 61TK600 and all superseding years, or as specified
in these rules. The factory service manual or its equivalent is
required to be in the possession of each entrant. The manual
may be the form of printed material, microfiche, CDs, DVDs
and/or Internet access to manufacturer sponsored web-based
databases.
2. Permitted engine maintenance includes the replacement, but
not modification, of external engine and engine systems parts.
3. All rubber fluid lines may be replaced with braided metalcovered (Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps maybe installed on
the rubber oil lines.
4. No balancing, lightening, polishing or other modification of
moving parts of the engine is permitted.
5. Only stock Honda manufactured gaskets and seals as specified in the Honda Fit factory service manual are permitted
(Including, but not limited to, head gasket, intake runner
gaskets and O-rings, restrictor plate gasket, and intake and
exhaust gaskets).
6. For all Honda part numbers in these specifications, superceding
part numbers are considered equivalent.
b.Block
1. The only permitted cylinder blocks are Honda PN:
11000-RP3-810 (2009-2010)
11000-RTW-810 (2010-2012)
2. Honing of cylinders is permitted to a maximum diameter of
73.065 mm (2.8766 inches). Fitting of cylinder sleeves is
prohibited. Re-boring to over size is prohibited.
3. Block must use stock main bearing caps, girdle and hardware
as supplied.
4. Minimum deck height from crank centerline: 220.00 mm
(8.661 inches).
c.Crankshaft
1. The stock Honda Fit crankshaft, Honda PN: 13310-RB1-000, must
be used with no modifications allowed.
2.Minimum weight: 27.7 lbs. No pilot bearing, pulsar or hardware.
3. Maximum stroke at piston: 89.55mm (3.526 inches)
GCR - 280
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
4. Main and rod bearings must not be modified in any way. OEM bearings must be used from within the standard range as allowed in the
Honda Fit factory service manual.
6. The crank pulley/balancer must not be altered or modified in any
way.
a.Minimum weight: 3.90 lbs.
b. Honda PN: 13810-RB0-003.
d. Connecting Rods
1. Stock Honda Fit connecting rod must be used PN: 13320-RB1000.
2. Minimum connecting rod weight with cap and bolts: 280.0
grams (9.88 ounces).
3. Maximum connecting rod length center to center: 149.05mm
(5.868 inches).
e.Pistons
1. Honda Fit OEM standard size pistons, PN: 13010-RB1-000,
must be used.
2. The use of over size pistons is not permitted.
3. Piston dimensions and weights:
a. Maximum standard piston diameter, measured at a point
16mm from the bottom of the skirt: 72.990mm (2.8736
inches).
b. Centerline of wrist pin to crown maximum: 26.21mm
(1.032 inches).
c. Maximum overall height from skirt to crown edge:
47.80mm (1.882 inches).
d.Minimum weight: 198.0 grams (6.984 ounces).
e.Minimum weight of piston pin: 66 grams (2.25 ounces).
f. Combined minimum weight of piston, piston pin and
connecting rod: 543.5 grams (18.85 ounces).
4. Piston rings must be as used in the Fit engine. Two compression rings and one 3 piece oil control ring must be used.
a. The standard ring pack PN 13011-RB1-004 (Riken) or
13011-RB1-006 (Nippon).
b. No modification of the piston is permitted for the installation of rings.
c. Ring groove widths.
Top ring groove: 1.04mm (0.0409 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Middle groove: 1.02mm (0.04016 inches) +/- 0.01mm.
Oil ring groove: 2.00mm (0.07874) +/- 0.01mm.
d. Ring gaps must be from 0.006 inch to 0.024 inch.
f. Cylinder Head
GCR - 281
FCS
5. The crank pulsar must not be altered in any way.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
1. The only permitted heads are Honda PN:
12200-RB0-G00 (2009-2010) (US spec)
12200-RP3-A00 (2010-2012) (US spec)
12200-RB0-000 (Japan Spec)
2. The gasket face of the cylinder head may be resurfaced to a
service limit of 0.2mm (0.008 inches) based on a height of
120.0 mm (4.720 inches). However, the maximum compression ratio of 10.55:1 may not be exceeded.
3. The cylinder head must not be ported, polished or machined.
The original casting must not be modified in any way or
polished.
4. Head gasket to be stock Honda Fit PN: 12251-RB0-004.
Minimum compressed thickness of 0.76 mm +/- 0.05mm.
5. Cylinder head breather restrictor must be used as supplied by
HPD, unmodified. PN: 15262-F21S-A200.
g.Camshaft
1. The only permitted camshaft is PN: 14110-RB1-J00; must not
be modified.
2. The CMP pulse (cam trigger) plate must be as supplied, Honda
PN 14221-RB0-003.
3. The camshaft and crankshaft sprockets must be as supplied,
Honda PNs: 14211-RB0-J00 and 13621-RB0-003, respectively. Cam timing must not be altered; the timing chain
must be installed as specified in the Honda Fit factory service
manual. The timing chain/sprocket cover and crankshaft pulley
may not be altered. With the engine at TDC (No. 1 cylinder),
the “UP” mark on the camshaft sprocket must be at the top
and the TDC grooves on the camshaft sprocket must line up
with the top edge of the cylinder head.
a. Timing chain Honda PN: 14401-RB1-003.
b. Case assy, chain (sprocket cover) PN: 11410-RB1-000
c. Pulley comp, crankshaft, PN: 13810-RB0-003
d. Cam timing at lobe centers: (at 1mm after opening to 1mm
before closing).
i.
Exhaust: 119 degrees, +/-1.0 degree.
ii. Intake VTEC on: 111 degrees, +/-1.0 degree.
4. Camshaft profile and lobe centers shall be checked using the
official procedure published by the SCCA.
5. Cam lobe heights: Intake, Primary: 35.240mm, secondary:
36.200mm, exhaust: 35.490mm.
6. Valve lift measured at the retainer:
a. Exhaust: 9.200mm
b. Intake VTEC off: 8.680mm
c. Intake VTEC on: 9.900mm
7. Valve rockers must not be modified in any way.
GCR - 282
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
a. Honda PN: 14620-RB1-010 Arm Assy, rocker.
8. The VTEC system must be stock. The VTEC activation valve
must be stock. The HPD ECU will activate the VTEC at 5200
RPM. Honda PN: 15810RB0-G01.
h.Valves
FCS
OEM valves must be as used in the Fit.
1.Dimensions
a. Inlet PN: 14711-RB0-000 Exhaust PN: 14721-RB0-000
b. Maximum diameter:
23.15mm
Inlet: 28.15mm E x h a u s t :
c. Maximum overall length: Inlet: 119.15mm E x h a u s t :
117.85mm
d. Minimum stem diameter:
5.42mm
Inlet: 5.45mm
Exhaust:
2. Valve location or angle must not be moved.
3. Reshaping of the valves is strictly prohibited.
4. Valve guides may be replaced provided the position of the
valve is not changed and the replacement guides are Honda
OEM parts.
Inlet PN: 12204-PJ7-305 (over size)
Exhaust PN: 12205-PJ7-305 (over size).
5. It is permitted to replace or re-cut valve seats provided the
valve seat angles are stock Honda three angle cut per the
Honda Fit factory service manual.
6. Valve stem installed height must be per The Honda Fit factory
service manual:
Intake maximum: 46.8mm.
Exhaust maximum: 46.9mm.
7. Valve stem seals must be Honda OEM parts.
Honda PN: Intake: 12210-PZ1-004 seal A.
Honda PN: Exhaust: 12211-PZ1-003 or 12211-PZ1-004 seal B.
i.
Valve Springs
1. Valve springs are Honda OEM as specified in the Honda Fit
factory service manual.
a. Intake PN: 14761-RB1-003, free length: 48.55mm.
b. Exhaust PN: 14762-RB1-007, free length: 54.52mm.
2. Valve spring shims are not permitted.
j.
Compression Ratio
The maximum compression ratio is 10.55 to 1 utilizing Honda Fit
factory service manual limits. Carbon may be removed.
k. Intake Manifold and Fuel System
1. The lower manifold must be stock Honda Fit parts. It is not
permitted to add or remove material. No coating is permitted
GCR - 283
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
on the exterior or interior of the manifold. (SCCA Club Racing
will have a standard port model for comparison.)
Honda PN: 17100-RB1-000
2. The upper manifold, air box and throttle body assembly must
be used as delivered from HPD. External throttle return springs
are unrestricted.
a. Air filters are unrestricted. All air entering the engine must
pass through the air filter prior to entering the throttle
body. No devices such as, but not limited to, air horn(s),
trumpet(s), bell mouth(s), velocity stack(s), vortex generators and or turning vanes are permitted inside the air filter
or between the air filter and the throttle body.
3. All gaskets and sensors utilized on the inlet manifold from head
to throttle body must be Honda Fit OEM or HPD supplied.
a. Gasket In. manifold: 17105-RB0-004, Honda Fit OEM.
b. Gasket, EGR chamber cover: 17146-RB0-004, Honda Fit
OEM.
c. Gasket In. port: 17115-RB0-007, Honda Fit OEM.
d. Gasket, restrictor: 17399-F21S-A200, (2 required) HPD.
4. The fuel rail must be as supplied by HPD. Injectors must be
stock Honda Fit OEM parts (PN 16450-RNA-A01). The fuel
pressure regulator may be the unit supplied by HPD or any
alternate as long as the fuel pressure regulator serves no additional purpose. Injectors must be stock Honda Fit OEM parts
(PN 16450-RNA-A01).
5. The Honda Fit engine is required to have an HPD supplied air
inlet restrictor with internal diameter of 30.5mm and thickness of 3.175mm (0.125 inches) correctly installed within the
intake system. The restrictor may not be modified in any way;
the specified value can not be exceeded in any measurement
of the diameter. The restrictor centerline or shape must not be
altered. SCCA Club Racing will have go-no go gauges to verify
that all competitors are in compliance.
l.
Fuel Pump
1. The fuel pump is unrestricted.
m. Exhaust Manifold
1. The exhaust manifold must be as supplied by HPD, HPD part
#18150-F21S-A200 or #181850-F21S-B200.
2. The exhaust manifold exit may be shortened within HPD specified limits to direct the tail pipe as necessary. The tail pipe
must be made from a single wall thickness tubing for its’ entire
length and may not be swaged, shaped or formed in any way
other than bending required for fitment. The exhaust pipe
must maintain a 2 inch outside diameter from the manifold exit
to its outlet and must meet 9.1.1.B.12.s.9.
3. The Lambda sensor may be placed anywhere in the exhaust
system after the required exhaust manifold.
4. Exhaust coatings and wraps and heat shields may be used
to control engine bay temperatures and protect other components.
GCR - 284
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
n. Lubrication System
1. The oil pan must be as supplied by HPD. No modifications are
permitted.
a. The oil pressure sensor location must be as supplied by
HPD.
b. It is recommended that oil pressure be maintained at the
factory service manual specification.
3. The scavenge pump must be as supplied from HPD. No modifications are permitted.
a. Rotor length: 25.400mm (1.000 inches)
b. Rotor outside diameter: 44.400mm (1.748 inches)
4. Scavenge drive pulleys must be as supplied by HPD. Drive belt
manufacture is unrestricted provided the belt type and dimensions are as specified by HPD.
5. Hose routing and filter system are unrestricted.
o. Cooling System
1. Water pump and water pump pulley must be stock Honda Fit
parts. No modifications are permitted.
Honda PN: 19200-RB0-003 Pump, water.
Honda PN: 19224-RB0-000 Pulley, water pump.
2. The water inlet and outlet at engine must be as supplied by
HPD. The thermostat is unrestricted provided the housing is
not modified. The thermostat bypass may be plugged.
3. Drive belt manufacture is unrestricted provided it is designed
for use with Honda Fit crank pulley.
4. Radiator is unrestricted.
p. Electrical Equipment
1. The ECU and engine electrical harness must be as supplied by
HPD. No modifications are permitted.
2. The ECU will be a sealed unit supplied by HPD. The ECU maps
and inputs must not be modified The ECU is capable of being
swapped in the case of a protest.
3. Ignition coils must be stock Honda Fit, PN: 30520-RB0-003.
No modifications are permitted.
4. All sensors related to engine operating parameters and/or
supplied by HPD must be used. These sensors, their locations
and mounts, and their wiring harness leads may not be altered
or “piggy backed”. Any sensors required for analog type
gauges must be in addition to the HPD supplied sensors.
5. The alternator must be stock Honda Fit PN: 31100-RB0-004
or HPD part #3100-F21S-A200. The alternator drive pulley
must be stock. Alternator connections must be through the
HPD engine electrical harness only. The alternator must not be
disabled and must be accessible to SCCA officials.
GCR - 285
FCS
2. Oil feed pump must be stock Honda Fit. No modifications are
permitted. Oil pressure may be adjusted for wear.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
q.Flywheel
1. The stock Honda Fit flywheel must be used. No modifications
are permitted except for normal resurfacing for clutch wear.
a. Stock Honda flywheel PN: 22100-RB0-005.
b.Minimum weight with ring gear: 14.4 lbs.
2. The stock Honda Fit clutch must be used. No modifications are
permitted.
a. Honda PN: 22300-RB0-005; Quicksilver PN: QSHDR-411.
b.Minimum weight without friction disk: 7.0 lbs.
3. Only stock Honda friction disk or friction disk from Quicksilver
Race Engines may be used. No modifications are permitted.
a. Honda PN: 22200-RB0-005.
b. Weight of new friction disk: 2.1 lbs.
r.Miscellaneous
1. All emission control devices must be removed and blocked off
by the blanking plate provided by HPD, except the VTEC activation valve. The VTEC activation valve must be retained; it
must be functioning.
2. Air filter is unrestricted.
3. The use of unleaded premium “pump” gas: 91 – 93 RON is
recommended.
4. The use of the following non-standard replacement parts is
permitted provided their use does not result in any unauthorized modification of any other component.
a. Fasteners – nuts, bolts, screws, washers, studs, etc. Head
bolts, rod bolts, flywheel bolts, and crank pulley bolt must
be used as provided by Honda and HPD.
b. Gaskets and seals, except those specified in the above
rules.
c. Spark plugs.
d. Mechanical tachometer and analog gauges.
e. Oil and lubricants are unrestricted. HPD strongly recommends the use of oil and lubricants as described in the
Honda Fit factory service manual.
f. The oil filler cap may be removed and plugged.
15. Ford NE series and Pinto Engines
The Ford 2 liter single overhead camshaft “NE” series engine and the
1971-74 Pinto/Capri 2 liter single overhead camshaft engine shall conform
to the following specifications. The nominal bore is 90.84mm and the
nominal stroke is 76.95mm (Note: All blocks shall contain casting number
HM6015BA, HM6015AA, HM6015BB, HM6015AB, HM6015DA, or
HM6015AD. Dashes in the casting number are not relevant.). Production tolerances are permitted providing the total swept volume does not
exceed 2000cc.
a. The rockers shall remain entirely unmodified. Alternate manufacturers may be used as long as the original materials and dimensions
GCR - 286
are the same. Camshafts must be from Ford Motor Company, or
Crower part #E57553 FF2000, or any camshaft that is a replica
of the original and of the same material may be used. Camshaft
geometry shall be stock. An alternate optional camshaft, Elgin
part number 2000FC, may be used only in the original iron head.
Regrinding camshaft lobes is permitted as long as the camshaft
lobe center is 112° ± 2°. Offset keys are permitted. Tuftriding or
Parkerizing is permitted. Maximum valve lift at determined points
by camshaft rotation will be established. The use of a low rate
substitute valve spring is permitted. Load characteristics of special
checking spring: twelve (12) lbs., at 1.417 inches, thirty (30) lbs.,
at 1.000 inches. An adjustable camshaft sprocket which retains
the same number of teeth and pitch as the stock sprocket may be
used.
b. A standard crankshaft shall be used or any crankshaft that is a
replica of the original crankshaft and of the same material may be
used. Spot machining to achieve balance is permitted. Tuftriding,
Parkerizing, shot peening, shot blasting, and polishing are permitted.
Minimum weight: twenty-seven point five (27.5) lbs.
c. The flywheel shall be a standard component or the approved alternate Elite-001. The minimum weight is 10.5 lbs. with ring gear.
The flywheel may be machined to achieve minimum weight. Spot
machining to achieve balance is permitted. Flywheel bolts are free
and locating dowels are permitted. A 1600 GT starter ring may be
fitted. The use of any single plate clutch is permitted provided no
modification is made to the flywheel other than changing the points
of attachment of the clutch to the flywheel. Carbon fiber clutches
are not permitted.
d. Maximum compression ratio will be controlled as follows:
1. Minimum Cylinder Head combustion chamber volume 49cc
(not including head gasket). Polishing and/or tooling of the
cylinder head to achieve only the required combustion chamber
volume is permitted.
2. Standard Ford gasket, Fel-Pro #8361PT, or Ferrea part number
G50100 may be used. Gaskets will have a minimum thickness
of 0.9mm, minimum diameter of cylinder aperture of 92mm.
3. Pistons shall not protrude above cylinder block surface at TDC.
e. It is permissible to reshape inlet and exhaust port by removal of
metal within limits. Addition of material in any form is prohibited.
Maximum diameter of inlet port at manifold head face 39.5mm.
Maximum dimensions of exhaust port at manifold face 35.5mm x
27mm. The distance between the valve centers and the angles of
the valves shall not be altered.
f. Pistons shall be standard Ford Mahle, AE Hepolite, CP, or J&E.
Pistons must be unmodified in any way except for balancing and as
detailed herein.
The following combinations are permitted:
1. Mahle piston P/N 80HM6102LA with rings, pin, connecting rod
(with bolts), but without bearings:Minimum permitted weight
= 1332.5 grams.
2. Mahle piston P/N 85HM6102DA with rings, pin, connecting
rod (with bolts), but without bearings: Minimum permitted
weight = 1240 grams.
GCR - 287
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
NOTE: This piston may have either casting #90V108 or
#90V118.
3. AE Hepolite piston P/N 21426, casting P/N 21426 (AE Hepolite) with rings, pin, connecting rod (with bolts), but without
bearings: Minimum permitted weight = 1240 grams.
4. CP piston P/N IV 2.0 LTR with rings, pin, connecting rod (with
bolts), but without bearings: Minimum permitted weight =
1240 grams. Part number and Ivey logo stamped on wrist pin
bosses.
5. JE piston P/N M-6102-B200 with rings, pin, connecting rod
(with bolts), but without bearings: Minimum permitted weight
= 1240 grams.
NOTE: M-6102-B200 piston assembly is now made by JE and is
visually different. I.D. Marks: M-6102-B200, Ford racing logo. All
marks pin stamped on wrist pin bosses.
Rings are unrestricted provided that:
A. One oil control and two compression rings are used.
B. No modification is made to the piston for the installation of
the rings.
Localized machining of the gudgeon pin bosses to achieve balance
and weight by simple machining; all external surfaces, dimensions,
and profiles shall remain standard with the exception of the top
surface of the piston crown which may have simple machining to
achieve balance, and as required in Section 9.1.1.B.3.d.
g. Valves may be of Ford manufacture or Ferrea part numbers
VSOIN200 and VSOEX2000. Valves shall remain standard; no
reprofiling or polishing is permitted.
The original forty-five (45) degree seat angle shall be maintained.
Maximum face diameter inlet 42.2mm.
Maximum face diameter exhaust 36.2mm.
Maximum valve stem diameter 8.4mm.
h. Full connectng rods may be standard Ford, Cosworth, Oliver, or
Crower. The approved Crower part numbers are SP93230B-4 or
SP93230PF-4. Any rod bolts may be used. Floating piston pins may
be used. Standard rod length must be 5.00 inches (+.005” -.010”).
Machining is permitted to remove metal from the balancing bosses
to achieve balance only. Tuftriding, Parkerizing, shot peening, shot
blasting, polishing, etc., are permitted.
i.
Maximum valve lift against cam angle with zero tappet clearance:
(Lift measured in mm)
Angle
0
5
10
Standard Camshaft
Intake
Exhaust
Opening
Closing
Opening
Closing
10.442
10.442
10.442
10.442
10.36
10.36
10.36
10.36
10.11
10.11
10.11
10.11
GCR - 288
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
Angle
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.59
1.5
0.86
0.65
0.54
0.46
0.37
0.26
0.2
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.58
1.47
0.81
0.56
0.43
0.33
0.19
0.08
0.01
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.58
1.47
0.81
0.56
0.43
0.33
0.19
0.08
0.01
9.69
9.11
8.37
7.45
6.38
5.17
3.86
2.59
1.5
0.86
0.65
0.54
0.8
0.37
0.26
0.2
Alternate Camshaft
Intake
Exhaust
Opening
Closing
Opening
Closing
11.182
11.182
10.149
10.149
11.102
11.092
10.07
10.071
10.853
10.821
9.831
9.829
10.423
10.363
9.426
9.415
9.821
9.721
8.854
8.826
9.069
8.916
8.117
8.073
8.177
7.955
7.205
7.154
7.131
6.85
6.132
6.071
5.96
5.624
4.92
4.866
4.702
4.313
3.611
3.6
3.425
3.01
2.346
2.38
2.242
1.851
1.325
1.406
1.278
0.994
0.722
0.825
0.642
0.509
0.488
0.604
0.334
0.307
0.385
0.524
0.215
0.208
0.303
0.461
0.134
0.13
0.224
0.404
0.064
0.063
0.146
0.343
0.022
0.024
0.09
0.279
j. Engines will be mounted upright, and aligned fore and aft in the
chassis.
GCR - 289
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
k. A single carburetor only will be used on a standard inlet manifold.
The carburetor will be a Weber 32/36 DGV 26/27mm venturi, its
origin being from a 1600 GT “Kent” or 2000 SOHC NE engine.
The Holly 5200 32/36 carburetor also may be used; carburetor
with the swaged fuel inlet fitting shall be replaced by drilling and
tapping the carburetor body for a threaded fitting. The air cleaner
may be removed and a trumpet fitted, and jets may be changed,
both throttles may open together, cold start devices and diffused
bar may be removed, internal and external antisurge pipes may be
fitted, and seals on emission control carburetors may be removed.
The bottom of the lower column portion of the auxiliary venturi
may be machined for purposes of high speed enrichment. No other
modifications are permitted. Chokes (venturi) shall remain standard
and no polishing or profiling is permitted.
l.
The addition of material by any means to any component is prohibited.
m. It is permitted, as a means of repair, to replace damaged valve
seats and cylinder bores by replacement cast iron valve seat inserts
and cast iron cylinder liners; valve guides may be replaced with
cast iron or bronze, all to standard dimensions. Repairs to the cam
towers to facilitate replacement of cam bearing and/or replacements of broken or cracked towers is permitted as long as the cam
bearing center line is not changed and that one original cam tower
is retained. Line boring of cam bearing caps is permitted.
n. Balancing of reciprocating and rotating parts is permitted only by
removal of metal from locations so provided by the manufacturer.
o. Non‑standard rocker covers are permitted providing they in no way
improve the performance of the engine.
p. Standard valve spring retainers shall be used, and single valve
springs only are permitted. Shims are permitted, and valve springs
are otherwise free.
q. Exhaust system and manifold are unrestricted, within SCCA safety
regulations.
r.
Lubrication system is unrestricted; dry sump is permitted. Localized
machining of the cylinder block is permitted to allow fitting of the
oil pump.
s. Oil coolers are unrestricted.
t. Cooling system unrestricted. The radiator, if housed in or incorporating a cowl air‑scoop deflector, shall comply with body regulations.
u. Fuel Pump: Unrestricted.
v. Distributors are unrestricted providing they retain the original drive
and location. The distributor is defined as the component which
triggers the L.T. current and distributes the H.T. current. The Ignition Timing may only be varied by vacuum and/or mechanical
means. It is prohibited to use any other method or component to
trigger, distribute, or time the ignition.
w. Only the standard inlet manifold shall be used.
The ports may be reshaped by the removal of metal as long as the
following dimensions are maintained: maximum size at head face
= 1.437” (36.5mm), maximum size at carburetor flange = 3.405”
(86.5mm) x 1.595” (40.5mm). The carburetor seat face may be
machined to horizontal in the fore to aft plane. The diameter of the
GCR - 290
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
x. Gaskets and seals are unrestricted except for the cylinder head
gasket that has the requirements listed in B.15.d.2. and the intake
gasket. The intake gasket thickness must not exceed 1.1mm.
Intake gasket is not to be construed as a spacer.
y. Pump, fan, and generator drive pulleys are unrestricted.
z. The crankcase breather may be altered or removed, but all breathers
shall discharge into a catch tank.
aa. Mechanical tachometer drives may be fitted.
bb. Generators are optional.
cc. Standard oversize and undersize bearings are permitted. This does
not allow reducing the bearing surface area by reducing the width
of standard bearings.
dd. The use of non‑standard replacement fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws,
studs, and washers) which are not connected with or which do not
support the intake manifold or any moving parts of the engine is
permitted.
ee. Only modifications or additions specifically covered by these regulations are permitted. All engine components not covered by these
regulations shall remain completely standard and unmodified. When
a system is specified to be “unrestricted” (e.g. paragraphs r and t),
the restrictions of this paragraph do not apply.
ff. The use of the Fast Forward aluminum cylinder head is permitted.
The following dimensions must be maintained.
Intake port maximum volume
70.0 cc.
Exhaust port maximum volume
52.0 cc.
Intake port surface to exhaust port surface 5.580 +/- 0.020 inches
Intake valve center line to (adjacent) intake valve center line 4.015
+/- 0.015 inches
Exhaust valve center line to (adjacent) exhaust valve center line
4.015 +/- 0.015 inches
The machine tool marks in the intake and exhaust ports must remain
untouched for 0.750 inches from the respective gasket surfaces.
gg. Any spark plugs may be used.
16. Ford Zetec Engine
The Ford Zetec ZX3 engine shall conform to the following specifications
and may be modified only as specifically allowed. If these specifications
do not explicitly allow a modification, then it may not be done. The philosophy of the Zetec engine in FC is to allow limited engine rebuilds but no
performance modifications to the engine. Blue printing, balancing, head
porting, polishing, etc. are strictly prohibited and against the spirit of the
Zetec formula. Where Ford part numbers are specified, normal industry
part number supersession is expected and the superseding part numbers
are automatically included.
a. a.The cylinder head may not be ported or polished. Machining the
cylinder head is not permitted except as specified in these rules.
GCR - 291
FCS
ports may exceed the above listed dimensions if the casting bore is
untouched and in its original state. The water passages in the inlet
manifold may be plugged. Holes in the inlet manifold resulting from
the removal of emission/vacuum lines shall be plugged.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
A standard three- angle “production” valve job is required and the
only allowed angles are those defined in the Ford factory manual.
The intake valve seats must be 30° 45° 70° with the 45° face a
minimum 1.5 mm wide. The exhaust valve seats must be 30° 45°
55° with the 45° seat 1.5 mm wide minimum. Valve seats and
guides may be replaced providing that they remain in the original
stock locations. The camshaft, valves, springs, and shim/bucket
com- ponents must be original Ford parts and may not be modified
in any way. Only original unmodified Ford parts may be used for
direct replacement. The camshafts must remain as ground by Ford;
no polishing is permitted. The head may not be surfaced or milled
beyond the minimum thickness of 5.230” measured between the
cam cover seating surface and the lower plane of the head.
Only the Ford #RFYS4E6090AC or RFYS4E6090AD head is
allowed. The only allowed camshafts are the Ford #L913B YSAA
intake and #L913B C2B exhaust. The original, unmodified Ford
camshaft and crankshaft timing pulleys must be used. Required
camshaft timings are as follows:
Intake centerline
116-117 degrees ATDC
Exhaust centerline
106-107 degrees BTDC
b. Only original Ford or Sealed Power H872cp pistons may be used.
Crankshaft, and rods may be replaced only with standard original
Ford replacement parts. The crankshaft, rod and main bearing journals may be reground or polished for the purpose of installing oversize main or rod bearings. The big end of the connecting rod may be
honed to fit .002 inch larger rod bearings. Connecting rod bearings
may be replaced with unmodified bearings which are specifically
designated for use in this engine. The required original crankshaft
main bearing journal dimension is 2.282-2.283 inches and the
required original crankshaft rod journal dimension is 1.846-1.847
inches. The corresponding main journal dimensions for oversized
bearings are either 2.273-2.274 inches or 2.263-2.264 inches;
the corresponding rod journal dimensions for oversized bearings
are either 1.837-1.838 inches or 1.827-1.828 inches. The crankshaft centerline to deck dimension is 8.378 inches and may not be
altered. The main bearing housing bore is 2.452-2.453 inches and
the rod housing bore is 1.9642-1.9650 inches. Only original Ford
rod bolts with a minimum weight of 24.6 grams or ARP rod bolts
with a minimum weight of 23.5 grams may be used.
c. Only original stock Ford replacement piston rings (part
number 2S4Z6148AA) or Hastings Rings (part number 2M4887
Std) may be used. The ring end gaps may not be altered and must
remain as manufactured. All of the rings must be installed including
the complete oil scraper assembly. The piston bore may be honed
solely to allow piston ring seating. The first and second compression rings must be installed in the positions designated by the
manufacturer.
d. All surfaces on the head, block, rods, pistons, and crankshaft must
remain as manufactured by Ford and may not be altered in any
way unless specifically provided for in these rules. The original
casting marks and cast surfaces must remain as-cast and also
meet all of the Ford design values and tolerances as stated in
the Ford factory manual or as delineated in these specifications. The block may not be decked. Only Ford Zetec ZX3 blocks
with block numbers #RFYS4G6015AA, or #RFYS4G6015AD
or #RFYS4G6015AE are permitted. The blocks may be sleeved
however all bore tolerances must remain stock or as otherwise
GCR - 292
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
e. e.
Flywheel: The minimum weight is 8.0 lbs. and any weight
removal from the specified flywheel must come from the clutch
plate surface. The friction and clamping force surface of the
flywheel may be resurfaced. Only the Quarter Master #QM107160
flywheel may be used. It is permitted to install a new ring gear on
the flywheel.
f.
Any 7¼ inch single plate or double plate, non-carbon fiber clutch is
allowed.
g. Any oil pan is allowed. The oil pan may not contain an oil scraper
between the oil pan and the block. No device in the oil pan may be
contoured to the crankshaft assembly to function as an oil scraper
nor may any device be closer to the rotating crankshaft assembly
than 0.500 inches.
h. Any three-stage oil pump with a maximum of two scavenge stages
is allowed. The maximum scavenge rotor dimensions are 1.600
inches in diameter and 1.375 inches in length. The maximum pressure rotor dimensions are 1.600 inches in diameter and 1.025
inches in length.
i. The exhaust system manifold tubing OD must be 1.5 inches (as
measured 1 inch or more from the face of the head) and the manifold tubes must be a minimum of 24 inches in length and must
terminate into a single exhaust pipe through a 4 into 1 collector.
The collector angles must be the standard 15 degree bend, (30
degree included angle) with an exit diameter of 2 inches. The
tail pipe must be a minimum of 24 inches in length. The tail pipe
includes a muffler, if present, as long as the inlet and outlet pipes
of the muffler are the same diameter as the tail pipe. 4 into 2 into 1
exhaust collectors or reduced diameter venturi sections are prohibited.
j.
ECU: The Pectel T2 or the Performance PE-3 unit is required. The
current specification SCCA Club map or 2013 Pro map as published
by SCCA is required. The SCCA Club and 2013 Pro map are available on the SCCA website.
k. Intake manifold and fuel injection components: The Quicksilver
Race Engines (QSRE) intake air scoop, intake manifold, throttle
bodies, air horns, fuel rail, injector system, pressure regulator and
carbon fiber air scoop with filter are required and must be used
with no modifications of any kind unless specifically provided for in
these rules. (Due to the aging of the air scoops alternative means
of securing the filter will be permitted which may include modifications to the debris tube and other mounting hardware. The
air scoop however must have a minimum .430 inch operable air
bleed at its rear most point.) The only allowed intake manifold and
throttle body combination is the #0138 manifold available through
QSRE. Only 19 pound fuel injectors may be used and they may not
be modified in any way. Fuel injectors may be replaced only with
stock Ford injector part number #0280155887 XS4U-AA or
Accel injector part number ACC150819.
GCR - 293
FCS
provided for in these rules. The required compression ratio is 9.6:1,
the required standard bore is 3.3390–3.3420 inches and the
required stroke is 3.461 +/-.004 inches. The maximum bore dimension of 3.3420 inch is intended to allow for cylinder wear only. It is
not permitted to machine to this dimension. This measurement will
be taken .250 below the block deck where the bore is untouched
by the piston ring.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
l.
Intake restrictor must meet FPIR specifications: The QSRE #1975
intake restrictor must be used and may not be modified in any way.
The restrictor internal diameter is 1.340. The restrictor is to be
placed between the air scoop mounting flange and the intake
manifold.
m. Engines will be mounted and aligned fore and aft in the chassis
n. The addition of material by any means to any component is prohibited
o. Non-standard rocker covers are permitted providing they in no way
improve the performance of the engine.
p. Oil coolers are unrestricted.
q. A liquid cooling system is mandatory, but radiators are unrestricted.
The stock water pump may be modified; electric water pumps are
prohibited.
r. Fuel pump is unrestricted.
s. Gaskets and seals are unrestricted except for
1. cylinder head gasket, Ford part number XS7Z6051CA or Victor
Reinz part number 54502
2. a continuous o-ring of cross-section of 0.100 inches must be
fitted to each intake runner groove between the intake manifold and the head which to ensures that no air by-passes the
o-ring seal
t. Pump, fan, and generator drive pulleys are unrestricted.
u. The use of non-standard replacement fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws,
studs, and washers) which are not connected with or which do not
support the intake manifold or any moving parts of the engine are
permitted.
v. Any tapered seat 14mm x 25mm (.984 inch) reach spark plugs
may be used.
w. Ford OEM coil P/N 988Z12029A or any other single OEM type
replacement coil is allowed.
17. Transmission
Any transmission may be used with not more than four (4) forward gears
and an operational reverse gear. The change gear ratios are unrestricted.
a. The use of an automatic and/or sequentially shifted gearbox is
prohibited.
b. Electronic and/or electro-mechanical assisted gear change mechanisms are prohibited.
c. Gearboxes with shafts that are transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the chassis are not allowed. The sole exceptions are the gearbox
final drive (crownwheel) shaft axis and final drive shafts (half
shafts).
d. All change gears must be located in the case aft of the final drive.
18. Final Drive
Any final drive unit may be used except:
a. Drive shall be to rear wheels only.
b. The differential shall be of standard “open” type and cannot be
modified in any way to limit its normal function. Torque biasing,
limited slip, and locked differentials are prohibited.
GCR - 294
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
19. Clutch
a. Formula F: The use of any single plate clutch on the Ford Cortina and
Kent is permitted provided no modification is made to the flywheel
other than changing the points of attachment of the clutch to the
flywheel, and provided that it shall have an operable clutch system.
Carbon Fiber clutches are not permitted.
b. The Honda Fit shall use the clutch specified in Section B.14.
Formula Continental
See B.15 and B.16.
20. Weight
A. Formula F
1. Ford Cortina Engine: 1060 lbs.
2. Ford Kent and Honda Fit Engines: 1110 lbs.
3. Cars complying with the English FF rules under the Alternate
Vehicle Allowance table add 25lbs.
B. Formula Continental
1. Pinto Engine: 1200 lbs.
2. Pinto with aluminum cylinder head: 1200 lbs.
3. Zetec Engine: 1200 lbs.
21. Cars Registered Prior To 1/1/86
The following specifications are for cars registered prior to January 1,
1986 and for Technical Inspection only. No cars are to be built to these
specifications as of January 1, 1986.
A. Chassis/Frame
The chassis is defined as the frame. It shall be a steel space frame.
Monocoque type structures are prohibited. Sheet material affixed to the
frame by welding, bonding, or riveting, or by bolts or screws which are
six (6) inch centers are defined as stress bearing panels.
FCS
The undertray, for safety reasons, shall be a stress bearing panel. Its
curvature shall not exceed one (1) inch. The mountings for brake and
clutch pedals and cylinders, and for the instrument panel and the bulkhead
(panel) behind the driver may be stress‑bearing. No other stress-bearing
panels are permitted.
Brackets for mounting components, such as the engine, transmission,
suspension pick‑ups, instruments, clutch, and brake components, and
body panels may be non‑ferrous, of any shape, and fastened to the frame
in any manner.
Gussets are defined as of steel, fastened to a maximum of two (2)
members, and are specifically permitted.
GCR - 295
FCS
c. Electronically controlled differentials are prohibited.
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
The firewall portion of the bulkhead (panel) shall extend the full
width of the cockpit and be as high as the top of the carburetor.
Forward facing air ducts may be installed for the purpose of delivering
air directly to the engine area. Air duct openings may be
located within the cockpit provided the firewall is extended to
prevent flame and debris from reaching the driver. (Any shape may
be used to form firewall extension.) All firewall inlets shall prohibit
passage of flame and debris.
B. Suspension and Running Gear
Suspension is defined as the system of springs, shock absorbers,
A-arms, links, etc., supporting the vehicle on its axles. Sway bars,
sway bar links, steering rack housings, steering links, etc., are not
classified as suspension or running gear for this application.
All components shall be of steel, with the exception of hubs, hub
adapters, rear hub carriers, and bearings and bushings. Front hub
carrier material shall be of steel or aluminum alloy. The materials
for front and rear hub carriers on cars manufactured after January
1, 1983 will be only steel or aluminum alloy. Springs: steel only,
titanium is prohibited.
Shock absorbers: Design: Unrestricted.
Casing Material: Steel or aluminum alloy.
All components which are not defined as chassis/frame or suspension
or running gear are unrestricted, unless otherwise restricted by
the GCR. Titanium is prohibited.
C. Body
1. Definition of Bodywork
Internally: All visible parts of the passenger compartment.
a. The bodywork opening giving access to the cockpit shall
have the following minimal dimensions:
Length: 60cm (23.622 inches)
Width: 45cm (17.72 inches)
This width extends over a length of 30cm (11.811 inches)
minimum. This minimal rectangular opening may exist
anywhere forward of the firewall. Forward facing roll bar/cage
bracing and required padding will not be considered in these
dimensions.
b. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
manipulation or removal of any part or panel.
c. Bodywork, including fuel tanks, shall not exceed a maximum
width of 95cm (37.4 inches).
d. No part of the bodywork and aerodynamic devices shall exceed
the height of a horizontal plane 90cm (35.4 inches) above the
ground. The safety roll bar/roll cage and engine air box are
not included in this height restriction. Measurements are to be
made in any condition, driver on board.
GCR - 296
e. No part of the bodywork shall extend more than 100cm (39
inches) behind the centerline of the rear axles.
f. Any specific part of the car which has an aerodynamic influence on the stability of the vehicle shall be firmly fixed with no
provisions for adjustment to vary downforce.
g. Side‑mounted radiators (behind the front wheels) may
extend beyond the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation, but not
beyond a vertical plane passing through the centerlines of the
front and rear tires. Any portion of a radiator that extends
beyond the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation cannot be covered
with any type of shrouding. Radiators mounted in front of the
front wheels are considered front mounted and cannot exceed
the 95cm (37.4 inches) limitation.
2. Wings and other airfoil devices which have the principal effect
of creating aerodynamic down-thrust are prohibited. Airfoil: Any
device or part of a car (excepting normal and conventionally styled
bodywork) which has a principal effect of creating aerodynamic
downthrust. Within this definition may be included forward facing
gaps or openings in the bodywork, but shall not include spoilers in
the form of raised surfaces, continuous with the body surface, and
not wider than the body surface.
3. It is the intent of these rules to minimize the use of “ground effects”
to achieve aerodynamic down-force on the vehicle. Thus, for the
full width of the body between the front and rear axles, the lower
surface (surface licked by the air-stream) shall not exceed 2.54cm
(1 inch) deviation from the horizontal in any longitudinal section
through that surface. (This is not to be interpreted as requiring
a floor pan beneath the motor, transaxle, transmission, or final
drive housing.) No aerodynamic devices (e.g., skirts, body sides,
etc.) may extend more than 1cm (0.394 inches) below the lower
surface of the tub or chassis floor to the rear of the front axle. Seat
buckets or other protrusions shall not circumvent this rule. It is
not permitted to duct air through any part of the bodywork for the
purpose of providing aerodynamic downforce on the car. All ducted
air for heat exchangers (water/oil) shall pass through those heat
exchangers.
4. Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm (9.843 inches) to
the rear of the cockpit.
GCR - 297
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
FF/FC Dimensions - Table 4
Dimension (refer to drawing)
Measurement (cm)
A. Maximum rear wing overhang from rear wheel axis
B. Maximum front overhang from front wheel axis
C. Maximum wing height measured from the ground with the driver on board
80
100
90
20-60 FC; 10-60 FF
D. Exhaust height measured from the ground
E. Maximum height of any aerodynamic device forward of the front wheel axis
F. Minimum safety rollover bar height inline with driver’s spine
Rim height
92
5
G. Minimum allowed helmet clearance
H. Maximum width - To be taken on the wheel at the axle centerline.
I. Maximum rear aerofoil width (includes endplates)
185
95
135
K. Maximum nose width
L. Minimum cockpit opening
45
M. Minimum cockpit parallel opening length
30
N. Minimum cockpit overall opening length
60
95
R. Maximum body width behind front wheels
S. Maximum exhaust length from rear wheel axis
80 FC; 100 FF
T. Maximum rear body overhang from rear wheel axis
80 FC; 100 FF
7. Minimum wheelbase
200
5. Minimum track
120
F‑2000 SPECIFICATION
1. Safety roll‑over bar.
5. Front track.
2. Substantial support structure.
6. Rear track.
3. Crushable structure.
7. Wheelbase
4. Substantial structure.
Maximum height is measured with the driver aboard. Maximum height
excludes safety rollover bar on which there is no maximum height.
GCR - 298
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Car (FC/FF) Category Specifications
Alternate Vehicle Allowance
Car
Class
Notes:
Cars complying
with English FF
rules.
FF only
Car must comply with published English FF regulations (Formula Ford 1600 – Formula Ford Championship of Great Britain: Dated 01/01/2010; Version
1) Article 3 (Bodywork & Dimensions); Article 13
(Cockpit); Article 15 (Safety Structure); and Appendix
A excepting Wheel width and ground clearance. Allowed Engines: 1600cc Ford Kent or 1500cc Honda
per SCCA rules. Tires, wheels, transmission, weight
and all other items not specifically governed by the
aforementioned English rules must comply with current SCCA FF rules. Competitors must have the English FF rules in their possession and present same
upon request.
Stohr 98 FF
FF only
Homologation numbers 990089 and 990094 permitted allowance for using chassis tubes for radiator water tubes.
GCR - 299
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
C.
FORMULA VEE PREPARATION RULES
1.Background
A. History and philosophy of the class
Formula Vee was recognized by SCCA in 1963. The class is highly
restricted, originally requiring the use of genuine VW parts “from the
standard Volkswagen 1200 Sedan Series type 1, US model sedan as
imported by VW” in the engine, drivetrain and suspension. Over the
years, the rules have changed slowly to maintain parts availability and
allow a gradual evolution of the class. However, the focus remains
the same: to provide a cost effective, highly competitive class that,
through consistent and tightly controlled component and preparation
rules, emphasizes driver ability rather than technological development
of the car. Today, as throughout its long history, FV is one of the most
highly subscribed classes in SCCA. The goal of these rules is to maintain both the competitiveness and cost effectiveness of the class.
B.Definition
A formula for single seat, open wheel racing cars based on standard
Volkswagen 1200 series Type 1, U.S. model sedan (imported by VW)
components, and restrictive in specifications so as to emphasize driver
ability and preparation rather than design and technology of the car.
Formula Vee is a Restricted Class. Therefore, any allowable modifications, changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation may be required. Refer to
section 9.2.2. for details.
No component of the engine, power train, front suspension, brakes
shall be altered, modified, or substituted unless specifically authorized.
Mass-produced, direct replacement components may be substituted for
the following as long as they are of the same material and dimensionally
identical to the original VW components they replace:
•
VW transmission components
•
Rear axle components
•
Front suspension
•
Brake components
These replacement parts must be generally available to all competitors
and must offer no competitive advantage over the original VW parts.
Replacement engine components are allowed as described in section
C.5.
Any external surface of the suspension, brakes, and transmission/ rear
axle may be painted, plated, or anodized.
Engine components shall be assembled in standard configuration.
Exceeding the wear limits specified in the VW manual or other official
VW guides is allowed provided that tolerances, dimensions, and specifications stated in the GCR are met.
2.
Weight and Dimensions
Minimum weight as qualified or raced, with driver: 1025 lbs.
Wheel base, minimum: 81.5”
Wheel base, maximum:
83.5”
Track, front: Standard VW – maximum 52.5” (no spacers allowed)
Track, rear: 49.125” minimum, 50.750 maximum (no spacers allowed)
Overall length, minimum: 123” (includes exhaust)
GCR - 300
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
3.
Suspension
A. The front suspension and steering shall be standard VW Sedan as
defined herein, or an exact replica of the same material and dimensionally identical. The following modifications are allowed:
1. Removal or modification of spring packs including the use of
ride height adjusters incorporated into the front beam provided
they are not adjustable from the cockpit. At least one spring
pack shall be retained as the primary spring media for the front
suspension.
2. The use of any anti sway bar(s), mounting hardware, and
trailing arm locating spacers.
3. The use of any direct acting, tube type shock absorber(s)
mounted in a longitudinal, vertical plane and acting through the
standard mounting points. Spring shocks and linkage activated
shocks are prohibited.
4. Relocation of the steering gearbox to any position utilizing an
appropriate mounting structure and replacements of the tie
rods. Steering damper mount and/or the steering box locating
bumps may be removed.
5. Any desired pitman arm may be used.
6. Steering column may be altered or replaced and any steering
wheel may be used.
7. Standard steering arms may be altered or replaced and speedometer cable hole may be plugged. No other modification of
the wheel spindle is permitted. Non-VW replacement spindles
shall maintain the same bearing dimensions and locations and
shall maintain the geometric relationship between the spindle
and the king pin bore and boss.
Wheel tethers are recommended. If wheel tethers are used,
a hole may be drilled in the spindle for the purpose of attachment.
8. The rubber portion of the bump stop and any portion or all of
the bump stop horn may be removed up to its base at the beam
upright.
9. Caster, camber, and toe in/out settings are unrestricted. Offset
link pin suspension bushings and alternate locating spacers are
permitted. Shims/spacers used solely for camber adjustment
are open. Clearancing of the link pin carrier and/or trailing arms
to eliminate binding is permitted. No other modifications to the
link pin carrier are permitted.
10.No structure, item, or component (including the battery) other
than bodywork, can protrude further forward than ten (10)
inches from the front of the lower axle beam tube. Any item
protruding further than eight (8) inches must include a vertical
safety plate. This plate must be constructed of no less than
.060” 6061-T-6 aluminum or no less than 16 gauge steel. The
plate shall have a minimum frontal surface area of 42 square
inches, and shall have a height of not less than four (4) inches
and a width of not less than six (6) inches. The plate may
have no more than ½ inch curvature or deflection from the
GCR - 301
FCS
Overall length, maximum: 127” (includes exhaust)
Body height at firewall (bottom of frame to top of bodywork),
minimum:25”
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
vertical plane, and shall be attached to the chassis (frame) at
all four corners. The lower braces shall not exceed a 15-degree
upward angle when measured from the horizontal plane of the
lower frame tubes.
If a vented lead acid battery is mounted in front of the axle
beam, it shall be encased in a marine-type container.
It is recommended that the front area of the nose be filled with
foam to aid in impact absorption.
11.Alternate spindle from cip1.com part number C26-412-020
and alternate spindle carrier C26-412-025 are allowed.
B. The rear axle assembly shall be standard VW sedan as defined
herein with axle location provided by a single locating arm on each
axle.
1. The rear axle tube may be rotated about its axis.
2. Coil spring(s) shall provide the primary springing medium, with
telescopic shock absorber(s) mounted inside the spring(s).
Cables, straps, or other positive stops may be used to limit
positive camber. An anti roll bar or camber control device may
also be used. When said anti roll bar or camber control device
is removed, the required coil springs shall continue to perform
functionally.
3. The shock absorber mounts may be modified.
C. Wheels shall be standard fifteen (15) inch X 4J as used on the
1200cc and 1300cc VW sedan as defined herein, or any steel (15)
inch X 4.5J wheel within the track dimensions of C.2. Wheels
may be balanced only by the use of standard automotive balance
weights (adhesive or clip on). Hub cap clips shall be removed.
D. Any tire size may be fitted, except that ungrooved radial race tires
(radial slicks) are not allowed.
4.Brakes
A. Brake drums, backing plates, and wheel cylinders shall be standard
VW Sedan as defined herein, or an exact replica of the same material and dimensionally identical. Ribbed type rear drums (VW Part
# N113-501 615 D or ICP Part # 113 501 615 D) may be used in
place of the 1200 series rear brake drums. Rear backing plates may
be from any Type 1 model year.
B. These cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated
by a single control. In case of a leak or failure at any point in the
system, effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two
wheels. Any master cylinder(s) may be used.
C. A separate hand brake (emergency brake) is not required. Removal
of the hand brake and operating mechanism is permitted.
5.Engine
A. The engine shall be a standard VW power plant, as normally fitted
to VW sedans as defined herein. Any engine part(s), listed by the
manufacturer (VW) as a current, superseding, replacement part for
the standard VW 1200 series, Type 1, U.S. model sedan and interchangeable with the original part(s), may be used. Turbocharging is
not permitted.
B. The engine/transmission shall be mounted in the chassis with the
transmission to the rear.
GCR - 302
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
C. The following component parts may be replaced with that of other
manufacture, provided said part is of the same material, is dimensionally identical, and meets all other tolerances and specifications
stated in the GCR.
2. Cylinder Heads
3. Cylinders (an O ring for centering is permitted).
4. Pistons and wrist pins minimum combined weight without clips
or piston rings = 330.0 grams.
a. Piston material shall be cast aluminum with steel inserts.
b. Maximum distance from bottom of wrist pin bore to top of
#1 (top) compression ring groove: 1.655 inches (20 mm
wrist pin bore assumed).
c. Width of #1 and #2 (compression) ring grooves: .100
+.003 inches or -.023 inches (2.0-2.5mm nominal).
d. Width of #3 (oil) ring groove: .158 +/- .003 inches (4.0mm
nominal).
e. Wrist pin offset from centerline: .059 +/- .005 inches.
f. Eccentricity of piston below the oil ring groove: .012 +/.008 inches. Eccentricity shall be defined as the difference between the largest diameter and smallest diameter
measured at the same distance from the crown of the
piston and below the oil ring grove.
5. Cam followers Minimum weight = 60.0 grams
6. Connecting rods with bolts and small end bushing minimum
weight = 425.0 grams. Crower part #SP93280B is allowed
as a direct replacement connecting rod but must meet the
same minimum weight requirement as the OEM part.
7. Oil pump exact replica of any standard VW oil pump
8.Distributor
9.Ignition points or drop-in ignition triggering module (e.g.,
Pertonix)
10.Distributor cap
11.Fuel pump any standard type VW fuel pump which can be
fitted without modification of any other part
12.Crankshaft minimum weight sixteen (16) lbs.
13.Crankshaft gear
14.Flywheel minimum weight twelve (12) lbs.
15.Pressure plate, or alternate SACHS 211 141 025 DAM pressure plate
16.Clutch disc – 180mm nominal diameter only
17.Throw out bearing
18.Push rods
19.Push rod tubes
GCR - 303
FCS
1. Engine Case – Type I or Type III style single or dual relief cases
only
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
D. Allowed Modifications
1. Replacement of standard exhaust system with any exhaust
system terminating one (1) to three (3) inches behind the rearmost part of the body.
2. Lightening of the flywheel to a minimum of twelve (12) lbs.
3. Balancing of all moving parts of the engine, provided such
balancing does not remove more material than is necessary to
achieve the balance except on those component parts where
weights are specified.
4. The crankshaft may be ground and the case may be machined
to accommodate the use of standard factory oversize/undersize crankshaft bearings, provided the crankshaft location is
not changed.
5. Where minimum weights are specified, any lightening is permissible provided the original part complied with the dimensional
restrictions set forth.
6. The following standard dimensions and tolerances of engine
components are included as information and shall be observed:
a. Maximum bore: 3.040 inches
b. Stroke: 2.520 inches +/ 0.005 inch.
c. Minimum capacity of combustion chamber in head: 43.0cc
(Polishing and/or tooling is prohibited.)
d. Minimum depth, top of cylinder barrel to top of piston:
0.039 inch.
The above dimensions may be achieved by machining any
previously machined surface, provided that the total surface
is machined on the same plane as the previously machined
surface. The above dimensions shall be the average of all four
(4) cylinders.
7. Complete or partial removal of any cooling duct component.
Removal of the fan and the fan housing. Fan belt origin is unrestricted. The use of a fan belt is optional.
8. Installation of a spark plug hole repair utilizing standard thread
repair methods, such as Helicoil or welding and rethreading
is permitted providing that the spark plug centerline is not
changed. The original size and shape of the combustion
chamber must be maintained.
9. Polishing of the intake and exhaust ports, provided such
polishing does not enlarge the intake port beyond 29mm
(1.142”) inside diameter and the exhaust port beyond 33mm
(1.299”) inside diameter. The measurements are to be taken at
the juncture of the seat insert and the aluminum port material,
and at the manifold face. Valve seat angles shall be machined
as specified in the official VW Workshop Manual.
GCR - 304
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
10.Replacement of intake and exhaust valve seats is allowed for
the purpose of repair only. Valve Seats may not be moved from
their original position. Welding is allowed to facilitate repair and
installation of replacement seats. The original size and shape of
the combustion chamber must be maintained. Installed seats
may neither be proud or recessed of the combustion chamber
surface.
Seat Dimensions
VW O.D.
(inches)
Max O.D.
(inches)
Max I.D.
(inches)
Max Depth
(inches)
Intake
1.385
1.445
1.142
0.375
Exhaust
1.265
1.315
1.299
0.375
Inside diameter of intake seat shall be 1.142” at the juncture of
the seat to the aluminum on original seats. A depth of 0.340”
from the combustion chamber on replacement seats. This is to
allow blending of the seat to the port. Valve seat angles may
not be larger than the outer diameter of the original VW seat
(1.385” intake, 1.265” exhaust).
11. The following standard dimensions are included for information
only and must be observed:
a. Exhaust valve diameter: 1.18 inches
b. Intake valve diameter: 1.24 inches
c. Reprofiling of valves is not permitted.
12.Alternate exhaust valves are allowed provided the dimensions
and materials are the same as standard (VW) exhaust valves.
13.In addition to the original VW manufactured valve, any mass
produced, replacement intake valve may be used provided
the material, profile, and finish remain essentially identical to
GCR - 305
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
the original VW valve, including the prominent lip at the inner
edge of the valve seat. The valve must also meet the following
dimensions:
stem diameter
0.305 inches minimum, measured
just below the keeper grooves
head diameter
1.24 inches maximum
length
4.450 inches maximum
valve face width
0.090 inches
distance
from
combustion 0.020 - 0.090 inches
chamber face to seat surface
(including any chamfer at valve
head)
stem diameter within 1.25 inches 0.293 inches minimum
of the head of the valve
14.Valve springs are unrestricted providing:
a. No more than one spring shall be used per valve.
b. Any steel spring cap and retainers may be used.
c. Spring shall be made of steel.
d. Valve spring shims may be used.
e. The circumference of the valve guide boss may be
machined to accommodate the inside diameter of the
valve spring.
15.Rocker arms may be lightened to a minimum weight of 80.0
grams. VW parts must be used, from 1200, 1300, 1500 or
1600 Type 1 engines; 1:1 or 1.1:1 ratios only. Valve adjuster
screws are open. The end of the screw that contacts the valve
may be profiled but must maintain the design and integrity of
the original VW part. Swivel feet, elephant’s feet, rollers or
any other similar pieces are not allowed.
16.Rocker arm shafts may be modified or replaced by those of
other manufacture, including shafts that replace the stock clips
with a solid center spacer and bolt on end caps/washers. Wave
type spacer washers may be replaced by solid steel type flat
washers.
17.The rocker arm shaft assembly may be shimmed out on the
cylinder head mounting studs by placing appropriate shims
between the cylinder head mounting boss and the blocks on
the rocker arm shaft assembly.
18.Valve covers are unrestricted and may be bolted on.
19.Fitting of any standard Solex 28 PCI or 28 PICT carburetor
and any jets and emulsion tube may be used. Any venturi of
standard VW/Solex dimensions may be fitted without alteration to the carburetor body. The venturi shall be fitted in the
standard position, but its internal diameter may be machined.
The carburetor may be rotated 180 degrees about its vertical
axis. Modification of the float is allowed as long as no change
is made to the float chamber and/or float valve.
The carburetor must remain untouched with the following
exceptions:
GCR - 306
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
a. No material shall be added.
b. Bead blasting is permitted for cleaning only.
d. Throttle Plate Shall be a minimum of 0.053”, flat and
parallel with no chamfering or radiusing. Diameter shall be
a minimum of 1.095 inches.
e. Carburetor Top The junction of the bowl and bore may be
radiused. The bore beneath the radius shall be a maximum
of 1.120 inches. Accelerator pump boss shall remain original. The orifice in the base of the accelerator pump boss
shall not allow a #56 (0.046 in.) drill bit to pass through
(maximum hole diameter shall be less than 0.046 in.).
f. Carburetor Body The removal of mold flashing from cast
surfaces, including the emulsion tube carrier (holder), is
permitted, but no additional material is to be removed.
The emulsion tube carrier (holder) must not be otherwise
modified. Bore diameter from throttle shaft down shall not
exceed 1.110 inches.
g. Carburetor air cleaner and choke mechanism may be
removed. Choke shaft holes may be plugged. Plugs may
not protrude into the choke bowl.
20.US imported VW Type 1, 1200 sedan manifold must be used.
The manifold heat riser tube and heat sink shall be removed.
Removal of metal from the interior of the intake manifold
and the interior rust-proofed is permitted provided that the
following dimensions are not exceeded.
See Figures 1 and 2 at the end of this subsection for application of certain measurements specified herein.
a. Down Tube: The O.D. of the down tube shall be measured at
two different locations within an area between 0.500” and
2.00” above the horizontal manifold tube. Each measurement
shall be taken four times rotating around the circumference of
the tube, and averaged.
The averaged O.D. of the down tube shall not exceed 1.140
inches. Removing material from the outside of the manifold
to achieve the legal dimension is not permitted. Removal of
the manifold down tube from the horizontal tube is prohibited. The original factory furnace bronze attaching process and
original factory bronze repair material MAY be visible, inside
and outside the manifold.
b. Horizontal tube: The O.D. of the horizontal tube shall be
measured at four different locations on each side of the down
tube. The area to be measured on each side of the down tube is
defined as being between the bend and a point that is 1.500”
from the center of the down tube connection. Each measurement will be taken four (4) times, rotating around the circumference of the tube, and averaged. The averaged horizontal
tube dimensions shall not exceed 0.994 inches. Removing
material from the outside of the manifold to achieve the legal
dimension is not permitted.
The tubes making up the manifold must also meet the following
GCR - 307
FCS
c. Throttle shaft Shall be a minimum of 0.185” with throttle
plate installed. Machined sides shall remain flat and parallel
with no chamfering or radiusing.
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
requirements:
1. The minimum bend-to-bend distance is 17.75 inches (Bend-tobend distance is the distance between points along the horizontal tube where the .994 inch OD, as described above, is
first exceeded.)
2. At no point in the bends of the horizontal tube may the average
O.D. exceed 1.070 inches. Measurements will be taken four
(4) times rotating around the circumference of the tube and
averaged.
3. The maximum carburetor flange height is 9.25 inches
(measured from the intake cylinder head sealing surface to the
centerline of the top of the carburetor flange.
4. The maximum deviation from straight along the 17.75 inch
bend-to bend section of the horizontal tube is 0.25 inches.
c. The finished, race prepared, manifold shall not weight less
than 24 ounces. Intake manifolds may be repaired. Repaired
GCR - 308
manifolds shall start at 24 ounces BEFORE repair. The addition of excessive material to achieve the minimum weight is
not permitted. Manifolds that have not been repaired shall
retain the 1.070 inch averages from where the tube exits the
2-hole flange through the entire manifold bend. The area of the
0.250 inch dimension in Figure 1 above is considered to be
the average length of the tube where most repairs have been
made. This area may vary slightly among manifolds; discretion should be used by scrutineers to determine if the repair
is excessive. Inspection of the inside of the manifold in this
area will aid in this determination. Enlarging the inside of the
manifold and attempting to hide it with repair material is not
permitted. The measurement averaging (in b.2 above) shall
start just above the repaired area and continue through the
manifold bend.
d. All exterior surfaces shall be in original condition. Bead blasting
is permitted for cleaning only. Manifolds may have a thin, transparent or translucent coating of rust proofing material applied.
Discoloration or darkening of the manifold itself from heating
or aging, or yellowing of coatings with aging, is allowed. Other
than the allowed coating for rust protection, any other type of
coating including conversion coatings are prohibited. Removing
material from the outside of the manifold to achieve the legal
dimensions is not permitted.
e. Matching of manifold flanges (to the ports) is permitted. Seal
rings or “gaskets” of any type are acceptable as long as the
bottom of the manifold flange is not raised above the cylinder
head casting around the port opening. Removal of the manifold flanges that connect the manifold to the cylinder head is
prohibited. Factory “VW” casting marks surrounded by a circle
and VW casting numbers shall be visible on the bottom side
of the flanges, closest to the head. No repair material of any
type shall be visible or cover these markings on the bottom of
the flanges. Factory furnace Bronze and manifold repair material may be visible where the horizontal tube enters the top of
the flange. The exterior dimensions of these flanges must not
exceed 2.990” x 1.360”.
21.Voltage regulator, generator, and/or generator stand may be
removed.
22.Fitting of any standard VW distributor (not restricted to 1200,
series) may be used. Use of any standard 6- or 12-volt non
transistorized ignition coil is allowed. Coil mounting location is
unrestricted.
23.A VW “D” camshaft, Part Numbers 113 109 015D,113 109
017D, 113 109 019D, 113 109 021D,113 109 023D, 113
109 025D, 13 109 027D, or an exact replica of the same material and dimensionally identical shall be used. The maximum
lift at the valve spring collar with zero valve clearance is as
follows:
a. Intake .354” + 0.000”
b. Exhaust .3365” + 0.000”
The camshaft profile shall match those which are specified
by the official SCCA camshaft plots, plus or minus .002 inch.
It is permitted to regrind the camshaft to duplicate the official SCCA profile. In so doing, the relationship between the
GCR - 309
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
centerlines of peak lift at the exhaust/intake lobes shall remain
at 214 degrees fifteen (15) minutes, plus or minus 1degree.
(Reference the Official SCCA Camshaft Checking Procedure).
The camshaft timing may be changed in relationship to the
crankshaft by utilizing an offset key at the crankshaft timing
gear. The camshaft timing may also be changed in its relationship to the crankshaft by utilizing an adjustable cam gear
that retains the existing helical gear thrust angle and that is
statically adjustable only (e.g., no dynamic adjustment mechanisms that respond to engine speed changes). Camshaft timing
is unrestricted within the restrictions provided as authorized
above. The camshaft profile shall be checked using the official
procedure published by the SCCA.
24.The crankcase may be machined to permit the use of standard
VW camshaft bearing inserts, provided that camshaft location
is not changed.
25.Crankshaft pulley is unrestricted and may be fitted with an oil
seal. The engine case may be machined to facilitate the installation of an oil seal.
26.The installation of baffles housed completely within the original oil sump and crankcase.
27.The use of any oil temperature indicating device.
28.The oil pump cover may be modified or replaced.
29.An oil sump extension may be fitted to the engine with a
maximum internal volume not to exceed 1500cc. In operation,
all movement of oil and crankcase air in and out of the extension shall be through the original oil strainer cover opening of
the engine case. No additional openings in the extension are
allowed above the plane of the oil strainer flange of the engine
case. The oil pump pickup pipe may be extended into the sump
extension. Any baffling is allowed within the extension and
may extend between the engine case and the sump extension
through the original oil strainer opening. Any sump may not
extend below the frame rails of the chassis when viewed from
the side. Accumulators (Accusump) may be fitted.
30.Replacement of oil galley plugs with threaded plugs.
31.A single standard automotive oil filter of not more than one
quart total capacity, and a suitable mounting bracket and
by-pass valve may be installed. Modification to the lubrication
system to facilitate installation of the oil filter is permitted. All
components shall be contained within the body to the rear of
the firewall.
32.Any oil cooler is allowed. Oil coolers shall be mounted
completely inside a plumb line extending downward from the
outermost edge of the bodywork.
33.An alternate oil pressure regulator spring and/or shims may be
used.
34. The standard clutch operating arm may be modified to allow its
attachment in any appropriate position. Dowel pinning of the
clutch pressure plate to the flywheel is permitted.
35.The use of any starter is permitted provided it can be fitted
without any modification to the engine/transmission.
GCR - 310
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
37. In addition to repairs and modifications specifically authorized in the FV rules, engine cases and cylinder heads may be
repaired within the definition of “repair” in Appendix F. Technical Glossary. Any such repairs shall provide no competitive
advantage and shall not allow the fitment of any alternate part
unless specifically authorized in the FV rules.
6.
Transmission/Rear Axle
A. The transmission/rear axle assembly shall be standard VW sedan,
as defined herein.
B. The synchromesh components shall be in place and operating on at
least three gears.
C. Reverse gear shall be operable from the driver’s seat.
D. Transmission shall not be installed in an inverted position.
E. The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal
function. Torque biasing, limited slip, and locked differentials are
prohibited.
F. Allowed modifications:
Installation of any standard VW gear set which can be fitted
without modification of any component of the transmission or of
the gear set itself and the transposing of the ring gear to provide
proper axle rotation. Permanent attachment of the synchro sleeve
to 3rd and 4th gears is permitted.
Fully synchromeshed transmission
Gear
Part Number
# of Teeth
Ratio
1st
113 311 251A
10:38
3.80
2nd
113 311 261
17:35
2.06
3rd
113 311 275
22:29
1.32
113 331 275B
23:29
1.26
113 331 275A
23:28
1.22
4th
211 311 341
28:23
0.82
113 311 341
27:24
0.89
211 517 143A
8:35
4.375
311 517 143B
8:33
4.125
Part Number
# of Teeth
Ratio
1st
113 309 251
10:36
3.60
2nd
113 309 261A
17:33
1.94
113 309 261
17:32
1.88
113 309 275
23:28
1.22
113 309 275A
22:27
1.23
Ring & Pinion
Partly synchromeshed transmission
Gear
3rd
GCR - 311
FCS
36.A tapped hole for the installation of a Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor may be added to the cylinder head adjacent to the spark plug, provided that the tapped hole does not
penetrate through the casting into the combustion chamber.
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
4th
113 309 341A
28:23
0.82
Ring & Pinion
113 517 141B
7:31
4.43
There are different part numbers for various gears in addition to the
ones listed here. This in general indicates changes on the parts such as:
Gear
4th
Ring & Pinion
Part Number
Ratio
Comment
113 311 341
0.82
with key way
113 311 341A
0.82
with splines
113 517 143
4.125
6 mgt bolts
113 517 143
4.125
8 mgt bolts
However, there are no other standard ratios than the ones listed here.
A gear removed from a transmission can be identified by the number
of teeth.
7.Ballasting
Ballasting is permitted, per GCR.
8.Frame
A. The frame/chassis shall be constructed of steel tubing of a maximum
diameter or width of 4 inches and be of a safe and suitable design.
B. The driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the rear of the front axle
beam tubes.
C. There shall not be frame/chassis rigidity or strength derived by
means other than the frame tubes. Stressed skin, monocoque, or
semi monocoque construction is not permitted, except that:
The firewall panel and undertray(s) may be rigidly attached to the
frame tubes.
D. The undertray (belly pan) from the nose to the rear roll hoop shall
not be wider than the bodywork at the bottom of the frame rail
or no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each side) than the frame rail
when the undertray has an upward turned edge that facilitates
mounting the undertray to the chassis or that facilitates mounting
the body to the chassis.
E. Engine bay undertrays shall be no wider than the frame rails in this
area or no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each side) than the frame
rail when the undertray has an upward turned edge that facilitates
mounting the undertray to the chassis or that facilitates mounting
the body to the chassis.
F. Any undertray(s) between the axle center lines shall be rigidly
attached to the frame provided the curvature of said tray(s),
measured vertically from the lowest point to the highest point at
their attachments to the frame rail members at their sides, shall not
exceed 1 inch and have no downward turned edges.
G. Transmission undertrays for cars with a rear subframe shall be no
wider than the subframe or no more than 1/4 inch wider (on each
side) than the subframe when the undertray has an upward turned
edge that facilitates mounting the undertray to the subframe or
that facilitates mounting the body to the subframe or 16 inches,
whichever is wider. For cars without a subframe, the tray shall be
no wider than 16 inches and shall not deviate more than 1 inch
from the horizontal plane. Undertray must be firmly attached and
have no downward turned edges.
GCR - 312
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached to the
outside of the main frame tubes.
2. Reinforced body, consisting of at least two layers of 5 ounce,
bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the
body which shall be securely fastened to the frame. (5 or more
layers are highly recommended.)
For either method, fasteners shall be no closer than 6 inch
centers (no stress-bearing panels). The material used for the
chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to the
roll hoop brace material.
3. Flat composite panels of uniform thickness and construction
attached to the outside of the main frame tubes. Shaping of
these panels to conform to the outer perimeter of the main
frame tubes is permitted. Carbon fiber is permitted; however,
it must be used in conjunction with another “anti-ballistic”
type material (e.g., Kevlar, Zylon, etc). Such material shall be
at least 1.5mm (.060 inches) in thickness not including the
carbon fiber.
Composite anti-intrusion panels shall be attached with no more
than eight fasteners per side. Fasteners shall be AN or superior
grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch diameter may be employed with each fastener. Ten fasteners per
side are permitted if the panels extend to the front bulkhead.
Alternatively, FIA mounting is permitted as follows:
One panel shall be permitted per side. It shall be fastened
to the frame at its extreme corners, the upper, lower,
forward and rearward edge halfway between the corners,
and halfway along each diagonal tube. The attachment
should consist of an 8mm U-bolt and an aluminum plate
3mm thick, 20mm wide and 12mm longer than the U-bolt
span.
Composite panel mounting must comply with one or the other
above prescribed methods. It may not be a combination of the
two.
9. Body
A. The chart (figure - Section C.12) illustrates both the intended
minimum frontal area and car configuration.
B. The rear bodywork shall enclose the engine by surrounding it from
a point no higher than the lower edge of the intake manifold and
extending from the front of the engine to its rear on each side.
C. The rear bodywork must have the ability to enclose the original
Volkswagen fan shroud mounted in its stock location (see illustration in Section C.12).
D. The top of the rear bodywork shall extend from the back of the
firewall to a point at least 16 inches to the rear of the centerline of
GCR - 313
FCS
H. The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front instrument/dash roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be protected by at least one of the following methods to
prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit. Panels may extend
to the forward most bulkhead, but must otherwise comply with
these regulations.
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
the rear axle.
E. Any bodywork forward of the center of the torsion bar tubes shall
not extend outward beyond the centerline of the shock towers
(maximum width of 31.75 inches or 80.645cm).
F. No part of the frame or bodywork shall project beyond a plane
connecting the vertical centerline of the front and rear tires.
G. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel, with the exception
of the steering wheel and/or drivers head surround. The steering
wheel and the surround must be removable by the driver and/
or safety workers without the use of any tools. Readily legible
removal instructions for safety workers are recommended. Bead
seats are recommended.
H. Wings (airfoils) are prohibited.
I.
Floor and safety equipment shall conform to Section 9 of the GCR.
J. A firewall to prevent passage of flame and debris between the
engine area and driver’s compartment shall extend the full width
of the cockpit and be at least equal to the top of the carburetor in
vertical height.
K. Air ducting may be attached to the carburetor and/or the engine.
Brake ducts are not permitted.
L. Forward facing air ducts may be installed for the purpose of delivering cooling air directly to the engine, cylinder heads, oil cooler,
and/or carburetor. If these ducts are within the profile area defined
in Section C.12, then the ducted air must make a 90 degree bend
within the bodywork.
M. Air duct openings may be located within the cockpit area, and/or
penetrate the firewall, provided the duct is baffled or the firewall is
extended to prevent flame and debris from reaching the driver. Any
shape may be used to form firewall extension. Any other firewall
inlet shall also prohibit passage of flame and debris.
(Recommended: All of this extension be the same width as the
firewall, allowing for bodywork contour limitations, and extend in
a horizontal plane back 2 inches, minimum, past the carburetor
body.)
N. The bottom of any bodywork that extends below the frame
members shall be on the same flat plane as the undertray (ref. C.8)
and shall not deviate from that flat plane by more than 1 inch front
to rear effective for any newly registered cars after January 1,
1983.
O. The space between the rear locating arm and axle tube up to the
outer casting flange may be enclosed in bodywork for the purpose
of streamlining. The enclosing bodywork may not extend above or
below the triangular space nor beyond the axle tube or locating arm
away from the triangular space so enclosed except that the panels
may be wrapped tightly around the locating arm or axle tube as
a method of location or attachment. The panels shall be securely
attached. Brackets and fasteners used for attachment shall serve
no aerodynamic purpose.
P. The front suspension upright(s) (shock absorber mounts), shock
absorbers, and/or trailing arms shall not be faired in by covering or
shrouding away from the air-stream except that the front shocks
GCR - 314
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
Q. Bodywork shall be defined as all panels external to the chassis/
frame and licked directly by the air stream. This includes the floor
pan. All bodywork shall be securely attached to the chassis and
shall not move relative to the chassis while the car is in operation,
except where specifically allowed in the FV rules. For the purposes
of this definition, the rigid portion of the front beam is considered
part of the chassis/frame.
10.
Non-Standard Parts
The use of the following non standard replacement parts is permitted
provided that no unauthorized modification of any other component
results.
A. Fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws, etc.)
B.Wiring
C. Gaskets and seals
D. Brake lines and fuel line
E. Spark plugs (maximum ½ inch reach)
F. Piston rings
G. Wheel bearings
H. Connecting rod bearings and crankshaft main bearings of same
type and size as standard VW
I.
Brake shoes and brake lining
J. Valve guides
11.Battery
A. The use of any single 6- or 12- volt battery is permitted to power
the starter, engine ignition system, gauges and/or data acquisition
system, video cameras/recorders and communications equipment.
B. Any secondary batteries are only permitted to run video cameras/
recorders, communications equipment and/or gauges and data
acquisition systems.
C. If an accumulator (Accusump) is in use in the vehicle, it is permitted
to power an electric accumulator (Accusump) valve with the vehicle
batteries.
12.
Front View
The following illustrates
a
fan
shroud
GCR - 315
in
its
stock
location.
FCS
may be mounted behind the shock uprights.
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
GCR - 316
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Vee (FV) Specifications
GCR - 317
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
D.
FORMULA 500 PREPARATION RULES
1. Definition
A class for single seat, open wheel, rigid suspension race cars using either
a snowmobile derived engine and drive components or a 600cc motorcycle engine. Specifications are restrictive in nature in order to emphasize
driver ability, rather than design.
Formula 500 is a restricted class. Therefore, any allowable modifications,
changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF IN
DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation may be required. Refer to section 9.2.2.
for details.
2. Weight and Dimensions
Minimum weight as qualified and raced with driver.
Wheelbase:Maximum
80”
Overall Length:Minimum110”
Maximum
150”
Overall Width:Minimum50”
Maximum
55”
Weight: see spec line at end of section
3. Suspension shall be restricted and of a safe, suitable design. “Restricted” is defined as follows:
A. There shall be no springs or shock absorbers acting either directly
or indirectly between the frame/chassis and axle.
B. Rear driving axle shall be of solid or tubular steel. Axle shall be one
piece live axle, driving both rear wheels. Trailing arms are allowed.
Differentials and/or slip joints are not permitted. The object of
E.3.B., is to eliminate independent rear suspension of any type,
or provision for lateral movement of the axle shaft to facilitate
independent‑type suspension.
C. Blocks, bushings, and/or mounts of rubber or similar material shall
be used to isolate engine and drive assemblies, and/or axles from
vibration, shock, or track irregularities. The number of mounts shall
not exceed one (1) per wheel and shall not exceed 1.0 inch in
thickness in uncompressed state nor shall they be stacked. The
diameter of the mounts shall not exceed two (2) times their thickness. The mounts shall carry the weight of the car. Installation will
be evaluated on compliance with both the letter and the intent of
this provision.
D. Front axle(s) design and/or mounting configuration shall be such
that the axle(s) does not function as a torsion bar. Split‑axle/
independent front suspension is permitted so long as suspension
control is effected solely by the mounting defined herein.
E. Anti‑sway bars are not permitted.
4. Brakes
Brakes shall be foot‑pedal operated, hydraulic disc or drum‑type, acting
on all four wheels. The brakes shall be a dual system, arranged in a
manner to provide braking for at least two (2) wheels in the event of
failure in part of the system.
GCR - 318
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
5. Steering
Steering is unrestricted provided it is of a safe and suitable design.
Transmission of power from the engine to the rear wheels shall be
through an automatic torque converter type, centrifugal variable
ratio drive, using a belt and/or drive chain and centrifugal clutch.
Sprocket and/or pulley diameters may be changed to alter the
drive ratio. No electronically or driver controlled variable drive is
permitted.
B. Motorcycle - engines
1. Only rear wheel drive is permitted.
2. The final drive ratio is unrestricted. Internal transmission gears
shall remain stock.
3. Engines must use the sequentially shifted motorcycle transmission as supplied with the engine. Reverse gear is not required.
4. All gear changes must be initiated and made by the driver. Only
mechanical gear shifting mechanisms are permitted. This may
include cables, rods, or other mechanical linkage systems. All
other shifting mechanisms are not permitted. This prohibition
shall include electric solenoid shifters, air-shifters, etc. Devices
that allow pre-selected gear changes are also prohibited.
5. The clutch assembly is unrestricted except that the clutch
engagement system shall be operated solely by driver input
and may be mechanical or hydraulic in nature. The driver’s
hands or feet must manually operate the clutch and there shall
be no operation of the clutch by any assisted method. There
shall be no modifications to the engine/transmission to enable
the use of replacement clutch components or assemblies.
6. Mechanical throttle mechanisms must be used on all engines.
Computer, electronic or pneumatic control of the throttle position is not permitted.
7. The use of jackshafts to transmit power from the output shaft
to the rear axle is permitted.
8. Final drive chain tensioners are permitted.
7. Frame/Chassis
The frame/chassis assembly shall be constructed of steel tubing, and
shall be of a safe and suitable design. The monocoque‑type chassis is
permitted but shall have reinforcement plates at all points of attachment
for axles, engine, drive components, roll cage, and driver restraint system.
There shall be a bulkhead incorporated in the chassis forward of the soles
of the driver’s feet with the pedals depressed. Forward‑facing braces
protecting the driver’s legs and feet shall extend from the front roll hoop
to the front bulkhead, unless foot protection is provided in accordance
with 9.4.5.G.1.B.
The soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge of
the wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedal not depressed).
8. Roll Cage
Cars shall have a full roll cage complying with section 9.4, made of steel,
designed so that when viewed from overhead, an opening, having a
minimum width of fourteen (14) inches and a minimum length of sevenGCR - 319
FCS
6. Transmission and Final Drive
A. Snowmobile derived engines
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
teen (17) inches is available for driver extraction under emergency conditions.
9. Bodywork
a. All mechanical components of the car, forward of the roll cage,
shall be covered by suitable bodywork. Exceptions are the wheels,
brakes, front suspension components, and the cockpit. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the removal or
manipulation of any part or panel.
b. Sports car noses are recommended provided they do not extend
beyond the outside edge of the front tires, do not stand taller than
the top of the front tires, and their rearward most portion does not
extend beyond an imaginary line drawn from the center of the front
wheel, forty (40) degrees forward from vertical. A sports car nose
shall be closed across the front and top except for air duct openings ducted to heat exchangers, provided that ALL air directed to
heat exchangers shall pass through those exchangers, except for
ducts directed at brake assemblies.
c. Bodywork behind the front wheels and forward of the rear wheels
shall extend to within one (1) inch of a line connecting the outer
edges of the front and rear wheels. In a horizontal plane, it shall
begin within 2.5 inches of the rear-most part of the front tire in
the completely turned position and extend to within 4.5 inches of
the front of the rear tire. The sidepod(s) shall be continuous from
the outside edge of the main bodywork, at a minimum height of
nine (9) inches, maximum twelve (12) inches measured from the
bottom plane of the car. The sidepod(s) shall be closed across the
front except for air duct openings to heat exchanger(s), but ALL
ducted air shall pass through those exchanger(s). The sidepod(s)
may be open to the rear. Sidepod(s) is (are) intended to restrict
wheel entanglement between cars.
d. Along the outer edge of the required sidepods between the front
and rear wheels, lateral protrusions of the bottom or floor of the
sidepods are allowed, provided that they do not extend more than
one inch beyond the floor under the required sidepods, and provided
that the overall length and width of the car conforms to the dimensions provided in these rules.
e. The purpose of these rules is to limit the use of “ground effects” to
achieve aerodynamic downforce on the vehicle. Thus, for full width
of the body between the front and rear axles, the lower surface
(surface licked by the airstream) shall not exceed 2.54cm (1 inch)
deviation from the horizontal through that surface. (This is not to
be interpreted as requiring a floor pan beneath the motor or rear
axle.) Except for rub strips within that 2.54cm (1 inch) deviation
rule, the bodywork shall not extend below the surface of the tub
or chassis floor to the rear of the front axle. Seat bucket or other
protrusions shall not circumvent this rule.
f. It is not permitted to duct air through any part of the bodywork for
the purpose of providing aerodynamic downforce on the car. It is
not permitted to duct any air through the downward facing surface
of the nose of the car extending to the front axle or through the
lower surface of the car between the front and rear axles. The
surface of the nose - facing the ground plane aft of the nose leading
edge plane - along it’s entire length at or before the front axle, must
be either parallel to or convex, as compared to the ground as illustrated in Figure 2.
GCR - 320
FCS
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
g. Ducts through the side or top of the body and/or sidepods to duct
air to and through heat exchangers or to allow cooling air into the
engine compartment are permitted, provided that they are not used
to generate aerodynamic downforce. Engine air intake ducts and
scoops are permitted, provided that they are not used to generate
aerodynamic downforce.
h. Wings are prohibited.
i. Diffusers are allowed, with or without strakes, provided that the
overall length and width of the car conforms to the dimensions
provided in these rules.
j.
Splitters are allowed, provided that they extend at least to and do
not extend more than one inch beyond the line(s) defined by the
leading edge(s) and corners of the nose and the sponsons of the
sports car nose, and provided that the overall length and width of
the car conforms to the dimensions provided in these rules.
GCR - 321
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
10. Tires
Any recognized ten (10) inch racing tire with any tread width up to a
designed 7.5 inch width may be used. Any HR rated radial tire may be
used as a rain tire.
11. Wheels
Wheels shall not exceed a ten (10) inch diameter and 8.5 inch width.
12. Ballast
Ballast may be added to meet the minimum weight requirement provided
it is securely mounted within the bodywork and serves no other purpose.
It is recommended that underweight cars be brought to the minimum limit
by adding strengthening material to areas providing driver protection; i.e.,
roll cages, frame rails, etc., rather than simply bolting in additional weight.
13. Fuel Tank
The fuel container shall be located within the bodywork, ahead of the rear
wheels and behind the centerline of the front wheels.
14. Snowmobile Derived Engines
Engines shall be two‑cylinder, two‑cycle, water‑cooled in stock configuration as listed below: Fuji “Chaparral” Model G44bw. “Kawasaki
TC440A”/C‑200, B-201, C-201, C‑202, F‑202, and G‑203. The F‑202
and the G‑203 are electric start engines. Cylinder head P/N 440/2A is
permitted for the engines listed. Only the “A” series engine is legal; the
use of any parts from other Kawasaki series engines is prohibited. Rotax
Model 494 and Model 493, single expansion chamber and electric and/
or pull starter, and Rotax 494 RAVE engine must use the 494 non-RAVE
rotor, Ski Doo part numbers 420 924 509 or 420 924 508, 147 degree
designation. RAVE valves may be blocked in the “full open” position
or left as delivered. 494 RAVE and non-RAVE cylinder heads may not
be interchanged between engines. Rotax 593 in a carbureted, non-HO
version; must run inlet tract restrictors, Cometic gasket part number
MA0242SP1020A, one in each tract immediately after the carburetor;
single expansion chamber; electric and/or pull starter. Alternate restrictor
plate option allowed the Rotax 593 engine part number
MA0242SP1063A.
AMW engine as specified:
The AMW engine approved for F500 shall be the AMW model no. 250-2
GCR - 322
RC2, two-cylinder, two cycle, liquid cooled, reed valve engine with a
nominal bore and stroke of 72mm x 61mm and a displacement of 497cc.
All components of the engine shall be in “as cast” condition or as delivered from AMW. No component of the engine may be altered, modified,
or changed nor be of any other origin than the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) unless specifically authorized in these rules. Any Y-pipe
exhaust manifold and single expansion chamber meeting 9.1.1.E.14.B is
permitted. All factory technical bulletins shall be approved by the Club
Racing Board prior to implementation and publication. AMW Technical
Bulletins #10/96.01, Published October 1996, #03/97.01, Published
January 1997 and Technical Bulletin #04/99.01, Published February
1999, have been approved by the Club Racing Board.
The engine must be installed in the chassis so that the exhaust ports face
the front of the car. The engine may be inclined from vertical.
Hardware items (nuts, bolts, etc.) may be replaced with similar items
performing the same fastening function(s).
No component of approved engines may be altered, modified, or changed,
nor be of any other than original equipment manufacture unless specifically authorized. Engine components shall be assembled in stock configuration. Stock configuration is defined as including: water outlet elbow,
ignition harness, etc.
Authorized Changes:
A. Carburetors: The induction system is restricted to two (2) 38mm
Mikuni VM 38 round slide carburetors (except AMW). No modifications are permitted to the carburetor bodies. The use of any jets or
jet needles is permitted.
Carburetor mounting shall be of individual runners, no balance
pipes, no plenums unless fitted as standard as on the 493 and 593
engine. The use of the intake plenum/resonator on the 493 and
the 593 engines is optional. If the intake resonator is removed the
resulting holes MUST be completely plugged and the plugs must be
held in place by appropriate clamps. Plugs may be of any material
and must serve no other purpose than to plug the holes originally
intended for the resonator. 38mm intake boots, BPP 420867860
(last 6 digits 867860 are embossed on the boot) or Kimpex 07-10033, shall be used for the 493 and 593 engines. Supercharging,
turbocharging, and direct fuel injection are prohibited.
Stock air filters and air boxes may be removed, and air filters and
air boxes are unrestricted.
B. Any exhaust pipe(s) may be used (unless otherwise specified).
Maximum exhaust length behind the rear axle centerline is twentyfour (24) inches. It is the intent of this rule that the exhaust pipe
includes the exhaust manifold.
C. Alternate piston replacement for Chaparral engine only, “Wiseco”
one-ring piston.
D. Any thermostat may be used. The thermostat may be modified
in any manner, replaced with a “restrictor” of any similar shape/
design to regulate coolant flow, or removed entirely.
E. Alternate AMW/Wiseco piston (#2687) is permitted.
F. Engine specifications will not be changed during the current year.
G. Rotax 494, 493, and 593 engines: Any Rotax 494, 493, or 593,
respectively, model thermostat housing or water outlet elbow may
be used. The water bypass may be blocked. Either upper or lower
GCR - 323
FCS
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
cylinder head water outlet may be blocked in any safe manner to
facilitate use of a single water outlet.
H. Kawasaki and Rotax 494/493 engines: “OEM Type” replacement
pistons of cast aluminum construction permitted. Must match OEM
design, specifications, and compression ratio (such as SPI/Kimpex).
No forged pistons permitted, except as specified in 9.1.1.E.14.I.
I.
Forged pistons
Only the following forged replacement pistons are permitted:
1. Kawasaki: Wiseco # 2084M06800
Rotax 494: Wiseco # 2381M06950
Rotax 493: Wiseco # 2436M06950
Rotax 593: Wiseco # 2411M07600
2
Rotax 593 (standard bore): Wiseco # 2411M07600
3. Rotax 593 (0.010” overbore): Rotax P/N 420889171
J. Overbore pistons
“OEM Type” cast replacement pistons as allowed in 9.1.1.E.14.H.
are permitted as acceptable substitutes for those listed below.
Engines may be overbored as specified by Rotax to allow fitting of
specified piston.
1. Rotax 493 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston
(P/N 420888446).
2. Rotax 494 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston
(P/N 420887556).
3. Rotax 593 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston P/
N420889171 is permitted.
4. The following aftermarket replacement cylinder sleeves manufactured by Los Angeles Sleeve of Santa Fe Springs, CA are for
the Rotax 493 and 494 respectively:
Rotax 493: Part Number FL-1286 (69.5mm)
Rotax 494: Part Number FL-1224 (69.5mm)
Note: the appearance of the port is machined as opposed to the
as-cast port of the OEM sleeve and the sleeves are machined
to size after installation in the cylinder casting.
K. Rotax 593 engine only: Rotax OEM 0.010” overbore piston P/N
420889171 is permitted. Engines may be overbored as specified
by Rotax so that this piston may be fitted.
The following aftermarket replacement cylinder sleeves manufactured by Los Angeles Sleeve of Santa Fe Springs, CA are for the
Rotax 493 and 494 respectively: Rotax 493: FL-1286 (69.5mm)
Rotax 494: FL-1224 (69.5mm) Note: the appearance of the port
is machined as opposed to the as-cast port of the OEM sleeve and
the sleeves are machined to size after installation in the cylinder
casting.
L. The following aftermarket replacement cylinder sleeves manufactured by Los Angeles Sleeve of Santa Fe Springs, CA are for the
Rotax 493 and 494 respectively:
Rotax 493: FL-1286 (69.5mm)
GCR - 324
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
Rotax 494: FL-1224 (69.5mm)
Note: the appearance of the port is machined as opposed to the
as-cast port of the OEM sleeve and the sleeves are machined to
size after installation in the cylinder casting.
A. Mass produced water-cooled, 4 cylinder, 4-cycle motorcycle
engines up to 600cc are allowed as per spec line (end of section).
B. It is the purpose of this section to control the power level of current
and future 4 cycle engines to yield approximately the same on
track performance as the 2 strokes. Thus all engines must use individual inlet restrictors (IIRs) that comply with Appendix F, Flat Plate
Intake Restrictor, except the third and fourth bullet items. The IIRs
holes shall be as listed in table 1. The IIRs shall be placed between
each cylinder throttle body and its corresponding inlet port. The
CRB may at any time require adjustments to items including but
not limited to restrictors, minimum weights and final drive ratios by
publication in Fastrack.
C. All engine internals and compression ratio must remain stock. The
competitor must present, on demand, an original factory manual
for the engine to allow compliance verification. There shall be no
modifications or removal of any component of the engine or addition of any component of the engine unless specifically authorized
in these rules.
D. The stock ECU shall be used. The ECU fuel and ignition map may
be changed. Devices that modify inputs to or outputs from the ECU
(e.g., Power Commander) may be used. Stand-alone after market
ECUs are not permitted.
E. Turbochargers and superchargers are prohibited.
F. Carburetion or fuel injection may be used. Fuel injection, if used,
must be stock and unmodified for the model and year of the engine
that is used. Stock air filters and air boxes may be removed, and air
filters and air boxes are unrestricted.
G. The exhaust system and exhaust manifold are unrestricted, within
SCCA safety regulations, except that stepped exhaust headers are
not allowed.
H. The lubrication system is unrestricted. Any oil pan and/or baffling
are permitted. The use of dry sumps is specifically not allowed.
Accusumps or similar oiling assist systems are permitted. Crankcase vacuum pumps are prohibited.
I.
Oil coolers are unrestricted.
J. The cooling system is unrestricted, however the stock engine water
pump must be retained.
K. Replacement of the stock camshaft chain tensioner with any other
chain tensioner is permitted. The replacement chain tensioner must
attach directly to the engine in the original chain tensioner position.
There shall be no modifications to the engine to enable the use of
the replacement chain tensioner.
L. Replacement of the standard connecting rod fasteners with alternate fasteners is permitted as long as there are no modifications to
the production connecting rods Replacement of other nuts, bolts,
fasteners, and washers with common hardware items performing
GCR - 325
FCS
15. 600cc Motorcycle Engines
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
only the same fastening/fitting functions also is permitted as long
as there are no modifications to the production parts being assembled or to the production assembly.
M. The engine head gasket must be the thickness of the OEM gasket
for the year and model of the engine.
N. Camshafts and camshaft drive mechanisms may not be modified or
adjusted in any way unless specifically authorized in these rules.
O. Self-starter: Cars shall be equipped with an on-board self-starter
and an on-board power supply controlled by the driver while in a
normal driving position.
P. The engine must be installed in the chassis so that the exhaust
ports face the front of the car. The engine may be inclined from
vertical. Mounting ‘bolt bosses’ may be removed from the exterior of the cases of the motorcycle engines to enable installation.
Sprocket covers may be removed or modified from the motorcycle
engines to provide for fitment of jackshafts or final drive chains.
16. Chain/Belt Guards
Protective guards made from 1/8” aluminum or 3/32” steel are required
where belt or chain breakage could result in injury to the driver or damage
to items necessary for the safe operation of the vehicle. This includes,
but is not limited to, fuel lines, fuel tanks, brake lines, radiator, and water
hoses.
17. Radiator
Capacity, size, shape, location, and number are unrestricted. Overhead
radiators shall be at least six (6) inches rearward of driver’s head.
18. Safety Items
In addition to previously mentioned items, the following equipment is
required. Vehicle will be fitted with:
A. Mirrors affording the driver clear fields of vision behind him/her,
and on both sides of the car.
B. Cars shall not be started with rear wheels on the ground unless a
driver is on board.
GCR - 326
FCS
9.1.1. Formula 500 (F500) Specifications
GCR - 327
Version/Model
Weight
(lbs)
Fuji
“Chaparral”
Model G44bw
700
Note 4
Kawasaki
TC440
A-200, C 200,
B-201, C-201,
C 202, F 202,
and G 203
700
Note 4
AMW
model no. 2502 RC2
800
Rotax 494*
Non-RAVE
800
Rotax 494*
RAVE
800
Y-pipe exhaust
manifold and
single expansion
chamber (ref
9.1.1.E.14.B)
Must use the 494 non-RAVE rotor valve (Ski Doo
part numbers 420 924 509 or 420 924 508, 147
degree designation). RAVE valves may be blocked
in the “full open” position or left as delivered.
Note 1 and 4.
825
Y-pipe exhaust
manifold and
single expansion
chamber (ref
9.1.1.E.14.B)
Note 1 and 4.
Rotax 493*
Inlet Restrictor
Outlet Restriction
Y-pipe exhaust
manifold and
single expansion
chamber (ref
9.1.1.E.14.B)
Notes
Note 4
Note 4
9.1.1. F500 Spec Lines
GCR - 328
F500
GCR - 329
F500
Version/Model
Weight
(lbs)
Inlet Restrictor
Outlet Restriction
Rotax 593*
Carbureted
and non-HO
versions only
850
MA0242SP1020A
or
MA0242SP1063A
Y-pipe exhaust
manifold and
single expansion
chamber (ref
9.1.1.E.14.B)
Note 1 and 4. Restrictor size and type is to be
displayed by the
following designation: 593 RSTR
Honda
CBR600RR
(03-13)
875
29mm Flat
Plate Intake
Restrictor
stepped exhaust
headers are not
allowed
Notes 2, 3, 4, and 5
Suzuki
GSXR600
(03-13)
875
29mm Flat
Plate Intake
Restrictor
stepped exhaust
headers are not
allowed
Notes 2, 3, 4, and 5
Yamaha
R6
(03-13)
875
29mm Flat
Plate Intake
Restrictor
stepped exhaust
headers are not
allowed
Notes 2, 3, 4, and 5
Notes
1. Any model thermostat housing or water outlet elbow may be used. The water bypass may be blocked. Either upper or lower cylinder head
water outlet may be blocked in any safe manner to facilitate use of a single water outlet.
2. Fasteners, cooling system and oiling systems are free.
3. Clutches are free as long as no mods are made to the engine to accommodate the replacement clutch.
4. Competitors must be able to supply a printed factory service manual for the year of engine being used to tech upon request.
FCS
9.1.1. F500 Spec Lines
Notes:
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
E.
FORMULA MAZDA
1.Eligibility
Only cars homologated as Formula Mazda are eligible for competition in
this class.
2.
Formula Mazda Description
Formula Mazda cars are one design, single seat, open wheel automobiles
conforming to safety standards as per regulations. Engine - Mazda 13B
rotary as approved by SCCA Club Racing.
3.
The Intent of the Rules
All components of the car shall be purchased from Moses Smith Racing,
sourced from the supplying manufacturer to Moses Smith Racing or fabricated as exact replicas of components supplied by Moses Smith Racing.
It is the explicit intention of these rules and regulations to prohibit innovation and alteration of the cars except as provided by these regulations or
supplements.
4.
Additional Safety Requirements, Decals, and Patches
A firewall, full width between the roll bar upright, securely attached at
the level of the shoulder harness attachment bolts, up to and bolted to
the upper headrest cross member, is mandatory. The manufacturer’s new
rollover bar design (February 2000) for the Star Race Car FM chassis
is accepted. All Moses Smith Racing Formula Mazda chassis shall be
converted to the manufacturer’s new rollover bar design by 1/1/2001.
5.Electrical
A. Alternators, Moses Smith Racing P/N 080-120, shall be in working
order and not modified in any manner. Belt tension shall be within
the factory tolerance.
B. Battery shall be securely mounted in front of the master cylinders,
in the center nose support frame. Battery type is unrestricted.
C. The wiring harness may be modified so long as it does not change
the actual electrical function of the car and does not override the
alternator or rev limiter.
D. The use of the MSD (P/N 6446 only) 6T spark box, MSD Soft
Touch limiter, or MSD (P/N 6420-6AL), or MSD (P/N 6430-6ALN)
is mandatory. Location of the spark box and limiter is unrestricted,
provided that access to visually inspect and remove the limiter chip
is not impeded. A 6600 rpm limiter chip is standard. A maximum
rpm of 6850rpm is allowed. Competitors may use adjustable
rev chip (Moses Smith Racing part # 080-135). Competitors are
advised that MSD chip function may vary with temperature, and
should take measures to ensure compliance at all times.
E. Instrumentation is unrestricted
F. Bosch Blue coil is mandatory.
G. MSD Spark Plug wires (Part #31919) are mandatory.
6.
Radiators and Plumbing
A. Fluidyne oil cooler #DB30130 or any brand oil cooler measuring
(+/- 1/2”) 2” thick x 12” wide x 12 1/4” high shall be fitted behind
the engine in front of the wing, above the gearbox.
B. Water radiators shall be fitted in both sidepods. They shall be
installed in series with each other. The swirl pot shall be connected
to the inboard inlet of the left radiator. The outboard outlet of the
GCR - 330
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
left radiator shall be connected to the right side radiator’s outboard
inlet. Approved radiators: Volkswagen P/N 171121253D. Moses
Smith Racing P/N 100-101 and Moses Smith Racing P/N 100-142.
D. Flat sheet metal blanking material may be fitted surrounding the
radiators and oil cooler to prevent cooling air from leaking around
the radiators or oil cooler rather than passing through. Synthetic
foam sealing material may also be used for this purpose, provided
that any combination of materials do not extend more than 3”
beyond the plane of the radiator or cooler, and may not extend
outside the standard bodywork.
7.Engine
A. The spec engine shall be the six (6) port Mazda 13B Rotary or
the four (4) port Mazda Renesis Rotary as approved by SCCA Inc.
Said engine is to be sealed by an approved engine builder and shall
remain so with no modifications to the engine or any of its accessories or components.
All engines shall be returned to an SCCA approved engine builder
to be dynoed and resealed with the new generation engine seals.
B. No engine may be rebuilt except by a rebuilder approved by SCCA
Club Racing.
Approved Engine Builders:
Daryl Drummond Enterprises, Inc.
3590 North River Rd
Gold Hill OR 97525
mailing address:
PO Box 678
Rogue River OR 97537
(541) 582-1786
C. The use of any impregnating material in the engine is expressly
prohibited.
D. Engine drain plugs shall be safety wired.
E. Alternate Header (13B) Moses Smith Racing P/N 050-133 or
Moses Smith Racing system provided with Renesis conversion kit
is permitted.
F. Minimum flywheel weight - 8.5 lbs.
G. Alternate one-piece intake manifold (part # 050-142) is permitted.
If the Renesis motor is used, the standard, unmodified factory fuel
injection must be used.
H. Spark plugs are unrestricted
I. Ceramic apex seals, Mazda part number 0000-01-9115, may be
used.
J: Replacement Water Pump, Mazda part number 8AF2-15-010B may
be used.
K. Two functional belts must be used to drive the alternator and water
pump.
L. External Oil Metering Pump, Oil Injection Lines, Oil Injectors, and
Associated Vacuum Lines may be removed and replaced with Oil
Metering Pump Block Off Kit (MSR P/N 050-189). Metering Pump
GCR - 331
FCS
C. All cars shall be equipped with oil and coolant catch tanks per GCR
Section 9.3 Oil Catch Tanks, Filters, and Breathers.
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
block off plate and Oil Injector ports must be plugged and/or sealed
to avoid any leakage. When Oil injection system is removed, it is
required to use premixed fuel. A minimum of one (1)oz of premium
race grade premix oil per gallon of fuel is recommended.
8.
Fuel System
A.All carburetor jets are unrestricted, but no other modifications shall
be made to the carburetor (50mm DCO/sp or 48mm DCO modified
to 50mm, as supplied). Chokes 44mm. F.15 emulsion tubes are
required.
B. Only the standard Weber 48 DCOE intake horns are permitted.
C. Fuel pump, fuel filter(s), fuel pressure regulator are unrestricted.
Fuel lines shall be –6 metal braided hose, otherwise unrestricted.
D. Only the factory fuel injection can be used with the Renesis motor.
A restrictor plate supplied by the engine builder must be utilized in
the throttle body. The plate shall measure .250” thick and contain
one 44.0mm hole centered in the plate with no radiusing. No air
shall bypass the restrictor.
9.Drivetrain
A. Limited slip differentials, torque biasing devices, locking differentials or full locked differentials are prohibited. Aluminum or modification of the unit provided is prohibited.
B. 10:31, ring and pinion.
C. Polishing of driveline components is permissible through either
conventional mechanical polishing techniques or by way of chemically assisted systems such as the REM Isotropic finishing system.
Coatings are not permitted.
10.
Weight and Dimensions
A. Maximum wheelbase - 94-5/8”
B. Maximum track front - 59-1/4”
C. Maximum track rear - 57-3/4”
D.Minimum weight with driver = 1350 lbs w/ 6 port 13B, 1400 lbs
w/ 4 port Renesis.
E. Ballasting is permitted. Ballast shall be mounted forward of the fuel
cell but aft of the instrument panel bulkhead and/or aft of the nose
pole but ahead of the master cylinder bulkhead. Ballast shall be
mounted securely.
11.
Suspension
A. Ride height is unrestricted within the standard adjustment range.
Droop limiters are not allowed.
B. Anti-roll bar stiffness may be adjusted within the range allowed by
sliding clamps on the anti-roll bar or front bars may be drilled for
adjustment. Anti-roll bars may be disconnected.
C. 5/8 or 11/16 inch front and 11/16 or 3/4 inch rear anti-roll bars
(solid) are required.
D. Shock absorber settings are unrestricted, but no alteration to the
internal mechanism or fluid medium is allowed. Extended top shock
spring retainers may be used to ensure clearance from suspension
members, or to prevent spring disengagement at full droop.
E. Shock absorber - front: Koni P/N 82x-2236, rear: 82x-2269.
Alternates: front: 8216-2420, rear: 8216-2421, or front: 3012GCR - 332
1604FMF, rear: 3012-1616FMR. Spring rates are unchanged.
Shock absorber sealastic – 55mm P/N 000-141 (Koni P/N 70-34-53000-0) or 40mm P/N 000-146 (Koni P/N 70-34-54-000-0). Shock
absorber packer(s) P/N 000-147 (Koni P/N 15-34-62-000-0). The
number of packers is unrestricted. Sealastics and packers shall be
unmodified except that the standard slit may be widened or made
into a wedge shape to facilitate installation and removal. When
Koni shock absorbers 3012-1604FMF and/or 3012-1616FMR are
used, the Koni shock bumpers P/N 000-152, Koni part # 72-34-48000-0 may be used.
F. Springs: Front: six (6) or seven (7) inch + or - 1/4”, unloaded free
length, 450, or 750 lbs./inch rate. Rear: eight (8) inch + or - 1/4”,
unloaded free length, 400 or 500 lbs./inch rate.
G. Camber, caster, toe-in/out, bump steer, are unrestricted within the
adjustment range provided on the car.
H. Manufacturer and construction of spherical bearings and rod ends
are unrestricted; however, geometry and length cannot be changed.
I.
Allowable Lower Control Arm Configurations
1. Original Front Lower Control Arm Moses Smith Racing P/N
000-118 can only be used with Camber Sleeve Moses Smith
Racing P/N 000-119 and Camber Nut Moses Smith Racing P/N
000-120 with no modifications to any of the parts.
2. Updated Front Lower Control Arm Moses Smith Racing P/N
000-158 can only be used with Updated Camber Sleeve Moses
Smith Racing P/N 000-159 and Camber Nut Moses Smith
Racing P/N 000-160 with no modifications to the parts.
3. Original Rear Lower Control Arm Moses Smith Racing P/N
020-110 can only be used with Camber Sleeve Moses Smith
Racing P/N 000-119 and Camber Nut Moses Smith Racing P/N
000-120 with no modifications to any of the parts.
4. Updated Rear Lower Control Arm Moses Smith Racing P/N
000-133 can only be used with Updated Camber Sleeve Moses
Smith Racing P/N 000-159 and Camber Nut Moses Smith
Racing P/N 000-160 with no modifications to the parts.
12.Wings
A. Wing “angle of attack” (front and rear) is unrestricted within the
adjustment range. Rear wing adjuster link (P/N 110-126) length is
2.25” overall. It is permitted to shorten existing rear wing adjuster
links to 2.25” overall length to match revised part (P/N 110-126).
B. Wings may be of aluminum construction, but shall conform to
stock dimensions as described by the manufacturer.
C. Gurney flaps for wings (3/4” Front max. & 3/8” Rear max.) are
permitted, provided they are mounted on the upper surface of
the wing). Note: Gurney flaps are measured from the upper wing
surface, normal to the surface and must not serve to increase the
plane of the wing. (Quick change attachment is prohibited, bolted
or riveted only)
13.Brakes
A.Tilton brakes bias adjustment may be fitted.
B. Brake master cylinder - Use of (any) 3/4” or 5/8” master cylinders
(with individual reservoir) is approved.
GCR - 333
FCS
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
C. Any mass produced brake pad that fits the standard caliper without
modification is permitted.
D. Modification of brake rotor is prohibited. Option: Two piece brake
rotor, Moses Smith Racing P/N 040-126 and Moses Smith Racing
P/N 040-127 may be used. Minimum brake rotor thickness =
0.300”.
E. Optional brake caliper Moses Smith Racing P/N 040-130 may be
substituted.
F. The use of any ferrous brake caliper piston is permitted.
14.
Tires and Wheels
A. Formula Mazda Tire Specification 1. Dry Tire - Goodyear 470 Compound Tire
a. Front Tire - Goodyear P/N D2659 - 20.0 x 7.0 - 13 - 470
Compound
b. Rear Tire - Goodyear P/N 2660 - 22.0 x 9.0-13 - 470
Compound
2. Rain Tires - open
B. A competitor shall start the race on tires used in a qualifying session
for the race as identified by markings made on the tires by a race
official. It is the responsibility of the competitor to ensure that his
or her tires are appropriately marked prior to, during, or immediately after a qualifying session. On weekends where there are two
races and only 1 qualifying session, this rule may be waived for the
second race.
C. For races with more than one qualifying session, a competitor shall
start the race on any marked tires from any qualifying session for
the race.
D. If a competitor chooses to start the race on any tires that were
not used in a qualifying session for the race and not appropriately
marked, the competitor shall forfeit his or her grid position and start
from the back of the grid. This forfeiture of grid position shall not
apply if all qualifying sessions for the race were run under rain or
wet conditions.
E. If a tire is damaged during a qualifying session, the competitor
may replace that tire with a used tire upon approval by the Chief
Steward. Should a tire be replaced for any other reason, the
competitor shall forfeit his grid position and start at the back of the
grid.
F.Rain tires may be used at any time. In the event that a grid position
is determined by use of a manufactured rain tire (excluding hand
grooved tires), the competitor may elect to start the race on either
the rain tire which was used in qualifying or slicks which are otherwise compliant.
G. Any competitors deemed to have taken steps to circumvent these
rules, or deemed to have used a foreign substance on the tire in
order to gain an advantage shall be immediately disqualified from
that event.
H. All cars shall run BBS (8” x 13”) front and (10” x 13”) rear wheels
as specified by the manufacturer. Alternate BBS wheel center
(Moses Smith Racing P/N 000-143 & 000-104) are permitted.
GCR - 334
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
I. Use of tire warmers or cooling methods other than natural air
convection or conduction is prohibited.
Mark5, or Mark8 Series Gears 15:36 – 15:30 – 15:25 – 17:34 –
19:32 – 18:25 – 21:29 – 17:23 – 22:30 – 24:27 – 19:23 – 23:28
– 25:26 – 26:25 – or 26:26 Webster; 24:24 Hewland
B. Additional approved gear ratios may be added by the manufacturer
with SCCA Club Racing authorization.
C. Reverse shall be installed and in workable condition.
D. Gearbox rear covers may be modified to permit installation of longer
shift finger shafts.
E. Transmission drain plugs shall be safety wired.
F. Shift rail stops may be added to transmission shift mechanism.
16.Clutch
A. Only a 1700 Pound KEP, 2300 Pound KEP, or Stage 2 KEP (Moses
Smith Racing part # 060-104) all steel pressure plate is permitted
and must be used unmodified. The pressure plate may be resurfaced; minimum thickness shall be .475 inch measured from the
friction face to the inside face of the mounting tab. [The original
pressure plate is no longer available. The replacement is the KEP
Stage 2, all steel plate.]
B. Clutch disc may be a “Dalkin” or “Marchal” or L&T disc remanufactured on VW core with organic friction material. Moses Smith
Racing P/N 060-103
C. Minimum flywheel weight - 8.5 pounds. Moses Smith Racing P/N
060-102
17.Mufflers
A. All cars shall be equipped with a SuperTrapp muffler P/N 5AS-2556
with none or any number of plates installed as needed to meet
sound If no plates are present the end plate is not required.
B. The main muffler, Power Pulse Muffler (Racing Beat) P/N 16400,
shall be in good working order with no removal of steel wool or
other alternations allowed.
C. The following options are allowed:
1. Use of the approved “Lo-back” muffler as a substitute for the
Racing Beat muffler. Alternate Muffler Moses Smith Racing
P/N 050-134 and header Moses Smith Racing P/N 050-133,
are permitted. All other specifications to remain the same.
2. Use of deflectors such as the SuperTrapp mud ring are allowed.
18.Headers
Headers must be unmodified except that high-temperature coatings are
permitted.
19.
Hardware and Fluids
A. Fasteners, links, and rod ends may be either metric or standard
threads, but shall be at least grade five (5). Hardware and fasteners
may not be modified to change adjustment parameters. Titanium hardware is not permitted. Tubular or Hollow bolts are not
permitted.
GCR - 335
FCS
15.Gearbox
A. All cars shall be equipped with some combination of the following
gears:
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
B. Brake fluid, clamps, and radiator hoses are unrestricted.
C. Lubricants and fluids, except fuel, are unrestricted.
D. Ceramic bearings are not permitted. All bearing components must
be ferrous metal, except for bearing retainers and bearing cages.
This definition is applicable to all bearings, including, but not limited
to, wheel bearings and transmission / gearbox bearings.
20.Cockpit
A. Cockpit controls and mechanisms may be adjusted within their
stock operating range.
B. It is permissible to modify the driver’s seat. The driver’s seat
attachment bracket on the chassis may be modified to facilitate
adjustment, but shall ensure positive retention of seat attachment
bolts. Seat shell may be removed and the assembly replaced by a
poured foam seat.
C. The head rest may be extended forward to improve head support,
provided the spacer(s) and attachments serve no other purpose.
D. A quick disconnect steering wheel may be used. Make and diameter are unrestricted.
E. A fabricated sheet aluminum cockpit liner is permitted.
21.Bodywork
A. Engine covers are required. Air inlet ducts may be trimmed but
must not change profile of outside bodywork.
B. Mirrors are California by Vitaloni - Model #01CBT. Alternate rear
view mirror (P/N 110-136) is permitted.
C. No modification to body external contour or dimensions is permitted.
No openings may be added or reshaped. A blister may be added
to the engine cover if needed for clearance between carburetor
linkage and bodywork. Optional: rearmost, rear face of sidepods
may be open, closed, or vented by drilling.
D. The aluminum undertray may be replaced with a stress-bearing
undertray, minimum of eighteen (18) gauge steel. This undertray
shall be attached to the frame by welding, bonding, or by rivets or
threaded fasteners.
E. Star Formula Mazda bodywork or exact equivalent is required.
F. A windscreen may be added to the bodywork, it shall: 1) Not
exceed 144 square inches of surface, nor stand more than six
inches normal (measured 90 degrees to the surface) to the bodywork. 2) Be constructed from flat stock with no compound curves.
3) Be symmetrical left to right. 4) Not extend more than 12 inches
to each side from the car’s longitudinal centerline, measured along
the cockpit opening. 5) Not constitute a potential hazard to driver,
emergency crews or other competitors.
G. Engine compartment belly pan, Moses Smith Racing P/N 030-132,
or any sheet metal pan covering the underside of the engine
compartment, provided it is flat when viewed from the bottom
(may have a bend up at the leading edge for stiffness), and does
not extend past the trailing edge of the frame, nor more than 1.5”
past the outer edges of the frame on each side.
GCR - 336
9.1.1. Formula Mazda (FM) Specifications
FCS
NOTES:
GCR - 337
9.1.1. Formula S (FS) Specifications
F.
FORMULA S CLASS (FS) (REGIONAL CLASS ONLY):
1.Definition
A formula for purpose built, highly modified single-seat, open-wheel, open
cockpit racing cars, which meet the general regulations of Section 9. of
the GCR for Formula Category cars, yet are different in concept and specifications from the current SCCA Formula classes. Homologation is may be
required. Refer to section 9.2.2. for details.
All Formula S cars registered after January 1, 2003 shall meet all preparation rules of Section G. Formula S cars registered prior to January 1,
2003 may be updated to Section G. specifications but they shall meet all
requirements of Section G. without exception.
Exceptions to the FS specifications must be made to the Club Racing
Board. Cars must have a letter from SCCA Technical Services documenting the exception.
2.Chassis/Frame
Chassis/frame construction is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Chassis of non-metallic composite construction shall be proven to
meet FIA specifications for non-metallic composite chassis prior
to being submitted to the SCCA for homologation. There are no
exceptions. Contact SCCA National Office for a list of the relevant
FIA specifications/SCCA requirements.
B. Chassis of metallic tube and/or metallic monocoque construction
shall be manufactured to be consistent with the safety requirements outlined within these rules and the GCR.
3.Engines
Any engine(s) may be used within the following limitations:
A. Piston or rotary internal combustion, gasoline-fueled engines only.
No turbines. Turbo and/or supercharging is permitted.
4.
Fuel System
Fuel system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Fuel Cell Vents: Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm
(9.843 inches) to the rear of the cockpit.
5.
Electrical System
Electrical system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Self Starter: Cars shall be equipped with on-board self-starter and
on-board power supply controlled by the driver while in a normal
driving position.
6.
Transmission / Final Drive
Transmission / final drive system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Power shall not be applied to more than two (2) wheels.
7.
Bodywork and Airfoils
Bodywork and airfoils are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Cockpit Opening:
The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
removal or manipulation of any part or panel (except for a removable steering wheel and removable cockpit padding).
The cockpit opening of metallic chassis shall have the following
minimal dimensions:
GCR - 338
Length: 60cm (23.622 inches)
Width: 45cm (17.717 inches)
This width extends over a length of 30cm (11.811 inches)
minimum. This minimal rectangular opening may exist anywhere
forward of the bracing, and required padding will not be considered
in these dimensions.
The cockpit opening of non-metallic chassis shall be designed to
meet the FIA F3 homologation requirements (article 275).
B. Aerodynamic Devices:
1. The mounting apparatus of any part having an aerodynamic
influence (i.e. bodywork, floor, sidepods, wings, spoilers, etc.),
shall be rigidly secured to the entirely sprung part of the car
(chassis/monocoque), shall have no degree of freedom in relation to the entirely sprung part of the car (chassis/monocoque),
and shall remain immobile in relation to the chassis/monocoque
at all times.
2. No Aerodynamic skirts per GCR Section 9.3 Aereodynamic
Skirts. Within the preceding restrictions, only wearable material (fiberglass, Kevlar, carbon fiber, high density polyethylene,
polypropylene, Teflon, Lexan, or wood) may be attached to
the side panels as a rubbing strip. Ceramics, brittle plastics
(i.e. Plexiglas), and other materials which shatter or break-up
causing hazardous track conditions are prohibited.
3. Ground effects are permitted, but may not be attained by
“sealing” or bridging the gap between the bodywork and the
road surface. Any means adopted to circumvent this intention
shall automatically be regarded as a breach of these regulations.
4. Leading Edges of Airfoils: The leading edge of any airfoil fixed
to the front of the car shall not be sharp. Minimum radius:
0.5cm (0.2 inches).
8.
Suspension
Suspension is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. All cars shall be equipped with a full suspension system (i.e. springs,
torsion bars, etc.) front and rear. Rigid mounted suspensions are
prohibited. Monoshock/monospring systems are permitted.
9.Steering
Unrestricted provided that it is of a safe/secure design and acts upon at
least two wheels at one end of the vehicle.
10.
Wheels and Tires
Wheels and tires are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Tires shall have a minimum speed rating of 120 mph or better.
Tires shall be the same size and design (i.e. radial, bias-ply, etc.)
for the right and left sides of the front axle(s), and same size and
design (i.e. radial, bias-ply, etc.) for the right and left sides of the
rear axle(s).
B. Wheels: Minimum diameter 10”, minimum width 5.5”. Wheels
shall be identical for the right and left sides of the front axle(s),
and identical for the right and left sides of the rear axle(s). Wheel
material shall be metal. Cars shall be equipped with a minimum of
four (4) wheels. Wire wheels are prohibited.
11.Brakes
GCR - 339
FCS
9.1.1. Formula S (FS) Specifications
9.1.1. Formula S (FS) Specifications
Brakes are unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Cars shall have a braking system that acts upon all wheels of the
vehicle. Chain/belt driven cars may have a single brake caliper that
acts upon the differential, thereby applying braking force to the
two (2) drive wheels.
B. Cars shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated by a
single control. In case of failure or leak at any point in the system,
effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two wheels.
12.
Weight (without driver)
The minimum weight of the vehicle as raced, without driver, shall be 750
lbs.
13.
Additional Safety Equipment
A. Mirrors per GCR Section 9.3 Mirrors. Additionally, there shall be
at least two (2) mirrors, each with a minimum 55cm² (8.53 in²) of
reflective surface.
B. Towing Eyes per GCR Section 9.3 Towing Eyes. Additionally, if the
rollbar is faired-in, the fairing shall have rollbar access hole(s) to
allow for quick retrieval.
C. The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front instrument/dash roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be protected by at least one of the following methods to
prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit. Panels may extend
to the forward most bulkhead, but must otherwise comply with
these regulations.
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached to the
outside of the main frame tubes.
2. Reinforced body, consisting of at least two layers of 5 ounce,
bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the
body which shall be securely fastened to the frame. (5 or more
layers are highly recommended.)
The material used for the chassis braces in this area shall be at
least equivalent to the roll hoop brace material.
3. Flat composite panels of uniform thickness and construction
attached to the outside of the main frame tubes. Shaping of
these panels to conform to the outer perimeter of the main
frame tubes is permitted. Carbon fiber is permitted; however,
it must be used in conjunction with another “anti-ballistic”
type material (e.g., Kevlar, Zylon, etc). Such material shall be
at least 1.5mm (.060 inches) in thickness not including the
carbon fiber.
Composite anti-intrusion panels shall be attached with no more
than eight fasteners per side. Fasteners shall be AN or superior
grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch diameter may be employed with each fastener. Ten fasteners per
side are permitted if the panels extend to the front bulkhead.
Alternatively, FIA mounting is permitted as follows:
One panel shall be permitted per side. It shall be fastened
to the frame at its extreme corners, the upper, lower,
forward and rearward edge halfway between the corners,
and halfway along each diagonal tube. The attachment
should consist of an 8mm U-bolt and an aluminum plate
GCR - 340
9.1.1. Formula S (FS) Specifications
3mm thick, 20mm wide and 12mm longer than the U-bolt
span.
Composite panel mounting must comply with one or the other
above prescribed methods. It may not be a combination of the
two.
4. Non-metallic chassis are covered under the FIA chassis homologation.
D. Driver’s Feet Position
For metallic chassis, the frame shall incorporate forward-facing braces
to protect the driver’s legs and feet. The braces shall extend from the
front roll hoop to the front bulkhead. (The front bulkhead is defined
as the furthest forward transverse section of the main frame.) The
soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge of the
wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedals not depressed) and shall
remain behind the front bulkhead. The lower main frame rails shall be a
minimum of twenty-five (25) centimeters (9.84”) apart (inside dimension) from the front bulkhead to the rear roll hoop.
1. Non-metallic chassis are covered under the FIA chassis homologation.
GCR - 341
FCS
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
G.
FORMULA 1000 (FB) PREPARATION RULES
Formula 1000 is a restricted class. Therefore, all allowable modifications,
changes, or additions are as stated herein. There are no exceptions. IF
IN DOUBT, DON’T. Homologation may be required. Refer to 9.2.2. for
details. All FB Sport Racing Cars competing in Majors Races and the
Runoffs must have the AIM part #DNKTKPFSOL5 data box mount installed
on their vehicle to provide the necessary mounting of the AIM Solo Data
box. The mounting surface is to be approximately oriented either horizontally or vertically either parallel or perpendicular to the longitudinal axis
of the car and must be accessible from the exterior of the car with the
driver on board -- it should have a view of the sky, and not be located
under carbon fiber or metallic bodywork. In addition the mount must not
be on wings, and or wing end plates and where possible should be in the
cockpit. The purpose of this requirement is to allow the random placement of data boxes on cars on pre-grid by SCCA assigned personal and
the collection of the box when the car exits the race track. Effective date
March 1, 2014. Contact AIM and their distributors for direct purchase.
1.Definition
A formula for purpose built, open-wheel, open cockpit racing cars. F1000
allows converted Formula Continental, Formula 2000, Formula F, and
purpose-built motorcycle-powered tube frame chassis.
2.Chassis
A. The chassis shall be of tubular steel construction only. Composite
construction (defined as carbon fiber, Kevlar, honeycomb or fiberglass) in a structural application is prohibited, except as specifically allowed in these rules. Stress bearing panels are not permitted
except as specifically allowed in these rules. Stress bearing panels
are defined as sheet metal affixed to the frame by welding, bonding,
rivets, bolts, or screws which have centers closer than 150mm.
B. The soles of the driver’s feet shall not extend beyond the front edge
of the wheel rims (in normal position; i.e., pedals not depressed)
and shall remain behind the front bulkhead. The lower mainframe
tubes shall be a minimum of 25cm apart (inside dimension) from
the front bulkhead to the rear roll hoop.
C. The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front instrument/dash roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be protected by at least one of the following methods to
prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit. Panels may extend
to the forward most bulkhead, but must otherwise comply with
these regulations.
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached to the
outside of the main frame tubes.
2. Reinforced body, consisting of at least two layers of 5 ounce,
bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the
body which shall be securely fastened to the frame. (5 or more
layers are highly recommended.)
For either method, fasteners shall be no closer than 6 inch
centers (no stress-bearing panels). The material used for the
chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to the
roll hoop brace material.
3. Flat composite panels of uniform thickness and construction
attached to the outside of the main frame tubes. Shaping of
GCR - 342
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
Composite anti-intrusion panels shall be attached with no more
than eight fasteners per side. Fasteners shall be AN or superior
grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch diameter may be employed with each fastener. Ten fasteners per
side are permitted if the panels extend to the front bulkhead.
Alternatively, FIA mounting is permitted as follows:
One panel shall be permitted per side. It shall be fastened
to the frame at its extreme corners, the upper, lower,
forward and rearward edge halfway between the corners,
and halfway along each diagonal tube. The attachment
should consist of an 8mm U-bolt and an aluminum plate
3mm thick, 20mm wide and 12mm longer than the U-bolt
span.
Composite panel mounting must comply with one or the other
above prescribed methods. It may not be a combination of the
two.
D. A stress-bearing floor pan/undertray is permitted between the front
bulkhead and the rear axles. Composite or stabilized materials shall
not be used for stress-bearing panels. The mountings for brake and
clutch pedals and cylinders (front bulkhead), instruments, (front
roll hoop bulkhead), and rear roll hoop bulkhead (behind the driver)
may be stress bearing panels, also. The firewall portion of the rear
roll hoop bulkhead (panel) shall extend the full width of the cockpit.
Forward facing air ducts may be installed to deliver air directly
to the engine area. Air duct openings may be located within the
cockpit provided the firewall is extended to prevent flame and
debris from reaching the driver. (Any shape may be used to form
the firewall extension.) All firewall inlets shall prohibit passage of
flame and debris.
E. Brackets for mounting components, such as the engine, transmission, suspension pickups, instruments, clutch and brake components, and body panels may be ferrous, aluminum alloy, or magnesium alloy, of any shape, and fastened to the frame in any manner.
F. No engine oil or water tubes are permitted within the cockpit.
G. It is not permitted to construct any suspension member in the
form of an asymmetrical airfoil or to incorporate a spoiler in the
construction of any suspension member. Symmetrical streamlining
of suspension members is permitted.
H. Front impact attenuation structures are required and rear impact
attenuation structures are highly recommended. Impact attenuation structures shall be securely attached to the entirely sprung part
of the car. Attachment of any front impact attenuation structure
shall not extend more than 50mm to the rear of the front bulkhead.
Impact attenuation structures may be fabricated from metallic and/
or composite materials.
3.
Bodywork and Airfoils
A. See Table 5. (Airfoils are a requirement for this class.) ForwardGCR - 343
FCS
these panels to conform to the outer perimeter of the main
frame tubes is permitted. Carbon fiber is permitted; however,
it must be used in conjunction with another “anti-ballistic”
type material (e.g., Kevlar, Zylon, etc). Such material shall be
at least 1.5mm (.060 inches) in thickness not including the
carbon fiber.
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
facing roll bar/roll cage bracing and required padding will not be
considered in the cockpit opening dimensions shown in the table.
B. The driver’s seat shall be capable of being entered without the
manipulation or removal of any part or panel, except the steering
wheel and/or driver’s head surround structure. The steering wheel
and head surround must be removable by the driver without the
use of any tools.
C. Carbon fiber is prohibited in any external panels or any panels
licked by the airstream (e.g., radiator ducting or engine air inlet),
with the exception of impact attenuation structures. Carbon fiber
may be used in internal panels and components (e.g., instrument
panel, radio boxes) unless otherwise restricted.
D.The entrant shall designate a flat rectangular reference area with
minimum dimensions of 30cm by 30cm. This reference area is
located on the lower surface of the car (the surface licked by the
air stream) between the rear of the front tire and the front of the
rear tire. The center of the reference area must be no more than
75mm from the longitudinal centerline of the vehicle.
Between the rear of the front tire and the front of the rear tire, no
point on the lower surface of the car (the surface licked by the air
stream) shall be more than 25mm above the plane determined by
the reference area designated by the entrant and on a line perpendicular to that reference plane. No point on the lower surface of the
car may be below the plane determined by the reference surface on
a line perpendicular to that reference plane, except as specifically
permitted herein. Compliance with these requirements shall be
accomplished by placing a straight edge on the reference surface
designated by the entrant and verifying that the requirements are
met. A maximum of four (4) rub blocks of maximum dimension
75mm by 125mm are allowed anywhere on the lower surface of
the chassis, and may extend below the reference plane.
E. A diffuser is permitted behind the front of the rear tires. The diffuser
may be divided internally into multiple sections. The radius of transitions between the diffuser sides and adjacent horizontal structures may be up to 25mm. The width of the diffuser, as measured
between its sides and above any radiused transitions, may not
exceed 95cm in any lateral section. Strakes within the diffuser are
allowed.
F. Movable aerodynamic devices, including aerodynamic skirts, are
prohibited.
G. The maximum permitted width of the bodywork is 150cm. The
width of the entire lower surface of the car between the rear of
the front tires and the front of the rear tires shall not exceed the
maximum width of the bodywork by more than 50mm and shall not
exceed 150cm.
H. The safety roll bar/roll cage and engine air box are not included in
the maximum height restriction (dimension C in Table 5).
I.
There shall be no forward facing gaps or openings in the bodywork
with the exception of those necessary for engine cooling, engine air
inlet, shock, or brake cooling. All bodywork shall be firmly attached
to the chassis.
4.Engines
A. Motorcycle-based 4-cycle up to 1000cc.
GCR - 344
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
C. The stock or factory racing ECU shall be used. The ECU fuel and
ignition maps may be changed. Devices that modify inputs to the
ECU (e.g., Power Commander) may be used. Stand-alone aftermarket ECUs are not permitted.
D. Turbochargers and superchargers are prohibited.
E. Carburetion and fuel injection are unrestricted, with the exception that the stock throttle bodies for a fuel injected engine must
be used. Throttle plates, shafts and other mechanisms may be
removed, substituted and/or disconnected. All holes or passages
resulting from the removal of any components must be plugged.
No other material may be added or removed from the stock throttle
body bores through which any air for engine combustion processes
flows.; except as noted in FB Restrictor Table.
F. The exhaust system and exhaust manifold are unrestricted, within
SCCA safety regulations.
G. The lubrication system is unrestricted. A dry sump system is
permitted; any oil pan and/or baffling is permitted.
H. Oil coolers are unrestricted.
I.
The cooling system is unrestricted. Radiators, if housed in or incorporating a cowl air-scoop deflector, shall comply with bodywork
rules.
J. The stock chain tensioner may be replaced with any mechanical
chain tensioner.
5.
Inlet Restrictors
Flat plate Individual Inlet Restrictors (IIRs) (FPIR) shall be used on all
engines as indicated in Formula B Restrictor Table below. The restrictors
shall conform to the definition within Appendix F of the GCR. All restrictors shall be installed within 4 inches of the primary throttle shaft on the
upper inlet side of the throttle body.
6.
Fuel system
The fuel system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A. Fuel Cell Vents: Fuel tank air vents shall be located at least 25cm
to the rear of the cockpit.
B. Fuel capacity: maximum 10.83 gallons.
7.
Electrical System
The electrical system is unrestricted within the following limitations:
A.Self-starter: Cars shall be equipped with an on-board self-starter
and an on-board power supply controlled by the driver while in a
normal driving position.
8.
Transmission/Final Drive
A. Rear wheel drive only is permitted.
B. The final drive ratio is unrestricted. Internal transmission gears shall
remain stock.
C. Cars may use sequentially shifted motorcycle transmissions.
GCR - 345
FCS
B. Engine components (including cylinder heads and blocks) must
remain stock, except as specifically permitted in these rules. No
material may be removed from any engine component, except as
specifically permitted in these rules. Valve jobs are permitted, but
the valve seat diameter must not be changed. The competitor must
present, on demand, an original factory manual for the specific
engine make, model and year to allow compliance verification.
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
Reverse gear is not required.
D. All gear changes must be initiated by the driver. Mechanical gear
shifters, direct-acting electric solenoid shifters, air-shifters and
similar devices are permitted. Devices that allow pre-selected gear
changes are prohibited.
E. The clutch assembly is unrestricted.
F. Any open, limited-slip, or locking differential is permitted. Electronic control of the differential is prohibited. A solid axle or spool
is permitted.
9.
Suspension
A. All suspension components shall be of steel or ferrous material,
except that hubs, hub adapters, hub carriers, bell cranks, pivot
blocks, bearings and bushings, spring caps, abutment nuts, anti-roll
bar links, shock absorber caps, and nuts may be aluminum alloy or
magnesium alloy.
B. Springs: steel only.
C. Shock absorbers: Steel or aluminum alloy body.
D. Control arms and all associated items that attach directly to the
chassis members shall be boxed in or captured to prevent intrusion
into the cockpit.
E. Front A-arms shall be equipped with anti-intrusion bars to limit
intrusion into the cockpit.
10.Brakes
Unrestricted, except:
A. All pistons in a given caliper must be of the same size. Calipers
must be ferrous or aluminum alloy.
B. Brake rotors are restricted to ferrous material.
11.Steering
Unrestricted.
12.
Wheels and Tires
Thirteen (13) inch diameter wheels with a maximum rim width of ten
(10) inches are the only wheel sizes permitted. Material is unrestricted
providing it is metal.
13.Minimum weight
Minimum weight for cars using model year 2010 or older engines is 1000
lbs. Minimum weight for cars using model year 2011 or newer engines
is 1025 lbs.
F1000 Dimensions - Table 5
Dimension (Refer to Figure 7a and 7b)
Measurement (cm)
A. Maximum rear overhang from rear wheel axis
80
B. Maximum front overhang from front wheel axis
100
C. Maximum height measured from the ground
90
D. Exhaust height measured from the ground
20-60
E. Maximum height of any aerodynamic device forward of the front wheel axis.
Rim height
H. Maximum width of entire car
185
I. Maximum rear aerofoil width (includes endplates)
95
J. Maximum width of body and lower surface of the car behind the front wheels
150
GCR - 346
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Specifications
F1000 Dimensions - Table 5
Measurement (cm)
K. Maximum front wing width (includes endplates)
135
L. Minimum cockpit bodywork opening
45
M. Minimum cockpit parallel opening length
30
N. Minimum cockpit overall opening length
60
S. Maximum exhaust length from rear wheel axis
80
7. Minimum wheelbase
200
5 & 6. Minimum track
120
Maximum diffuser width
95
Note: Maximum height is measured with the driver aboard. The safety roll
bar/roll cage and engine air box are not included in the maximum height
restriction (dimension C).
GCR - 347
FCS
Dimension (Refer to Figure 7a and 7b)
Engine Make
Restrictor
(mm)
GCR - 348
Model
Years
Notes
All Engines
All
2008 and
newer;
2007 Suzuki
NA
May use upper and lower shaped velocity stacks with 37.5mm diameter at
restrictor interface surface.
All Engines
All
2007 and
older except
2007 Suzuki
NA
May use upper and lower shaped velocity stacks with 37.5mm diameter at restrictor interface surface.
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Spec Line
Formula B Restrictor Table
-Proposed changes to the specified restrictor sizes must be accompanied by engine dynamometer data.
-Competitor wishing to use any engines newer than 2014 model year must supply dynamometer data to the CRB
to be approved for use.
9.1.1. Formula 1000 (FB) Spec Line
GCR - 349
FCS
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
H.
FORMULA FIRST
1.Definition
1. Formula First is a class for single seat racing cars based on
compo¬nents from the standard Volkswagen Types 1 sedan, as
originally manufactured by Volkswagen from 1966 to 2004. Since
it is a restricted class, all allowable modifications are stated herein.
The purpose of the Formula First class is to emphasize driver ability
and to encourage the participation of owner/builders and owner/
preparers while using proven Volkswagen components (or exact
replicas). Homologation may be required. Refer to section 9.2.2.
for details.
2. No component of the engine, power train, front suspension, or
brakes shall be altered, modified, or changed, or be of other than
VW manufacture (or an exact replica thereof), unless specifically
authorized herein. Parts used are classified as original, made by
VW parts, exact replacement parts usually bearing a VW part
number used in the VW model range specified below. Finally,
mass-produced direct replacement parts can be substituted for the
original components if authorized in the rules. These direct replacement components must be constructed of original material(s) or an
acceptable substitute, maintain the original function(s) and general
dimension(s) of the VW components they replace. Furthermore,
these replacement parts must be generally available to all competitors and offer no competitive advantage over the original VW parts.
There are no exceptions. IF IN DOUBT, DON’T.
3. Any VW Type 1 component, of VW manufacture or an exact
replica in size, shape, and material, may be used unless a specific
part (VW or aftermarket) is specified.
4. All measurements given in these rules are exact unless a specific
tolerance is stated. A car exceeding any measurement or outside a
tolerance, BY ANY AMOUNT is not in compliance.
5. Any external surface of the suspension, brakes, and transmission/
rear axle tubes may be painted, plated, or anodized.
6. Weights and Measurements
1.Minimum weight, as qualified or raced, with driver: 1125
pounds
2. Wheelbase minimum 81.5”; maximum 85.5”
3. Front track maximum: 57” at zero camber & toe
4. Rear track maximum: 55” at zero camber & toe
5. Overall length: Maximum 140” (includes exhaust)
2.
Suspension
1.Front Suspension
The front suspension shall be standard VW Type 1 sedan ball joint
H-beam front suspension or an exact replica of one of them and dimensionally identical. The following modifications are permitted:
1. Lugs may be welded, brackets attached by welding or otherwise, and holes drilled in the ball joint H-beam to permit attachment of the beam to the chassis, and other components wholly
or partially to the beam. Brackets may be welded to the torsion
arms for the sole purpose of actuating the shock(s) and/or
external mounted anti-roll bar and shall perform no other function.
2. Front spring(s) are unrestricted except that the front suspenGCR - 350
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
sion lifting spring(s) must be a continuous unit measuring
37.63” (+ or - .13”) in length, is completely housed internal of
the torsion spring tube(s), and fit unaltered control arm spring
sockets.
4. Relocation of the shock dampers is permitted. Shock dampers
and their actuation are free providing that no VW components
are altered, modified or changed unless specifically authorized
herein. Bump rubbers with a maximum length of 2 ½” may be
used to protect the shock(s)/chassis from bottoming. Use of
related bump rubber packing washers/solid spacers is free. Coil
spring mounted (coil-over) shocks are not permitted.
5. The use of any anti-sway bar or bars, internal or external,
mounting hardware, and trailing arm locating spacers. The
anti-sway bar fitted as part of the standard suspension may
be removed. Sway bars may not be cockpit adjustable. Front
suspension Z-bars are not permitted.
6. Replacement of torsion bar rubbers with spacers of another
material.
7. Installation of
standard VW
of the spring
spring tube is
is permitted.
ride height adjuster(s), constructed for use with
spring packs, to the H-beam allowing rotation
pack. One (1) ride height adjuster per torsion
permitted. No cockpit adjustment of ride height
8. Removal of the brake backing plates.
9. Camber/caster eccentric adjusting nut may be replaced with an
aftermarket nut of different design. Caster, camber, and toe-in
are free.
10.Any wheel bearings that fit the VW type 1 spindles and disk
brake hubs without modification may be used.
11.Steering column may be altered or replaced. Steering wheel
is free, and may be detachable. Steering mechanism is free,
but tie rods must attach to the spindle using existing steering
arm, a modified steering arm, or a suitable new or modified
bracket welded to the spindle. Ball joints in the tie rods may be
replaced with rod ends.
2.Rear Suspension
1. The rear axle and tube assembly shall be standard VW Type I
up to 1966, sedan swing axle (no outer pivot point for a half
shaft) with axle location provided by a single locating arm on
each axle. The rear axle tube may be rotated about its axis.
The standard shock mounting and brake pipe brackets may be
removed. Rear axle O.A. length: 26 11/16” + or – 1/8”.
1. The rear axle bearing retainer flange mating surface may
be machined, or shims may be installed under the rear
axle bearing, for the sole purpose of adjusting bearing axial
float.
2. Springs, shock dampers, their actuation, and camber compensating devices are free.
3.
Braking System
1. Standard VW Type 1 disc brake components must be used,
GCR - 351
FCS
3. Removal of the shock towers above the upper H-beam tube
centerline.
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
including any standard VW Type 1 original or aftermarket direct
replacement brake caliper constructed of cast iron material. Front
rotor minimum weight: 13.0 lbs. each without wheel mounting
studs.
1. Caliper housing material may be removed on the outer radius
surface of the outer piston housing to clear the inside of the
rotating wheel. This metal removal shall only be to allow wheel
clearance.
2. Any type pad material may be used on standard VW Type 1 brake
pads.
3. Adapter plates may be fitted to allow mounting of front or rear
brake calipers.
4. Cross-drilling or grooving of rotors is not permitted.
5. Rear brake drum assemblies must be removed and replaced with
one-piece cast iron rear brake rotors with machined-in rear axle
splines. Caliper mounting is free. Min. rotor weight: 15.0 lbs each,
without wheel mounting studs.
6. The car shall be equipped with a dual braking system operated by a
single control. In case of a leak or failure at any point in the system,
effective braking power shall be maintained on at least two wheels.
7. A separate hand brake is not required. Removal of the hand brake
and operating mechanism is permitted.
8. Brake lines may be of any suitable material, including steel braided
lines.
9. Wheel mounting lug bolts may be replaced with studs.
10. All brake components must remain within the safety tolerances and
minimum dimensions established by the component manufacturer.
4.
Wheels and Tires
1. Wheels shall be 13” diameter by 6” wide. (+ or – 1/8” for all
dimensions).
1. Wheels must be of one-piece construction and may be
constructed of steel, aluminum, or magnesium, but each wheel
must comply with a minimum weight of 10 pounds, less tire,
wheel weights and valve stem assembly.
2. Wheel bolt pattern is free, except that it must use 4 lug bolts
or studs with lug nuts. No centerlocks. As a recommended
standard, the common bolt pattern for Formula First is 4”x 4
bolt.
3. Spacers between the wheel and rotor are permitted.
2. Tires shall be Formula F slicks in standard front and rear sizes and
using a hard compound. The Region, Division and/or racing series
sanctioning the races shall specify which manufacturer or manufacturer’s tires meeting this general description shall be permitted.
Regional, Divisional and/or Race Series Tire Options:
1. Option 1. The spec tire manufacture for Formula First shall be
Hoosier Tire. Front tires shall be #43130 20.0”x 6.0” – 13”
R60 or R60A compound. Rear tires shall be #43302 22.5”x
7.5”– 13” R60 compound or #43307 22.5” x 7.2” x 13”
R60A compound.
2. Option 2. The spec tire manufacture for Formula First shall
GCR - 352
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
3. Option 3. The spec tire manufacture for Formula First shall be
American Racer Tire. Front tires shall be 20.0”x 6.0” – 13”
133 compound. Rear tires shall be # 22.5”x 7.5”– 13” 133
compound.
4. Inter divisional races or special events may choose to allow
more than one tire option by listing the options allowed for said
event in the event supplemental regulations.
3.Any tires (brand, size, tread or construction) fitting the 13 x 6 rims
may be used when the Chief Steward declares a rain race.
5.Engine
1. The engine shall be the standard VW “1600” (1584 cc) twin port,
unless otherwise stated in these rules.
1. Engine components shall be assembled in standard configuration. Exceeding the wear limits specified in the VW manual
or in other official VW guides is permitted provided that the
specifications, tolerances, and dimensions specified in these
rules are not exceeded.
2. Standard engine reconditioning practices are permissible as set
out below. Such machining shall occur on the same plane as
original VW specification. It is not permissible to add metal or
any other material to any engine component, unless specifically stated herein.
3. Balancing of the following moving parts of the engine is
allowed: pistons, connecting rods, crankshaft, flywheel, front
pulley, and clutch disc and clutch cover. Balancing may not
remove more material than is necessary to achieve the balance,
except on those component parts where minimum weights are
specified herein. The addition of weight to the clutch cover
plate, for the sole purpose of achieving balance, is permitted.
4. Polishing of the contact faces of moving parts is permitted.
2. 1584 cc engine dimensions
Bore 85.7 mm maximum
Stroke: 69.1 mm maximum
Exhaust valve diameter: 32.10mm maximum
Intake valve diameter: 35.60mm maximum
Intake port dimension at head: 33 mm maximum
Exhaust port dimension at head: 33 mm maximum
Intake manifold horizontal inside diameter: 33 mm maximum
Manifold casting maximum diameter at flange: 33 mm maximum
Maximum valve lift: .455”. Measured at Valve cap with 0” lash. An
average of the four exhaust valves must be .455” or less and an
average of the four intake valves must be .455” or less.
Rod weight with bolt and small end bushing: Minimum 560 grams.
Rod length, center to center: 5.35” to 5.45”. Any piston rod may
be used that meets the VW dimensional and weight specifications
listed herein.
Piston weight with pin: Minimum 515 grams.
Minimum distance: Top of piston to top edge of #1 ring groove:
8.0 mm
Crankshaft weight: 20 pounds minimum
Flywheel: Clutch diameter 200 mm; weight - 12 pounds minimum
GCR - 353
FCS
be Goodyear Tire. Front tires shall be #807-366-068 3321
20.0”x 6.0” – 13” R600 compound. Rear tires shall be #870274-068 2015 22.5”x 7.5”– 13” R600 compound.
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
Deck height: .045” minimum
Cam followers: 90 grams minimum
Rocker arms: 80 grams minimum (w/o adjuster)
3. Crankcase, Clutch and Flywheel
1. Any 1200 or 1600 VW case or exact replica may be used.
(Aftermarket competition cases that vary in design from the
original VW case are not permitted.)
2. Standard reconditioning of the case halves is permitted.
3. The case may be drilled to accept an external oil cooler or oil
filter.
4. Generator/alternator, stand, and fan housing and fan may be
removed.
5. Oil baffles may be installed. They must be housed completely
within the original oil sump and crankcase.
6. An oil temperature sending unit may be installed in the crankcase.
7. Oil galley plugs may be replaced with threaded plugs.
8. Cylinder head studs may be replaced with studs of different
material.
9. The crankshaft may be ground and the case may be machined
to accommodate the use of the standard VW oversize/undersize crankshaft bearings, provided the crankshaft location is
not changed. It may also be machined to permit installation of
camshaft bearings.
10.The use of an aftermarket counterweighted crankshaft with
standard VW stroke, index and journal sizes is mandatory.
Bearings may be standard VW undersized/oversized and rods
ground to accommodate them.
11.Crankshaft front pulley is free.
12.The flywheel may be lightened to a minimum of 12 pounds.
Flywheel dowels may be reconditioned. Additional dowels may
be added on the same face. The flywheel clutch plate surfaces
may be machined.
13.Any 200 mm VW clutch disc, pressure plate and throwout
bearing (or replacement replica) as fitted to the VW Type 1,
2 and 3 are permitted. The standard VW clutch actuation arm
may be modified to allow its attachment to the standard VW
clutch throwout bearing shaft in any appropriate position.
Clutch shaft arm actuation (cable, levers, or hydraulic) is free.
14.Oil filler/engine vent(s), dry sump tank and catch tank(s) are
unrestricted provided they meet section 9.3 Oil Catch Tanks,
Filters, and Breathers.
15.The installation of a crankshaft pulley oil seal is permitted.
16. The installation of case center main web location pins or shuffle
pins are permitted.
4.Camshaft
1. Only the Engle W110 camshaft is permitted. Specifications
listed herein are for checking purposes only. Re-grinding of
the Engle W110, or any camshaft, to meet or maximize these
specifications is strictly prohibited.
GCR - 354
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
Cam lift: Exhaust and Intake .392” variance + .003”
Lobe centers: 108 deg +/- 30 sec.
Exhaust opens @ 55 deg. Exhaust closes @ 12deg. (at .050”
valve lift) (+/- 30 sec)
2. Cam timing (advance/retard) may be achieved by offset keys
or adjustable cam gear. Cam timing may not be adjustable
without disassembling the case. No form of VTEC, cockpit
adjustment, or other variable cam timing is permitted.
3. Cam gear must be of stock dimensions, including angle and
width of teeth.
4. Cam followers may be reconditioned and/or may contain
camshaft face lubrication holes.
5. Pistons and Cylinders
Pistons and cylinders shall be standard VW replacement parts or exact
replicas. Any piston rings that can fit the standard grooves are permitted.
Piston pin retaining clips may be replaced with Teflon buttons.
6. Cylinder Head
1. The original standard VW twin port cylinder heads or any direct
replacement cylinder head that complies with the original standard VW twin port cylinder head dimensions listed herein are
permitted.
Reference list of some common manufacturers, part and
casting numbers:
Auto Lineas P/N 040-101-375 xx Casting “040”
(Note: xx varies)
Auto Lineas P/N 043-101-375A Casting “043”
Mofoco 040 P/N CHH 040
OE VW Original
P/N 113-101-375 A Casting “113”
OE VW Replacement P/N 040-101-355
Casting “040”
Casting “040”
OE VW Replacement P/N 043-101-375H Casting “043”
Other cylinder heads can be added as requested if the castings
are the same dimensionally (e.g., combustion chamber volume,
valve size and location) as an approved VW manufactured
head. This allows casting duplicates that may be of better
quality (longevity), appearance, and/or price.
2. The intake and exhaust ports are to remain in as-cast condi­tion,
except that material may be removed from the intake ports for
the sole purpose of matching/blending up to 1.5 inches from
the intake flange mating point and up to 1.5 inches from an
intake valve seat. Material may be removed from the exhaust
ports for the sole purpose of matching/blending up to .75
inches from the exhaust flange mating point and up to 1 inch
from an exhaust valve seat. The remainder of the ports must
be untouched.
GCR - 355
FCS
Intake opens @ 19 deg. Intake closes @ 48 deg. (at .050”
valve lift) (+/- 30 sec)
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
3. The combustion chamber must hold a minimum of 47 cc, with
valves in place.
4. Replacement of valve seats and valve guides with others of
standard dimensions and material is permitted.
5. Valves and valve seats may not be reshaped. Valve to valve
seat mating surface (figure 1) shall be cut as follows. The 45
deg valve seat width (figure 2) shall be maintained by cutting a
15 deg chamfer (figure 3) at the outside edge of the seat and
a 75 deg chamfer (figure 4) at its inner edge. Seats cannot be
refaced if too little material remains for a 15 deg chamfer to
be cut without going beyond the boundary of the insert. If the
chamfer extends to the head, the seat or the head must be
replaced.
1. Valve specifications (figures 1 & 5):
Dimension “a” – valve seat contact width: Intake – 1.30 mm
to 1.60 mm
GCR - 356
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
Exhaust – 1.70 mm to 2.00 mm Seat contact angle on valve:
45 deg Intake and Exhaust
Dimension “A” – valve head dia: Intake – 35.56 mm max.
Exhaust – 32.06 mm
Dimension “C” – valve stem dia: Intake – 7.94 mm min.
Exhaust – 7.91 mm
Dimension “b” – valve head margin: Intake - .80 to 1.50 mm
Exhaust – 1.00 to 1.70 mm
Dimension “d” – face angle of valve only: Intake - 44 deg
Exhaust – 45 deg
6. Stainless steel valves of the same dimensions as stock are
permitted.
7. Single valve springs must be used, but are otherwise free
except that no unauthorized modifications to other parts may
be made to accommodate them.
8. Shimming of valve springs is permitted.
9. Combustion chambers are to remain in standard, as cast condition, except that fly cutting is permitted to obtain the permitted
compression ratio. No other tooling or polishing of the combustion chamber is permitted.
10.Any aluminum or steel pushrod may be used. Length is free.
11.Only standard 1.1:1 ratio 1600 rocker arms may be used. The
two bars need to be visible. Minimum rocker arm weight listed
under 5.2.
12.Wavy washers in the rocker gear may be replaced with solid
washers.
13.Swivel-foot valve adjusters may be used, provided that they
are on the same center plane as the standard screw and offer
no increase in valve lift.
14.The rocker shaft posts may be shimmed to restore original
GCR - 357
FCS
Dimension “B” – valve length: 110.5 mm to 112.5 mm
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
geometry after authorized fly cutting.
15.Spark plug holes may be repaired using standard thread repair
methods, such as Helicoil inserts, providing that the spark plug
centerline is not changed.
16.Valve covers are unrestricted and may be bolted on.
17.Push rod tubes are unrestricted.
18.Any ferrous metallic valve spring retainers and keepers are
permitted.
7. Oil system
1. Any standard VW Type I, or replacement replica in size, shape,
and material, oil pump may be used. Oil pump pressure port
plugging is permitted.
2. Any oil pump cover may be used.
3. A dry sump oiling system is permitted.
1. The dry sump pump must bolt into the standard location,
must be driven by the camshaft and have no more that
two stages.
4. A sump extension may be fitted using or in place of the oil
strainer cover plate. The oil pump pickup pipe may be extended
into the sump extension. The sump extension shall not extend
below the lower frame members surrounding the engine.
5. Any oil cooler is allowed provided it is located within the bodywork and behind the firewall.
6. An alternate oil pressure regulator spring or springs may be
used.
7. A standard or racing type automotive oil filter of not more
than one-quart capacity may be installed provided it is located
within the bodywork and behind the firewall. No cooling fins
are permitted on the filter or connecting lines. Connecting lines
shall not exceed 12 feet in total length, including oil cooler
connections if part of the oil filter circuit.
8. Fuel pump
Fuel pump is free. A block off plate may be installed if the mechanical
fuel pump is removed.
9.Carburetor
1. Only the Mexican made Bocar 34 PICT/3 replacement carburetor shall be permitted. The carburetor shall be in “as new”
condition. The carburetor may be cleaned with commercially
available “carb cleaner”. NO MEDIA BLAST CLEANING IS
PERMITTED. Original replacement replica gaskets, float, needle
& seat may be replaced as needed. Float level may be adjusted
via shim(s) under the needle & seat. Only the modifications
listed herein are permitted. If you don’t see it listed herein, you
can’t do it, NO EXCEPTIONS.
2. The choke plate, choke heater element and related components, choke shaft and related hardware may be removed and
the shaft holes taped or plugged. Any air filter, air horn, or
combination of filter and horn may be used.
3. Modification or removal of the idle shutoff solenoid to allow
air/fuel flow without power is permitted.
GCR - 358
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
4. Main fuel and air correction jet sizes are free.
5.The carburetor may be rotated 180 degrees about its vertical
axis.
7. The fuel inlet must be threaded into the carburetor top housing,
the original brass swaged in fitting is not permitted.
8. Vacuum fittings may be removed and ports plugged.
9. The full throttle stop bracket may be modified to allow for full
throttle operation.
10.Throttle plate screws shall be “as supplied” from Bocar, no
grinding, filing or trimming on these screws, NO EXCEPTIONS.
11.NO OTHER TOOLING OR MODIFICATIONS ARE PERMITTED.
REBUILDING IS NOT AN EXCUSE FOR MACHINING, MODIFYING OR CHANGING ANY DIMENSIONS OR ANY COMPONENT OF THE CARBURETOR, NO EXCEPTIONS.
12.Carburetor dimensions: Specifications listed herein are for
checking purposes only. Re-working of the Bocar PCIT/3 to
meet or maximize these specifications is strictly prohibited.
Throttle plate thickness: .055” Minimum
Throttle shaft thickness: .210” Minimum
Venturi/Choke inside dimension: 26 mm Maximum
10.Intake Manifold
1. The intake manifold shall consist of standard VW Type 1 1600
(1584 cc) twin port components, or direct replacement, unless
stated otherwise in the following rules.
2. The heat sink casting may be removed or modified.
3. Other EXTERNAL modifications to the cast sections are
permitted for clearance purposes, provided no performance
advance results.
4. The standard 1600 manifold end castings must be untouched
internally other than for the purpose of port matching.
5. Port matching to a depth of 1.0” into the manifold casting from
the manifold/head joining surface is permitted.
6. The official Formula First 32mm restrictor plate, SR Racing
part number SRA-FST-RESTRICTOR, must be installed per the
instructions below. Absolutely no modifications are permitted
to the restrictor plate. Any defects or marks on the blue anodize
is not allowed and must be exchanged immediately for a new
official Formula First 32 mm restrictor plate. Small external
scratches are considered normal wear.
1. The official Formula First 32 mm restrictor plate must be
installed/assembled exactly in the following order, using
only the listed parts. No exceptions allowed.
1. Intake manifold
2. (1) Standard VW (or direct replacement) carburetor
gasket
GCR - 359
FCS
6. The choke heater element housing may be cut off the carburetor top housing.
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
3. Official Formula First 32 mm restrictor plate
4. (1) Standard VW (or direct replacement) carburetor
gasket
5. Bocar 34 PICT/3
2. Installation diagram supporting I.5.10.6.1.
3. Any Formula First car may be subject to a “spot check” for
restrictor plate compliance. A spot check may be visual or
may require a vacuum leak check performed as follows:
1. Run engine at 2500 RPM
2. Seal the carburetor air inlet
3. Engine must stall within 4 seconds
7. All intake manifold vacuum fittings or ports must be plugged.
11.Engine cooling system
The air-cooling system for cylinders and cylinder heads is free, subject
to limitations on bodywork. See I.5.7.7. with respect to oil coolers and
lines.
12.Exhaust System
The exhaust system is free, but must comply with SCCA and local
noise requirements and with overall body dimensions requirements.
13.Electrical System
1. 12-volt electrical systems shall be used.
2. The distributor must be a standard VW mechanical advance
distributor, or Bosch 009, or a replacement replica, with the
following modifications permitted.
3. The advance curve may be adjusted.
4. Standard Bosch or replica points may be replaced with an electronic replacement points set (Pertronix, Comp-U-Fire, etc.).
The replacement set must be totally within the distributor.
5. Any coil is permitted.
GCR - 360
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
14.Other non-standard components.
Use of the following non-standard replacement parts is permitted
provided that no unauthorized modification of any component results:
Any fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws, etc); wiring; gaskets and seals; fuel
line; spark plugs; piston rings; fan belt; and connecting rod bearings,
camshaft bearings, and crankshaft main bearings, provided the bearings
are of the same type and size and VW standard or oversize bearings.
6.Transaxle
1. The standard VW Type 1, 2 or 3 swing axle type transaxle must
be used in standard configuration unless stated otherwise in these
rules. All five gears (including reverse) must be operable, and
controllable from the driver’s seat. Synchromesh must be operating
on all four forward gears. A direct replacement transmission case,
VW part # 081-301-051, or replacement replica, “Rhino” case is
permitted.
2. Shock damper mounts may be modified or removed.
3. Transmission shall not be installed in an inverted position.
4. The crown wheel must be transposed in the transmission case.
5. The differential cannot be modified in any way to limit its normal
function. Torque biasing, limited slip, and locked differentials are
prohibited.
6. The following gear ratios must be used with the 1600(1584)
engine:
1 - 3.80; 2 – 2.06; 3 – 1.26; 4 – 0,89; differential 4.125
7.
Frame and Body
The area between the upper and lower main frame tubes from the
front instrument/dash roll hoop bulkhead to the rear roll hoop bulkhead shall be protected by at least one of the following methods to
prevent the intrusion of objects into the cockpit. Panels may extend
to the forward most bulkhead, but must otherwise comply with
these regulations.
1. Panel(s), minimum of either .060 inch heat treated aluminum
(6061-T6 or equivalent) or 18 gauge steel, attached to the
outside of the main frame tubes.
2. Reinforced body, consisting of at least two layers of 5 ounce,
bi-directional, laminated Kevlar material incorporated into the
body which shall be securely fastened to the frame. (5 or more
layers are highly recommended.)
For either method, fasteners shall be no closer than 6 inch
centers (no stress-bearing panels). The material used for the
chassis braces in this area shall be at least equivalent to the
roll hoop brace material.
3. Flat composite panels of uniform thickness and construction
attached to the outside of the main frame tubes. Shaping of
these panels to conform to the outer perimeter of the main
frame tubes is permitted. Carbon fiber is permitted; however,
it must be used in conjunction with another “anti-ballistic”
type material (e.g., Kevlar, Zylon, etc). Such material shall be
at least 1.5mm (.060 inches) in thickness not including the
carbon fiber.
GCR - 361
FCS
6. Any 12v on-board automotive starter capable of starting the
engine from the driver’s compartment is permitted.
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
Composite anti-intrusion panels shall be attached with no more
than eight fasteners per side. Fasteners shall be AN or superior
grade of not more than 0.25 inch diameter. Two flat or countersunk Mil Spec or SAE washers of no more than 1 inch diameter may be employed with each fastener. Ten fasteners per
side are permitted if the panels extend to the front bulkhead.
Alternatively, FIA mounting is permitted as follows:
One panel shall be permitted per side. It shall be fastened
to the frame at its extreme corners, the upper, lower,
forward and rearward edge halfway between the corners,
and halfway along each diagonal tube. The attachment
should consist of an 8mm U-bolt and an aluminum plate
3mm thick, 20mm wide and 12mm longer than the U-bolt
span.
Composite panel mounting must comply with one or the other
above prescribed methods. It may not be a combination of the
two.
2.Body
1. The body shall be constructed of fiberglass, aluminum, steel,
Kevlar, carbon fiber or any combination thereof.
2. The body must not be rigidly attached so as to form part of the
structural integrity of the car.
3. Rear (Tail) Bodywork: The rear bodywork shall extend from the
firewall to a point at least 16” aft of the rear axle centerline.
4. Front (Nose) Bodywork: Any bodywork forward of the front
beam torsion spring tubes shall have a maximum width of
31.75” (80.65 cm)
5. Main (Center) Bodywork: No part of the frame or bodywork
shall project beyond a plane connecting the vertical centerline
of the front and rear tires. Fuel filler necks, caps or lids shall
not protrude beyond the bodywork of the car. The bottom of
any bodywork that extends below the frame members shall be
on the same flat plane as the undertray and shall not deviate
from that flat plane by more than 1”.
6. Cockpit Opening: The driver’s seat shall be capable of being
entered without the removal or manipulation of any part or
panel (except for a removable steering wheel and removable
cockpit padding). The cockpit opening of the bodywork shall
have the following minimal dimensions: Length: 60cm (23.622
inches) Width: 45cm (17.717 inches). This width extends over
a length of 30cm (11.811 inches) minimum. This minimal rectangular opening may exist anywhere forward of the bracing,
and required padding will not be considered in these dimensions.
7. Air Ducting: Air ducts may be installed for the purpose of delivering air to, or extracting air from the cylinders, cylinder heads,
oil cooler and/or carburetor. Air duct opening(s) may be located
within the cockpit area and/or penetrate the firewall provided
the duct(s) design and construction would prohibit flame and
debris from reaching the driver.
8. Aerodynamic Devices: Wings are prohibited. Any device
specifically designed to use air speed to create aerodynamic
downforce is prohibited.
GCR - 362
9.1.1. Formula First (F First) Specifications
FCS
NOTES:
GCR - 363
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
I.
FORMULA ENTERPRISES PREPARATION RULES
1.Definition
One design, fixed specifications, open cockpit, single seat Formula car
with Mazda 2.3 engine. Cars are packaged and sold by SCCA Enterprises,
Inc. All replacement parts are supplied through SCCA Enterprises, Inc.,
and shall be official Spec Formula Car parts except where noted in J.4.
No modifications may be made to any part or system unless specifically
permitted in these rules.
2.
Safety Requirements
Car will be delivered from the manufacturer with approved safety equipment. Replaced items shall be supplied through SCCA Enterprises, except
safety harnesses may be replaced by any other that conforms to GCR
Section 9.
3.
Vehicle Configuration
All cars to GCR section 9 with the following exceptions: Section 9.3
Accumulators.
4.
Maintenance and Repairs
It is permitted to perform routine maintenance and repairs as long as
existing parts are in no way modified and replacement parts are official
Enterprises Formula Car parts. If any official Enterprises’ seal is broken,
lost by accident or intent, the procedures outlined under I.18., shall be
followed. Parts and materials with an Enterprises part number having the
prefix “WM10” are considered to be unrestricted, providing their dimensions and materials are comparable. No other parts are to be considered
“unrestricted” except where specified.
5.Chassis
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED except as noted in these rules.
a. All cars shall use the stock, as delivered by Enterprises, wood floor
of 6mm, with an allowable deviation of 3 mm across the surface
for wear.
b. Seats are free. Panels inside the cockpit may be attached to the
frame as long as the points of attachment are no closer than 6
inches apart. No welding or gluing of the seat to the structure of
the car is allowed.
Definition of cockpit is: area between the front roll hoop and rear
roll hoop.
c. Painting or powder coating of the chassis is allowed.
d. Enterprises foot drop box part # WM180020J may be installed.
e. Enterprises impact attenuator part #WM180023 (crush box) shall
be installed.
f. Transponder must be used per SCCA Enterprises Technical Bulletin
002-2016.
6.Bodywork
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED (except as specified). If any seal, label,
stamp is missing the parts must be returned to Enterprises for resealing.
a. Bodywork shall remain unmodified with the exception of holes for
a slave or jumper battery plug, trackside beacon receiver, and tow
hooks. All repair work must match original body dimensions and
contours.
GCR - 364
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
b. Bodywork fasteners are free.
c. The car may be painted any color(s), except primer.
d. It is required that all cars display the official sponsors of Enterprises
decals and locations as specified by Enterprises.
f.
All aerodynamic devices shall be used as delivered: i.e. wings, body
winglets. No modification to mounting location or holes.
g. TThe front wing main plane, front wing secondary elements, front
wing support mounts, and front wing endplates must be used and
mounted as delivered from Enterprises. Any modification to these
parts, except as specifically noted herein, is strictly forbidden. The
main wing plane angle is zeroed on the rear upper aft transmission
surface measured with a suitable angle gauge, i.e.: digital level on
the top main plane 2 inches outward from the nose box mounts. It
must meet a minimum measurement of negative .5 degrees (angled
down in the back) and a maximum measurement of positive 2.5
degrees (angled up in the back). It is acceptable to shim the main
plane to obtain this measurement. Wicker bill (Gurney flaps) are
permitted as an option for installation on the trailing edge upper
surface of the front wing secondary elements only, not the wing
main plane. They must be attached in a secure fashion, without
modification to the wing element except for mounting hardware.
Total height is .500”. Maximum number of mounting locations on
front flaps is 2 on each flap and maximum hardware size is #8
(.156). Gurney flaps, where attached, shall be 90 degrees and
parallel to the upper surface of the wing element and no taper or
“saw toothed” Gurneys are permitted.
h. The rear wing and its related mounting components are to be used
and mounted as delivered. Any modifications, except as specifically noted herein, are strictly prohibited. The lower plane angle,
zeroed on the rear upper aft transmission surface, measured with
a suitable angle gauge. i.e.; digital level on the top surface of the
lower rear wing must meet a minimum of –3.0 degrees (angled
down in the back) and a maximum of +2.0 degrees (angled up
in the back). It is acceptable to adjust the lower rear element to
meet these requirements. The upper rear wing element may only be
adjusted within the parameter of the endplates and wing adjusters
as provided from Enterprises. No additional holes may be added.
Wicker bill (Gurney flaps) are permitted as an option for installation
on the trailing edge upper surface of the wing element. They must
be attached in a secure fashion, without modification to the wing
element except for mounting hardware. Total height is .250” on
one or both elements. The Gurney flap only, may extend beyond
the parameters of the end plate. Maximum number of mounting
locations is 5 and maximum hardware size is #8 (.156). Gurney
flaps, where attached, shall be 90 degrees and parallel to the upper
surface of the wing element and no taper or “saw toothed” Gurneys
are permitted.
i.
The stock headrest may be modified or replaced with any headrest
meeting GCR section 9.4. The stock lateral bolsters may be modified or removed.
j.
Enterprises windscreen P/N: WM137000 is allowed.
7.
Engine and Drivetrain
a.Engine
GCR - 365
FCS
e. Radiator screens are allowed and recommended.
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
1. NO MODIFICATIONS ARE ALLOWED EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFICALLY AUTHORIZED WITHIN THESE RULES. This includes all
fuel injection and engine management components, including
exhaust, cooling, electrical and lubrication systems. All
systems are subject to test procedures and must conform to
OEM specifications as stated and supplied by Enterprises. All
fluids, except fuel, are unrestricted.
2. Enterprises, Inc., seals on the engine, and other components
shall remain in place at all times. All engines shall be rebuilt,
checked on an engine dynamometer, and sealed through Enterprises.
3. Engine maintenance, which is permitted, includes the replacement, but not modification of external engine and engine
systems parts.
4. There are six (6) seals on the engine. Two (2) on the timing
cover, two (2) on the top of the valve cover, and two (2) on
the oil sump. They may not be removed or tampered with.
5. All rubber oil lines may be replaced with braided metal-covered
(Aeroquip type) lines. Hose clamps may be installed on the
rubber oil lines.
6. Intake manifold: No modifications are allowed. Absolutely no
porting or the addition of material is allowed. No coating is
allowed on the exterior or interior of the manifold.
7. Engine Control Unit (ECU): Manufactured by MBE and sealed
by Enterprises. Tampering of the ECU, ECU program, seal,
wiring or sensors is prohibited.
8. The flywheel weight is a minimum of 2.6 pounds for the Enterprises supplied flywheel. No modifications to the flywheel
with the exception of normal resurfacing for clutch wear are
allowed.
9. No modification to the crankshaft dampener is allowed.
The following parts must be used:
10.Clutch: Enterprises supplied clutch and flywheel contained in
kit #WM701000A, Piston #WM701004A, Throw out bearing
#WM701006A, Small O-ring #WM1010405, Large o-ring
#WM1010406, Flexplate and Ring Gear # WM1101053.
11.Spark Plugs, Part # NGK PTR5F-11, NGK ITR5F-13, or Motorcraft # AGSF32FEC.
12.Fuel Injectors: Part # WM591929
13.Throttle Body: Part # WM591930
14.Fuel Filter: Any 10 micron fuel filter may be used as long as it
performs no other purpose than to filter fuel.
15.Air Filter: Part # WM301020
16.Exhaust systems may be thermal coated or wrapped.
17.A heat shield between the engine block and the exhaust
system is recommended for the purpose of protecting hoses,
shifter cable, and wiring from the heat of the exhaust.
18.An Enterprises muffler kit part #WM1131046 is required. The
muffler may not extend beyond the back of the transmission.
GCR - 366
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
An additional muffler may be added to accompany the stock
muffler as needed to meet sound requirements.
20.An optional Enterprise alternator kit is allowed, Part #
WM1100101
b.Transmission
1. The 5 speed sequential transaxle supplied by Enterprises is the
only permitted gearbox. The casting has to remain original.
No internal or external modification (including lightening) other
than normal racing repair.
2. The servicing, replacement and modification of internal components is permitted by the competitor. With the following exceptions:
a. All components must be ferrous metal, except for bearing
retainers and bearing cages.
b. Components manufactured by alternate manufacturers
are permitted. Replacement components must be direct
replacements to the original components. Absolute
minimum weights are listed below.
3. The rear cover plate may manufactured or remanufactured
using aluminum.
4. Only the following gear ratios are permitted:
1st gear combination 12:29 Ratio number 2.41
2nd gear combination 15:28 1.86
3rd gear combination 16:24 1.50
4th gear combination 18:22 1.22 or 20:25 1.25
for 2011beginning 2012, only 20:25 1.255th gear
combination 24:26 1.08
5. Differential – Only final drive ratio allowed is 12:33 2.75. The
differential must remain an open differential. No limited slip
mechanism is allowed. Differential must work as supplied (no
tightening of the differential to limit slip) Must be able to use
existing components.
6. Polishing, shot peening, REM© Isotropic treatment, heat and
cold treatments are allowed. No coatings or plating is allowed.
7. Any mechanical device may be used between the shift lever
and the transmission barrel to provide the required actuation.
No electronic or pneumatic devices are allowed. Gear position
indicators are allowed.
8. Throttle cable is free, but must remain cable operated.
MINIMUM WEIGHTS OF THE FOLLOWING PARTS
Differential Housing (both parts including bearings) 7.4 lbs
Ring Gear 3.6 lbs
Pinion Shaft 4.0 lbs
1st gear 2.7 lbs
2nd gear 1.2 lbs
3rd gear 1.1 lbs
4th gear 1.1 lbs
5th gear 1.0 lbs
GCR - 367
FCS
19.An optional air to oil cooler is allowed. The maximum core
size is 13 inches wide by 6.5 inches high. No water to oil heat
exchanger is allowed.
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
8.
Suspension
a. NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED. Adjustments are permitted within
the limits of the suspension and steering components. All rod ends
shall be engaged at least 1.5 times the diameter of the end.
b. Front Springs: 600 lbs. ±25 lbs. Part # WM203008. Wire size
shall measure .360” ±.005”.
Rear Springs: 1000 lbs. ±25 lbs. Part # WM203009. Wire size
shall measure .410” ± .005”.
c. Competitors may use the entire travel of all suspension adjusted
components as delivered. Alternate parts are not allowed.
d. All suspension parts shall have the SCCA code embedded (a label/
or an Enterprises stamp) in the part. If they do not it is required to
return part to Enterprises for proper labeling.
e. Rod ends may be replaced with rod ends having specifications
equal to or greater than the OEM supplied rod ends. This includes
dimensional material and strength specifications. Replacement rod
ends shall be capable of being installed with no modifications to
any original components.
f. Anti-roll bars (sway bars) may be disconnected, but not removed.
Anti-roll bar sizes:
Front
Main Shaft 0.875” OD ±.005” Top Tee .750” x .135” wall, ±.005”
Length: 7.5” maximum end to end
Rear
lower stalk .615” Dia. ±.005”
Upper stalk .765” ±.005”
Arm length 5.470” shoulder to shoulder
Optional: Front rotating blade Anti-roll bars
PN: WM201023 Blade Minimum thickness 0.155” ±.005”
PN: WM201022 0.590” ±.005 Main Shaft Length 6.006 _+ .010”
PN: WM201029 0.875 +/- .005” Main Shaft Length 6.006” ±.010”.
PN: WM1121008 0.590” Full Bar kit / Cockpit adjustable.
PN: WM1121010 0.875” Full Bar kit / Cockpit adjustable.
PN: WM1121007 0.590” Bar Kit / set screw lock.
9.Shocks
a. NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED. 4 Bilstein Shocks, Part #
WM203001 or 4 Penske shocks, Part # WM1180090. Same type
on all 4 corners.
b. Only shims provided on the shocks are legal (no bump rubbers,
packers or modification to shims).
c. Adjustments for the Bilstein will be at the spring perch and with
pressure (if rebuilt). Adjustments for the Penske will be at the
spring perch or with the rebound adjuster.
d. Bilstein shocks may be used in the original configuration or may be
rebuilt. Both shock types can only be rebuilt by Enterprises or its
authorized rebuilder.
GCR - 368
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
e. All shock absorbers must be sealed by Enterprises or its authorized
rebuilder.
a. An alternate steering wheel may be used. “Butterfly” style steering
wheels are not allowed.
b. Upper steering shaft may be modified to accept an alternate
steering wheel and/or hub (if applicable). It may also be modified to
accommodate a larger driver.
11.Brakes
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules.
Only the AP 4 PISTON CALIPER BRAKE SYSTEM AS SUPPLIED WITH
VENTED ROTORS as supplied by Enterprises shall be used
a. Brake pads as labeled and supplied from Enterprises.
b. Brake rotors are used as delivered, no drilling or lightening is
allowed. Minimum Diameter is 10.450”. Part # WM801002x Left,
Part # WM801003x Right. Min width is .600”
c. Master cylinders must be the Girling type.
Front master cylinder is.700” piston diameter, Part # WM802005
Rear master cylinder is .750” piston diameter, Part # WM802006
d. Calipers must be AP 4 piston. Part numbers are:
LF # WM802004 RF #WM802003
LR # WM802002 RR # WM802001
e. Brake lines are free (no plastic allowed).
12.
Wheels (Only wheels supplied by Enterprises)
NO MODIFICATIONS or MACHINING ALLOWED Aluminum racing wheel
supplied from Enterprises with SCCA logo. If logo is worn off or wheels
that have been painted or powder coated, wheels must be inspected by
Enterprises or one of their designated Customer Service Representatives
and logos replaced.
Front: 8 in X 13 in Part # WM 205001
Rear: 10 in X 13 in Part # WM205002
a. All wheel bearings shall be run with grease (not oil), no special
coatings are allowed, and the bearing grease seal shall be intact.
No ceramic wheel bearings are permitted.
b. Wheel spacers are not allowed.
13.Tires
Tires must run in sets of 4 as stated below:
DRY
American Racer
Front: P/N: JE3C3, 22.0 X 8.0-13S
Rear: P/N: JE3MA, 22.5 X 10.0-13S
WET
GCR - 369
FCS
10.Steering
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
American Racer
Front: P/N: JWWC3: 22.0 X 8.0-13
Rear: P/N: JWWMA, 22.5 X 10.0-13
a. A competitor shall start the race on at least 3 tires used in a qualifying session for the race as identified by markings made on the
tires by a race official. It is the responsibility of the competitor to
ensure that his or her tires are appropriately marked prior to (e.g. on
the false grid), during, or immediately after (e.g. as the car leaves
the track) a qualifying session.
b. For races with more than one qualifying session, a competitor
shall start the race on any 3 or 4 marked tires from any qualifying
session for the race.
c. If a competitor chooses to start the race on any more than one
tires that was not used in a qualifying session for the race and not
appropriately marked, the competitor shall forfeit his or her grid
position and start from the back of the grid. This forfeiture of grid
position shall not apply if all qualifying sessions for the race were
run under rain or wet conditions.
d. A complete set of four (4) rain or wet track tires may be used at the
competitor’s discretion for any race. Rain tires may be in new or
used condition and require no special marking if used as a complete
set of four.
14.
Electrical System
NO MODIFICATIONS ALLOWED, except as described within these rules.
a. Wiring harnesses must remain as delivered.
b. Battery may be replaced with a larger one as long it remains in the
same location.
c. Battery wiring is free. Car must shut off when master switch is
turned off.
d. Any instrumentation is allowed.
e. Data acquisition is allowed, no telemetry is allowed.
f. Any rain light is allowed.
15.Weight
The car shall weigh 1270 lbs. minimum, including the driver.
a. Ballast must be placed between the front dash bulkhead and the
front engine bulkhead. They shall be fastened securely to the floor
with flat head 5/16 bolts, washers and nuts on both ends of the
weight.
16.Updates
Provisions will be made for updates on all safety and mechanical improvements. When part updates are needed, because of reliability, supply or
obsolescence, testing of parts from alternative, updated sources with
direction and approval from SCCA Enterprises may be used in sanctioned
events. Such updates will be effective when finalized by Enterprises,
announced by the National Office, and published in Fastrack.
17.
Vehicle Logbook
The Vehicle Logbook for each Enterprises Formula Car remains the
property of Enterprises and will contain not only the record of technical
inspections, but also the major maintenance performed and all transfers of
ownership. The Vehicle Logbook number will be the same as the factory
GCR - 370
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
A FEE OF $200 WILL BE CHARGED FOR LOST LOGBOOKS.
The logbook shall be presented at scrutineering for each event entered.
All Enterprises Formula Cars are subject to normal safety inspection.
Additionally, scrutineers will check each official seal. A competitor may
not be barred from competing at a specific event if a seal is broken,
damaged, lost or part not properly labeled but the part may be considered
suspect and will be treated as such and will be required to be sent back to
Enterprises for inspection. If engine cam cover or oil pan seals are broken,
damaged, or missing, the engine shall be removed and sent to Enterprises
for testing and resealing. The competitor will bear all expenses at the
competitor’s cost prior to the next event.
18.Seals
Enterprises engine seals are required for all races. Any competitor who
runs an event without all proper engine seals in the required locations
shall have his engine removed and shipped to Enterprises for testing
and sealing after that event. The competitor will be responsible for all
cost incurred by this procedure regardless of the findings, and subject to
penalty by the SOM if engine is found to be not as specified.
SCCA Enterprises, Inc., seals are required on all Formula Car Engines.
Any counterfeit engine seal found by an authorized representative of
SCCA, Inc., or SCCA Enterprises, Inc., shall immediately render that
engine illegal for further use, without need of dyno testing or inspection.
Enterprises, Inc., will not be under any obligation to bring an illegally
sealed engine back to legal condition. Penalties shall include all of the
following: 19.1., 19.2., 19.3., and 19.4.
19.
Penalties (Specific to Enterprises Spec Cars)
If a competitor refuses to give his engine and/or unlabeled parts for testing
per a request of the Chief Steward, the following penalties will automatically be imposed:
a.Vehicle logbook will be impounded.
b. Disqualification from a competition or the event.
c. Suspension of SCCA competition privileges for thirty (30) days.
d. The car and drive train are suspended from competition until the
unit(s) specified by the Chief Steward are replaced.
In a case where a competitor does comply with the Chief Steward’s
request to have an engine and/or parts inspected and the impounded
unit(s) are found legal, the SCCA, will stand all the costs incurred for the
testing, including shipping. Should the impounded unit(s) be found illegal,
the following penalties will be imposed:
1. Disqualification from a competition or the event.
2. A fine of $250.00.
3. $500.00 testing fee plus freight charges paid to Enterprises.
4. Competition privileges will be suspended immediately, and the
suspension will continue for a minimum of thirty (30) days after
the date when all fines and costs are paid in full and the license is
GCR - 371
FCS
chassis number that is stamped on the name plate mounted on the fuel
cell behind the driver’s shoulders. When the vehicle is sold, traded, or
scrapped, the logbook shall be sent to SCCA Enterprises, Inc.,. 14550 E.
Easter Ave Suite 400 Centennial, Co. 80112. The logbook will them be
reissued to the new owner. When the logbook has been filled, a new one
shall be requested from SCCA Enterprises, Inc.
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
received by the Chairman SOM or the SCCA Topeka Office.
5. For a second illegal drive train offense, the competitor will be
permanently disqualified from further Enterprises Formula Car
competition.
20.
Enterprises Formula Car Drive Train Protest
a. Protests shall be filed per the GCR.
b. Protestor will specify the drive train item suspected (i.e., transmission or engine). The teardown bond to remove the motor and
transmission is in three (3) parts:
1. Remove and replace motor and transmission - $400.00
a. Will be done by an SCCA representative or other shop that
is equipped for this type of work and will be paid directly.
2. Ship motor to Enterprises and test - $500.00 plus freight and
crating charges
a. Enterprises will inspect the motor, (item 2), and will notify
the Chairman SOM as soon as possible as to the results.
3. Protest Fee: Regional ‑ $25.00, National ‑ $50.00.
c. Enterprises shall retain the evidence, and the SCCA shall retain the
fee, (item 3), until the period for appeal has passed.
d.The Chairman SOM is required to inform Enterprises of the protest
using the FE Protest Information Form. A copy of the protest shall
be sent to Enterprises.
If the protest proves to be valid and any appeal fails, the protest
fee, (item 3), will be returned to the protestor. Also, the protestee
will be required to reimburse the protestor the remaining fees
($900). The protestee will not be allowed to compete again until all
costs are paid. If found legal, the protester forfeits fee (items 1 and
2) above.
e. If found illegal, competition privileges will be suspended immediately, and the suspension will continue for thirty (30) days after all
costs are paid in full.
f. For a second illegal drive train offense, the competitor will be
permanently disqualified from competing in FE competition.
21.
Accessory Items
a. Mirrors are free.
b. Two-way radios may be installed in the car. All components shall
be securely attached and approved by Tech inspection.
c. Racers tape may be used to repair crash damage, or as a precautionary means of securing the body retaining latches. Crash-damage
is defined as having occurred during the current event, and the tape
should be of an appropriate color if possible. Taping of body joints
is not allowed
d. The spark plug wires may be fire sleeved and may be loomed, but
must be original Mazda wire as supplied by Enterprises.
e. Engine compartment fluid hoses may be insulated using heat shield
or wrap.
f.
Front and rear tow hooks are required, see GCR section 9.3 Towing
Eyes.
GCR - 372
9.1.1. Formula Enterprises (FE) Specifications
g. Enterprises P/N WM11592302 Throttle Cam/Cable Update is
recommended.
h. Enterprises P/N WM114001 Thermostat Kit is permitted.
Enterprises P/N WM 801004 Rotor Temp Bands are permitted.
FCS
i.
GCR - 373
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
9.1.2.GT1 CATEGORY SPECIFICATIONS
A.PURPOSE
The GT Category is intended to provide the membership and interested
manufacturers with the opportunity to compete in purpose built, highly
modified replicas of series produced automobiles. To that end, cars shall
be classified in GT Classes based on their competitive potential. The Club
may alter or adjust specifications and require, permit, or restrict certain
specific components to equate competitive potential. The SCCA does not
guarantee the competitiveness of any car.
B.INTENT
It is the intent of these rules to allow modifications useful and necessary
in the construction and preparation of an extremely high perfor­
mance
road racing vehicle. It is understood that such a vehicle can be updated
and/or changed from marque-to-marque, based on member interest and
manufacturer incentive. With this in mind, the Club will use the following
guidelines in the determination of the suitability for classification in the
GT Category:
1. Basic vehicle size, shape, engine displacement, and cylinder head
design of the standard and/or alternate engine(s).
2. Member interest.
3. Manufacturer interest and potential support to competitors.
4. Vehicle production quantities of no less than 3000 units of the
specified make/model within a twelve (12) month period, all such
units being approved by the EPA and DOT for sale in the United
States (Production Cars that have been reclassified into the GT
Category need not meet minimum production quantities).
C.SPECIFICATIONS
The SCCA shall publish the GT Category Specifications (GTCS) containing
recognized specifications for each car eligible to compete in the GT Category during the calendar year. Cars shall be listed according to the manufacturer’s make and model designation. In the case of doubt involving
specifications not adequately described in the GTCS, Scrutineers/Stewards may refer to maintenance manuals, spare parts books, general catalogs and performance catalogs published by the vehicle manufacturer,
MVMA specifications, and FIA Homologation Certificates for the make
and model, or may inspect other cars of the same make and model.
1. GT Category automobiles shall be divided into Classes based on
relative performance as follows: GT1, GT2, GT3, and GTLite.
2. Cars may be updated or backdated within the specifications of the
recognized make and model as listed on the Approved Automobile
List of the GTCS (GT-1), or as listed on a single GT Specification
Form line of the GTCS. Any classified engine may be used in a
classified chassis within the same manufacturer as shown on the
specification line.
3. Cars shall meet or exceed their minimum specified weight, as listed
in the GTCS, as qualified or raced, with driver.
4. No permitted component/modification shall additionally perform a
prohibited function.
5. Turbocharging/supercharging is not permitted.
GCR - 375
GTCS
These specifications are part of the SCCA GCR, and all automobiles shall
conform with GCR Section 9.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
6. Construction of tube frame cars is permitted. Standard maximum
track dimensions for all cars, unless otherwise noted, are as
follows:
GT-1
70.0” F & R
GT-2
64.0” F & R
GT-3 / GT-Lite
60.0” F & R
D.
AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS (GT-1)
1. Engine (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
any mechanical or chemical means, the standard, optional,
or alternate components of the engine, provided it is
always possible to positively identify them as such.
2. Material shall not be added to these components unless
specifically authorized by these rules.
3. The original direction of engine rotation shall be retained.
b. Induction System
1. All inducted air shall pass through the throttle venturis.
2. The specified carburetor(s) or specified fuel injection may
be modified. The number, model, type, throttle bore and/
or venturi restriction shall remain as specified. Refer to
Section E.1.a. of these rules for additional induction specifications.
3. Any air filter(s), velocity stack(s), and or air box(es) may be
fitted. Air may be ducted to the carburetor or fuel injection
provided that the ducting is completely contained within
the engine compartment and that the air to be ducted
is supplied through normal (or as specifically authorized
herein) openings in the bodywork. Cars may duct air to
the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of the
hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20 inches,
maximum length of 3.5 inches.
4. Intake manifolds are unrestricted.
5. Any throttle linkage may be used. All throttle linkages
shall be equipped with more than one system of positive
throttle closure
c. Fuel System
1. Any fuel line(s) may be used. All fuel line(s) passing
through the driver/passenger compartment shall be made
of metal braided hose with AN-Series threaded couplings.
2. Any fuel pump(s), filter(s), and pressure regulator(s) may
be used. Such components may not be located in the
driver/passenger compartment, but their location within
the bodywork of the car is otherwise unrestricted.
d. Emission Equipment
1. Exhaust emission control equipment shall be removed in
their entirety. When air injection nozzles are removed from
a cylinder head, the resultant holes shall be completely
plugged.
GCR - 376
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
3. V-6 and V-8 General Motors engines are permitted: Buick,
Chevrolet, Oldsmobile, Pontiac, aluminum V-6 GM bow
tie block, Brodix, Brownfield, Dart, Edlebrock, Pro Action
14-degree, or Airflow Research 210, 215, 220, and 227
cylinder heads of cast iron or aluminum. All Pro cylinder
head, part # 270-LM-13 is permitted Any cylinder head(s)
utilized shall be of a conventional design (siamesed intake
ports, two (2) valves per cylinder, all valves inline), direct
replacement type. General Motors SB-2 cylinder heads are
permitted.
4. V-6 and V-8 Ford engines are permitted: Ford Motorsports
inline-valve or canted-valve cylinder heads of cast iron or
aluminum. Alternate cylinder heads from Airflow Research,
Brodix, Cylinder Head Innovations, Dart, Edelbrock, Pro
Action, and World Products. Any alternate cylinder head(s)
utilized shall be of a conventional design (two valves per
cylinder, all valves inline) direct replacement type.
5. V-6 and V-8 Chrysler engines are permitted: MOPAR
Performance conventional design (siamesed intake ports,
two (2) valves per cylinder, all valves inline), direct replacement cylinder heads.
f. Camshaft and Valve Gear
1. Any camshaft(s) mounted in the standard location(s)
may be used. Any cam followers may be used. Springs
and mounting hardware which act directly on the cam
followers may be added.
2. Camshaft drive mechanism is unrestricted.
3. Push rods, rocker arms, and rocker arm supports are unrestricted.
4. Valves are unrestricted.
5. Valve springs, retainers, keepers, and seals are unrestricted.
g.Block
1. The standard production, manufacturer’s heavy duty (of
the same basic materials as the original block), or specified
alternate engine block shall be used. Aluminum block V8
engines are not permitted unless specifically classified in
9.1.2.E.1.c
2. The block may be bored and/or sleeved to achieve the
correct displacement.
3. The block may be machined, and O-rings may be added to
replace or supplement the head gasket(s).
4. The crankshaft main bearing caps may be substituted.
GCR - 377
GTCS
e. Cylinder Heads
1. The standard production, optional, or specified alternate(s)
cylinder head(s) shall be used. Any valve guides and valve
seats may be used.
2. Material(s) may be added to the combustion chamber(s)
and interior ports/passages of the cylinder head(s). The
addition of such material(s) shall not enable the combustion chamber and/or interior ports/passages to be moved
external to the original physical limitations of the cylinder
head(s).
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
Additional main bearing caps and/or bolts may be used
provided that no material is added to the block for their
attachment.
h. Pistons and Rods
1. Pistons and piston pins are unrestricted. The compression
ratio is unrestricted.
2. Connecting rods are unrestricted, provided that they are
made of a ferrous material, e.g., steel. Aluminum, titanium, graphite, etc., rods are prohibited.
i.
Crankshaft and Flywheel
1. The crankshaft is unrestricted, provided it is made of the
same basic material as the standard production crankshaft.
Those vehicles originally equipped with an iron crankshaft
may use a steel crankshaft. All alternate crankshafts shall
retain the same angle(s) of crank throws as the original
crankshaft.
2. The use of any crankshaft vibration damper is permitted.
3. The use of any flywheel and clutch is permitted.
j.
Oiling System
1. The use of any oil pan (sump), oil pump(s), and/or oil
pickup(s) is permitted. Oil pump(s) shall be mechanically
driven by the engine. Dry sump systems are permitted.
Any oil tank(s) used by such a system shall be located
within the bodywork, and any oil lines utilized within the
system shall be metal or metal braided, equipped with
AN-Series threaded couplers.
2. The use of any oil filter(s) is permitted.
3. The oil tank(s), cap(s), oil filter(s), and any fittings attached
thereto shall be isolated by a metal bulkhead(s), so that in
the event of any spillage, leakage, or failure, oil will not
reach the driver.
k. Electrical System
1. The use of any driver operated electrical starter is permitted.
2. The use of any ignition system (except magneto ignition)
is permitted, provided the number of spark plugs remains
the same as that of the standard production, optional,
or alternate cylinder head(s). Driver controlled adjustable
spark timing is prohibited.
3. The remaining components of the engine electrical system
are unrestricted.
l.
Exhaust System
1. The components of the exhaust system are unrestricted.
Refer to sections D.8.c.2., and D.8.j.3., of these rules for
additional exhaust system and bodywork specifications.
m. Other Engine Components
1. Alternate engine components considered replacement
parts, such as seals, bearings, water pumps, nuts, bolts,
studs, washers, and gaskets are permitted. Bushings or
offset keys of unrestricted origin may be installed.
2. Generator/alternator, crankshaft, and water pump pulleys
are unrestricted.
GCR - 378
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
B. Transverse mounted engines may be relocated for
axle/CV joint alignment. Alternately, they may be relocated to a longitudinal position if authorized specifically by the GTCS.
C. General Motors, Ford, and Chrysler front mounted V-6
engines may be positioned so that the center of the
foremost spark plug hole is no more than 4.5 inches
behind the front axle center line (bellhousing and
transmission locations are the same as a V-8 motor).
2. Engine, Rotary Piston (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. Rotary piston engines in GT-1 may be prepared using
GTCS specifications D.1.a., b., c., d., j., k., l., and m.
2. The standard production or specified alternate rotor housings shall be used. No changes in the epitrochoidal curve
of the motor are permitted.
3. The capacity of the working chamber(s) shall not be
changed.
4. The eccentric shaft may be replaced with another of the
same basic material, but no changes in its eccentricity or
bearing journal dimensions are permitted.
5. The rotor(s) is/are unrestricted, provided the material and
number of lobes remains unchanged.
3. Cooling System (GT-1)
a.Radiator
1. Only one radiator is allowed provided that there are no
changes to the exterior bodywork to accommodate its use.
It shall not be located in the driver/passenger compartment. Radiator overflow line (s) shall terminate in a catch
tank.
2. Separate expansion or header tank(s) are permitted. Any
such tanks shall not be located in the driver/ passenger
compartment.
3. The heater core and all attendant heater controls, lines,
and accessories may be removed in their entirety, but shall
not be modified or replaced.
b. Radiator Fan
1. The cooling fan(s) may be modified, substituted, or
removed.
2. Electrically operated cooling fan(s) may be installed,
provided it/they serve no other purpose.
GCR - 379
GTCS
3. Engine mountings are unrestricted.
A. Cars with the engine mounted longitudinal to the
chassis may relocate the engine in a longitudinal direction, centered along the longitudinal centerline of the
vehicle as defined by the track. A one (1) inch transverse deviation tolerance from the absolute centerline
is permitted. Unless otherwise so fitted in its standard
production location or specifically authorized in the
vehicle’s GTCS specifications, said relocation shall
align the center of the foremost spark plug hole with
the front axle centerline.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
c. Radiator Shroud/Ducting
1. The original radiator shroud may be altered, removed, or
replaced.
2. Sealing or shrouding the airflow area between the normal
grill opening and the water radiator is permitted.
d. Water Pump
1. The water pump(s) may be replaced with any other water
pump(s) mechanically driven by the engine.
2. Mid-engine vehicles may use an electric water pump.
e.Thermostat
1. The thermostat(s) may be modified or replaced with
blanking sleeves or restrictors.
f. Oil/Lubricant Coolers
1. The use of any engine, transmission, and differential
cooler(s) is permitted, provided that it/they are mounted
completely within or under the bodywork, but not in the
driver/passenger compartment.
2. Associated cooler pumps and lines are permitted for the
transmission and differential coolers.
3. Air may be ducted to said coolers only through normal
openings in the bodywork. Air ducts or other openings
shall be added to body parts only where specifically authorized by these rules.
4. Air may be ducted to the rear brakes and rear mounted
coolers from an interior bulkhead behind the driver. Air
may also be ducted to these components from free air
under the car, provided that such under car ducting does
not create “ground effects.”
4. Transmission/Final Drive (GT-1)
a. Component Modification
1. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
any mechanical or chemical means, the standard, optional,
or alternate components of the transmission and final
drive, provided that it is always possible to identify them
as such.
b.Transmission
1. Automatic transmissions are not permitted unless specifically authorized on a vehicle’s GTCS line.
2. Any readily available manual transmission having no more
than five (5) forward speeds and an functional reverse
speed may be used, provided that it is fitted in the same
basic location used in the standard production automobile. Any relocation or repositioning of the transmissionto-engine dimensional relationship shall be specifically
authorized by the GTCS. Sequential shifting transmissions
are permitted with a 75 lb. weight penalty. Air, hydraulic
or electric actuation of the gearshift mechanism is not
allowed.
A functional reverse is defined as “operable by the driver
from his normal seated position and capable of sustained
movement of the vehicle, under its own power, in a reverse
direction.” A driver-operated device for locking out reverse
GCR - 380
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
gear may be added provided it does not prevent prompt
engagement of reverse in an emergency situation.
3. Front engine/transmission vehicles shall locate the front
mounting surface of the transmission within sixteen (16)
inches of the back of the engine block.
4. Any shift linkage may be used.
6. Transmission mountings are unrestricted.
c. Final Drive
1. Any axle tube, final drive housing, gear ratio, limited slip
or locked differential may be used. Final drive units which
permit ratio changes while the car is in motion are prohibited.
2. Heavy duty propeller shaft(s) and/or drive shaft(s) may
be used. A minimum of two (2) steel 360 degree “loops”
shall be installed of sufficient strength to prevent the
driveshaft(s) from contacting the ground in the event of
shaft and/or U-joint failure. Said loops shall be located
within twelve (12) inches of the front of the shaft, and as
close as practical to the rear universal joint.
5. Suspension (GT-1)
a. Ride Height
1. No part of the car to the rear of the front tire opening,
including the exhaust, may touch the ground when two (2)
tires on the same side of the vehicle are deflated.
b. Suspension Components
1. Suspension components may be reinforced, modified, or
replaced with units of alternate design, and their mounting
points may be relocated. The addition or substitution
of anti roll bars, camber compensating devices, and/or
suspension stabilizers is permitted. If these devices or
any other suspension components extend into the driver/
passenger compartment, they shall be completely sealed
off from said compartment by metal panels.
2. Hubs, bearings, spindles, axles, U-joints, CV joints, bushings, ball joints, and rod ends may be freely modified or
substituted.
3. The wheelbase of the automobile shall not be changed or
relocated in the fore/aft direction. A tolerance of +/- 2.00
inches from published specification shall be permitted
unless otherwise noted in the GTCS. Alternatively, any
purpose built tube frame car can be built to a 102 inch
wheel base to enable eligibility in both GT-1 and Transam
events.
c. Springs/Shock Absorbers
1. Suspension springs may be replaced with others of unrestricted origin and type.
2. Shock absorbers are unrestricted, except that the number
of shock absorbers fitted shall not be changed from that
GCR - 381
GTCS
5. The linkage between the clutch pedal and the clutch
housing/clutch actuating mechanism is unrestricted.
A mechanical linkage may be replaced with a hydraulic
system.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
of the standard production automobile. No hydraulic or
pneumatic interconnecting or cross linking of shocks is
allowed.
3. Shock absorber mountings are unrestricted.
d. Suspension Control
1. The manufacturer’s basic system of front suspension shall
be retained, i.e., independent. Strut type front suspension
may be replaced with a double A-arm type suspension.
Rocker Arms, push/pull rods, etc. are prohibited.
2. The manufacturer’s basic system of rear suspension may
be retained, i.e., independent, live axle, etc.. All forms
of independent rear suspension may be replaced with a
closed tube beam, live axle suspension. Cars originally
equipped with live axle rear suspension shall not replace
said suspension with any type of independent suspension.
3. Automobiles originally manufactured as FWD vehicles may
convert to RWD, but shall only use a closed tube beam,
live axle rear suspension.
e.Steering
1. The front wheels only shall be steered by the driver.
2. The type of steering is unrestricted, provided that a
collapsible type of steering column is used.
6. Brakes (GT-1)
a. Brake Components
1. The use of any dual master cylinder and/or pressure equalizing device is permitted. All cars shall be equipped with
a dual braking system operated by a single control. In the
case of leakage or failure to any point in the system, effective braking power shall be maintained to at least two (2)
wheels.
2. Servo assist braking systems are unrestricted.
3. Backing plates or shields may be removed. Brake air ducts
may be fitted, provided they extend only in a forward
direction, and that no changes are made in the bodywork
for their installation.
4.Parking brakes may be removed.
5. The brake lines shall be steel tubing, metal braided hose,
or flexible brake hose. Lines may be relocated and given
additional protection.
6. Brake discs, calipers, and/or drums are unrestricted,
provided that the discs or drums are mounted in the same
location (e.g., outboard vs. in-board) as the standard
production automobile.
7. Water spray brake cooling systems are permitted. No
water cooled calipers are permitted.
8. Carbon brake rotors are prohibited.
7. Wheels and Tires (GT-1)
a.Wheels
1. Wheels shall be made of steel, aluminum, magnesium,
or a combination thereof. Multi-piece wheels shall utilize
GCR - 382
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
mechanical fasteners (bolts, rivets, etc.) for assembly.
2. Wheels may be thirteen (13), fourteen (14), fifteen (15),
or sixteen (16) inches in diameter, but all four (4) wheels
shall be of the same diameter.
3. Wheels shall have a maximum width of twelve (12) inches
in the front and (13) inches in the rear.
8. Body/Structure (GT-1)
a. The intent of these bodywork/configuration rules is to maintain
the recognizable external features of the standard production
automobile while providing for necessary safety and performance modifications.
1. Lightening of the bodywork is permitted, but the exterior
shape of the body shall not be changed except where
specifically authorized herein.
2. The method of bodywork attachment is unrestricted, and
shall meet the requirements of the GCR. Section 9.3 Loss
of Bodywork.
3. Maximum overall car width shall not exceed 80.65 inches.
Existing cars built to 84.75 inches with a logbook history
of running in that configuration may continue to do so.
4. Trans Am approved bodywork and wheelbase specifications are allowed unless otherwise specifically prohibited
by these rules. Trans Am bodywork shall be in a configuration that is approved for past or present Trans Am competition. If body panels do not have the official Trans Am
bodywork approval decal, the competitor is allowed to
present a receipt of purchase from the manufacturer or
it’s agent for verification. No additional spoilers, splitters,
air dams or other aerodynamic devices not incorporated
in the original approved body may be run. No undertray
may extend beyond the outline of the original Trans Am
approved body.
5. Convertible tops, sunroofs, and removable panels shall
meet GCR Section 9.3 Detachable Panels/Sunroofs. As
of 1/1/2002, all newly classified convertible models will
be required to compete with a windshield and hardtop.
Convertible models classified before 1/1/2002 will be
allowed to compete without a windshield and/or top,
regardless of logbook issue date, unless specified differently on the vehicle specification line.
6. Two (2) hood louver panels are allowed, they must be
located on the hood/front fender between the radiator and
the rearward edge of the hood, max. size of 20” x 10”
with a minimum of five (5) slots.
b.Any bodywork components may be fabricated of alternate
material(s), provided that their shape remains as specified
herein, unless specifically prohibited elsewhere in these rules.
c. Fenders may be flared for tire clearance, provided that their
GCR - 383
GTCS
4. Centerlock or quickchange wheels are permitted.
b.Tires
1. Tires are unrestricted, except that they must meet the
requirements of GCR Section 9.3 Tires.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
shape and opening contour in horizontal projection is similar to
the original opening.
1. Modified wheel opening(s) shall not confuse the identity
of the car. The fender flares shall completely cover the
highest point of the tires, and may extend into the doors
and bumpers.
2. Rear fenders may have holes or slots to accommodate
exhaust outlets. These holes or slots shall be below a line
seven (7) inches above the bottom of the rocker panel,
and shall be no wider than seven (7) inches.
3. The inner fender panels separating the wheel wells from
the engine compartment may be altered, replaced, or
removed, provided that there are panels which provide
total separation between the wheel wells and the driver/
passenger compartment.
d. The hood and deck lid/trunk hinges and latches may be
removed. The hood and deck lid/trunk may be “molded in”
with other bodywork components to create “one-piece” front
and rear ends. Misalignments or modifications to create ventilation openings where none previously existed are prohibited.
The hood may be modified for clearance of an airbox, provided
that such alteration does not confuse the identity of the car.
e. Bumpers that are not an integral part of the bodywork may
be removed, providing that all projecting hardware is also
removed. Alternately, they may be replaced with replicas of
alternate material(s). In those cases where bumpers are an
integral part of the bodywork, they may be replaced with
replicas of alternate material(s). Bumper bracket holes in the
bodywork may be covered, provided such covering serves no
other purpose.
f.
The standard grille(s) or approved facsimile(s) shall be retained,
except where covered by the front spoiler or intermediate
spoiler mounting device.
g. The original angle of the windshield shall be maintained unless
alternate components and/or specifications are specifically
authorized in the GTCS.
h. All cars may use a standard safety glass windshield, mounted
in the stock location and at the stock angle. In addition to
any other method of retention, the windshield shall be secured
within the specifications of GCR Section 9.3 Windshield
Clips. Polycarbonate windshields such as Lexan are allowed.
Alternate windshields must be of 6mm minimum thickness.
Alternate material windshields must be identical in size and
curvature to the original glass component. Alternate material
windshields must have in addition, three (3) inner supports to
prevent the windshield from collapsing inward. These supports
must be 0.75” by .125” minimum straps of aluminum.
Spacing between these inner supports must be eight (8) inches
minimum. In place of clips, polycarbonate windscreens may
be mounted using a fastener spaced a minimum of every 12
inches across the top and sides, with a minimum of four across
the bottom. Alternatively, the bottom may be captured in a
channel.
i. The rear quarter (side) and rear windows may be made of clear,
GCR - 384
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
j.Doors
1. Driver and passenger door window glass or plastic shall be
removed. Inside door handles, door panels, window cranks
and mechanisms, and other interior trim pieces may be
removed.
2. The doors shall be pinned or otherwise positively fastened
to prevent their opening in the event of an accident. Standard door hinges and latches may be removed, but the
doors shall remain capable of being opened or removed,
unless the doors are integral to the remainder of the bodywork. The stock side impact beams may be removed.
3. Doors may contain holes or slots to accommodate exhaust
outlets. Any such openings in the door(s) shall be below a
line ten (10) inches above the bottom of the rocker, and no
wider than seven (7) inches. A maximum of two (2) such
exhaust openings are permitted on the door.
k.Spoilers
1. A front spoiler may be fitted. It shall not protrude beyond
the overall outline of the car as viewed from above except
for a front splitter that may extend up to five (5.0) inches.
Trans Am approved bodies have a unique splitter that is
approved as a part of the body, and as such, is exempt
from the 5.0 inch dimension. The additional splitter is
allowed only on air dams not already incorporating a splitter
that extends forward of the factory bumper. The spoiler
shall not extend aft of the forward most part of the front
fender opening (cutout), and shall not be mounted more
than four (4) inches above the horizontal centerline of the
front wheel hubs. Full-width bottom shrouding of the front
spoiler/nosebox area (front undertray) is permitted but
must be flat and can extend no farther rearward than the
center of the engine harmonic balancer. Undertray may
not be stepped or curved. Undertray may be angled in side
view to produce a maximum height at the trailing edge of
3.25 inches above the ground.
Openings are permitted for the purpose of ducting air to the
brakes, radiator, airbox and/or oil cooler(s); equal openings
may be placed in the standard lower front panel directly
behind openings placed in the spoiler. Joint separations
need not be shown. The spoiler ”pan” area forward of the
leading edge of the front wheel openings shall be flat and
follow, but not exceed, the line of the front fender/spoiler
bottom. No components may protrude or extend below
this plane.
2. The Club Racing specified rear wing or a flat plane rear
spoiler may be used. If a flat plane rear spoiler is used, it
shall be contiguous with the rear bodywork rearward of
GCR - 385
GTCS
transparent, and uncolored polycarbonate material having a
minimum thickness of 3mm.
1. Ducts may be installed in the side windows or window
openings for the purpose of supplying cooling air to the
driver and/or differential/transmission coolers. Air passing
through the differential/transmission coolers may be
exhausted through an opening identical in size and location to the rear license plate frame.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
the rear window, and shall comply with the following:
A. Height: No higher than eight (8) inches, measured
from the bodywork along the face of the spoiler, from
the point of attachment to the top of the spoiler. In the
case of a spoiler with a curved top edge conforming to
the shape of the bodywork (rearview), the measurement is to be made perpendicular to the tangent of
the body at the point of attachment. In the case of a
spoiler mounted with a vertical mounting flange on the
rear face of the bodywork, the measurement shall be
made ignoring any slight amount of mounting flange
exposed due to the curvature of the rear bodywork at
the point of attachment.
B. Width and Overhang: No wider than the body,
excluding fender flares, from the forward most point
of the spoiler (or mounting flanges) rearward. It shall
not extend rearwards of the rearmost extremity of
the bodywork for the entire width of the car (when
viewed vertically from above the car at any point, the
spoiler shall not protrude beyond the bodywork).
C. Mounting: Spoilers shall be strong enough to be self
supporting, and shall be mounted directly to the rear
hatch, deck, or trunk lid. A mounting flange no greater
than one and one-half (1-1/2) inches wide, contiguous
with the bodywork (either forward facing on the top
surface of the bodywork or downward facing on the
rear surface of the bodywork) shall be employed.
No other forward facing sheet metal supports are
permitted. Supplemental bracing may be added in the
form of two (2) rods (maximum diameter one-quarter
inch), mounted at least ten (10) inches inboard from
the ends of the spoiler. Small rear supports may be
added.
D. Configuration: the spoiler shall be a single plane
spoiler (a straight line in any vertical cross-section),
uniform in height from the rear bodywork. There shall
be no gaps or openings below the spoiler for its entire
width. Only enough curvature (in a fore-and-aft direction as viewed from above) shall be permitted to facilitate mounting. The use of fences, end rails, Gurney
lips, wickerbills, or other forward facing lips or aerodynamic devices is prohibited.
NOTE: O.E.M. rear spoilers are not permitted unless
specifically listed on the vehicle’s specification form.
E. A single element, single plane airfoil scaled to a chord
length of 10.75 inches is permitted. The maximum
cross-sectional tolerance of the wing profile is 0.060
inch. A maximum 0.50 inch Gurney tab is allowed at
the trailing edge of the wing element. The tab must
be mounted 90 degrees to the upper wing surface. No
air may pass between the tab and the wing. The wing
end plates must fit within a rectangle measuring 11.00
inches long by 4.00 inches tall. No portion of the wing
element or tab may extend beyond the perimeter of
the endplate. The endplates must be mounted parallel
to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular
to the ground. Endplates must be flat, with no curvaGCR - 386
ture or Gurney tabs. The maximum width of the entire
wing assembly (wing element, endplates, Gurney tab,
and mounting hardware) is 72.00 inches.
F. Wing mounting specs: The entire wing assembly must
be mounted below the peak of the roof (measured
at the highest point of the roof). Trailing edge of
wing assy. must be located within an area defined
by a point; 6” forward of rearmost bodywork and the
rearmost bodywork (measured at vehicle centerline).
Two wing mounting posts must be used, with each
one located between 16”-20” inboard from end of
wing. The exposed portions of the wing posts shall
not exceed 85 square inches each. Curved mounting
brackets will be measured as if they’re in a flat plane
as viewed from the side. Mounting brackets are to be
included in the measurement. Max. wing angle from
horizontal is 30-degrees.
l.
Glass/plastic headlights, front parking and signal lights, lenses,
and bulbs shall be removed. Other front lighting parts and
ancillaries may be removed. Headlight, front parking and signal
light, and similar standard openings in the front of the car
may be used for ducting air to the engine, front brakes, and/
or coolers. Such ducting may pass through interior panels for
these purposes.
1. The cross sectional area of a single duct shall not exceed
the cross sectional area for the original (single) headlight
lens.
2. It is not permitted to relocate the standard openings for
headlights, parking lights, signal lights, etc.. The headlight
openings shall be covered with a wire screen or a panel of
an alternate material, provided that such covering does not
confuse the identity of the car.
3. The side marker light assemblies shall be removed, and the
resultant openings shall be completely closed.
m. The windshield wiper system is unrestricted.
n.Floors
1. Driver/Passenger Compartment: The floor of the driver/
passenger com­
partment shall maintain the basic shape
and position of the original floor, i.e., flat and horizontal,
relative to the car and rocker panels. It may not be curved,
angled, recessed, or channeled other than as specifically
authorized by these rules, and shall be made of steel and/
or aluminum only.
A.On the passenger side of the driver/passenger
compartment (only), the floor may be raised up to
ten (10) inches, or a secondary floor installed at that
level, to accommodate the installation of the exhaust
system and mufflers. Such raising of the floor shall
serve no other purpose.
B. The driver/passenger compart­ment floor shall cover the
area from the forward firewall the full width between
the rocker panels, and shall extend no further aft than
the forward most point of the rear wheel openings.
The floor panels between the rocker panels and the
outboard frame rails may be cut out or removed.
GCR - 387
GTCS
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
2. For front engine cars – floor panels between the engine
bay firewall and the forward most point of the front wheel
openings are prohibited. For mid or rear engine cars – floor
panels between the engine bay firewall and the rearward
most point of the rear wheel opening are prohibited.
3. The fuel cell bottom and/or floor behind the rear wheel
opening shall be flat, angled upwards, and shall follow, but
not exceed, the line of the rear fender bottom.
9. Driver/Passenger Compartment - Trunk (GT-1)
a.Seating
1. All standard production seats and seat backs shall be
removed. The driver’s seat shall be replaced with a onepiece bucket-type race seat. Such seat shall be installed
so that a second seat of the same dimensions could be
simultaneously fitted to the passenger’s side of the car (no
center seating), or a beaded or poured formed seat with
fore, aft and lateral support equivalent to that of a buckettype seat. Such seat shall be installed on one side of the
Chassis and driveline (no center seating).
b. Steering Wheel
1. Any steering wheel and wheel quick release mechanism
complying with GCR Section 9.3 Steering Wheel Locks,
may be used.
c. Gauges/Accessories/Driver Convenience
1. The replacement, addition, or removal of accessories
(gauges, switches, indicators, etc.) is permitted. Such
installations and/or modifications shall have no influence
on the mechanical performance of the car. Similarly, they
shall not include the substitution or replacement of any
element of the bodywork or chassis except where specifically authorized by these rules.
2. Fresh-air ducts to the driver may be added to the A-pillar
area. They shall be distinctly separate parts from the bodywork. Roof louvers (vents) are allowed for the express
purpose of venting the driver’s compartment. A maximum
of 24 square inches of open area and a maximum number
of twelve openings are allowed. Each opening shall be no
larger than 4” x ½”.
3. The use of any mirror(s) meeting the requirements of GCR
Section 9.3 Mirrors, is permitted.
d. Interior Modifications - Firewall/Bulkheads
1. Modifications may be made to the driver/passenger
compartment for the convenience of the driver and to
permit the installation of required safety equipment. Such
modifications shall have no influence on the mechanical
performance of the car. Similarly, they shall not include
the substitution or replacement of any element of the
bodywork or chassis except where specifically authorized
by these rules.
2. Floor mats, upholstery, and all interior trim shall be
removed.
3. There shall be a firewall between the driver/passenger
compartment and the engine compartment/ bay. It shall be
GCR - 388
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
B. It shall be designed, in conjunction with the floor and
driver/passenger compartment interior panels and
bulkheads, to prevent the passage of and isolate the
driver from flame, fluids, and debris.
4. There shall be a steel and/or aluminum bulkhead completely
separating the driver/passenger compartment from the
compartment containing the fuel cell.
A. The forward most element of this separation shall
consist of a vertical transverse bulkhead behind the
driver, extending the full width of the compartment
from the floor to the top of the door.
B. Behind this rear bulkhead there shall be a steel and/
or aluminum horizontal bulkhead the full width of
the interior of the car or between the inner fenders
extending from the vertical bulkhead to the rear of the
fuel cell.
C. These two bulkheads shall, together, completely cover
and isolate the rear suspension, coolers, ducting, etc.
so that none of these items are visible when viewed
from above. The fuel cell shall also be covered and
isolated unless the car is equipped with the optional
bulkhead listed below in Paragraph 5. Oil tank tops
may be visible.
D. All fuel filler, overflow, vent, discriminator, or return
lines or components that extend beyond the limits of
the vertical or horizontal bulkheads into the driver/
passenger compartment shall be metal, metal braided
line, or independently shielded with an additional steel
and/or aluminum bulkhead.
5. An additional vertical, transverse bulkhead is permitted
behind the driver. It shall be located above the mandatory vertical bulkhead and shall allow the driver adequate
vision to the rear. It is recommended that this additional
bulkhead be made of a clear, transparent polycarbonate
material.
10.Safety (GT-1)
a. Steering Column/Locks
1. The steering column shall be a collapsible type, either by
layout design or by column construction, and shall comply
with GCR Section 9.3 Steering Wheel Locks.
b. Fuel Cell
1. No part of the fuel cell shall be closer to the ground than
six (6) inches, unless contained within and above the
lowest part of the basic structural frame rails of the vehicle
and fully enclosed.
2. The fuel cell shall be located in approximately the same
location as in the original vehicle, or may be relocated
GCR - 389
GTCS
made of steel and/or aluminum and shall be transversely
positioned in the approximate location of the original.
A. It shall extend, at minimum, from the left outboard
frame rail to the right outboard frame rail, and at
maximum from the left outer door skin to the right
outer door skin.
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
behind the rear axle. It shall not be located within the
protected area of the driver/passenger compartment
unless specifically authorized in the GTCS.
c. Brake Lights
1. Two (2) operating brake lights and two (2) operating tail
lights are required at the rear of the car.
2. The original tail light and brake light lenses shall be
retained, and shall be located in their original positions.
3. Tail lamp decals are permitted only on GTA/ASA/NASCAR
type bodies. The decals must be in the approximately
stock location and the brake lights must be centered and
visible within or behind the decals.
d.Hoses/Lines
1. All fuel, oil, and coolant lines (including those lines that
perform fill, overflow, vent, return, etc., functions) which
pass through the driver/passenger compartment shall be
made of metal or metal braided hose, and shall be equipped
with AN-Series threaded couplers.
2. For front engine cars, no oil or fuel line located to the
rear of the transverse engine compartment firewall shall
be located in a compartment or otherwise restricted
area which also contains any component of the exhaust
system.
E.
APPROVED AUTOMOBILES/NOTES
1. Notes (GT-1)
a. Carburetors/Fuel Injection
1. Any modular 4bl carburetor may be used with a maximum
of a one and eleven-sixteenths (1-11/16) inch throttle
bore, unless alternate carburetion and/or dimensions are
specified in the GTCS.
2. Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the GTCS, fuel
injection is prohibited on GT-1 automobiles as of January
1, 1994.
3. Pushrod V-6 engines may run a single Holley Model 4500
carburetor, but the minimum weight shall be increased to
that of the same displacement fuel injected car.
4. V-8 engine cars with engine displace­ments of greater than
366 cubic inches (6.0 liters) shall use a one and threeeighths (1-3/8) inch throttle bore restrictor plate, mounted
beneath the carburetor, as specified in the diagram.
GCR - 390
GTCS
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
Required Restrictor Plate for GT Engines over 6.0 Liters (366CID).
Throttle Restrictor Plate Material: Aluminum, Thickness 0.75” Maximum.
1.375” Restrictor – Hole must be maintained for a depth of 0.125” Min.
Relief angles to clear Butterflies, Unrestricted.
5. Refer to Sections D.1.b. and c. of these rules for additional
induction system specifications.
b.Weight
1.The weight chart is applicable to all cars unless alternate
weight(s) is/are specified in the GTCS.
WEIGHT CHART FOR GT‑1
Type ‑ cubic inches (liters)
= Carb
V‑6 ‑ up to 275 (4.5)
= 2345
V‑8 ‑ up to 311 (5.1)
= 2585
V‑8 ‑ 312 (5.1) to 335 (5.5)
= 2685
V‑8 ‑ 336 (5.5) to 366 (6.0)
= 2780
V‑8 ‑ over 366 (6.0) *
= 3070
*With restrictor to 1‑3/8” throttle bores per restrictor plate diagram.
Weight in pounds with driver
2. All cars using a production based transmission with
syncros and having no more than four (4) forward speeds
and a working reverse speed may reduce the listed weight
by fifty (50) pounds.
Note: A production based manual trans­mission is defined
as a unit that retains original type gears (i.e., no straight
cut, dog ring type gears). It shall be located in the same
basic position as used in the production automobile,
retaining the standard bellhousing dimensions, and may
use any shift linkage.
3. All cars competing on ten (10) inch wide rims may reduce
the listed weight by fifty (50) pounds.
GCR - 391
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
NOTES:
GCR - 392
GTCS
9.1.2. Grand Touring 1 (GT1) Specifications
GCR - 393
9.1.2. GT1 Spec Lines
c.
GT1 Approved Automobile List
Make/ModelWheelbase
American Motors Corporation
Concord
Javelin
Spirit
108.0”
109.0”
96.0”
Chrysler Corporation
Chrysler Laser X/T
97.0”
Dodge Challenger SRT (2014)
102.0/104.0”
Dodge Daytona
97.0”
Dodge Avenger
106.0”
Dodge Viper GTS
96.2”
Note: Viper shall use a class legal Dodge engine.
Dodge Viper Competition Coupe
8.3L sealed engine (4.03” x 3.96”), Comp. ratio: 9.6:1, Trans
ratios: 2.66, 1.78, 1.30, 1.00, 0.74, 0.50, Wheelbase: 98.8”,
Track (F&R): 62.8” / 63.3”, Wheels (F&R): 18x11 / 18x13, Tire
size (F&R): 305/30 / 335/30, Weight: 3065 lbs. Cars must remain
in the original configuration, factory optional equipment is not
allowed.
Ford Motor Company - Ford
Falcon
105.0”
Fusion (bodywork)106.0”
Mustang (1965-68)
108.6”
Mustang (1969-70)
108.0”
Mustang (1979-93)
100.5”
Mustang (1994-1998)
100.5”
Mustang (1999-2004)
100.5”
Mustang (bodywork) (05-10)*
106.0/110.0”
* ACP (2010) MUSTANG bodywork only may add 2.0” to the front
splitter length.
Roof height 46.5” min. (measured from the ground). Air may be ducted
to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of the hood,
rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum length 3.5”.
Opening may extend 1” into the windshield.
Probe V-6 or V-8
99.0”
Thunderbird (1983-89)
104.0”
Thunderbird (1990-)
105.0”
Taurus (2 door) (98-)
110.0”
Ford Motor Company - Lincoln/Mercury
Capri (1979-86)
100.5”
General Motors Corporation - Buick
Regal
Somerset
108.1”
108.1”
General Motors Corporation - Cadillac
CTS-V (2015) 102.0”
General Motors Corporation - Chevrolet
Beretta
103.4”
Only a beam-type, live-axle rear suspension is permitted.
Camaro (1967-69) *
108.0”
Camaro (1970-81) *
108.0”
Camaro (1982-92) V-6 or V-8*
101.0”
GCR - 394
Camaro (1993-) V-6 or V-8*
102.0”
Camaro (2010-) V-6 or V-8*
108.0”/112.0”
Corvette (1963-67) *
98.0”
Corvette (1968-77) *
98.0”
Corvette (1978-82) *
98.0”
Corvette (1984 -96) V-6 or V-8*
96.2”
Corvette (1997) V-8
104.5”
* Alternate transmissions: THM350 based or THM400 based 3 speed.
Corvette C6 (bodywork only) (05-) **
102.0”
** The front undertray and rear fascia and diffuser included in the ACP kit
must be replaced with bodywork compliant with the GT1 rules. ACP C-6
Corvette bodywork only may add 2.0” to splitter length.
Lumina (1990-)
106.0”
Monte Carlo (95-00)
103.0”/106.0”
Monte Carlo (01-02)
103.0”/110.0”
Monza
97.0”
Air may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the
back of the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum
length 3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield.
LS1 V8 engine allowed with stock plastic intake manifold and 75mm
throttle body @ 2585 lbs.
General Motors Corporation - Oldsmobile
Cutlass Ciera (1987-)
105.0”
Cutlass (1988-)
104.0”
Toronado (1987-)
105.0”
Aurora (2dr.)
106.0”
Air may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the
back of the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum
length 3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield.
General Motors Corporation - Pontiac
Fiero
94.0”
3300cc (4-cyl.), multi-carb and fuel injected weight = 1765 lbs.
3100cc (GM V-6) multi-carb and fuel injected weight = 1765 lbs.
4500cc Chevrolet 90 deg V-6 weight = 2345 lbs.
V-6 engine may be repositioned longitudinally in the engine bay along
vehicle centerline. GM V-6 bow tie block #10051141 may be used.
Mid engine configuration – may place fuel cell within the protected area
of the driver/passenger compartment provided that it meets all constraints
of GCR section 9.3 Fuel Cell Specifications.
Transverse V-6 may deduct fifty (50) lbs.
Firebird/Trans-Am (1969)*
108.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1970-81)*
108.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1982-1992 )*
101.0”
Firebird/Trans-Am (1993- )*
102.0”
Grand Prix
106.0”
GTO
102”/110”
*Alternate transmissions: THM350 based or THM400 based 3 speed. Air
may be ducted to the carburetor airbox through an opening in the back of
the hood, rectangular in shape, maximum width of 20”, maximum length
3.5”. Opening may extend 1” into the windshield.
LS1 V8 engine allowed with stock plastic intake manifold @ 2585 lbs.
Jaguar
XK8 / XKR
Note: shall use a class legal Ford engine.
GCR - 395
100.5”
GTCS
9.1.2. GT1 Spec Lines
9.1.2. GT1 Spec Lines
Mazda
RX-7
95.2”/95.7”
RX-8
102”
12A engine, multi-carb or fuel inj. weight = 1710 lbs.
13B engine, multi carb or fuel inj. weight = 1710 lbs.
20B engine, multi carb or fuel inj. weight = 1965 lbs.*
* Alternate transmission: 6 speed transmission permitted.
Nissan
300ZX/Z31
101.2”
3000cc V-6 engine, multi-carbs weight = 1815 lbs.
300ZX/Z32 (1990- )
101.2”
VG30D V-6 engine, (3) 48mm IDF with 40mm venturis weight = 1860
lbs. Permitted alternate hood: P/N 99996-Z32HP
Porsche
911
89.4”
3800cc 6, multi-carb or fuel injection weight, twin-plug head, dual ignition
distributor weight = 1815 lbs. Factory spoiler P/N 930-512-023-00 &
930-512-021-00 (or kit# 930-512-901-01). Entire assembly only (with
rubber lip). No alternate materials, no reproductions.
911 Cup 3.8 RSR
with the following additional specifications: Wheels: (F) 18 x 12, (R) 18
x 13, Allow FIA GT-2 front bumper cover, Allow FIA GT-2 “banana”
rear spoiler, Transmission: 6 speed, Type G50/30, Weight: 2230 lbs (w
/ driver). Original, factory-installed Matter roll cage structures permitted.
Boxster
89.4”
alternate engine: 3.8 liter air-cooled, multi-carb or fuel injection, twin-plug
head, dual ignition distributor. weight =1815 lbs. Shall have windshield
and hardtop installed by 1/1/2003.
GT3 R/RS (00-02)
3600cc, Wheels: (F) 18 x 10”, (R) 18 x 11”, Allow FIA GT-2 front bumper
cover, Allow FIA GT-2 “banana” rear spoiler, Transmission: 6 speed Type
G50/30, Original, factory-installed Matter roll cage structures permitted,
weight 2340 lbs. May use fuel per the IT specs of GCR section 9.3 Fuel.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows allowed as delivered.
997 GT3 Cup
Shall run as delivered for the GT3 Cup Challenge except that tires are
unrestricted and fuel per IT specs. Cars shall meet the safety requirements
as specified in the GCR except that original, factory installed roll cage is
permitted. Competitors shall have a copy of the Cup Challenge rules in
their possession. Minimum weight 2710 lbs w/ driver. Alternatively, may
run in conformance with the Grand-Am specification. Competitors shall
have a copy of the Grand-Am rules in their possession. Minimum weight
2710 lbs with driver. Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
Panoz
Esperanté
Note: Shall use a class legal Ford engine.
106.0”
Qvale
Mangusta104.0”
Note: Shall use a class legal Ford engine.
GCR - 396
9.1.2. GT1 Spec Lines
NOTES:
90.0”
GTCS
Shelby
Cobra
GCR - 397
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Restrictor
Notes
Aston Martin
Vantage GT3
(2012)
5956
3020
2 x 41.5mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
Audi R8 LMS
Ultra GT3
(10-14)
5200
3050
2 x 49mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
BMW Z4 GT3
(10-13)
4017
3000
70mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
GT1-ST
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GCR - 398
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GCR - 399
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Corvette
5967
2900
GM LS2. May use the LSX cast iron block
with OEM LS2 bore and stroke.
6162
2950
GM LS3
6162
3100
GM LT1
6178
2900
GM LT1/LT4/L98 (only), with alternate
3.75” stroke crankshaft. Max stroke 3.75”,
max bore 4.04”.
7011
3200
GM LS7
Restrictor
Notes
GTCS
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Chassis-specific notes: The top 12 inches of the firewall must be covered with metal or reflective heat shielding material.
The OE firewall may also be replaced with a metal panel running between the A-pillars. For Chevrolet Corvette Z06,
carbon fiber lip, APR performance part number FA-208026 is permitted. World Challenge body work for C6 Corvette
Advanced Composite Products: Deck lid (p/n:C6/A0028), door (RH) (p/n:C6/A0030), door (LH) (p/n:C6/A0031), front
fascia (p/n:C6/A0001), rear fascia (p/n:C6/A0011), rear fender (LH)(p/n:C6/A0009), rear fender (RH)(p/n:C6/A0010),
front fender (LH)(p/n:C6/A00-L), front fender (RH)(p/n:C6/A00-R), left front mounting rail (p/n:C5A0015-L), right front
mounting rail (p/n:C5A0015-R), headlight mounting panel (LH)(p/n:C6/A0018-L), headlight mounting panel (RH)(p/n:C6/
A0018-R), headlight cover (RH)(p/n:C6/A0040-WC), headlight cover (LH)(p/n:C6/A0041-WC), hood (p/n:C6/A0021),
instrument panel (p/n:C6/A0032), roof (p/n:C6/A0027), rocker (LH)(p/n:C6/A0005), rocker (RH)(p/n:C6/A0006),
rear spoiler (C6/A00013), front under tray (p/n:C6/A0022), rear wing (p/n:C6R-1272) may be used. Note: the max
width of the front fascia and splitter is 1930mm (76”) edge-to-edge as measured across the bottom of the splitter.
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Corvette Z06
(2015)
6200
3300
Dodge Viper
GT3R
(2012-)
8414
3060
Dodge Viper,
incl Comp
Coupe, ACR/
ACR-X
7990
3100
8000
3100
8300
3100
8400
3200
8400
3400
GT1-ST
GCR - 400
Chassis-specific Notes: OEM fuel tank may be used.
Restrictor
Notes
GM LT4 Supercharged. Must be run in
as built, OEM configuration. Competitor
must present factory service manual upon
request.
2 x 40mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle.
68mm flat plate
380mm brakes, 12” front and 14” rear
width wheels, full engine porting, 6 speed
sequential trans, any OEM intake configuration allowed.
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GCR - 401
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Ferrari 430
4310
3000
Kessel 430 GT3 front fenders, hood and
bumper permitted; if installed, single radiator
is permitted. Must conform to 9.1.4.F.7.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front
windows allowed as delivered.
Ferrari 458
Challenge
4499
2800
Must have copy of the Ferrari 458 Challenge
rules that matches the year of car being
raced in their possession. Factory (OEM
manufacturer) Lexan front windows allowed
as delivered.
Ferrari 458 GT3
(2011-)
4497
3000
Ford GT
FIA GT3-016
5000
2557
Restrictor
2 x 43mm
Notes
Must have copy of the FORD GT FIA GT3016 homologation paperwork & rules
that matches the year of the car being
raced in their possession. Factory (OEM
manufacturer) Lexan front windows allowed
as delivered.
GTCS
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
GCR - 402
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Restrictor
Notes
Lamborghini
Gallardo GT3
(2013)
5212
2950
2 x 47mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
Lamborghini
Gallardo
5204
3000
Must comply with Super Trofeo series rules.
Competitor must have the series rules in their
possession. Factory (OEM manufacturer)
Lexan front windows allowed as delivered.
Lamborghini
Huracan
5204
3000
Must comply with Super Trofeo series rules.
Competitor must have the series rules in their
possession. Factory (OEM manufacturer)
Lexan front windows allowed as delivered.
Noble M12/
M400
3000
2650
Must be run in as built OEM configuration.
Competitor must present specifications on
demand. Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan
front windows allowed as delivered.
McLaren GT
Sprint
3799
2080
Competitor must have a copy of the factory
build spec in their possession. Cars must
pass SCCA World Challenge Tech and have
World Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front
windows allowed as delivered.
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GCR - 403
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Restrictor
Notes
McLaren
MP12C GT3
(2013-)
3799
2950
2 x 36mm 1.50
bar
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
Mercedes Benz
SLS GT3
(2011-)
6208
3100
2 x 36 mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
Noble/Origin
HVRx
7011
2650
Must be run in as built OEM configuration,
non-turbo
V8
only.
Factory
(OEM
manufacturer) Lexan front windows allowed
as delivered.
Porsche 991
GT3 Cup
3800
2900
Cars must be prepared in accordance with
the appropriate model/year Porsche factory
991 GT3 Cup parts catalog/service manual.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front
windows allowed as delivered.
GTCS
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Porsche 991.2
GT3 Cup
3997
2950
Porsche 991
GT3-R
(2016)
3997
2899
GT1-ST
Restrictor
Notes
Cars must be prepared in accordance with
the appropriate model/year Porsche factory
991 GT3 Cup parts catalog/service manual.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front
windows allowed as delivered.
(2) 35 mm
GCR - 404
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have
World Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front
windows allowed as delivered. ABS and
traction systems must be disabled. It is the
responsibility of the competitor to provide
proof of system disabling.
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Porsche 996
Turbo AWD
Minimum
Weight
Restrictor
3050
3998
2925
65mm
Competitor must provide World Challenge,
Appendix A, upon request. Cars must pass
SCCA World Challenge Tech and have World
Challenge Dog Tag fixed to vehicle. Factory
(OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows
allowed as delivered.
GTCS
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Intercooler: ERP Intercooler kit complete
with all ducting and components #ERP.
DP996TT.1055.S. Body: L.F. fender
#ERP.996.031; R.F. fender #ERP.996.032;
Front
bumper
#ERP.996.311;
Front
splitter 2” #ERP.996.345; Rear bumper
#ERP.996.211. Engine: Intake manifold R&L
#997.110.619.90; Intake manifold center
#997.110.120.53; Throttle body - single
#997.110.039.93; Cylinder heads (non
Vanos) #996.104.012.94; Intake cams
#996.105.235.92 (0.484 lift); Exhaust cams
#996.105.245.90 (0.440 lift); Cam housing
R. (non Vanos) #996.105.040.91; Cam
housing L. (non Vanos) #996.105.039.91;
Garrett GT28 turbo chargers; 2 - 50 mm
TIRs. Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan
front windows allowed as delivered.
GCR - 405
Porsche 997
GT3 R
(2013-)
Notes
GT1-ST
Maximum
Displacement
Minimum
Weight
Rossion Q1
3000
2650
Restrictor
Notes
Must be run in as built OEM configuration.
Competitor must present specifications on
demand. Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan
front windows allowed as delivered.
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
Note: Cars must comply with 2012 STO rules as stated in Appendix K of the GCR. Engine Displacements in this table are nominal. Each
competitor shall have available definitive documentation (e.g., factory manual) of the original displacement for the engine used. GT1/ST Tire
make/size are free, DOT tires are not required.
GCR - 406
GCR - 407
9.1.2. GT1/ST Spec Lines
GTCS
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
9.1.2.F. GT-2, 3, LITE CATEGORY SPECIFICATIONS
Front-engined GT cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990 may
be converted to Section F.2., specifications, but shall meet ALL specifications of Section F.2.
F.2.
GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990.
All front engined GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990
shall utilize McPherson strut or double A‑arm front suspension. A‑arm
front suspensions shall have the shocks attached to the outboard end
of an upper or lower control arm. Rocker arms, push‑pull rods, etc., are
prohibited. Front wheel drive cars may convert to rear wheel drive. Cars
classified in GT2-Lite that retain the original front wheel drive (FWD)
configuration may retain the original type of rear suspension with no
weight penalty or use a beam axle.
Cars classified in GT2-Lite running front engine, rear wheel drive (RWD)
may use independent rear suspension (IRS), by choice at a weight increase
equal to 2.5% of the car’s specified weight.
All GT cars registered as GT cars after January 1, 1990 or updated to
Section F.2. specifications shall utilize left side driver placement.
Disenfranchised small bore GT2 cars will be allowed classification in GT3
“In GT2 spec” on a case by case basis but will be classified with the
appropriate SIR and GT3 weight + 150 lbs. to offset any advantage in
the wider wheel/tire, track and wing width. Max wheel/tire 16.0”. Cars
must have a GT2 logbook issued prior to 1-01-2013
F.3.
Safety Equipment required on all cars.
a.Bulkheads
1. A metal bulkhead shall separate the driver/front passenger
compartment from the compartment containing the fuel cell.
The fuel cell, cap, filler neck, and all fittings shall be isolated
so that in case of spillage, leakage, or failure, fuel will not
reach the driver. The bulkhead separating the driver/passenger
compartment from the fuel cell shall not be above the bottom of
the rear window and the bottom of the side/quarter windows.
An additional vertical, transverse bulkhead is permitted behind
the driver. It shall be located above the mandatory vertical
bulkhead and shall allow the driver adequate vision to the rear.
It is recommended that this additional bulkhead be made of a
clear, transparent polycarbonate material.
b. Fuel Cells
A safety fuel cell complying with GCR Section 9.3 Fuel Cell Specifications, shall be installed. All fuel cell vents shall incorporate check valves
to prevent fuel spillage. Dry‑break refueling couplings and discriminator
valves may be installed, provided they do not extend beyond the bodywork. The use of a fuel cell is required unless the stock fuel tank is
located between the axle centerlines and within the main chassis structure (e.g. frame rails). Spec line allowances will be added on a case by
case basis.
GCR - 409
GTCS
F.1.
GT Cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990.
All GT cars registered as GT cars prior to January 1, 1990 shall use
the manufacturer’s original engine location, i.e., front, mid, rear; drive
location, i.e., front or rear, and type of front and rear suspension, i.e.,
MacPherson strut, double A‑arm, live axle, semi trailing arm, etc., unless
authorized by the GTCS for a specific make and model.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
c.Windows
1. Windshield safety clips and rear window safety straps shall be
installed on all closed cars. Three (3) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x
1/8 inch) shall be bolted or riveted to the body at the top of the
windshield. Two (2) clips (3 inch x 1 inch x 1/8 inch) shall be
bolted or riveted to the cowl and extend over the bottom edge
of the windshield. Clips shall be spaced a minimum of twelve
(12) inches apart. The rear window shall be secured with two
(2) metal straps (1 inch wide x 1/8 inch thick) bolted or riveted
to the body at the top and bottom of the rear window. Polycarbonate windshields such as Lexan are allowed. Alternate
windshields must be of 6mm minimum thickness. Alternate
material windshields must be identical in size and curvature to
the original glass component. Alternate material windshields
must have in addition, three (3) inner supports to prevent
the windshield from collapsing inward. These supports must
be 0.75” by .125” minimum straps of aluminum. Spacing
between these inner supports must be six (6) inches minimum.
In place of clips, polycarbonate windscreens may be mounted
using a fastener spaced a minimum of every 12 inches across
the top and sides, with a minimum of four across the bottom.
Alternatively, the bottom may be captured in a channel.
3. Open cars must remove the windshield glass, door window
glass, quarter window glass, rear glass, vent glass, frames/
channels and all mounting brackets. Window winding mechanisms can be removed. A replacement windshield must be
installed. The replacement windshield must be fitted within the
vertical planes of the front most and rear most elements of the
stock windshield and frame. The replacement windshield must
not exceed the height or width of the stock windshield and
frame. Any portion of the windshield that is in the driver’s line
of sight, must be constructed of a clear material. No part of the
replacement windshield can be constructed of glass.
4. Ducts may be installed in the side windows or window openings for the purpose of supplying cooling air to the driver and/
or differential/transmission coolers and/or the rear brakes. Air
passing through the differential/transmission coolers may be
exhausted through an opening identical in size and location to
the rear license plate frame.
F.4.
Authorized Modifications
The following modifications are authorized on all GT‑2, 3, and Lite cars.
Modifications shall not be made unless specifically authorized herein. No
permitted component/modification shall additionally perform a prohibited
function.
a.General
1. It is not permitted to make any changes, altera­tions, or modifications to any component produced by the manufacturer,
unless specifically authorized by these rules, or required by the
GCR.
2. Any springs (including torsion bars) may be replaced by others
of unrestricted origin, unless specifically prohibited by these
rules.
3. Where alternate suspension and/or drive train equipment is
authorized, modifications to the car/chassis are permitted to
install authorized equipment, provided the modifications serve
no other purpose.
GCR - 410
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
Vents may be added to the roof panel or rear window for the
express purpose of venting the driver’s compartment. There
may be no more than 12 openings with a total area of not more
than 24 square inches.
5. Spare wheel and tire shall be removed.
6. Glass and/or plastic headlights, front parking lights, front
signal lights, lenses, and bulbs shall be removed. Headlight
openings shall be covered with a wire mesh screen or panel
having the same contour as the original lens, mounted so that
the headlight bezel/rim remains in place, maintaining the standard appearance of the Production automobile. Side marker
light assemblies shall be removed and the resulting openings
covered with a plate whose dimensions do not exceed those of
the original parts; side marker lights that are an integral part of
the taillight assembly cannot be removed. Other lighting parts
and operating mechanisms may be removed. In the case of
pop‑up headlights, the entire assembly may be removed and
the opening covered with a screen or plate (as above, without
the headlight bezel/rim requirement) which provides a stock
appearance. It is not permitted to relocate the standard headlight, parking light, signal light, etc., openings. Taillights shall
be in the original location and shall be the original style/type of
taillight for the make, model, and year of car.
Ducts from headlights, front parking lights, and front signal
lights in the front of the car may be used for ducting air to
the engine, front brakes, and/or oil cooler(s). These ducts may
pass through interior panels for this purpose. The cross section
area of a single duct shall not exceed the cross sectional area
of the original (single) headlight.
b. Chassis and Bodywork
The purpose of the following rules is to maintain recognizable external
features of the manufacturer’s make and model, while providing necessary safety and performance modifications.
Restrictions regarding external body shape and use of belly pans are
aimed at preventing attempts to obtain ground effect or streamlining.
Provisions in the rules permit one-off chassis and frames, to reduce the
cost of building and repairing GT cars, not to permit high technology
(streamlining and/or ground effects). Semi‑monocoque or monocoque
construction is prohibited.
1. The external shape of the body cannot be changed, except
when specifically authorized. Standard grills, window openings, or approved facsimiles shall be retained. All external
trim and model identification may be removed. Misalignment
or modifications to create ventilation where none previously
existed are prohibited. One piece front and one piece rear
bodywork is allowed. Rocker panels and doors may be parted
and/or integrated with associated body panels. Rocker panels
GCR - 411
GTCS
4. All component parts of the bodywork, such as hood, doors,
fenders, deck lid, rocker panels, windshield surround, roof,
etc., may be lightened or replaced by ones of alternate materials, provided the shape, size, and relative position is identical
to the original or approved alternate. The original size, angle,
and relative position of the windshield shall be maintained.
Convertible tops, sunroofs, and removable panels shall meet
GCR Section 9.3 Detachable Panels/Sunroofs.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
of an alternate material may be a flat vertical panel having the
same dimensions as the original component when viewed from
the side. Overall width of the vehicle/rocker panel measured at
the door sill must remain stock. Roof/A-pillars shall be separate
pieces. The cowl trim panel may be modified or removed. GT2
only: Four (4) hood/fender louvered panels are allowed. Total
maximum area of panels shall not exceed 600 sq. inches with
a minimum of five (5) slots for each panel. All louvers must be
mounted in front of the windscreen.
2. Chassis, frame, or subframe may be lightened, reinforced, or
replaced, provided components and attachments are not relocated, except where specifically permitted. Reinforcing does
not authorize the use of belly pans forward of the firewall, or
aft of the front edge of the rear wheel opening. There shall be
no pans, whether factory supplied or otherwise, between the
spoiler pan and the floor pan nor between the floor pan and
the floor behind the rear wheel opening. The floor behind the
rear wheel opening shall be flat and follow, but not exceed, the
line of the rear fender bottom. Only the fuel cell container may
protrude or extend below this plane. There shall be no pans,
whether factory supplied or otherwise, between the spoiler
pan and the floor pan nor between the floor pan and the floor
behind the rear wheel opening.
3. No part of the bodywork or chassis, to the rear of the front
wheel opening, shall touch the ground when both tires on the
same side of the car are deflated.
4. The firewall and floor may be replaced with aluminum alloy or
steel. Firewalls may be modified or notched.
5. Bumpers may be removed providing all projecting hardware is
removed except when it (they) are an integral part of the bodywork, in which case it (they) may be replaced with replica(s)
of different material. Non‑integral bumpers may be replaced
with a replica of alternate material or removed. Bumper bracket
holes in the bodywork may be covered provided such covering
serves no other purpose.
6. All standard production seats and seat backs shall be removed.
The driver’s seat shall be replaced with a one-piece buckettype race seat. Such seat shall be installed so that a second
seat of the same dimensions could be simultaneously fitted to
the passenger’s side of the car (no center seating).
7. Doors shall be pinned or otherwise positively fastened to
prevent their opening in case of an accident. Standard door
hinges and latch mechanisms may be removed, but the doors
shall be capable of being opened or removed unless integrated
into the bodywork. Interior door panels may be removed and
the door window slots may be covered. Pins or straps may
be added to hood and deck lid to supplement or replace the
latches. Hood and deck lid hinges may be removed.
8. All driver and front passenger door window glass shall be
removed. Window cranks and mechanisms may be removed.
Rear quarter, rear side, and rear windows may be of transparent
(clear) polycarbonate material, minimum thickness 3mm, but
shall remain in the same position in the frame or opening as
the original glass it replaces; rubber molding optional. Rear
windows/hatchbacks and deck lids shall be completely closed.
No bumper blocks or other means of poor alignment of bodyGCR - 412
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
9. Fenders may be flared for tire clearance, provided their shape
and opening contour, in the horizontal projection, is similar and
proportional to the original opening. Rear doors on 4-door automobiles may be considered part of the fender for purposes
of fender flaring. The tire shall not extend beyond the fender
openings at the highest point of the tire. The rear fender flares
on GT-2 cars may extend forward into the door, no more than
26 inches from the rear axle centerline (GT-2 only). Wheel
opening location may be altered in accordance with the allowable wheelbase tolerance in order to maintain vehicle’s stock
appearance. Ventilation openings, other than those which are
standard production on the recognized model, are prohibited.
10.Front and rear inner fender panels may be altered, replaced, or
removed provided there are panels providing total separation
between driver compartment and wheel wells.
11.Replacement, addition, or removal of accessories (gauges,
switches, indicators, etc.), or other interior modifications for
driver convenience, or to permit installation of required safety
equipment, is authorized provided such modifications have no
influence whatever on the mechanical performance of the car.
Such modifications do not include the substitution or replacement of any bodywork or chassis component except those
specifically authorized by these rules. Floor mats and all interior trim shall be removed.
12.A spoiler may be fitted to the front of the car. It shall not
protrude beyond the overall outline of the car as viewed from
above except as follows:
• GT2: a front splitter may extend up to 3 inches.
• GT3: a front splitter may extend up to 2 inches.
• GTLite: a front splitter may extend up to 2 inches.
In all classes, the spoiler shall not extend aft of the forward
most part of the front fender opening (cutout), and shall not
be mounted more than four (4) inches above the hori­zontal
centerline of the front wheel hubs. The spoiler shall not cover
the normal grill opening at the front of the car. An inter­mediate
mounting device may be used on cars whose front bodywork
is above the four (4) inch minimum. Openings are permitted
for the purpose of ducting air to the brakes, radiator, airbox
and/or oil cooler(s); equal openings may be placed in the
standard lower front panel directly behind openings placed
in the spoiler. When bumpers are retained, the spoiler and
bumper shall appear to be two separate parts. Spoiler “pans”
are only permitted forward of the leading edge of the front
wheel openings and shall be flat and follow, but not exceed,
the line of the front fender/spoiler bottom.
13.A spoiler or a Club Racing specified rear wing for GT2 and
GT3 may be fitted to the rear of the car. Note: OEM rear
spoilers and wings are not permitted unless specifically listed
on the vehicle’s specification line. If a spoiler is used, it shall
be contiguous with the bodywork and shall comply with the
following:
A. Height (max): six (6.0) inches (GT-2 & 3) or five (5.0)
GCR - 413
GTCS
work will be permitted. Rear quarter (side) windows may be
run in their original open or closed position.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
inches (GT-Lite) measured from the bodywork along the
face of the spoiler from the point of attachment to the
top of the spoiler. In the case of a spoiler with a curved
top edge conforming to the shape of the bodywork (rearview), the measurement is to be made perpendicular to the
tangent of the body at the point of attachment. In the case
of a spoiler mounted with a vertical mounting flange on the
bodywork, the measurement shall be made ignoring any
slight amount of mounting flanges (see below) exposed
due to the curvature of the rear bodywork at the point of
attachment.
B. Width and Overhang: If roof mounted, no wider than the
roof at its mounting point when viewed from above the
car. Mounting to be no further rearward than the forward
most part of the rear window. If rear mounted, no wider
than the body, excluding fender flares, from the forward
most part of the spoiler (or mounting flange) rearward.
Shall not extend rearwards of the rearmost extremity of
the bodywork for the entire width of the car (when viewed
vertically from above the car at any point, the spoiler shall
not protrude beyond the bodywork).
C. Mounting: Spoilers shall be strong enough to be selfsupporting. A mounting flange no greater than one and onehalf (1-1/2) inches wide, contiguous with the bodywork,
(either forward facing on the top surface of the bodywork
or downward facing on the rear surface of the bodywork)
shall be employed. Supplemental forward bracing may
be added in the form of two (2) rods, mounted at least
ten (10) inches inboard from the ends of the spoiler. Rear
supports may be added.
D. Configuration: The spoiler shall be a single plane spoiler (a
straight line in any vertical cross section) uniform in height
from the bodywork with no more than 1/8” gaps/openings
below the spoiler to facilitate imperfect mounting. The
gaps/ openings are to be included in the overall height of
the spoiler. Only enough curvature (in a fore and aft direction as viewed from above) shall be permitted to facilitate mounting. The use of fences, end rails, Gurney flaps,
wickerbills, or other forward facing lips or aerodynamic
devices is prohibited.
NOTE: O.E.M. rear spoilers are not permitted unless
specifically listed on the vehicle’s specification form.
If a Club Racing specified wing is used (GT2 and GT3 only), it
shall comply with the following:
E. A single element, single plane airfoil scaled to a chord
length of 10.75 inches.
A maximum 0.50 inch Gurney tab is allowed at the trailing
edge of the wing element. The tab must be mounted
90 degrees to the upper wing surface. No air may pass
between the tab and the wing.
The wing end plates must fit within a rectangle measuring
11.00 inches long by 4.00 inches tall. No portion of the
wing element or tab may extend beyond the perimeter
of the endplate. The endplates must be mounted parallel
to the vehicle centerline, and must be perpendicular to
GCR - 414
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
-
GT2: The maximum width of the entire wing assembly
(wing element, endplates, Gurney tab, and mounting hardware) is 68.00 inches, but no wider than the rear body
width including fender flares.
-
GT3: The maximum width of the entire wing assembly
(wing element, endplates, Gurney tab, and mounting hardware) is 64.00 inches, but no wider than the rear body
width including fender flares.
F. Wing mounting
GT2 and GT3: The entire wing assembly must be mounted
below the highest point of the roof or roll cage main hoop
whichever is higher measured at the highest point.
GT2 and GT3: The trailing edge of the wing assembly must
be located within an area not forward of 6” forward of
the rear most bodywork and not rearward of the rearmost
bodywork. The rearmost bodywork is to be measured at
the vehicle centerline.
Two wing mounting posts must be used, with each one
located between 2”-20” inboard from the end of the wing.
The exposed portion of the wing mounting posts shall not
exceed 85 square inches each. Curved brackets will be
measured as if they’re in a flat plane as viewed from the
side. Mounting brackets are to be included in measurement.
The maximum wing angle from horizontal is 30-degrees.
14.GTL Wing Rules
A. The maximum width of the entire single element, flat plane
wing assembly (wing element, endplates, and mounting
hardware) is 56.0 inches, but it may be no wider than
the bodywork including fender flairs. The maximum chord
is 8.0 inches. Wing endplates must fit within a rectangle
measuring 8.5 inches wide by 3.0 inches high. Endplates
must be flat, with no curvature or Gurney tabs. A maximum
0.5-inch wicker-bill may be employed. B. The wing shall be mounted with two brackets. Each
mounting bracket shall attach to the wing at least 2.0
inches inboard of the endplates. The brackets may
protrude through the trunk/deck lid to allow the brackets
to be fastened together and/or to the chassis of the car
beneath the lid. C. The entire wing assembly shall be at least 6.0 inches
below the highest point of the roof or roll cage main hoop
whichever is higher measured at the highest point.
D. The trailing edge of the wing assembly must be located
between 6.0 inches forward of the rearmost bodywork
and the rearmost bodywork as measured along the vehicle
longitudinal centerline.
E. Cars with a wagonback/notchback/hatchback style body
must have the entire wing positioned between 6.0 and
28.0 inches of the rearmost bodywork as measured along
the vehicle longitudinal centerline, and a maximum of
4.0 inches above the highest point of the roof. For this
subsection, a wagonback/notchback/hatchback style body
GCR - 415
GTCS
the ground. Endplates must be flat, with no curvature or
Gurney tabs.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
(or variations of these) is a car in which the rear edge
of the roofline is no more than 28.0 inches forward of
the rearmost bodywork as measured along the vehicle
longitudinal centerline.
15.GTLite front splitter: A front splitter may be added that is a
flat single-plane. The splitter shall be mounted flat. The splitter
must not extend laterally any further than the widest point
of the front fenders. The splitter must have no vertical deviations. Additionally, a maximum of four (4) rods or cables may
be used to support the front, and/or the sides of the splitter. A
single-plane vertical close-out panel may be used to bridge any
gaps between the front fascia and splitter.
c. Suspension and Wheels
1. Wheelbase will be homologated on a case by case basis as
requested by the manufacturer. Wheelbase may be changed
from -3” to +1” from printed stock dimensions in a fore/aft
direction.
2. Suspension components may be reinforced, modified, or
replaced as long as the type of suspension is not changed from
that authorized in this GTCS.
3. Suspension mounting points, including suspension springs,
may be relocated.
4. Suspension springs may be replaced with others of unrestricted
origin.
5. Modifications or substitution of hubs, bearing, spindles, axle
shafts, universal B joints, flex joints, and CV joints is permitted.
6. Addition or substitution of antiroll bars, camber compensating
devices, and/or suspension stabilizers is permitted. If these
devices extend into the driver/passenger compartment, they
shall be completely sealed off by metal panels.
7. Suspension bushings and joints may be replaced by others of
different material and/or design. Offset bushings and spherical
bearings are permitted, including adjustable type.
8. Steering arms, pitman arms, and steering linkage component
parts may be modified, reinforced, or substituted. The steering
system may be changed and/or relocated.
9. The steering wheel may be replaced and rake of the steering
column may be altered. A collapsible type of steering column
equivalent to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 204
is required in all cars registered after January 1, 1983 and
highly recommended for prior registered cars. GT cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted to Section
F.2., specifications shall have left side driver placement.
10.Substitute wheels of any type may be used. All four (4) wheels
shall be of the same diameter except in GT2.
a. GT2 cars may run any tire/wheel combination provided
that the tire does not exceed a maximum cross section
width of 12.0” in the front and 13.75” in the rear. GT2
cars using 15 x 7” wheels exclusively may reduce the
listed weight by 50 lbs. GT2 cars may run Hoosier DOT
tires #46846 front, P315/30ZR18 A7 and #46850 rear,
P335/30ZR18 A7.
GCR - 416
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
c. The maximum wheel size for GTL is 13” X 7” unless otherwise noted on the vehicle specification line. Alternatively,
any wheel up to 15” x 7” may be used in GTL with a
weight penalty equal to four percent of the car’s weight
as listed on the specification line. The minimum vehicle
weight shall be rounded to the nearest pound. Cars using
13” wheels may run 13” x 8” wheels, but only with American Racer 20.0-8.0-13, bias ply, non-belted tires, without
weight penalty. GTL cars using 15” wheels may run 15” x
10” wheels, but only with American Racer 23.5-10.0-15,
bias ply, non-belted, tire without weight penalty.
11.Shock absorbers: It is not permitted to alter the number of
shock absorbers. The make of shock absorber and its points
of attachment may be moved. Shock absorbers may have
load bearing capacity; e.g., gas filled or coil over. When using
load bearing shocks, the original springs may be removed. GT
cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted
to Section F.2., specifications shall have the shock absorber
attached to the outboard end of an upper or lower control arm.
Rocker arms, push‑pull rods, etc., are prohibited.
d. Electrical Systems
1. The electrical/electronic system may be modified or replaced
provided an operating starter motor and two (2) brake lights
are retained.
2. Any distributor or transistorized ignition system (including
crank triggered), firing the same number of spark plugs as the
original distributor, may be used.
3. Magneto ignition is prohibited unless listed in the GTCS. Ignition wiring and spark plugs are unrestricted.
e. Engine and Drive Train/General
1. Exhaust manifold(s), header(s), tailpipe(s), and muffler(s) may
be of unrestricted origin. The exhaust pipe(s) and/or muffler(s)
may be recessed into the floor panel and rocker panel. The
exhaust may be recessed into the bottom of the door or rear
fender below a line seven (7) inches above the bottom of the
rocker. There maybe a maximum of two (2) such areas in the
door or fender, with the maximum length for each no more
than seven (7) inches. Note that the exhaust outlet shall still
be mounted as low as possible; this does not authorize exhaust
outlets through the door. Exhaust opening(s) shall exit to the
rear of the wheelbase centerline and away from the body.
GCR - 417
GTCS
b. The maximum wheel size for GT3 cars is 15 x 7”. Alternatively, any wheel up to 18” with a maximum tire cross
section of 12.0” and a maximum tire diameter of 26.0”
may be used with a weight penalty equal to eight percent
of the car’s weight as listed on the specification line. The
minimum vehicle weight shall be rounded to the nearest
pound. A maximum brake rotor diameter of 13.0” may
be used with alternate wheels. Cars using 15” American
Racer 23.5-10.0-15, bias ply, non-belted tire may do so
without the weight penalty.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
180 degree headers: The passenger’s side floor pan may be
raised not more than ten (10) inches or a secondary floor may
be installed at that level to accommodate the installation of
the exhaust system and muffler(s) provided such raising of the
floor serves no other purpose. Exhaust may pass through the
rear bodywork no higher than the rear axle centerline.
2. Exhaust emission control air pumps, associated lines and
nozzles, and EGR devices cannot be modified in any way except
that they may be completely removed. When air nozzles are
removed from the cylinder head, the holes shall be completely
plugged.
3. Substitution or modification of the clutch and/or flywheel is
permitted.
4. It is permitted to lighten, balance, or modify in shape, by
tooling, the standard or optional components of the engine and
drive train, provided it is always possible to identify them as
such. Material shall not be added to these components unless
specifically authorized by these rules.
5. Alternate engine and drive train components considered
replacement parts, such as seals, bearings, valve guides,
pushrods, water pump (including electric), timing chains/belts
and sprockets, nuts, bolts, studs, washers, and gaskets are
permitted. Bushings or offset keys of unrestricted origin may
be installed.
6. The substitution of valve spring retainers and keepers is
permitted. Valve springs are unrestricted (including number)
provided the type and location remain unchanged.
7. Generator (alternator), crankshaft, and water pump pulleys
may be altered or replaced with others of unrestricted origin.
Any crankshaft vibration dampener is allowed.
8. Any oil pan (sump), oil pump(s), and/or pickups are allowed. Oil
pump(s) shall be driven mechanically by the engine. Dry sump
systems are permitted. The oil tank shall be located within the
bodywork. The oil tank, cap, and all fittings shall be isolated
so that in case of spillage, leakage, or failure, oil will not reach
the driver. Any oil filter(s) may be used.
9. Installation of any vent or breather on the engine, transmission,
or differential is permitted (See “Oil Catch Tanks”). Crankcase
vacuum devices are prohibited, but a conventional dry sump
system is permitted.
GCR - 418
10. Any readily available manual transmission having no more than
six (6) forward speeds in GT2 and five (5) forward speeds in
GT3 and Lite and a functional reverse speed may be used,
provided that it is fitted in the same basic location used in
the standard production automobile. Any shift linkage may be
used. If a sequential shift gearbox is used, the car must carry
a weight penalty equal to 1.25 percent of the weight as listed
on the spec line. If a synchromesh engagement transmission
is used, the weight may be reduced by 1.25 percent of the
weight listed on the spec line. A synchromesh gearbox is one
having a friction mechanism to allow engagement. Note: The
minimum vehicle weight is to be rounded to the nearest pound.
Air, hydraulic or electric actuation of the gearshift mechanism
is not allowed. For front engine, rear drive cars requiring the
transmission to be attached to the engine, the transmission
front seal shall be within twelve (12) inches of the back of the
engine block. On front engine/rear drive cars, the transmission front seal is that seal which is within 5” of the gear on
the input shaft which meshes with the foremost gear on the
counter/layshaft.
A functional reverse is defined as “operable by the driver from
his normal seated position and capable of sustained movement
of the vehicle, under its own power, in a reverse direction.”
A driver-operated device for locking out reverse gear may be
added provided it does not prevent prompt engagement of
reverse in an emergency situation.
11.Heavy duty propeller shaft(s) and/or drive shaft(s) may be
used. Steel retaining strap(s) shall be used to prevent drive
shaft failure from dropping or entering driver compartment.
12.Any axle tube, final drive housing, gear ratio, limited slip, or
locked differential may be used. Final drive units which permit
ratio changes while the car is in motion are prohibited. GT
cars registered after January 1, 1990 or GT cars converted to
Section F.2., specifications, using the front engine/rear drive
configuration, shall use a “closed tube” rear axle housing.
13.OEM body-engine-chassis combinations may run in their stock
locations. If the factory chassis is altered with respect to
engine mounting or spindle location then engine location must
comply with the following: Engine location is defined such that
the forward-most spark plug is within 1.0 inch of the front
axle centerline .Engine and transmission mounts may be of
alternate shape and/or material. Cars with engines mounted
longitudinal to the chassis MAY relocate the engine in a longitudinal, not lateral, direction within the following restrictions:
(Note: A tolerance of up to a 1.0 inch setback is allowed if the
engine is relocated.)
A. V8, V6, and V4 engines shall align the center of the foremost spark plug hole in line with the front axle spindles.
B. In‑line six (6) cylinder engines shall align the center of the
first spark plug hole (from the front) in line with the front
axle spindles.
C. In‑line four (4) cylinder engines shall align the center of the
first spark plug hole (from the front) in line with the front
axle spindles.
D. Rotary engines setback from the front spindle centerline to
GCR - 419
GTCS
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
the front spark plug is 4.5 inches.
E. The engine may be rotated about the crankshaft centerline (lean over) a maximum of fifteen (15) degrees unless
otherwise noted and shall not cause hood bulges.
14.Any transverse mounted engine may be rotated for axle/CV
joint alignment. Any readily available transmission having a
functional reverse and no more than five (5) forward speeds
may be used, provided it is mounted to the rear of the engine.
All transverse engines may be rotated 180 degrees. A transverse mounted engine may be rotated to a longitudinal position that places the crankshaft centerline on the longitudinal
centerline of the car (shall conform to all restrictions in Section
9.1.2.F.4.e). The engine may be rotated about the crankshaft
(lean over) a maximum of fifteen (15) degrees unless otherwise
noted and shall not cause hood bulges. Rear axle / suspension
per GTCS 9.1.2.F.2.
f. Engine, Reciprocating
1. Engines may be rebored a maximum of 1.2mm (0.047 inch)
over the standard bore size listed in the GTCS. A cylinder block
from any model from the same manufacturer which is of the
same material and dimensionally identical throughout, except
for non-critical bosses, is permitted.
2. Crankshaft main bearing caps may be modified or substituted.
Main bearing cap straps or girdles and/or additional main
bearing cap bolts may be used, provided that no material is
added to the block for their attachment.
3. The crankshaft may be replaced with another of the same
basic material, but with no change in stroke and provided the
angles of the crank throws remain the same. The engine firing
order shall remain unchanged.
4. Connecting rods may be replaced with any connecting rod of
steel (ferrous) material. Aluminum, titanium, and non‑metal
connecting rods are prohibited, except where fitted as standard.
5. Any pistons and piston pins may be used.
6. Any camshaft(s) may be used, provided locations are (is) the
same as standard.
7. Any cam followers may be used, except that roller cam
followers shall not be used unless fitted as standard equipment.
8. Any rocker arms and rocker assembly supports may be used.
9. Valve sizes are unrestricted except when limited by the GTCS
for specific automobiles. Centerlines shall not be altered.
Valves may be of alternate material; non‑metal is prohibited.
10.Compression ratio may be altered by machining, using any
head gasket(s) or elimination of head gasket(s).
g. Engine, Rotary Piston
1. The capacity of the working chamber(s) shall not be changed.
2. The eccentric shaft may be replaced with another of the same
basic material, but no changes in eccentricity or journal dimensions are permitted.
GCR - 420
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
3. Rotor is unrestricted, providing the material and number of
lobes remain unchanged.
h. Cooling Systems
1. Cooling fan(s) may be modified, substituted, or removed. Electrically operated cooling fan(s) may be installed, provided it
(they) serve no other purpose. The use of any engine, transmission, and/or differential oil coolers(s) is (are) permitted
provided it (they) are mounted completely within or under
the bodywork, but not in the driver/passenger compartment.
Associated oil cooler pumps and lines are permitted for the
transmission and differential. Air ducts may be fitted to the oil
cooler(s) as specifically authorized herein.
2. Any water radiator is allowed, provided there are no changes
in the exterior bodywork to accommodate its use. It shall not
be located in the driver/ passenger compartment. Separate
expansion or header tank(s) are permitted, provided they are
mounted in the engine compartment. The heater core may be
removed entirely but not modified or replaced.
3. Sealing or shrouding the airflow area between the normal grill
opening and the water radiator is permitted.
4. On water cooled cars, thermostats may be modified or replaced
with blanking sleeves or restrictors.
5. Alternate fan and fan shroud are permitted on air cooled
engines.
6. Radiator intake and brake openings may be covered with
screen and/or taped as necessary to protect the radiator and/
or regulate air flow.
i.
Fuel Induction System
All inducted air shall pass through venturi(s), maximum one (1) per
cylinder or rotor.
1. Any air filter(s) may be used, or the filter(s) may be removed.
Velocity stack(s) and/or air box(es) may be fitted. Air may be
ducted to the carburetor(s) provided the ducting is contained
within the engine compartment and air is supplied through
normal openings in the bodywork (or as specifically authorized
herein).
2. Any fuel pump(s) may be used and the location(s) may be
changed. Fuel pump(s) shall not be located in the driver/
passenger compartment.
3. All fuel/oil lines passing through the driver/passenger compartment shall be steel or metal braided hose. Number of fuel lines
is unrestricted.
4.Carburetors:
A. Reciprocating engines: Carburetor(s) and intake manifold(s)
are unrestricted except as limited in the GTCS for a specific
make/ model. All cars with restricted carburetion are
required to use I.R. manifolds with no plenums or balance
pipes unless using an SIR or otherwise restricted for
specific automobiles. Intake manifold(s) shall be attached
GCR - 421
GTCS
4. Alternate rotor housings are allowed only as listed in the GTCS
for specific automobiles. No changes are allowed in the epitrochoidal curve in alternate housing.
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
to the head(s) without modification to the head(s).
B. Rotary engines: Carburetor and intake manifold are unrestricted except as limited in the GTCS for a specific make/
model. All cars with restricted carburetion are required
to use I.R. manifolds with no plenums or balance pipes,
unless using an SIR. Intake manifold(s) shall be attached to
the end cover(s) or rotor housing(s) without modification
to the end cover(s) or rotor housing(s).
C. No portion of the intake manifold(s) may extend into the
intake ports (reciprocating and rotary engines.)
D. Carburetors shall incorporate a butterfly‑type throttle plate
for engine speed control.
E. Where Weber or Weber‑type carburetors are specified and
used, they shall retain their standard configurations of fuel
distribution. This is to prohibit annular discharge carburetors.
F. Where Weber carburetors are specified, Weber‑type carburetors may be substituted. The following are approved
Weber‑type carburetors: Weber, Solex, SK, Mikuni,
Delorto, Berg, and PMO.
5. Any car may utilize fuel injection, whether originally equipped
with fuel injection or not. The following restrictions apply.
A. Both method and manufacturer are open.
B. Intake manifold shall be of the individual runner type,
unless using an SIR or otherwise notes on the vehicle spec
line. Cars using an SIR may use any manifold type.
C. Only butterfly-type throttle plates for engine speed control,
one per cylinder or rotor, are permitted if intake restrictors
and/or chokes are specified on the vehicle specification
line, the restrictors shall be round orifices (unless otherwise specified) and located within four (4) inches of the
throttle butterfly. SIR location is unrestricted so long as all
SIR criteria are met. Restrictors shall be a minimum .060”
thickness and of the specified diameter.
D. All inducted air for each cylinder must pass through the
specified restrictor. Fuel injected cars, unless otherwise
specified, shall use the same individual venturi restriction
size specified for a car using carbureted induction.
E. The number of injectors shall be one (1) per cylinder
(unless otherwise noted on the vehicle specification line).
Direct injection is not permitted.
F. Rotary engines may use two (2) injectors per rotor.
6. Supercharging/turbocharging is prohibited.
7. Float(s) shall not be removed or altered to produce (a) floatless
carburetor(s).
8. Any throttle linkage may be used.
9. Induction systems shall be equipped with a positive method of
throttle closing by means of (an) external spring(s).
j.Brakes
GCR - 422
9.1.2. Grand Touring Category Specifications
1. Any dual master cylinders and/or pressure equalizing/regulating
device(s) are permitted.
2. Servo‑assist systems are unrestricted.
3. Backing plates/dirt shields may be ventilated or removed. Brake
air ducts may be fitted within the provisions of these rules.
4. The hand brake may be removed.
6. Brake calipers and/or drums are unrestricted except as limited
by the GTCS for a specific make/model. Brake rotors shall be
ferrous material but are otherwise unrestricted. Brake rotors/
drums shall be located in the original position (e.g., inboard vs.
outboard).
7. Water cooled brakes are permitted, maximum reservoir
capacity two (2) gallons, maximum line size 3/16 inch I.D. The
water shall be atomized by an atomizing nozzle, and the water
shall enter the air duct a minimum of twelve (12) inches from
the centerline of the spindle/axle.
k. GTLite Rules Concerning Alternate Weights and SIRs
1. Allow currently restricted 2V and 3V engines <1400ccs to run
unrestricted at a 100 lb weight penalty.
2. Allow all 2V and 3V restricted engines less than 1600ccs to
run 1mm larger SIR as an option at a 125 lb weight penalty.
3. Allow all 4V restricted engines less than 1600ccs to run 1mm
larger SIR as an option at a 175 lb weight penalty.
4. Competitors running the alternate SIR must display “+1mm”
on the side of their car next to their new weight.
5. Competitors running the unrestricted option must display
“UNR” on the side of their car next to their new weight.
6. Limit compression ratio to 15:1 for SIR restricted engines
effective 1/1/2014.
l. GT2 Rules Concerning Alternate Weights and SIRs
1. Traditional GT2 cars that are currently required to run an SIR
may run unrestricted induction with a 350 lb. weight penalty.
This weight penalty is to be added prior to any “add-on” penalties, such as sequential shifting, IRS, etc.
GCR - 423
GTCS
5. Brake lines shall be steel or metal braided hose. They may be
relocated and may be given additional protection.
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
NSX
NA
2dr
RWD
99.6
NSX
2017
2dr
AWD
103.5
Cars must be prepared in accordance with the appropriate model/year Acura factory parts catalog/service manual. Drivers
must have the correct year manual as it applies to their specific car in their possession. Cars may not be altered in any way
except as authorized below. NSX GT3 spec wing allowed. (2) 34mm TIRs required.
The fuel cell(s) may be relocated to the front trunk area.
RSX
NA
2dr
FWD
101.2
No mid-engine mounting. Hood bulge permitted with no openings.
Engines - ACURA
Engine Family
K20A
GCR - 424
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
87.0 x 84.0
1997
Alum, Crossflow
4
Automotive type sidedraft
1830
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
1830
DOHC
87.0 x 90.7
2157
Alum, Crossflow
4
Automotive type sidedraft
1830
DOHC
89.9 x 78.0
2971
Alum, Crossflow
4
Automotive type sidedraft
2140
DOHC
93.0 x 78.0
3176
Alum, Crossflow
4
Automotive type
Unrestricted
2190
SOHC
89.0 x 86.0
3210
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
SOHC
89.0 x 93.0
3471
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
Notes
Cars - ALFA ROMEO
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
GTV
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Notes
Hood modifications allowed for carburetors.
Engines - ALFA ROMEO
Engine Family
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
88.0 x 68.3
2492
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
1900
SOHC
93.0 x 72.6
2959
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2040
Notes
Cars - AUDI
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
TT Coupe
NA
2dr
FWD
97.3
Engines - AUDI
Notes
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
GT2 Cars - ACURA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
GT2
82.5 x 92.8
Disp.
(cc)
1984
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Alum, Crossflow
4
Fuel Induction
Unrestricted
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
1730
Cars - BMC thru Rover Group
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
MGB GT V8 & RV8
NA
2dr
RWD
91.0
TR8
NA
2dr
RWD
85.0
Notes
Engines - BMC thru Rover Group
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
OHV
GCR - 425
GT2 Cars - BMW
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
71.1 x 88.9
3528
Alum, Crossflow
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
325
84-91
2dr
RWD
101.2
M3 (E30)
88-91
2dr
RWD
101.2
M3 (E36)
95-99
2dr
RWD
106.3
M3 (E46)
00-
2dr
RWD
106.3
330ci (E46)
01-
2dr
RWD
107.3
2
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
41mm SIR
2280
Alternate induction: Holley P/N 0-80507-1 (390 CFM) on unrestricted
manifold with a mandatory plate between the carburetor and plenum
of 0.060” flat steel or aluminum plate with four (4) 1.15”” holes.
Spacer is unrestricted. The restrictor plate shall be positioned within
4” of the throttle butterflies. All inducted air shall pass through the
specified restrictor plate.
Notes
Engines - BMW
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
93.4 x 84.0
2302
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
1950
M20
SOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
1950
M50
DOHC
84.1 x 75.0
2494
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2140
M52B28
DOHC
84.0 X 84.0
2793
Alum,
Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2140
S50
DOHC
86.0 x 85.8
2990
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2140
S50B32
DOHC
86.4 x 91.0
3201
Alum. Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
S52
DOHC
86.4 x 89.6
3152
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
GTCS
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
S14
Notes
GT2
DOHC
87.0 x 91.0
3246
Alum. Crossflow
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
4
40mm SIR
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
S54
2280
Cars - CHEVROLET
Model
Years
Body Style
Cavilier Z24
NA
2dr
FWD
104.0
Monza
75-80
2dr
RWD
97.0
Notes
Engines - CHEVROLET
Engine Family
EcoTec
GCR - 426
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
89.9 x 89.03
2210
Alum, Crossflow
4
1830
DOHC
92.2 x 85.09
2272
Alum, Crossflow
2
1950
DOHC
88.9 x 94.6
2349
Alum. Crossflow
4
1950
DOHC
90.0 x 94.0
2392
Alum, Crossflow
4
1950
OHV
101.6 x 82.6
2679
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
1900
OHV
89.0 x 84.0
3136
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted
2020
Notes
GM racing block #XGB615 and cylinder head #XGBH614 allowed.
Cars - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Breeze / Stratus
NA
2dr
FWD
108.0
Neon
NA
2dr, 4dr
FWD
104.0
Daytona / Laser
84-87
2dr
FWD
97.0
Viper Roadster
NA
2dr
RWD
Notes
Turbo Z body panels allowed.
Roadster must run windscreen and frame per “stock” dimensions.
Engines - CHRYSLER/DODGE/PLYMOUTH
Engine Family
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
1830
DOHC
87.5 x 83.0
1995
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
1830
SOHC
87.5 x 92.0
2213
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
(2) Automotive type
1950
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Cars - FERRARI
Model
Years
Notes
308 GTB
76-
2dr
RWD
92.1
Fuel cell(s) must comply with GCR 9.3 Fuel Cell Specifications but may be relocated to front trunk or remain in OEM saddle
tank locations.
288, 328, 348, 355
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Fuel cell(s) must comply with GCR 9.3 Fuel Cell Spefifications but may be relocated to front trunk or remain in OEM saddle
tank locations. Engine may be rotated longitudinally.
Engines - FERRARI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
81.0 x 71.0
2926
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2140
DOHC
83.5 x 68.0
2980
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Capri I, II
NA
2dr
RWD
100.8
Mustang
74-78
2dr
RWD
100.8
Mustang
79-93
2dr
RWD
100.5
Mustang
10-11
2dr
RWD
101.0/107.1
Probe
NA
2dr
FWD
99.0/102.9
GT2
Notes
Cars - FORD
Model
Notes
Duratech DOHC engine, as specified in GT3, to run unrestricted in GT 2. Minimum weight is 1950 lbs.
GCR - 427
Engines - FORD
Engine Family
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
SOHC
91.0 x 77.0
1993
Alum, Crossflow
2
(2) Automotive type
1830
DOHC
84.5 x 74.2
2496
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2105
OHV
90.0 x 66.8
2550
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
OHV
93.0 x 72.6
2934
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
Notes
World Products 2.9 OHV cylinder head allowed.
Cars - INFINITI
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
G20
99-02
4dr
FWD
102.4/97.5
Notes
Engines - INFINITI
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
Disp.
(cc)
1998
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Alum, Crossflow
4
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Unrestricted automotive
type
1830
Notes
GTCS
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
Model
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
GT2
Cars - HONDA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Prelude
93-
2dr
FWD
100.4
Civic Coupe
92-95
2dr
FWD
103.2
Civic Hatchback
92-95
2dr
FWD
101.3
CRX
88-91
2dr
FWD
90.6
S2000
00-09
2dr
RWD
94.5
Notes
Engines - HONDA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
GCR - 428
K20A
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
1830
KA20A2, KA20A3
DOHC
87.0 x 90.7
2157
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
VTEC not allowed.
DOHC
87.0 x 90.7
2157
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
VTEC not allowed.
DOHC
86.9 x 95.0
2252
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
2090
DOHC
87.0 x 99.0
2354
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted
1950
K24A
GT2
Cars - JAGUAR
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
XKE Coupe, Roadster
NA
2dr
RWD
96.0
Notes
Roadster windshield may be removed and a low front hoop roll cage fitted.
Engines - JAGUAR
Engine Family
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
87.1 x 105.9
3781
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2110
DOHC
92.0 x 105.9
4235
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2110
Notes
Cars - LOTUS
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Esprit
75-
2dr
RWD
96.0
Notes
Engines - LOTUS
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
DOHC
GT2
95.3 x 76.2
2174
Alum, Crossflow
Wheelbase (in)
4
Unrestricted
(2)Automotive type
2040
Cars - MAZDA
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
MX-5 / Miata
90-
2dr
RWD
89.2
RX-7
NA
2dr
RWD
95.2 / 95.5 /
95.7
RX-8
NA
2dr
RWD
98.0
Notes
Downing GTS body kit allowed with 75 lbs. weight increase. This “one-off” body allowance is not meant as an open invitation
for others to be classified. May run transaxle with 100 lb. weight penalty.
May run transaxle with 100 lb. weight penalty.
Engines - MAZDA
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
12A
Street Port
12A
GCR - 429
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
2292
Unrestricted
Automotive type
1720
Street / Bridge /
Peripheral Port
2292
Unrestricted automotive
type
1810
13B
Street / Bridge Port
2616
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1810
13B
Peripheral Port
2616
Unrestricted automotive
type
1900
Renesis
Street Port
2616
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1810
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2090
DOHC
GT2
89.0 x 79.5
2967
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Alum, Crossflow
4
20B
Street / Bridge / Peripheral
Port
3924
43mm SIR
2230
20B
Street / Bridge / Peripheral
Port
3924
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2500
Notes
Hood bulge allowed.
Must run +100 lbs. for Grand Am transaxle and independent rear
suspension. Must comply with all other GT2 rules.
Cars - MERCEDES BENZ
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
190E
85-92
4dr
RWD
104.9
Notes
Engines - MERCEDES BENZ
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
GT2
82.9 x 80.3
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
2599
Alum, Crossflow
2
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Unrestricted automotive
type
2060
Notes
Cars - MERCURY
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Capri
79-86
2dr
RWD
100.8
Notes
GTCS
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
SOHC
Disp.
(cc)
Engine Family
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
OHV
93.0 x 68.6
2796
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
OHV
93.0 x 72.6
2934
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type
2040
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
World Products 2.9 OHV cylinder head allowed.
Cars - NISSAN
Model
Years
240Z / 260Z / 280Z
-78
2dr
RWD
90.7
280-Z 2+2
NA
2dr
RWD
102.6
280-ZX
79-
2dr
RWD
91.3
Notes
Headlight covers allowed. Hood bulge allowed.
GCR - 430
240-SX
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
240-SX S13
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5
Hood bulge allowed.
240-SX S14
NA
2dr
RWD
99.4
Hood bulge allowed.
300-ZX Z31
-89
2dr
RWD
91.3
Hood bulge allowed.
300-ZX Z32
90-
2dr
RWD
96.5/101.2
Hood bulge allowed.
350Z/370Z
NA
2dr
RWD
97.5 / 99.4
/104.3/90.7
/91.3/102.6
/104.3/91.3
/96.5/101.2 /
104.4
Doors may be pinned from the bottom at door bar height. Hood bulge allowed.
Engines - NISSAN
Engine Family
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
SR20DE/VE
DOHC
86.0 x 86.0
1998
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted automotive
type
1830
L24
SOHC
83.0 x 73.3
2380
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1950
KA24E
SOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum, Crossflow
3
Unrestricted
1920
KA24DE
DOHC
89.0 x 96.0
2389
Alum, Crossflow
4
1950
QR25DE/DD
DOHC
89.0 x 100.0
2489
Alum, Crossflow
4
2080
Direct injection not permitted.
VQ25
DOHC
85.0 x 73.3
2495
Alum, Crossflow
4
2130
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30 allowed.
L26
SOHC
83.0 x 79.0
2565
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1950
VG30
SOHC
87.0 x 77.2
2754
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1950
L28
SOHC
86.1 x 79.0
2760
Alum, NonCrossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1950
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
Engines - MERCURY
L28
SOHC
86.1 x 83.0
2899
Alum, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2040
VG30
DOHC
87.0 x 83.0
2960
Alum, Crossflow
4
Automotive type sidedraft
w/ 40mm choke(s)
or
40mm SIR
2140
2230 w/
40mm
SIR
VQ30
DOHC
93.0 x 73.3
2988
Alum, Crossflow
4
Unrestricted Automotive
type
2200
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30 allowed.
VQ35 w/ VQ30 crankshaft
DOHC
95.5 x 73.3
3150.3
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30 allowed.
VQ30 w/ VQ35 crankshaft
DOHC
93.0 x 81.4
3317.7
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30 allowed.
VG33
SOHC
81.5 x 83.0
3275
Alum, Crossflow
2
40mm chokes or
40mm SIR
2090
2230
VG33E
DOHC
91.5 x 83.0
3275
Alum. Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
VQ35
DOHC
95.5 x 81.4
3498
Alum, Crossflow
4
40mm SIR
2280
GT2
An SCCA approved F.I. kit of OEM origin is allowed. Contact the
National Office for part numbers and specs.
Nismo cyl head #11040RRZ30 and 11090RRZ30 allowed.
Cars - PANOZ
GCR - 431
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Esperante GTS
NA
2dr
RWD
107.6
Cars must be prepared to Panoz Esperante GTS specifications and competitors must have a copy of the current GTS rules in
their possession. Wheels: (F) 18x10 (R) 18x11. Track (F) 64.0 (R) 67.8. Any tire with a diameter of 17” or 18” may be used
provided the tire does not exceed a maximum cross section width of 11.5” in the front and 12.5” in the rear; or may use
conventional GT2 tires and wheels per GTCS 9.1.2.F.4.c.10. Internal modification to stock Penske 7500 shocks are permitted. Shock seals are not required. Brakes are unrestricted. Front and rear anti-roll bars are unrestricted. Shock and springs
are free, transmission type and ratios are free, differential gear ratio only is free (all GT2 transmission rules apply), roof vents
allowed per GTCS.
Panoz GTWC
NA
2DR
RWD
107.6
Cars must be prepared to Panoz GTWC specifications. Wheels: (F) 18x10 (R) 18x11. Track (F) 64.0 (R) 67.8. Any tire with
a diameter of 17” or 18” may be used provided the tire does not exceed a max¬imum cross section width of 11.5” in the
front and 12.5” in the rear; or may use conventional GT2 tires and wheels per GTCS 9.1.2.F.4.c.10. Internal modification to
stock Penske 7500 shocks are permitted. Shock seals are not required. Brakes are unrestricted. Front and rear anti-roll bars
are unrestricted. Shock and springs are free, transmission type and ratios are free, differential gear ratio only is free (all GT2
transmission rules apply), roof vents allowed per GTCS.
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type
Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
Notes
OHV
101.6 x 88.9
5754
Alum, Crossflow
2
Holly 4bbl. 750 cfm #04779C. ProForm 67100C
throttle body - Panoz part
#GTS6-3349 allowed.
2880
Maximum compression ratio of 10.5:1. Fresh air intake air cleaner
housing Panoz #GTS9-3348 allowed. Engine seals are no longer
being installed; engines must comply with Panoz GTS engine requirements available at http://www.scca.com/clubracing/content.
cfm?cid=44722.
OHV
89.45-100.38 x
89.9
4.6L
Alum, Crossflow
4
Fuel Injection
2880
Fresh air intake air cleaner housing Panoz #GTS9-3348 allowed. Must
comply with Panoz GTWC engine requirements available at http://
www.scca.com/clubracing/content.cfm?cid=44722.
Engines - PANOZ
Engine Family
Ford V8
Cars - PONTIAC
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
Fiero
NA
2dr
FWD
93.4
May convert to front engine/rear wheel drive. If OEM engine location is used (i.e. rear-engine) IRS weight penalty is waived.
Air cleaner may protrude through engine hatch.
GTCS
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
GT2
NA
2dr
FWD
103.4
Sunfire GT
NA
2dr
FWD
104.0
Engines - PONTIAC
Engine Family
LE5 Ecotech
EcoTec
GCR - 432
GT2
Engine Bore x Stroke
Type
(mm)
Disp.
(cc)
Head Type Valves/
Cyl.
Fuel Induction
Weight
(lbs)
DOHC
86.0 x 94.6
2198
Alum, Crossflow
4
1830
DOHC
88.9 x 89.03
2210
Alum, Crossflow
4
1830
DOHC
92.2 x 85.09
2272
Alum, Crossflow
4
DOHC
88.9 x 94.6
2349
Alum, Crossflow
4
1950
DOHC
90.0 x 94.0
2392
Alum, Crossflow
4
1950
OHV
101.6 x 76.2
2471
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1810
OHV
101.6 x 82.6
2679
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted Automotive
type
1900
OHV
89.0 x 76.0
2837
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type or 42mm SIR
2080
OHV
89.0 x 84.0
3136
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type or 42mm SIR
2150
OHV
92.0 x 84.0
3350
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type or 42mm SIR
2090
OHV
94.0 x 84.0
3498
Iron, Crossflow
2
Unrestricted automotive
type or 40mm SIR
2140
Unrestricted Automotive
type
Notes
GM racing block #XGB615 and cylinder head #XGBH614 allowed.
1950
GM racing block #XGB615 and cylinder head#XGBH614 allowed.
Factory aluminum cylinder heads allowed.
2230
2280
Cars - PORSCHE
Model
Years
Body Style
Driveline
Wheelbase (in)
Notes
911 Coupe & Targa
68-
2dr
RWD
89.4
Factory spoiler: 930-512-023-00 & 530-512-021-00 (or kit #930-512-901-01), no reproductions. Windshield may be removed
on Targa and a low front hoop roll cage may be fitted.
914-6
NA
2dr
RWD
96.5
Top panels may remain if bolted or pinned. Roof of alt. material allowed. Windshield may be removed and a low front roll cage
may be fitted. 75-76 bumpers allowed.
944
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
968
NA
2dr
RWD
94.5
Boxster
NA
2dr
RWD
95.1
Top panels may remain if bolted or pinned. Roof of alt. material allowed. Windshield may be removed and a low front roll cage
may be fitted.
9.1.2. GT2 Spec Lines
Grand Am
GCR - 433
996/997 GT3 Cup
996:
98-05
997:
06-09
2dr
RWD
996: 92.5
997: 92.7
Cars must be prepared in accordance with the appropriate model/year Porsche factory 911 GT3 Cup parts catalog/service
manual. Cars may not be altered in any way except as authorized below. Drivers must have the correct year manuals as they
apply to their specific car in their possession. Safety, drivers comfort, driver control and instrumentation items may be modified
per the GCR. Original factory installed Matter/IMV roll cages are allowed. The stock unmodified fuel tank is allowed. Side door
windows must be removed and windshield clips must be installed per GCR 9.3 Windshield Clips/Rear Window Straps. All other
SCCA safety standards apply. The following additional modifications are authorized: Alternate hood provided it is a facsimile
of the stock part. Any wheel, including 5 bolt (and the required 5 bolt modification to the hubs) provided they do not exceed
18x9 F and 18x11 R. Tires per GCR 9.3 Tires. Battery size and location is unrestricted. Shocks are unrestricted but they shall
be installed in the stock locations with the stock, unmodified pick up points. Any suspension settings are allowed provided
they are achieved without modifications. Machining of suspension components and pick up points to achieve caster/camber/
toe is not allowed. Lubricants, consumable fluids (brake fluid, coolant etc.) and oil filters are open free. Modifications listed in
Grand Am, IMSA Cup, World Challenge or any other rules, except those listed above, are specifically not allowed. No updating
or backdating permitted between 996 and 997 cars. 996 required gear ratios: Crown wheel and pinion 8/32; 1st gear 13/41,
2nd gear 20/40, 3rd gear 25/39, 4th gear 29/36 or 26/34, 5th gear 32/33 or 32/35, 6th gear 35/30 or 34/31; 997 required
gear ratios: Crown wheel and pinion 8/32; 1st gear 12/38, 2nd gear 15/32, 3rd gear 18/31, 4th gear 20/28, 5th gear 23/26,
6th gear 29/27. Aftermarket exhaust header is allowed (996 only). Paddle shift system allowed with 100 lb. weight penalty.
Factory (OEM manufacturer) Lexan front windows allowed as delivered.
Porsche 991.1 GT3 Cup
(14-16)
2dr
RWD
92.7
3.8L flat six. 3000lbs. w/62mm Throttle Body Restrictor (TBR). Cars must be prepared in accordance with the appropriate
model/year Porsche factory 911 GT3 Cup parts catalog/service manual. Cars may not be altered in any way except as authorized below. Drivers must have the correct year manuals as they apply to their specific car in their possession. Safety, drivers
comfort, driver control and instrumentation items may be modified per the GCR. Original factory installed Matter/IMV roll cages
are allowed. The stock unmodified fuel tank is allowed. Side door windows must be removed and windshield clips must be
installed per GCR 9.3 Windshield Clips/Rear Window Straps. All other SCCA safety standards apply. The following additional
modifications are authorized: Alternate hood provided it is a facsimile of the stock part. Any wheel, including 5 bolt (and the
required 5 bolt modification to the hubs). Tires per GCR 9.3 Tires. Battery size and location is unrestricted. Shocks are unrestricted but they shall be installed in the stock locations with the stock, unmodified pick up points. Any suspension settings
are allowed provided they are achieved without modifications. Machining of suspension components and pick up points to
achieve caster/camber/toe is not allowed. Lubricants, consumable fluids (brake fluid, coolant et